|
QW-310.1 and QW-457.3 |
QW-310.1; QW-457.3 |
11/7/1980 |
|
Assuming the thickness limitations are met, is a welder who qualifies on pipe over 2-7/8 in. O.D. qualified to weld on any pipe over 2-7/8 in. O.D. (i.e., qualification on 10 in. O.D. pipe qualifies a welder to weld on 3 in. O.D. pipe)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=968
|
|
QW-200.4 and QW-451.1 |
QW-200.4; QW-451.1 |
11/12/1980 |
|
A ½ in. thick butt welded coupon is prepared by depositing 1/8 in. of GTAW and 3/8 in. of SMAW. What is the maximum thickness qualified using this coupon? |
For the example cited in Question (1), the range of thickness of base metal qualified is 3/16 in. to 1 in. The range of thickness of deposited weld metal qualified for GTAW is 1/16 in. to ¼ in. and for SMAW is 1/16 to ¾ in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=980 |
|
QW-200.4 and QW-451.1 |
QW-200.4; QW-451.1 |
11/12/1980 |
|
A WPS is being written for groove welding of pipe to utilize a GTAW root pass and SMAW fill. A previously qualified PQR welded on a ¼ in. thick test plate using GTAW and a previously qualified PQR welded on a 3/8 in. thick test plate using SMAW are to be used to support the combination WPS. What are the maximum thickness ranges of the combination WPS? |
Based on Question (2), the deposited weld metal thickness range for the GTAW is 1/16 in. through ½ in. and for the SMAW is 1/16 in. through ¾ in. The base metal thickness range for the combination WPS is 1/16 in. through ½ in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=980 |
|
Weld Procedure for Tack Weld |
QW-202; QW-302 |
12/8/1980 |
|
When the tack welds are to be a part of the completed production weld, what are the procedure and performance qualification requirements for such welds? |
Tack welds which form a part of a completed weld must be welded using a qualified WPS and a qualified welder. The procedure qualification requirements shall be in accordance with QW-202, and the performance qualification requirements shall be in accordance with QW-302. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=981 |
| IX-13-13 |
QW-423.1 |
QW-423.1 |
6/10/2013 |
|
In accordance with QW-423.1, may P-No. 1 base materials be substituted for P-No. 8 base materials when following a P-No. 8 to P-No. 8 WPS for the purpose of a welder qualification, when variable QW-403.18 applies? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1974 |
| IX-86-29 |
QW-461.9 and QW-452.3 |
QW-461.9; QW-452.3 |
6/2/1986 |
|
Is a welder qualified to weld a butt joint in pipe or tubing less than 2-7/8 in. O.D. in the 1G position (rotated) when he has been tested on pipe in the 6G position, which qualifies him to weld pipe/tube down to 2-7/8 in. O.D.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1975 |
| IX-86-71 |
QW-214 and QW-381 |
QW-214; QW-381 |
5/7/1987 |
|
When qualifying for corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay of F-No. 6 weld metal on P-No. 1 base metal, in accordance with QW-214 and QW-381, is it permissible to use a 6-2/3t (2½ in.) mandrel diameter for the side bend tests? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1976 |
| IX-10-11 |
QW-453, Minimum Qualified Thickness for Corrosion Overlay |
QW-453 |
2/17/2010 |
|
For corrosion resistant overlay welding procedure qualifications, where a chemical analysis is not required, is there a minimum qualified deposit thickness? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1984 |
| IX-13-04 |
QW-181.2, Sectioning of Pipe-to-Pipe Quarter Sections |
QW-181.2 |
9/13/2012 |
|
If the resultant size from a pipe-to-pipe quarter section, per QW-462.4(c), is too large to bend as specified in QW-181.2, can the fracture test quarter section specimen be cut into multiple specimens and tested in lieu of one full quarter specimen? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1985 |
| IX-79-50 |
QW-462.2(a) Removal of Backing Ring for Side Bend Tests |
QW-462.2(a) |
6/27/1979 |
|
Is it acceptable to remove weld reinforcement, backing strip or backing ring flush with the undisturbed surface of the base material before performing a side bend test? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1986 |
| IX-86-48 |
QW-451.1 vs QW-403.6 |
QW-451.1; QW-403.6 |
11/24/1986 |
|
When impact tests are waived by a book section for the base material, but are required for the weld metal, is the qualified minimum base metal thickness that given in QW-451.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1987 |
| IX-86-52 |
Section IX, QW-322(a) |
QW-322(a) |
11/24/1986 |
|
In order to maintain his qualifications, must a welder actually weld with each of his qualified welding processes within 6 months when they have been extended in accordance with QW-322(a)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1988 |
| IX-86-58 |
Section IX, QW-381 |
QW-381 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Is a welder, who has a groove or fillet qualification with F-No. 5, A-No. 8 filler metal and respecting the QW-350 essential variables, qualified to weld corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1989 |
| IX-86-68 |
Section IX, QW-356 and QW-360 |
QW-356; QW-360 |
5/7/1987 |
|
Does a welder performance qualification for manual GTAW in accordance with QW-304 and the essential variables of QW-356 qualify a welding operator to perform machine welding (GTAW process)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1990 |
| IX-92-33 |
Section IX, QW-407.4, Postweld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.4 |
2/28/1992 |
|
Can a PQR conducted on a 2 in. thick base metal with notch toughness required and PWHT above the upper transformation temperature be used to support a WPS on a ½ in. thick base metal with all other essential variables, including notch toughness, unchanged? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=1991 |
| IX-86-30 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
6/2/1986 |
|
May an existing welder qualification for a specific process in all positions, but with limited deposited weld metal thickness, be extended for all positions by making an additional test in the 1G position on a thicker plate? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=2585 |
| IX-01-38 |
Section II, Part C, SFA 5.1, Table 1 |
|
5/19/2003 |
|
May a welder qualify with E7018 electrode using either uphill or downhill progression? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=2768 |
| IX-82-21 |
Section IX, QW-214 |
QW-214 |
6/9/1982 |
|
Is it required that the entire bend test specimen for procedure qualification of overlay (QW-214) be covered with overlay weld metal? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=2778 |
| IX-86-32 |
Section IX, QW-383 |
QW-383 |
9/23/1986 |
|
May a welder who has qualified to apply corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay also weld the corrosion-resistant overlay (cladding) portion of a groove weld in composite (clad) materials? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=2779 |
| IX-89-99 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Does QW-451.1 apply when welding a partial penetration groove joint of a tube to a header of dissimilar thicknesses? |
Yes; see Note (1) for additional reference paragraphs. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=2780 |
| IX-01-01 |
QW-403, Base Metal Requirement; QW-404, Filler Metal Requirement |
QW-403; QW-404 |
10/11/2000 |
|
If a WPS is written using the GMAW-S process alone, is T limited to l.l T per QW-403.10 and t limited to l.l t per QW-404.32? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4804 |
| IX-01-01 |
QW-403, Base Metal Requirement; QW-404, Filler Metal Requirement |
QW-403; QW-404 |
10/11/2000 |
|
If a WPS is written using FCAW process alone, is T limited to 2T per QW-403.8 and t limited to 2t per QW-404.30? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4804 |
| IX-01-02 |
QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
10/11/2000 |
A large majority of fabrication contracted by a design Company A is performed by Manufacturers B and C. Each company is independent in ownership from the other two. Companies A, B, and C have developed a Welding Coalition. The top management of all three companies has executed an Agreement and Commitment protocol consenting to the establishment of this Welding Coalition. The Welding Coalition controls all weld procedures developed for use on Company A contracts by Companies B and C under one designated program. The Coalition does not control production welding at either of the manufacturing companies. Weld procedure qualifications performed by Company C are controlled by Company A's Quality Program. Weld procedure qualifications performed by Company B are controlled by Company B's Quality Program that has been approved by Company A. Company C is on Company B's Approved Vendors List. |
Is it permissible to consider the Welding Coalition as "the organization which has responsible operational control of production of the weldments to be made in accordance with this Code" such that Company B may use weld procedures qualified by Company C and vise versa? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4805 |
| IX-01-03 |
QW-194, Visual Examination |
QW-194 |
1/3/2001 |
|
Is a welder's performance qualification test coupon in which undercut is present acceptable, provided that the rest of the examinations and tests are acceptable?
|
Yes. However, manufacturers may disqualify welders based on QW-301.2 when discontinuities such as undercut and porosity do not comply with the quality requirement of the manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4806 |
| IX-01-04 |
QW-304.1, Welder's Test Coupon Examination |
QW-304.1 |
1/3/2001 |
|
Does QW-304.1 require that when radiography is used for examination of welder test coupons for performance qualification, the visual examination per QW-302.4 be performed and documented on the Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification record? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4807 |
| IX-01-05 |
QW-200.2, Welding Procedure Qualification |
QW-200.2 |
1/3/2001 |
|
When a nonessential variable is recorded on a PQR, may a new or revised WPS supported by that PQR specify a different range for that nonessential variable from that recorded on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4808 |
| IX-01-06 |
QW-410.51, Addition/Deletion of Oscillation |
QW-410.51 |
2/9/2001 |
QW-410.51, addition or deletion of oscillation is an essential variable for GTAW hard-facing. QW-410.1, addition or deletion of weave bead is not a variable for the GTAW hard-facing process. |
Is it the intent of Section IX that a PQR developed with a machine or automatic GTAW hard-facing process, with or without oscillation, may be used to qualify a WPS for a manual, or a semiautomatic GTAW hard-facing process, with or without weave? |
Yes. Note that recent actions by Section IX have defined oscillation as applicable to machine and automatic processes and wave as applicable to manual and semiautomatic processes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4809 |
| IX-01-06R |
QW-410.51, Addition/Deletion of Oscillation (1998 and Earlier Editions) |
QW-410.51 |
2/9/2001 |
QW-410.51, addition or deletion of oscillation is an essential variable for GTAW hard-facing. QW-410.1, addition or deletion of weave bead is not a variable for the GTAW hard-facing process.
|
Is it the intent of Section IX that a PQR developed with a machine or automatic GTAW hard-facing process, with or without oscillation, may be used to qualify a WPS for a manual, or a semiautomatic GTAW hard-facing process, with or without weave? |
Yes. Note that recent actions by Section IX have defined oscillation as applicable to machine and automatic processes and weave as applicable to manual and semiautomatic processes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4810 |
| IX-01-07 |
QW-420.2, Material Grouping |
QW-420.2 |
2/23/2001 |
A PQR is qualified on a P-Number X material to a P-Number Y material. |
Does this PQR support a WPS for welding P-Number X to S-Number Y without changes to any other essential variables? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4811 |
| IX-01-07 |
QW-420.2, Material Grouping |
QW-420.2 |
2/23/2001 |
A PQR is qualified on a P-Number X material to a P-Number Y material. |
Does this PQR support a WPS for welding S-Number X to S-Number Y without changes to any other essential variables? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4811 |
| IX-01-08 |
QW-300.2, Transfer of Record of Performance Qualification |
QW-300.2 |
2/26/2001 |
|
When a new owner acquires a company or part of a company, does QW-300.2 prohibit continued use of existing welder performance qualifications? |
No. Section IX does not address rules applicable to performance qualification continuity when a new owner acquires a manufacturer or contractor. If welder performance qualification continuity is to be maintained by the new owner, the Quality Control System/Quality Assurance Program should reflect to the source of the welder performance qualification records as being from the former manufacturer or contractor. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4812 |
| IX-01-09 |
QW-356, Welding Variables |
QW-356 |
2/26/2001 |
|
A welder was qualified on P-No. 1 material using the GTAW process without gas backing using F-No. 6 filler material. Is he qualified to weld P-No. 8 material using the GTAW process with gas backing using F-No. 6 filler material, provided all other essential variables remain the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4813 |
| IX-01-10 |
QW-144 and QW-194, Visual Examination |
QW-144; QW-194 |
2/26/2001 |
|
Are the requirements of QW-144 and QW-194 for visual examination of the test coupon required for the qualifications of a welding procedure? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4814 |
| IX-01-11 |
QW-510 and QW-540 in Article V, Standard Welding Procedure Specifications |
QW-510; QW-540 |
6/4/2001 |
|
Under QW-510(d), is it acceptable to weld the demonstration test coupon with only GTAW if the SWPS is for combination GTAW root and SMAW E7018 fill? |
No. All variables of the SWPSs are considered to be essential variables. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4815 |
| IX-01-11 |
QW-510 and QW-540 in Article V, Standard Welding Procedure Specifications |
QW-510; QW-540 |
6/4/2001 |
|
Under QW-510(d), is it acceptable to weld the demonstration test coupon with only SMAW E7018 if the SWPS is for combination GTAW root and SMAW E7018 fill? |
No. All variables of the SWPSs are considered to be essential variables. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4815 |
| IX-01-11 |
QW-510 and QW-540 in Article V, Standard Welding Procedure Specifications |
QW-510; QW-540 |
6/4/2001 |
|
Under QW-510(d), is it acceptable to weld demonstration test coupon with only SMAW E7018 if the SWPS specifies both E6010 and E7018? |
No. All variables of the SWPSs are considered to be essential variables. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4815 |
| IX-01-11 |
QW-510 and QW-540 in Article V, Standard Welding Procedure Specifications |
QW-510; QW-540 |
6/4/2001 |
|
Does Section IX, Article II apply when the fabricator chooses to use SWPSs? |
No. Ref. para. QW-100.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4815 |
| IX-01-11 |
QW-510 and QW-540 in Article V, Standard Welding Procedure Specifications |
QW-510; QW-540 |
6/4/2001 |
|
When using SWPSs under Article V of Section IX, may a single welding process of a multiple process SWPSs be used to complete a weld? |
No. Ref. paras. QW-540(a) and (c). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4815 |
| IX-01-11 |
QW-510 and QW-540 in Article V, Standard Welding Procedure Specifications |
QW-510; QW-540 |
6/4/2001 |
|
When using SWPSs under Article V of Section IX, may a single process SWPS for E7018 and a single process SWPS for GTAW be used to complete a weld, assuming all other variables are within the SWPS parameters? |
No. Ref. paras. QW-540(a) and (c). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4815 |
| IX-01-11 |
QW-510 and QW-540 in Article V, Standard Welding Procedure Specifications |
QW-510; QW-540 |
6/4/2001 |
|
When using SWPSs under Article V of Section IX, may a single process SWPS for E7018 and a single process SWPS for E6010 be used to complete a weld, assuming all other variables are within the SWPS parameters? |
No. Ref. paras. QW-540(a) and (c). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4815 |
| IX-01-12 |
QW-322.2(a) and QW-452.1, Rule Change Affecting Welder Qualification |
QW-322.2(a); QW-452.1 |
6/4/2001 |
ASME Section IX, Addenda 2000, revised table QW-452.1 reducing the coupon size from 3/4 in. to 1/2 in. to qualify the welder for "Maximum to be welded" when welding a minimum of three layers. |
A welder qualified prior to Addenda 2000 and has remained qualified since his original test. His original test coupon consisted of at least three weld layers and greater than 1/2 in. but less than 3/4 in. deposited weld metal. May the qualification recorded be revised from
"2t" to "Max. to be welded" subsequent to Addenda 2000? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4816 |
| IX-01-12 |
QW-322.2(a) and QW-452.1, Rule Change Affecting Welder Qualification |
QW-322.2(a); QW-452.1 |
6/4/2001 |
ASME Section IX, Addenda 2000, revised table QW-452.1 reducing the coupon size from 3/4 in. to 1/2 in. to qualify the welder for "Maximum to be welded" when welding a minimum of three layers. |
A welder was qualified prior to Addenda 2000. His qualification has lapsed due to not welding with the original weld process for greater than 6 months. His original test coupon consisted of at least three layers and greater than 1/2 in. but less than 3/4 in. deposited weld metal. His renewal restores his original qualifications in accordance with QW-322.2(a). May the original qualification record be revised from "2t" to "Max. to be welded" subsequent to Addenda 2000? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4816 |
| IX-01-13 |
References to Edition and Addenda |
|
6/26/2001 |
|
The 1998 Code Edition, as published, incorporates the 1998 Addenda. When providing reference to this Code Edition and Addenda within a Code-required document, may only the Edition be listed (i.e., 1998 Edition)? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4817 |
| IX-01-13 |
References to Edition and Addenda |
|
6/26/2001 |
|
For the 1998 Edition only, is it necessary to revise Code-required documentation where the term "1998 Edition" was used as meaning the 1995 Edition through the 1997 Addenda? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4817 |
| IX-01-14 |
QW-500, The Use of SWPS's |
QW-500 |
9/25/2001 |
|
May a manufacturer or contractor adopt and use SWPSs in accordance with the rules of Article V for work on Code items built to an edition or addenda prior to the 1998 edition with the 2000 Addenda, provided the construction code does not prohibit the use of SWPSs? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4818 |
| IX-01-15 |
QW-300.2, Employer's Responsibility |
QW-300.2 |
9/15/2001 |
Section IX requires that the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer "be responsible for conducting tests to qualify the performance of welders which his organization employs in construction of weldments built in accordance with the Code." It also requires that the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer provide supervision and control over welders while they are welding test coupons for performance qualification. |
An employee of a contractor provides supervision and control over a welder during welding of a test coupon, but that welder is not an employee of the contractor at the time of the test. Is it required that the welder be an employee of that contractor at the time of qualification testing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4819 |
| IX-01-15 |
QW-300.2, Employer's Responsibility |
QW-300.2 |
9/15/2001 |
Section IX requires that the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer "be responsible for conducting tests to qualify the performance of welders which his organization employs in construction of weldments built in accordance with the Code." It also requires that the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer provide supervision and control over welders while they are welding test coupons for performance qualification. |
Must the welder be the employee of any manufacturer or contractor at the time of qualification testing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4819 |
| IX-01-16 |
Code Case 2142-1 and 2143-1 |
|
12/18/2001 |
The submerged arc welding process is being used to deposit corrosion-resistant weld overlay for Section III, Subsection NB fabrication using a Ni-Cr-Fe alloy strip filler metal and flux combination. The strip filler metal does not meet the chemical requirements of Code Case 2142-1 (bare electrode and rod), but both the filler metal and weld deposit meet the chemical composition limits of Code Case 2143-1 (covered electrodes). |
Must the Ni-Cr-Fe alloy strip filler metal used for the SAW process meet the chemical composition requirements of Code Case 2142-1 to be classified as F-43 for procedure and performance qualifications? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4820 |
| IX-01-16 |
Code Case 2142-1 and 2143-1 |
|
12/18/2001 |
The submerged arc welding process is being used to deposit corrosion-resistant weld overlay for Section III, Subsection NB fabrication using a Ni-Cr-Fe alloy strip filler metal and flux combination. The strip filler metal does not meet the chemical requirements of Code Case 2142-1 (bare electrode and rod), but both the filler metal and weld deposit meet the chemical composition limits of Code Case 2143-1 (covered electrodes). |
May Ni-Cr-Fe alloy filler metal that is not designated as F-43 per Code Case 2142-1 be used for welding if the welding procedure is qualified separately per QW-404.37? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4820 |
| IX-01-16 |
Code Case 2142-1 and 2143-1 |
|
12/18/2001 |
The submerged arc welding process is being used to deposit corrosion-resistant weld overlay for Section III, Subsection NB fabrication using a Ni-Cr-Fe alloy strip filler metal and flux combination. The strip filler metal does not meet the chemical requirements of Code Case 2142-1 (bare electrode and rod), but both the filler metal and weld deposit meet the chemical composition limits of Code Case 2143-1 (covered electrodes). |
If the Ni-Cr-Fe alloy strip filler metal meets the chemical composition requirements of Code Case 2143-1 and was produced to the requirements of SFA-5.14, except for the chemical analysis, may the filler metal be classified as F-43 for procedure and performance qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4820 |
| IX-01-16 |
Code Case 2142-1 and 2143-1 |
|
12/18/2001 |
The submerged arc welding process is being used to deposit corrosion-resistant weld overlay for Section III, Subsection NB fabrication using a Ni-Cr-Fe alloy strip filler metal and flux combination. The strip filler metal does not meet the chemical requirements of Code Case 2142-1 (bare electrode and rod), but both the filler metal and weld deposit meet the chemical composition limits of Code Case 2143-1 (covered electrodes). |
If the Ni-Cr-Fe alloy strip filler metal is not classified in an SFA specification, and is not covered in Code Case 2142-1 or 2143-1, is it permissible to identify the filler metal and flux on the WPS, PQR, and WPQ by the manufacturer's brand names? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4820 |
| IX-01-17 |
QW-202.2(b), QW-202.3(b), and QW-407.4 |
QW-202.2(b); QW-202.3(b); QW-407.4 |
12/18/2001 |
A groove weld procedure qualification test coupon 1.5 in. thick was welded with the SMAW process using multiple passes of 1/2 in. max. thickness. The test coupon was given a subsequent post weld heat treatment exceeding the upper transformation temperature prior to the completion of mechanical testing. |
May this PQR be used to support the weld of partial penetration groove welds per QW-202.2(b) or weld repair and buildup welds per QW-202.3(b) on base material thickness exceeding 1.65 in.? |
No. Per QW-407.4, a procedure qualification test coupon receiving a post weld heat treatment in which the upper transformation is exceeded, the maximum qualified thickness for production welds is 1.1 times the thickness of the test coupon. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4821 |
| IX-01-18 |
QW-153.1, Acceptance Criteria for Tensile Strength |
QW-153.1 |
12/18/2001 |
|
Does the minimum specified tensile strength in QW/QB-422 supercede the SA/SB material tensile strength for procedure qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4822 |
| IX-01-19 |
QW-202.4(b), Dissimilar Base Metal Thickness |
QW-202.4(b) |
12/18/2001 |
|
Does QW-202.4(b) permit the maximum weld deposit thickness limit to be extended beyond the limit specified in QW-451.1? |
No; QW-202.4 applies only to the base metal thickness limits. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4823 |
| IX-01-20 |
QW-407.1, Postweld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1 |
12/18/2001 |
|
May a procedure qualification record subject to variable QW-407.1(a) that included only a PWHT below the lower transformation temperature be used to support a WPS with PWHT above the upper transformation temperature and a subsequent PWHT below the lower transformation temperature ? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4824 |
| IX-01-20 |
QW-407.1, Postweld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1 |
12/18/2001 |
|
Does Section IX address the values to be used as transformation temperature? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4824 |
| IX-01-21 |
QW- 151.1(d), Reduced Section -- Plate; QW-200.4(b), Combination of Processes: QW-322, Expiration and Renewal of Qualifications |
QW-200.4(b); QW-322 |
1/19/2002 |
A welder is qualified for manual SMAW and GTAW, and semiautomatic
FCAW and GMAW. |
Do welders maintain their qualifications for manual SMAW and GTAW by welding with either semiautomatic GMAW or FCAW? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4825 |
| IX-01-21 |
QW- 151.1(d), Reduced Section -- Plate; QW-200.4(b), Combination of Processes: QW-322, Expiration and Renewal of Qualifications |
QW-200.4(b); QW-322 |
1/19/2002 |
A welder is qualified for manual SMAW and GTAW, and semiautomatic
FCAW and GMAW. |
Do welders maintain their qualifications for both SMAW and GTAW by welding with only one of the processes during the six-month period? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4825 |
| IX-01-21 |
QW- 151.1(d), Reduced Section -- Plate; QW-200.4(b), Combination of Processes: QW-322, Expiration and Renewal of Qualifications |
QW-200.4(b); QW-322 |
1/19/2002 |
A welder is qualified for manual SMAW and GTAW, and semiautomatic
FCAW and GMAW. |
Do welders maintain their qualifications for semiautomatic GMAW and FCAW by welding with either GMAW or FCAW during the six-month period? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4825 |
| IX-01-21 |
QW- 151.1(d), Reduced Section -- Plate; QW-200.4(b), Combination of Processes: QW-322, Expiration and Renewal of Qualifications |
QW-200.4(b); QW-322 |
1/19/2002 |
A WPS was qualified using a Trade Name wire-flux combination that conforms to a classification in ASME Section II, Part C. |
Does the substitution in the qualified WPS of a different Trade Name wire-flux combination that conforms to the same SFA Specification and classification in ASME Section II, Part C require requalification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4825 |
| IX-01-21 |
QW- 151.1(d), Reduced Section -- Plate; QW-200.4(b), Combination of Processes: QW-322, Expiration and Renewal of Qualifications |
QW-200.4(b); QW-322 |
1/19/2002 |
The tensile specimens of a 60 mm PQR test plate was divided into three pieces. The sum of the thickness of the three specimens was less than 60 mm. |
What is the allowable percentage thickness reduction from the original base metal thickness? |
Section IX does not address this issue. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4825 |
| IX-01-22 |
QW-100.3, QW-420.1, P-Number Reassignment |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
3/11/2002 |
|
May a previous qualified WPS, written to permit the welding of P-No. 5, Group 1 material to P-No. 5, Group 4 material prior to the establishment of P-Nos. 5A, 5B, and 5C be used to weld SA-213 T22 to SA-213 T91 materials? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4826 |
| IX-01-22R |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1, P-Number Reassignment (2004 Edition) |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
9/11/2007 |
|
May a previously qualified WPS, written to permit the welding of P-No. 5, Group 1 material to P-No. 5, Group 4 material prior to the establishment of P-Nos. 5A, 5B, and 5C, be used to weld SA-213 T22 to SA-213 T91 materials? |
Yes, if the WPS is revised to limit the materials qualified for welding to the P- or S-Number(s) and Group number(s) assigned to the specific material(s) originally used for the procedure qualification test coupon in the applicable edition and addenda of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4827 |
| IX-01-23 |
QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4 |
3/11/2002 |
|
A WPS is qualified to weld base material from 1.6 mm to 20 mm. May that WPS be used for welding a part 30 mm thick that has been tapered to 15 mm thick to another 15 mm part? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4828 |
| IX-01-24 |
QW-200.4, Impact Test Qualification of Multiprocess Welds |
QW-200.4 |
3/11/2002 |
|
A welding procedure qualification is made using multiple welding processes on a single test plate for an application where notch-toughness testing is required. The weld coupon was welded with two passes each of GTAW and FCAW, and the remainder with SAW process. Is it required to take multiple sets of weld metal impact test specimens to include all welding processes when all welding could not be included in a single set of specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4829 |
| IX-01-25 |
ASME BPV Section II, Part C |
|
3/11/2002 |
|
Does Section II, Part C mandate the use of SFA 5.01? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4830 |
| IX-01-26 |
QW-100.3, The Use of the Referenced Edition of the Code |
QW-100.3 |
3/11/2002 |
A designer specifies a specific year of the ASME Code to be complied with for the fabrication of a component, i.e., including 96 Addenda, and this component is installed in 2003. |
What year of Section IX does the installer use for qualifying welders/welding
operators? |
Welders are qualified in accordance with the current edition and addenda of Section
IX in effect at the time of the qualification. See QW-100.3. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4831 |
| IX-01-26 |
QW-100.3, The Use of the Referenced Edition of the Code |
QW-100.3 |
3/11/2002 |
A designer specifies a specific year of the ASME Code to be complied with for the fabrication of a component, i.e., including 96 Addenda, and this component is installed in 2003. |
What year of Section II does the installer use for purchasing welding materials? |
Section IX does not address this issue. The question should be addressed to the
applicable construction code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4831 |
| IX-01-27 |
QW-452.1, Nominal Coupon Thickness |
QW-452.1 |
3/11/2002 |
|
A welder welds an NPS 6 Schedule 80 test coupon that is 0.432 in. thick. He uses one welding process, one set of essential variables, and deposits at least three layers of weld metal in that test coupon. Is that welder qualified to weld "maximum to be welded?" |
The nominal coupon thickness must be at least 1/2 in. thick in order for a welder to
be qualified for "maximum to be welded." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4832 |
| IX-01-28 |
QW-409.4, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.4 |
5/22/2002 |
|
Does QW-409.4 apply to the current type used to preheat the filler metal wire when welding GTAW Hot-wire Automatic or machine corrosion-resistant overlay? |
No.
Note: This interpretation was inadvertently omitted from Volume 51 of the interpretations. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4833 |
| IX-01-29 |
Section II-C SFA Specifications, Marking of Packages |
|
10/3/2002 |
ASME Section II-C SFA specifications state in the "Marking of Packages" paragraphs that the AWS specification and classification designations must be marked on the outside of each unit package. |
Must filler metal procured to an ASME SFA specification be marked with the ASME SFA specification such as ASME SFA-5.XX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4834 |
| IX-01-29 |
Section II-C SFA Specifications, Marking of Packages |
|
10/3/2002 |
ASME Section II-C SFA specifications state in the "Marking of Packages" paragraphs that the AWS specification and classification designations must be marked on the outside of each unit package. |
Is marking the package with the AWS specification and classification such as AWS A5.XX EXXXX required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4834 |
| IX-01-29 |
Section II-C SFA Specifications, Marking of Packages |
|
10/3/2002 |
ASME Section II-C SFA specifications state in the "Marking of Packages" paragraphs that the AWS specification and classification designations must be marked on the outside of each unit package. |
May the material manufacturer add the ASME specification (e.g., SFA-5.XX) to the required AWS markings on the unit container? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4834 |
| IX-01-30 |
QW-403.5, Base Metal Requirements |
QW-403.5 |
12/30/2002 |
|
When impact testing of a heat-affected zone is required for nonferrous base materials of the same P-Number, does a PQR with a UNS number designation (e.g., SB-619, UNS N06022) qualify a WPS that specifies a different UNS number designation (e.g., SB-619, UNS N10276) within the same P-Number? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4835 |
| IX-01-31 |
QW-423, Alternate Base Materials for Welder Qualification |
QW-423 |
12/30/2002 |
|
May a welder who has qualified on a P-Number base metal within the left column of QW-423 weld any combination of P-Number base metals in the corresponding row of the right column within the limits of the other essential variable limits qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4836 |
| IX-01-31 |
QW-423, Alternate Base Materials for Welder Qualification |
QW-423 |
12/30/2002 |
|
May a welder who has qualified on a P-Number base metal within the left column of QW-423 weld one of the P-Number base metals in the corresponding row of the right column to any other (dissimilar) P-Number in the corresponding row of the right column within the limits of the other essential variable limits qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4836 |
| IX-01-31 |
QW-423, Alternate Base Materials for Welder Qualification |
QW-423 |
12/30/2002 |
|
May a welder who has qualified on a P-Number base metal within the left column of QW-423 welded to an unassigned base metal, weld any combination of P-Number base metals in the corresponding row of the right column to the unassigned metal within the limits of the other essential variable limits qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4836 |
| IX-01-32 |
QW-200.4(b), Root Pass Procedure Qualification |
QW-200.4(b) |
12/30/2002 |
|
Do the provisions of QW-200.4(b) permit a GTAW procedure qualification test weldment performed on a 13 mm thick coupon to support depositing a root pass in a production joint of the qualified base metal having a thickness of 8 mm when impact testing is required? |
No. See QW-403.6. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4837 |
| IX-01-34 |
QB-203.1, Limits of Qualified Flow Positions for Procedures, and QB-408.4, Joint Design; QB-303.3, Limits of Qualified Positions, and QB-408.1, Joint Design |
|
3/13/2003 |
QB-203.1 states: "Qualification in pipe shall qualify for plate, but not vice versa. Horizontal-flow in pipe shall qualify for flat-flow in plate." QB-408.4 states: "A change in the joint type, e.g., from a butt to a lap or socket, from that qualified. For lap or socket joints, a decrease in overlap length from that qualified." |
Do procedure qualifications in plate lap joints qualify for tube-to-tube socket joints for brazing procedure qualifications? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4838 |
| IX-01-34 |
QB-203.1, Limits of Qualified Flow Positions for Procedures, and QB-408.4, Joint Design; QB-303.3, Limits of Qualified Positions, and QB-408.1, Joint Design |
|
3/13/2003 |
QB-303.3 states: "Qualification in pipe shall qualify for plate, but not vice versa. Horizontal-flow in pipe shall qualify for flat-flow in plate." QB-408.1 states: "A change in the joint type, i.e., from a butt to a lap or socket, from that qualified. For lap or socket joints, an increase in
lap length of more than 25% from the overlap used on brazer performance qualification test coupon." |
Do performance qualifications in plate lap joints qualify for tube-to-tube socket joints for brazer performance qualifications? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4838 |
| IX-01-37 |
QW-404.33, Change in SFA Specification Filler Metal Classification |
QW-404.33 |
5/19/2003 |
|
Does the expression "a change in the SFA specification filler metal classification" refer to a change in the AWS classification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4839 |
| IX-01-33 |
QW-283, Welds With Buttering |
QW-283 |
12/30/2002 |
In all cases described below, the manufacturers develop and follow WPSs and PQRs based on the test coupons welded. The minimum buttering thickness in all cases will be greater than 3/I6 in. |
Manufacturer A qualifies a WPS by buttering the ends of the test coupons, which are the same material. The buttered ends are heat treated, then the weld is completed using the same filler metal as was used for the buttering. Manufacturer B welds a groove weld test coupon of the same base metal using the same process, filler metal and other essential variables as manufacturer A. That test coupon is heat treated in the same manner as the heat treatment used for the buttering by manufacturer A. May manufacturer A weld parts that were buttered by manufacturer B? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4840 |
| IX-01-33 |
QW-283, Welds With Buttering |
QW-283 |
12/30/2002 |
In all cases described below, the manufacturers develop and follow WPSs and PQRs based on the test coupons welded. The minimum buttering thickness in all cases will be greater than 3/I6 in. |
Manufacturer C welds a groove weld test coupon using the same base metal, process, filler metal, and other essential variables as manufacturer A. That test coupon is heat treated in the same manner as the heat treatment used for the buttering by manufacturer A. May manufacturer A weld parts that were buttered by manufacturer C? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4840 |
| IX-01-33 |
QW-283, Welds With Buttering |
QW-283 |
12/30/2002 |
In all cases described below, the manufacturers develop and follow WPSs and PQRs based on the test coupons welded. The minimum buttering thickness in all cases will be greater than 3/I6 in. |
Manufacturer A receives parts that have been buttered by both manufacturers B and C. May the parts buttered by manufacturer B be welded by manufacturer A to parts buttered by manufacturer C? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4840 |
| IX-01-33 |
QW-283, Welds With Buttering |
QW-283 |
12/30/2002 |
In all cases described below, the manufacturers develop and follow WPSs and PQRs based on the test coupons welded. The minimum buttering thickness in all cases will be greater than 3/I6 in. |
Manufacturer D receives parts that have been buttered by manufacturers A, B, and C. May manufacturer D weld the buttered parts together using a buttered groove weld test coupons qualified using the same base metal, process, filler metal, and other essential variables as manufacturer A? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4840 |
| IX-01-33 |
QW-283, Welds With Buttering |
QW-283 |
12/30/2002 |
In all cases described below, the manufacturers develop and follow WPSs and PQRs based on the test coupons welded. The minimum buttering thickness in all cases will be greater than 3/I6 in. |
"Manufacturer D receives parts that have been buttered by manufacturers A, B, and C. May manufacturer D weld the buttered parts together using a groove weld test coupon qualified in accordance with QW-283.4(b) using the same process, filler metal, and other essential variables that manufacturer A used to join the buttered parts (i.e., the as-welded portion of the test) using a base metal that nominally matches the chemical analysis of the buttering used by manufacturer A, B, or C?" |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4840 |
| IX-01-33 |
QW-283, Welds With Buttering |
QW-283 |
12/30/2002 |
In all cases described below, the manufacturers develop and follow WPSs and PQRs based on the test coupons welded. The minimum buttering thickness in all cases will be greater than 3/I6 in. |
Manufacturer E welds a groove weld test coupon of another base metal using the same filler metal as manufacturer A. That test coupon is heat treated and tested in accordance with QW-202.2(a). May manufacturer F, who has welded a test coupon in accordance with QW-283.4(b), join parts buttered by manufacturer E? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4840 |
| IX-01-35 |
QW-451.1, Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits |
QW-451.1 |
3/13/2003 |
|
A test coupon is prepared as follows: A 1.75 in. plate is welded to 1.75 in. plate with 1 in. thick weld. Per QW-451.1, is 8 in. the maximum thickness range of base metal qualified?
|
Yes, except that further limits or exceptions may apply as stated in Notes (1) and (5)
of QW-451.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4841 |
| IX-01-35 |
QW-451.1, Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits |
QW-451.1 |
3/13/2003 |
|
Using the same test coupon as Question (1), where a single process was used to deposit the entire weld thickness, is 8 in. the maximum thickness of the weld metal permitted per
QW-451.1 ? |
Yes, except that further limits or exceptions may apply as stated in Notes (1) and (5)
of QW-451.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4841 |
| IX-01-36 |
QW-301.4, Record of Welder Performance Qualification |
QW-301.4 |
3/13/2003 |
For welder's performance qualification, a multiple layer groove weld is made on a single test coupon using one welder for first layer and another welder for the second. |
QW-301.4 requires a record of welder performance qualification. May a single form be used to record the essential variables, the type of test and test results, and the ranges qualified in accordance with QW-452 for each welder and welding operator? |
Section IX specifies information required to be recorded, but does not specify the format
of the records. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4842 |
| IX-01-39 |
QW-401.3, Supplemental Essential Variable (Procedure) |
QW-401.3 |
5/19/2003 |
A company has qualified a PQR to satisfy all testing requirements other than notch toughness for welding P1 Group 2 to P1 Group 2 by the SAW process. Another test coupon is subsequently prepared using the WPS written on the original PQR and an additional PQR is then qualified with only testing for notch toughness, as allowed by the Code, to supplement the original PQR for welding with impact requirements. However, the preheat value (an essential variable) used to qualify the original PQR was 150°F. The preheat temperature was less than 150°F. |
May the supplemental PQR with reduced preheat be used with the original PQR to support a WPS for notch toughness application? |
Yes, provided that the requirements of QW-406.1 are met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4843 |
| IX-01-40 |
QW-201/QW-201.1, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201/QW-201.1 |
5/19/2003 |
Several manufacturing organizations within the same company perform welding procedure qualifications in accordance with Section IX. Each manufacturing organization performs these activities in accordance with specific Quality Assurance Program(s)/Quality Control System(s) that comply with their ASME Construction Code Certificate(s) of Authorization and describe operational control of qualifications. |
Is it permissible for any of the manufacturing organizations within the company to use WPSs and PQRs qualified by any of the other manufacturing organizations? |
Yes, this is permitted by QW-201. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4844 |
| IX-04-01 |
QW-151.3(b), Tension Test Turned Specimen |
QW-151.3(b) |
9/15/2003 |
QW-151.3(b) states, “For thicknesses over 1 in. (25 mm), multiple specimens shall be cut through the full thickness of the weld with their centers parallel to the metal surface and not over 1 in. (25 mm) apart. The centers of the specimens adjacent to the metal surface shall not exceed 5/8 in. (16 mm) from the surface.” |
Does the specified distance between specimens of “not over 1 in. apart” refer to the distance between the centers of the specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4845 |
| IX-04-01 |
QW-151.3(b), Tension Test Turned Specimen |
QW-151.3(b) |
9/15/2003 |
QW-151.3(b) states, “For thicknesses over 1 in. (25 mm), multiple specimens shall be cut through the full thickness of the weld with their centers parallel to the metal surface and not over 1 in. (25 mm) apart. The centers of the specimens adjacent to the metal surface shall not exceed 5/8 in. (16 mm) from the surface.” |
How many tension tests would be required for a 2 1/2-in. thick groove welding procedure qualification test coupon welded full thickness? |
Two. See QW-451.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4845 |
| IX-04-01 |
QW-151.3(b), Tension Test Turned Specimen |
QW-151.3(b) |
9/15/2003 |
QW-151.3(b) states, “For thicknesses over 1 in. (25 mm), multiple specimens shall be cut through the full thickness of the weld with their centers parallel to the metal surface and not over 1 in. (25 mm) apart. The centers of the specimens adjacent to the metal surface shall not exceed 5/8 in. (16 mm) from the surface.” |
When reduced section turned tension test specimens are used in accordance with QW- 462.1(d) for a 2 1/2-in. thick groove welding procedure qualification test coupon welded full thickness, what is the minimum number of specimens that must be removed for each tension test set? |
Three |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4845 |
| IX-04-02 |
QW-258.1 and QW-410.38, Multiple Layers |
QW-258.1; QW-410.38 |
9/15/2003 |
The electroslag welding process is used to apply a corrosion-resistant overlay. The essential variables in QW-258.1 apply. QW-410.38 is listed as an essential variable for corrosion-resistant overlay. |
When a single layer is recorded in the PQR, is a WPS qualified for application of multiple layers? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4846 |
| IX-04-02 |
QW-258.1 and QW-410.38, Multiple Layers |
QW-258.1; QW-410.38 |
9/15/2003 |
The electroslag welding process is used to apply a corrosion-resistant overlay. The essential variables in QW-258.1 apply. QW-410.38 is listed as an essential variable for corrosion-resistant overlay. |
When multiple layers are recorded in the PQR, is a WPS qualified for application of single layer? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4846 |
| IX-04-04 |
QW-403.6, QW-451, and QW-401.3; Notch Toughness Testing |
QW-403.6; QW-451; QW-401.3; |
9/15/2003 |
A WPS is supported by three PQRs. Two PQRs are recorded on 12-mm and 28.5-mm thick coupons using tensile, bend, and impact testing specimens. A third PQR was made using 5-mm thick plate using the same welding parameters, but only impact specimens were tested. |
May these PQRs be combined to support a WP for welding 2.5 mm through 57 mm material requiring notch toughness testing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4848 |
| IX-04-04 |
QW-403.6, QW-451, and QW-401.3; Notch Toughness Testing |
QW-403.6; QW-451; QW-401.3; |
9/15/2003 |
A WPS is supported by three PQRs. Two PQRs are recorded on 12-mm and 28.5-mm thick coupons using tensile, bend, and impact testing specimens. A third PQR was made using 5-mm thick plate using the same welding parameters, but only impact specimens were tested. |
May these three PQRs be combined to support welding base metal thicknesses of 4.8 mm through 57 mm with or without notch toughness? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4848 |
| IX-04-05 |
QW-200.2(f) and QW-451, Weld Tests |
QW-200.2(f); QW-451 |
12/30/2003 |
|
Two separate PQRs with identical welding process exist for a 6 mm and an 8 mm base metal thickness. May these PQRs support a WPS, with all the essential and supplementary variables unchanged, to weld a 28-mm thick production joint? |
No. See QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4849 |
| IX-04-06 |
QB-451.3 and QB-462.l(e), Tension Tests |
|
12/30/2003 |
Two tubes under 3 in. in diameter are separately torch brazed into each end of a coupling using face-fed filler in the same position with all the remaining brazing variables the same for both joints. The coupon is pulled to failure which occurs in the weaker of the two brazed joints. The resulting ultimate tensile strength exceeds the minimum specified values listed in QW/QB-422. |
Does one tensile coupon, as shown in QB-462.l(e), brazed in this manner, fulfill the requirement in QB-451.3 for two tension tests? |
Yes. See QB-463.1(e). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4850 |
| IX-04-06 |
QB-451.3 and QB-462.l(e), Tension Tests |
|
12/30/2003 |
Two tubes under 3 in. in diameter are separately torch brazed into each end of a coupling using face-fed filler in the same position with all the remaining brazing variables the same for both joints. The coupon is pulled to failure which occurs in the weaker of the two brazed joints. The resulting ultimate tensile strength exceeds the minimum specified values listed in QW/QB-422. |
Since the same inside diameter, outside diameter, cross-sectional area ultimate load, ultimate tensile strength, and type of failure exist for both lap joints, may the same values be recorded for the two tension tests on the Brazing PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4850 |
| IX-04-07 |
QW-310.1, QW-452.3, and QW-461.9; Position |
QW-310.1; QW-452.3; QW-461.9; |
12/30/2003 |
|
Does QW-310.1 apply if the pipe coupon is welded in the 6G position? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4851 |
| IX-04-08 |
QW-200.4, Combination of Welding Procedures |
QW-200.4 |
4/1/2004 |
|
A combination weld process PQR was qualified using the GTAW for the root pass, SMAW, and SAW. May this PQR support a WPS for welding with only one or two of the processes shown on the PQR? |
Yes, provided the following are met:
(a) The remaining essential, nonessential, and supplementary essential variables, when applicable, are applied.
(b) The base metal and deposited weld metal thickness limits of QW-451 are applied. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4852 |
| IX-04-09 |
QW-403.9, Base Metal Thickness |
QW-403.9 |
4/1/2004 |
|
An EGW procedure was qualified on 3/8 in. thick base material completing the weld joint in one single pass. Is the WPS qualified to make a weld deposit greater than ½ in., in one pass, in base metal greater than ½ in. in thickness? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4853 |
| IX-04-10 |
QW-100.3 and QW-200.2, Procedure Qualification Record Time Limits |
QW-100.3; QW-200.2 |
6/10/2004 |
|
Is there a time limit on the validity of a PQR? |
PQRs always remain valid but may only be used to support WPSs, provided they meet the requirements of the 1962 or later Edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX. See QW-100.3. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4854 |
| IX-04-11 |
QW-451.1, Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens and QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-451.1; QW-202.4 |
12/22/2004 |
|
A procedure qualification test coupon using the same P-Number material and consisting of two plates of different thicknesses are welded together, where the thicker of the two plates (T2 = 1-1/2 in. thick) has been tapered on a 4:1 taper down to the thinner plate thickness (T1 = 1 in. thick). Does this test coupon qualify the WPS for a base metal thickness range of 3/16 in. to 8 in.? |
See Interpretation IX-86-43, Question (2). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4855 |
| IX-04-11 |
QW-451.1, Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens and QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-451.1; QW-202.4 |
12/22/2004 |
|
A procedure qualification test coupon using the same or different P-Number materials and consisting of two plates of different thicknesses, T2 = 1-1/2 in. thick and T1 = 1 in. thick, has been welded with a single process. The thicknesses meet on the same plane with neither plate being tapered. The joint is welded in accordance with Fig. IX-04-11.
Does this test coupon qualify the WPS for both base metals for a thickness range of 3/16 in. to 8 in. on both sides of the weld joint? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4855 |
| IX-04-11 |
QW-451.1, Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens and QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-451.1; QW-202.4 |
12/22/2004 |
|
Does this test coupon qualify the WPS for both base metals of different P-Numbers for a thickness range of 3/16 in. to 8 in.? |
No. QW-202.4 requires both base metal thicknesses be in accordance with QW-451.1. Base metal T1 is qualified 3/16 in. to 2 in. and base metal T2 is qualified 3/16 in. to 8 in., except as permitted by QW-202.4(b)(1). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4855 |
| IX-04-12 |
QW409.1, Electrical Characteristics, Heat Input |
QW-409.1 |
12/22/2004 |
|
Does QW-409.1 require that the highest heat input, to be recorded on the PQR, be calculated based on the parameters used at the location where the HAZ impact specimens are removed?
|
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4856 |
| IX-04-12 |
QW409.1, Electrical Characteristics, Heat Input |
QW-409.1 |
12/22/2004 |
|
GTAW is a nonconsumable electrode welding process that would record zero for the "per unit length of electrodew in QW-409.1(b). Therefore, can the weld volume method detailed in QW-409.1 be used to control the heat input for a nonconsumable electrode welding process such as GTAW? |
See Interpretation IX-92-40. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4856 |
| IX-10-12 |
QW-181.1 and QW-424.1, Procedure Qualification Using Production Assembly Mockup |
QW-181.1; QW-424.1 |
2/17/2010 |
|
Does ASME Section IX allow the use of materials having the same P-No. as the actual production materials, to produce a test specimen for fillet welding procedure qualification, using a production assembly mockup? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4857 |
| IX-04-13 |
QW-322.2, Renewal of Qualification |
QW-322.2 |
12/22/2004 |
|
A welder has been qualified for the GMAW process (short circuiting transfer mode). The required mechanical bend tests were performed and found to be acceptable. The welder did not weld with this process during the following 6-month period, resulting in expiration of the qualification. May a welder's qualification be renewed by radiographing a production weld performed with the GMAW process (short circuiting transfer mode)? |
No. See QW-322.2(a). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4858 |
| IX-04-14 |
QW-200.2, Procedure Qualification Record and QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics, Heat Input |
QW-200.2; QW-409.1 |
12/22/2004 |
|
Procedure qualification tests were conducted with notch toughness testing. When documenting the PQR with actual variables (amps, volts, travel speed) that were recorded during welding of the test coupon, is it required that a single value be recorded for these variables in the PQR? |
No. See QW-200.2(b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4859 |
| IX-04-14 |
QW-200.2, Procedure Qualification Record and QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics, Heat Input |
QW-200.2; QW-409.1 |
12/22/2004 |
|
Must the volts, amps, and travel speed used to calculate heat input for each process per QW-409.1 be measured in the same weld pass or unit length of weld? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4859 |
| IX-04-15 |
QW-403.7, Base Metal Thickness Qualification and QW-407.2, PWHT Temperature and Time Range |
QW-403.7; QW-407.2 |
12/22/2004 |
|
Will a procedure qualification test coupon on 1.5 in. thick P-No. 1, Gr. 2 material and postweld heat-treated at 1,100°F for 1.5 hr with supplementary essential variable requirements met, support a WPS with supplementary essential variable requirements for production welding on 8 in. thick P-No. 1, Gr. 2 material that is PWHT at 1,100°F for 3.5 hr? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4860 |
| IX-04-15 |
QW-403.7, Base Metal Thickness Qualification and QW-407.2, PWHT Temperature and Time Range |
QW-403.7; QW-407.2 |
12/22/2004 |
|
Based on the conditions stated in Question (I), could the PWHT time on the 8 in. thick weldrnent be increased to 4 hr and 10 min at 1,100°F and still be in compliance with Code requirements? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4860 |
| IX-04-16 |
QW-403.5, Qualification of Dissimilar Group Number Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
3/8/2005 |
|
A PQR is qualified with impact testing using API 5L X56, which is an S-No. 1, Group 2 material. Does that PQR support a WPS for impact-tested welding API 5L X52 and X46 which are S-No. 1, Group 1 materials? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4861 |
| IX-04-16 |
QW-403.5, Qualification of Dissimilar Group Number Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
3/8/2005 |
|
Does a PQR qualified with impact testing conducted using an unassigned material welded to an S-No. 1, Group 2 material support a WPS for welding the same unassigned material to S-No. 1, Group 1 material? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4861 |
| IX-04-17 |
QW-409.8, QW-256, SFA Specifications, GTAW Electrode Characteristics |
QW-409.8; QW-256 |
3/8/2005 |
|
May current levels outside the range of SFA 5.12 Table A1 for specific tungsten electrode diameters be specified in a WPS in accordance with Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4862 |
| IX-04-18 |
QW-200.4(b), Combining Procedure Qualification Records |
QW-200.4(b) |
3/8/2005 |
A combination GTAW and SMAW WPS is supported by two PQRs. PQR A is welded with SMAW to join 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) thick plates with 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) of SMAW deposit. PQR B is welded with GTAW and SMAW to join 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick plates, with 1/8 in. (3 mm) of GTAW deposit, and 3/8 in. (10 mm) of SMAW deposit. |
Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 3/16 in. (5 mm) to 8 in. (200 mm) when impact testing is not required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4863 |
| IX-04-18 |
QW-200.4(b), Combining Procedure Qualification Records |
QW-200.4(b) |
3/8/2005 |
A combination GTAW and SMAW WPS is supported by two PQRs. PQR A is welded with SMAW to join 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) thick plates with 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) of SMAW deposit. PQR B is welded with GTAW and SMAW to join 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick plates, with 1/8 in. (3 mm) of GTAW deposit, and 3/8 in. (10 mm) of SMAW deposit. |
Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a maximum deposited weld metal thickness of 1/4 in. (6 mm) for the GTAW process and 8 in. (200 mm) for the SMAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4863 |
| IX-04-18 |
QW-200.4(b), Combining Procedure Qualification Records |
QW-200.4(b) |
3/8/2005 |
A combination GTAW and SMAW WPS is supported by two PQRs. PQR A is welded with SMAW to join 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) thick plates with 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) of SMAW deposit. PQR B is welded with GTAW and SMAW to join 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick plates, with 1/8 in. (3 mm) of GTAW deposit, and 3/8 in. (10 mm) of SMAW deposit. |
When impact tests are performed for both PQRs with acceptable results, do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/2 in. (13 mm) to 8 in. (200 mm) when impact testing is required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4863 |
| IX-04-19 |
QW-404.36, Filler Metals, Testing of Recrushed Slag |
QW-404.36 |
3/8/2005 |
|
Does QW-404.36 require that each batch or blend of recrushed slag, as defined in SFA-5.17, be tested in accordance with Section II, Part C regardless of the source of slag? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4864 |
| IX-04-20 |
QW-407.1, Welding Procedure Specification, Postweld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1 |
3/8/2005 |
|
A WPS for joining P-No. 4 to P-No. 4 specifies that the PWHT be performed at 1,125°F ± 25°F, which is below the lower transformation temperature for the material. May this WPS be revised to specify a PWHT performed at 1,225°F ± 25°F, which is also below the transformation temperature, without requalification of the procedure? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4865 |
| IX-04-21 |
QW-184 and QW-322.1, Production Welds, Revoking Welder Qualifications |
QW-184; QW-322.1 |
5/19/2005 |
|
A welder, qualified for fillet welds by a qualification test on a plate groove weld, is required to weld a fillet weld of 3/8 in. (10 mm) leg on a nozzle-to-shell weld. Is the welder required to produce fillet welds with legs having a maximum difference in length of 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) as per QW-184?
|
No, QW-184 does not apply to production welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4866 |
| IX-04-21 |
QW-184 and QW-322.1, Production Welds, Revoking Welder Qualifications |
QW-184; QW-322.1 |
5/19/2005 |
|
The same welder, qualified as per previous question, produces fillet welds with one leg size twice the size of the other (3/8 in. versus 3/4 in.). Is this cause for questioning his/her ability to weld within the qualification parameters and revoke his/her qualification for fillet welds, in terms of QW-322.1(b)? |
Section IX does not establish criteria for revoking welder qualifications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4866 |
| IX-04-22 |
QW-407.4, Qualified Thickness Range When Exceeding the PWHT Upper Transformation Temperature |
QW-407.4 |
5/27/2005 |
|
When variable QW-407.4 applies per QW-250 for test coupons with postweld heat treatment exceeding the upper transformation temperature, is the maximum thickness qualified 1.1 times the thickness of the test coupon for ferrous P-Number materials, P-Nos. 1 through 7 and P-Nos. 9A through 11B? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4867 |
| IX-04-23 |
QW-211 and QW-310.2, Procedure Qualification for Groove Welds With Backing |
QW-211; QW-310.2 |
8/18/2005 |
|
A performance qualification test is performed using solid round bar machined to 42.20 mm (1.66 in.) O.D. with a machined circumferential weld groove that is 14.6 mm (0.575 in.) deep and has integral backing. Welding is performed in the 6G test position with a single welding process. At least three weld layers are deposited. The test coupon will be subjected to radiographic examination. May the test coupon described above be used for a performance qualification test in the 6G position welded with a single process to qualify for all position welding of unlimited weld metal thickness with backing and for all diameters 25 mm (1 in.) O.D. and greater? |
Yes, however, multiple test coupons are required to provide a minimum weld length of 150 mm (6 in.) for radiographic examination and the radiographic examination requirements of QW-191 need to be met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4868 |
| IX-04-24 |
QW-461.9, Performance Qualification - Position and Diameter Limitations |
QW-461.9 |
11/17/2005 |
|
A welder was qualified on pipe 5/8 in. thick in the 6G position using the GTAW process without backing for his root pass, and SMAW with F4 filler metal to complete the joint. He is also qualified to weld using SMAW on plate in the IG position without backing. May this welder deposit a root pass using SMAW with F4 filler in the 6G position without backing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4869 |
| IX-04-25 |
QW- 151.3 and QW-451, Tension Test Requirements for Turned Specimens |
QW-451 |
11/17/2005 |
A test coupon of 1-1/8 in. thickness was welded. Only two turned 0.505 in. diameter tension specimens were prepared and tested. The test results were acceptable for the specimens tested. |
Do the tension tests performed satisfy the requirements of QW-150 and QW-451? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4870 |
| IX-04-25 |
QW- 151.3 and QW-451, Tension Test Requirements for Turned Specimens |
QW-451 |
11/17/2005 |
A test coupon of 1-1/8 in. thickness was welded. Only two turned 0.505 in. diameter tension specimens were prepared and tested. The test results were acceptable for the specimens tested. |
Are the requirements of QW-150 and QW-451 satisfied if the WPS and this PQR supports is limited to a base metal thickness range of 3/16 in. to 2 in. instead of a base metal thickness range of 3/16 in. to 2-1/4 in. that would have been permitted had a sufficient number of tension specimens been tested? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4870 |
| IX-04-26 |
QW-201, Manufacturer’s or Contractor’s Responsibility |
QW-201 |
2/22/2006 |
Two independent companies, A and B, form a Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) to perform work requiring ASME Section I Code Stamp. The LLP has obtained valid ASME Certificates of Authorization. Each company also has valid, existing ASME Certificates of Authorization. The organization’s effective operational control of welding procedure qualification is described in each of the partner’s Quality Control System Manuals and the LLP’s Quality Control System Manual. The welding procedure qualification tests and production welding are under the full supervision and control of the same individual representing both the LLP and company A. |
May the LLP use PQR’s qualified by company A after the formation of the LLP? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4871 |
| IX-04-27 |
Units of Measurement |
|
2/22/2006 |
|
Is it acceptable to maintain welder performance qualification records in SI units, with a conversion table as part of the welding manual to ensure that qualification limits are not exceeded? |
Yes. Code Case 2523 provides information about when such conversions are required and the requirements for performing such conversions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4872 |
| IX-04-27 |
Units of Measurement |
|
2/22/2006 |
|
Is it acceptable to maintain welding procedure specifications that are dual dimensioned with SI units primary and U.S. Customary units in parentheses, with a conversion table as part of the welding manual to ensure that qualification limits are not exceeded? |
Yes. Code Case 2523 provides information about when such conversions are required and the requirements for performing such conversions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4872 |
| IX-04-28 |
QW-405.2, Welding Position |
QW-405.2 |
6/21/2006 |
|
If a Stud Welding Procedure Qualification is performed in the 4S position, does the same procedure qualification qualify for the 1S position? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4873 |
| IX-04-28 |
QW-405.2, Welding Position |
QW-405.2 |
6/21/2006 |
|
If a Stud Welding Procedure Qualification is performed in the 4S and 2S positions, does the same procedure qualification also qualify for all positions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4873 |
| IX-04-29 |
QW-407.1(b), Postweld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1(b) |
6/21/2006 |
|
Does QW-407.1(b)(2) address the temperature ranges for stress relieving, stabilizing, and/or solution annealing heat treatments? |
No, QW-407.1(b)(2) addresses PWHT within a specified temperature range. Section IX requires the temperature range to be specified on the WPS and the PQR supporting the WPS be within the specified PWHT temperature range (see the fourth paragraph of the Introduction). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4874 |
| IX-07-01 |
QW-407.1(b), Postweld Heat Treatment (2004 Edition) |
QW-407.1(b) |
2/6/2007 |
A manufacturer has fabricated multiconvolution bellows of SB-409 UNS N08800, N08810, or N08811 (P-No. 45), in accordance with Section VIII, Division 1, Mandatory Appendix 26, Pressure Vessel and Heat Exchanger Expansion Joints. Although the Code does not require it, the manufacturer performs heat treatment (at 1,750°F) subsequent to completing all welding and forming. |
Is the heat treatment described above considered postweld heat treatment for the purpose of welding procedure qualification in accordance with Section IX, QW-407.1(b)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4875 |
| IX-07-02 |
QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility (2004 Edition) |
QW-201 |
8/17/2007 |
Three construction companies have participated in a nuclear power plant construction project as a consortium contractor. They have a unified Quality Assurance Program, but the consortium does not hold a Certificate of Authorization. Each of the construction companies holds its own Certificate of Authorization. |
Does "two or more companies of different names in an organization" in QW-201 apply to the consortium described in the Background? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4876 |
| IX-07-03 |
QW-409.2, FCAW Mode of Transfer (2004 Edition) |
QW-409.2 |
8/17/2007 |
|
Does QW-409.2, the transfer mode variable, apply to the flux cored arc welding process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4877 |
| IX-07-04 |
QW-404.23, Filler Metal Product Form (2007 Edition) |
QW-404.23 |
8/17/2007 |
|
Is the requirement to document essential variable QW-404.23 satisfied when the AWS filler metal classification is specified in the WPS and recorded on the supporting PQR? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4878 |
| IX-07-04 |
QW-404.23, Filler Metal Product Form (2007 Edition) |
QW-404.23 |
8/17/2007 |
|
Does QW-404.23 require the words "solid wire," "bare wire," or "flux cored" be specified in addition to the AWS filler metal classification in the WPS and supporting PQR? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4878 |
| IX-07-06 |
QW-407.1 and QW-407.2, Postweld Heat Treatment (2007 Edition) |
QW-407.1; QW-407.2 |
12/11/2007 |
A weld test coupon for a PQR was welded to itself using P-No. 1, Group 2 plate material and postweld heat treated at 1110°F to 1130°F (600°C to 610°C) for 10 hr. The PQR documents all supplementary essential variable notch-toughness requirements. Notch toughness is required and all qualification ranges are supported by the PQR for production welds. |
Will this PQR support a WPS that specifies a PWHT temperature range below the lower transformation temperature, provided the time at temperature does not exceed 12.5 hr? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4879 |
| IX-07-10 |
QW-201.1 |
QW-201.1 |
9/18/2008 |
|
Does QW-201.1 allow maintaining effective operational control of PQRs and WPSs under different ownership than existed during the original procedure qualification when the ownership of one company has been transferred more than once? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4880 |
| IX-07-11 |
QW-301.2, Qualification Tests |
QW-301.2 |
11/26/2008 |
|
Does QW-301.2 require that a person making adjustments to the welding equipment settings, under the supervision and control of the welder or welding operator performing the weld, also be a qualified welder or welding operator? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4881 |
| IX-07-05 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1, Change of P-Number As an Essential Variable With Respect to Reassignment of P-No. 5 into P-Nos. 5A, 5B, and 5C (2004 Edition) |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
9/11/2007 |
A welding procedure was qualified in 1975 (without impact testing) for joining P-No.5
materials, using SA-213-T9 in the PQR test coupon. P-No. 5 has since been deleted, and CrMo materials have been reassigned to P-Nos. 5A, 5B, and 5C, with SA-213-T9 being assigned to P-No. 5B. It can be demonstrated that SA-213-T9 is now designated as a P-No. 5B material. |
QW-100.3 allows the continued use of welding procedures qualified under previous editions and addenda of the Code without revision to include any variables required by later editions and addenda. Is it the intent of QW-100.3 to allow the use of this WPS to join P-No. 5A, P-No. 5B, or P-No. 5C materials without requalification when toughness is not a consideration? |
No. QW-I00.3 applies when later Code editions and addenda have added new variables for a given welding process. While this WPS can be shown to be qualified for welding P-No. 5B materials to each other, it is intended that the WPS be editorially revised to show applicability of the WPS to the originally qualified materials under the material grouping assignment found in the applicable edition and addenda of Section IX. See QW-420.1 and QW-200.2(c). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4882 |
| IX-07-05 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1, Change of P-Number As an Essential Variable With Respect to Reassignment of P-No. 5 into P-Nos. 5A, 5B, and 5C (2004 Edition) |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
9/11/2007 |
A welding procedure was qualified in 1975 (without impact testing) for joining P-No.5
materials, using SA-213-T9 in the PQR test coupon. P-No. 5 has since been deleted, and CrMo materials have been reassigned to P-Nos. 5A, 5B, and 5C, with SA-213-T9 being assigned to P-No. 5B. It can be demonstrated that SA-213-T9 is now designated as a P-No. 5B material. |
Is it the intent of Section IX that the WPS described above is acceptable for joining all materials previously assigned P-No. 5? |
No. Based upon the original PQR, the WPS is qualified only for joining materials assigned to P-No. 5B under the current Section IX rules. See QW-403.13. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4882 |
| IX-07-07 |
QW-404.22, Use of Consumable Inserts (2007 Edition) |
QW-404.22 |
2/12/2008 |
QW-356 lists the essential variables for Welder Performance Qualification for manual GTAW. QW-404.22, the use of consumable inserts, is an essential variable for Welder Performance Qualification within QW-356.
An individual performs the following two qualification tests:
(a) Groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with a consumable insert.
(b) Groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with an open root. Each qualification test is performed independently and welded full thickness by the process used to make the root weld. |
Is this individual qualified to weld a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe groove weld by making the root weld with the GTAW-machine process with a consumable insert and then completing the weld using the GTAW-manual process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4883 |
| IX-07-07 |
QW-404.22, Use of Consumable Inserts (2007 Edition) |
QW-404.22 |
2/12/2008 |
QW-356 lists the essential variables for Welder Performance Qualification for manual GTAW. QW-404.22, the use of consumable inserts, is an essential variable for Welder Performance Qualification within QW-356.
An individual performs the following two qualification tests:
(a) Groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with a consumable insert.
(b) Groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with an open root. Each qualification test is performed independently and welded full thickness by the process used to make the root weld. |
Is this individual qualified to make non-through-wall weld repairs using the GTAW-manual process to a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe groove weld that was originally performed using the GTAW-machine process with a consumable insert? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4883 |
| IX-07-07 |
QW-404.22, Use of Consumable Inserts (2007 Edition) |
QW-404.22 |
2/12/2008 |
QW-356 lists the essential variables for Welder Performance Qualification for manual GTAW. QW-404.22, the use of consumable inserts, is an essential variable for Welder Performance Qualification within QW-356.
An individual performs the following two qualification tests:
(a) Groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with a consumable insert.
(b) Groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with an open root. Each qualification test is performed independently and welded full thickness by the process used to make the root weld. |
Is this individual qualified to make through-wall repairs using the GTAW-manual process to the root of a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe groove weld that was originally performed using the GTAW-machine process with a consumable insert if the defect removal results in a repair cavity with an open root? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4883 |
| IX-07-07E |
QW-404.22, Use of Consumable Inserts |
QW-404.22 |
2/12/2009 |
QW-356 lists the essential variables for Welder Performance Qualification for manual GTAW. QW-404.22, the use of consumable inserts, is an essential variable for Welder Performance Qualification within QW-356.
An individual performs the following two qualification tests:
(a) groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with a consumable insert
(b) groove weld using the GTAW-manual process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with an open root
Each qualification test is performed independently and welded full thickness by the process used to make the root weld. |
Is this individual qualified to weld a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe groove weld by making the root weld with the GTAW-machine process with a consumable insert and then completing the weld using the GTAW-manual process? |
Yes.
NOTE: This interpretation originally appeared in Volume 59. The word "machine" in paragraph (b) of "Background" has been corrected by errata to read "manual." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4884 |
| IX-07-07E |
QW-404.22, Use of Consumable Inserts |
QW-404.22 |
2/12/2009 |
QW-356 lists the essential variables for Welder Performance Qualification for manual GTAW. QW-404.22, the use of consumable inserts, is an essential variable for Welder Performance Qualification within QW-356.
An individual performs the following two qualification tests:
(a) groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with a consumable insert
(b) groove weld using the GTAW-manual process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with an open root
Each qualification test is performed independently and welded full thickness by the process used to make the root weld. |
Is this individual qualified to make non-through-wall weld repairs using the GTAW -manual process to a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe groove weld that was originally performed using the GTAW machine process with a consumable insert? |
Yes.
NOTE: This interpretation originally appeared in Volume 59. The word "machine" in paragraph (b) of "Background" has been corrected by errata to read "manual." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4884 |
| IX-07-07E |
QW-404.22, Use of Consumable Inserts |
QW-404.22 |
2/12/2009 |
QW-356 lists the essential variables for Welder Performance Qualification for manual GTAW. QW-404.22, the use of consumable inserts, is an essential variable for Welder Performance Qualification within QW-356.
An individual performs the following two qualification tests:
(a) groove weld using the GTAW-machine process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with a consumable insert
(b) groove weld using the GTAW-manual process on a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe coupon with an open root
Each qualification test is performed independently and welded full thickness by the process used to make the root weld. |
Is this individual qualified to make through-wall repairs using the GTAW-manual process to the root of a NPS 6 (DN 150) Schedule 40 pipe groove weld that was originally performed using the GTAW-machine process with a consumable insert if the defect removal results in a repair cavity with an open root? |
Yes.
NOTE: This interpretation originally appeared in Volume 59. The word "machine" in paragraph (b) of "Background" has been corrected by errata to read "manual." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4884 |
| IX-07-08 |
QW-200.2(c), Changes to PQR (2007 Edition) |
QW-200.2(c) |
2/12/2008 |
|
Can additional tests and data that are not required by Section IX (i.e., hardness ferrite, corrosion, etc.) be added to a PQR at a later date when the testing was not performed as part of the original PQR, but followed the conditions of the original qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4885 |
| IX-07-08 |
QW-200.2(c), Changes to PQR (2007 Edition) |
QW-200.2(c) |
2/12/2008 |
|
If the tests and data noted in Question (1) are added to the PQR, would recertification, including date, be required? |
Yes. All changes to a PQR require recertification (including date) by the manufacturer or
contractor per QW-200.2(c). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4885 |
| IX-07-09 |
QW-401.3 and QW-403.6, Thickness Range Qualified for Impact Testing (2007 Edition) |
QW-401.3; QW-403.6 |
5/1/2008 |
A welding procedure qualification was performed on a 1-in. (25-mm) thick test coupon. Tension and bend tests were performed on the 1-in. (25-mm) plate. A second welding procedure qualification was performed on a 0.24-in. (6-mm) plate and only impact testing was performed. All of the essential and supplementary essential variables remained the same except for the coupon thickness. |
May the above PQRs be used to support a WPS for material requiring notch toughness with a qualified thickness range of 0.1875 in. (5 mm) to 2 in. (50 mm)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4886 |
| IX-07-12 |
Table QW-466.1 |
QW-466.1 |
12/3/2008 |
|
In Table QW-466.1, when the material P-No. is assigned as "All Others" and the material specification of the ASME Code Section II does not have any requirements for reporting elongation, is the manufacturer limited to performing a base metal tension test to determine the proper test jig dimensions A, B, C, and D of Table QW-466.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4887 |
| IX-07-13 |
Forms QW-483 and QW-484 |
QW-483; QW-484 |
12/3/2008 |
|
May the manufacturer or contractor subcontract the certification of procedure or performance qualification records? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4888 |
| IX-07-13 |
Forms QW-483 and QW-484 |
QW-483; QW-484 |
12/3/2008 |
|
Does Section IX specify the qualifications for the individuals who certify procedure or performance qualification records? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4888 |
| IX-07-14 |
QW/QB-422 |
|
6/4/2009 |
|
Does the assignment of P-No. 8, Group No. 3 to SA-479, Type XM-19, UNS S20910 include all three of the heat treatment conditions (annealed, hot-rolled, and strain-hardened) specified by SA-479? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4889 |
| IX-10-01 |
QW-302.1 and QW-302.2 - Article III |
QW-302.1; QW-302.2 |
8/18/2009 |
|
If radiographic examination per QW-302.2 is done for qualification of two welders on a single pipe coupon welded in the 6G position, must each welder complete the entire circumference of the pipe coupon? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4890 |
| IX-10-01 |
QW-302.1 and QW-302.2 - Article III |
QW-302.1; QW-302.2 |
8/18/2009 |
|
If mechanical testing per QW -302.1 is done for qualification of two welders on a single pipe coupon welded in the 6G position, must each welder complete the entire circumference of the pipe coupon in order to remove the required bend specimens in accordance with QW-463.2(d) or QW-463.2(e)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4890 |
| IX-10-02 |
QW-300.2(b) |
QW-300.2(b) |
8/18/2009 |
|
Is the manufacturer or contractor required to provide full supervision during the performance qualification testing, so that issues such as the essential variables and inspections during the test can be verified and satisfied for each welder or welding operator qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4891 |
| IX-10-03 |
QW-304 and QW-355 - FCAW |
QW-304; QW-355 |
8/18/2009 |
|
May radiographic examination meeting the requirements of QW-304 be used to qualify a welder using the flux-cored arc welding (FCAW) process, provided the transfer mode is not the short circuiting mode? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4892 |
| IX-10-03 |
QW-304 and QW-355 - FCAW |
QW-304; QW-355 |
8/18/2009 |
|
When qualifying a welder in accordance with the essential variables listed in QW-355 for the gas metal-arc welding (GMAW) process and the requirements of QW-304 are met, is the welder also qualified for the flux-cored arc welding (FCAW) process if the essential variables are unchanged? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4892 |
| IX-10-04 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1 |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
11/12/2009 |
A later edition/addenda of Section IX assigns a P-number different from that assigned by the edition/addenda of Section IX that was in effect at the time of qualification. |
Is it required that the WPS be revised or a new WPS be written to identify the new P-number when the applicable code edition/addenda lists the material under the new P-number? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4893 |
| IX-10-04 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1 |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
11/12/2009 |
A later edition/addenda of Section IX assigns a P-number different from that assigned by the edition/addenda of Section IX that was in effect at the time of qualification. |
Is it required that the WPS be revised or a new WPS be written to identify the new P-number when the applicable code edition/addenda lists the material under the old P-number? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4893 |
| IX-10-04 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1 |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
11/12/2009 |
A later edition/addenda of Section IX assigns a P-number different from that assigned by the edition/addenda of Section IX that was in effect at the time of qualification. |
Is it required that a supporting PQR be amended to show the new P-number assignment? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4893 |
| IX-10-04 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1 |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
11/12/2009 |
A later edition/addenda of Section IX assigns a P-number different from that assigned by the edition/addenda of Section IX that was in effect at the time of qualification. |
May a supporting PQR be amended to show the new P-number assignment? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4893 |
| IX-10-04 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1 |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
11/12/2009 |
A later edition/addenda of Section IX assigns a P-number different from that assigned by the edition/addenda of Section IX that was in effect at the time of qualification. |
May a supporting PQR be amended to show both the old and the new P-number assignments? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4893 |
| IX-10-04 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1 |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
11/12/2009 |
A later edition/addenda of Section IX assigns an F-number different from that assigned by the edition/addenda of Section IX that was in effect at the time of qualification. |
Is it required that the WPS or PQR be amended to reflect the new filler metal F-No. assignment? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4893 |
| IX-10-04 |
QW-100.3 and QW-420.1 |
QW-100.3; QW-420.1 |
11/12/2009 |
A later edition/addenda of Section IX assigns an F-number different from that assigned by the edition/addenda of Section IX that was in effect at the time of qualification. |
May the WPS or PQR be amended to reflect the new filler metal F-No. assignment? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4893 |
| IX-10-05 |
QW-181.2.1 and QW-452.5 |
QW-181.2.1; QW-452.5 |
12/2/2009 |
A fillet weld performance qualification test is performed using a production assembly mockup. |
Must a welder or a welding operator using a production mockup assembly be qualified for a change in fillet size, base material thickness, or configuration of the mockup? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4894 |
| IX-10-06 |
QW-452.5 |
QW-452.5 |
12/11/2009 |
|
Is it the intent of QW-452.5 to permit welder or welding operator fillet weld performance qualification testing to be conducted using test coupon thicknesses greater than 3/8in. thick? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4895 |
| IX-10-07 |
QW-250 |
QW-250 |
12/31/2009 |
|
Is it the intent of the Code that Variables QW-403.6, QW-406.3, QW-409.l, QW-410.9, and QW-410.10 apply when specified in QW-250 for P-No. 10H materials? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4896 |
| IX-10-07 |
QW-250 |
QW-250 |
12/31/2009 |
|
Is it the intent of the Code that Variable QW-407.4 applies when specified in QW-250 for P-No. 10H materials? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4896 |
| IX-10-08 |
QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
2/17/2010 |
|
May a procedure qualification subject to the variable QW-407.2, for P-No. 8 material with solution annealing PWHT at 1,940°F (1 060°C) for 1 hr and impact tested, support a WPS for production with both solution annealing at 1,940°F (1 060°C) and stabilization heat treatment at 1,742°F (950°C) for 2 hr? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4897 |
| IX-10-09 |
QB-451.3 and QB-451.5, Workmanship Coupons |
QB-451.3; QB-451.5 |
2/17/2010 |
|
For components such as valve bodies and seats, in which materials of suitable geometry and thickness are not normally available to make up lap joint test coupons as required by QB-451.3, is it the intent of the Committee that the materials to be brazed shall be qualified using any convenient thickness and geometry suitable for performing the tension and section tests required by QB-451.3, and that a greater range of base metal thickness may be qualified using workmanship test coupons in accordance with QB-451.5? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4898 |
| IX-10-10 |
QW-163 and QW-466.1, Guided Bend Test Specimen Dimensions |
QW-163; QW-466.1 |
2/17/2010 |
A welding procedure was qualified for welding on thick base metals. Due to the thickness of the test coupon required, the width of the face of the weld is 5 in. Per QW-163, the weld and heat-affected zone (HAZ) shall be completely within the bent portion of the bend specimen. For a material with 20% or greater elongation, the standard 3⁄8 in. thick bend specimen provides a bent portion that is 3.53 in. long on the O.D. of the specimen. |
Does it meet the requirements of ASME Section IX, if the bend radius and bend test specimen thickness are increased, such that 20% outer fiber elongation is achieved, and the O.D. of the specimen contains the entire width of the weld and HAZ? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4899 |
| IX-10-10 |
QW-163 and QW-466.1, Guided Bend Test Specimen Dimensions |
QW-163; QW-466.1 |
2/17/2010 |
A welding procedure was qualified for welding on thick base metals. Due to the thickness of the test coupon required, the width of the face of the weld is 5 in. Per QW-163, the weld and heat-affected zone (HAZ) shall be completely within the bent portion of the bend specimen. For a material with 20% or greater elongation, the standard 3⁄8 in. thick bend specimen provides a bent portion that is 3.53 in. long on the O.D. of the specimen. |
Does it meet the requirements of ASME Section IX, if a set of multiple specimens having the standard 3⁄8 in. thickness and representing the entire width of the weld and both HAZs are removed and tested to meet the requirements for testing the entire width of the weld? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4899 |
| IX-10-10 |
QW-163 and QW-466.1, Guided Bend Test Specimen Dimensions |
QW-163; QW-466.1 |
2/17/2010 |
A welding procedure was qualified for welding on thick base metals. Due to the thickness of the test coupon required, the width of the face of the weld is 5 in. Per QW-163, the weld and heat-affected zone (HAZ) shall be completely within the bent portion of the bend specimen. For a material with 20% or greater elongation, the standard 3⁄8 in. thick bend specimen provides a bent portion that is 3.53 in. long on the O.D. of the specimen. |
Assuming that both of the base metals in the test coupon are of the same P-No., does it meet the requirements of ASME Section IX, to use standard 3⁄8 in. thick bend specimens representing at least one HAZ and as much weld metal as possible, when performing the required bend test? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4899 |
| IX-10-13 |
QW-404.5(b), Change in Trade Designation of Filler Metal |
QW-404.5(b) |
6/25/2010 |
A PQR using GTAW process was qualified using filler metal classified in accordance with ASME Section II Part C, SFA 5.28, ER80S-G classification, with chemistry meeting A-No. 2. A footnote was used in the PQR to document the filler metal trade name used in the qualification. |
A WPS supported by the above PQR using the same filler metal classification ER80S-G and A-No. 2, but with a different trade name was specified. When notch toughness (QW-404.12) does not apply, does a change in the filler trade name specified on the WPS require requalification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4900 |
| IX-10-14 |
QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
6/25/2010 |
A production weld joint was made using a qualified welding procedure, welding P3 to P8 using an unassigned filler metal. In order to perform a repair to this joint, a second welding procedure was qualified using an assigned filler metal. |
If the second procedure is qualified by welding P3 to P8, is this procedure qualified to repair the production weld between the P3 and P8 material made with an unassigned filler metal? |
Yes. However, see QW-431. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4901 |
| IX-10-14 |
QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
6/25/2010 |
A production weld joint was made using a qualified welding procedure, welding P3 to P8 using an unassigned filler metal. In order to perform a repair to this joint, a second welding procedure was qualified using an assigned filler metal. |
For the same situation as Question (1), is this procedure qualified to repair the production weld between the P3 and P8 material if the repair is entirely within the previously deposited weld metal? |
Yes. However, see QW-431. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4901 |
| IX-10-14 |
QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
6/25/2010 |
A production weld joint was made using a qualified welding procedure, welding P3 to P8 using an unassigned filler metal. In order to perform a repair to this joint, a second welding procedure was qualified using an assigned filler metal. |
If the second procedure is made by welding P-number material that nominally matches the composition of the unassigned filler metal similar to QW-293.4, is the second procedure qualified to make a repair to the production weld between the P3 and P8 material provided that the repair is entirely within the previously deposited weld metal? |
Yes. However, see QW-431. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4901 |
| IX-10-15 |
QW-202.3, Weld Repair and Buildup |
QW-202.3 |
8/26/2010 |
|
May a WPS be used to perform a weld repair per QW-202.3 on a groove weld previously welded using the same WPS, without revising the WPS to include the groove design of the repair cavity? |
Yes. Also see Interpretation IX-79-72. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4902 |
| IX-10-16 |
QW-404.24 and QW-404.27, Supplemental Filler Metal |
QW-404.24; QW-404.27 |
8/26/2010 |
QW-404.24 and QW-404.27 are essential variables for the SAW process. A procedure qualification test was conducted using the SAW process without the use of supplemental filler metal. |
Is it required that the PQR indicate that supplemental filler metal was not used and must the WPS specify it is not to be used? |
Yes. However, Section IX does not specify the manner in which this is documented on the PQR or specified on the WPS. The method of recording information on the PQR and WPS may be by statement, sketch, or other means as long as the essential variables are addressed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4903 |
| IX-10-17 |
QW-322.1(a) |
QW-322.1(a) |
8/26/2010 |
A welder successfully completes a performance qualification test. During the next 6 mo, the welder used the welding process multiple times during the first 4 mo, but did not use the welding process in the fifth or sixth month. |
When maintaining the welder's qualification, is the welder continuity based on the last date the welder used the welding process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4904 |
| IX-10-18 |
QW-256.1, Joining of Clad Materials |
QW-256.1 |
11/17/2010 |
A composite (clad) material having a carbon steel base and alloy 825 cladding is to be joined by welding. The alloy 825 cladding is not included in the design calculations. The contractor has a PQR for joining the base metal whose qualified ranges are appropriate for welding conditions. The contractor also has a PQR for overlaying carbon steel with alloy 625 filler metal using GTAW, whose qualified ranges of essential special process variables for corrosion-resistant overlay welding are applicable to the welding conditions. |
When joining the clad layer of a composite (clad) material using GTAW where the clad thickness is not considered in the design calculations, are the essential special process variables or QW-256.1 applicable to the clad portion of the weld? |
Yes. See QW-217 and QW-251.4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4905 |
| IX-10-18 |
QW-256.1, Joining of Clad Materials |
QW-256.1 |
11/17/2010 |
A composite (clad) material having a carbon steel base and alloy 825 cladding is to be joined by welding. The alloy 825 cladding is not included in the design calculations. The contractor has a PQR for joining the base metal whose qualified ranges are appropriate for welding conditions. The contractor also has a PQR for overlaying carbon steel with alloy 625 filler metal using GTAW, whose qualified ranges of essential special process variables for corrosion-resistant overlay welding are applicable to the welding conditions. |
When completing the clad portion of a weld using the GTAW process, is a WPS qualified to deposit corrosion-resistant weld metal using alloy 625 (UNS N06625) filler metal, also qualified for depositing a corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay using alloy 825 (UNS N08065) filler metal, when the carbon steel base metal has the same P-No. as the base metal qualified by the WPS? |
No. See QW-256.1 and QW-404.37. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4905 |
| IX-10-19 |
QW-214, Procedure Qualification, Corrosion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-214 |
11/17/2010 |
A corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay was applied to P-No. 3 base metal with WPS qualified for the SAW process using an unassigned strip filler metal, with resulting deposit chemistry nominally matching F-No. 43 filler metal. It is later determined a greater thickness of corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay or a repair to the overlay is needed. An alternate WPS is proposed for depositing the weld metal overlay to increase the overlay thickness or perform the repairs. The alternate WPS was qualified using a different welding process, applying SFA-5.11 ENiCrFe-7 filler metal to produce a corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay with a deposit chemistry nominally matching F-No. 43 on P-No. 3 base metals. |
Is any WPS qualified for depositing a corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay with a known chemistry, also qualified for applying additional layers or repairs to an existing corrosion-resistant overlay surface having a nominally matching chemistry? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4906 |
| IX-10-20 |
QW-405.3 |
QW-405.3 |
11/18/2010 |
|
When a welder qualifies with the vertical up progression on weld coupons in the 3G, 5G, or 6G test positions, is that welder qualified to weld with the vertical down progression when QW-405.3 is a performance qualification essential variable? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4907 |
| IX-10-21 |
QW-402 and QW-404 Through QW-410 |
QW-402; QW-404; QW-410 |
3/11/2011 |
|
When impacts are waived by a book section for the base metal (HAZ notch toughness is not required), but are required for the weld metal, do the supplementary essential variables of QW-402 and QW-404 through QW-410 apply per the applicable tables QW-252 through QW-265? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4908 |
| IX-10-22 |
QW-200.2, Use of Preliminary WPS |
QW-200.2 |
3/14/2011 |
|
Does ASME Section IX require a preliminary WPS be used during procedure qualification testing, or that a WPS number be recorded on the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4909 |
| IX-13-05 |
QW-193, Macro Examination for the Mockup Test of Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint |
QW-193 |
11/14/2012 |
|
When performing a tube-to-tubesheet test in accordance with QW-193, is it required to section a total of 10 tubes and perform a macroetch of the 40 surfaces exposed by sectioning? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4910 |
| IX-13-08 |
QW-361.2 |
QW-361.2 |
12/6/2012 |
|
A welding operator (machine) successfully qualifies in accordance with QW-300, using an open root, single-welded, Vee-groove joint configuration, without backing and without a consumable insert. Is the welding operator (machine) qualified to perform machine welding with a consumable insert? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4911 |
| IX-13-09 |
QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thickness |
QW-202.4 |
12/6/2012 |
|
Does QW-202.4 allow a WPS qualified on groove weld, with specified P-No. 1 base metal thickness range of 1/2 in. (13 mm) through 1 in. (25 mm), to be used in production to weld a 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick base metal to a 3/8 in. (10 mm) thick base metal? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4912 |
| IX-10-23 |
QW-433 and QW-452.1(b) |
QW-433; QW-452.1(b) |
3/14/2011 |
A welder tests on an NPS 6 Sch. 80 (0.432 in. wall) coupon, depositing 0.100 in. of E6010 and the balance of 0.332 in. using E7018. |
Using E6010, is the welder qualified to deposit 0.864 in. maximum of weld metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4913 |
| IX-10-23 |
QW-433 and QW-452.1(b) |
QW-433; QW-452.1(b) |
3/14/2011 |
A welder tests on an NPS 6 Sch. 80 (0.432 in. wall) coupon, depositing 0.100 in. of E6010 and the balance of 0.332 in. using E7018. |
Using E7018, is the welder qualified to deposit 0.664 in. maximum of weld metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4913 |
| IX-10-23 |
QW-433 and QW-452.1(b) |
QW-433; QW-452.1(b) |
3/14/2011 |
A welder tests on an NPS 6 Sch. 80 (0.432 in. wall) coupon, depositing 0.100 in. of E6010 and the balance of 0.332 in. using E7018. |
Is the welder qualified to deposit 0.864 in. of weld metal using E6010 plus 0.664 in. of E7018 weld metal deposit thickness for a total of 1.528 in. in the same groove? |
No. See QW-452.1(b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4913 |
| IX-10-24 |
QW-409.2, Combination of Processes |
QW-409.2 |
3/14/2011 |
A welder was tested on an SA-516 Gr. 70 plate, using the GMA W process. Short arc mode was used for depositing the root, and spray arc mode was used for depositing the balance of the weld in a single coupon. |
Is it permissible, according to ASME Section IX, QW-409.2, to use two modes of metal transfer in a single test coupon? |
Yes; the deposit thickness for each transfer mode shall be recorded as required by QW-306. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4914 |
| IX-10-25 |
QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
5/23/2011 |
|
May an organization with more than one ASME Certificate of Authorization, under different names and in different locations, describe in its quality assurance programs the operational control of procedure qualifications and the use of welding procedures properly qualified under one certificate holder, under another certificate holder within the organization, but without separate qualification, as permitted by Section IX, QW-201? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4915 |
| IX-10-26 |
QW-304, Volumetric Examination |
QW-304 |
6/13/2011 |
|
Does Section IX require a welder to qualify for small diameter butt welds by preparing more than one small diameter pipe coupon to provide a minimum circumferential weld length when qualified by volumetric examination under the provisions of QW-304? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4916 |
| IX-10-27 |
QW-452.5 |
QW-452.5 |
8/1/2011 |
|
Is it the intent of QW-452.5 to permit welder or welding operator fillet weld performance qualification testing to be conducted using test coupon thicknesses greater than 3/8 in. thick? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4917 |
| IX-10-28 |
QW-250 |
QW-250 |
8/1/2011 |
|
Is it the intent of the Code that Variables QW-403.6, QW-406.3, QW-409.1, QW_410.9, and QW-410.10 apply when specified in QW-250 for P-No. 10H materials? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4918 |
| IX-10-28 |
QW-250 |
QW-250 |
8/1/2011 |
|
Is it the intent of the Code that Variable QW-407.4 apply when specified in QW-250 for P-No. 10H materials? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4918 |
| IX-10-29 |
QW-300.3, Simultaneous Performance Qualifications |
QW-300.3 |
8/1/2011 |
|
Is it the intent of Section IX, QW-300.3 to permit an AWS standard welding procedure specification adopted by a contractor to be used in lieu of a PQR to support the range of variables for a single WPS proposed for use in conducting simultaneous welder performance qualification testing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4919 |
| IX-10-30 |
QW-420, ASTM Materials' P_Number Assignment |
QW-420 |
8/1/2011 |
|
Is it the intent that material produced under an ASTM specification shall be considered to have the same P-Number or P-Number plus Group Number as that of the P-Number or P-Number plus Group Number assigned to the same grade or type material in the corresponding ASME specification (e.g., SA-240 Type 304 is assigned P-No. 8, Group No. 1; therefore, A 240 Type 304 is considered P-No. 8, Group No. 1)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4920 |
| IX-10-31 |
QW-404.5, A-Number |
QW-404.5 |
8/25/2011 |
A procedure qualification test coupon was prepared and tested, which included a chemical analysis of the weld metal. The chemical analysis results were as follows: C: 0.08%, Cr: 0.044%, Mo: 0.14%, Ni: 1.48%, Mn: 1.45%, Si: 0.19%. |
Does this chemistry meet an A-1 classification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4921 |
| IX-10-31 |
QW-404.5, A-Number |
QW-404.5 |
8/25/2011 |
A procedure qualification test coupon was prepared and tested, which included a chemical analysis of the weld metal. The chemical analysis results were as follows: C: 0.08%, Cr: 0.044%, Mo: 0.14%, Ni: 1.48%, Mn: 1.45%, Si: 0.19%. |
Does this chemistry meet an A-10 classification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4921 |
| IX-10-32 |
QW-182, Fracture Tests |
QW-182 |
8/25/2011 |
|
Is it required by QW-182 that the sum of all rounded indications (regardless of diameter) be considered in addition to the sum of the lengths of the inclusions in determining the 3/8 in. (10 mm) maximum allowed for acceptance? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4922 |
| IX-10-32 |
QW-182, Fracture Tests |
QW-182 |
8/25/2011 |
|
Is it permissible to apply the porosity size limitation of 1/32 in. or greater as specified in QW-191.1.2.2 (b)(3) to a 1/2 in. (12 mm) welded coupon to the fracture test acceptance criteria of QW-182? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4922 |
| IX-10-33 |
QW-404.5, A-Number Essential Variable for GMAW Weld Metal |
QW-404.5 |
11/14/2011 |
|
According to QW-404.5, may the A-Number of GMAW weld metal be established from the chemical analysis of a weld deposit prepared according to the filler metal specification when the shielding gas used for the chemical analysis was different from that used in the procedure qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4923 |
| IX-10-33 |
QW-404.5, A-Number Essential Variable for GMAW Weld Metal |
QW-404.5 |
11/14/2011 |
|
According to QW-404.5, may the A-Number of GMAW weld metal be established from the chemical analysis of a weld deposit prepared according to the filler metal specification provided the shielding gas used for the chemical analysis was the same as that used in the procedure qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4923 |
| IX-10-33 |
QW-404.5, A-Number Essential Variable for GMAW Weld Metal |
QW-404.5 |
11/14/2011 |
|
Are the GMAW rules in QW-404.5 for establishing A-Numbers also applicable for FCAW? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4923 |
| IX-10-35 |
QW-452.1(b) |
QW-452.1(b) |
12/8/2011 |
|
Regarding QW-452.1(b) for performance qualification, is "Maximum to be welded" equivalent to "Unlimited"? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4924 |
| IX-10-36 |
QW-462.4(a) and (b), Fillet Weld Test |
QW-462.4(a) |
2/16/2012 |
|
May a WPS qualified with a fillet weld using a plate tee-joint configuration as shown in QW-462.4(a) be used to join a plate to a pipe with fillet welds made parallel to the axis of the pipe for nonpressure-retaining applications? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4925 |
| IX-10-36 |
QW-462.4(a) and (b), Fillet Weld Test |
QW-462.4(a) |
2/16/2012 |
|
May a welder qualified with a fillet weld using a plate tee-joint configuration as shown in QW-462.4(b) be used to weld a plate to a pipe with fillet welds made parallel to the axis of the pipe? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4925 |
| IX-10-37 |
QW-151.3, Tensile Tests - Turned Specimens |
QW-151.3 |
2/16/2012 |
|
For a 1-in. (25-mm) deep groove weld deposited in a 2-in. (50-mm) thick plate test coupon, may a single-turned 0.505-tensile specimen conforming to QW-462.1(d) be used for each tension test required by QW-451? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4926 |
| IX-10-38 |
QW-404.23, Filler Metal Product Form |
QW-404.23 |
2/16/2012 |
|
May stranded filler metal be considered the same as bare (solid or metal cored) filler metal in QW-404.23? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4927 |
| IX-10-39 |
QW-424.1, Base Metal Used for Procedure Qualification |
QW-424.1 |
2/16/2012 |
|
Does a PQR recording a P-No. 5B base metal welded to itself support a WPS for welding P-No. 5B metal to any metal assigned P-No. 4, 3, or 1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4928 |
| IX-13-01 |
QW-403.6 |
QW-403.6 |
7/2/2012 |
|
Does QW-403.6 apply when the HAZ is not subject to impact testing such as when qualifying a P-8 material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4929 |
| IX-13-02 |
QW-288, Tube-to-Tubesheet Welder Qualification |
QW-288 |
8/23/2012 |
|
When a demonstration mock-up for tube-to-tubesheet welder or welding operator qualification is required, are all of the variables specified in QW-288 required to be followed during the performance qualification test? |
Yes, see QW-193.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4930 |
| IX-10-34 |
QW-200.4(b) |
QW-200.4(b) |
12/8/2011 |
PQR A is welded with SMAW to join 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick plates with 5/8 in. (16 mm) of SMAW deposit. PQR B is welded with GTAW and SAMW to join 5/16 in. (8 mm) thick plates with 1/8 in. (3 mm) of GTAW and 3/16 in. (5 mm) of SMAW deposit. PQR C is welded with GTAW to join 3/16 in. (5 mm) thick plates with 3/16 in. (5 mm) of GTAW deposit. |
Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) to 1 1/4 in. (32 mm) when impact testing is not required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4931 |
| IX-10-34 |
QW-200.4(b) |
QW-200.4(b) |
12/8/2011 |
|
Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) to 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) when impact testing is not required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4931 |
| IX-10-34 |
QW-200.4(b) |
QW-200.4(b) |
12/8/2011 |
|
Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a maximum deposit weld metal thickness range of 1/4 in. (6 mm) for the GTAW process and 1 1/4 in. (32 mm) for the SMAW process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4931 |
| IX-10-34 |
QW-200.4(b) |
QW-200.4(b) |
12/8/2011 |
|
Do PQRs A and C qualify the combination WPS for a maximum deposit weld metal thickness range of 3/8 in. (10 mm) for the GTAW process and 1 1/4 in. (32 mm) for the SMAW process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4931 |
| IX-10-34 |
QW-200.4(b) |
QW-200.4(b) |
12/8/2011 |
|
Do PQRs A and C qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) to 1 1/4 in. (32 mm) when impact testing is not required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4931 |
| IX-10-34 |
QW-200.4(b) |
QW-200.4(b) |
12/8/2011 |
|
Do PQRs A and C qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) to 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) when impact testing is not required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4931 |
| IX-10-34 |
QW-200.4(b) |
QW-200.4(b) |
12/8/2011 |
|
Do the provisions in QW-200.4(b) affect the responses to the above questions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4931 |
| IX-13-06 |
QW-103.2, Records |
QW-103.2 |
12/6/2012 |
In the 2006 Addenda to Section IX, it became mandatory to certify qualification records "by signature or other means as described in the manufacturer's or contractor's Quality Control System." |
Prior to the 2006 Addenda, is a typed signature or means other than a written signature on a procedure qualification or performance qualification record considered certified as required in QW/QB-103.2? |
Prior to the 2006 Addenda, the method of certification for procedure and performance qualification records was not addressed by Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4932 |
| IX-13-03 |
QW-200.1(b) |
QW-200.1(b) |
9/13/2012 |
QW-200.1(b) says: "The completed WPS shall describe all of the essential, nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essential variables for each welding process used in the WPS." |
If a WPS is written and qualified for welding P-No.1 material to itself, is it necessary to specifically mention on the WPS or on the PQR anything regarding QW-410.64, which addresses the use of thermal processes for cutting or backgouging when welding on P-No.11A and P-No.11B materials? |
No. The fact that the WPS and PQR are for welding on P-No.1 materials precludes the need to specifically describe the use of thermal cutting or backgouging for P-No.11A or P-No. 11B materials on either the WPS or the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4933 |
| IX-13-03 |
QW-200.1(b) |
QW-200.1(b) |
9/13/2012 |
QW-200.1(b) says: "The completed WPS shall describe all of the essential, nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essential variables for each welding process used in the WPS." |
If a WPS specifies the use of ER70S-6 filler metal, is it necessary to specifically mention in the WPS anything regarding QW-404.23, which addresses filler metal product form by specifying that the filler metal has to be solid? |
No. The use of active or neutral fluxes only needs to be specified on the WPS and documented on the PQR when the base metal is P-No.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4933 |
| IX-13-03 |
QW-200.1(b) |
QW-200.1(b) |
9/13/2012 |
QW-200.1(b) says: "The completed WPS shall describe all of the essential, nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essential variables for each welding process used in the WPS." |
If a WPS is written and qualified for welding P-No. 5A material to itself, is it necessary to specifically mention on a WPS or on the PQRs for submerged arc welding anything regarding QW-404.34 that addresses, when welding on P-No.l materials, the use of active or neutral flux? |
No. The use of active or neutral fluxes only needs to be specified on the WPS and documented on the PQR when the base metal is P-No.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4933 |
| IX-13-07 |
QW-407.1(b) |
QW-407.1(b) |
12/6/2012 |
(a) P-No. 8 plate is welded, heated to 780°C (1,436°F), then formed, followed by a solution heat treatment at 1 060°C (1,940°F).
(b) P-No. 8 plate is welded, then cold formed, followed by a solution heat treatment at 1 060°C (1,940°F). |
Is WPS supported by a PQR with 1 060°C (1,940°F) solution heat treatment qualified to weld P-No. 8 base material as described in (a) and (b) of the Background? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4934 |
| IX-13-10 |
QW-201 |
QW-201 |
3/21/2013 |
|
Company A owns Companies B and C. May Company B use WPSs qualified by Company C in accordance with the requirements of Section IX without requalification, provided Company C describes the process that they follow in their Quality Control System/Quality Assurance Program for the operational control of procedure qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4935 |
| IX-13-11 |
QW-409.1 and QW-409.8, Reference to Nonmandatory Appendix H |
QW-409.1; QW-409.8 |
3/25/2013 |
QW-409.1 and QW-409.8 variables reference Nonmandatory Appendix H as a guideline for understanding of Waveform Controlled Welding when qualifying personnel and procedures. |
Does Nonmandatory Appendix H become an essential, nonessential, or supplementary essential variable when it is referenced within the text of a variable? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4936 |
| IX-13-11 |
QW-409.1 and QW-409.8, Reference to Nonmandatory Appendix H |
QW-409.1; QW-409.8 |
3/25/2013 |
QW-409.1 and QW-409.8 variables reference Nonmandatory Appendix H as a guideline for understanding of Waveform Controlled Welding when qualifying personnel and procedures. |
Does either QW-409.1 or QW-409.8 require that power or energy shall be specified in the WPS when using a waveform controlled power source? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4936 |
| IX-13-12 |
QW-410.9 |
QW-410.9 |
6/10/2013 |
Impact testing of welding procedure qualifications is required by the Construction Code and QW-410.9 applies to the welding process used as a supplementary essential variable. QW-410.9 requires requalification for a change from multipass per side to single pass per side. Per QW/QB-492 Definitions, a pass can result in a weld bead or a layer. |
Does QW-410.9 regard multiple layer welds as multipass welds, so that a change from multiple layers per side to a single layer per side requires a requalification? |
Yes, when the single layer is made in a single pass. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4937 |
| IX-13-12 |
QW-410.9 |
QW-410.9 |
6/10/2013 |
Impact testing of welding procedure qualifications is required by the Construction Code and QW-410.9 applies to the welding process used as a supplementary essential variable. QW-410.9 requires requalification for a change from multipass per side to single pass per side. Per QW/QB-492 Definitions, a pass can result in a weld bead or a layer. |
Does QW-410.9 regard multiple beads in a single layer (as shown in beads 3, 4, 5, and 6 of Figure QW/QB-492.1) as “multipass”? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4937 |
| IX-13-12 |
QW-410.9 |
QW-410.9 |
6/10/2013 |
Impact testing of welding procedure qualifications is required by the Construction Code and QW-410.9 applies to the welding process used as a supplementary essential variable. QW-410.9 requires requalification for a change from multipass per side to single pass per side. Per QW/QB-492 Definitions, a pass can result in a weld bead or a layer. |
A Welding Procedure Specification is qualified with multiple layers per side. Can this WPS be used to deposit multiple beads in a single layer per side, within the limits of all other essential and supplementary essential variables? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4937 |
| IX-13-14 |
QW-360, Welding Operator Performance Qualifications |
QW-360 |
6/10/2013 |
|
While base metal P-Number is an essential variable for welder qualifications, QW-360 does not specify base metal P-Number as an essential variable for welding operator qualification. Is it required that welding operators be qualified separately for welding Code Case base metals when the Code Case specifies that “Separate welding procedure and performance qualifications shall be conducted for the material in accordance with Section IX”? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4938 |
| IX-13-15 |
QW-322, Expiration and Renewal Qualification |
QW-322 |
6/10/2013 |
A welder is qualified for a shop that fabricates Section VIII, Division 1 vessels as well as non-Code equipment. A welder maintains his welding process qualification for Code welds by making non-Code welds. |
May a welder maintain his welding process qualification by making non-Code welds if the welder has not made a Code weld for a period of 6 mo or more? |
Yes, see IX-83-159. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4939 |
| IX-13-15 |
QW-322, Expiration and Renewal Qualification |
QW-322 |
6/10/2013 |
A welder is qualified for a shop that fabricates Section VIII, Division 1 vessels as well as non-Code equipment. A welder maintains his welding process qualification for Code welds by making non-Code welds. |
According to QW-322.1(a)(1), can a welder receive a 6-mo qualification extension more than once? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4939 |
| IX-13-16 |
QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4 |
6/10/2013 |
|
When employing a WPS to join flat plates of dissimilar thickness in a groove-weld tee joint, is it a requirement of QW-202.4 that both the thicker and thinner members must be qualified within the range permitted by QW-451 unless the alternative provided in QW-202.4 is used? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4940 |
| IX-77-01 |
Section IX, QW-462.1 |
QW-462.1 |
1/4/1977 |
|
Is it permissible to machine a tension sample below the original surface of the base metal in order to obtain parallel faces over the reduced section? |
No definite limits are set with respect to metal that may be machined off the original thickness. The test plate should be of substantially the same thickness as originally welded, but if a little of the thickness is machined off to obtain parallel rectangular surfaces, the specimen may be accepted. If your procedure wishes to set definite limits, you may do so. Section IX is a minimum safety requirement. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4941 |
| IX-77-02 |
Section IX, QW-303.6 |
QW-303.6 |
1/7/1977 |
|
Will welder qualification in the 3G and 4G positions for single groove welds with backing on plate also cover welder qualification for the 2G, 1F, 2F, 3F, and 4F positions per the thickness limits of QW-452? |
(1) Qualification in 3G and 4G plate with backing does not qualify a 2G position.
(2) Qualification in the 3G and 4G positions does qualify the 1F and 2F positions.
(3) Qualification in 3G also qualifies for 3F, within the limits of applicable essential variables.
(4) Qualification in the 4G position qualifies for the 4F position within the limits of the applicable essential variables. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4942 |
| IX-77-03 |
Section IX, QW-461.7 |
QW-461.7 |
1/12/1977 |
|
Are fillet welds in the 1F, 2F, and 3F positions qualified by 3G groove welds? |
Revisions to Section IX have been made to clarify what positions are qualified by specific test positions. Table QW-461.7, which was published in the Winter 1976 Addenda to Section IX, summarizes the position limitations for performance qualifications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4943 |
| IX-77-04 |
Section IX, Tack Welder Qualification |
|
1/31/1977 |
|
May a welder be qualified as a tack welder if his tack welds were a part of another welder's qualification test coupon or part of another welding procedure qualification test which met the intent of the Code? |
The Code requires that all welders, (including tack welders), must be qualified per Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4944 |
| IX-77-05 |
Section IX, Use of Base Metals and Filler Metals |
|
2/1/1977 |
|
Is it acceptable to substitute identical base materials for ASME or ASTM specification materials? |
For Code boilers or vessels, base materials must conform to an ASME specification accepted by the particular book section, or to a Code Case permitting a specific material. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4945 |
| IX-77-05 |
Section IX, Use of Base Metals and Filler Metals |
|
2/1/1977 |
|
Is it acceptable to substitute identical filler materials for ASME or AWS specification filler materials? |
For Code boilers or vessels, filler material need not conform to a particular specification. Procedures utilizing such filler material must be qualified per Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4945 |
| IX-77-06 |
Section IX, QW-484 |
QW-484 |
2/10/1977 |
|
Is a welder qualified as of the day he makes his test welds? |
A welder is qualified as of the day he makes his test welds, if he passes the test. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4946 |
| IX-77-07 |
Section IX, QW-180 |
QW-180 |
2/16/1977 |
|
What type of tests are required to qualify a welding procedure and a welder or welding operator for fillet welds only? |
Macro-examination is required for procedure qualification as per QW-181.1, and macro and fracture tests are required for performance qualification, as per QW-181.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4947 |
| IX-77-08 |
Section IX, QW-202.2(2)(a) |
QW-202.2(2)(a) |
2/22/1977 |
|
Is it the intent of QW-202.2(2)(a) that groove weld procedure qualification made in base metal 3 in. or more in thickness qualifies repair welds for any thickness of base metal with no limit on minimum depth of deposited weld metal? |
It is the intent of QW-202.2(2)(a) that groove weld procedure qualification made in base metal 3 in. or more in thickness qualifies repair welds for any thickness of base metal with no limit on minimum depth of deposited weld metal. Maximum limits are fixed per QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4948 |
| IX-77-10 |
Section IX, QW-310.4(d) |
QW-310.4(d) |
3/9/1977 |
|
Does a welder, using a total alloy content F-4 electrode, also qualify to use a higher total alloy F-4 electrode, within the nominal 6% total alloy content, under the provisions of QW-310? |
QW-310.4(d) permits welders, who qualify on carbon steel test plates or pipe, to use all electrodes of the particular F-number qualified and all lower F-number electrodes, up to and including F-4 electrodes, of total alloy content less than or equal to 6%. Therefore, an F-4 electrode may qualify a welder to use another F-4 electrode of higher alloy content, on carbon steel, as long as the total alloy content does not exceed 6%. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4949 |
| IX-77-11 |
Section IX, QW-407.4 |
QW-407.4 |
3/9/1977 |
|
Do the provisions of QW-407.4 apply when heat treatment is performed, although the heat treatment is not mandatory? Also, you asked for the lower critical temperature of P-No. 8 materials. |
QW-407.4 does not apply to P-No. 8 material because it has no lower critical temperature (that is, the temperature at which steel starts its phase transformation on heating which allows hardening upon cooling to occur). QW-407.3 is the variable that applies to P-No. 8 material. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4950 |
| IX-77-12 |
Section IX, Calibration of Welding Machine Meters |
|
3/10/1977 |
|
What are the Code requirements concerning the calibration of meters on welding machines? |
Meters recording volts and amps or any acceptable method of measuring volts and amps (such as measuring burnoff rate), must be employed when QW-409.1 or QW-409.8 is required. QW-409.1 is a supplementary essential variable, and QW-409.8 is a nonessential variable for most welding processes. Because QW-409.8 requires the recording on the WPS of changes in voltage and amperage range, an accurate method of recording such must be employed. When meters are used to record amps and volts, they must be calibrated. Provisions for calibration of equipment, including welding machines, are covered by the quality control system. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4951 |
| IX-77-13 |
Section IX, Interpass Temperature QW-492 |
QW-492 |
3/11/1977 |
|
May interpass temperature be measured either on the base metal adjacent to the weld, or on the deposited weld metal? The method of measurement is specified in the qualified welding procedure. |
Interpass temperature may be measured either in weld groove or adjacent to the weld groove. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4952 |
| IX-77-14 |
Section IX, More Than One Welder on a Single Process Joint |
|
3/31/1977 |
|
May more than one welder perform welding on a joint made by a single process provided each welds only that portion of the thickness for which he is qualified, and provided the procedure is qualified? |
More than one welder may perform welding on a joint made by a single process provided each welds only that portion of the thickness for which he is qualified, and provided the procedure is qualified. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4953 |
| IX-77-15 |
Section IX, Supporting Mill Test Reports and Typicals for Base and Filler Metals Used in a Procedure Qualifying Test |
|
3/29/1977 |
|
Must supporting mill test reports and typicals for base and filler metals used in qualifying procedures for Section III, Class 1, 2, 3, and metal containment weldments be saved? You also asked for committee approval of a specific procedure. |
The mill test reports and typicals for procedures tests need not be saved. QW-201.1 and QW-201.2 of Section IX provide for necessary documentation of welding procedures and tests. Also, procedures and qualifying tests are reviewed by the survey team, authorized inspectors, or jurisdiction authorities, not our office. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4954 |
| IX-77-16 |
Section IX, QW-404.4 |
QW-404.4 |
4/15/1977 |
|
If a welding procedure were tested with a root pass using an E6010 (F3) electrode and filler passes using an E7018 (F4) electrode, and it was later decided to change the root pass electrode to E7018 (F4), would this change constitute an essential variable and require a separate qualification test? |
QW-404.4 is an essential variable under QW-252 through QW-259. Therefore, your procedure must be requalified. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4955 |
| IX-77-17 |
Section IX, Flux-Cored Arc Welding |
|
7/18/1977 |
|
Under what welding process category shall flux-cored arc welding be qualified under Section IX? |
Flux-cored arc welding is considered to come under the more general method of welding known as gas-metal-arc welding. The rules now in Section IX covering inert gas-metal-arc welding apply to flux-cored arc welding. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4956 |
| IX-77-18 |
Section IX; 1971 Edition of Q-11(b)(5) |
|
8/9/1977 |
|
With respect to the 1971 Edition of Section IX, Q-11(b)(5), is it intended that the ranges for amperage, voltage, and speed of travel may be different in the Welding Procedure Specifications from that recorded in the PQR test? |
It is the intent of Section IX (1971 Edition), Q-11(b)(5) that the procedure qualifications record shall record the ranges actually used with the filler metal used in the procedure qualification test, but that the Welding Procedure Specification may specify ranges in amperage, voltage, and speed of travel that will produce acceptable welds and yet might be quite different than the actual values used in the procedure qualification record. For example, the procedure qualification record may have recorded data on a 5/32 in. electrode actually used, whereas the Welding Procedure Specification written as supported by the welding procedure record, gives the ranges to be used for 1/8 in. through 1/4 in. diameter electrodes. The electrode manufacturers ranges when available are an acceptable guide. In the case of shielded metal-arc welding and gas tungsten-arc welding even wider ranges are possible. The size of the electrode or filler metal is not an essential variable. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4957 |
| IX-77-19 |
Section IX, QW-351 |
QW-351 |
9/26/1977 |
|
May a welder qualified in a given procedure, and for a given maximum thickness of deposit, weld on pipe of greater wall thickness, provided the thickness deposited by this welder does not exceed his qualification? |
A welder qualified in a given procedure and for a given maximum thickness may weld on a pipe of greater wall thickness provided the thickness deposited does not exceed his qualification. However, the welder must follow a Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) that has a PQR qualification necessary to weld the full pipe thickness in production. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4958 |
| IX-77-20 |
Section IX; Welder Performance Qualification Tests |
|
12/27/1977 |
|
Is it permissible for a Manufacturer to have the Welder Performance Qualification test of his welders in accordance with Section IX conducted on the premises of an organization other than the Manufacturer without direct supervision from the Manufacturer as a subcontracted service by an approved vendor as permitted in Section III? |
QW-103.1 states that each Manufacturer is responsible for his welding and he shall conduct the tests to qualify the performance of welders and welding operators, and QW-301.2 states that each Manufacturer shall qualify each welder or welding operator for each welding process to be used in production welding, but is silent relative to full supervision of the welder or welding operator during the welding of the test coupons. It is the intent of the above listed paragraphs that the welders and welding operators be qualified under the full supervision and control of the Manufacturer during the production of the test weldment coupons. It is proposed to revise Section IX to clarify this intent. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4960 |
| IX-77-09 |
Section IX, Use of Filler Metals not in Section II, Part C |
|
3/7/1977 |
|
Is it the intent of Sections I, III, IV, VIII, and IX of the Code that weld material be ordered to an SFA Specification (Section II, Part C)? |
No. Weld material is ordered in different manners by various users. It is generally advantageous, however, to order to an SFA Specification where available and suitable for the intended use. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4961 |
| IX-77-09 |
Section IX, Use of Filler Metals not in Section II, Part C |
|
3/7/1977 |
|
If not, how may it be ordered? |
Where the weld material is defined in an SFA Specification of Section II, Part C in sufficient degree for the users purpose he may so order to the appropriate paragraphs. He may also add his own requirements to this. He may also order welding materials to his requirements "in toto" - particularly where an appropriate SFA Specification is not available. The procedure of ordering varies, but in any event all the requirements of Section IX and applicable requirements of the book Sections of the Code must be met for specific usages. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4961 |
| IX-77-09 |
Section IX, Use of Filler Metals not in Section II, Part C |
|
3/7/1977 |
|
Can a weld material that is not SFA/AWS be used for Sections I, III, IV, and VIII work provided it meets the required chemical and physicals only, of an SFA/AWS Specification? |
Yes. Sections I, III, IV, and VIII use several welding materials for which an SFA Specification is not available. Section IX allows this and specifically delineates qualification requirements for this situation as well as for the situations for which an SFA Specification is available. Section III additionally specifies requirements for chemical analyses and lot and batch testing including mechanical property testing. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4961 |
| IX-77-09 |
Section IX, Use of Filler Metals not in Section II, Part C |
|
3/7/1977 |
|
Is the weld material for use in Sections I, III, IV, and VIII work locked into SFA/AWS or equivalent or may it meet another criteria as appears to be the intent of Section IX, QW-404.4. "A change from one F Number in QW-432 to any other F Number or to any other filler metal not listed in QW-432"? |
No. The weld material is not "locked" into SFA/AWS, but - yes - it may meet other criteria as allows in Section IX, but must meet all Section IX criteria and other criteria specifically delineated in Book Sections. Section III particularly includes additional criteria as described in Reply 3 above. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4961 |
| IX-77-09 |
Section IX, Use of Filler Metals not in Section II, Part C |
|
3/7/1977 |
|
Must all welding procedures to be used for Sections I, III, IV and VIII Code work be qualified by using ASME welding material? |
No. However, the welding materials must meet the requirements delineated in Section IX and in the applicable book sections. When this is done, they become ASME welding material whether or not an SFA Specification for the specific welding material exists. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4961 |
| IX-77-09 |
Section IX, Use of Filler Metals not in Section II, Part C |
|
3/7/1977 |
|
The Foreword to the various Code Sections, last paragraph, addresses itself to base material and welding material. We all more or less have understood over the years the bench mark base material for Sections I, III, IV, and VIII work to be SA or SB and the provisions for acceptance of an identical ASTM. Should one consider this same intent to apply to welding material, namely, the bench mark for welding material for Sections I, III, IV, and VIII work to be SFA with provisions for acceptance of an identical AWS? If so, it would appear that one is locked into the one SFA or SFA/AWS combination only for welding material the same as we are now to the SA or SA/ASTM combination only for base material. Is this so? |
No. As described above, there are conditions for which an SFA Specification does not exist or completely cover the condition. For such situations, the welding materials are to be specifically qualified as part of the Welding Procedure Qualification. Where an SFA Specification suitable for the purpose does exist, the description of the welding materials is simplified through reference to the specification. Also the number of qualifications may be reduced.
In addition to QW-404.4 which contains the statement "or to any other filler metal not listed in QW-432," QW-404.12 contains the statement "or to a weld metal or filler metal composition not covered by these specifications." Also other QW-404 items cover situations for which SFA Specifications may not be available or fully cover the situation. Some of these are QW-404.8, QW-404.9, QW-404.10, QW-404.17, QW-404.18, QW-404.20, QW-404.24, QW-404.25, QW-404.26, and QW-404.27. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4961 |
| IX-78-01 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 and Section II Part C, SFA-5.17, Table 4, Note C |
QW-404.9 |
1/19/1978 |
|
QW-404.9 of Section IX is an essential variable for submerged arc welding which requires requalification if a change is made from one flux classification listed in SFA-5.17 to any other flux classification.
Section II, Part C, SFA-5.17, Table 4, Note C states that an F76-Exxx flux-electrode combination also meets the requirements of all lower numbered classifications in the F7X-xxx series.
Is it correct to interpret Note C to mean a procedure qualification performed utilizing a F74-EM12K would qualify that particular welding procedure specification for the use of F72-EM12K or E70-EL12 as well without additional individual procedure qualifications? |
AWS A 5.17 and the corresponding SFA-5.17 tests are for classification purposes only and are designed to minimize the number of tests required. The Section IX requirement (QW-404.9) governs the qualification requirements and the limits of qualification for Code applications. Therefore, it is incorrect to interpret SFA-5.17, Table 4, Note C as governing Section IX qualification requirements. Appendix A in SFA-5.17 supplies additional information on the effects of different electrode-flux combinations effects on strength, ductility, and notch toughness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4962 |
| IX-78-02 |
Section IX, QW-406.1 |
QW-406.1 |
1/19/1978 |
|
QW-406.1 reads "A decrease of 100°F or more in the minimum specified preheating or interpass temperature." Does the word "specified" refer to the preheating temperature on the WPS or as recorded on the PQR? |
The word "specified" in QW-406.1 refers to the temperature specified on the WPS. However, the minimum specified temperature cannot be more than 100°F lower than that stated on the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4963 |
| IX-78-04 |
Section IX, QW-403.6 |
QW-403.6 |
1/19/1978 |
|
What is the intent of QW-403.6 when applied to the minimum thickness limitation of material qualified by test plate when qualifying a welding procedure? |
It is the intent of the Code that QW-403.6 applies only to thickness less than 5/8 in. where the thickness of the test coupon is the minimum thickness qualified. For thicknesses over 5/8 in., the minimum thickness qualified is as stated in QW-451.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected reply sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: July 31, 1979
Reply: The intent of QW-403.6 was further clarified in the Summer 1979 Addenda. For thickness less than 5/8 in., the thickness of the test coupon is the minimum thickness qualified for production welds. For thicknesses 5/8 in. or greater, the minimum thickness qualified is 5/8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4964 |
| IX-78-05 |
Section IX, QW-305 and QW-452 |
QW-305; QW-452 |
1/19/1978 |
|
Will one operator performance qualification for a wall thickness within the range of a qualified WPS be sufficient to qualify the welding operator for the full range of thickness of the WPS? |
One operator performance qualification for a wall thickness within the range of a qualified WPS is not sufficient to qualify the welding operator for the full range of thickness of the WPS. The welding operator is qualified only in accordance with the test coupon he welded in accordance with QW-452.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected interpretation sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: April 11, 1978
Reply: Performance qualification of welding operators is as listed in QW-305. The thickness of the test coupon or the weld examined for performance qualification is not a variable for welding operators. An operator who has satisfactorily passed the performance qualification test is qualified to weld in accordance with all other qualified welding procedure specifications using the same welding process as that in the welding procedure specification to which he qualified. A welding operator is required to requalify only when changing from one welding process to any other welding process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4965 |
| IX-78-03 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 Qualification of Welders; Section VIII, Division 1 |
QW-452.3 |
1/19/1978 |
|
Clarification of the welder qualification requirements for welding of nozzles into the shell, identified as "T-Joint UW-16.1(c) Section VIII, Division 1" is requested. The shell in question is made of ASME specification pipe 3 in. diameter through 14 in. diameter. The nozzles may be the same material pipe in diameters of 3/4 in. through 8 in.
Welders are qualified using 5 in. Schedule 80 pipe in 2G position. The joint design is a single vee. In accordance with Performance Qualification, Section IX, QW-452.3 and QW-461.7, this qualifies welders for groove weld in 2½ in. nominal pipe, minimum and fillet weld in all sizes of pipe in 2G and 2F positions.
Our interpretation of the Code is that the above qualifies welders to weld nozzles of 3/4 in. through 8 in. into shells providing the minimum diameter of the shell is not less than the qualified 2½ in. Since the joint design does not require full penetration on the nozzle pipe but only in the shell, we interpret this as a fillet weld and not a groove weld on the nozzle pipe. Does the welder have to requalify for 1 in. to 2½ in. pipe and under 1 in. as outlined in QW-452.3? |
Performance qualification using 5 in. diameter pipe does not qualify a welder to perform work on groove welds having a diameter size less than 2-7/8 in.
The example you have shown is not considered a fillet weld application and is a groove weld application subject to the 2½ in. nominal pipe size (2-7/8 in. O.D.) minimum limitation. Therefore, for this application, qualification of welders would be required on 3/4 in. (1 in. O.D.) through 2 in. nominal pipe size groove weld test coupons.
Performance qualification using 2 in. Schedule 2X pipe in the 2G position will qualify the welder to perform work on the following fabrication:
Performance qualification using SMAW, GTAW, and GMAW (except short circuit mode) or a combination of these processes may be made using radiographic examination. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4966 |
| IX-78-06 |
Section IX, Welding Procedure Qualifications - Welding Positions |
|
1/19/1978 |
|
May welding qualification procedures, limited to a specific position and qualified prior to the 1974 Edition of Section IX, be used for all positions of welding after the effective date of the 1974 Edition of Section IX? |
Welding qualification procedures, qualified prior to the 1974 Edition of Section IX, and limited to a specific position, may be used for any position of welding after the effective date of the 1974 Edition of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4967 |
| IX-78-07 |
Section IX, QW-410.16, Welder Performance Qualifications |
QW-410.16 |
1/24/1978 |
|
Was it the intent of QW-410.16, as it pertains to the welder performance qualifications, to exclude a welder qualified on a double-welded vertical position joint (where only the root was placed using one direction of progression and then removed to sound metal prior to welding the second side) from production welding a single-welded backing strap joint using the other direction of progression? |
Under the conditions expressed in your inquiry where the root was removed to sound metal in the qualification coupon, it was not the intent of QW-410.16 to exclude a welder from production welding a single-welded backing strap joint using the other direction of progression. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4968 |
| IX-78-08 |
Section IX, QW-410.16 Welder Performance Qualifications |
QW-410.16 |
1/24/1978 |
|
May welders be qualified on a double welded plate in vertical upward progression where the root pass has been welded in vertical downward progression and subsequently removed to sound metal in the preparation for welding the second side, for a production weld which is a single welded plate with a backing bar? All welding including the root pass for production weld is done in vertical upward progression. Reference is made to QW-410.16. |
Under the conditions of your inquiry, the welders are qualified for vertical up welding. It is the opinion of the Committee that as stated in the second sentence of QW-410.16, the root pass may be welded upward or downward when the root pass is removed to sound metal. It should be pointed out that it is not critical that the root pass be completely removed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4969 |
| IX-78-09 |
Section IX, QW-410.24, Grain Refining Austenitizing Heat Treatment |
QW-410.24 |
2/27/1978 |
|
It is our interpretation that QW-410.24 only concerns material that would have no postweld heat treatment or a postweld heat treatment below the austenitizing temperature.
Any material being hot formed from a temperature above the AC3 after welding and/or normalized after welding and hot forming would not be governed by QW-410.24.
Is this interpretation correct? |
QW-410.24 does not apply when the welding procedure specification is qualified with a grain refining heat treatment after welding. QW-410.24 has been revised to clarify this in the 1977 Edition of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4970 |
| IX-78-10 |
Section IX, QW-202.2, Fillet Weld Procedure Qualification Test Requirements |
QW-202.2 |
2/27/1978 |
|
(1) Does a fillet weld procedure qualification test conducted in accordance with QW-462.4(a) on ¼ in. plate qualify fillets of all sizes in plates of all thicknesses?
(2) Is it a Code requirement that a WPS showing a sketch of a groove weld be revised to show a fillet weld when that WPS is to be used to make a fillet? |
(1) The present Code rules allow a fillet weld qualification test made in accordance with QW-462.4(a) on ¼ in. plate to qualify for all fillet weld sizes and all plate thicknesses.
(2) A WPS showing a sketch of a groove weld does not have to be revised to show a fillet weld when that WPS is to be used to make a fillet weld. The variable QW-402.1 refers to a change in groove weld joint design and therefore does not apply to fillet welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4971 |
| IX-78-100 |
Section IX, SMAW Procedure Qualifications |
|
12/13/1978 |
|
Is DC straight (electrode negative) polarity permitted by Section IX for procedure qualifications using E7018 (SFA 5.1) electrodes? |
Yes, straight polarity is permitted. Section IX places no limits upon polarity for SMAW procedure qualifications other than those imposed by QW-409.1 (Supplementary Essential Variables) and QW-409.8 (Nonessential Variables).
|
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4972 |
| IX-78-101 |
Section IX, Semi-Automatic and Automatic Welding |
|
12/14/1978 |
|
Are separate performance qualifications required for one person, acting as both welder and welding operator, using the same process within the same essential variables? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4973 |
| IX-78-101 |
Section IX, Semi-Automatic and Automatic Welding |
|
12/14/1978 |
|
Must the performance qualifications for welders and welding operators be maintained and renewed separately? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4973 |
| IX-78-102 |
Section IX, QW-407.1, PWHT of Weld Procedure |
QW-407.1 |
12/15/1978 |
|
What is meant by the term "range" as it appears in the wording for PWHT in QW-407.1? |
The Code does not address itself to specifying a postweld heat treatment temperature range. It would be the responsibility of the manufacturer or fabricator to develop a temperature range suitable for the material used and designated in the Welding Procedure Specification. It is hoped that a postweld heat treatment temperature would be selected to fall midway in the range developed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4974 |
| IX-78-102 |
Section IX, QW-407.1, PWHT of Weld Procedure |
QW-407.1 |
12/15/1978 |
|
How much may the temperature of PWHT of WPS qualification coupons differ from the PWHT temperature of the vessel? |
There is no connection between the PWHT of welded test coupons and the PWHT requirements of a vessel. The values may be similar, but are not required to be so by Code requirements.
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected interpretation to Question (2) sent to the inquirer.
Corrected Issued: September 25, 1979
Question (2): How much may the temperature of PWHT of WPS qualification coupons differ from the PWHT temperature of the vessel?
Reply (2): The PWHT of the welded test coupons and the PWHT of the vessel must be of the same type of PWHT as designated for the various conditions outlined in QW-407.1 |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4974 |
| IX-78-103 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification for Small Diameter Tubing, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
12/18/1978 |
|
"1 in. diameter" tubing may vary (per SA-450) between 0.968 and 1.016 in. in diameter. Under the diameter limitations in QW-452.3, is a welder qualified on a "2 in." (nominal) pipe qualified to weld the "1 in. diameter" tube described above? |
No. QW-452.3 is based on nominal pipe sizes for specimen sizes and qualification limits, the "over 1" minimum qualified outside diameter keyed to ¾ in. pipe size. SA-53 gives the following O.D. tolerances for ¾ in. pipe:
O.D.: 1.050 in.
O.D. min : 1.050 - 1/32 in. (i.e. 1.019 in.)
O.D. max : 1.050 + 1/64 in. (i.e. 1.066 in.)
The 1 in. tube in question, varying between 0.968 and 1.016 in. O.D., would not be weldable under the conditions in question. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4975 |
| IX-78-104 |
Section IX, QW-403.16, Diameter Restrictions |
QW-403.16 |
12/21/1978 |
|
Do the diameter restrictions of Section IX, QW-403.16 mandate requalification of welders for fillet and socket welds in pipe 2f in. nominal diameter and less when the welders have been qualified in large diameter groove welds in pipe? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4976 |
| IX-78-11 |
Section IX, Range of Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures |
|
2/27/1978 |
|
Is it the intent of Section IX to have WPS's written specifically to meet the requirements of a fabricating Code (ASME Section I, ANSI B31.1, etc.) with respect to preheat, PWHT, and other specific fabrication requirements? |
A given qualified procedure may be used for Section I and/or III and/or IV, and/or VIII. Other procedures written to various Codes which reference Section IX may also utilize this procedure, if acceptable to their inspection and quality control system. Alternatively, anyone may use Section IX to suit their needs. The various Sections of the Code stipulate ranges of temperature for PWHT. A procedure must be qualified within this range. QW-407.1, an essential variable, requires a requalification when PWHT temperature range is changed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4977 |
| IX-78-12 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-410.24, Notch Toughness Requirements |
QW-409.1; QW-410.24 |
2/27/1978 |
|
For the processes of SMAW, SAW, GMAW, and GTAW when notch toughness requirements apply, QW-409.1 and QW-410.24 are essential variables. We believe that the intent of these paragraphs are met by specifying that the maximum heat input per unit length of weld shall not exceed that of the qualification test. Thus, although the voltage and amperage may increase beyond that used during qualification, the travel speed may be adjusted accordingly to assure that the heat input per unit length is controlled. This effectively controls the unit volume of weld metal deposited per unit length of weld.
Therefore, for processes of SMAW, SAW, GMAW, and GTAW when notch toughness requirements apply, may the following replace QW-409.1 and QW-410.24 as an essential variable?
An increase in the heat input per unit length of weld over that used in the qualification tests. Heat input per unit length shall be defined as:
Volts X Amps X 60 / Travel Speed (ipm) = Heat Input (J/in.)
This requirement does not apply when the WPS is qualified with a grain refining austen-itizing heat treatment after welding. |
QW-409.1 presently does not allow heat inputs to be controlled by adjusting amperage or voltage upward with an increase in speed. However, as a result of your inquiry, the Subcommittee on Welding has begun action to revise the Code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4978 |
| IX-78-13 |
Section IX, Application of SFA-5.18 to the GTAW Method |
|
2/27/1978 |
|
Does SFA-5.18 apply to the GTAW method? |
SFA-5.18 does apply to the GTAW method. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4979 |
| IX-78-14 |
Section IX, QW-410.17, Type or Model of Welding Equipment |
QW-410.17 |
2/27/1978 |
|
Is it permissible to utilize an acceptable PQR covering one type of process to substantiate a new WPS of the same process but of a different type without requalification? |
It is permissible to utilize an acceptable PQR covering one type of process to substantiate a new WPS of the same process if QW-410.17 is not listed as an Essential Variable for that specific process. This has been clarified in the Summer 1977 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4980 |
| IX-78-15 |
Section IX, QW-351, Multiple Process Thicknesses Qualified for a Performance Qualification |
QW-351 |
2/27/1978 |
|
For production welds made using a combination of processes (GTAW initial passes, SMAW completion), must the welder performing the GTAW portion of the weld (3/16 in. depth) qualify on 3/4 in. thick test pipe in order to qualify for unlimited pipe thickness of production welds where the combination GTAW/SMAW processes are used? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4981 |
| IX-78-15 |
Section IX, QW-351, Multiple Process Thicknesses Qualified for a Performance Qualification |
QW-351 |
2/27/1978 |
|
If a welder completes a 3/8 in. depth of weld in a 3/4 in. thick pipe specimen using the SMAW process, is the welder qualified to deposit a 3/4 in. depth (maximum) of weld metal in all thicknesses of production pipe welds? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4981 |
| IX-78-15 |
Section IX, QW-351, Multiple Process Thicknesses Qualified for a Performance Qualification |
QW-351 |
2/27/1978 |
|
If a welder qualifies on 3/8 in. thickness pipe wall test specimen using the SMAW process, is that welder qualified to deposit a 3/4 in. depth (maximum) of weld metal in all thicknesses of production pipe welds? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4981 |
| IX-78-16 |
Section IX, QW-255, Flux Cored Arc Welding |
QW-255 |
2/27/1978 |
|
Does gas metal-arc welding (GMAW) in the procedure qualification and performance qualification refer also to flux cored arc welding (FCAW)? If so, should welders be qualified separately under both processes? |
Flux cored arc welding (FCAW) is permissible under the Code and is considered to come under the more general method of welding known as gas metal-arc welding (GMAW). Welders do not have to be qualified separately unless there is a change in any of the Essential Variables. However, there is an Essential Variable for procedure qualification, QW-404.23, that requires separate qualification for solid wire and for flux cored wire for the GMAW process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4982 |
| IX-78-17 |
Section IX, QW-310, Change in A-Number for Performance Qualification |
QW-310 |
2/27/1978 |
|
Is a welder who satisfactorily accomplishes a welder performance qualification test using the gas tungsten arc welding process on P-No. 1 material with an F-No. 6 (A-No. 8) filler metal also qualified by virtue of the above test to use the gas tungsten arc welding process with an F-No. 6 (A-No. 1) filler metal, all other essential variables being the same? |
A welder qualified by the GTAW process with an F-No. 6 (A-No. 8) filler metal is also qualified to use an F-No. 6 (A-No. 1) filler metal. The manufacturer must have a procedure qualified for both the (A-No. 8) and the (A-No. 1) filler metal. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4983 |
| IX-78-18 |
Section IX, QW-303.3, QW-452.3, and QW-461.7 |
QW-303.3; QW-452.3; QW-461.7 |
2/27/1978 |
|
What is the intent of Section IX with regard to required weld testing as specified by QW-303.3, QW-452.3, and QW-461.7? A strict interpretation of QW-303.3 would indicate that pipes or couplings of 2-7/8 in. O.D. or less would require a performance test for each individual size rather than a general qualification test. However, it would seem logical to assume that welds made on pipes and couplings of 2-7/8 in. O.D. or less onto a shell would more normally fall into the category of 1G welds. |
The 2-7/8 in. O.D. pipe or coupling is considered a fitting such as a nozzle and is attached by a groove or fillet weld and the diameter limitations do not apply. If two pipes of 2-7/8 in. O.D. are butt welded together, the diameter limits of the tables apply. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4984 |
| IX-78-19 |
Section IX, QW-251.2 and QW-403.5 |
QW-251.2; QW-403.5 |
2/27/1978 |
|
When a change is made in a Supplementary Essential Variable for work done according to a Section which specifies notch toughness tests, are tension, bend, and impact tests required or only weld deposit and heat affected zone impacts? |
When a change is made in a Supplementary Essential Variable for work done according to a Section which specifies notch toughness tests, all tests are not required to requalify the procedure. The second paragraph of QW-403.5 states:
When a procedure has been previously qualified to satisfy all requirements other than notch toughness, it is then necessary only to prepare an additional test coupon using the same procedure with the plates only long enough to provide the necessary notch toughness specimens. If a previously qualified weld procedure has satisfactory notch toughness values in the weld metal then it is necessary only to test notch toughness specimens from the heat affected zone. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4985 |
| IX-78-20 |
Section IX, QW-201, Effective Operational Control of Welding Procedure Qualifications |
QW-201 |
2/27/1978 |
|
QW-201 permits welding procedures which are properly qualified by one Division of a Company to be used by another Division of the Company within the same organization if in an organization effective operational control of welding procedure qualifications for two or more companies of different names exists. What constitutes "effective operational control of welding procedure qualification" within a corporation? |
WPS's and PQR's may be used by all Divisions of a Corporation the same as provided in QW-201 for two companies of different names. The QC Manual must describe the effective operational control of the production of weldments, and if two or more divisions are involved, which division is responsible for qualification of procedures and/or the performance of welders and welding operators. The controlling division must have the authority to control and the other divisions cannot overrule or ignore direction from the one controlling. It is the responsibility of the Authorized Inspector to determine that the described control is being maintained. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4986 |
| IX-78-22 |
Section IX, QW-322, Renewal of Qualification |
QW-322 |
2/27/1978 |
|
A welder, who was qualified in SMAW for all positions with F4, F5, F42, F43, and F44 electrodes, for all material thicknesses, returns to work after a one year absence. If he passes a requalification test on a 3/8 in. thick carbon steel plate, using an F4 electrode, in flat position, is he then qualified to weld with F4, F5, F42, F43, and F44 electrodes in all positions for all thicknesses of materials? |
Yes, the welder would be qualified by making a single test joint on any thickness, position, or material to reestablish the welder's or welding operator's qualification for any thickness, position, or material for which he was previously qualified. This has been clarified in the Winter 1977 Addenda of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4987 |
| IX-78-24 |
Section IX, QW-202.2, Base Metals - Groove and Fillet Weld |
QW-202.2 |
2/27/1978 |
|
(1) We have a WPS (SMAW) qualified with tube 10.97 mm thickness. The nominal pipe size of the tube used for the welding procedure qualification was 6 in. Schedule 80, thickness 10.97 mm. Can this procedure be used with groove welds in plates and pipes under 3/8 in. (9.525 mm) thickness?
(2) Can this procedure be used with fillet welds in plates under 3/8 in. thickness?
(3) Can this procedure be used with socket welds in pipes under 3/8 in. thickness? |
(1) The procedure may be used down to 1.5 mm (approximate), 1/16 in. within the range of essential variables.
(2) This procedure can be used with fillet welds on all thicknesses within the range of essential variables.
(3) This procedure can be used with socket welds on all thicknesses within the range of essential variables.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected interpretation sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: June 6, 1978
Question: We have a WPS (SMAW) qualified with tube 10.97 mm thickness. The nominal pipe size of the tube used for the welding procedure qualification was 6 in. Schedule 80, thickness 10.97 mm. Can this procedure be used with groove welds in plates and pipes under 3/8 in. (9.525 mm) thickness?
Reply: The WPS may be used down to 4.76 mm (approximate), 3/16 in. within the range of essential variables of the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4988 |
| IX-78-21 |
Section IX, QW-201.3, Combination of Welding Processes or Procedures |
QW-201.3 |
2/27/1978 |
|
Does the PQR-1 (sketched below) which has two processes qualified on a single test plate support the WPS-1 (sketched below)? The maximum plate thickness for WPS-1 is two times the test plate and the weld deposit of each process for WPS-1 is not more than two times the actual weld deposit of each process in the test plate. If the PQR-1 does not support the WPS-1, what should be the thickness of weld deposit in each process in the test plate to satisfy QW-201.3 requirements?
Also, do the following PQRs together support the WPS-1? What changes in thickness of weld deposit in each process would satisfy QW-201.3 to support the WPS-1? |
PQR-1 as sketched does support WPS-1. The maximum thickness of the production joint qualified by PQR-1 is 20 mm which is two times the thickness of the metal deposited by the SMAW and TIG process.
PQR-2 and PQR-3 taken together do not support WPS-1. PQR-3 would currently have to be on 10 mm plate to permit WPS-1 to be qualified to satisfy the base material requirements.Question: Does the PQR-1 (sketched below) which has two processes qualified on a single test plate support the WPS-1 (sketched below)? The maximum plate thickness for WPS-1 is two times the test plate and the weld deposit of each process for WPS-1 is not more than two times the actual weld deposit of each process in the test plate. If the PQR-1 does not support the WPS-1, what should be the thickness of weld deposit in each process in the test plate to satisfy QW-201.3 requirements? |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4989 |
| IX-78-23 |
Section IX and Section I, Par. PW-28.5 Welding Qualification |
|
2/27/1978 |
|
Under what circumstances is it acceptable to modify the requirements of QW-103.1 of Section IX which reads as follows:
QW-103.1 Welding. Each Manufacturer or Contractor is responsible for the welding done by his organization and shall conduct the tests required in this Section to qualify the welding procedures he uses in the construction of the weldments built under this Code, and the performance of welders and welding operators who apply these procedures. |
Section I, PW-28.5 provides that:
28.5 To avoid duplication of qualification tests, it is recommended that procedures, welders. and welding operators qualified as required above be acceptable for any similar welding work on piping using the same procedure (see PW-1.2). It is the intent of this paragraph to provide for the avoidance of duplication of qualification tests of welding procedure specification, welders, and welding operators as applied to piping within the Scope of Section I.
Manufacturers or Contractors are permitted to join together with other Manufacturers or Contractors into an organization for the establishment of welding procedure specifications and their qualification so that the individual Manufacturer or Contractor does not have to duplicate this. This means that a welding procedure specification adopted by the organization must be qualified in accordance with Section IX of the Code by a member of the organization. Other members of the organization may subsequently use the weld-ing procedure specification without requalification.
Welding procedure qualification test records shall be available with each welding procedure specification sent to the organization's membership. No member of the organization may use the organization's qualified welding procedure specifications on ASME Code work unless he holds the applicable ASME Code stamp and Certificate of Authorization.
Welders and welding operators of a member Manufacturer or Contractor must pass their performance test on each of the organization's welding procedure specifications they are to weld under, except as otherwise permitted in Section IX. The performance qualification test records are placed on file with the organization. When such welders or welding operators are employed by another member Manufacturer or Contractor, their performance qualification records are made available to their new employer by the organization and performance requalification is not required for those welding procedure specifications under which they qualified previously.
It is incumbent upon the member Manufacturer or Contractor using the organization's welding procedure specifications and performance qualification records to assume responsibility for the qualifications by maintaining records, certified by him, and available to the Authorized Inspector. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4990 |
| IX-78-25 |
Section IX, Use of Unclassified Materials |
|
3/6/1978 |
|
Is it necessary to requalify a WPS when a base metal of the same nominal chemistry as that originally qualified is used, except that the material was purchased to a specification not recognized by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or is simply another product form of a previously qualified metal? |
It is necessary to perform a separate procedure qualification of a metal of the same nominal chemistry of a previously qualified metal that was purchased to a specification not recognized by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4991 |
| IX-78-33 |
Section IX, QW-303.6, Fillet Welds |
QW-303.6 |
3/9/1978 |
|
Is a welder who qualified on a 5 in. Schedule 80 groove weld in the 6G position also qualified to weld fillet welds in all sizes, diameters, and thicknesses? |
In accordance with QW-303.6, a welder qualified on a 5 in. Schedule 80 pipe with a groove weld in the 6G position is qualified to weld fillet welds in all sizes, diameters, and thicknesses. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4992 |
| IX-78-34 |
Section IX, Definition of Current Edition |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
In an ASME response to an inquiry, a definition of "current Edition" was presented as follows: "... the term 'current Edition' refers to the latest Addenda of Section IX which has been issued long enough to become mandatory."
The last paragraph of the Section IX Preamble requires new qualifications to be made in accordance with the requirements of the "current Edition."
The Section IX Foreword in paragraph eight allows Addenda to be used beginning with the date of issuance shown on the Addenda.
The definition of "current Edition" as stated above appears to prohibit using Addenda on the date of issuance as allowed in the Foreword.
Is it the intent of the Code to prohibit the use of the latest issued Addenda? |
The Preamble reference to the use of the "current Edition" for requalification or new qualification is to the latest Addenda of Section IX that has been issued long enough to become mandatory and relates to "normal" mandatory requirements. However, the Foreword overrides and permits using the Addenda on the date of issuance so the Manufacturer has the option of using it as the current Addenda. It is not the intent of the Code to prohibit the use of the latest Addenda upon issuance. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4993 |
| IX-78-26 |
Section IX - Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
May a WPS and PQR prepared to the "current Edition" requirements of a 1962 or later Edition of Section IX be used to support work being performed to contracts invoking the 1974 Edition. (Preamble, 1974 Edition of Section IX)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4994 |
| IX-78-26 |
Section IX - Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
May a WPS and PQR that meet the requirements of the 1962 or later Editions of Section IX be used for work where the contract date is any time prior to or after the qualification date? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4994 |
| IX-78-26 |
Section IX - Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
May a qualification be performed at some time after the Section IX date invoked by the Contract and utilized to support a WPS written to the requirements of the Code for the date invoked by the contract or any subsequent date, regardless of the date of the "current Edition" as it applies to the qualification, provided all essential variables for the Edition of the Code used in the WPS have been documented on the PQR? For example, a contract invokes Section IX, 1971. May qualifications be performed today to the 1971 Edition of Section IX, or a later version, and be utilized to support a WPS written to the 1971 Edition of Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4994 |
| IX-78-26 |
Section IX - Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
May a qualification performed to a prior Edition of Section IX (1962 or later) support a WPS written to a later version of ASME Section IX provided all essential variables of the later version have been documented on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4994 |
| IX-78-26 |
Section IX - Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
May a PQR originally prepared to a particular version of the Code be updated to reflect a later version of the Code provided all essential variables of the later version are available from the qualification test records for documentation on the PQR? |
Yes.
In all cases, the PQR and WPS combination shall meet the requirements of the same Section IX Edition and Addenda that is selected for use.
It is recommended that both the PQR and WPS designate which Edition and Addenda of ASME Section IX the documents reflect.
Regarding the last two statements of the inquiry, it is the opinion of the Committee that the date shown on the WPS and PQR will identify the Edition of Section IX and Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4994 |
| IX-78-27 |
Section IX, QW-161.5, Longitudinal Bend Tests |
QW-161.5 |
3/9/1978 |
|
(1) Does QW-161.5 apply to guided bend tests of 9% Nickel-to-9% Nickel butt joint welded with an ENiCrFe-2 (or ENiCrFe-3) electrode, (base metal SA-353 or SA-553; plate thickness under ½ in.)?
(2) If the answer to Question (1) is affirmative, what is the relative value of each type of bend test as a measure of the quality of the weld? |
(1) QW-161.5 does apply to guided bend tests of 9% Ni Steel-to-9% Ni steel butt welds made using ENiCrFe-2 (or ENiCrFe-3) electrodes.
(2) Transverse bends made using guided bend jigs illustrated in QW-466.1 and QW-466.2 provide acceptable test methods for weldments when base metals and weld metal have similar bending properties. When transverse bend specimens of base metals and/or weld metal having markedly different bending properties are tested in these guided bend jigs, selective yielding may occur in the lowest yield strength area of the weldment. The localized yielding may far exceed the elongation required by Section IX, and may render the weldment rejectable when, in fact, the deposited weld quality and weldment ductility are acceptable.
However, longitudinal guided bends made using guided bend jigs illustrated in QW-466.1 and QW-466.2 or transverse guided bends made using the wrap-around bend jig illustrated in QW-466.3 result in essentially uniform bending of all areas across the weldment. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4995 |
| IX-78-28 |
Section IX, Preamble |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
(1) The Preamble to Section IX states that procedure and performance qualifications made in accordance with the requirements of the 1962 or any later Edition of Section IX may be used for Code Work. Does this dispensation also apply to Welding Procedure Specifications?
(2) Do WPS's have to be revised to the latest Edition of the Code or can they be used today if properly written and qualified to the 1962 Code? |
(1) It is the opinion of the Committee that "welding and brazing procedures" specified in the Preamble of Section IX includes welding and brazing procedure specifications.
(2) It is the opinion of the Committee that a WPS written to the 1962 Code may be used in Code construction today without revision and does not require requalification, if the results of tests meet the requirements of the 1962 Code or any later Edition. However, if a revision to an essential variable is more restrictive than previous Editions, the WPS should be revised and requalified. It is not the intent of the Committee to cause extensive retesting of previously employed welding and brazing procedures, welders, brazers, or welding and brazing operators. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4996 |
| IX-78-30 |
Section IX, QW-482, Reference to Other Documents on Welding Procedure Specifications |
QW-482 |
3/9/1978 |
|
May a welding procedure specification (WPS) reference another document in response to either an essential or nonessential variable in lieu of having the applicable information contained directly on the WPS? |
QW-482 is a suggested form which lists essential and nonessential variables to be included in the welding procedure specification. The use of a similar form, together with supplemental documents, is considered to be acceptable, provided the essential and nonessential variables for each specific welding process are included. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4997 |
| IX-78-32 |
Section IX, Preamble |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
Can a WPS be written to the present Section IX requirements using a qualification conducted to a previous Edition of Section IX provided the qualification and WPS meet the essential and nonessential variables of the present Code? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4998 |
| IX-78-32 |
Section IX, Preamble |
|
3/9/1978 |
|
Can a PQR or Q-1 be updated to reflect a later version of the Code provided the required information of the later version is available? |
Yes, provided that the original document is maintained and available. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4998 |
| IX-78-29 |
Section IX, QW-404.13 and QW-404.22, Consumable Inserts |
QW-404.13; QW-404.22 |
3/9/1978 |
|
We currently have a qualified WPS for making single-welded butt joints in stainless steel piping, using the gas tungsten-arc welding process. As qualified, the procedure does not require the use of a consumable insert. It is unclear if we are required to requalify our WPS and/or our welders if we add a consumable insert (with an analysis meeting the same A-Number as the filler rod used) to the procedure.
The confusion arises in the last sentence of QW-404.13 which reads "Qualification in a single-welded butt joint, with or without consumable inserts, qualifies for fillet welds and single-welded butt joints with backing or double-welded butt joints." If consumable inserts are considered backing, then the statement in effect says that qualification in a single-welded butt joint, with or without consumable inserts, qualifies for a single-welded butt joint with consumable inserts (backing).
We feel that the current definition of backing in QW-492 contains nothing which excludes consumable inserts. A more specific definition is the one approved by the AWS Committee on Definitions Symbols and Metric Practice in 1975: "Backing - A material (base metal, weld metal carbon, or granular material) placed at the root of a weld joint for the purpose of supporting molten weld metal."
If consumable inserts are not considered backing, but are considered joint material, two other questions arise. First, does the addition of a consumable insert constitute a change in the basic groove design and, hence, not require requalification according to QW-402.1? Second, does a change in the shape of a consumable insert constitute a change in basic groove design?
|
It is the opinion of the committee that a WPS and welders qualified on a single-welded butt joint without the use of a consumable insert, will require requalification when a consumable insert is to be used in the fabrication of single-welded butt joints. This requirement is specified in QW-404.13 for WPS qualification and QW-404.22 for performance qualification.
Regarding your inquiry of a consumable insert being considered as a backing for single-welded butt joints, it is the opinion of the Committee that a consumable insert is not to be considered backing.
Regarding your questions in the last paragraph, it is the opinion of the committee that:
(1) consumable inserts are considered to be filler metal; and
(2) joint geometry is a nonessential variable (QW-402.1).
Therefore, requalification of a WPS is not required when a change in joint geometry is made. A change in the shape of the consumable insert is not considered an essential variable, even though a change in joint geometry may be required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=4999 |
| IX-78-47 |
Section IX, QW-201.3, Combination of Welding Processes or Procedures |
QW-201.3 |
3/31/1978 |
|
We interpret QW-201.3 to allow the use of portions of existing qualifications to establish new welding procedure specifications as long as none of the original essential variables are violated and such portions are limited to the separation of processes or similar processes with differences created by essential variables. Please advise us of your interpretation. |
QW-201 permits one PQR to support more than one WPS. QW-201.3 permits the deletion of one or more processes from production welds, provided the processes used in production are qualified for the thickness range specified in QW-202.2, QW-403, and QW-451. Requalification is not required for a new WPS written to cover production welds made with the process used in depositing the root layer of a multiprocess qualification test, provided the WPS limits the thickness of production welds to 2t the deposited thickness of the root layer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5000 |
| IX-78-48 |
Section IX, QW-403.9, Single- or Multi-Pass Welding |
QW-403.9 |
3/31/1978 |
|
Does the ½ in. dimension in QW-403.9 refer to bead thickness or bead width? |
The ½ in. dimension refers to bead thickness for a groove weld and the throat distance of a single-pass fillet weld. The ½ in. measure has no relationship to the width of a single bead or weave. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5001 |
| IX-78-36 |
Section IX, Definition of Thickness |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
Suppose a design is given that requires production of a laminated joint (see sketch) where several 0.020 in. sheets of P-No. 8 material are clamped together and the ends welded to effect a weld deposit that later becomes part of a butt weld.
For purposes of procedure qualification, can the assembled thickness ("T" on sketch) of the production joint, rather than the individual sheet thickness, be considered as the thickness that the procedure must cover, since the sheets are assembled prior to arc initiation? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5002 |
| IX-78-37 |
Section IX, QW-404.9, Flux Classification |
QW-404.9 |
3/22/1978 |
|
May a procedure qualified with one of the SFA-5.17 flux classifications (such as, F73--XXXX) be used with a lower flux classification (such as, F72-, F70-), assuming a "neutral" flux is used, without requalification? |
No. Under the essential variable QW-404.9, a procedure qualified with one of the SFA-5.17 flux classifications does not qualify a lower flux classification. Note (c) of Table 4 in SFA-5.17 does not apply to procedure qualifications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5003 |
| IX-78-31 |
Section IX, QW-201.2, Procedure Qualification Record |
QW-201.2 |
3/9/1978 |
|
The revisions to QW-201.2 in the Summer 1977 Addenda to Section IX include the statement, "The WPS identification (including date and revision number) shall be listed on the PQR." Since, as noted in QW-201, a PQR may support a number of WPSs, must each WPS (including date and revision number) be listed? |
The quoted statement intends the Manufacturer shall follow the variables of a WPS when making the test coupons for procedure qualification testing. The essential variables used, the test results, and the WPS followed when welding the test coupons shall all be recorded on the PQR form. The PQR therefore reflects the test results and the conditions used when welding the test coupons. This PQR may now be used to support several additional WPSs without any change, since all the conditions used during the welding of the test coupons are recorded in the original PQR.
Each WPS supported by a PQR need not be listed on the supporting PQR. Only the WPS used during the procedure qualification testing needs be listed on the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5004 |
| IX-78-31 |
Section IX, QW-201.2, Procedure Qualification Record |
QW-201.2 |
3/9/1978 |
|
If a new WPS, which uses an already written PQR, is written, must the PQR be revised to include it? |
A new WPS may be written and may be supported by an already qualified PQR, without any change or revision to the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5004 |
| IX-78-31 |
Section IX, QW-201.2, Procedure Qualification Record |
QW-201.2 |
3/9/1978 |
|
Will a revision in a WPS, occasioned by the inclusion of an additional PQR, require a revision to the other support PQRs to show the newly revised WPS number? |
A WPS may be revised, occasioned by the inclusion of an additional PQR without revision to the other supporting PQRs. Each PQR need only list the WPS (including date and revision number) used during the procedure qualification testing. The WPS date and revision number used must be listed on the PQR so the testing conditions of the WPS at the time of the qualification testing will be known. The WPS may then be revised for future needs because the conditions of the WPS used for the qualification testing are traceable by the WPS date and revision number. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5004 |
| IX-78-31 |
Section IX, QW-201.2, Procedure Qualification Record |
QW-201.2 |
3/9/1978 |
|
Is it necessary to revise the present PQRs to include the WPSs which they support? |
It is not necessary to revise present PQRs to include the WPSs which they support. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5004 |
| IX-78-35 |
Section IX, QW-201, QW-403.9, and QW-201.3 |
QW-201; QW-403.9; QW-201.3 |
3/14/1978 |
|
Is it required that three separate plants of a division of a company develop their own welding procedures and qualify them or can they be written and qualified by Division Welding Engineering in conjunction with one plant and be used in the other two plants? |
WPSs and PQRs may be used by all divisions of a corporation the same as provided in QW-201 for two companies of different names. The QC Manual must describe the effective operational control of the production of weldments, and if two or more divisions are involved, which division is responsible for qualification of procedures and/or the performance of welders and welding operators. The controlling division must have the authority to control and the other divisions cannot overrule or ignore direction from the controlling division. It is the responsibility of the Authorized Inspector to determine that the described control is being maintained. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5005 |
| IX-78-35 |
Section IX, QW-201, QW-403.9, and QW-201.3 |
QW-201; QW-403.9; QW-201.3 |
3/14/1978 |
|
In QW-403.9, does the statement "greater than ½ in. (13 mm)," refer to width or depth of the weld pass? |
In QW-403.9, the statement "greater than ½ in. (13 mm)" refers to depth of the weld pass. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5005 |
| IX-78-35 |
Section IX, QW-201, QW-403.9, and QW-201.3 |
QW-201; QW-403.9; QW-201.3 |
3/14/1978 |
|
Can QW-201.3 be interpreted to mean that if a joint is qualified for welding with a single pass manual weld produced by a specified process on one side and an automatic weld with a different process (or even the same process) on the other side, that at any time in the future the same weld may be produced using either one of the processes or procedures on both sides of the joint without a new WPS or PQR and no revision to the existing WPS or PQR? |
In a production joint qualified by two processes or procedures, one may be deleted providing the remaining process or procedure has been, in the specific combination welding process or procedure qualification, qualified (within the thickness limits specified in QW-202.2, QW-403, and QW-451) for the deposited weld metal thickness range for the remaining process or procedure used in the production joint. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5005 |
| IX-78-38 |
Section IX, QW-404, Filler Metals |
QW-404 |
3/22/1978 |
|
Does the use of more than one of the electrodes in SFA 5.9 (although within the same F-Number and A-Number) for a submerged-arc procedure with a "neutral" flux require a requalification? |
Several electrodes in SFA 5.9 may be used under one qualified procedure within the limits of all applicable essential variables. Please note QW-404.9. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5006 |
| IX-78-44 |
Section IX, QW-201, Effective Operational Control |
QW-201 |
3/31/1978 |
|
The third paragraph of QW-201 states: "the Code recognizes a Manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer as the organization which has responsible operational control of the production of the weldments to be made in accordance with this Code. If in an organization effective operational control of welding procedure qualification for two or more companies of different names exists, the companies involved must establish this to the satisfaction of the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee, in which case separate welding procedure qualifications are not required."
Please provide an interpretation of this paragraph regarding what constitutes effective operational control. |
WPSs and PQRs may be used by all divisions of a corporation the same as provided in QW-201 for two companies of different names. The QC Manual must describe the effective operational control of the production of weldments, and if two or more divisions are involved, which division is responsible for qualification of procedures and/or the performance of welders and welding operators. The controlling division must have the authority to control and the other divisions cannot overrule or ignore direction from the controlling division. It is the responsibility of the Authorized Inspector to determine that the described control is being maintained. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5007 |
| IX-78-39 |
Section IX, QW-351 and Table QW-452, Welder Performance Qualification |
QW-351; QW-452 |
3/22/1978 |
|
The sketch presented below is meant to display a typical cross section of our 6 in. test pipe in the as-welded condition; open root GTA with SMA fill and coverbead reinforcement. In addition, it should be pointed out that we use radiography exclusively for welder performance qualifications.
Is a welder who successfully qualifies on our 6 in. pipe test following a combination open root GTA/SMA procedure qualified for combination open root GTA/SMA welding on production joint thicknesses from 3/16 in. to maximum welded restricted only to a GTA deposit of 2 times the GTA
test weld? |
(1) The welder who successfully qualifies on your 6 in. pipe test following a combination open root GTA/SMA procedure is qualified for combination open root GTA/SMA welding on production joint thicknesses from 3/16 in. to maximum welded restricted only to a GTA deposit of 2 times the GTA deposit thickness of the test weld. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5008 |
| IX-78-39 |
Section IX, QW-351 and Table QW-452, Welder Performance Qualification |
QW-351; QW-452 |
3/22/1978 |
|
Is a welder who successfully qualifies on our 6 in. pipe test following a combination open root GTA/SMA procedure using one pass GTA also qualified for SMA welding on backing on production joint thicknesses from 3/16 in. to maximum welded? We contend that the welder has made his SMA weld on 0.750 in. minimum thickness pipe (QW-452) and he has also deposited 0.750 in. of weld metal including coverbead reinforcement (QW-351). |
The welder who successfully qualifies on your 6 in. pipe test following a combination open root GTA/SMA procedure using one pass GTA is also qualified for SMA welding on backing on production joint thicknesses from 3/16 in. to maximum welded. The welder has made his SMA weld on 0.750 in. minimum thickness pipe, but he has deposited 0.750 in. of SMA weld metal only if the coverbead reinforcement is included. In this case, in order to take advantage of the coverbead reinforcement to qualify the welder for unlimited deposit weld metal thickness, the coverbead reinforcement should not be removed for making the side bend tests. If the coverbead reinforcement is removed for making the side bend tests (as is ordinarily done to prepare the specimen for best assurance of passing the bend test), the intent is that the 2t maximum qualified for the specific case would be 1 1/4 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5008 |
| IX-78-42 |
Section IX, QW-407.1, Postweld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1 |
3/22/1978 |
|
A WPS was originally written and qualified with the use of a postweld heat treatment. The vessel now up for fabrication requires no postweld heat treatment. QW-407.1 is an essential variable for the process being used. Does a revised WPS have to be written without the heat treatment step in it? |
The existing WPS must be revised to include the allowance of welding with or without post-weld heat treatment, or a new WPS must be written for welding without postweld heat treatment at the choice of the Manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5009 |
| IX-78-41 |
Section IX, P- and A-Numbers |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
(1) A welding procedure is qualified as per Section IX. The base metal welded is 14 Mo V 63 pipe. Its chemical composition is C, 0.1 to 0.18; Mn, 0.3 to 0.60; Si, 0.15 to 0.35; Cr, 0.3 to 0.6; Mo, 0.5 to 0.65; V, 0.25 to 0.35. Its ultimate tensile strength is 50 to 70 kg/mm2. The electrode used is Cromotherme-2 conforming to AWS E-9018 B3. Its chemical composition is C, 0.07 max; Mn, 0.8 to 1.0; Si 0.3 to 0.35; Cr, 2.1 to 2.3; Mo, 0.9 to 1.0. Its ultimate tensile strength is 60 to 68 kg/mm2. The resultant weld metal com-position is C, 0.08; Mn, 0.74; Cr, 1.67; Mo, 0.63; V, 0.10.
The base metal specification does not fit into any of the P-Number groups of Section IX. Also the weld metal can not be classified under any one of the A-Number groups. Hence, you are requested to clarify regarding the P-Number grouping of the above material and the A-Number group of the weld metal.
(2) We are also interested in knowing why vanadium steels in general are not mentioned in the ASME Code whereas other codes like B.S. and DIN use them regularly. |
(1) The Code has grouped the commonly used base materials and filler materials deposit analysis into P-Numbers and A-Numbers. There are many materials, however, that have not been grouped. The base materials without P-Numbers and the filler materials without A-Numbers must have a separate procedure qualification for Code use.
(2) Materials may be added to the Code at the request of the user and approval of the appropriate Code Committee.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected interpretation sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: April 17, 1978
Replies:
(1) Materials approved for welded construction under the rules of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee are grouped into P-Numbers in relation to their effects upon the welding processes employed in these constructions. Section IX lists only those materials which are approved by other Sections of the Code for welded construction. New materials are considered under the normal procedures of approval process for materials of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee. Section IX covers only the materials listed in the appropriate P-Number tables.
(2) The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code includes those materials which a user or fabricator of vessels constructed in accordance with all the requirements of a Section of the Code indicates a need to meet his requirements. The user or fabricator of ASME pressure vessels may request new materials, not presently included in the Code, by application to the Secretary of the Committee. Your attention is invited to the "Guideline on the Adoption of New Base Materials for the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code" in Section II, Part A. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5010 |
| IX-78-43 |
Section IX, Certification of Accessory Welding Equipment |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
Is it a requirement to certify accessory equipment used to monitor nonessential variables for the GTAW, GMAW, and PAW processes? We currently monitor calibration of the following during the welding of the 300 series stainless steel:
(1) speed indicators
(2) gas mixers
(3) flowmeters, and
(4) gas analyzers.
Are these certifications required even though the accessory equipment will be used for nonessential variables. |
Yes. The requirement of the Code is that nonessential variable ranges be specified on the Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and they must be followed when making Code welds. Changes may be made to a nonessential range without requalifications to the WPS, but the changes must be made and the WPS revised by the Manufacturer before the WPS can be used in productions with the new ranges. The type and extent of the certification or calibration of the necessary equipment shall be documented in the QA/QC manual and the requirements of the Section of the Code being used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5011 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
QW-310 specified a P-Number of the base material for a test coupon for welding performance qualification. Is it permissible in the performance qualification test to use the JIS material (Japan Industrial Standard) instead of the ASME material, provided that the JIS material has the chemical composition equivalent to the P-Number material specified in QW-310? |
Yes, it is permissible in the performance qualification test to use the JIS material (Japan Industrial Standard) instead of the ASME material provided that the JIS material has the chemical composition equivalent to the P-Number material specified in QW-310.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected replies sent to the inquirer.
Corrected Issued: July 31, 1979
Reply (1): No, the material must be to a specification of P-No. 1; see QW-310.4. The Code has provisions where a stamp holder may take a material or electrode and reidentify it to an appropriate Code recognized specification, providing the material meets the requirements of that specification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
Is it permissible in the performance qualification to use the JIS welding material and to classify this welding material as an F-Number conforming to QW-430, provided that the JIS welding material has the same mechanical properties and chemical composition as specified in an SFA Specification of Section II, Part C? |
Yes, it is permissible in the performance qualification to use the JIS welding material and to classify this welding material as an F-Number conforming to QW-430, provided that the JIS welding material has the same mechanical properties and chemical composition as specified in the SFA Specification (listed in QW-432) of Section II, Part C.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected replies sent to the inquirer.
Corrected Issued: July 31, 1979
No. F-Number assignment of QW-432 applies to SFA electrodes, as included in QW-432. The Code has provisions where a stamp holder may take a material or electrode and reidentify it to an appropriate Code recognized specification, providing the material meets the requirements of that specification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
There is no specification for the mild and low-alloy steel welding rods for gas tungsten arc welding in Section II, Part C. Is it permissible to use SFA-5.18 for welding rods for gas tungsten arc welding except that this welding rod is used for gas tungsten arc welding and the type of package does not meet SFA-5.18. |
Yes, provided the rods conform to the requirements of the specific AWS classification in SFA-5.18 with respect to chemistry and mechanical properties. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
Is it permissible in the procedure and performance qualifications to classify the welding rod as F-No. 6 conforming to QW-430? |
Yes, it is permissible in the procedure and performance qualifications to classify the welding rod as F-No. 6 conforming to QW-430. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
Is the renewal of performance qualification not required when a welder or welding operator has used the specific process for a period of three months, even if the Code was not applied to the production weld which he made? |
The intent of the Code is that the welder or welding operator be welding with the specific process on either Code work or non-Code work, and that documentation is required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
Is it necessary to make any nondestructive examination on the production welds which a welder or welding operator made to renew his qualifications? |
Nondestructive examinations of production welds are given in the Sections other than Section IX. Section IX performance qualifications by radiography are as given in QW-302, QW-304, and QW-305. These paragraphs describe conditions for qualification by radiography of separate test coupons, for welders and welding operators, and conditions for qualification of welding operator by radiography of a production weld. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
When the welding procedure qualification test for repair or built-up welding is performed by groove welding, is it permissible to use a joint which is made between base metals of two different groups, provided that one of the base metals is the same group as the other used for the production? |
For welding procedure qualification for repair or built-up welding performed by groove welding it is not permissible to use a joint which is made between base metals of two different groups in which only one of the base metals is the same group as the other used for production. QW-202.2 delineates the ranges qualified for specific conditions, but the essential variables for the specific conditions must be met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
The postweld heat treatment was not required for nonferrous materials in the Edition of Section IX published before 1974.
Can the welding procedure qualified before 1974 be used in the construction of the vessel to be subjected to the postweld heat treatment, even if the test coupon was not subjected to the postweld heat treatment, or is the requalification required? |
The welding procedure qualified before 1974 cannot be used in the construction of the vessel to be subjected to postweld heat treatment if the test coupon was not subjected to the postweld heat treatment. Requalification is required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
There is no special requirement for welding procedure qualification of tube-to-sheet welding in Section VIII, Division 1.
Can the welding procedures qualified by the groove or fillet conforming to Section IX, welding processes tested conforming to Appendix A of Section VIII, Division 1 or the welding procedures qualified in accordance with the requirements of Section VIII, Division 2 or Section III be used for tube-to-tubesheet welding for the vessel to be fabricated in accordance with Section VIII, Division 1? |
Welding procedures qualified by the groove or fillet conforming to Section IX, using welding processes tested conforming to Appendix A of Section VIII, Division 1, can be used for tube-to-tubesheet welding for the vessel to be fabricated in accordance with Section VIII, Division 1. Since the requirements of Section VIII, Division 2 and of Section III are more restrictive for qualification of tube-to-tubesheet welds, these also would meet Section VIII, Division 1 requirements. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-40 |
Section IX and Section II, Welding Performance Qualification and Welding Procedure Qualification |
|
3/22/1978 |
|
Is it necessary to revise WPSs, PQRs, and Manufacturer's records of welder or welding operator qualification tests which were already recorded in the event that the recommended forms are revised under the new Edition or Addenda? |
It is not necessary to revise WPSs, PQRs, and Manufacturer's records of welder or welding operator qualification tests which were already recorded in the event that the recommended forms are revised under the new Edition or Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5012 |
| IX-78-45 |
Section IX, QW-201.1, Welding Procedure Specification |
QW-201.1 |
3/31/1978 |
|
Must exact filler metal alloy (such as ER308) be stated on the WPS, or is a general classification (such as ERXX) sufficient? |
QW-201.1 states that the WPS shall list in detail the filler metals to be used. The particular electrode classification, or trade name, must therefore be listed on the WPS. QW-404.12 is a variable which also requires the listing of the AWS classification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5013 |
| IX-78-46 |
Section IX, QW-201.3, Combination of Welding Processes or Procedures |
QW-201.3 |
3/31/1978 |
|
Is it necessary to write a new WPS when combining two previously qualified WPSs to do a third combination of welding? |
When two WPSs are combined to provide direction for a third combination of welding, a new WPS will usually be required. The support PQRs from the original WPS should be listed on the new WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5014 |
| IX-78-50 |
Section IX, QW-310.5, Combination with Austenitic Stainless Steel or Nickel Alloy Filler Metals |
QW-310.5 |
3/31/1978 |
|
Does a performance qualification test made using "any" F41 through F45 filler metal with one or a combination of P-Numbers as mentioned in QW-310.5, qualify the operator for all combinations of these base metals, using "any one" F41 through F45 filler metal? |
Yes, provided you have a qualified Welding Procedure Specification for each combination the welder will be using in production. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5016 |
| IX-78-51 |
Section IX, QW-409, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409 |
3/31/1978 |
|
In QW-409.8 it states "... a change in the range of amperage or voltage." QW-409.10 states "a change in amperage of more than + 10%." QW-409.8 is a nonessential variable and QW-409.10 is an essential variable. Please clarify this. |
QW-409.8 is a general statement and is a nonessential variable. The amperage is modified by QW-409.10 and a + 10% change in amperage only is considered an essential variable. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5017 |
| IX-78-52 |
Section IX, Performance Qualifications |
|
3/31/1978 |
|
Is a welder qualified in carbon steel material with AWS E7018 electrode allowed to weld 9 Chrome alloy steel with AWS E505 electrode? |
Yes, provided that you have a WPS for 9 Chrome alloy steel with an E505 electrode qualified in accordance with the requirements of the Code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5018 |
| IX-78-53 |
Section IX, QW-421, Substitution of P-Number Materials |
QW-421 |
4/4/1978 |
|
May a P-No. 5 Group 1 base metal of tensile strength 70,000 psi be used when a welder is qualified on P-No. 5, Group 2 base metal of 60,000 psi within the limits of all other remaining applicable essential variables? Notch toughness is not a requirement. |
A P-No. 5 Group 1 base metal of tensile strength 70,000 psi may be used when a welder is qualified on P-No. 5 Group 2 base metal of 60,000 psi, within the limits of the other remaining applicable essential variables, and when notch toughness is not required. You are cautioned that strength of filler metal in production must be equal to the strength of stronger base metal, unless this requirement is waived by the various Sections of the Code for limited applications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5019 |
| IX-78-55 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturers or Contractors Responsibility |
QW-201 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Must the welder or welding operator performing the welding procedure qualification test be an employee of the Manufacturer or Contractor preparing or having the welding procedure specification prepared?
Is it acceptable for the Manufacturer or Contractor to enlist the services of a testing laboratory for the preparation of welding procedure specifications and for a welder in the employ of the testing laboratory to perform the welding procedure qualification tests? |
In QW-201, it is stated that "the welders or welding operators used to produce weldments to be tested for qualification of procedures shall be under the full supervision and control of the Manufacturer, Contractor, assembler, or installer during the production of these test weldments. It is not permissible for the Manufacturer, Contractor, assembler, or installer to have the welding of the test weldments performed by another organization. It is permissible, however, to subcontract any or all of the work of preparation of test materials for welding and subsequent work on preparation of test specimens from the completed weld-ment, performance of nondestructive examination, and mechanical tests, provided the Manufacturer, Contractor, assembler, or installer accepts the responsibility for any such work." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5020 |
| IX-78-56 |
Section IX, QW-403.6, Supplementary Essential Variable, WPS Thickness Range Qualification |
QW-403.6 |
4/4/1978 |
|
What is required to qualify a WPS to weld from 0.203 in. to 0.906 in. when impact testing is a requirement of the applicable Section of the Code. |
A 0.203 in. test coupon is required to meet the intent of QW-403.6. This would qualify from 0.203 in. to 0.406 in. A second test coupon is required to qualify welding up to 0.906 in. This coupon could be 0.453 in. or greater. The 0.453 in. test coupon alone qualifies from 0.453 in. (per QW-403.6) to 0.906 in. but when combined with the 0.203 in. test coupon, would qualify for welding from 0.203 in. thru 0.906 in. There is no need to weld a third test coupon to qualify the gap between 0.406 in. and 0.453 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5021 |
| IX-78-57 |
Section IX, QW-404.3, QW-404.6 and QW-409.12, Filler Rods and Tungsten Electrodes |
QW-404.3; QW-404.6; QW-409.12 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Does QW-404.3 deal with filler rod and QW-404.6 deal with the tungsten electrode? |
Yes. QW-404.3 deals with filler material and QW-404.6 deals with the tungsten electrode. QW-409.12 also deals with the tungsten electrode. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5022 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
When a root pass using SMAW is used to prepare a weld joint for welding by SAW, are these considered a combined process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
When welding procedures are to be used for Section VIII work, is it necessary to state in QW-410, Cleaning, on QW-482, that surfaces must be dean for a distance of ½ in. from the weld joint (UW-32)? |
Cleaning required by Section VIII must be specified on the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
When multiple values are used on multi-pass or combined process welding for current, voltage, and filler sizes, how do you fill in QW-482? Often there is not enough room on the form to be specific. Should the Manufacturer use separate page and reference this page on WPS? |
Requirements of each pass must be specified on the WPS. This can be done in any manner suitable to the Manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Is it necessary to specify the type of NDE for checking back gouging or to specify any NDE at all on a WPS? Should a separate written procedure be submitted for approval with the WPS to fill in areas not covered by the WPS? |
NDE is not required on the WPS. Separate written information may be attached to the WPS to cover areas of welding not on the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
If no preheat is used to weld because the ambient temperature is above the minimum preheat temperature, what is filled in for QW-406, Preheat Temperature, on QW-483? |
The ambient temperature must be recorded. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
When multiple values for current, voltage and filler sizes are used, how do you fill in Form QW-483? |
All values used in qualifying the WPS shall be recorded on the PQR in any manner acceptable to the Manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
In QW-462.1(a) values are given for test specimen sizes. If a ½ in. thick specimen is 0.997 in. wide, is this reason to reject a procedure qualification? |
The values are approximate where stated but the 1 in. minimum is required if t does not exceed 1 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
When a combined process is used, how are welders listed on QW-483 and what is each welder qualified for? |
It must be clearly shown what welding each welder has done on the PQR. Each welder is qualified for the amount of welding he has done in accordance with QW-300. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
When qualifying welders for combined processes, are both welders listed on one QW-484? |
This is at the option of the Manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
If each welder has his own qualification, does the welder who performed the other portion of the combined process have his name on the qualification of the first? |
This is not necessary. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
How is this combined process and qualifications documented on QW-484 in regard to thicknesses qualified and qualifications of a number of welders? |
This is done in accordance with QW-452. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
How are multivalues for current, voltage, and filler size listed in QW-484? |
This is at the option of the Manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-54 |
Section IX, QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484; Section VIII |
QW-482; QW-483; QW-484 |
4/4/1978 |
|
How are QW-482, QW-483, and QW-484 certified? |
This is done by the authorized company representative's signature. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5023 |
| IX-78-58 |
Section IX, QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
4/21/1978 |
|
(1) Can the GTAW process be deleted, as per QW-201.3 and a WPS written for:
(a) A single welded "Vee" groove joint, using SMAW against a backing with a thickness limit of 0.187 in. to 0.489 in.?
(b) Fillets and socket welds using SMAW with a thickness weld deposit range of 0.1875 in. to 0.489 in. in all thicknesses of metal?
(2) Can the SMAW process be deleted, as per QW-201.3, and a WPS written for a single welded "Vee" groove joint using GTAW with a consumable insert and a thickness limit of 0.1875 in. to 0.375 in.?
(3) The question in regards to QW-403.13 is why is it that, when the consumable insert is deleted from the PQR previously described, the procedure is not qualified to weld single "Vee" groove joints with a backing, fillets, and socket welds using both processes? |
(1) and (2). In answer to Questions Nos. 1 and 2; you are permitted to prepare Welding Procedure Specifications in accordance with the provisions of QW-201.3 to meet the conditions of your inquiry.
(3) In answer to Question No. 3; QW-404.13 was revised in the 1977 Summer Addenda to Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5024 |
| IX-78-59 |
Section IX, QW-150, Tension Test Specimens |
QW-150 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Is the requirement of a 0.505 in. diameter of the machined specimens for the testing of tensile strength a rigid one? |
No. The 0.505 in. diameter is a convenient diameter for calculation of square area. It is not required that the 0.505 in. diameter be maintained. Any diameter that covers the full weld may be used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5025 |
| IX-78-60 |
Section IX, QW-407.4, Postweld Heat Treatment in Which the Lower Critical Temperature Is Exceeded |
QW-407.4 |
4/4/1978 |
|
A Procedure Qualification Report using a GTAW root and SMAW balance has been made using A335 Grade P11 pipe (P-No. 4 material in QW-422) as the base material. The maximum which can be welded is 2t. In accordance with QW-403.11, this PQR can be used to back up a WPS using carbon steel (P-No. 1 material) if none of the essential variables are changed including the postweld heat treatment temperature range. If a WPS is written for a transition weld between P-No. 1 and P-No. 4 materials using the same PWHT temperature range, the lower critical temperature of the P-No. 1 material will be exceeded. Is the maximum thickness qualified 2t as in the P-No. 4 material or 1.1t as allowed by QW-407.4? |
The maximum thickness qualified is 1.1t as allowed by QW-407.4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5026 |
| IX-78-61 |
Section IX, QW-461.7 Performance Qualification - Positions Limitations |
QW-461.7 |
4/4/1978 |
|
QW-461.7 indicates that qualification on plate or pipe for the 1G position also qualifies for the 1F position and not for the 2F and 2FR position. Is this incorrect and does the 1G position also qualify for the 2F and 2FR positions? |
QW-461.7 is correct. Performance qualification on a 1G plate or pipe does not qualify a welder for the 2F or 2FR positions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5027 |
| IX-78-62 |
Section IX, QW-203, Limits of Qualified Positions for Procedures |
QW-203 |
4/4/1978 |
|
If a welder welds a test coupon for qualifying a WPS in the 1G position, may all the positions for welding in production be listed on one WPS, or should each position be listed on separate WPSs? |
It depends on how the WPS is intended to be used in production. It may be used either way providing the welder gets the proper direction for each position he will be using. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5028 |
| IX-78-62 |
Section IX, QW-203, Limits of Qualified Positions for Procedures |
QW-203 |
4/4/1978 |
|
If a welder is going to weld in the flat position only for a particular job and if more than one position is allowed on each procedure, may the welder use the multiple-position procedure for a job requiring only one position? |
A welder may use a multiple-position Welding Procedure Specification for a job requiring only one position. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5028 |
| IX-78-62 |
Section IX, QW-203, Limits of Qualified Positions for Procedures |
QW-203 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Could a SMAW-SAW procedure be used only for SMAW (within the limits that the SMAW was qualified)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5028 |
| IX-78-62 |
Section IX, QW-203, Limits of Qualified Positions for Procedures |
QW-203 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Could a procedure that specifies grinding and air-arc use only grinding (or vice-versa)? |
Yes, if the WPS specifies grinding or air-arc. If the WPS specifies grinding and air-arc, then both must be used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5028 |
| IX-78-62 |
Section IX, QW-203, Limits of Qualified Positions for Procedures |
QW-203 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Could a procedure that prescribes two types of electrodes use only one type of electrode? |
Yes, if directions are provided for each type electrode and the WPS specifies one electrode or the other. If both are specified in a specific sequence, then both must be used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5028 |
| IX-78-63 |
Section IX, QW-403.6, Procedure Thickness Qualification |
QW-403.6 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Note (2) was added to QW-451.1 in the 1977 Edition of Section IX. This note refers to QW-403 for further limits on range of thickness qualified.
As an example, to qualify a ¾ in. thick test specimen using the SMAW process, QW-451.1 indicates the thickness range qualified to be 3/16 in. (minimum) to 1½ in. (maximum). Please assume the WPS to be PWHT. Now a contract under Section III, Division 1, Class MC, imposes notch toughness testing of all welding procedures. Reviewing QW-403 per Note (2) of QW-451.1, please refer to QW-403.6. Further checking for welding variables under Section IX, a review of QW-253 (Shielded Metal-Arc Welding) is made. Under 253.1(a) Supplementary Essential Variables - Notch Toughness, QW-403.6 is applicable. This now tends to indicate that the above ¾ in. test specimen qualifies a range of 5/8 in. (min) to 1½ in. (max).
In a specific situation, if a ¼ in. thick pressure boundary category "A" butt weld has to be made in fabricating a component, does this mean that another WPS would have to be qualified using a ¼ in. thick test specimen to comply with QW-403.6? This would qualify this WPS to a thickness range of ¼ in. (min.) to ½ in. (max.). |
Note (2) was added to QW-451.1 because many people were overlooking the additional restrictions of QW-403. The example given is correct.
The thickness range is 5/8 in. min. to 1½ in. max.
The answer to the specific situation is affirmative. A WPS must be qualified using a ¼ in. thick test coupon which would qualify for a thickness range of ¼ in. min. to ½ in. max.
We are not in agreement with the other interpretations in your letter which you have received from the industry. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5029 |
| IX-78-64 |
Section IX, QW-141 and QW-405.2 |
QW-141; QW-405.2 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Does Section IX require radiographic examination of a welded test coupon prepared for the qualification of a Welding Procedure Specification. |
Section IX does not require radiographic examination of a welded test coupon prepared for the qualification of a Welding Procedure Specification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5030 |
| IX-78-64 |
Section IX, QW-141 and QW-405.2 |
QW-141; QW-405.2 |
4/4/1978 |
|
May X-rays be used as an alternative for welders' performance qualifications. |
Radiographic examination may be substituted for mechanical testing of QW-141 for groove-weld performance qualification as permitted in QW-304 to prove the ability of welders to make sound welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5030 |
| IX-78-64 |
Section IX, QW-141 and QW-405.2 |
QW-141; QW-405.2 |
4/4/1978 |
|
The last sentence of QW-405.2 indicates that vertical-uphill qualifies for all positions. In QW-461.3(c), 5G, the weld groove is in the vertical plane as noted in QW-122.3 and welding does progress vertical-up. Would this welding eliminate the required 6G position on pipe to qualify for all positions? |
QW-405.2 is an essential variable for notch toughness requirements when qualifying a Welding Procedure Specification. Groove-weld test coupons for qualifying a WPS may be made in plate in the flat position, except where notch toughness is required. When notch toughness is required, the groove-weld test coupon must be welded in the vertical-up to qualify for all positions. A groove-weld test coupon made in pipe in the 5G position to qualify a WPS is considered to be in accordance with the requirement QW-405.2, provided the diameter size and thickness of the pipe is adequate to obtain the required number of tensile, bend, and impact test specimens. Test specimens from a 5G coupon meeting all the requirements to qualify a WPS will permit welding in all positions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5030 |
| IX-78-64 |
Section IX, QW-141 and QW-405.2 |
QW-141; QW-405.2 |
4/4/1978 |
|
What positions do the 5G and 6G positions qualify for? |
A performance qualification conducted in position 5G will qualify for groove welding in flat (1G), vertical (3G), and overhead (4G) but not for horizontal (2G). It will also qualify for all fillet weld positions. Qualification in position 6G will qualify for all position groove welds and fillet welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5030 |
| IX-78-65 |
Section IX, QW-303.6 Fillet Welds |
QW-303.6 |
4/4/1978 |
|
Is a welder qualified to a groove-weld test that permits him to weld pipe/tube 2-7/8 in. 0.D. and larger (within the limits of QW-350), qualified to weld fillet welds or socket welds on pipe/tube smaller than 2-7/8 in. O.D., i.e., 3/4 in. through 2 in. O.D., without testing in accordance with QW-452.3 or QW-452.4 for this smaller pipe size? |
Yes. Groove-weld performance qualification on a pipe or tube 2-7/8 in. O.D. qualifies a welder to weld fillet welds or socket welds on any diameter without further qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5031 |
| IX-78-67 |
Section IX, QW-442, Weld Deposit Chemistry |
QW-442 |
4/19/1978 |
|
Is it possible to classify as A-No. 2 of QW-442 weld deposits which contain Ni up to 1.1 maximum and whose Mo values may be below 0.40 minimum? |
The weld metal analysis described cannot be classified as any particular A-Number of QW-442 of Section IX. The analysis will require separate qualification with the nominal analysis listed in the Welding Procedure Specification covering this weld metal analysis. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5033 |
| IX-78-68 |
Section IX, QW-469.2 |
QW-469.2 |
4/20/1978 |
|
In welder performance qualification testing, does the term 1G, as defined by Section IX, mean that welding shall be in a single butt joint without backing as shown in QW-469.2? |
The term 1G relates to position of the test assembly pipe in QW-122.1 during the performance of the welding for the performance qualification test and may be single or double welded, with or without backing. The test joints, as shown in QW-469, may be used for welder performance qualification in addition to weld joint configurations contained in the qualified Welding Procedure Specification used in the performance welding. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5034 |
| IX-78-69 |
Section IX, QW-404.4 and QW-201.2 |
QW-404.4; QW-201.2 |
4/20/1978 |
|
For procedure qualifications, considering that QW-404.5 is an essential variable, may QW-404.28 be substituted as an essential variable in place of QW-404.4 in QW-250? If not, could the phrase in QW-404.4 "any other filler metal" be defined in more detail? |
QW-404.28 may not be substituted as an essential variable in place of QW-404.4 for procedure qualifications. Any other filler metal as referred to in QW-404.4 will be that which cannot be classified in one of the appropriate ASME specifications for filler metals and the appropriate F-Number as shown in QW-432. There may be special electrodes within the United States covered by this statement as well as many foreign produced electrodes which are also covered in this statement. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5035 |
| IX-78-69 |
Section IX, QW-404.4 and QW-201.2 |
QW-404.4; QW-201.2 |
4/20/1978 |
|
As an alternate to the requirement in QW-201.2 of issuing a WPS prior to (and maintaining after) performing procedure qualification tests, may instead a detailed PQR be used which documents all essential and nonessential variables of the actual qualification welding? |
The written form of the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and the Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) can be varied to meet the requirements of the Manufacturer or contractor. It is necessary that there be some record of a proposed Welding Procedure Specification prior to the actual test welding for the Procedure Qualification Record. This may be the completion of that portion of a Manufacturer's or contractor's form prior to welding and subsequent completion of the form with the test results when a combined WPS and PQR are desired. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5035 |
| IX-78-71 |
Section IX, Welding Requirements |
|
5/10/1978 |
|
Where procedure qualification tests are performed by the production of a butt weld such as Category A or B weld joint of UW-3 in Section VIII, Division 1, does this also qualify for other welds such as C and D in UW-3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5037 |
| IX-78-72 |
Section IX, QW-432; Section II, Part C |
QW-432 |
5/29/1978 |
|
According to Section IX, QW-432 F-No. 4, ASME SFA-5.4, nominal total alloy more than 6% EXX15, XX16; and Section II, Part C of Material Specifications it says, "that on SFA 5.4 electrode weld metal exceeds 4% chromium and does not exceed 50% nickel." If this is correct then anyone qualifying with an F-No. 4 total alloy over 6% is also qualified for all F-Numbers below F-No. 4 with above 6% total alloy? |
The electrodes up to F-No. 4 are for the ferritic steels, as indicated in QW-310.4(a). For the use of A-No. 8 or A-No. 9 composition filler metals, QW-310.4(b) specifically mentions F-No. 5 electrodes for joining various base metals (and allows use of carbon steel P-No. 1 plate or pipe to be used for the performance qualification). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5038 |
| IX-78-73 |
Section IX, QW-422.43; Section II, Part C, SFA-5.14 and SFA-5.11 |
QW-422.43 |
6/7/1978 |
|
Section IX lists two grades for SB-443 in QW-422.43 while SB-443 in Section II, Part B does not. What is the correct listing? |
The listing of SB-443 annealed, Grade 2, in Section IX is incorrect as there is no such material in the SB-443 specification. Section IX will be corrected to show SB-443 annealed with a 120,000 psi tensile strength. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5039 |
| IX-78-73 |
Section IX, QW-422.43; Section II, Part C, SFA-5.14 and SFA-5.11 |
QW-422.43 |
6/7/1978 |
|
SFA-5.14 and SFA-5.11 lists Class ERNiCrMo-3 filler metals with an as-welded tensile strength of 110,000 psi while the tensile strength in SB-443 is listed as 120,000. What is the correct minimum tensile strength for this material? |
The tensile strengths given in the specifications for both the filler metals and the base metals are correct. The SB-443 material is one of those rare cases in the Code where the tensile strength requirements for the base materials specification are higher than for the filler metal used to join that material. This fact is accounted for in the stress tables in which SB-443 is listed. The allowable stresses are based upon the strength of the weld metal, 110,000 psi minimum. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5039 |
| IX-78-71 |
Section IX, Welding Requirements |
|
5/10/1978 |
|
The thickness of weld in a procedure qualification test made in the performance of a butt weld controls the thickness range of qualifying for that particular procedure test. How does this apply in the consideration of weld thickness for other than butt welds? |
The thickness of the weld with respect to both procedure qualification for welding and consideration of postweld heat treatment requirements is confirmed by the appropriate Section of the Code; that is, Sections I, III, IV, or VIII. The Sections have approached this requirement by stating that the thickness of the weld shall be the depth of the weld deposit; such as, in UW-16.1 of Section VIII, Division 1, design (a) is the thickness through the nozzle neck and design (c) through the vessel shell thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5037 |
| IX-78-71 |
Section IX, Welding Requirements |
|
5/10/1978 |
|
Does a qualified Welding Procedure Specification in which procedure qualification tests employing a single sided butt weld without backing also qualify a double welded butt weld? |
Yes, except for QW-260 and QW-261, joint design is not an essential variable in the Weld-ing Procedure Specification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5037 |
| IX-78-71 |
Section IX, Welding Requirements |
|
5/10/1978 |
|
Does a welder performance qualification test in a single weld without backing also qualify for a double welded joint? |
Each welding process, as listed in QW-350, must be reviewed for the appropriate essential variable under QW-402. The addition or deletion of backing may be an essential variable, depending on the welding process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5037 |
| IX-78-71 |
Section IX, Welding Requirements |
|
5/10/1978 |
|
When a performance qualification test plate is produced by welding a 3/4 in. thick carbon steel plate with a welder using GTAW for the first pass with two additional passes of SMAW and completion by a welding operator with SAW, what are the thickness limits of welder and welding operator qualifications? |
The welder who performed the GTAW welding is qualified to twice the thickness of the weld metal deposited with the minimum of 1/16 in. using GTAW process. The welder using the SMAW process is qualified to twice the thickness qualified with the minimum as specified in QW-452.1 with the SMAW process. Your attention is also invited to QW-351 when a combination of processes are being employed. The welding operator is qualified for all thicknesses with the SAW welding process. See QW-305. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5037 |
| IX-78-74 |
Section IX, Qualification of Seal Welds |
|
6/7/1978 |
|
May a qualified Welding Procedure Specification which includes postweld heat treatment be used for seal welds which are not postweld heat treated? |
A Welding Procedure Specification which has been qualified with postweld heat treatment of the procedure qualification test may not be employed for production welding where no postweld heat treatment will be applied. QW-407.1, which is an essential variable for all welding processes, requires requalification when postweld heat treatment is omitted. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5040 |
| IX-78-75 |
Section IX, QW-461, Position Qualification |
QW-461 |
6/7/1978 |
|
In QW-461.7, qualification for plate-groove process 2G qualifies a welder for the pipe fillet weld position 1F, 2F, and 2FR. Qualification for pipe-groove process 2G qualifies for plate-groove processes 1G and 2G but for pipe fillet welds processes 1F and 2F only. Should not the pipe-groove process 2G also include the 2FR process under the pipe fillet weld column? |
QW-461.7 was included as a convenience for the interpretation of QW-303. In the plate-groove test process 2G, the pipe fillet weld process 2FR is incorrectly included in accordance with the present Code rules. However, when the Summer 1978 Addenda to Section IX, QW-303.6 is being revised to include the pipe fillet weld 2FR process as a qualified process when the test was either a plate-groove or pipe-groove in the 2G position. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5041 |
| IX-78-75 |
Section IX, QW-461, Position Qualification |
QW-461 |
6/7/1978 |
|
QW-461.7 lists positions 2G and 5G in the pipe-groove test as qualifying for all positions in both plate and pipe welding. Does this also include position 6G? |
Yes. Position 6G is included in this same table under pipe-groove qualification test as qualifying for all positions in both plate and pipe welding. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5041 |
| IX-78-76 |
Section IX, QW-153(d) |
QW-153(d) |
6/7/1978 |
|
QW-153.1(d) permits acceptance of the tension test if the specimen breaks in the base metal outside of the weld or fusion line where the strength is not more than 5% below the specified minimum tensile strength of the base metal. What are the requirements if the specimen breaks in the weld or fusion line? |
If the tension test specimen breaks in the weld or fusion line, it shall have a tensile strength not less than that required in QW-153.1(a), (b), or (c). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5042 |
| IX-78-77 |
Section IX, QW-452.3, Welder Performance Qualification Test Size and Thickness Limitations |
QW-452.3 |
6/7/1978 |
|
When welding in the 6G position, is the following the proper interpretation of QW-452.3?
Sample Weld Coupon Qualifies for
Minimum Maximum Nom. Size Nom. Thickness O.D.1 Thickness O.D. Thickness
1/2 in. 0.188 in. 0.840 in. 0.0625 in. Any 0.376 in.
1-1/2 in. 0.145 in. Over 1 in. 0.0625 in. Any 0.290 in.
6 in. 0.280 in. 2.875 in. 0.0625 in. Any 0.560 in.
1 Also please note comments on "job size" pipe in QW-310.1, last sentence. |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5043 |
| IX-78-77 |
Section IX, QW-452.3, Welder Performance Qualification Test Size and Thickness Limitations |
QW-452.3 |
6/7/1978 |
|
QW-303.6 permits the qualifying for small diameter pipe fillet welds when actually qualifying with a groove weld test. Is the man qualified for all small diameter pipe fillet welds (no limitations on base metal thickness or pipe diameter) or only for fillet welds on pipe where the pipe thickness and diameter are within the limits of the qualified groove weld test? |
Qualifying with a groove weld test, whether it be a plate or weld test, qualifies for all fillet welds with no limitations on base metal thickness or pipe diameter, within the limits of the other welding variables in QW-350 for the applicable welding process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5043 |
| IX-78-78 |
Section IX, QW-255 and QW-355, FCAW |
QW-255; QW-355 |
6/7/1978 |
|
The Winter 1977 Addenda of Section IX has included flux cored arc welding (FCAW) in the heading for QW-255 and QW-355. Previous correspondence from ASME stated that when welding with flux cored electrodes the provisions of QW-255 apply when the shielding gas is used and QW-253 when the shielding gas was omitted. May we continue to use the flux cored welding process in accordance with these previous instructions? |
The flux cored arc welding process shall meet the provisions of QW-255 for procedure qualifications and QW-355 for performance qualifications. The use of the provisions of QW-253 are not applicable to flux cored arc welding. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5044 |
| IX-78-79 |
Section IX, QW-442; Section II, Part C; A-Numbers |
QW-442; |
6/12/1978 |
|
Is it the intent that E6010 and E6011 electrodes or E7015, E7016, and E7018 electrodes, as specified in Section II, Part C, SFA-5.1, conform to A-No.1, F-No. 3, and A-No.1, F-No. 4 classifications and groups, respectively, or must each electrode be limited to the F-Number grouping of QW-432 only and subsequently require individual electrode procedure qualifications because it has no A-Number class validity? |
It is the intent of the Code that electrodes of SFA-5.1 of Section II, Part C shall conform to F-Numbers of QW-432 and A-Numbers of QW-442 of Section IX, as given below.
AWS Class F-No. A-No.
E6010 3 1
E6011 3 1
E7015 4 1
E7016 4 1
E7018 4 1 |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5045 |
| IX-78-80 |
Section IX, QW-281.2(c), AISI Type of A-No. 8 or A-No. 9 Analysis |
QW-281.2(c) |
6/12/1978 |
|
What are the qualification requirements with respect to weld metal analysis for A-No. 8 or A-No. 9 analysis in QW-281.2(c)? |
The intent of the Code is to require requalification for a change from one (AISI) type of stainless steel filler metal to another. For example, a change from 309 to 308 or 312 would require requalification. However, a change from 308-15 to 308-16 or vice versa would not require requalification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5046 |
| IX-78-81 |
Section IX, QW-462.2(a) and QW-463.2(a) |
QW-462.2(a); QW-463.2(a) |
6/23/1978 |
|
Is it permissible to remove weld reinforcements and backing strips or rings in the preparation of side bend specimens of QW-462.2(a)? |
Weld reinforcements and backing strips and backing rings shall be removed flush with the undisturbed surface of the base material. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5047 |
| IX-78-81 |
Section IX, QW-462.2(a) and QW-463.2(a) |
QW-462.2(a); QW-463.2(a) |
6/23/1978 |
|
Is there any maximum or minimum length required for the performance qualification test plate in QW-463.2(a)? |
The length of the qualification test plate shall be adequate to permit removal of the bend tests specified in QW-452.1 or QW-452.2 and to permit their preparation to meet the dimensional requirements in QW-462 for the appropriate bend test being prepared. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5047 |
| IX-78-82 |
Section IX, Welding in Hot Formed Heads |
|
6/23/1978 |
|
Where fabrication will require A-No.2 weld metal for the joining of P-No.1 materials to meet the strength requirements as affected by postweld heat treatments, is the A-No.2 weld metal considered a P-No.3 material in subsequent fabricating operations requiring both P-No.1 to P-No.1 and P-No.1 to P-No.3 procedure qualifications? |
A-No.2 weld metal is never considered as a P-No.3 material. Furthermore QW-404.5 permits P-No.1 materials to be fabricated with either A-No. 1 or A-No.2 weld metal analysis with a Welding Procedure Specification that has been qualified with either an A-No.1 or A-No.2 analysis or vice versa. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5048 |
| IX-78-83 |
Section IX, 1974 Edition, QW-403.6 |
QW-403.6 |
6/23/1978 |
|
If the thickness of the test plate or pipe is more than 5/8 in. and QW-403.6 is specified as a Supplementary Essential Variable, what is the minimum thickness qualified? |
When QW-403.6 is required as a Supplementary Essential Variable for notch toughness, the minimum thickness qualified when the test plate or pipe is greater than 5/8 in. is 5/8 in. The minimum thickness specified in QW-451 is the minimum thickness qualified, except when QW-403.6 is listed as a Supplementary Essential Variable. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5049 |
| IX-78-84 |
Section IX, QW-422, A-Numbers vs. AWS Requirements |
QW-422 |
6/23/1978 |
|
Prior to the Winter 1976 Addenda of Section IX, the E8018-C3 electrodes met the A-No. 12 category of QW-442. What is the A-Number category for this electrode in the revised QW-442 A-Numbers? |
All E8018-C3 electrodes now meet the requirements for A-No. 10 in QW-442. This was also true in 1976. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5050 |
| IX-78-85 |
Section IX, QW-201.1 and QW-201.2 |
QW-201.1; QW-201.2 |
7/5/1978 |
|
Is it the intent of QW-201.1 to list on the Welding Procedure Specification each essential and nonessential variable required for each process whether the variable is applicable for that particular process or not? |
It is the intent of QW-201.1 as stated: "The WPS information may be presented in any form, written or tabular, to fit the needs of each manufacturer or contractor as long as every essential and nonessential variable required of the appropriate welding process or processes (QW-252 through QW-281) is included." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5051 |
| IX-78-85 |
Section IX, QW-201.1 and QW-201.2 |
QW-201.1; QW-201.2 |
7/5/1978 |
|
Do the requirements of QW-201.2 on the Procedure Qualification Record require a similar enumeration? |
The requirements of QW-201.2 call for the Procedure Qualification Record to document the essential variables of the applicable process or processes required by QW-252 through QW-281. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5051 |
| IX-78-86 |
Section IX, QW-305 |
QW-305 |
7/11/1978 |
|
Is it the intent of the Code, QW-305, that if a man qualifies using a semi-automatic process (submerged arc), is he also qualified using automatic submerged arc where the arc is positioned via a fully motorized manipulator? |
It is the intent of the Code that welding operators would be governed by the requirements of QW-305 which would cover all automatic processes. Semi-automatic submerged arc process, which would be performed by a welder, would need to comply with the requirements of QW-304 and QW-354. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5052 |
| IX-78-87 |
Section IX, Summer Addenda, QW-202.2 |
QW-202.2 |
7/31/1978 |
|
Is there a limit on the minimum depth of deposited metal for repair or build-up welding? Does this override the minimum limits listed in Table QW-451.1? |
If you limit the weld layers to ½ in. or less in thickness, then the minimum limits of QW-451.1 are overridden as far as weld metal thickness is concerned. New work has been done on QW-451.1 which will help clarify this item. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5053 |
| IX-78-87 |
Section IX, Summer Addenda, QW-202.2 |
QW-202.2 |
7/31/1978 |
|
Does qualification on test plates/material less than 3 in. thick allow repair and build-up welding on base material of thickness up to 2t, with a depth of deposited metal being limited to a maximum of 2t? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5053 |
| IX-78-87 |
Section IX, Summer Addenda, QW-202.2 |
QW-202.2 |
7/31/1978 |
|
Does qualification on test plates/material 3 in. thick or greater allow repair and build-up welding on base material of any thickness, the depth of the deposited metal is limited to a maximum of 2t? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5053 |
| IX-78-87 |
Section IX, Summer Addenda, QW-202.2 |
QW-202.2 |
7/31/1978 |
|
Is it permissible to perform repairs deeper than 6 in. using for qualification plate with a thickness of at least one-half the depth of the repair? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5053 |
| IX-78-87 |
Section IX, Summer Addenda, QW-202.2 |
QW-202.2 |
7/31/1978 |
|
Is it correct to assume that the thickness of the material being repaired refers to the location where the repair is being made? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5053 |
| IX-78-88 |
Section IX, QB-402.1 and QB-402.2 Material Qualification |
QB-402.1; QB-402.2 |
8/2/1978 |
|
QB-402.1 and QB-402.2 are Essential Variables for procedure and performance qualification, respectively, which indicate that a change from a base metal listed under one P-Number in QB-422 to a base metal listed under another P-Number or to any other base metal require requalification. Can a procedure which is qualified using ASME SB-12 Alloy 122 be used for the brazing of ASME SB-42 Alloy 122 (P-No. 107) material? Can a procedure which is qualified with ASME SB-466 Alloy 706 (similar to P-No. 107 material, SB-111 Alloy 706) be used to qualify a brazing procedure for joining SB-12 Alloy 122 (similar to P-No. 107 material, SB-42 Alloy 122)? |
The answer to both questions presented is in the affirmative that qualification with Alloy 122 or Alloy 706, both included in P-No. 107, will qualify all other product forms of that same alloy. The Committee recognizes that the P-Number tables of the Brazing Section of Section IX need revision and updating to cover the other product forms for alloys now listed. The precedent of permitting other product forms of similar chemistry materials has been well established in all the book sections of the Code in their General Requirements paragraphs on materials. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5054 |
| IX-78-89 |
Section IX, QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
8/3/1978 |
|
Is it acceptable to delete a GMAW root pass (using E70T-1 wire) which was initially in a qualified combination procedure with SAW remainder using a F 72-EM12K flux/filler (base material is P-No. 1, Group 2), and add an SMAW root pass using E7018 electrode, without requalification, provided that the SMAW procedure is qualified within the thickness range for that process? |
It is the intent of QW-201.3 to allow the deletion of a GMAW process which was previously qualified in combination with one or more other processes and to add an SMAW process without requalification providing the SMAW process has been qualified within the thickness limits specified in QW-202.2, QW-403, and QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5055 |
| IX-78-90 |
Section IX, QW-462.1(a) |
QW-462.1(a) |
8/11/1978 |
|
Referring to QW-462.1(a), may the specified widths of the reduced section tensile specimens be reduced as follows?
Plate Thickness Present Widths Proposed Width
1 in. or less 1-1/2 in. approx., 1 in. min. 1/2 in. min.
Over 1 in. 1 in. min. 3/8 in. min.
The reason for this inquiry is that the present minimum sizes impose a very high load requirement on tensile testing equipment. The proposed reduction would still test significantly more weld cross-sectional area than that tested by the turned 0.505 in. diameter specimens [QW-461.2(d)], which are also permitted for procedure qualification tensile testing, and which are more expensive to prepare. |
The widths of the reduced section tensile specimens shall be as specified in QW-462.1(a). However, your attention is called to QW-141.1, which permits the mechanical cutting of a single specimen into a number of approximately equal pieces to accommodate the available testing equipment. If this provision will not permit specimens which can be tested within the capabilities of the testing equipment, the specimen of QW-461.2(d) is to be employed in accordance with the instructions of QW-151.3. The speci-mens contained in QW-462 are standard specimens used throughout the welding industry in the various specifications controlling qualification in which tensile testing is required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5056 |
| IX-78-90 |
Section IX, QW-462.1(a) |
QW-462.1(a) |
8/11/1978 |
|
Referring to QW-462.1(a), may the specified thickness of reduced specimens be reduced by a maximum of 10% of the plate thickness? (This is in addition to grinding the reinforcement flush.) |
The Code does not specify any maximum reduction in the thickness. The minimum amount of material needed to produce parallel surfaces shall be removed from the test specimen. Figure QW-462.1(a) was revised in the Summer 1978 Addenda to Section IX recognizing that a test specimen will distort during welding. Cold straining is permitted prior to the removal of the weld reinforcement. These revisions were made to clarify the intent of the Committee. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5056 |
| IX-78-91 |
Section IX, QW-302.3 and QW-452.3 |
QW-302.3; QW-452.3 |
8/14/1978 |
|
QW-302.1 requires that the type and number of specimens for performance qualification to be in accordance with QW-452. QW-452.3 specifies two bend tests for each performance qualification. However, QW-302.3 requires four specimens from pipe in positions 5G or 6G of QW-461.3 removed in accordance with the sequence of QW-463.2(d) or (e). What are the proper requirements: the two bend tests of QW-452.3 or the four bend tests required by QW-302.3? |
The four bend tests required by QW-302.3 are correct. The Summer 1978 Addenda of Section IX has revised QW-452.3 to correct this inconsistency. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5057 |
| IX-78-91 |
Section IX, QW-302.3 and QW-452.3 |
QW-302.3; QW-452.3 |
8/14/1978 |
|
QW-452.3 of Section IX specifies that a welder must weld a performance qualification coupon with a thickness of 3/4 in. and over to have an unlimited maximum thickness qualification. SA-106 has a minimum thickness of 0.656 in. for a nominal thickness of 0.75 in. Can a performance qualification specimen that is greater than 0.656 in. but less than 0.75 in. thick be used to qualify a welder for an unlimited maximum thickness? |
No. The thickness of the performance qualification must be 3/4 in. (0.750 in.) or over for an unlimited qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5057 |
| IX-78-92 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification on Combination Welding |
|
9/25/1978 |
|
If a welder makes a combination performance qualification test weld using GTAW and SMAW on 0.75 wall pipe, can he make production welds in combination to unlimited thickness? |
The welder does not have unlimited thickness qualification. He is limited to the sum of the thickness qualified by each welding process in the performance qualification test weld as listed in QW-452. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5058 |
| IX-78-92 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification on Combination Welding |
|
9/25/1978 |
|
If a welder makes a combination test weld with GTAW and SMAW on 0.500 wall pipe, what is the maximum wall thickness he can weld in combination if we assume 3/16 in. of GTAW is deposited in both the test weld and the production weld while the remaining 5/16 in. is deposited with SMAW? |
Since the inquiry has restricted the GTAW to 3/16 in. for both the test weld and the production weld, the only variable shall be the amount deposited by the SMAW. The maximum amount that can be deposited by the SMAW process in addition to the 3/16 in. of the GTAW is 5/8 in. by the SMAW process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5058 |
| IX-78-92 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification on Combination Welding |
|
9/25/1978 |
|
When a welder is tested in combination, is it required to measure the actual thickness of the GTAW weld deposit with a depth gage? |
The method of measurement of the actual thickness of the GTAW weld deposit is left to the stamp holder. The Code does not specify the actual method of measurement. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5058 |
| IX-78-95 |
Section IX, QW-214.1 |
QW-214.1 |
10/4/1978 |
|
Under the requirements of QW-214.1, is the test plate thickness for production base metal greater than 1 in. required to be at least 1 in. thickness? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5059 |
| IX-78-95 |
Section IX, QW-214.1 |
QW-214.1 |
10/4/1978 |
|
Under the requirements of QW-214.1, is the test plate thickness for production base metal less than 1 in. required to be a thickness that is as thick as the production base metal (with the understanding that a thickness less than the production base metal is also acceptable)? |
The intent of QW-214.1 is that qualification for production base metal less than 1 in. thick must be done on test metal which is equal to or less than the thickness of the production base metal. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5059 |
| IX-78-95 |
Section IX, QW-214.1 |
QW-214.1 |
10/4/1978 |
|
May Corrosion Resistant Overlay Clad procedures (WPS) that have been qualified in accordance with Section VIII, UCL-43 (1977 Edition) on ¼ in. or thicker plate be used for all production base metal thickness providing the existing WPS meets all of the essential variables of QW-281.2 through QW-281.4? |
The production base metal thickness shall be qualified as listed in QW-214.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5059 |
| IX-78-93 |
Section IX, Electrodes and Flash Butt Welding |
|
10/2/1978 |
|
In applying the requirements of QW-404.4 and QW-404.5 to electrodes which are not produced in accordance with AWS/SFA requirements, must requalification be made for each lot or heat item number of a particular proprietary type of electrode? |
Qualification with a proprietary type of electrode which is not in accordance with an AWS/SFA specification shall qualify those electrodes as long as the electrodes continue to meet the proprietary requirements for that particular electrode; that is, proprietary specifications covering chemistry and strength of the electrode. It is not necessary to requalify new heats of such new electrodes when they meet the requirements of proprietary specification. The chemistry and strength of that specification should be identified in the Welding Procedure Specification by actual values or references to the appropriate proprietary specification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5060 |
| IX-78-93 |
Section IX, Electrodes and Flash Butt Welding |
|
10/2/1978 |
|
Since flash butt welding is permitted under the rules of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section I, why does Section IX not cover qualification of procedures and operators even though referenced in Section I for such requirements? |
Section IX has not covered some of the automatic welding processes such as flash butt welding, but the Code has accepted the use of this welding method when the procedure has been tested to meet the requirements of QW-451 for a number of specimens and the requirements of QW-305 for qualification of the operators. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5060 |
| IX-78-94 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, QW-406.3, QW-409.1, and QW-410.24 |
QW-403.5; QW-406.3; QW-409.1; QW-410.24 |
10/3/1978 |
|
In interpreting QW-403.5, must the Welding Procedure Specification state the group number or the type and grade of material when the base metals have specified impact test requirements for the flux cored arc welding process? |
QW-403.5 is a Supplementary Essential Variable for the flux cored arc welding process and becomes an Essential Variable when notch toughness testing of the base metals is required by the Section of the Code to which the vessel is being fabricated. If the Welding Procedure Specification is to be employed under these conditions, it must state the P-Number and group number of materials to which the welding procedure can be applied and which procedure qualification records of the procedure qualification test will substantiate. QW-403.5 and its other applicable paragraphs under QW-403 must all be considered as applied to the welding process. QW-403.5 does not conflict with the other specified QW-403 paragraphs but supplements them when notch toughness is a factor. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5061 |
| IX-78-94 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, QW-406.3, QW-409.1, and QW-410.24 |
QW-403.5; QW-406.3; QW-409.1; QW-410.24 |
10/3/1978 |
|
QW-406.3 indicates that an increase in the specified maximum interpass temperature is cause for requalification of the procedure. Must the Welding Procedure Specification and the procedure qualification record list the maximum interpass temperatures, and who specifies the maximum interpass temperature? |
QW-406.3 is a Supplementary Essential Variable where notch toughness is required by the Section of the Code to which the vessel is being fabricated. The maximum interpass temperature shall be specified by the stamp holder and shall be included in both the Welding Procedure Specification and the procedure qualification record. This shall be the temperature observed and attained as maximum interpass temperature during the welding of the welding procedure qualification test coupons. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5061 |
| IX-78-94 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, QW-406.3, QW-409.1, and QW-410.24 |
QW-403.5; QW-406.3; QW-409.1; QW-410.24 |
10/3/1978 |
|
In QW-409.1, are voltage ranges required in the WPS for Shield Metal Arc welding when using a constant current welding machine, and what are the maximum amperages and voltages qualified for the WPS? |
QW-409.1 has been revised by committee action and will appear in the Winter 1978 Addenda to Section IX. The essence of the change will require that the stamp holder shall account for the heat input as measured by either voltage, amperage, or an increase in weld metal deposited per unit length beyond that qualified will require requalification. If the stamp holder chooses to use amperage, voltage, and travel speed for the control of his heat input, it will be necessary that the Welding Procedure Specification include nominal ranges of the amperage, voltage, and travel speed to be observed for all diameter electrodes to be employed in production welding. These amperage and voltage ranges shall be those observed during the welding of the welding procedure qualification test assemblies. Even though the welding machine is a constant potential power source, the voltage would be included in the WPS so that the Authorized Inspector could assure himself that the intent of QW-409.1 is being met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5061 |
| IX-78-94 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, QW-406.3, QW-409.1, and QW-410.24 |
QW-403.5; QW-406.3; QW-409.1; QW-410.24 |
10/3/1978 |
|
In QW-410.24, does the travel speed recorded during the welding of the welding procedure test coupons become the travel speed for which the WPS is qualified, regardless of process or electrode size? |
With the revision of QW-409.1 to be published in the Winter 1978 Addenda, QW-410.24 will be deleted as the subject of travel speed is an essential of heat input. The travel speed recorded during the welding of the welding procedure test coupon shall be recorded on the procedure qualification record and should be within the travel speed range for the applicable electrode size listed within the Welding Procedure Specification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5061 |
| IX-78-96 |
Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications |
|
12/5/1978 |
|
Are separate performance qualifications required for one person, acting as both welder and welding operator, using the same process within the same essential variables? |
Yes. Section IX considers welders and welding operators to be distinct from one another for performance qualification purposes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5062 |
| IX-78-96 |
Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications |
|
12/5/1978 |
|
Must the performance qualifications for welders and welding operators be maintained and renewed separately? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5062 |
| IX-78-97 |
Section IX, QW-403.6, Thicknesses Qualified |
QW-403.6 |
12/5/1978 |
|
Does QW-403.6, which states "For thicknesses less than 5/8 in. (16 mm) the thickness of the test coupon is the minimum thickness qualified," have any applicability when the test coupon is 5/8 in. and above in thickness? |
QW-403.6 has no effect where the test coupon is 5/8 in. or over in thickness.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected replies sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: August 3, 1979
Replies (1) and (2); For thickness less than 5/8 in., the thickness of the test coupon is the minimum thickness qualified for production welds. For thicknesses 5/8 in. or greater, the minimum thickness qualified is 5/8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5063 |
| IX-78-97 |
Section IX, QW-403.6, Thicknesses Qualified |
QW-403.6 |
12/5/1978 |
|
When QW-403.6 is listed as an essential variable, what is the minimum thickness qualified when the test coupon is 5/8 in. or over in thickness? |
As stated above QW-403.6 does not apply to test coupons 5/8 in. thick and over. The thickness range qualified here would be found in QW-451 in general and may be limited by other applicable essential variables. If QW-403.6 is an essential variable, if no other thickness limitation factors come into play, the minimum thickness qualified by a test coupon ½ in. thick would be ½ in. For a test coupon, 5/8 in. thick on from there up to but not including 3/4 in., the minimum thickness qualified would be 3/16 in., per QW-451.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected replies sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: August 3, 1979
Replies (1) and (2); For thickness less than 5/8 in., the thickness of the test coupon is the minimum thickness qualified for production welds. For thicknesses 5/8 in. or greater, the minimum thickness qualified is 5/8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5063 |
| IX-78-98 |
Section IX, Lap Dimension Requirements for Reduced-Section Tension Test Specimens, QB-463.3 |
QB-463.3 |
12/6/1978 |
|
Is the X=4t min ratio shown in QB-463.3 binding, or may the test specimen use a shorter lap? |
The X=4t min ratio is not binding; it is included in QB-463.3 as a typical lap-to-thickness ratio, but it is not in the scope of Section IX to prescribe joint design. As QB-408.1, which states "A change in the joint design details; such as, from a butt to a lap or socket, or a change in lap of plus or minus 25%," applies to all brazing procedure qualifications, a mandatory X=4t min would indeed place a restriction on joint design. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5064 |
| IX-78-99 |
Section IX, Tension Tests and Material Classifications |
|
12/7/1978 |
|
If a tension test specimen breaks in the weld metal at a strength not less than that specified for the base metal, is it acceptable? |
Yes. QW-153.1 provides for this. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5065 |
| IX-78-99 |
Section IX, Tension Tests and Material Classifications |
|
12/7/1978 |
|
If a bend test specimen shows an open defect exceeding 1/8 in. in length on the convex side, is the test coupon acceptable? |
Not generally. Your attention is directed to QW-163 for exact bend test specimen acceptance criteria. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5065 |
| IX-78-99 |
Section IX, Tension Tests and Material Classifications |
|
12/7/1978 |
|
What is the A-Number for electrodes having a nickel content above 4%? |
It is important to state that the A-Numbers apply specifically to the weld deposit and not to the electrode. A-Numbers 8 and 9 apply to weld deposits with nickel contents ranging from 7.50% to 15.00% and from 15.00% to 37%, respectively, but these A-Number classifications also require specified concentration ranges of carbon, chromium, molybdenum, manganese, and silicon. For a weld deposit of, e.g., 4.5% nickel, there is no A-Number classification, and depending on the applicable essential variables, a separate qualification may be required for such a deposit. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5065 |
| IX-78-99 |
Section IX, Tension Tests and Material Classifications |
|
12/7/1978 |
|
What P- and A-Numbers are applicable to materials not listed in Section IX? |
Occasionally a material to an SA Specification that is usable under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code has not received a P-Number. If this be the case, the Subcommittee on Welding should be so informed that the weldability of material may be considered. Concerning non-Code listed materials, it is the policy of the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to assign P-Numbers only to those materials listed in Section II of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
A-Number classifications have been developed as a convenience for the grouping of weld metal deposits of general usage in Code construction. It is not intended that all weld metals will be included within the A-Numbers of QW-442 and provisions of Section IX permit qualification of other weld metals. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5065 |
| IX-79-01 |
Section IX, Retention of Qualification Specimens and Radiographs |
|
1/2/1979 |
|
What are the retention requirements for welder qualification test coupons that have been accepted by radiography or welder qualification test specimens that have been accepted by bend test? |
There are no retention requirements in the Code for either the bend tests nor the radiographs employed in welder qualification. QW-103 states the responsibility and the record that each manufacturer or contractor shall maintain of the results obtained and shall certify those records. These records shall be accessible to the Authorized Inspector with recommended form, as shown in QW-480. Any requirements beyond certification of records are local options between the stamp holder and his Authorized Inspector.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following was added as a clarification and sent to the inquirer.
Clarification of Reply (1) Issued: October 5, 1979
Reply (1): There are no retention requirements in the Code for either the bend tests nor the radiographs employed in welder qualification. However QW-103.2 states, "Each manufacturer, or contractor, shall maintain a record of the results obtained in welding procedure and welder and welding operator performance qualifications." These records shall be accessible to the Authorized Inspector with recom-mended form, as shown in QW-480. Any requirements beyond certification of records are local options between the stamp holder and his Authorized Inspector. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5066 |
| IX-79-01 |
Section IX, Retention of Qualification Specimens and Radiographs |
|
1/2/1979 |
|
What are the retention requirements for accepted radiographs for welder qualification coupons and of welding procedure qualification? |
The reply to the previous question covers the retention requirements for accepted radiographs of welder qualification coupons. Radiography of a welding procedure qualification is not a requirement nor is it permitted as an acceptance standard for a welding procedure qualification. Welding procedure qualifications must meet the test required by QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5066 |
| IX-79-02 |
Section IX, QW-304 and QW-305 |
QW-304; QW-305 |
1/3/1979 |
|
Are there provisions in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code to permit performance qualification of a welder after the production welding has been completed? |
There are no provisions in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code which recognize qualifi-cation of welders or welding operators after completion of the production welding. There are provisions which permit concurrent qualifications of welders or welding operators as provided in Section IX, QW-304 and QW-305. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5067 |
| IX-79-03 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification for Small Tubing, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
1/2/1979 |
|
"1-in. diameter" tubing may vary (per SA-450) between 0.968 and 1.016 in. in diameter. Under the diameter limitations in QW-452.3 is a welder qualified on a "2-in." (nominal) pipe qualified to weld the "1-in. diameter" tube described above? |
No. QW-452.3 is based on nominal pipe sizes for specimen sizes and for qualification limits. The "over 1" minimum qualified by the 2 in. nominal pipe size would exclude the 1 in. diameter tubing. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5068 |
| IX-79-04 |
Section IX, Use of ASTM A296 Grade CA6NM as P-No. 6 Group 4 for Procedure and Performance Qualification |
|
1/9/1979 |
|
Is it permissible to use ASTM A-296, Grade CA6NM, in lieu of SA-487, Class CA6NM, for welding procedure qualification testing and performance qualification testing to be qualified per Section IX to weld both ASTM A-296, Grade. CA6NM, and SA-487, Class CA6NM? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5069 |
| IX-79-05 |
Section IX, Voltage and Amperage Ranges for a Welding Procedure Specification |
|
1/17/1979 |
|
For Shielded Metal Arc and Gas Tungsten Arc Welding of a base material without requirements for notch toughness, is the amperage and voltage used for the particular diameter of electrode in procedure qualification required to be within the range specified in the Welding Procedure Specification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5070 |
| IX-79-06 |
Section IX, Welder Performance Qualification Materials QW-432 and QW-442 |
QW-432; QW-442 |
1/23/1979 |
|
On a performance qualification test does a welder who qualifies with an E-7018 rod also qualify for using E-8018-B2 or E-9018-B3L rods? |
Yes. They are all listed as having an F-Number classification of 4. Since there are no A-Number essential variables, i.e., since no restrictions are placed on weld-metal-deposit analysis for performance in Section IX extends throughout a single F Number. You are encouraged to review the F-Number essential variables for performance qualifications for further material usability. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5071 |
| IX-79-07 |
Section IX, Slag Inclusions; Section VIII, Division 1, UW-13.2 |
|
1/29/1979 |
|
When using partial penetration welds for the joining of materials of dissimilar thicknesses, such as shown in Fig. UW-13.2 of Section VIII, Division 1, what are the procedure qualification test plate thickness requirements for the production welds? |
The thicknesses qualified are subject to the requirements of QW-451 as further governed by the requirements of QW-202.2(b). Where dissimilar thicknesses are being joined, the thickness of the thinner member shall govern the required thickness of the procedure qualification test plate, as given in QW-451.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following was added as a clarification and sent to the inquirer.
Clarification of Reply Issued: June 4, 1979
Reply: The thicknesses qualified are subject to the requirements of QW-451 as further governed by the requirements of QW-202.2. You must qualify the thickness range for both the base metal and the deposited weld metal thickness ranges to be used in production. In addition, there are two rules in QW-202.2 covering dissimilar thicknesses. Both rules are in the third paragraph in Exception (1). For groove welding qualifications made on test coupons of any thickness, there is no limit on the minimum depth of deposited weld metal nor on the thickness of the thinner of the base metals being joined where they are of dissimilar thickness. Groove welding qualifications made on test coupons 3 in. thick or more shall be applicable for production use for base metal and deposited weld metal thickness up to the maximum given in QW-451 except welds joining dissimilar thicknesses of base metals in which the base metal on one side is equal to or less than the maximum thickness qualified in the PQR, the base metal on the other side may be of any greater thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5072 |
| IX-79-08 |
Section IX, QW-403.6 Diameter Restrictions |
QW-403.6 |
2/6/1979 |
|
Do the diameter restrictions of Section IX, QW-403.16 mandate requalification of welders for fillet and socket welds in pipe 2-7/8 in. nominal diameter and less when the welders have been qualified in large diameter groove welds in pipe? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5073 |
| IX-79-09 |
Section IX, Travel Speed As An Essential Variable for Hardfacing, QW-282.4 |
QW-282.4 |
2/21/1979 |
|
For manually-controlled hardfacing procedure qualification, QW-282.4(h) reads "A variation of more than 10% beyond the travel speed range specified." Does this mean that the travel speed range must be specified on the WPS? |
Yes. The travel speed range must be specified and any change 10% below the lowest speed specified and 10% above the highest speed specified requires requalification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5074 |
| IX-79-10 |
Section IX, Peel Tests |
|
2/20/1979 |
|
When qualifying a lap joint by brazing to Section IX with brazing filler metal of equal or greater strength than the base metals being joined, does failure in the base metal constitute passage of the peel test? |
When qualifying a lap joint with a brazing filler metal of equal or greater strength than the base metals being joined, the sectioning test of QB-181 is used in place of the peel test of QB-170. Sectioning of the specimens shall be as shown in QB-463.9 and acceptance standards of QB-181 shall be met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5075 |
| IX-79-100 |
Section IX, QW-410.10 |
QW-410.10 |
11/5/1979 |
|
QW-410.10 states that a change from a single electrode to a multiple electrode or vice versa is an essential variable when applied to electroslag or electrogas welding. What are the requirements when changing from two to three electrodes or three to four electrodes or vice versa with regard to requalification? |
QW-410.10 requires requalification for any change in the number of electrodes used in the electroslag or electrogas welding processes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5076 |
| IX-79-101 |
Section IX, Welder or Welder Qualification Operator |
|
11/5/1979 |
|
In certain instances when tubing is being manufactured by the material manufacturer, seam welding is employed without the addition of filler metal. Must the welding operator be qualified in accordance with Section IX? |
The materials specification which covers the product being produced will contain any requirements with respect to qualification of the welding operator who operates the production machinery. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5077 |
| IX-79-102 |
Section IX, Postweld Heat Treatment |
|
11/7/1979 |
|
How much may the PWHT temperature of WPS qualification coupons differ from the PWHT temperature of the vessel? |
The PWHT of the qualification test coupons and the PWHT of the vessel must be of the same type of PWHT as outlined in (a), (b), (c), or (d) of QW-407.1. The PWHT of the qualification test coupons should meet the PWHT requirements of either Section I, III, or VIII within these limits and shall qualify for the other Code sections. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5078 |
| IX-79-103 |
Section IX, Procedure Qualification |
|
11/7/1979 |
|
When using SMAW, does a procedure qualification on P-No. 1 to P-No. 8 using F-No. 5, A-No. 8 electrodes, and on P-No. 1 to P-No. 43 using F-No. 43 electrodes also qualify P-No. 1 to P-No. 1 with these electrodes? |
No. QW-403.11, an essential variable for SMAW, states: "A change from a base metal listed under one P-Number in QW-422 to a base metal listed under another P-Number ..." Therefore, a change such as that indicated in the question, requires a separate qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5079 |
| IX-79-104 |
Section IX, QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
11/9/1979 |
|
WPS #1 was written and qualified for a base metal with a thickness of 1.5 in. The processes and depth of deposit to complete the joint are GTAW for the first 0.500 in.; GMAW for the second 0.500 in.; and SMAW for the final 0.500 in. Can the PQR supporting this WPS be used to support the following single process WPS's?
(a) WPS #2-Straight GTAW with a thickness range of 1/16 in. to 1 in.
(b) WPS #3-Straight GMAW with a thickness range of 3/16 in. to 2 in.
(c) WPS #4-Straight SMAW with a thickness range of 3/16 in. to 3 in. |
No. In WPS #2, #3, and #4 the thickness range of the deposited weld metal will be 3/16 in. to 1 in., and the base metal thickness range wilt be 3/16 in. to 3 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5080 |
| IX-79-104 |
Section IX, QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
11/9/1979 |
|
A welder needs to be qualified for SMAW, GMAW, and GTAW, used either separately or in combination. Can he be qualified using WPS #1? |
QW-306 states: "A welder qualified in combination on a single test coupon is qualified to weld in production using any of his processes individually or in different combinations provided he welds within his limits of qualification with each specific process." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5080 |
| IX-79-105 |
Section IX, Thickness of Base Metal Qualified |
|
11/9/1979 |
|
The base metal thickness qualification ranges given in QW-451.1 are further limited by QW-403.7. When qualifying a procedure with a test coupon thickness greater than 1-1/2 in. but less than 8 in., what is the maximum base metal thickness qualified? |
The maximum base metal thickness qualified is twice the test coupon thickness, but in no case greater than 8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5081 |
| IX-79-106 |
Section IX, QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
11/14/1979 |
|
Is it permissible to write two separate WPS's, including different identity numbers, for different welding processes and then perform one multiprocess test weld in accordance with the variables of these two WPS's resulting in one multiprocess PQR? |
QW-201.3 permits the use of separate WPS's to make one joint employing several procedures. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5082 |
| IX-79-106 |
Section IX, QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
11/14/1979 |
|
A procedure has been written and qualified for a double-groove weld. The base metal is 2 in. thick and the root face is 1/8 in. wide and is joined by ½ in. of SMAW. The two remaining grooves are each joined by ¾ in. of SAW. May this qualification be used for separate procedures for SMAW for a base metal thickness range of 3/16 in. to 1 in. and SAW for a base metal thickness range of 3/16 to 3 in.? |
The thickness range given above for SMAW is correct; however, the base metal thickness range for the SAW procedure would be 3/16 in. to 1½ in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5082 |
| IX-79-107 |
Section IX, Qualification of Multiprocess Procedures, QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
11/28/1979 |
|
Two procedures have been qualified, one with SMAW, the other with GTAW. Both were qualified with the same base metal and base metal thickness. May these two procedures be combined (e.g., one layer of GTAW, followed by a layer of SMAW, etc.) for use on single production joint without qualification? |
Yes, provided the thicknesses for both the base metal thickness and the deposited weld metal thickness remain within ranges established in the single process PQR's. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5083 |
| IX-79-108 |
Section IX, Identification of Essential and Nonessential Variables |
|
12/3/1979 |
|
Is it required by Section IX that every applicable essential and nonessential variable be identified on a single document called a WPS, or may the variables be addressed on one or more documents identified on the WPS form for use in conjunction with the WPS? |
The format of the WPS may be any which will fulfill the needs of the stamp holder: a single document, a series of documents properly referenced together, a welding drawing, etc. The WPS, regardless of the format selected, shall include all essential, nonessential, and, when required, supplemental essential variables for the process or processes within the document or documents comprising the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5084 |
| IX-79-109 |
Section IX, Dimensional Tolerances of Test Specimens, QW-462 |
QW-462 |
12/10/1979 |
|
What are the dimensional tolerances for tensile and bend test specimens in QW-462, where such tolerances are not specified? |
Section IX does not specify exact dimensional tolerances for bend test, but recommends that standard commercial machining tolerances be observed. Where the tensile test has rectangular cross sections, it is necessary to take dimension measurements for the purpose of cross sectional area calculations. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5085 |
| IX-79-11 |
Section IX, QW-303 |
QW-303 |
2/15/1979 |
|
Is it the intent of QW-303.4 that qualification in the 6G position shall qualify for all positions for double welds as described in that paragraph? |
Yes.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following was added as a clarification and sent to the inquirer.
Clarification of Reply Issued: October 5, 1979
Reply: No. QW-303.4 covers 1G and 2G positions only. Refer to QW-303.1 and QW-461.7 for rules governing 6G. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5086 |
| IX-79-110 |
Section IX, Base Metal Thickness for Welder Qualification |
|
12/10/1979 |
|
Where a fabricating operation involves the mechanical removal of some of the deposited weld metal subsequent to the completion of the welding operation, what is the weld metal thickness to be observed in establishing the qualification limit for welders? |
The thickness of weld metal deposited by the welder is that which must be observed in establishing the qualifications of the welder. Subsequent weld metal removal is not a factor in the establish-ment of this qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5087 |
| IX-79-111 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification for Hard Facing Weld Metal Overlay, QW-312 |
QW-312 |
12/10/1979 |
|
What essential variables should be used when qualifying welders and welding operators for hard facing weld metal overlay? |
The essential variables for welders and welding operators for hard facing weld metal overlay are identical to those controlling the welding procedure specification QW-282. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5088 |
| IX-79-112 |
Section IX, QW-320 |
QW-320 |
12/26/1979 |
|
In accordance with Section IX, if a welder is active in a specific welding process, does his qualification in that process remain for as long as he is active in that process? |
Assuming the manufacturer has qualified the welder in accordance with one of his qualified welding procedure specifications and there is no specific reason to question his ability to make welds with the process, the welder's qualification in a specific process will remain for as long as he is active in that process in the employ of the manufacturer. If for any reason the welder does not use the welding process for a period of three months, which can be extended to six months if another welding process is being used by the welder, he must be requalified in accordance with QW-322. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5089 |
| IX-79-113 |
Section IX, Procedure Qualification |
|
12/26/1979 |
|
A procedure has been qualified for welding P-No. 8 material to P-No. 8 material using a flux-core self-shielded electrode, F-No. 6 and A-No. 8. May a revised WPS be prepared without requalification, if it is desired to use different base metal-filler metal combinations than those shown on the qualified WPS? These different base metal-filler metal combinations do not require changes to the P-Number for the base metal or the F-Number and A-Number for the filler metal and all other essential variables remain the same |
A WPS, revised as indicated in the question, may be used without requalification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5090 |
| IX-79-12 |
Section IX, Changes in Supplementary Essential Variables, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
2/26/1979 |
|
Under QW-403.5 is it permissible to change other supplementary essential variables, i.e., position, temperature, or electrical characteristics by welding a new test plate from which only impacts are taken? |
No. The opening sentence of the second paragraph of QW-403.5 provides that all requirements be met. This means supplementary essential as well as essential variables. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5091 |
| IX-79-13 |
Section IX, QW-407.1(b) |
QW-407.1(b) |
2/26/1979 |
|
Is it the intent of QW-407.1(b) to require the requalification of a welding procedure when changing from one postweld heat treatment temperature range to another postweld heat treatment temperature range when both are below the critical range? |
No. It is the intent of Section IX that the postweld heat treatment temperature range, below the critical range, employed in the qualification of a welding procedure specification for fabrication in accordance with a Section of the Code shall also qualify for the required postweld heat treatment below the critical range specified by other Sections of the Code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5092 |
| IX-79-14 |
Section IX, Variables for Welder Performance Qualification for Hard Facing Weld Metal Overlay, QW-312 |
QW-312 |
2/26/1979 |
|
Do the variables in QW-350 apply for the qualification of welders for hard facing weld metal overlay application? |
Reply: No. A welder who meets the requirements of QW-312 is qualified to do all hard facing weld metal overlay applications using the same process.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following was added as a clarification and sent to the inquirer.
Clarification of Reply Issued: October 5, 1979
Reply: No. QW-312 covers qualification requirements for a welder for hard facing weld metal overlay.
|
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5093 |
| IX-79-15 |
Section IX, Revision of the Procedure Qualification Record, QW-201.2 |
QW-201.2 |
2/27/1979 |
|
If a nonessential variable on a Welding Procedure Specification is changed, must the Procedure Qualification Record supporting that Welding Procedure Specification be changed to reflect the nonessential variable change? |
Since the Procedure Qualification Record is used to record the actual data used in qualifying a Welding Procedure Specification, such data shall not be revised when a nonessential variable is changed. QW-201.1 does require, however, that a Welding Procedure Specification having undergone a nonessential variable change must be revised or rewritten to reflect such a change. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5094 |
| IX-79-16 |
Section IX, Deletion of a Part of a Shielded Metal-Arc Procedure, QW-253 |
QW-253 |
3/1/1979 |
|
May a welder, qualified using a combination welding procedure for shielded metal-arc welding on a single test coupon, specifically E6010 root and E7018 fill, weld on Code construction using the E7018 electrode only, if the production joint employs a backing, and all other essential variables are the same, and the welder deposits weld metal only within the range qualified by his E7018 portion of his performance qualifications? |
Yes. The thickness limit is that of the test coupon, including both E6010 and E7018 deposited weld metals. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5095 |
| IX-79-17 |
Section IX, Pipe Welding Qualification Test Coupon Thickness Definition, QW-451, QW-452 |
QW-451; QW-452 |
3/12/1979 |
|
In QW-451 and QW-452 how are "Thickness T of Test Coupon Welded" and "Nominal Pipe Size of Sample Weld," respectively, defined? |
In both cases when standard-size pipe is used for qualification test specimens, T is defined as the nominal wall thickness of the pipe as listed in the applicable SA pipe specification in Section II. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5096 |
| IX-79-18 |
Section IX, Additional Test Specimens Required for Notch Toughness Condition, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
3/19/1979 |
|
If a welding procedure has already been qualified to satisfy all requirements other than notch toughness and a new procedure is to be qualified without changing essential variables but incorporating additional supplementary essential variables, will it be necessary to prepare an additional test coupon using the new procedure, only to provide necessary notch toughness specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5097 |
| IX-79-19 |
Section IX, Welding Material "F" Numbers |
|
3/19/1979 |
|
May welding rods, electrodes, and filler metals not meeting an American Welding Society (AWS) Specification be assigned F-Numbers provided they meet another specification, such as a Japan Institute of Steel one? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5098 |
| IX-79-20 |
Section IX, Welding Procedures When Essential Variables are Revised in Subsequent Editions of Section IX |
|
3/19/1979 |
|
QW-311(a) of the 1977 Edition with Winter 1977 Addenda, now requires that at least three weld beads of overlay be used for qualification for weld overlay cladding. Is it the intent of the Code that weld overlay procedures qualified before the Winter 1977 Addenda which became mandatory now must be revised in order to clad components with Code effective dates earlier than December 31, 1977? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5099 |
| IX-79-21 |
Sections IX and III, Weld Thickness Qualified and Postweld Heat Treatment Requirements |
|
3/19/1979 |
|
A shielded metal arc welding procedure is qualified using a 1 in. thick test coupon. What are the maximum plate thickness and weld depth qualified thereby? |
The maximum plate thickness and weld depth qualified are each 2 in., as indicated by QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5100 |
| IX-79-21 |
Sections IX and III, Weld Thickness Qualified and Postweld Heat Treatment Requirements |
|
3/19/1979 |
|
Does Section IX limit the SMAW weld repair depth qualified when no postweld heat treatment is used? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5100 |
| IX-79-21 |
Sections IX and III, Weld Thickness Qualified and Postweld Heat Treatment Requirements |
|
3/19/1979 |
|
For a repair weld procedure qualified as described above, what is the maximum repair, partial penetration, or fillet weld thickness or depth that can be made without postweld heat treatment under Section III, Subsection NE, Table NE-4622.3-1? |
Repair, partial penetration, and fillet welds up to ¾ in. thick or deep may be made under the conditions described above provided the base metal is over 1½ in. thick and provided a 200°F minimum preheat is applied. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5100 |
| IX-79-22 |
Section IX, Brazing Qualification Peel-Test Acceptance Criteria, QB-172 |
|
4/25/1979 |
|
Is it the intent of Section IX, QB-172 that brazing qualification peel test specimens must meet all of the acceptance criteria of QB-172 [namely, in the paragraph itself and subparagraphs (1), (2), and (3)]? |
Yes. A specimen failing to meet any of the criteria is unacceptable. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5101 |
| IX-79-23 |
Section IX, Welding of Split Backing Rings, QW-402.2, QW-402.4 |
QW-402.2; QW-402.4 |
4/30/1979 |
|
If a welder is qualified to weld using a split backing ring, must he be additionally qualified to weld a joint without backing to weld the gap of a split backing ring? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5102 |
| IX-79-24 |
Section IX, Code Edition Applicable to Assigning Essential Variables to Old Welding Procedures, Preamble |
|
4/30/1979 |
|
When position was an essential variable for welding procedure specification test, may the welding procedure specification now be revised to include other positions without requalification? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5103 |
| IX-79-25 |
Section IX, QW-302.2 |
QW-302.2 |
5/11/1979 |
|
To qualify a welder under QW-304 or a welder operator under QW-305 by radiographic examination, must a 6 in. test coupon be evaluated? |
For plate, a test coupon of a minimum of 6 in. long must be evaluated by radiographic examination to qualify a welder under QW-304 or a welder operator under QW-305. For pipe, the entire weld circumference shall be examined. When this circumference is less than 6 in., additional coupons shall be welded to obtain 6 in. of weld length, but not more than four samples are required. That is, four small diameter samples may not equal the 6 in. length. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5104 |
| IX-79-26 |
Section IX, Thickness Qualified for Procedure Qualification |
|
5/10/1979 |
|
Does the thickness of the base metal in a production groove weld or the thickness of the groove weld metal govern the thickness range to which a Welding Procedure Specification shall be qualified? |
For groove weld procedure qualification, QW-202.2 states that qualification shall encompass both the base metal and the weld-metal thickness. This also applies to partial penetration groove welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5105 |
| IX-79-27 |
Section IX, Thickness Qualified in Partial Penetration Weld Procedure Qualification, QW-45l |
QW-45l |
5/10/1979 |
|
For procedure qualification of partial penetration welds, what dimension is used in determining the maximum thickness qualified: the base metal thickness, or the thickness of the weld metal (i.e., the weld groove depth)? |
For groove weld procedure qualification, QW-202.2 states that qualification shall encompass both the base metal and the weld-metal thickness. This also applies to partial penetration groove welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5106 |
| IX-79-28 |
Section IX, Welding Procedure Qualification Requirements for Clad Plate, for Use in Section VIII, Division 1 Construction |
|
5/14/1979 |
|
An integrally clad plate consists of a base plate of SA-515 Grade 70 which is 22 mm thick and cladded with SA-240 Type 304L which is 2 mm thick. The base plates are joined with E 7016 weld metal and the cladding plates are joined with E 309 and E 308L weld metal. What tests are required on this integrally clad plate to meet the requirements of Section IX plus additional requirements of Section VIII, Division 1, UCL-40 and -41? |
1st Condition: Thickness of cladding is included in design per UCL-23(c).
(1) Weld an integrally clad plate with the base plate being at least 11 mm thick and the clad being at least 1.6 mm thick using F-No. 4 and F-No. 5 electrodes on the respective materials.
(2) Weld test plate of P-No. 1 material equal to or less than 22 mm thick by overlaying in accordance with QW-214 and QW-281 with the appropriate desired electrodes.
2nd Condition: Thickness of cladding is not included in design per UCL-23(c).
(3) Make (1) and (2) above or (4) and (5) below and (2) above.
(4) Weld P-No. 1 material (over 11 mm) separately with F-No. 4 electrode.
(5) Weld P-No. 8 material 1.6-9.6 mm (separately) with F-No. 5 electrode. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5107 |
| IX-79-29 |
Section IX, QW-410.24 |
QW-410.24 |
5/29/1979 |
|
Do austenitic base metals fall under the category of ferritic base metals, when notch toughness is required for the weld metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5108 |
| IX-79-30 |
Section IX, Interpretation of the Preamble and QW-100.3 |
QW-100.3 |
5/30/1979 |
|
In the case where the mandatory qualification requirements have been made more restrictive in Editions later than the 1962 Edition, are Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifications that were made according to the 1962 Edition still acceptable as a qualified Welding Procedure Specification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5109 |
| IX-79-31 |
Section IX, Nominal Electrode Diameter, QW-281.3 and QW-282.3 |
QW-281.3; QW-282.3 |
5/16/1979 |
|
What is the meaning of the word "nominal" as used in QW-281.3 and QW-282.3? |
The word "nominal" in QW-281.3 and QW-282.3 refers to the listed size of electrodes and electrode tolerances as a consideration; that is, 5/32 in. would be the nominal size, and tolerances permitted are not a consideration. Another size electrode, such as 1/8 in. is not considered to be within the tolerances of the 5/32 in. nominal size electrode under the definition of the word "nominal." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5110 |
| IX-79-30 |
Section IX, Interpretation of the Preamble and QW-100.3 |
QW-100.3 |
5/30/1979 |
|
Is it mandatory that the WPS be updated to document all essential variables required by the current edition of Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5109 |
| IX-79-30 |
Section IX, Interpretation of the Preamble and QW-100.3 |
QW-100.3 |
5/30/1979 |
|
In 1968 a procedure was qualified using an A-No. 4 classification of weld metal analysis. Subsequently the A-Number Table was revised and the composition of the weld metal now place it in the A-No. 5 classification. Since QW-404.5 indicates a change in weld metal composition as an essential variable, is it necessary to requalify this updated Welding Procedure Specification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5109 |
| IX-79-32 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
5/30/1979 |
|
A welding procedure specification was written to weld base metals listed under one P-Number but having different Group Numbers. Does QW-403.5 require requalification, if the welding procedure specification has been qualified with each of the base metals welded to itself, using the same electrode or filler metal and the same essential variables? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5111 |
| IX-79-33 |
Section IX, Temperature Ranges for PWHT, QW-200.1 and QW-200.2 |
QW-200.1; QW-200.2 |
6/12/1979 |
|
For materials where UCS-56(e)(3) of Section VIII, Division 1 permits a maximum difference of 150°F between the various parts of a vessel being postweld heat treated, is a PWHT temperature range of 150°F a reasonable range to be specified in the WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5112 |
| IX-79-33 |
Section IX, Temperature Ranges for PWHT, QW-200.1 and QW-200.2 |
QW-200.1; QW-200.2 |
6/12/1979 |
|
Is it necessary that the PWHT temperature range specified in the WPS be the same as the actual temperature range recorded for the PWHT carried out on the test coupon of the supporting PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5112 |
| IX-79-34 |
Section IX, QW-452, Performance Qualification Specimens |
QW-452 |
6/1/1979 |
|
What are the requirements for performance qualification when using a transverse bend test and the thickness of the material is less than 1/16 in.? |
QW-310.1 of Section IX provides for qualifications where the thicknesses are less than 1/16 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5113 |
| IX-79-34 |
Section IX, QW-452, Performance Qualification Specimens |
QW-452 |
6/1/1979 |
|
What is the minimum thickness qualified for a groove weld when the nominal pipe size of the sample weld is over 2 in. and t= ¾ in.? |
The minimum thickness qualified would be 3/16 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5113 |
| IX-79-35 |
Section IX, QW-304 and QW-305 |
QW-304; QW-305 |
5/30/1979 |
|
The SAW process under consideration consists of a wire and flux feed in a fixed position with the work being rotated on rollers by a positioner. The wire is fed at a rate based on voltage and current adjustments made by a worker as the weld progresses. Is a worker welding with this equipment considered to be a welder or a welder operator? |
A worker using this equipment would be a welding operator. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5114 |
| IX-79-36 |
Section IX, Slag Inclusions |
|
6/4/1979 |
|
When using partial penetration welds for the joining of materials of dissimilar thicknesses, such as shown in Fig. UW-13.2 of Section VIII, Division 1, what are the procedure qualification test plate thickness requirements for the production welds? |
The thicknesses qualified are subject to the requirements of QW-451 as further governed by the requirements of QW-202.2.
You must qualify the thickness range for both the base metal and the deposited weld metal thickness ranges to be used in production. In addition, there are two rules in QW-202.2 covering dissimilar thicknesses. Both rules are in the third paragraph in Exception (1).
For groove welding qualifications made on test coupons of any thickness, there is no limit on the minimum depth of deposited weld metal nor on the thickness of the thinner of the base metals being joined where they are of dissimilar thickness.
Groove welding qualifications made on test coupons 3 in. thick or more shall be applicable for production use for base metal and deposited weld metal thickness up to the maximum given in QW-451 except welds joining dissimilar thicknesses of base metals in which the base metal on one side is equal to or less than the maximum thickness qualified in the PQR, the base metal on the other side may be of any greater thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5115 |
| IX-79-37 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification on Split Backing Rings |
|
6/5/1979 |
|
If a welder is qualified to weld using a split backing ring, must he be additionally qualified to weld a joint without backing to weld the gap of a split backing ring? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5116 |
| IX-79-38 |
Section IX, QW-304 and QW-305 |
QW-304; QW-305 |
6/5/1979 |
|
Please classify submerged-arc welding performed under the control and observation of an individual as either semi-automatic or machine welding. |
Semi-automatic Arc Welding is arc welding with equipment which controls only the filler metal feed. The advance of the welding is manually controlled. The person welding with these conditions is classified with manual welding as welders. This normally includes GMAW, FCAW, and SAW (hand held).
Machine Welding is welding with equipment which performs the welding operation under the constant observation and control of a welding operator. The welding operator may adjust the height and location of the arc but the machine advances the welding head. The person welding with these conditions is classified with automatic welding as a welding operator. This normally includes SAW. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5117 |
| IX-79-39 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
6/7/1979 |
|
A material was purchased to an ASTM Specification that was not included in the P-Number table at that time, and a PQR was then documented using this material. In subsequent Addenda this material was issued a P-Number. Is it permissible to qualify a procedure using the PQR that was documented before this Addenda was issued? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5118 |
| IX-79-40 |
Section IX, Positions Qualified When QW-405.2 is an Essential Variable |
QW-405.2 |
3/27/1979 |
|
If QW-405.2 is an essential variable for procedure qualification, does qualification in the vertical (3G) position with uphill qualification qualify the procedure for all other positions? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5119 |
| IX-79-41 |
Section IX and Section III, P-Numbers for ASTM A-572, A-588, and A-633 as Used Under Case N-71 (1644), QW-422 |
QW-422 |
4/11/1979 |
|
Is it permissible for an Owner to assign P-Numbers to materials in Code Cases for Section III, Division 1 construction when considering either welding or postweld heat treatment? |
No, only the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee may assign P-Numbers to materials. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5120 |
| IX-79-41 |
Section IX and Section III, P-Numbers for ASTM A-572, A-588, and A-633 as Used Under Case N-71 (1644), QW-422 |
QW-422 |
4/11/1979 |
|
Are ASTM materials A-588, A-572 and A-633 considered as P-No. 1 materials in Section IX? |
No, the above materials have not been submitted for approval as SA specifications and assignment of P-Numbers by the Committee. Upon proper notification that these materials will be adopted as SA Specifications, the Committee will then review these materials for the proper assignment of P-Numbers. P-Numbers cannot be assigned in any other manner either for welding procedures or postweld heat treatment exemptions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5120 |
| IX-79-44 |
Section IX, QW-303.6 |
QW-303.6 |
6/18/1979 |
|
Welders have been qualified in 10 in. Schedule 80 and 120 pipe in the 6G position. Are these welders then permitted to make fillet welds in all sizes, diameters, including, for instance, 1 in. O.D., and thicknesses within the qualified process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5121 |
| IX-79-45 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification, QW-300 |
QW-300 |
6/18/1979 |
|
Can an organization use its welding supervisors to qualify welders to procedures, using the tests required in Section IX "Welding and Brazing Qualification," without utilizing the services of an outside testing organization? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5122 |
| IX-79-46 |
Section IX, QW-462.1(c) Applicability of Notes |
QW-462.1(c) |
6/19/1979 |
|
Do the notes immediately beneath QW-462.1(c) relate only to that figure or are they also applicable to QW-462.1(a) and QW-462.1(b)? |
These notes are also applicable to QW-462.1(a) and (b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5123 |
| IX-79-48 |
Section IX, P-Number Classification, QW-422 |
QW-422 |
6/20/1979 |
|
If a material does not have a P-Number classification, is it still suitable for welding in accordance with Section IX? |
Section IX addresses only those materials listed in QW-422; the use of other materials is dependent upon the discretion of the manufacturer or contractor. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5124 |
| IX-79-49 |
Section IX, QW-452, Performance Qualifications of Joints Using Split Backing Rings |
QW-452 |
6/26/1979 |
|
If a welder is to be qualified on a joint with a split backing ring, is it necessary to remove a specimen from the gap of the ring to perform the required bend tests? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5125 |
| IX-79-42 |
Section IX, Preamble Introduction QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
5/27/1979 |
|
The Preamble acknowledges that procedure and performance qualifications made in accordance with recommendations of the 1962 or later Editions of the Code are acceptable, providing they were made in accordance with the Edition of the Code in effect at that time. May a procedure qualified in 1971 be rewritten to remove information which is not listed as Essential, Supplementary Essential, or Non-essential Variables? |
Changes may be made to Nonessential Variables of a welding procedure specification, provided such changes are documented with respect to both Essential and Nonessential Variables of the specified welding process or processes, either in an amendment to the original WPS or a new WPS without requalification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5126 |
| IX-79-42 |
Section IX, Preamble Introduction QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
5/27/1979 |
|
Must a procedure qualified after 1962 be revised to reflect new or deleted Essential or Nonessential Variables? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5126 |
| IX-79-42 |
Section IX, Preamble Introduction QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
5/27/1979 |
|
The introduction under Article II, page xx, discusses the elimination of diameter requirements up to 24 in. diameter pipe for procedure qualification. Where is the 24 in. diameter required for procedure qualification discussed in the body of Section IX? |
The introduction is an aid to the user of Section IX. The particular paragraphs cited relate to items which were changed from previous Editions of the Code. Since the 24 in. diameter is no longer a requirement for procedure qualification, there is no cause to discuss it within the body of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5126 |
| IX-79-42 |
Section IX, Preamble Introduction QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
5/27/1979 |
|
Where a procedure qualification test coupon with a total base metal thickness of 1 in. is to be welded using GTAW for 3/8 in., SMAW for ¼ in., and SAW for 3/8 in., in that sequence, what are the answers to the following questions?
(4a): What is the qualification range for the GTAW process?
(4b): What is the qualification range for the SMAW process?
(4c): What is the qualification range for the SAW process?
(4d): What is the qualification range for the combined process weld?
(4e): Must the WPS list the qualification range for each process? |
Reply (4a): 1/16 in. to 3/4 in.
Reply (4b): 1/16 in. to ½ in.
Reply (4c). 1/16 in. to 3/4 in.
Reply (4d): 1/16 in. to 2 in., providing the individual limits for each process are observed and taken to their maximums.
Reply (4e): Yes.
|
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5126 |
| IX-79-42 |
Section IX, Preamble Introduction QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
5/27/1979 |
|
If a welding procedure for SMAW is qualified for 1/16 in. to 1/2 in. without a backing ring and another SMAW welding procedure specification for 3/16 in. to 2 in. with a backing ring, may the two procedures be used to weld a 1 in. thick base material with no backing ring? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5126 |
| IX-79-42 |
Section IX, Preamble Introduction QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
5/27/1979 |
|
Qualification A is for the GTAW process from 0.062 in. to 0.166 in. and Qualification B is for the GTAW welding process from 0.187 in. to 1.5 in. May a plate 0.180 in. thick be welded using one or both of these qualifications? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5126 |
| IX-79-42 |
Section IX, Preamble Introduction QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
5/27/1979 |
|
Where a welding procedure specification is qualified using the GTAW process for 3/16 in. of the qualification plate and the SMAW process for 1/16 in. of the plate, may you use this welding procedure specification to weld a 0.180 in. thick plate by the GTAW process? |
The qualification in the question will permit the welding of a 0.180 in. thick plate by the gas tungsten arc process qualification which covers this thickness range. Processes may be deleted from the production joint qualified by a combination of processes or procedures. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5126 |
| IX-79-47 |
Section IX, Welding Performance Qualification, QW-300 |
QW-300 |
6/19/1979 |
|
Can a welder be qualified to a process without a qualified procedure? |
No, a performance qualification test must be welded in accordance with a Welding Procedure Specification that has been qualified by the Manufacturer or contractor having the responsibility for conducting the test. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5127 |
| IX-79-51 |
Section IX, QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
7/9/1979 |
|
QW-407.2 is a supplementary essential variable for all welding processes except EBW, OFW, and stud welding. This variable requires that the procedure qualification test be subjected to heat treatment essentially equivalent to that encountered in the heat treatment of base metals and in the fabrication of the vessel or vessel parts, including at least the aggregate times at temperature(s). Does this variable apply only to vessels for which notch toughness is a requirement? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5128 |
| IX-79-51 |
Section IX, QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
7/9/1979 |
|
Is a procedure qualification heat treatment time of at least 80% of the heat treatment time actually applied to the vessel considered to be essentially equivalent to the heat treatment time of the vessel? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5128 |
| IX-79-64 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification Using SMAW |
|
7/19/1979 |
|
There appears to be a conflict on base metal essential variables for SMAW welder qualification between the requirements of QW-310.4 and QW-353. QW-403.16, listed under QW-353, states that a change outside of the qualified thickness range is the only base metal essential variable. QW-310.4 states the base metals under which the welder must be qualified for the production weld, with some exceptions. What is to be followed for the qualification or extending of a previous qualification on a welder in the SMAW process? |
Both paragraphs cited in the inquiry are compatible. The purpose of the essential variable under QW-353 is to state the limits of the qualification as based upon thickness range. The purpose of QW-310.4 is to state the permissible base metals which can be employed in accordance with the electrode which is being qualified for the welder qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5129 |
| IX-79-65 |
Section IX, Regarding Thickness Limitation for Performance Qualification of Combined Processes Using a Backing Ring, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
7/26/1979 |
|
A welder who satisfactorily passes a performance qualification test using two passes with GTAW and the balance with SMAW on a 6 in. Schedule XXH (0.864 wall) pipe is qualified for what thickness in the combined processes per QW-452.3? |
QW-452.3 was revised as published in the Summer 1979 Addenda. This clarification states that the thickness qualified for each process is dependent on the thickness of the weld metal deposited in the performance qualification test by that process. Where the weld metal deposited by each process in the performance qualification test is less than 3/4 in., the qualification limit with that process shall be twice the thickness qualified. If the thickness of weld metal deposited with a welding process is in excess of 3/4 in., there will be an unlimited qualification in thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5130 |
| IX-79-43 |
Section IX, Welding Qualification Mechanical Properties |
|
6/13/1979 |
|
A procedure is being written to weld 3 in. thick SA-515-70 P-No. 1 base metal in production. The base metal used for procedure qualification is 3 in. thick SA-515-55 P-No. 1, welded with an E-7018 F-No. 4, A-No. 1 electrode. The test coupon was stress relieved for 3 hr at 1125°F. Charpy impact tests were not required. The tensile tests failed at 54,800 psi in the base metal. Is this procedure acceptable per Section IX to weld 70,000 psi min. tensile P-No. 1 material even though the tensile specimen failed at 54,800 psi? |
Yes, per QW-153(d), provided a proper Welding Procedure Specification is written as described in the following questions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5131 |
| IX-79-43 |
Section IX, Welding Qualification Mechanical Properties |
|
6/13/1979 |
|
What is the intent of Section IX QW-153, QW-421, and QW-422 with respect to mechanical properties (tensile strength) of materials substituted for the base metal used in procedure qualification within the same P-Number grouping? |
The intent of QW-421 is to "reduce the number of welding procedure qualifications required" with considerations being given as stated in the remainder of the paragraph. In addition, QW-201 describes the documents of "Welding Procedure Specification" (WPS) and "Procedure Qualification Record" (PQR) both of which are required. Also, in addition, the Welding Variables of QW-250 need be considered and documented, as required, in both the WPS and the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5131 |
| IX-79-43 |
Section IX, Welding Qualification Mechanical Properties |
|
6/13/1979 |
|
Can the tensile test acceptance criteria of QW-153 for the base metal used in procedure qualification be applied to other base metals within the same P-Number grouping that may be substituted for the procedure qualification base metal in actual production? |
Yes, provided that a WPS is written as described in QW-201.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5131 |
| IX-79-43 |
Section IX, Welding Qualification Mechanical Properties |
|
6/13/1979 |
|
Do the words "where this can logically be done" and "does not imply that base metals may be indiscriminately substituted for a base metal which was used in the procedure qualification test," as stated in the second paragraph of QW-421, mean that the procedure cited in Question (1) qualifies for welding any and all of the base metals listed in the same P-Number grouping of QW-422 regardless of tensile strength? |
Yes, again provided that a proper WPS is written to cover the usage. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5131 |
| IX-79-43 |
Section IX, Welding Qualification Mechanical Properties |
|
6/13/1979 |
|
Does the purpose of the WPS and PQR as stated in the fourth paragraph of the Introduction to Section IX mean that the tensile strength of the procedure qualification test must be at least equal to the minimum tensile strength of the base metal for its intended application per the requirements of QW-153? |
No. As stated in the fourth paragraph of the Introduction to Section IX, the purpose of the WPS and the PQR (combined), is "to determine that the weldment proposed for construction is capable of having the required properties for its intended application." It should also be noted that QW-103 states that "Each Manufacturer or contractor is responsible for the welding done by his organization and shall conduct the tests" etc. It is allowed that the Manufacturer use judgment in meeting his responsibilities for the intended application. There are, of course, design conditions where deposited metal of strengths lower than that of the base metal, or higher, are satisfactory. In addition, properties other than tensile strength can be of importance to the intended application. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5131 |
| IX-79-43 |
Section IX, Welding Qualification Mechanical Properties |
|
6/13/1979 |
|
Is the intent of QW-403.11 that a procedure qualification using one base metal within a P-Number grouping is also qualified to weld any other metal within the same P-Number grouping regardless of tensile strength? |
Yes, again provided that a proper WPS is written to cover the usage, and if the use is compatible with the design of the intended application. For instance, for the procedure cited in Question (1), if the design is based on the base metal and weld metal both meeting 70,000 psi minimum tensile strength, the electrode specified in the WPS should generally be E-7018-A1 (of SFA-5.5), F-No. 4, A-No. 2, as this electrode is capable of meeting the 70,000 psi minimum tensile strength after stress relieving, whereas the E7018, F-No. 4, A-No. 1 (of SFA-5.1) may not be. Similarly, the other welding variables may also be of importance, such that the Manufacturer must select and define in his WPS the conditions to be used, and these be supported by one or more PQR's within the limits of the essential variables. The Manufacturer is responsible for these, and they shall be available for reference by the Authorized Inspector.
|
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5131 |
| IX-79-52 |
Section IX, Weld Metal Deposit Analysis as a Variable for Welder Performance Qualification for Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding, QW-356 |
QW-356 |
7/10/1979 |
|
In QW-356 (GTAW) of Section IX, no reference is made to weld metal analysis (as classified by A-Numbers) as being an essential variable. Does this mean that a welder may qualify with one F-No. 6 electrode and automatically be qualified for the use of all other F-No. 6 electrodes (regardless of A-Number designation) provided all the other essential variables of QW-356 are satisfied and provided the initial test conditions conform to the requirements set forth in QW-310.4 (for carbon steel bare wire) or QW-310.5 (for stainless steel bare wire)? |
The reference to QW-310.4 for carbon steel bare wire is not correct. QW-310.4 permits substitution for plate or pipe materials under various conditions for other base materials being joined in the usual Welding Procedure Specification. QW-310.5 states that a performance qualification test must be made (whose weld deposit conforms to A-No. 8 or A-No. 9) to use these filler metals in production welding. This qualification will also qualify for all other F-No. 6 electrodes but not vice versa. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5132 |
| IX-79-52R |
Section IX, Weld Metal Deposit Analysis as a Variable for Welder Performance Qualification for Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding, QW-356 |
QW-356 |
11/17/1983 |
|
In QW-356 (GTAW) of Section IX, no reference is made to weld metal analysis (as described by A-Numbers) as being an essential variable. Does this mean that a welder may qualify with one F-No. 6 electrode and automatically be qualified for the use of all other F-No. 6 electrodes (regardless of A-Number designation) provided all other essential variables of QW-356 are satisfied and provided the initial test conditions conform to the requirements set forth in QW-310.4 (for carbon steel bare wire) or QW-310.5 (for stainless steel bare wire)? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5133 |
| IX-79-53 |
Section IX, Revision of Qualification Forms When Related Forms are Changed. QW-482 and QW-484 |
QW-482; QW-484 |
7/11/1979 |
|
A welder is qualified using a qualified Welding Procedure Specification (WPS), and a Welding Performance Qualification (WPQ) Form QW-484 is filled out with the required data including the weld variables, test data, and the WPS used. At a later date, the WPS referenced on the WPQ Form is revised for a variable change which is not an essential or nonessential variable for performance qualification. Must the revised WPS number be added to the WPQ Form QW-484? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5134 |
| IX-79-53 |
Section IX, Revision of Qualification Forms When Related Forms are Changed. QW-482 and QW-484 |
QW-482; QW-484 |
7/11/1979 |
|
Using the same conditions as Question (1), except, at a later date, the WPS referenced on the WPQ Form QW-484, is revised for a variable change which is an essential variable for performance qualification. Is it required to add the revised WPS number on the WPQ Form QW-484? |
The variables affecting the qualification of welders and welding operators are contained in Article III. While a WPS contains variables which are required for performance qualification, the welder or welding operator may weld only within the limits of the variables to which previous qualifications have been accepted. That is, a WPS may list other positions beyond those in which a welder is qualified. The welder is limited to those positions previously qualified unless new performance qualifications are performed for additional positions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5134 |
| IX-79-53 |
Section IX, Revision of Qualification Forms When Related Forms are Changed. QW-482 and QW-484 |
QW-482; QW-484 |
7/11/1979 |
|
A welder is qualified using an already-qualified WPS, and a WPQ Form is completed with the required data including the welding variables, test data, and the WPS used. The welder's qualification range happens to cover several additional qualified WPS's that will be used in Code construction. Is it required to fill out a WPQ Form for each WPS the welder will be using, even though no performance qualification variables have been changed? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5134 |
| IX-79-54 |
Section IX, Brazing Procedure Qualification Temperature Requirements, QB-404.1 |
|
7/12/1979 |
|
Is it acceptable to write a Brazing Procedure Specification with a brazing temperature range outside of the range listed in QB-432? |
Yes, as long as this Brazing Procedure Specification is supported by an appropriate Brazing Procedure Qualification Record. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5135 |
| IX-79-55 |
Section IX, Clarification of Welder Variables, QW-350 |
QW-350 |
7/12/1979 |
|
A welder has been qualified using GTAW to weld base metals with a consumable insert and a filler metal having a specific A-Number and F-Number. Is this welder also qualified to weld, using GTAW, these same base metals with the same consumable insert and a filler metal having a different A-Number but the same F-Number? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5136 |
| IX-79-56 |
Section IX, Regarding Performance Qualification Specimens, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
7/12/1979 |
|
In order to fulfill the requirements of QW-452 for an unlimited maximum thickness qualification for pipe, a welder must weld a test specimen of 3/4 in. or over. Is this reference to a thickness of 3/4 in. the actual measured minimum thickness required at the weld joint? |
No, a standard size pipe with a nominal pipe wall thickness of 3/4 in. or over, as listed in the applicable SA pipe specification in Section II, may be used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5137 |
| IX-79-57 |
Section IX, Qualification of Welding Operators by Radiographic Examination, QW-305.1 |
QW-305.1 |
7/12/1979 |
|
Two welding operators are required to weld pipe due to the inaccessibility of the joint. QW-305.1 requires that the first production weld examined by radiography be at least 3 ft long. If each welding operator welds only half the joint, can this 3 ft length be obtained by more than one weld? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5138 |
| IX-79-57 |
Section IX, Qualification of Welding Operators by Radiographic Examination, QW-305.1 |
QW-305.1 |
7/12/1979 |
|
Do the qualified thickness ranges of QW-452 apply to QW-302.2 as well as QW-302.1? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5138 |
| IX-79-58 |
Section IX, Postweld Heat Treatment of a Combination of Welding Processes |
|
7/13/1979 |
|
Can postweld heat treatment be performed without requalification on a weld partially completed in accordance with a WPS qualified without postweld heat treatment and a second WPS completing the weld which has been qualified with postweld heat treatment? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5139 |
| IX-79-59 |
Section IX, Usage of Silicon Spray for Joint Preparation |
|
7/13/1979 |
|
May surface preparations to prevent oxidation of the base metal prior to welding or to prevent adherence of unwanted weld droplets to the base metal surface be employed under the rules of Section IX? |
QW-410.5 covers initial and interpass cleaning as a nonessential variable to be listed in the Welding Procedure Specification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5140 |
| IX-79-60 |
Section IX, Clarification of QW-404.6 as Relating to Metric Size Electrodes |
QW-404.6 |
7/13/1979 |
|
SFA-5.1, 5.5, and 5.4 list nominal electrode diameters in metric sizes that have been converted from English units. However, these converted nominal diameters are not considered standard sizes in some other countries. Does any difference between the sizes listed in Section II Part C and other sizes constitute deviation from Section IX? |
No. The Committee recognizes that in transposing from standard English units to metric units that the diameters will not fall in identical conversions. Where requirements are established on electrode sizes, the next higher English unit conversion of the metric shall be that employed in establishing the acceptance criteria. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5141 |
| IX-79-61 |
Section IX, Clarification of QW-310.4 |
QW-310.4 |
7/13/1979 |
|
The welding variables, for both procedure and performance qualification, covering GMAW also apply to FCAW. QW-310.4 makes reference to GMAW but does not mention FCAW. Can it be assumed that the reference to GMAW in QW-310.4 also applies to FCAW? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5142 |
| IX-79-63 |
Section IX, Clarification of the Use of P-Numbers |
|
7/18/1979 |
|
A procedure has been qualified using P-No. 1 Group 1 material welded to itself. Will this qualification also cover P-No.1 Group 1 material welded to P-No. 1 Group 2 material? |
A separate qualification test need not be made unless electron beam welding is used to join the base metals. However, where notch toughness tests are to be performed, supplementary essential vari-ables QW-403.4 and QW-403.5 may require requalification depending upon the process used to join the base metals. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5144 |
| IX-79-66 |
Section IX, Interpretation of QW-201.3 |
QW-201.3 |
7/27/1979 |
|
A welding procedure has been qualified using GMAW on 10 in. x 0.593 in. thick pipe. Another welding procedure using GTAW root and second pass and the balance of SAW on 12 in. x 0.687 in. pipe has been qualified. The thickness of the weld deposits are GMAW 0.56 in., GTAW 0.187 in., and SAW 0.5 in. In reference to QW-201.3 and the above two qualified welding procedures, may a production weld be made using the GMAW process for root pass and the SAW process for completion and what would the thickness limits be? |
A production weld may be made using the two qualified welding qualifications with a GMAW process for the root pass and SAW process for completion. It is assumed in this reply that the only variables to be considered are the thickness limitations with all other requirements of essential variables being the same as those recorded in the PQR. The GMAW process may be used for the root pass providing it is a minimum of 3/16 in. thick with a maximum of 2T, where T is the thickness of the deposit weld metal. This also applies to the thickness limits in the SAW process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5145 |
| IX-79-67 |
Section IX, Definition of the Word "Electrode" as Used in QW-282.4 |
QW-282.4 |
7/27/1979 |
|
When employing the PAW process, what is the interpretation of the word electrode in QW-282.4? |
The term electrode in QW-282.4 when applied to PAW process refers to the tungsten electrode used in that process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5146 |
| IX-79-68 |
Section IX, Regarding Semi-Automatic Welding |
|
7/30/1979 |
|
Are separate performance qualifications required for one person, acting as both welder and welding operator, using the same process within the same essential variables? |
Yes. Section IX considers welders and welding operators to be distinct from one another for performance qualification purposes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5147 |
| IX-79-68 |
Section IX, Regarding Semi-Automatic Welding |
|
7/30/1979 |
|
Must the performance qualifications for welders and welding operators be maintained and renewed separately? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5147 |
| IX-79-69 |
Section IX, Clarification of QW-322 |
QW-322 |
7/30/1979 |
|
During the last month of each calendar quarter (i.e. March, June, September, and December), a check is made to determine if each of the welders employed used each process for which they are qualified during that three month quarter. Is the intent of QW-322 of Section IX served if we thereby establish those welders, who have used a particular process, as qualified to continue welding for the next calendar quarter with that process? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5148 |
| IX-79-71 |
Section IX, Regarding Procedure Qualification Record Information Recording Requirements |
|
8/2/1979 |
|
QW-201.2 states that a PQR must record the "specific facts" used in qualifying a WPS. What defines to what detail "specific facts" must be recorded? |
QW-200.2 states "The PQR form shall list the actual variables used within the limits of a narrow range, rather than the full range of variables allowed. A manufacturer may include all additional information he may consider helpful, such as the nonessential variables, but is only required to record the essential variables used." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5150 |
| IX-79-71 |
Section IX, Regarding Procedure Qualification Record Information Recording Requirements |
|
8/2/1979 |
|
What rules apply to the use of PQR's from an earlier WPS to support a new WPS? |
A new WPS may be written and may be supported by an already qualified PQR, without any change or revision to the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5150 |
| IX-79-72 |
Section IX. Clarification Regarding QW-201.1 |
QW-201.1 |
8/2/1979 |
|
QW-402.1, Groove Design, is a nonessential variable for all processes except EBW and Stud welding processes. When making repairs to a weld, is it necessary to describe in the WPS the cavity developed in preparation for such repairs? |
No. The intent of QW-402.1 is to include or reference in the WPS the groove design employed in preparing the base materials for joining into a weldment. Repairs are considered a part of the welding operations. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5151 |
| IX-79-73 |
Section IX, Regarding the Preparation of a Procedure Qualification Record, QW-100 and QW-200 |
QW-100; QW-200 |
8/2/1979 |
|
Does QW-100.1 require the PQR to identify the actual amperage and voltage used and prohibit the PQR from showing voltage and amperage ranges when voltage and amperage are nonessential variables? |
No. Voltage and amperage ranges may be recorded within the limits of a narrow-range, rather than the full range of the variables allowed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5152 |
| IX-79-73 |
Section IX, Regarding the Preparation of a Procedure Qualification Record, QW-100 and QW-200 |
QW-100; QW-200 |
8/2/1979 |
|
QW-200.2 states, "The PQR form shall list the actual variables used within the limits of a narrow range rather than the full range of variables allowed. A manufacturer may include all additional variables he may consider helpful, such as the nonessential variables, but is only required to record the essential variable used." Does this permit the manufacturer to leave the PQR blank where nonessential variables are concerned or to fill in the nonessential variables in any manner considered to be helpful at the manufacturer's option? |
A manufacturer is only required to list the essential variables on the PQR; any further information may be included at his option. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5152 |
| IX-79-73 |
Section IX, Regarding the Preparation of a Procedure Qualification Record, QW-100 and QW-200 |
QW-100; QW-200 |
8/2/1979 |
|
Must every WPS supported by a given PQR be listed on that PQR? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5152 |
| IX-79-74 |
Section IX, Regarding Thicknesses Qualified, QW-403.6 |
QW-403.6 |
8/3/1979 |
|
Does QW-403.6, which states "For thicknesses less than 5/8 in. (16mm) the thickness of the test coupon is the minimum thickness qualified", have any applicability when the test coupon is 5/8 in. and above in thickness? |
Where the test coupon is 5/8 in. or over in thickness, the minimum thickness qualified is 5/8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5153 |
| IX-79-74 |
Section IX, Regarding Thicknesses Qualified, QW-403.6 |
QW-403.6 |
8/3/1979 |
|
When QW-403.6 is listed as an essential variable, what is the minimum thickness qualified when the test coupon is 5/8 in. or over in thickness? |
The minimum thickness qualified is 5/8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5153 |
| IX-79-75 |
Section IX, Regarding Clarification of QW-200.1 |
QW-200.1 |
8/3/1979 |
|
Is any further information, other than that which appears on Form QW-482, required for a welding procedure specification (WPS)? |
The Form shown in QW-482 is a suggested format for the required information; a WPS may be presented in any form as long as every essential and nonessential variable covered by QW-252 through QW-282 is presented. Any additional information is not required, but may be attached to the WPS at the option of the manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5154 |
| IX-79-76 |
Section IX, Regarding the Use of Material for Performance Qualification, QW-310.4 |
QW-310.4 |
8/8/1979 |
|
Welders must be qualified for the deposit of and joining of several different types of material as described in QW-310.4. Would it be acceptable, for the qualification of welders or operators, to substitute for P-No. 1 any carbon steel material with not more than 70,000 psi specified tensile strength and the following chemistry limits:
C Mn P S Si Other
0.30% 1.35% 0.05% 0.05% 0.15%/0.50% 0.75%
(Single values are maximum) |
No, the material must be to a specification listed under P-No. 1 (see QW-310.4). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5155 |
| IX-79-77 |
Section IX, Clarification of QW-403.10 |
QW-403.10 |
8/8/1979 |
|
The short circuiting transfer mode of GMAW is used to deposit the first two weld passes in a weld that is subsequently filled with the FCAW. For thickness qualification purposes, should the thickness deposited by each mode be specified on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5156 |
| IX-79-77 |
Section IX, Clarification of QW-403.10 |
QW-403.10 |
8/8/1979 |
|
If the weld joint were on 1 in. material thickness and ¼ in. deposited with GMAW-S mode, would this require definitive limits similar to multiprocess joints (e.g., would GMAW-S mode be limited to its specific range, 1.1 times its deposited thickness per QW-403.10; in this case, 0.275 in.)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5156 |
| IX-79-78 |
Section IX, Regarding Qualification of Fillet Weld Procedures, QW-202.2 |
QW-202.2 |
8/8/1979 |
|
Is it permissible to conduct a fillet weld procedure qualification test as shown in QW-462.4(a) on ¼ in. plate and be qualified for all fillet sizes and all plate thicknesses, providing the remaining essential variables are the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5157 |
| IX-79-79 |
Section IX, Regarding the Preparation of a WPS, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
8/9/1979 |
|
Is it permissible to write a WPS listing options for essential variables (e.g., PWHT/ non-PWHT, a range of F-Numbers, etc.) if each of these options is supported by an appropriate PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5158 |
| IX-79-79 |
Section IX, Regarding the Preparation of a WPS, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
8/9/1979 |
|
Is it permissible to specify changes in nonessential variables as long as they are also used on separate supporting PQR's? |
Section IX permits changes in nonessential variables without requalification; therefore no supporting PQR's are required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5158 |
| IX-79-79 |
Section IX, Regarding the Preparation of a WPS, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
8/9/1979 |
|
To allow changes in nonessential variables and to document their use, should they be listed on the PQR also? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5158 |
| IX-79-80 |
Section IX, Regarding Clarification of Quantity Ranges in Essential Variables |
|
8/22/1979 |
|
Phrases similar to "a change in the specified.... "appear in several sections of QW-281, specifically QW-281.2(e), QW-281.2(f), QW-281.4(f), QW-281.4(g), and QW-281.4(i). In these cases, does the use of the word "specified" mean a range or parameter stipulated on the WPS which must be met during qualification and the actual value found during qualification (which may be different from the quantity stated on the WPS reported on the PQR, or does it mean the actual value qualified and reported on the PQR which in turn determines the limit of a range or parameter on the WPS? |
The above mentioned phrases refer to changes made to the WPS. Any WPS written and supported by a particular PQR must remain within the parameters established in that PQR or be requalified. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5159 |
| IX-79-80 |
Section IX, Regarding Clarification of Quantity Ranges in Essential Variables |
|
8/22/1979 |
|
Is the statement, "A change in the specified postweld heat treatment temperature" in QW-281.2(f), intended to imply a range of temperature? If a range is implied, is it permissible to use ranges specified in other sections of the Code or applicable specifications where such specified ranges exist? |
It is permissible to use ranges specified in other Book Sections (e.g., UHT-56 of Section VIII, Division 1, and PW-39 of Section I). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5159 |
| IX-79-81 |
Section IX, Regarding the Ranges for Preheat and Interpass Temperature |
|
8/23/1979 |
|
A procedure has been qualified for an interpass temperature range of 100°F to 350°F. Is it permissible to use this qualification for a procedure with an interpass temperature range of 32°F min. to 250°F max. for material 1 in. and under? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5160 |
| IX-79-82 |
Section IX, Regarding Heat Treatment of Test Coupons |
|
8/29/1979 |
|
A procedure is being qualified using 2-1/4 in. thick test coupons. After welding, these coupons are cut into 1 in. thick strips to facilitate testing. These strips are then heat treated along with a completed vessel. After the application of heat treatment, the necessary tests are made per Section IX. Would this method of preparing the test coupon qualify the procedure for a thickness of 4-1/2 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5161 |
| IX-79-83 |
Section IX, Regarding Amendments to a Qualified WPS |
|
8/29/1979 |
|
May a previously qualified WPS which does not include notch toughness requirements be employed for weldments in which notch toughness is a requirement? |
The previously qualified WPS may be employed provided it is revised to include the Supplementary Essential Variables for notch toughness requirements for the process or processes covered by that WPS. The new PQR, in addition to previous PQR's qualifying the revised WPS, should also be included. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5162 |
| IX-79-84 |
Section IX, Procedure and Performance Qualification |
|
8/30/1979 |
|
A company has the necessary equipment and personnel to conduct the required tests for performance and procedure qualifications according to Section IX. Must this company be certified to conduct this testing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5163 |
| IX-79-85 |
Section IX, Regarding Thickness Qualification of Procedures |
|
9/4/1979 |
|
A procedure is qualified to a thickness range of 2T, per QW-403.7, using PWHT below the critical range. Is a procedure tested with PWHT above the critical range followed by PWHT below the critical range also qualified to a thickness range of 2T per QW-403.7? |
No, see QW-407.4 for qualification ranges for procedures receiving PWHT above the critical range. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5164 |
| IX-79-86 |
Section IX, Clarification of QW-281.4(f), Regarding the Current Range for Use with Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-281.4(f) |
9/12/1979 |
|
In reference to corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay essential variable QW-281.4(f), does the phrase "...beyond the range specified" refer to the current range specified in the Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) or the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)? |
The range referred to above is that which is listed on the WPS; therefore any WPS written and supported by a specific PQR must remain within 10% of the range listed on that PQR or be requalified. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5165 |
| IX-79-87 |
Section IX, General Questions |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
Why have Monel welding electrode classifications SFA-5.11, ENiCu-2 and ENiCu-4 been dropped from the Code? |
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code adopts AWS filler metal specifications. In the case of this particular specification (SFA-5.11), the AWS Filler Metal Committee eliminated the two classifications of electrodes in question as they are no longer produced. This elimination occurred in the 1976 Edition. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5166 |
| IX-79-87 |
Section IX, General Questions |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
If I have a procedure qualified in 1974 using ENiCu-2 electrodes, must I requalify so that I may use ENiCu-4 electrodes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5166 |
| IX-79-87 |
Section IX, General Questions |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
Will the F-Number for either electrode now be classified as special? |
ENiCu-2 and ENiCu-4 are not now classified in the F-Number tables and would have to be handled in accordance with special requirements as now provided for in Section IX for materials without F-Numbers. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5166 |
| IX-79-87 |
Section IX, General Questions |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
When is QW-192.4 to be used? |
The acceptance criteria of QW-192.4 are employed in evaluating the test specified in QW-202.3 when studs are welded to materials other than P-Number 1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5166 |
| IX-79-88 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
9/13/1979 |
|
Welding procedures have been qualified on 18 in. diameter x 1.781 in. wall material, using a combination of processes; the GTAW process for the root and two layers, and the SMAW process for the balance. The PQR stated that the "thickness range this test qualifies" is 0.187 in. to 3.562 in. based on QW-451.1. Is it acceptable to write a WPS using a combination of processes (GTAW-Root and two layers, SMAW-Balance) with a qualified thickness range of 0.187 in. to 3.562 in. using the previously mentioned PQR as justification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5167 |
| IX-79-89 |
Section IX, Joint Classification |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
Figure UA-002 of Section VIII, Division 1, shows some acceptable types of tube-to-tubesheet welds. When qualifying a welding procedure, should types (2), (3), (4), and (7) be tested as groove welds or fillet welds? |
The welding procedure qualification test for types (2), (3), (4), and (7) of Fig. UA-002 of Section VIII, Division 1, should be qualified by a groove weld employing a butt weld test plate for qualification of partial penetration welds, in accordance with QW-202.2 |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5168 |
| IX-79-91 |
Section IX, Renewal of Performance Qualification, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
9/17/1979 |
|
What are the radiographic and/or mechanical tests required to be performed on the single test joint (plate or pipe) for the purpose of requalification of a welder or welding operator who has not used a specific process for a period of 3 months or more? |
The types of tests required for renewal of qualification of a performance qualification are described in QW-302. The period of qualification may be extended to 6 months for a specific process providing that the welder or welding operator has used some other welding process during the preceding 3 months. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5169 |
| IX-79-93 |
Sections IX and VIII, Division 1, Impact Testing, QW-403.6 and UHA-51 |
QW-403.6 |
9/25/1979 |
|
Do weld metal (SMAW or SAW) impact tests for vessels fabricated under UHA-51, Section VIII, Division 1, require to be qualified for each thickness welded when less than 5/8 in. as described in QW-403.6? |
Impacts on weld metal would be as required by UHA-51 of Section VIII.
The 2T rule applies below 5/8 in.; however the thickness qualified is the minimum thickness that can be used in production. For example: a 1 in. test plate qualifies impacts from 5/8 in. to 2 in. A 3/16 in. test plate qualifies 3/16 to 3/8 in. and a 5/16 in. T plate would qualify 5/16 in. - 5/8 in. T. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5170 |
| IX-79-94 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 Qualification of Welding Procedure with Notch Toughness in Materials of the Same P-Number but Different Group Numbers |
QW-403.5 |
10/9/1979 |
|
Is it the intent of QW-403.5 to permit qualification of two different Group number materials within the same P-Number welded to themselves by welding one Group material to the other Group material and impact testing the heat affected zone on both sides of the weld and the weld metal? |
Yes, provided the same essential variables, including electrodes of filler metals, are used when welding each base metal Group to itself. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5171 |
| IX-80-05 |
Section IX, QW-303 |
QW-303 |
2/19/1980 |
|
Is a welder who has been qualified by a groove weld in plate or pipe larger than 2-7/8 in. O.D. qualified to make a groove and/or fillet weld, as shown in Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (g), joining a 2-3/8 in. O.D. pipe or nozzle neck to a shell or head? |
Yes, provided the groove is in the shell or head, and the shell or head is 2-7/8 in. O.D. or larger. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5172 |
| IX-80-05 |
Section IX, QW-303 |
QW-303 |
2/19/1980 |
|
Does qualification in any position by groove weld (butt joint) in pipe larger than 2-7/8 in. O.D. qualify a welder to make a groove and/or fillet weld joining a nozzle neck less than 2-7/8 in. O.D. to a shell or head, in any position? |
Yes, for the positions delineated in QW-461.2 provided the groove is in the shell or head, and the shell or head is 2-7/8 in. O.D. or larger. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5172 |
| IX-80-06 |
Section IX, Qualification of Tube-to-Tubesheet Welds |
|
2/19/1980 |
|
For pressure vessels constructed in accordance with Section VIII Division 1, what essential and nonessential variables and tests are required for the procedure and performance qualification for tube-to-tubesheet welding? |
The essential variables are dependent upon the welding process and are given in QW-252 through QW-260. The type and number of tests required are given in QW-451 for procedure qualification and QW-452 for performance qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5173 |
| IX-79-90 |
Section IX, Preparation of Root Bend Specimens |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
We understand the backside of a root bend specimen should be machined flat per QW-462.3(a). Is that correct? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5174 |
| IX-79-90 |
Section IX, Preparation of Root Bend Specimens |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
We understand the root side of a pipe bend having a backup bar should be machined flush with the inside surface of the specimen per Note (1) of QW-462.3(a). Any banding which sometimes occurs [refer to QW-462.1(c)] should be removed, along with the backup bar flush with the surface of the specimen. Is this correct? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5174 |
| IX-79-90 |
Section IX, Preparation of Root Bend Specimens |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
Is it the intent that the R = 1/8 in. max. be applied to the corners on the outside of the bend, that this radius should be smoothly rounded so as not to introduce notches? |
Yes
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following was added as a clarification and sent to the inquirer.
Clarification of Question (3) and Reply (3) Issued: February 15, 1980
Question (3): Must the 1/8 in. maximum radius applied to the corners of the transverse face and root bend specimens shown in QW-462.3(c) be smoothly rounded so as not to introduce notches?
Reply (3): Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5174 |
| IX-79-90 |
Section IX, Preparation of Root Bend Specimens |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
To remove machine tool or grinding marks on the outside of a bend specimen for high alloy weldments, such as stainless steel, is it proper to further smooth the outside surface on a bend (test) specimen by some technique such as sanding with 240 grit equipment? We understand this is industry practice. |
Section IX does not specify the method of surface finishing of bend test specimens. Bend test specimens should be surface finished so as to preclude any machine tool or other similar mechanical marks resulting in failure of the bend test because of improper specimen preparation. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5174 |
| IX-79-90 |
Section IX, Preparation of Root Bend Specimens |
|
9/13/1979 |
|
Is it the intent of Section IX that T in the table of QW-462.3(a) be equal to t for pipe thicknesses 3/8 in. or less in thickness in the "All other Metals" column and that the machining shown in the sketch is to be done so this is accomplished? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5174 |
| IX-79-92 |
Section IX, Thickness Limitations for Procedure When Notch Toughness is Required, QW-403.5 and QW-403.6 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.6 |
9/25/1979 |
|
When impact test requirements are specified, does QW-403.5 apply in addition to QW-403.11 (for SMAW, SAW, GMAW, and GTAW) or instead of QW-403.11? |
QW-403.5 applies in addition to QW-403.11. QW-403.11 is an essential variable so its requirements must be met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5175 |
| IX-79-92 |
Section IX, Thickness Limitations for Procedure When Notch Toughness is Required, QW-403.5 and QW-403.6 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.6 |
9/25/1979 |
|
A test on P-No.1 Gr. 2 has qualified P-No.1 Gr. 2 to itself and P-No.1 Gr. 1 to itself as permitted in QW-403.11. When impacts are required, which makes QW-403.5 an essential variable, will the original P-No.1 Gr. 2 test without impacts plus a P-No.1 Gr.1 test, with impacts only, be sufficient to qualify P-No.1 Gr.1 and P-No.1 Gr.2 to P-No.1 Gr. 2? |
P-No. 1 Gr. 1 to itself is fully qualified; a new "impact only" test is required for P-No. 1 Gr. 2 which then also qualifies P-No. 1 Gr. 1 to P-No. 1 Gr. 2 as permitted in QW-403.5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5175 |
| IX-79-92 |
Section IX, Thickness Limitations for Procedure When Notch Toughness is Required, QW-403.5 and QW-403.6 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.6 |
9/25/1979 |
|
Will a test on ¾ in. T material with impacts plus an "impact only" test on 3/16 in. T material qualify the range 3/16 in. T to 1½ in. T? |
No. The 3/16 in. T plate qualifies to 2T which covers 3/16 in. to 3/8 in.; a plate just over 3/8 in. is needed to qualify 3/8 in. to 5/8 in. T. The ¾ in. test qualifies 5/8 in. to 2T. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5175 |
| IX-79-92 |
Section IX, Thickness Limitations for Procedure When Notch Toughness is Required, QW-403.5 and QW-403.6 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.6 |
9/25/1979 |
|
If weld coupons are made using ½ in. thick plates separately for GTAW and SMAW processes (both multipass), can a ½ in. thick production plate be welded using GTAW for the root pass only and SMAW for the subsequent passes? |
Yes; however, each process shall deposit a minimum of 3/16 in. per QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5175 |
| IX-80-07 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
2/19/1980 |
|
In the Winter 1978 Addenda to Section IX, QW-451.1 was revised to allow a maximum base metal thickness qualification of 8 in. for a test coupon of a thickness of 1.5 in. or greater when using SMAW, SAW, GTAW, or GMAW (except the low voltage short-circuiting type). A procedure was qualified prior to this Addenda using a test coupon of base metal thickness greater than 1.5 in. Can this PQR now be used to qualify a procedure up to an 8 in. maximum base metal thickness? |
Yes, provided one of the welding processes specified in Note (7) is used to join the base metals. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5176 |
| IX-80-08 |
Section IX, Welder Performance Qualification |
|
2/27/1980 |
|
Is a welder required to take a "small diameter" pipe test to weld a "saddle in" [full penetration through shell as in Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c) of Section VIII Division 1] when the diameter of the hole in the head or shell is less than 2-7/8 in. O.D.? |
No, when the weld preparation is made in the head or the shell. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5177 |
| IX-80-08 |
Section IX, Welder Performance Qualification |
|
2/27/1980 |
|
Is a welder required to take a "small diameter" pipe test to weld a "saddle on" (full penetration through the nozzle as in Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (a) of Section VIII - Division 1) when the diameter of the nozzle is less than 2-7/8 in. O.D. and the weld prep is made on the nozzle? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5177 |
| IX-80-08 |
Section IX, Welder Performance Qualification |
|
2/27/1980 |
|
What thickness of plate (test coupon) would a welder have to make his performance qualification test welds on to qualify for production welding of two 1 in. plates to be attached perpendicularly to each other by two partial penetration welds of 3/8 in. each? |
The performance qualification test coupon would have to be a minimum of 3/16 in. thick. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5177 |
| IX-80-09 |
Section IX, QW-407.1 |
QW-407.1 |
3/20/1980 |
|
When is requalification of the WPS required with respect to the "specified PWHT temperature range" in QW-407.1? |
The 1979 Summer Addenda to Section IX eliminated the statement "specified PWHT temperature range" and established four (4) PWHT conditions for procedure requalification:
(a) No PWHT;
(b) PWHT below the critical range;
(c) PWHT above the critical range (e.g., normalized);
d) PWHT above the critical range followed by PWHT below the critical range (e.g., normalized and tempered).
The PWHT conditions listed in QW-407.1 establish the critical range as the basic criteria for requalification. The respective Code Sections establish the minimum PWHT temperature to be used in construction. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5178 |
| IX-80-09 |
Section IX, QW-407.1 |
QW-407.1 |
3/20/1980 |
|
When a WPS is qualified in accordance with the exceptions to QW-403.11 and QW-302.12, using the PWHT temperature for P-No.5 (3% max. Cr content), is requalification required when joining P-No. 5 metals to a lower P-Number, such as P-No. 3 or P-No. 4? |
No, provided the PWHT temperature used for the P-No. 5 qualification is not above the critical temperature range of the P-No. 3 or P-No. 4 metals. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5178 |
| IX-79-95 |
Section IX, QW-201 Use of Welding Procedure Qualification by Related Companies |
QW-201 |
10/10/1979 |
|
Must the controlling company have the same Code Symbol Stamps as the company they are supplying WPS's and PQR's? |
No. If a particular book Code requires additional tests for a particular application, responsibility for determining WPS suitability remains with the Certificate Holder responsible for the production weld. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5179 |
| IX-79-95 |
Section IX, QW-201 Use of Welding Procedure Qualification by Related Companies |
QW-201 |
10/10/1979 |
|
Must there be a corporate QA/QC Manual describing the organizational control before this option may be used? |
No. A "Corporate" Manual is not required. The Manuals of all interfacing organizations must include the required controls. This may be accomplished in a Corporate Manual. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5179 |
| IX-79-95 |
Section IX, QW-201 Use of Welding Procedure Qualification by Related Companies |
QW-201 |
10/10/1979 |
|
May the controlled company provide some of their WPS's and PQR's? |
Yes. These would be handled routinely and need not involve the QW-201
controls. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5179 |
| IX-79-95 |
Section IX, QW-201 Use of Welding Procedure Qualification by Related Companies |
QW-201 |
10/10/1979 |
|
What is the extent of "the controlling company must have the authority to control"? Does this include absolute control for selection of WPS, repair weld, process and filler metal to be used? Does this include provisions for the controlling company to hire and fire welders? |
The intent of QW-201 relates only to control of qualification of weld procedures. Responsibility for production welding must remain with the Certificate Holder having responsibility for the component. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5179 |
| IX-79-95 |
Section IX, QW-201 Use of Welding Procedure Qualification by Related Companies |
QW-201 |
10/10/1979 |
|
Must the controlled company report to the controlling company all discrepancies whenever welding will be involved? |
No. See No. (4) above. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5179 |
| IX-79-96 |
Section IX, QW-201 Use of Welding Procedure Qualification by Related Companies |
QW-201 |
10/10/1979 |
|
May QW-201 and QW-300.2 be extended from two companies of different names to include divisions of other units of the same company? |
Yes. It is the intent of QW-201 that WPS's and PQR's may be used by two or more companies of different names within one organization or two or more divisions of a corporation. Similarly, QW-300.2 permits welder performance qualifications to be used by two or more companies of different names within one organization or two or more divisions of a corporation.
The Q.C. Manual(s) must describe the operational control of production weldments and which division or company is responsible for qualification of procedures and/or welders and welding operators. The Certificate Holder responsible for certifying the Data Report shall retain responsibility for Code compliance of production welds and all procedure and qualification records.
Compliance with these requirements is expected to be one of the items in a quality control system that will be reviewed at the time of a survey or joint review for new Certificates of Authorization or renewal of expiring Certificates. At intervals between renewal of Certificates, proposed changes in the accepted Quality Control System manual must be reviewed and approved by the Authorized Inspection Agency prior to implementation. There is no need to receive additional acceptance or permission from ASME. It is the duty of the Authorized Inspector to determine that the described control is being maintained. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5180 |
| IX-79-97 |
Section IX, Essential Variables for Performance Qualification |
|
10/10/1979 |
|
Is a welder who satisfactorily accomplishes a welder performance test using GTAW process on P-No. 1 material with an F-No. 6 (A-No. 1) filler metal also qualified by virtue of the above test to use the GTAW process with an F-No. 6 (A-No. 8) filler metal, with all other essential variables being the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5181 |
| IX-79-98 |
Section IX, Repair Welding on Pressure Castings |
|
10/15/1979 |
|
What are the limits on qualifying both procedure and performance for the repair welding of castings used for pressure containment? |
The procedure qualification employed in repair of castings is controlled, with regard to thickness qualification, by QW-451, and the third paragraph and its subparagraphs of QW-202.2. All other applicable essential and nonessential variables for the process or processes employed apply.
Performance qualification is controlled by QW-452 for the weld metal thickness qualification and the appropriate essential variables for the process in which the welder is qualified. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5182 |
| IX-79-99 |
Section IX, Qualifications for Butt Welding 2 in. NPS and Smaller Pipe |
|
10/15/1979 |
|
Is it permissible for a welder's small diameter qualification (one qualification for welding process used), to be extended to encompass all filler metals and base metals of which he satisfactorily performs a large diameter (6 in. NPS) qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5183 |
| IX-80-01 |
Section IX, QW-463.l(a) |
QW-463.l(a) |
1/2/1980 |
|
Regarding QW-463.1(a), if the seam has been welded alternatingly from both sides, which side of the welded plate has to be considered as the root side and which side is the face side? |
According to QW-161, the face surface is that surface having the greater width of weld. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5184 |
| IX-80-02 |
Section IX, Welding of Nozzles |
|
1/10/1980 |
|
What requirements of Section IX govern the procedure qualification of ANSI B 16.11 half coupling (nozzle) attached to a flange (shell) by a full penetration weld? |
QW-202.2 and QW-451 govern the qualification of the base metal thickness of both the half coupling and the flange, as well as the deposited weld metal thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5185 |
| IX-80-03 |
Section IX, QW-408.2 Regarding Shielding Gas Composition |
QW-408.2 |
1/29/1980 |
|
Is it permissible to change from a single gas to any other single gas or to a mixture of gases, or to change the specified percentage composition of gas mixture exceeding 2% of any gas, or to omit the shielding gas without requalification? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5186 |
| IX-80-04 |
Section IX, Multiprocess Procedures |
|
2/15/1980 |
|
A Manufacturer is qualifying welding procedures that require impact testing. The procedures are multiprocess (GTAW-SMAW), and the base metal thickness is 0.280 in. QW-403.6 places a restriction on minimum thickness qualification as it applies to a given procedure test coupon. When preparing the thickness range for the WPS, does the minimum thickness requirement apply to each process individually, as used in the procedure qualification test? |
QW-403.6 restricts the base metal thickness range to 0.280 in. for both processes. The deposited weld metal thickness range for each process shall be in accordance with QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5187 |
| IX-80-04 |
Section IX, Multiprocess Procedures |
|
2/15/1980 |
|
Does the requirement specified in QW-404.24 preclude deleting one of the processes (QW-201.3) in welding a particular production joint? |
Does the requirement specified in QW-404.24 preclude deleting one of the processes (QW-201.3) in welding a particular production joint? |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5187 |
| IX-80-04 |
Section IX, Multiprocess Procedures |
|
2/15/1980 |
|
If one of the processes (SMAW) in a particular production joint is deleted (as allowed in QW-201.3), does the minimum thickness requirement become the thickness of the remaining process as specified on the PQR? |
No. The base metal minimum thickness shall remain 0.280 in. when using this WPS/PQR, even when one process is deleted as allowed in QW-201.3. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5187 |
| IX-80-10 |
Section IX, QW-216.2(d) |
QW-216.2(d) |
3/24/1980 |
|
Does QW-216.2(d) require a complete chemical analysis of a welding qualification sample, or may the chemical analysis be limited to specific chemicals designated on the WPS? |
The analysis shall be for those elements listed in the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5188 |
| IX-80-11 |
Section IX, QW-201.1 |
QW-201.1 |
3/25/1980 |
|
A manufacturer provides his welders with a WPS and a "Welding Plan"; this additional document contains all the basic information needed to perform the welding. This information includes all essential and nonessential variables. Could this "Welding Plan" be considered an amendment to the original WPS? |
The WPS can be composed of one or more documents to meet the needs of the manufactur-ers. If any part of the WPS is revised, it is considered as a new WPS and may or may not require requalification, depending on the classification of the variable or variables affected. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5189 |
| IX-80-12 |
Section IX, QW-310 |
QW-310 |
4/8/1980 |
|
If a welder is qualified using GTAW (short-arc) with a F-No. 6, A-No. 8 filler metal, is he also qualified to use a F-No. 6, A-No. 1 filler metal with this process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5190 |
| IX-80-13 |
Section IX, QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
4/9/1980 |
|
Where notch toughness is a requirement of the referencing Section of the Code and the provisions of QW-407.2 apply, is 1 hr at temperature of PWHT for the procedure qualification test using 1 in. thick P-No. 4 material essentially equivalent to 2 hr of PWHT during actual fabrication where the material is P-No. 4 and the thickness is 2 in., provided the other variables are the same? |
No, QW-407.2 was revised in the Winter 1979 Addenda of Section IX to require that the aggregate time at the temperature of PWHT of the procedure qualification test be at least 80% of the aggregate time of PWHT to be used in fabrication. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5191 |
| IX-80-18 |
Section IX, Welder Performance Qualification |
|
4/29/1980 |
|
Is a welder who has been qualified by a groove weld in plate or pipe larger than 2-7/8 in. O.D. qualified to make a groove and/or fillet weld, as shown in Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (g), joining a 2-3/8 in. O.D. pipe or nozzle neck to a shell or head? |
Yes, provided the groove is in the shell or head, and the shell or head is 2-7/8 in. O.D. or larger. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5193 |
| IX-80-18 |
Section IX, Welder Performance Qualification |
|
4/29/1980 |
|
Does qualification in any position by groove weld (butt joint) in pipe larger than 2-7/8 in. O.D. qualify a welder to make a groove and/or fillet weld joining a nozzle neck less than 2-7/8 in. O.D. to a shell or head, in any position? |
Yes, for the positions delineated in QW-461.2 provided the groove is in the shell or head, and the shell or head is 2-7/8 in. O.D. or larger. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5193 |
| IX-80-18 |
Section IX, Welder Performance Qualification |
|
4/29/1980 |
|
Is a welder required to take a "small diameter" pipe test to weld a "saddle in" (full penetration through shell as in Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c) of Section VIII - Division 1) when the diameter of the hole in the head or shell is less than 2-7/8 in. 0 .D.? |
No, when the weld preparation is made in the head or the shell. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5193 |
| IX-80-18 |
Section IX, Welder Performance Qualification |
|
4/29/1980 |
|
Is a welder required to take a "small diameter" pipe test to weld a "saddle on" [full penetration through the nozzle as in Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (a) of Section VIII - Division 1] when the diameter of the nozzle is less than 2-7/8 in. O.D. and the weld prep is made on the nozzle? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5193 |
| IX-80-14 |
Section IX, QW-407.1 |
QW-407.1 |
4/10/1980 |
|
Does the critical range in QW-407.1(b) refer to the postweld heat treatment range specified on the WPS? |
Yes
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected interpretation sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: June 18, 1980
Question (1): Does the critical range in QW-407.1(b) refer to the postweld heat treatment range specified on the WPS?
Reply (1): No; this refers to the metallurgical transformation temperatures for materials exhibiting such.
Question (2): Is it permissible to postweld heat treat a test coupon used to qualify a WPS at a temperature below the specified range on the WPS?
Reply (2): Yes; when it falls within the condition given in QW-407.1(b), the PWHT is included in a new WPS and the construction Code permits it. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5194 |
| IX-80-14 |
Section IX, QW-407.1 |
QW-407.1 |
4/10/1980 |
|
Is it permissible to postweld heat treat a test coupon used to qualify a WPS at a temperature below the specified range on the WPS? |
QW-407.1 establishes four postweld heat treatment conditions, each requiring a separate PQR. It is not permissible to PWHT a test coupon used to qualify a WPS below the range specified on the WPS, since QW-200.2 requires all essential and nonessential variables of a WPS be followed in welding a test coupon. PWHT of a production weld below the temperature range specified on the WPS is permissible provided:
(1) notch toughness is not a requirement; and
(2) the PWHT is within one of the four conditions given in QW-407.1.
ATTENTION
The foregoing interpretation has been further considered and the following corrected interpretation sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: June 18, 1980
Question (1): Does the critical range in QW-407.1(b) refer to the postweld heat treatment range specified on the WPS?
Reply (1): No; this refers to the metallurgical transformation temperatures for materials exhibiting such.
Question (2): Is it permissible to postweld heat treat a test coupon used to qualify a WPS at a temperature below the specified range on the WPS?
Reply (2): Yes; when it falls within the condition given in QW-407.1(b), the PWHT is included in a new WPS and the construction Code permits it. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5194 |
| IX-80-26 |
Section IX. Clarification of QW-281.4(f) Regarding Current Range for Use With Corro-sion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-281.4(f) |
5/9/1980 |
|
In reference to corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay essential variable QW-281.4(f), does the phrase beyond the range specified refer to the current range specified in the Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) or the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)? |
The range referred to above is that which is listed on the WPS. Supporting PQR's must be within the specified range. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5195 |
| IX-80-27 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification Using Radiography |
|
5/16/1980 |
|
When qualifying welders and welding operators by radiography, as permitted in QW-190, may a film side penetrameter be used when double-wall technique, single wall viewing is used?
The welders and welding operators are qualified on pipe. The majority of the welds in production (when radiography is required) will be inaccessible for source side penetrameter placement. |
A film side penetrameter must be used for double-wall technique, single-wall viewing of 3½ in. nominal O.D. pipe or tube. All other cases require a source side penetrameter for qualification of welders and welding operators. It is assumed the performance test coupon is accessible and does not comply with the circumstances outlined in T-237.1.2 of Section V. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5196 |
| IX-80-16 |
Section IX, QW-200, QW-200.1, QW-201.1, and QW-400 |
QW-200; QW-200.1; QW-201.1; QW-400 |
4/16/1980 |
|
If a WPS states in QW-402 that a metallic backing strip is to be used, and the PQR states a metallic backing was used, must it be stated in QW-410 of the WPS that nonmetallic or nonfusing metal retainers may not be used? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5197 |
| IX-80-16 |
Section IX, QW-200, QW-200.1, QW-201.1, and QW-400 |
QW-200; QW-200.1; QW-201.1; QW-400 |
4/16/1980 |
|
Is it necessary to update PQR's (Q-1 Forms) made prior to the 1977 Edition of Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5197 |
| IX-80-16 |
Section IX, QW-200, QW-200.1, QW-201.1, and QW-400 |
QW-200; QW-200.1; QW-201.1; QW-400 |
4/16/1980 |
|
Is it necessary to record all of the nonessential variables for a particular process on the PQR? |
No; only the essential variables are required to be recorded on the PQR. Any additional information may be included at the option of the manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5197 |
| IX-80-16 |
Section IX, QW-200, QW-200.1, QW-201.1, and QW-400 |
QW-200; QW-200.1; QW-201.1; QW-400 |
4/16/1980 |
|
A WPS for GMAW (short circuiting mode) states that a SFA-5.18 E70S-3 electrode is to be used. Is it necessary to state that an SFA-5.28 electrode may not be used? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5197 |
| IX-80-16 |
Section IX, QW-200, QW-200.1, QW-201.1, and QW-400 |
QW-200; QW-200.1; QW-201.1; QW-400 |
4/16/1980 |
|
QW-410.7 is a nonessential variable for GMAW, GTAW, PAW, and SAW. Is this variable for automatic or machine welding or must it be applied to manual and semiautomatic welding also? |
These variables apply to automatic or machine welding. The Committee has approved revisions to QW-410.7 along with QW-410.10 and QW-410.15 to indicate that they apply only to automatic or machine welding. These revisions will appear in the Summer 1980 Addenda to Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5197 |
| IX-80-16 |
Section IX, QW-200, QW-200.1, QW-201.1, and QW-400 |
QW-200; QW-200.1; QW-201.1; QW-400 |
4/16/1980 |
|
If a variable is listed among the variables in QW-400, but is not listed in the welding variable tabulation given in QW-415, does this imply the variable applies to all processes or that it does not apply to any process? |
The variables applying to a particular process are given in QW-252 through QW-261 and QW-280 for hard facing and corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay. These are the only variables that apply to a particular process. The listing in QW-415 is provided only as a guide to the user. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5197 |
| IX-80-17 |
Section IX, Variables Used for Procedure Qualification |
|
4/28/1980 |
|
Must a WPS include root spacing where an extreme range of thicknesses (0.035 in. to 2 in.) is given in the WPS? |
Root spacing is a nonessential variable for all processes listed in QW-250 except EBW and stud welding; therefore, root spacing must be included in the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5198 |
| IX-80-17 |
Section IX, Variables Used for Procedure Qualification |
|
4/28/1980 |
|
QW-409.3 covers the addition or deletion of a pulsing current which is used in GTAW. If a manufacturer does not possess a pulsing unit, must his WPS address this variable? |
Yes. The WPS must state that pulse current is not permitted to preclude its use if future purchased equipment were of a pulsing current type. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5198 |
| IX-80-17 |
Section IX, Variables Used for Procedure Qualification |
|
4/28/1980 |
|
If a manufacturer does not use consumable inserts, must his WPS address this variable? |
Yes. The WPS must state that consumable inserts are not permitted. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5198 |
| IX-80-17 |
Section IX, Variables Used for Procedure Qualification |
|
4/28/1980 |
|
Does QW-410.7 apply only to automated or machine welding? |
Yes. The Committee has approved a revision to clarify this variable. It will appear in the Summer 1980 Addenda to Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5198 |
| IX-80-17 |
Section IX, Variables Used for Procedure Qualification |
|
4/28/1980 |
|
If a gas backing is used, may this be listed under the QW-402 area of QW-482 under backing material? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5198 |
| IX-80-17 |
Section IX, Variables Used for Procedure Qualification |
|
4/28/1980 |
|
Must the PQR include a description of the guided bend test used to qualify a procedure? |
No. Certification by a stamp holder that has welded and tested the procedure qualification test in accordance with Section IX is all that is required. Any additional description of' the test, including the tensile test, other than the required results are at the option of the stamp holder. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5198 |
| IX-80-17 |
Section IX, Variables Used for Procedure Qualification |
|
4/28/1980 |
|
Must the WPS list the specific cleaning method to be used, or is a statement such as "the area to be welded must be cleaned prior to, between passes, and after completion of the weld" sufficient? |
The WPS must state the type of cleaning required and/or allowed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5198 |
| IX-80-20 |
Section IX, Preparation of the WPS and Procedure Qualification Tests |
|
5/2/1980 |
|
Can a contractor, performing work for a utility, allow another organization to prepare its Welding Procedure Specifications? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5200 |
| IX-80-20 |
Section IX, Preparation of the WPS and Procedure Qualification Tests |
|
5/2/1980 |
|
Since the answer to the above Question is yes, can the other organization also conduct the testing needed for qualification of these Specifications? |
QW-201 allows another organization to perform the preparation of test materials; however, the welders or welding operators used to produce the weldments to be tested for procedure qualification must be under the full control and supervision of the contractor. Also, all subsequent work on preparation of test specimens from the completed weldment and the nondestructive and mechanical testing of the specimens may be performed by another organization provided the contractor accepts the responsibility for such work. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5200 |
| IX-80-21 |
Section IX, QW-310.4(b) |
QW-310.4(b) |
5/7/1980 |
|
A contractor has qualified a welder using SMAW with an F-No. 5 electrode on P-No. 1 material. Does QW-310.4(b) permit this welder to use SMAW with F-No. 4 through F-No. 1 electrodes? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5201 |
| IX-80-22 |
Section IX, QW-404.28 |
QW-404.28 |
5/7/1980 |
|
If a welder satisfactorily accomplishes a welder performance test using GTAW with and F-No.6, A-No. 1 filler metal, can he also be qualified by virtue of the above test to use GTAW with an F-No.6, A-No. 8 filler metal, all other essential variables being the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5202 |
| IX-80-23 |
Section IX, Recording of Measured Values of Variables in the PQR, QW-200.2 |
QW-200.2 |
5/8/1980 |
|
Is it required to record actual values of nonessential variables in the Procedure Qualification Record? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5203 |
| IX-80-24 |
Section IX, Requirements for Carrying Out Procedure and Performance Qualification, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
5/8/1980 |
|
A firm has access to the test coupon preparation and testing equipment necessary to conduct performance and procedure qualification tests. Must this firm meet any further requirements in order to conduct these tests required by Section IX? |
No; it is permissible to subcontract any or all of the work of preparation of test materials for welding and subsequent work on preparation of test specimens from the completed weldment, performance of nondestructive examination, and mechanical tests, provided the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer accepts the responsibility for any such work. However, the welders or welding operator used to produce weldments to be tested for qualification of procedures or performance shall be under the full supervision and control of the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer during the production of these test weldments. It is not permissible for the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer to have the welding of the test weldments performed by another organization. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5204 |
| IX-80-25 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
5/8/1980 |
|
A manufacturer has qualified his welders using radiography and evaluating these radiographs in accordance with MIL-S-11356D. Can the manufacturer take these same radiographs, evaluate in accordance with the radiographic acceptance criteria of Section IX, and based upon this evaluation, determine if his welders are qualified according to Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5205 |
| IX-80-28 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
5/21/1980 |
|
Where a welder is making a performance qualification test to a qualified WPS in which the root pass must be backchipped to sound metal for completion of the weld, is it a requirement that the initial root pass have complete penetration? |
It is not required that initial root pass have complete penetration when it is subsequently backchipped to sound metal for completion of the weldment. Such qualification will permit the welder to be qualified for those production weldments in which a backing of the weld groove or backchipping of the metal root pass is a requirement. Open-type butt joints are not qualified by the welder under these conditions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5206 |
| IX-80-30 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
5/21/1980 |
|
For a particular WPS, is a welder who has successfully passed the necessary qualification tests for two size ranges allowed to weld on a size not covered by either range but covered by the combination of ranges? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5208 |
| IX-80-31 |
Section IX, Welding Qualification of Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses, QW-202.2 |
QW-202.2 |
5/27/1980 |
|
When qualifying a procedure for joining a 1 in. thick member to a 2-3/4 in. thick member forming a tee joint, may the PQR test coupon be based on the 1 in. member or must the 2-3/4 in. member also be considered? |
QW-202.2 requires both thicknesses be covered when qualifying the procedure within the ranges of QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5209 |
| IX-80-32 |
Section IX, QW-302.2 for 2G/5G Pipe Welds |
QW-302.2 |
6/18/1980 |
|
When using radiography for performance qualification of a single pipe test coupon [QW-463.2(f) or (g)] to qualify for all position welding, is it a requirement of Section IX that the "tie-in" region of the 2G/5G position be considered in the radiographic evaluation? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5210 |
| IX-80-32 |
Section IX, QW-302.2 for 2G/5G Pipe Welds |
QW-302.2 |
6/18/1980 |
|
If the radiographic examination test results are acceptable for one of the two pipe positions [QW-463.2(f) or (g)], is the welder considered qualified for that position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5210 |
| IX-80-32 |
Section IX, QW-302.2 for 2G/5G Pipe Welds |
QW-302.2 |
6/18/1980 |
|
If the radiographic examination test results are not acceptable for one of the two pipe positions [QW-463.2(f) or (g)], must a retest be performed in both positions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5210 |
| IX-80-33 |
Section IX, QW-405.2 and QW-405.3 |
QW-405.2; QW-405.3 |
6/18/1980 |
|
May a weld, for which notch toughness is required, qualified in the vertical position, using a root pass made in the downward progression, which is removed to sound metal, cover passes made in the vertical downward progression and all other passes made in the vertical upward progression and be used in production for all positions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5211 |
| IX-80-34 |
Section IX, Regarding QW-405.2 |
QW-405.2 |
6/18/1980 |
|
Supplementary essential variable QW-405.2 states: "Vertical-uphill qualifies for all positions." Does a procedure qualification made in the 6G position qualify a welding procedure for all positions if the impact test specimens are taken from that area of the coupon which was welded in the vertical-uphill position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5212 |
| IX-80-35 |
Section IX, Welder Qualifications |
|
6/18/1980 |
|
Welders have been qualified using 6 in. NPS XX strong pipe in the 6G position on single vee joints, open butt or with backing rings. The production weld is pipe runs 2-1/2 in. NPS (2-7/8 in. O.D.) and greater. The branch connections are 2 in. NPS and less, and are solid bosses or bonney forge sockolets with the weld preparation on the branch connection. Do the welders have to requalify for the 3/4 in. through 2 in. NPS connections per QW-403.16 and QW-452.3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5213 |
| IX-80-35 |
Section IX, Welder Qualifications |
|
6/18/1980 |
|
Is the requirement retroactive to the addition of QW-403.16? |
QW-403.16 was added to Section IX to clarify the small diameter requirement. The requirement was added to the Code in the Summer 1970 Addenda to the 1968 Edition of Section IX. Welders qualified after 1970 shall include the small diameter requirement of QW-452.3 or Q-24.3. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5213 |
| IX-80-36 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
6/26/1980 |
|
Does QW-404.9 allow a change from SFA-5.17 to SFA-5.23 if the flux classification is not changed? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5214 |
| IX-80-37 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification |
|
6/26/1980 |
|
Does satisfactory completion of performance qualification test on a pipe 6 in. in diameter qualify a welder to weld any diameter pipe over 2-7/8 in ? |
If the qualification test consisted of a fillet weld, the welder would be qualified to make fillet welds in all thicknesses of material, sizes of fillet welds, and diameters of pipe over 2-7/8 in. for use within the other applicable essential variables.
If the qualification test consisted of a groove weld, the limitations of QW-452.3 would be applicable for pipe groove welds, and the welder would also be qualified to make fillet welds in all thicknesses and pipe diameters, within the limits of the welding variables in QW-350. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5215 |
| IX-80-37 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification |
|
6/26/1980 |
|
Can a welder "take down" a coupon to clean the weld during a performance qualification test? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5215 |
| IX-80-38 |
Section IX, QB-406.1 |
QB-406.1 |
6/26/1980 |
|
Is the use of the AWS Brazing Flux Type Number a satisfactory means of meeting the requirement of QW-406.1 for "the nominal chemical composition of flux"? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5216 |
| IX-80-39 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
6/26/1980 |
|
A 3½ in. test coupon was welded using the Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding (GTAW) process for the first 3/16 in. thickness and the Gas Metal Arc-Welding (GMAW) process from 3/16 in. to 3½ in. thickness. The test coupon material was 2¼ Cr-1Mo (P-No. 5). Tension tests, guided-bend tests, notch-toughness tests, and other tests were performed in accordance with Section IX, 1974 Edition including Addenda through Winter 1975, and the welding procedure qualified with the above combination of welding processes.
Is it permissible to utilize the PQR covering the above qualified combination of welding processes to substantiate a new WPS for the following production welds: 1/16 to 3/8 in. thick by using the GTAW process, 3/16 to 5/8 in. thick by using the GMAW process, 1/16 to 3½ in. thick where the first 1/16 in. is deposited using the GTAW process, and the remaining 3-7/16 in. using the GMAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5217 |
| IX-80-40 |
Section IX, QW-216.2(d) |
QW-216.2(d) |
6/26/1980 |
|
Prior to the Winter 1979 Addenda, a Manufacturer's hardfacing procedure qualifications included chemical analysis taken on a plane at least 0.020 in. below the surface of the "as welded" and conditioned hardfacing but no greater in depth than the plane representing the minimum hardsurfacing thickness of the Welding Procedure Specification. This was done in accordance with QW-216.2(d) of Section IX prior to the Winter 1979 Addenda and provided a sampling from a plane which was greater in distance from the base metal than the minimum hardsurfacing thickness specified.
The figure QW-462.5 referred to in QW-216.2(d) of the Winter 1979 Addenda clearly indicates that chemical analysis sampling should be done at the minimum specified thickness with a limit of the minimum Specification thickness less 0.020 in.
May the procedures qualified prior to the Winter 1979 Addenda be used in current Code construction? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5218 |
| IX-80-41 |
Section IX, Impact Test Qualification of Multiprocess Welds |
|
7/8/1980 |
|
We are qualifying a multiple process procedure on a single test plate for an application where toughness testing is required. QW-451.2, Note (5) of Section IX states that toughness testing, if required, shall be applied with respect to each welding process.
When one or more processes are used in a qualification test plate in a thickness less than 5/8 in., how may the requirements of QW-451.2, Note (5) be implemented? |
Where the thickness of deposit of one or more processes in a multiprocess test plate is not of a thickness that permits removal of toughness test specimens, additional test plates shall be prepared using a weld deposit thickness of 5/8 in. thick minimum to permit toughness testing in accordance with QW-451.2, Note (5).
Where an autogenous welding process in a multiple process qualification test plate is used, and it therefore is not possible to prepare a separate test plate of sufficient thickness to permit toughness testing, the notch toughness test specimen shall be located in such a manner in the procedure qualification test plate as to test the entire thickness of the metal deposited. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5219 |
| IX-80-43 |
Section IX, QW-403.13 |
QW-403.13 |
7/23/1980 |
|
A WPS has been qualified for a P-No. 9B, Group No. 1 steel using the SAW process to meet specified impact test requirements. Does QW-403.13 permit this procedure to be used to weld P-No. 9A Group No. 1 steels without requalification provided no other essential or supplementary essential variables are changed? |
No. QW-403.5 must also be considered. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5220 |
| IX-80-44 |
Section IX, QW-410.7 |
QW-410.7 |
7/23/1980 |
|
QW-410.7 states: "A change in the width, frequency, or dwell time of oscillation." Does this supplemental essential variable for GTAW apply to both automatic and manual welding. |
QW-410.7 applies to automatic or machine welding only. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5221 |
| IX-80-47 |
Section IX, QW-282.4 |
QW-282.4 |
8/12/1980 |
|
Concerning QW-282.4, do subparagraphs (a) through (h) apply only to SAW, and subparagraphs (i) through (l) apply only to GMAW, GTAW, and PAW? |
Subparagraphs (a) through (l) of QW-282.4 apply to SAW, GMAW, GTAW, and PAW excepted as noted in subparagraphs (a) and (i). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5222 |
| IX-80-52 |
Section IX, QW-432 |
QW-432 |
8/28/1980 |
|
If a welder is qualified to weld with the GTAW process with an F-No. 6 filler metal of weld metal analysis other than A-No. 8 or 9, is he qualified to weld with an F-No. 6 filler metal of weld metal analysis A-No. 8 or 9, or vice versa, all other essential variables being the same? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5223 |
| IX-80-52R |
Section IX, QW-432 |
QW-432 |
11/17/1983 |
|
If a welder is qualified to weld with the GTAW process with an F-No. 6 filler metal of weld metal analysis other than A-No. 8 or 9, is he qualified to weld with an F-No. 6 filler metal of weld metal analysis A-No. 8 or 9, or vice versa, all other essential variables being the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5224 |
| IX-80-42 |
Section IX, Regarding Variables for Hardfacing and Fully Automatic GTAW |
|
7/10/1980 |
|
In QW-282.4(f) and (g) it is stated that the welding parameters must be within the range specified. Does this mean that a range must be qualified? |
No. The qualification must be within the range specified in the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5225 |
| IX-80-42 |
Section IX, Regarding Variables for Hardfacing and Fully Automatic GTAW |
|
7/10/1980 |
|
In QW-282.4(e) the cross-sectional area of the electrode or filler metal is an essential variable. Does this mean that:
(a) each diameter of filler metal must be qualified independently?
(b) the minimum and maximum diameters of filler metals be qualified separately and all the diameters which fall between the two are qualified?
(c) all diameters being qualified can be applied on a single part which is being used to qualify the procedure? |
(a) Yes, provided that the nominal cross-sectional area is changed more than 10%.
(b) No. Other essential variables, such as QW-282.4(f), (g), and (h), are simultaneously applicable such as to generally provide this answer.
(c) No, except when all diameters are part of a single procedure being qualified and each diameter is defined with respect to other essential variables, such as QW-282.4(f), (g), and (h). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5225 |
| IX-80-42 |
Section IX, Regarding Variables for Hardfacing and Fully Automatic GTAW |
|
7/10/1980 |
|
In QW-282.4(h) it is stated that the travel speed is an essential variable. Is it therefore necessary to qualify the minimum and maximum travel independently, or should they be recorded during the qualification of a single part. |
The travel speed used in qualification shall be within 10% of the range specified in the WPS. If it is necessary to change the travel speed to a range more than 10% beyond that specified (to a faster or a slower travel speed), it is necessary to qualify this new travel speed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5225 |
| IX-80-42 |
Section IX, Regarding Variables for Hardfacing and Fully Automatic GTAW |
|
7/10/1980 |
|
Also, for hardsurfacing, how should the above Questions be answered for performance qualifications? |
As given above, as further delineated in QW-312. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5225 |
| IX-80-42 |
Section IX, Regarding Variables for Hardfacing and Fully Automatic GTAW |
|
7/10/1980 |
|
Another area in which I am unsure of the Code's intent is in fully automatic gas tungsten arc welding. In QW-356, fully automatic GTAW is not listed. Does this mean that only the procedure has to be qualified? |
No. Performance qualification for welding operators (fully automatic processes) shall be in accordance with QW-305 as specified in QW-361. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5225 |
| IX-80-45 |
Section IX, QW-404.13 |
QW-404.13 |
7/31/1980 |
|
QW-404.13 is an essential variable for GTAW. This variable contains the following phrase, "... a change in the consumable insert composition..." Does this phrase refer to a change from one P-Number to another P-Number (e.g., a change from a mild steel consumable insert to an austenitic chromium nickel steel consumable insert) or a change with the same P-Number (e.g., a change from a IN308 consumable insert to a IN316 consumable insert)? |
P-Numbers apply to base materials only, not welding filler metals. Welding filler metals are classified in F-Numbers and A-Numbers. Where a metal is beyond the F-Number or A-Number designation, requalification would be required for each composition listed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5226 |
| IX-80-46 |
Section IX, QW-462 |
QW-462 |
7/31/1980 |
|
What are the dimensional tolerances for tensile and bend test specimens in QW-462, where such tolerances are not specified? |
The Code does not specify exact dimensional tolerances for bend tests, but recommends that standard commercial machining tolerances be observed. Where the tensile test has rectangular cross sections, it is necessary to take dimension measurements for the purpose of cross-sectional area calculations. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5227 |
| IX-80-48 |
Section IX, QW-304 and QW-305 |
QW-304; QW-305 |
8/15/1980 |
|
In a procedure for a dissimilar thickness joint where one side of the joint is a cylinder ½ in. thick with a 24 in. I.D. and the other side is a flange 3 in. thick, also with a 24 in. I.D. forming a corner joint having a weld thickness of ½ in., what is the minimum thickness which can be used to qualify the procedure? |
The minimum thickness for qualification is 1½ in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5228 |
| IX-80-49 |
Section IX, Qualification Thicknesses |
|
8/21/1980 |
|
Two PQRs have been qualified, the first using GTAW on ¼ in. thick material and the second using SMAW on ¾ in. material. What is the maximum base metal thickness which can be welded using a combination of these two PQR's, ½ in. or 1½ in.? |
The maximum base metal thickness is ½ in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5229 |
| IX-80-49 |
Section IX, Qualification Thicknesses |
|
8/21/1980 |
|
In a procedure for a dissimilar thickness joint where one side of the joint is a cylinder ½ in. thick with a 24 in. I.D. and the other side is a flange 3 in. thick, also with a 24 in. I.D. forming a corner joint having a weld thickness of ½ in., what is the minimum thickness which can be used to qualify the procedure? |
The minimum thickness for qualification is 1½ in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5229 |
| IX-80-49 |
Section IX, Qualification Thicknesses |
|
8/21/1980 |
|
Two PQRs have been qualified, the first using GTAW on ¼ in. thick material and the second using SMAW on ¾ in. material. What is the maximum base metal thickness which can be welded using a combination of these two PQR's, ½ in. or 1½ in.? |
The maximum base metal thickness is ½ in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5229 |
| IX-80-50 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification Limits |
|
8/26/1980 |
|
Does the amount of weld metal deposited by a welder determine the maximum thickness of base metal a welder may weld regardless of the original test coupon size? |
Base metal thickness is not a consideration in performance qualification; therefore, only the range of thickness of deposited weld metal qualified is given in QW-452.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5230 |
| IX-80-50 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification Limits |
|
8/26/1980 |
|
In QW-452.1, does the category, "3/4 in. and over" mean that a welder depositing a full weld on a 3/4 in. thick test coupon is qualified to deposit the maximum weld necessary on an unlimited thickness of base metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5230 |
| IX-80-51 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification |
|
8/26/1980 |
|
Are welders who make groove welds attaching nozzle necks or couplings, that are less than 2-7/8 in. O.D., to shells or heads using the attachment joint detail shown in Fig. UW-16.1 sketch (a), (b), or (w-3) required to be qualified on 2 in. or smaller diameter pipe? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5231 |
| IX-80-51 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification |
|
8/26/1980 |
|
Does qualification on plate in the 2G (Horizontal) position qualify a welder to make the above groove welds when the O.D. of the nozzle or coupling is 2-7/8 in. and over, in the 1G position or the 2G position, or both? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5231 |
| IX-80-51 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification |
|
8/26/1980 |
|
Does qualification on plate in the 3G (Vertical) position qualify a welder to make the above groove welds when the O.D. of the nozzle or coupling is 2-7/8 in. and over, in the 1G position only? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5231 |
| IX-80-51 |
Section IX, Performance Qualification |
|
8/26/1980 |
|
If groove welds attaching nozzle necks or couples to shells or heads using the attachment joint detail shown in Fig. UW-16.1 sketch (a), (b), or (w-3), for all diameters through 24 in., are to be made in the 5G or 6G position, is the welder required to be tested on pipe as a test in plate would not qualify in these positions? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5231 |
| IX-80-53 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
8/28/1980 |
|
When welding a groove weld procedure qualification test coupon having a thickness of 1-1/2 in. or greater and using one of the welding processes of QW-403.7, what is the maximum base metal thickness qualified by this PQR? |
For the multipass processes of shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas tungsten-arc, and gas metal-arc (except low voltage, short-circuiting type) in which no pass is thicker than 1/2 in., the maximum thickness is 8 in. for test plates up to in 8 in. thick. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5232 |
| IX-80-54 |
Section IX, QW-310 |
QW-310 |
9/3/1980 |
|
A procedure has been qualified with an F-No. 4 electrode using SMAW. Does QW-310 permit this procedure to be used with F-Number electrodes lower than F-No. 4, all other essential variables being the same? |
No. QW-310 applies only to performance qualification. QW-404.4, an essential variable for SMAW, requires requalification of a procedure for changes in the F-Number classification of the electrode. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5233 |
| IX-80-55 |
Section IX, QB-408.1 |
|
9/8/1980 |
|
A Manufacturer has a Brazing Procedure Specification for copper nickel which is qualified for the range of thicknesses used in construction. The joint design is a socket connection with a lap which is held within the required +25%. This is a requirement of QB-408.1 which states: "A change in the joint design details, i.e., from a butt to a lap or socket, or a change in lap of +25%."
Is the procedure qualified acceptable, or would additional requalification be required for different lap design details? For example, ½ in. +25%, ¾ in. +25%, 1 in. +25%, etc. |
Yes, the procedure qualified is acceptable for multiple diameter sockets, provided the change in lap does not exceed +25% and the joint clearances continue to meet the requirements of QB-408.2.
ATTENTION
The foregoing Interpretation has been further considered, and the following revised Reply sent to the inquirer.
Revision Issued: November 21, 1980
Reply: Yes, the procedure qualified is acceptable. The change in lap of +25%, shown in QB-408.1, applies to the 4T (design) for each thickness, not the qualified lap as listed in the PQR. The PQR qualified a design lap of 4T. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5234 |
| IX-80-57 |
Section IX, QW-466.1 Guided Bend Jig |
QW-466.1 |
9/23/1980 |
|
Are the dimensions shown in QW-466.1 Guided Bend Jig critical? |
As stated in QW-162.1, the test jig should be built in substantial accordance with QW-466. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5236 |
| IX-80-57 |
Section IX, QW-466.1 Guided Bend Jig |
QW-466.1 |
9/23/1980 |
|
What does "All others" in the Material column for specimen thickness 3/8 in. and t refer to? |
All material listed in QW-422 not specifically referred to in the Material column. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5236 |
| IX-80-57 |
Section IX, QW-466.1 Guided Bend Jig |
QW-466.1 |
9/23/1980 |
|
What is the sample thickness range for this setup (QW-466.1)? |
Each test jig in QW-466.1 is made for a specific nominal thickness. The t line allows flexibility in establishing this thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5236 |
| IX-80-57 |
Section IX, QW-466.1 Guided Bend Jig |
QW-466.1 |
9/23/1980 |
|
Where would correct dimensional data for thicker sections be found? |
See Reply (3). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5236 |
| IX-80-57 |
Section IX, QW-466.1 Guided Bend Jig |
QW-466.1 |
9/23/1980 |
|
Is a different set of jigs necessary for each pipe wall thickness? |
Yes, when jigs are made to QW-466.1. Adjustable jigs are marketed to meet the requirements of QW-466.2 and QW-466.3. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5236 |
| IX-80-58 |
Section IX, Use of WPS's and PQR's by a Manufacturer Operating Under Two Names |
|
9/24/1980 |
|
A Manufacturer is fabricating generators for installation at a foreign site. A wholly owned subsidiary is manufacturing hydraulic turbines to be used at this site. The Manufacturer producing the generators is responsible for the total installation of the turbines and generators. When working in foreign countries, the Manufacturer uses a different name (this is done to avoid problems involving taxation). The supervision and administration of all work is the responsibility of the manufacturer working under this different name. The personnel involved at site are employees of the Manufacturer working under this different name. All salaries, benefits, etc., and their administration and supervision are by the Manufacturer. Can this Manufacturer prepare a WPS, qualify it in his native country, and use it as a qualified WPS at a foreign sale? |
Yes, provided the company relationship and responsibility for technical welding control is established in the stamp holders approved QA system. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5237 |
| IX-80-58 |
Section IX, Use of WPS's and PQR's by a Manufacturer Operating Under Two Names |
|
9/24/1980 |
|
When working in a foreign country, is it necessary for a Manufacturer to prepare a WPS and PQR under the name they use when working in a foreign country, or may they be prepared under the name they use in their native country? |
It is not necessary for a Manufacturer to prepare a WPS and PQR under the name they use when working in a foreign country. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5237 |
| IX-80-59 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
9/29/1980 |
|
In QW-451.1, is it correct that the T dimension (thickness of test coupon welded) should be the reported thickness as given by the CMTR for the test coupon? |
The thickness of the test coupon to be recorded on the PQR should be that given in the CMTR. However, if it is not available or the applicable dimension is not given on the CMTR, the thickness of the test coupon can be obtained by direct measurement. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5238 |
| IX-80-59 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
9/29/1980 |
|
Two qualification tests were performed on SA-240 sheet, one of 0.012 in. thickness and one of 0.026 in. thickness. When both PQR's are combined to support one WPS, may the total qualified thickness range of the WPS be expressed as 0.012 in. through 0.052 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5238 |
| IX-80-60 |
Section IX, QW-432 |
QW-432 |
9/30/1980 |
|
When referring to the F-Number Tables, QW-432, SFA-5.4 is listed under both F-No. 4 and F-No. 5. For a particular AWS Classification of SFA-5.4, how does a Manufacturer determine which of these F-Numbers to assign to the electrode? |
The F-No. 5 grouping is for low hydrogen austenitic stainless steel electrodes of SFA-5.4 Specification. Those SFA-5.4 electrodes not falling into this grouping would be considered F-No. 4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5239 |
| IX-80-61 |
Section IX, QW-310.1 and QW-457.3 |
QW-310.1; QW-457.3 |
11/7/1980 |
|
Assuming the thickness limitations are met, is a welder who qualifies on pipe over 2-7/8 in. O.D. qualified to weld on any pipe over 2-7/8 in. O.D. (i.e., qualification on 10 in. O.D. pipe qualifies a welder to weld on 3 in. O.D. pipe) ? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5240 |
| IX-80-62 |
Section IX, QW-202.2 and QW-403.6 |
QW-202.2; QW-403.6 |
11/11/1980 |
|
If a fillet weld is made on material 0.154 in. thick, does QW-202.2 take precedence over QW-403.6 and allow the use of a PQR made on ½ in. material? |
No. If the requirements of supplemental essential variable QW-403.6 are applicable for a given procedure, then for thicknesses less than 5/8 in., the thickness of the test coupon (PQR) is the minimum thickness qualified for production welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5241 |
| IX-80-63 |
Section IX, QW-403.11 |
QW-403.11 |
11/11/1980 |
|
Will a procedure qualification not requiring impact testing, using a P-No. 5 Group No. 1 (3% maximum Cr content) material welded to itself, also qualify the welding of P-No. 5 Group No. 2 (over 3% Cr content) material to itself? |
Yes, provided no other essential variables are changed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5242 |
| IX-80-63 |
Section IX, QW-403.11 |
QW-403.11 |
11/11/1980 |
|
Will a procedure qualification not requiring impact testing, using a base metal of P-No. 5 Group No. 1 (3% maximum Cr content) welded to itself, qualify the welding of any P-No. 5 base metal to lower P-Number base metals? |
Only those P-No. 5 base metals with a maximum Cr content of 3% may be welded to lower P-Number base metals for the procedure qualification cited in the Question. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5242 |
| IX-80-64 |
Section IX, Preamble |
|
11/11/1980 |
|
In the event that revision or amendment is required for a "prior to 1962" welding procedure specification, must this be rewritten in accordance with the current Edition of Section IX? |
No. However these revisions or amendments may or may not require requalification of the WPS, depending on the classification of the variable or variables affected. If requalification is required, it shall be made in accordance with the test requirements of the current Edition of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5243 |
| IX-80-65 |
Section IX, QW-404 |
QW-404 |
11/14/1980 |
|
A Manufacturer has a qualified WPS for welding P-No. 1 to P-No. 1. The WPS lists a range of low hydrogen electrodes from 3/32 in. through 1/4 in. diameters with the accompanying required ranges of voltage and current for each diameter. For SMAW, a change in electrode diameter is a nonessential variable for diameters less than 1/4 in. Does a welder have the option of selecting the electrode diameter he wishes to use for the root, filler and cap passes? |
Section IX has no requirements concerning the above Question. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5244 |
| IX-80-66 |
Section IX, Weld Procedure for Tack Weld |
|
12/8/1980 |
|
When the tack welds are to be a part of the completed production weld, what are the procedure and performance qualification requirements for such welds? |
Tack welds which form a part of the completed weld are considered a part of the overall production weld, and their qualifications are automatically obtained in meeting the requirements of Section IX for production or performance welding in regards to thickness, or diameter, or both.
ATTENTION
The foregoing Interpretation has been further considered, and the following corrected Reply sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: May 13, 1981
Reply: Tack welds which form a part of a completed weld must be welded using a qualified WPS and a qualified welder. The procedure qualification requirements shall be in accordance with QW-202, and the performance qualification requirements shall be in accordance with QW-302. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5245 |
| IX-80-67 |
Section IX, Nozzle to Shell Connections |
|
12/8/1980 |
|
When nozzle or branch connections are attached to the wall or head of a pressure vessel, what are the basic criteria establishing procedure and performance qualification requirements, assuming impact testing is not a requirement? |
Where the nozzle is attached to the vessel by welding completely through the thickness of the vessel wall, the procedure shall be qualified for the thickness of the vessel wall penetrated by the nozzle or attachment. Where additional metal is placed on either the interior or exterior of the vessel wall in the form of fillet welds, they shall be considered as having been qualified by the procedure qualification covering the thickness of the vessel wall. Performance qualification for this weldment may be made in plate to cover the appropriate thickness of the vessel wall and the position in which the weld is being made. Diameter is not a factor.
Where the nozzle or attachment is welded to the vessel wall by welding through the thickness of the nozzle or attachment, the procedure qualification shall be made for the thickness of the nozzle or attachment wall at the time of welding. Performance qualification for this condition shall be made with the appropriate diameter pipe weld as required by QW-452.3 with the range of thickness of weld metal qualified determined by the thickness of the nozzle or attachment wall at the time of welding. Any fillet welds, both procedure and performance, will have been qualified when qualifying for the full penetration welds involved.
ATTENTION
The foregoing Interpretation has been further considered, and the following corrected Interpretation sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: March 12, 1981
Question: When nozzle or branch connections are attached to the wall or head of a pressure vessel, what are the basic criteria establishing procedure and performance qualification?
Reply: For groove weld procedure qualification, the base metal thickness range for all base metals being joined in addition to the deposited weld metal thickness range for each process used must be qualified in accordance with QW-451 (see QW-202.4). Also, see exemptions in QW-202 for fillet weld procedure qualifications.
For groove weld performance qualification, the deposited weld metal thickness range must be qualified per QW-452, and where the nozzle or attachment is welded to the vessel wall by welding through the thickness of the nozzle or attachment, a "set-on connection" performance qualification shall be made with the appropriate diameter pipe as required by QW-452.3. Where the nozzle or attachment is welded to the vessel wall with the weld preparation made on the vessel wall, a "set-in" connection, diameter is not a factor. See QW-303 for exemptions for fillet welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5246 |
| IX-80-68 |
Section IX, Flash Butt Welding of Unfired Pressure Vessel Flange Rings for Use in Section VIII - Division 1 Fabrication |
|
12/9/1980 |
|
When a Section of the Code, such as Section VIII - Division 1, UW-27(b),
permits welding processes not covered by Section IX, what can be considered as acceptable qualification? |
The intent of the Code is met by performing the mechanical test, tensile test, and bend test to the standards of Section IX. Since the variables for such processes are not included in Section IX, the fabricator shall establish a welding procedure listing those variables which he believes are needed by the welding operator to assure quality production work. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5247 |
| IX-80-69 |
Section IX, QW-404.4 |
QW-404.4 |
12/9/1980 |
|
In the 1977 Edition of Section IX, QW-404.4 stated "A change from one F-Number in QW-432 to any other F-Number or to any other filler metal not listed in QW-432, except if otherwise allowed in QW-310." Using the provision of QW-310.4(a), does a welding procedure qualified with an F-Number up to and including F-No. 4 qualify welding procedures for the same or lower F-Number, all other essential variables being the same? |
No. The reference to QW-310 in QW-404.4 was recognized as not being appropriate as the variable is only for procedure qualification and not for performance qualification. The last phrase of QW-404.4 has subsequently been eliminated to prevent such reasoning in the application of this variable. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5248 |
| IX-80-70 |
Section IX, QW-182 |
QW-182 |
12/12/1980 |
|
Do the results of a fillet weld fracture test of QW-182 which has inclusions and gas pockets meet the requirements of Section IX provided the sum of these imperfections does not exceed 3/4 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5249 |
| IX-80-71 |
Section IX, QW-404.4 |
QW-404.4 |
12/29/1980 |
|
Is the change from one proprietary brand name filler metal to another of the same range of chemical analysis specified in the WPS considered a change of essential variable QW-404.4 (A change from one F-Number in QW-432 to any other F-Number or to any other filler metal not listed in QW-432)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5250 |
| IX-81-01 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
1/5/1981 |
|
Does a groove in a procedure test coupon of thickness T have to be filled completely with weld metal to meet the requirements of Section IX for a groove weld procedure test coupon? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5251 |
| IX-81-02 |
Section IX, QW-201.3 and QW-451.1 |
QW-201.3; QW-451.1 |
1/20/1981 |
|
A welding procedure is qualified on a base material with a thickness of 1.125 in. Two welding processes are used. The deposited weld metal thickness for each process is GMAW Short Circuiting Transfer Mode 0.125 in., SAW 1 in. What is the maximum base metal thickness qualified by this combination procedure? |
1.2375 in. maximum. See QW-200.4 and QW-403.10. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5252 |
| IX-81-02 |
Section IX, QW-201.3 and QW-451.1 |
QW-201.3; QW-451.1 |
1/20/1981 |
|
A welding procedure is qualified on a base material thickness of 0.280 in. using the GMAW Short Circuiting Transfer Mode. A second welding procedure is qualified on a base material thickness of 1.500 in. by the GTAW and SAW processes. A new WPS is written using these two procedures, using GMAW Short Circuiting Transfer Mode for the first layer with SAW balance. What is the maximum base metal thickness qualified by combining these two procedures? |
0.308 in. maximum. See QW-200.4 and QW-403.10. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5252 |
| IX-81-03 |
Section IX, Multiprocess Thickness Ranges |
|
1/20/1981 |
|
When using individually a process that was qualified in combination with another process, what benefit is gained by stating a base metal thickness range that is greater than the deposited weld metal thickness range allowed? |
The thicker base metal thickness range is primarily needed for combination process welds wherein both base metal and deposited weld metal thickness ranges must be qualified. But the thicker base metal range may also be used when welding base metals of dissimilar thicknesses or for partial penetration groove welds wherein the base metal thickness is greater than the weld groove preparation and, therefore, is greater than the deposited weld metal thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5253 |
| IX-81-03 |
Section IX, Multiprocess Thickness Ranges |
|
1/20/1981 |
|
A new WPS is to be written utilizing a multiprocess procedure GTAW-SAW qualified in combination, and a single procedure qualified by itself. The multiprocess procedure was qualified using a base metal thickness of 1½ in. The single process procedure was qualified on a base material with a thickness of ½ in. by the GMAW-S (short circuiting process). The new WPS will use the GMAW-S process for the root pass and SAW balance. What is the maximum base metal thickness that can be welded using this combination of processes? |
0.550 in. maximum. See QW-200.4 and QW-403.10. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5253 |
| IX-81-04 |
Section IX, QW-282.4(f) |
QW-282.4(f) |
1/28/1981 |
|
In reference to hard facing weld metal overlay essential variable QW-282.4(f), does the phrase "... beyond the range specified" refer to the current range specified in the Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) or the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)? |
The range referred to above is that which is listed on the WPS. Supporting PQR's must be within the specified range. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5254 |
| IX-81-05 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
3/5/1981 |
|
A welder was performance qualified with the manual SMAW process and the semiautomatic SAW process on January 1, 1980. He welded using the SMAW process on January 15, 1980. Must he weld using the semiautomatic SAW process on or before April 15, 1980 to remain qualified with the semi-automatic SAW? |
If there is no additional welding after the SMAW on January 15, 1980, the SMAW qualification will expire on April 16. Since the welder is no longer employed on some other welding process, his semiautomatic SAW qualification will also expire on April 16. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5255 |
| IX-81-05 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
3/5/1981 |
|
A welder was qualified with SMAW and semiautomatic SAW on January 1, 1980. He welds using SMAW on March 15, 1980 and May 15, 1980. Must he weld using semiautomatic SAW after July 1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5255 |
| IX-81-06 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
3/5/1981 |
|
Can a contractor who has developed, qualified, and maintained his welding procedure specification and has qualified his welders to these qualified WPS's then place the welders' qualification test papers into a pool of qualified welders maintained by an organized group (in this case, the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau) for all member contractors to use? |
Section IX does not recognize or address any organized group with regard to welder qualification.
Section IX is explicit that each Manufacturer shall certify that welders have been qualified in accordance with one of his qualified welding procedures specifications in accordance with the requirements of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5256 |
| IX-81-06 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
3/5/1981 |
|
Are the organized group and all its member contractors in compliance with Section IX if they use these welders described in Question (1), without qualifying them? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5256 |
| IX-81-07 |
Section IX, Qualification of Small Diameter Pipe |
|
3/5/1981 |
|
May procedure qualification for fillet welded socket joints less than 3/4 in. in diameter be conducted on the test specimen prescribed for performance qualification, with testing as required for performance qualification? |
No. QW-202.2 requires procedure qualification for fillet welds only to be in accordance with QW-180. QW-181.1 refers to QW-462.4(a) as the only acceptable way to qualify such procedures. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5257 |
| IX-81-08 |
Section IX, QW-300.2 |
QW-300.2 |
3/5/1981 |
|
May a Certificate Holder subcontract qualification of his welders to a testing laboratory under the following conditions?
(a) the Certificate Holder will have specific individuals identified in the testing laboratory to oversee, supervise, and control the qualification test coupons being made;
(b) the identified individual (at the test lab) would be compensated separately for his services;
(c) the welders will weld to the Certificate Holder's procedures; and
(d) the performance qualification test coupons will be tested using the Certificate Holder's established criteria. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5258 |
| IX-81-09 |
Section IX, QW-303.3 |
QW-303.3 |
3/5/1981 |
|
A 2 in. NPS pipe is to be welded, without backing, to a flange to build a nozzle for a Section VIII vessel. The assembly is placed in a positioner and rotated in such a manner that the entire weld is made in the 1G position (maximum 15 deg. off horizontal). Does the welder have to be qualified for small pipe diameter less than 2-7/8 in. O.D. per QW-303.3 and QW-452.3? |
In the example cited above, the welder would have to be qualified for small diameter pipe (less than 2-7/8 in. O.D.). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5259 |
| IX-81-10 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
3/5/1981 |
|
Do the small diameter qualification requirements of QW-452.3 apply to welders who weld small diameter (less than 2-7/8 in. O.D.) drill through bosses or weld pads that will later be drilled out to form a branch connection to a pressure component? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5260 |
| IX-81-10 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
3/5/1981 |
|
If the answer to the above question is yes, how is the wall thickness determined and what tests are to be performed on the test coupon? |
The wall thickness is not a consideration. Refer to QW-452.3 for requirements based on deposited weld metal thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5260 |
| IX-81-11 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
3/12/1981 |
|
A procedure qualification groove weld test is conducted on 2 in. thick base metal. A root pass of 1/8 in. is deposited with GTAW, and the balance is filled with SMAW. The coupon is sectioned and meets the acceptance criteria for the required testing. Is this procedure qualified for a base metal thickness of 3/16 in. through 8 in.? |
Yes, provided the thickness ranges for deposited weld metal are observed. However, for a procedure consisting of only GTAW, the range of base metal thickness is 1/16 in. through 8 in. with 1/16 in. through 1/4 in. of deposited weld metal. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5261 |
| IX-81-11 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
3/12/1981 |
|
Is the procedure described in Question (1) qualified for deposited 1/4 in. of GTAW and 7-3/4 in. of SMAW on 8 in. thick base metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5261 |
| IX-81-11 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
3/12/1981 |
|
May the PQR described in Question (1) be used to support a procedure consisting only of SMAW for both base metal and deposited weld metal ranges of 3/16 in. through 8 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5261 |
| IX-81-11 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
3/12/1981 |
|
May the PQR described in Question (1) be used to support a procedure consisting only of GTAW for both base metal and deposited weld metal ranges of 1/16 in. through 1/4 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5261 |
| IX-81-12 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
3/12/1981 |
|
A recent weld test using dissimilar materials SA-516 Gr. 70 to A 238 Gr. 9 was given a postweld heat treatment at 1350°F for 6 hr to meet the requirements of application for ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.3, Section VIII, and welded fittings SA-234 Grade P9. While the tension tests were acceptable with this heat treatment, the side bends failed with a brittle type fracture at the interface of the A 387 Gr. 9 plate and weld deposit, with no visible weld defects. During welding the test coupons were maintained at 400-600F and allowed to cool after welding beneath an insulating blanket. Since QW-163 does permit cracking if not the result of slag inclusions or other internal defects, would the side bends be acceptable despite the complete fracture? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5262 |
| IX-81-13 |
Section IX, Repair Welding |
|
3/12/1981 |
|
Is it necessary to make full thickness butt welds in thick test materials to qualify for minor surface repair, overlay, or buildup welding on thick parts? |
The Summer 1980 Addenda to Section IX revised QW-202.3. This paragraph states in part, "The upper limit for base metal and deposited weld metal shall be in accordance with QW-451, except qualification on 1½ in. thick base metal will permit welding on unlimited thickness." There is a conflict between QW-202.3 and QW-202.2 in both the Summer and Winter 1980 Addenda that is applicable to this matter. QW-202.3 is correct and reference to the 3 in. thick base metal in QW-202.2 should be ignored. Corrections to these paragraphs will be made by Errata in the Summer 1981 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5263 |
| IX-81-14 |
Section IX, QW-305 |
QW-305 |
3/12/1981 |
|
Is a welding operator who is qualified to weld to a WPS in one process and position qualified to weld to any other WPS in this same process in all positions? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5264 |
| IX-81-15 |
Section IX, QW-403.11 |
QW-403.11 |
3/12/1981 |
|
When using either SMAW or GTAW, does welding with F-No. 5 (A-No. 8), F-No. 6 (A-No.8), or F-No. 43 filler materials on a P-No. 5 to P-No. 5 base material (with 3% maximum chromium content), also qualify for welding with the following base metals (using the same welding process and filler materials): P-No. 4 to P-No. 5, P-No. 4 to P-No. 4, P-No. 1 to P-No. 5, P-No. 1 to P-No. 4, and P-No. 1 to P-No.l? |
QW-403.11 allows a procedure qualified with P-No. 1,3, 4 or 5 (3% maximum chromium content) base metal welded to itself to qualify for that P-Number base metal welded to each of the lower P-Number base metals. Therefore, for the example cited above, the following base metal combinations are qualified (using the.same welding process and filler materials): P-No. 5 to P-No. 5, P-No. 4 to P-No. 5, P-No. 3 to P-No. 5, and P-No. 1 to P-No. 5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5265 |
| IX-81-16 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
3/12/1981 |
|
In QW-163, is the total amount of defect allowed on the surface of one bend strap a total of 1/8 in.? |
There may be any number of defects as long as any one defect does not exceed 1/8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5266 |
| IX-81-17 |
Section IX, QW-403.11 and QW-403.12 |
QW-403.11; QW-403.12 |
3/12/1981 |
|
For SMAW, SAW, GMAW, GTAW, and PAW welding processes, QW-403.11 and QW-403.12 state that for P-Nos. 1,3, 4, and 5 (of 3% maximum nominal chromium content) a procedure qualification test with one P-Number metal shall also qualify for that P-Number metal welded to each of the lower P-Number metals (i.e., P-No. 5 to P-No. 5 also qualifies P-No. 5 to P-No. 4, P-No. 5 to P-No. 3, and P-No. 5 to P-No. 1). Does this also mean that a procedure qualification test with one P-Number to a lower P-Number (e.g., P-No. 5 to P-No. 4) will also qualify that P-Number to lower P-Numbers (e.g., P-No. 5 to P-No. 3 or P-No. 5 to P-No. 1 )? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5267 |
| IX-81-18 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
3/12/1981 |
|
Is a welder qualified with backing for SMAW also qualified to weld flare bevel groove welds, tee fillet welds, and partial penetration groove welds? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5268 |
| IX-81-21 |
Section IX, Thickness Qualification |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
Is a right angle joint between a piece of 3/4 in. thick material and a 2 in. thick material where there is a "J" preparation in the 3/4 in. piece considered a groove weld? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5269 |
| IX-81-21 |
Section IX, Thickness Qualification |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
What is the minimum thickness of test plate that will qualify a 3/4 in. to 2 in. dissimilar thickness groove weld? |
1 in.; QW-202.4 contains qualification requirements for joints between dissimilar base metal thicknesses. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5269 |
| IX-81-25 |
Section IX, QW-409.8 |
QW-409.8 |
5/13/1981 |
|
Is it required by QW-409.8 to list a voltage range on welding procedure specifications written for manual SMAW and GTAW? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5270 |
| IX-81-26 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/13/1981 |
|
A welder has not used a specific process for a period of 3 months or more, but during that 3 month period has taken and passed a performance qualification test with a different process. Would this welder's qualification on the first process be extended to 6 months? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5271 |
| IX-81-29 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
5/13/1981 |
|
Do welding procedures have to be qualified for each different heat treatment to comply with QW-407 for nonferrous materials of P-Nos. 41,42, 43, 44, and 45? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5272 |
| IX-81-22 |
Section IX, Qualification of an Autogenous Seal Weld |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
Will the following course of action provide an acceptable method of qualifying an autogenous weld:
(a) fuse the root of a groove weld using the GTAW process with no filler metal added;
(b) complete welding of the joint with the addition of filler metal;
(c) perform all required mechanical testing; and
(d) modify the WPS based on the PQR developed as a result of (c), eliminating all but the fused GTAW root pass from the actual production weld? |
Yes, provided that the applicable thickness ranges are not violated. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5273 |
| IX-81-23 |
Section IX, QB-422 |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
Why are the P-Number groupings in QB-422 changed from time to time, including elimination of some alloys? |
P-Number groupings in QB-422 am changed periodically for a number of reasons. These reasons include additions or deletions of alloy types in SA/SB specifications, occasional determinations that certain alloy types are not brazable, and infrequently, alloys are inadvertently eliminated as part of the editing and printing process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5274 |
| IX-81-23 |
Section IX, QB-422 |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
Can materials that have been eliminated from the P-No. 107 grouping in the Summer 1980 Addenda of Section IX be used? |
Materials that have been eliminated from the P-Number groupings cannot be used unless a Code Case is approved or Errata is published which permits their use to the Section IX Edition and Addenda from which they were removed. Alloys C 120, C 122, and C 142 (SB-75) were inadvertently dropped from P-No. 107 in the 1980 Edition, Summer 1980 Addenda and action is presently in progress to restore them in QB-422. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5274 |
| IX-81-23 |
Section IX, QB-422 |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
Are Alloys C122 (SB-75) and C102 (SB-42) in the temper drawn condition acceptable when only annealed properties are shown in QB-422? |
Copper alloys in the temper drawn condition are acceptable for use. Annealed properties are shown in the P-No. 107 grouping because temper drawn material will be annealed during the brazing operation. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5274 |
| IX-81-27 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/13/1981 |
|
In accordance with QW-322, may qualifications of a welding operator in a specific process be continuously extended by welding as a qualified welder in the same welding process (e.g., SAW, GMAW, FCAW)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5275 |
| IX-81-27 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/13/1981 |
|
In accordance with QW-322, may the qualifications of a welder in a specific process be continuously extended by welding as a qualified welding operator in the same welding process (e.g., SAW, GMAW, FCAW)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5275 |
| IX-81-27 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/13/1981 |
|
In accordance with QW-322, may both the expired welder and welding operator qualifications of an employee in a specific welding process (e.g., SAW, GMAW, FCAW) be re-established if the employee successfully makes only one test joint using all the variables of the previous welder test joint for the specific welding process (e.g., SAW, GMAW, FCAW)? |
The previous welder qualifications are reinstated, but not the welding operator qualifications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5275 |
| IX-81-27 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/13/1981 |
|
In accordance with QW-322, may both the expired welder and welding operator qualifications of an employee in a specific welding process (e.g. SAW, GMAW, FCAW) be re-established if the employee successfully makes only one test joint using all the variables of the previous welding operator test joint for the welding process (e.g., SAW, GMAW, FCAW)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5275 |
| IX-81-28 |
Section IX, QW-462.1 |
QW-462.1 |
5/13/1981 |
|
Two welders have been qualified for a thickness of deposited weld metal from 1/16 in. to 3/4 in. for a particular welding process. A third welder is qualified for a deposited weld metal thickness of 3/16 in. to 1 in. for the same welding process. A 1 in. thick pipe is to be welded in production, using a single vee butt joint, with the same process for which the welders are qualified. Is it permissible for each of the first two welders to deposit 1/2 in. of weld metal to complete the weld? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5276 |
| IX-81-28 |
Section IX, QW-462.1 |
QW-462.1 |
5/13/1981 |
|
Using the same welders and joint configuration as given in Question (1), one of the welders qualified for a deposited weld metal thickness range of 1/16 in. to 3/4 in. deposits the root pass. The welder qualified for 3/16 in. to 1 in. deposited weld metal thickness range completes the weld. Is a third welder required to deposit the weld reinforcement, or is it permissible for the welder who completed the weld to deposit the reinforcement? |
The welder who completed the weld may deposit the weld reinforcement. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5276 |
| IX-81-36 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
5/13/1981 |
|
Does qualification of a welding procedure using 1½ in. thick plate qualify for welding up to 8 in. even when notch toughness is a criteria? |
Yes, except as further limited by QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5277 |
| IX-81-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-410.7 |
QW-409.1; QW-410.7 |
3/27/1981 |
|
For manual GTAW when notch toughness is a consideration, QW-409.1 requires requalification of a WPS if there is an increase in the heat input during production. Does this mean that WPS must be qualified using constant monitoring devices to establish the voltage, amperage, and travel speed at any point in time? |
No. Constant monitoring devices to establish the voltage, amperage, and travel speed at any point in time are not required in order to meet the requirements of QW-409.1 for manual GTAW. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5278 |
| IX-81-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-410.7 |
QW-409.1; QW-410.7 |
3/27/1981 |
|
For manual GTAW when notch toughness is a consideration, QW-409.1 requires requalification of a WPS if there is an increase in the heat input during production. For a multipass weld, must the maximum heat input be established for each pass by constant monitoring during WPS qualification? |
No. Constant monitoring to establish maximum heat input for each pass on multiple pass welds is not required during WPS qualification in order to meet the requirements of QW-409.1 for manual GTAW. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5278 |
| IX-81-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-410.7 |
QW-409.1; QW-410.7 |
3/27/1981 |
|
For manual GTAW when notch toughness is a consideration, QW-409.1 requires requalification of a WPS if there is an increase in heat input during production. Is it required that an average heat input be obtained for the full thickness of the test coupon to establish a maximum? If it is not required, is it permissible? |
No. Average heat input is not required to be established for the full thickness of the test coupon to establish a maximum in order to meet the requirements of QW-409.1 for manual GTAW. It is permissible to establish average heat input during procedure qualification as it is permissible to take any additional data desired by those performing the procedure qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5278 |
| IX-81-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-410.7 |
QW-409.1; QW-410.7 |
3/27/1981 |
|
If QW-409.1 does not require that average heat input be determined, how is the heat input established for multiple pass procedure qualification? Must it be established for each pass? |
QW-409.1 requires requalification when an increase in heat input occurs over that qualified. Maximum heat input is established during procedure qualification by determination of the maximum amperage and voltage in combination with the least travel speed, or, alternatively, the maximum volume of weld metal deposited per unit length of weld. Heat input is not required to be determined for each pass. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5278 |
| IX-81-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-410.7 |
QW-409.1; QW-410.7 |
3/27/1981 |
|
QW-410.7 requires requalification of a WPS when there is a change in the width, frequency, or dwell time of oscillation. Does Section IX prohibit the use of manual GTAW when notch toughness is a requirements since QW-410.7 cannot be complied with? |
No. Section IX does not prohibit the use of manual GTAW when notch toughness is a requirement. The Summer 1980 Addenda to Section IX is clear that the supplementary essential variable QW-410.7 applies only to machine or automatic welding. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5278 |
| IX-81-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-410.7 |
QW-409.1; QW-410.7 |
3/27/1981 |
|
Does QW-410.7 apply to the stringer bead technique or just to the weave bead technique? |
QW-410.7 applies only to machine or automatic welding where there is a change in width, frequency, or dwell time of oscillation. The stringer bead technique in machine or automatic welding can be viewed as a special case of the weave bead technique where frequency and dwell time of oscillation are at or near zero. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5278 |
| IX-81-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-410.7 |
QW-409.1; QW-410.7 |
3/27/1981 |
|
The stringer bead technique is defined in Section IX as a "type of weld bead made without appreciable weaving motion." Industry practice seems to consider "appreciable" to be no more than two and one-half times the diameter of the filler wire. Does Section IX agree with this definition of "appreciable" and, if not, what does Section IX consider as "appreciable"? |
It is not appropriate to redefine or further define stringer bead technique in the context of manual GTAW and the supplementary essential variable QW-410.7. The supplementary essential variable QW-410.7 applies only to a change in width frequency or dwell time of oscillation for machine or automatic welding. Section IX does not establish or endorse what may or may not be industry practice. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5278 |
| IX-81-30 |
Section IX, PWHT |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
A Manufacturer's WPS to weld P-No. 4 to P-No. 4 metals specifies a minimum preheat temperature of 150°C (302°F) with PWHT at 593°C (1099°F) to 650°C (1202 °F). The supporting PQR to this WPS shows PWHT was performed at 700°C (1292°F) to 720°C (1328°F). Does the PWHT of the PQR support this WPS? |
Yes. However, the WPS must be modified to include the range of the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5279 |
| IX-81-30 |
Section IX, PWHT |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
When qualifying a WPS, a welded tensile test specimen of SA-106 Gr. A (48,000 psi UTS) failed at 45,600 psi, which is 95% of the UTS of the pipe. The UTS of the failed specimen conforms to QW-153(d). May this WPS be used to weld P-No. 1 to P-No. 1 metals using 70,000 psi filler metal which is other than the A-Number and F-Number shown on the PQR? |
No. See QW-404.4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5279 |
| IX-81-30R |
Section IX,QW-407.1(b), PWHT |
QW-407.1(b) |
9/20/1982 |
|
A manufacturer's WPS to weld P-No. 4 to P-No. 4 metals specifies a minimum preheat temperature of 150°C (302°F) with PWHT at 593°C: (1099°F) to 650°C (1202°F). The supporting PQR to this WPS shows PWHT was performed at 700°C (1292°F) to 720°C (1328°F). Does the PWHT of the PQR support this WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5280 |
| IX-81-30R |
Section IX,QW-407.1(b), PWHT |
QW-407.1(b) |
9/20/1982 |
|
When qualifying a WPS, a welded tensile test specimen of SA-106 Gr. A (48,000 psi UTS) failed at 45,600 psi, which is 95% of the UTS of the pipe, the UTS of the failed specimen conforms to QW-153(d). May this WPS be used to weld P-No. 1 to P-No. 1 metals using 70,000 psi filler metal which is other than the A-Number and F-Number shown on the PQR? |
No. See QW-404.4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5280 |
| IX-81-31 |
Section IX, QW-462 |
QW-462 |
5/13/1981 |
|
Is "full pipe thickness" of QW-151.2(a) defined as that thickness which results from the machining (within standard commercial tolerances) required by QW-462.1(b)? |
No. Full pipe thickness is the thickness before machining. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5281 |
| IX-81-31 |
Section IX, QW-462 |
QW-462 |
5/13/1981 |
|
Is the 3/4 in. dimension of QW-462.1(b) a minimum or a recommendation? If it is a minimum, is there a maximum? If it is a recommendation, is there a tolerance at which the size becomes unresponsive to the requirements of Section IX? |
The 3/4 in. dimension is a recommendation. It is not intended to be a minimum or maximum. As little material as necessary should be machined to obtain parallel surfaces for testing. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5281 |
| IX-81-20 |
Section IX, Procedure Qualification Variables |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
On the WPS, is it necessary to specify the Group Number after the P-Number? |
The Group Number must be listed after the P-Number when the referencing book Section specifies impact test requirements for notch toughness applications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5282 |
| IX-81-20 |
Section IX, Procedure Qualification Variables |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
On QW-482, is it necessary to specify the pipe diameter range? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5282 |
| IX-81-20 |
Section IX, Procedure Qualification Variables |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
On the WPS and PQR, is it necessary to specify or record the minimum preheat, maximum interpass, and preheat maintenance temperatures for materials not requiring heat treatment? |
The Code requires all variables listed in QW-250 (by process) be listed on the WPS, and, therefore, preheat (not less than 100F below the PQR) shall be listed on the WPS, the preheat maintenance shall be described (or "none" if not required) on the WPS, and the interpass temperature (not more than 100F above the PQR) shall be listed on the WPS when impact tests are required for notch toughness applications. The Code requires all essential variables listed in QW-250 (by process) be listed on the PQR, and, therefore, the actual interpass temperature shall be recorded on the PQR when impact tests are required for notch toughness applications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5282 |
| IX-81-20 |
Section IX, Procedure Qualification Variables |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
On the WPS and PQR, is it necessary to specify or record the PWHT on materials when the Code does not require heat treatment? |
When the Code does not require PWHT, the WPS and PQR would list PWHT as not applicable. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5282 |
| IX-81-20 |
Section IX, Procedure Qualification Variables |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
On QW-482 and QW-483, does travel speed pertain only to automatic welding? |
Travel speed is only a variable in some applications of the supplementary essential variable QW-409.1. When the QW-409.1(a) is employed, the travel speed is an essential variable which must be recorded on the PQR and controlled in production within the parameters of the heat input formula of QW-409.1(a) manual, semiautomatic, machine, and automatic welding applications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5282 |
| IX-81-24 |
Section IX, Welding Positions and Thickness Qualifications |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
When applying QW-405.2 where notch toughness is required, what positions are qualified by the welding procedure qualification test? |
When applying QW-405.2, any position not involving the vertical uphill progression will qualify for all positions, except those involving the vertical uphill progression. Any position involving the vertical uphill progression win qualify for all positions, including those involving the vertical uphill progression. For example, qualification on a test coupon in the 2G position will qualify 4G and 5G downhill, but not 3G uphill. Qualification on a test coupon in 3G uphill progression will qualify 4G, 6G uphill progression, and all other positions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5283 |
| IX-81-24 |
Section IX, Welding Positions and Thickness Qualifications |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
In cases where notch toughness is required, what range of interpass temperature is qualified by the welding procedure qualification test? |
When notch toughness is required, the maximum interpass temperature that may be used in production shall be no more than 100F higher than the maximum interpass temperature recorded during the welding of the procedure qualification test coupon. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5283 |
| IX-81-24 |
Section IX, Welding Positions and Thickness Qualifications |
|
5/13/1981 |
|
In cases where cavities on base metals or weld metal are weld repaired:
(a) What is the definition of performance qualification thickness of deposited weld metal qualified for performance qualification?
(b) What is the minimum thickness of deposited weld metal for welder performance qualification? |
The replies are as follows:
(a) The performance qualification thickness for deposited weld metal for weld repair is the depth of the prepared cavity.
(b) There is no limit on the minimum depth of deposited weld metal. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5283 |
| IX-81-32 |
Section IX, QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
5/13/1982 |
|
QW-200.4 states, in part: "One or more processes or procedures may be deleted from a production joint..." In a procedure for a GTAW root and SMAW fill, can the GTAW root be deleted and the production joint welded completely using SMAW? |
The joint can be completely welded with SMAW provided this process has been properly qualified for the deposited weld metal thickness range to be used in the production joint. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5284 |
| IX-81-33 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
5/13/1981 |
|
When determining the range of base metal thickness qualified for procedure qualification, is the thickness of the piece after welding or the thickness tested used? For example, a weldment was made using 3/4 in. material; however, the actual thickness tested was 0.714 in. Does one use 3/4 in. or 0.714 in. in determining the base metal thickness range qualified? |
The thickness of the test coupon welded is used; therefore, in the example cited above, one would determine the base metal thickness range qualified using 3/4 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5285 |
| IX-81-34 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/13/1981 |
|
If welder qualifications are reviewed during the end of each calendar quarter (i.e., March, June, September, and December), and it is determined that a particular welder employed and qualified only in one welding process used that process during the beginning of that 3 month quarter only, may his qualification be extended to the end of the next quarter or will his qualification expire 3 months from the date he last welded with that process in order to comply with QW-322? |
His qualification will expire 3 months from the date he last welded. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5286 |
| IX-81-35 |
Section IX, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
5/13/1981 |
|
If a welding procedure has been qualified at one unit of an international organization, can it be used at another unit of the same organization in another country without being qualified on site at the second unit provided that the welders at the second unit are qualified for performance to the procedure? |
Yes, provided the controls required by QW-201 are established to the satisfaction of the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5287 |
| IX-81-35 |
Section IX, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
5/13/1981 |
|
Is the purpose of a procedure qualification to prove that a given set of parameters will produce a satisfactory weld, or to demonstrate that the parameters plus local conditions (e.g., the efficiency of a stress relieving furnace, or state of repair of welding plant, etc.) must be proven in combination to produce a satisfactory weld? |
The purpose of procedure qualification is given in QW-100.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5287 |
| IX-81-37 |
Section IX, QW-462.1 (a) |
QW-462.1 |
9/14/1981 |
|
A reduced section specimen was prepared per QW-462.1(a) from a plate having a thickness of less than 1 in. The W dimension of the specimen was measured to be 0.997 in. QW-462.1 (a) states "W = approx. 1½ in., but not less than 1 in. if it does not exceed 1 in." Does the specimen described above meet the requirements of QW-462.1(a)? |
No.
ATTENTION
The foregoing Interpretation has been further considered, and the following corrected Question sent to the inquirer.
Correction Issued: March 30, 1982
Question: A reduced section specimen was prepared per QW-462.1(a) from a plate having a thickness of less than 1 in. The W dimension of the specimen was measured to be 0.997 in. QW-462.1 (a) states "W = approximately 1½ in., but not less than 1 in. if t does not exceed 1 in ." Does the specimen described above meet the requirements of QW-462.1 (a)? |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5288 |
| IX-81-38 |
Section IX, QW-202.4 |
QW-202.4 |
9/14/1981 |
|
A test coupon is prepared as follows: A 1 in. thick plate has an 1/8 in. step machined from its top. A plate 1/8 in. thick is placed into the section of the 1 in. thick plate that has been machined and is then butted to the unmachined portion. This forms a dissimilar thickness joint, which is welded using the GTAW process. The coupon then satisfactorily passes the qualification testing. Would the joint described above qualify for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. to 2 in. and deposited weld metal thickness range of 1/16 in. to 1/4 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5289 |
| IX-81-39 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
9/15/1981 |
|
A side bend test was performed on a procedure qualification test specimen. The specimen showed open defects exceeding 1/8 in. on the convex surface after bending. An analysis was made of the defects and showed them to be caused by slag inclusions and blowholes. Since the defects can be shown to be caused by the above imperfections, can the results of the test be considered satisfactory? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5290 |
| IX-81-40 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
9/15/1981 |
|
What is the critical temperature range for PWHT specified in QW-407.1? |
For ferritic steels, QW-407.1(b), PWHT below the critical range, is considered to be a heat treatment performed below the lower transformation temperature. QW-407.1 (c), PWHT above the critical range, is considered to be a heat treatment performed above the upper transformation temperature. QW-407.1(d), PWHT above the critical range followed by PWHT below the critical range, is a normalizing and tempering heat treatment which is performed initially above the upper transformation temperature and after cooling reheated to a temperature below the lower transformation temperature. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5291 |
| IX-81-40 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
9/15/1981 |
|
QW-407.1 does not mention PWHT conducted in the critical range. Should we understand that PWHT is generally not conducted in the critical range, or PWHT above the critical range includes PWHT in the critical range also? |
While QW-407.1 does not specifically address PWHT performed within the critical range (between lower transformation and upper transformation temperatures), it is the intent of the Code that when the specified temperature range of the WPS is within the lower transformation temperature, a separate qualification is required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5291 |
| IX-81-40 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
9/15/1981 |
|
QW-407.2 refers to temperature range.
(a) What is the definition of temperature range?
(b) What is the allowable difference between the PWHT of the WPS and PQR? |
QW-407.2 states "Weldments constructed with P-No. 11 metals and other P-Number metals for which impact tests are required, a change in the PWHT (see QW-407.1) temperature and time range requires a PQR."
(a) See A-1 for the temperature range clarification of QW-407.1 which requires separate qualification.
(b) It is the intent of the Code that the PWHT temperature range used in developing the PQR shall be within the PWHT range specified on the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5291 |
| IX-81-40 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
9/15/1981 |
|
QW-407.2 refers to heat treatment of base metals. Should we understand that:
(a) Where the base metal of the fabrication is subjected to heat treatment (e.g., hot forming in the normalizing temperature range) before welding, should the base metal used for the PQR test be subjected to a similar heat treatment before welding?
(b) Is (a) above required when the base metal for the PQR test is a piece of metal removed from the plate or component to be fabricated, which has been subjected to a heat treatment? |
The base metal used for PQR test shall be of the same P-Number and Group Number that is to be used in fabrication. The procedure qualification test coupon shall be subjected to heat treatment essentially equivalent to that encountered in the heat treatment of base metals and in the fabrication of the weldments, including at least 80% of the aggregate times at temperature(s). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5291 |
| IX-81-40 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
9/15/1981 |
|
Is there a publication available on the application/usage/interpretation of QW-407? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5291 |
| IX-81-41 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
9/16/1981 |
|
How does a fabricator specify and qualify an essential variable consisting of a range? |
In cases in which the essential variable consists of a range for which the party specifying the range is responsible, he is expected to use judgement in setting the range. This may include prior testing in confirming this judgement for setting or specifying the range. It is not generally practicable to have too narrow a range and meet the capabilities of control and measuring equipment, nor too wide a range and still meet the combinations of the several essential variables required for the application. When qualifying a procedure having such variables, the full range of these variables specified in the WPS need not be tested. The PQR should list the actual range of the variable as measured during the welding of the qualification test coupon. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5292 |
| IX-81-41 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
9/16/1981 |
|
A procedure was qualified using SA-240, Type 304, with an E 308-16 electrode. If a procedure using SA-240, Type 316L, with an E316L-16 electrode is now required (all essential variables remaining the same), is a new or revised WPS required and does such a change require a new PQR? |
A new WPS or a revision to the WPS would be sufficient to document this change. Since there is no change of essential variable, no requalification or new PQR is necessary. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5292 |
| IX-81-42 |
Section IX, QW-312 |
QW-312 |
9/16/1981 |
|
When the welder or welding operator is qualified for hardfacing weld metal overlay in accordance with a qualified hardfacing weld metal overlay procedure, is he qualified to weld in accordance with all hardfacing weld metal overlay procedures using the same welding process? |
No. The essential variables for performance qualification for hardfacing weld metal overlay are identical to those controlling the welding procedure specification as given in QW-282. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5293 |
| IX-81-43 |
Section IX, QW-405.2 |
QW-405.2 |
9/16/1981 |
|
When notch toughness tests are specified, supplemental essential variable QW-405.2 becomes a requirement for qualification of welding procedures utilizing certain processes. QW-120 identifies the vertical position as the 3G position. Will qualification of a welding procedure in the 5G position following an uphill progression satisfy QW-405.2? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5294 |
| IX-81-43 |
Section IX, QW-405.2 |
QW-405.2 |
9/16/1981 |
|
Will qualification of a welding procedure in the 6G position following an uphill progression satisfy QW-405.2, even though the welding groove is not vertical? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5294 |
| IX-81-43 |
Section IX, QW-405.2 |
QW-405.2 |
9/16/1981 |
|
If the answers to Questions (1) and (2) are affirmative, from which coupon should the impact specimens representing the heat affected zone be taken, upper or lower? |
Impact specimens are taken from the areas of maximum heat input, which are generally about the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5294 |
| IX-81-44 |
Section IX, QW-442 |
QW-442 |
9/16/1981 |
|
When welding filler metal specifications, such as SFA-5.28 ER805-D2, for bare solid electrodes for use with the GMAW or GTAW processes having chemical composition determined by analysis of the solid wire, how are A-Numbers established for QW-442? |
Where bare solid electrodes are used for the GMAW or GTAW processes, the analysis shown in the filler metal specification may be used in establishing the A-Numbers in QW-422. However, if an actual chemical analysis of the weld metal deposited by either of these two processes with such solid bare electrodes is made, that analysis shall be employed in establishing the A-Number of the filler material in accordance with QW-442. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5295 |
| IX-81-45 |
Section IX, Preamble |
|
9/16/1981 |
|
QW-100.3 states that a Manufacturer may perform any new qualifications needed for a particular contract to the Addenda mandatory for the particular contract. These qualifications to previous Addenda may not be used on new orders. This appears to be in conflict with the Preamble, which requires all new qualifications to be made to the Addenda mandatory on the date of qualification. May a manufacturer qualify all new welding procedure specifications and performance qualifications to the requirements of the Code Edition and Addenda made mandatory at the date of order? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5296 |
| IX-81-45 |
Section IX, Preamble |
|
9/16/1981 |
|
May a Manufacturer qualify all new welding procedures and welders or welding operators for a specific job to any Code Edition and Addenda after the Code Edition and Addenda made mandatory at the date of order? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5296 |
| IX-81-46 |
Section IX, Plug Welds |
|
9/16/1981 |
|
A manufacturer has PQR's available from previously qualified groove weld procedures. Could these PQR's be used to support procedures written to fabricate plug welds, all other essential variables being the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5297 |
| IX-81-46 |
Section IX, Plug Welds |
|
9/16/1981 |
|
What type of test is required for welder qualification when plug welds are to be used in production? |
The welder should be qualified by a groove weld test joint in which range of thickness of deposited weld metal qualified encompasses that thickness required by the production joint. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5297 |
| IX-81-46 |
Section IX, Plug Welds |
|
9/16/1981 |
|
What method of examination should be used to examine the quality of the production weld? |
The method of examination of production welds is specified by the fabrication code (i.e., Section VIII - Divisions 1 and 2, B31.1, etc.) |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5297 |
| IX-81-47 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
11/2/1981 |
|
Concerning the renewal of performance qualification given in QW-322, must the welder be in the continuous employ of the Manufacturer? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5298 |
| IX-81-47 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
11/2/1981 |
|
If a welder leaves the employ of a Manufacturer and later returns to that same Manufacturer, can his qualifications be renewed for all previous qualifications per QW-322? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5298 |
| IX-81-47 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
11/2/1981 |
|
When a welder is being tested for renewal of his qualifications, is it necessary to test him using all the essential variables for which he was qualified using a specific process? |
No. QW-322 allows the welding of a single test joint to reinstate the welder's previous qualifications for a specific process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5298 |
| IX-82-01 |
Section IX, Visual Examination |
|
1/21/1982 |
|
Is it necessary to achieve complete penetration for single welded test coupons throughout their entire length, or only where the specimens are to be removed? |
Complete penetration for single welded test coupons is required throughout their entire length. See QW-301.2, QW-191.2.2(a)(1), and QW-452.1 Note (1). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5299 |
| IX-82-02 |
Section IX, QW-402.1 |
QW-402.1 |
1/21/1982 |
|
QW-402.1 states, "A change in the type of groove (Vee-groove, U-groove, single-bevel, double-bevel, etc.)." This variable is a nonessential variable for SMAW, GTAW, GMAW, and FCAW. Currently, a Manufacturer states, "All groove designs" under joint design in the WPS. Is this practice acceptable, or is it required to either include these in the WPS or reference another document that illus-trates all possible joint configurations? |
The practice of stating "all groove designs" on the WPS to satisfy QW-402.1 is not acceptable. Because the WPS is for the guidance of the welder or welding operator, a Manufacturer must state on the WPS the types of joints permitted in production. Alternatively, a reference to a drawing or other document that describes the allowable production joints is permitted. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5300 |
| IX-82-03 |
Section IX, QW-191.2.2 |
QW-191.2.2 |
1/21/1982 |
|
Can permissible maximum defect size be measured directly from the charts of rounded indications in Appendix I of QW-191.2.2? |
No. It is not intended that the sketches be sized to determine acceptance criteria. Criteria for acceptance of rounded indications are given in the text of QW-191.2.2(b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5301 |
| IX-82-03 |
Section IX, QW-191.2.2 |
QW-191.2.2 |
1/21/1982 |
|
What is the maximum size of a single rounded indication in welds of 3.5 mm (0.1365 in.) thickness and 6.0 mm (0.234 in.) thickness? |
See QW-191.2.2(b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5301 |
| IX-82-03 |
Section IX, QW-191.2.2 |
QW-191.2.2 |
1/21/1982 |
|
What is the minimum separation between two rounded indications, each of the maximum permissible dimension? |
There is no requirement in Section IX governing separation of rounded indications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5301 |
| IX-82-03 |
Section IX, QW-191.2.2 |
QW-191.2.2 |
1/21/1982 |
|
QW-191.2.2(b)(3) states that rounded indications less than 1/32 in. in maximum diameter shall not be considered in the 1/8 in. or greater material thickness range. Does this statement override the standards given in QW-191.2.2(b)(1)? |
Yes. It is not applicable for thinner materials. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5301 |
| IX-82-04 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
1/21/1982 |
|
How does QW-404.9 affect the qualification of procedures for SAW using the various grades (classifications) of stainless steels listed in SFA-5.9 Table 1? |
Requalification of a WPS to QW-404.9 is required under the following conditions:
(a) Any change in flux classification listed in an SFA Specification or a change to a flux not listed in an SFA Specification.
(b) Any change of electrode classification listed in Table 1 of SFA-5.9 that changes the deposited weld metal chemistry beyond that specified in the WPS as an A-Number designation.
For a change from a bare cored to a stranded electrode, or vice versa, in the same electrode classification, requalification is not required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5302 |
| IX-82-05 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
1/21/1982 |
|
Must a welder be qualified on small diameter pipe (i.e., less than NPS 2½) if he is required to weld the root pass of a set-on nozzle that consists of a 1½ in. double extra strong coupling that is larger than 2-7/8 in. O.D.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5303 |
| IX-82-05 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
1/21/1982 |
|
Does QW-452.3 allow a welder qualified on 10 in. diameter pipe to weld a small diameter (i.e., less than 2-7/8 in. O.D.) set on nozzle to a shell whose outside diameter is greater than 2-7/8 in.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5303 |
| IX-82-05 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
1/21/1982 |
|
Regarding performance qualification, are thickness limitations linked to each position? For example, a welder is presently qualified to weld unlimited thicknesses in the flat, horizontal, and vertical positions. If a separate test is given to qualify him for the overhead position, must this test be given a thickness of ¾ in. or greater to qualify for unlimited thicknesses in this position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5303 |
| IX-82-06 |
Section IX, Peening |
|
1/21/1982 |
|
Is the mechanical removal of slag defined as peening, and must it be addressed as such on the WPS under Technique (QW-410)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5304 |
| IX-82-07 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
1/21/1982 |
|
If a procedure for the GTAW, GMAW, or SMAW process is qualified in accordance with Section IX, utilizing a 6 in. diameter pipe coupon with a single vee groove joint, is the procedure qualified for all diameters of pipe if the essential variables of the procedure remain the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5305 |
| IX-82-07 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
1/21/1982 |
|
If a welder is qualified in accordance with the requirements of Section IX on a 6 in. diameter test coupon with a single vee groove joint for the GTAW, SMAW, or GMAW process, does he require requalification if the production weld he is making is on a pipe with an outside diameter of below 2-7/8 in. with a single vee groove? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5305 |
| IX-82-08 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
1/21/1982 |
|
Occasionally, slag is trapped between the backing ring or strap and the base metal during the welding of a welder's qualification test assembly. When the initial radiograph with the backing in place shows the above condition, can the backing ring or strap be removed and the weld test coupon subsequently be resubmitted for additional radiography to satisfy the welder performance qualification test? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5306 |
| IX-82-09 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
1/21/1982 |
|
Do the rules of Section IX require that the dimensions of tensile test specimens be recorded on PQR's or be available as part of the records, or is it sufficient to only have recorded the tensile strength? This question is both for the case where procedure qualification was performed prior to 1962, but met the requirements of the 1962 Edition of Section IX, and for the case where procedure qualification was performed after 1962, but met the requirements of the Edition and Addenda in effect at the time of qualification. |
It is sufficient to have recorded the tensile strength of each test specimen on the PQR's. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5307 |
| IX-82-09 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
1/21/1982 |
|
For PQR's qualified prior to 1962 that meet the requirements of the 1962 Edition of Section IX and for PQR's qualified in 1962 and later that meet the requirements of the Edition and Addenda of Section IX in effect at the time of qualification, is it required that the following nonessential variables be recorded on the PQR for the SMAW and GTAW procedures?
(a) voltage
(b) current |
(a) No
(b) No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5307 |
| IX-82-09 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
1/21/1982 |
|
Is it permissible under the rules of Section IX to use PQR's prepared and certified in 1959 and later to qualify other WPS's prepared in 1981, provided the essential and supplementary essential variables (when required) specified in the Edition and Addenda of Section IX in effect at the time the 1981 WPS was written were recorded on the PQR's that had been prepared and certified at earlier dates? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5307 |
| IX-82-09 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
1/21/1982 |
|
When using a PQR prepared in 1959 or later to qualify a WPS prepared and used in 1981, do the rules of Section IX require a Certificate Holder to provide to the Authorized Inspector a copy of the original WPS (dated 1959 or later and no longer in use) as well as a copy of the Edition and Addenda of Section IX in effect at the time the PQR was prepared? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5307 |
| IX-82-10 |
Section IX, QW-214 and QW-216 |
QW-214; QW-216 |
2/9/1982 |
|
If SFA-5.13 RCoCr-A filler metal is used for weld metal overlay, what means shall be used to assure conformance with Section IX? |
The testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of a hard facing weld metal overlay. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5308 |
| IX-82-10 |
Section IX, QW-214 and QW-216 |
QW-214; QW-216 |
2/9/1982 |
|
A weld metal overlay is termed corrosion resistant, e.g., aluminum bronze; however, the overlay material is of a brittle nature and will undoubtedly break if subjected to the required bend testing. By what means may conformance with Section IX be assured? |
The material is termed corrosion resistant. Therefore, it must be tested in accordance with QW-214. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5308 |
| IX-82-11 |
Section IX, QW-466.2, 1980 Edition With Winter 1981 Addenda |
QW-466.2 |
2/9/1982 |
|
When carrying out welding procedure qualification tests per Section IX for 6 mm thick unalloyed titanium (SB-265, P-No. 51) plates using GTAW process with filler SFA-5.16 ERTi-1, what is the required mandrel diameter using the guided bend roller jig according to QW-466.2? |
The diameter of the mandrel of the guided bend roller jig (QW-466.2) shall be 8t (see the Winter 1981 Addenda to Section IX). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5309 |
| IX-82-13 |
Section IX, QW-281.2 |
QW-281.2 |
3/15/1982 |
|
Does a PQR for corrosion resistant weld metal overlay that utilized an
SFA-5.9 E (b R308 filler metal support a WPS that specifies SFA-5.9 ER309 filler metal? |
No. Separate qualification is required for each AWS classification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5310 |
| IX-82-13 |
Section IX, QW-281.2 |
QW-281.2 |
3/15/1982 |
|
Does a PQR for corrosion resistant weld metal overlay that utilized an
SFA-5.4 E308-xx filler metal support a WPS that specifies SFA-5.4 E309-xx filler metal? |
No. Separate qualification is required for each AWS classification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5310 |
| IX-82-13 |
Section IX, QW-281.2 |
QW-281.2 |
3/15/1982 |
|
Does reference to "...Each AISI type of A-No. 8 or A-No. 9..." of
QW-282.2(c) refer to QW-442 or to base metal specifications? |
This phrase refers to QW-442 in Section IX (each "AISI type" is intended to be "AWS classification"). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5310 |
| IX-82-16 |
Section IX, QW-153 |
QW-153 |
3/15/1982 |
|
A tensile specimen broke in the weld metal at a tensile strength below the minimum strength of the base metal. When the requirements of QW-153.1(c) are not applicable, does this specimen pass the tension test? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5311 |
| IX-82-19 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
3/15/1982 |
|
Is a welder required to take a small diameter pipe test to weld a pipe through a plate when the weld preparation on the plate is less than 2-7/8 in O.D. and the welds are reinforced with fillet welds? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5312 |
| IX-82-20 |
Section IX, QW-462.2(a) |
QW-462.2(a) |
3/15/1982 |
|
Is it permissible to use subsize thickness side bends for test coupons welded in the 1/16 in. to 3/8 in. inclusive range? |
Side bends are only permitted for test coupons 3/8 in. thick and greater. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5313 |
| IX-82-12 |
Section IX, QW-214, QW-216, QW-407, and QW-492, 1980 Edition Through Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-214; QW-216; QW-407; QW-492 |
3/12/1982 |
|
QW-216.1 states that the minimum hard facing weld metal overlay thickness shall be as specified in the WPS. Is the maximum hard facing weld metal overlay thickness qualification unlimited? |
Yes. The minimum thickness qualified is also defined in QW-462.5 as the thickness corresponding to the upper surface of the material used for chemical analysis. The larger of the minimum thicknesses specified shall govern. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5314 |
| IX-82-12 |
Section IX, QW-214, QW-216, QW-407, and QW-492, 1980 Edition Through Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-214; QW-216; QW-407; QW-492 |
3/12/1982 |
|
The requirements of Section IX do not address the maximum corrosion resistant weld overlay thickness qualified. Is the maximum thickness qualified unlimited? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5314 |
| IX-82-12 |
Section IX, QW-214, QW-216, QW-407, and QW-492, 1980 Edition Through Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-214; QW-216; QW-407; QW-492 |
3/12/1982 |
|
Neither QW-214 nor QW-281 address the minimum corrosion resistant weld metal overlay thickness qualified. Is there a minimum thickness qualification? |
Yes. The minimum thickness qualified is defined in QW-462.5 as the thickness corresponding to the upper surface of the material used for chemical analysis. QW-462.5 is referenced by QW-214.3. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5314 |
| IX-82-12 |
Section IX, QW-214, QW-216, QW-407, and QW-492, 1980 Edition Through Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-214; QW-216; QW-407; QW-492 |
3/12/1982 |
|
For procedure qualification of dissimilar metals, one groove face has been buttered (as defined in QW-492) with 0.187 in. of weld metal. Based on this, are the minimum and maximum thicknesses for the buttered portion unlimited? |
The maximum thickness of the buttering is unlimited. The minimum thickness shall be sufficient to provide a suitable transition weld deposit for subsequent completion of the joint, as provided in the definition for buttering in QW-492. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5314 |
| IX-82-12 |
Section IX, QW-214, QW-216, QW-407, and QW-492, 1980 Edition Through Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-214; QW-216; QW-407; QW-492 |
3/12/1982 |
|
QW-407 defines changes in PWHT that require requalification of procedures. The critical range is referenced in QW-407.1 and QW-407.4 (prior to the Winter 1981 Addenda). Is this critical range defined as the PWHT range identified in other Sections of the Code (i.e., Section III Table NB-4622.1-1)? |
The critical range referenced in QW-407.1 and QW-407.4 refers to the range between the lower and upper transformation temperatures for P-Nos. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, and 11 materials. This range is not the same as the PWHT range identified in other sections of the Code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5314 |
| IX-82-14 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
3/15/1982 |
|
QW-151.1 requires one tensile specimen for thicknesses up to and including 1 in., while QW-451.1 requires two tension tests for the same thickness range. Which is correct? |
Both are correct. The Code distinguished between tension tests (QW-451.1) and the tensile specimens (QW-150) that are used to make up a tension test. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5315 |
| IX-82-14 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
3/15/1982 |
|
In the test coupon thickness range of over 1 to 1-1/4 in., how many turned tensile specimens are required for each tension test? |
Two. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5315 |
| IX-82-14 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
3/15/1982 |
|
In performing tension tests on a weldment made with two processes, is QW-451.1 Note (4)(b) satisfied if a portion of the weld deposit from each welding process is included in each of the tension tests required by QW-451.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5315 |
| IX-82-14 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
3/15/1982 |
|
If multiple turned specimens are used to represent a single tension test removed from a test coupon that is welded with two processes, must each turned specimen contain weld metal from each process to satisfy the requirements of QW-451.1 Note (4)(b)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5315 |
| IX-82-14 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
3/15/1982 |
|
In the case of a test coupon welded using two welding processes, is the requirement of QW-451.1 Note (4)(d) that toughness testing be applied with respect to each welding process or procedure satisfied with respect to impact test specimens if only a portion of the impact test specimens contains one of the welding processes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5315 |
| IX-82-15 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
3/15/1982 |
|
QW-404.5, which is an essential variable for procedure qualification, describes requirements for requalification when the weld deposit A-Number changes. It also states "...In lieu of an A-Number designation, the chemical composition of the weld deposit shall be indicated on the WPS..." Does this mean that all filler metals that do not fall within an A-Number classification of QW-442 require chemical analysis of an undiluted weld pad, and the results reported on the WPS? |
No. QW-404.5 requires specification of the chemical composition of the weld deposit. It does not prohibit use of filler metal manufacturer literature in specifying a nominal deposit chemistry. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5316 |
| IX-82-17 |
Section IX, QW-403.9 |
QW-403.9 |
3/15/1982 |
|
QW-403.9 states: "For single or multipass welding in which any pass is greater than 1/2 in., an increase in thickness beyond 1.1 times that of the qualification test coupon." Does the phrase "...greater than 1/2 in..." refer to width or thickness? |
The phrase shown in the Question refers to the thickness of any pass. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5317 |
| IX-86-59 |
Section IX, QW-281.2(c) |
QW-281.2(c) |
3/2/1987 |
|
Does a PQR using P-No. 1 base material and AWS E347 corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay support a WPS using P-No. 1 base material and AWS E316L corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay with all other essential variables unchanged? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5318 |
| IX-86-62 |
Section IX, QW-191.2.2 |
QW-191.2.2 |
3/2/1987 |
|
When using QW-191.2.2, shall linear porosity (hollow bead, wormhole/piping porosity), in which the length is more than three times the width, be evaluated using QW-191.2.2(a)(2) elongated slab inclusion limits? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5319 |
| IX-86-66 |
Section IX, QW-381 |
QW-381 |
5/7/1987 |
|
If a welder passes a groove weld test and meets the requirements of QW-350, is he qualified to make corrosion-resistant weld metal overlays? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5320 |
| IX-86-67 |
Section IX, QW-408.3 and QW-408.9 |
QW-408.3; QW-408.9 |
5/7/1987 |
|
Is it permissible to reduce the flow rate of shielding gas in GMAW and GTAW below that actually used to qualify the procedure provided the WPS is amended or a new WPS is written without requalification? |
Yes, except for the materials listed in QW-408.9. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5321 |
| IX-82-18 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
3/15/1982 |
|
Does QW-407.1(b), per the Winter 1981 Addenda to Section IX, require a PQR for PWHT of P-No. 8, normally stabilized, at temperatures corresponding to below the lower transformation temperature of carbon or low alloy steel? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5322 |
| IX-82-18 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
3/15/1982 |
|
Does QW-407.1(b), per the Winter 1981 Addenda to Section IX, require a separate PQR for PWHT for each of the following conditions: annealing only, annealing followed by stress relief, and stress relief only? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5322 |
| IX-82-18 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
3/15/1982 |
|
If annealing is employed as PWHT, is the annealing temperature that recommended by the Material Manufacturer? |
Section IX does not specify annealing temperature. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5322 |
| IX-82-18 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
3/15/1982 |
|
Is the annealing temperature range left to the discretion of the Manufacturer or must it be within normal operating ranges? |
Section IX requires the PWHT temperature range to be specified on the WPS by the Manufacturer. Section IX does not assign specific annealing temperature ranges. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5322 |
| IX-82-22 |
Section IX, QW-451 1980 Edition Through Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-451 |
6/9/1982 |
|
A PQR was prepared with multiple F-Number electrodes using the SMAW process. The first 1/4 in. was welded with F-No. 3 filler metal and the remaining 1/2 in. with F-No. 4 filler metal. Does the Winter 1980 Addenda (same as the Summer 1981 Addenda), QW-451.1 Note 4(e) permit the PQR to support a WPS qualified for a base material range of 1/16 in. through 1-1/2 in. and deposited weld metal range from 1/16 in. through 1/2 in. with F-No. 3 filler metal and a range from 3/16 in. through 1 in. with F-No. 4 filler metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5323 |
| IX-82-22 |
Section IX, QW-451 1980 Edition Through Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-451 |
6/9/1982 |
|
Given the PQR example of Question (1) above, can an additional WPS be prepared for production welding of base material thickness from 1/16 in. through 1/2 in. using only the F-No. 3 filler material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5323 |
| IX-82-23 |
Section IX, QW-452, 1980 Edition With Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-452 |
6/9/1982 |
|
Considering Notes (1), (2), and (5) of QW-452.1 and QW-404.15 in the Summer 1981 Addenda, what range of thickness of F-No. 3 and F-No. 4 is a welder qualified to use in production welding when the qualification coupon consists of 3/8 in. of F-No. 3 filler metal followed by 3/8 in. of F-No. 4 filler metal in the same test coupon? |
The welder is qualified to make production welds from 1/16 in. through 3/4 in. using F.-No. 4 electrodes. Because of QW-404.15 (an essential variable for the SMAW process), the welder is also qualified from 1/16 in. through the maximum to be welded for F-No. 3 electrodes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5324 |
| IX-82-23 |
Section IX, QW-452, 1980 Edition With Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-452 |
6/9/1982 |
|
Is it intended by the Notes to QW-452.1 in the Summer 1981 Addenda that substitution of the term "process" may be made for filler metal F-Number? |
No, although sometimes this results because of the essential variable QW-404.4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5324 |
| IX-82-23 |
Section IX, QW-452, 1980 Edition With Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-452 |
6/9/1982 |
|
To what production thickness is a welder qualified as the result of welding a 3/4 in. thick coupon by depositing 1/16 in. F-No. 3 electrodes followed by 11/16 in. of F-No. 4 electrodes? |
The welder is qualified from 1/16 in. through the maximum to be welded for F-No. 3 electrodes because of QW-404.15. The welder is also qualified from 3/16 in. through 1-3/8 in. for F-No. 4 electrodes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5324 |
| IX-82-24 |
Section IX, QW-202.3 |
QW-202.3 |
6/9/1982 |
|
Is it permissible to use QW-202.3 on a 1-1/2 in. thick base metal if a postweld heat treatment will be performed? |
QW-202.3 only covers the deposited weld metal and base metal thickness ranges qualified. All other requirements of Section IX and the referencing Code(s) shall also be met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5325 |
| IX-82-25 |
Section IX, QW-192 |
QW-192 |
6/9/1982 |
|
May studs be welded using an SMAW procedure that has been qualified on a groove weld coupon rather than by the stud welding process? |
Yes, provided all essential variables for SMAW remain the same. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5326 |
| IX-82-26 |
Section IX, QB-407 |
QB-407 |
6/9/1982 |
|
A test coupon consisting of a socket type brazed joint contains a preplaced filler metal within a groove. When brazed, uneven flow occurs in each direction: 0.2 in. toward the base of the socket and 0.4 in. toward the outside of the socket. Does QB-407(c) apply? |
No, QB-407(c) does not apply because major flow has occurred. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5327 |
| IX-82-26 |
Section IX, QB-407 |
QB-407 |
6/9/1982 |
|
What constitutes major flow, as referenced in QB-407(b) and (c)? |
Major flow is the required distribution of the molten filler metal throughout the joint. When the filler metal is preplaced in the joint using material such as shims and foils so that the entire joint is essentially occupied, major flow does not occur during the brazing process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5327 |
| IX-82-27 |
Section IX, QW-202.3(a) and QW-403.6, 1980 Edition With Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-202.3(a); QW-403.6 |
6/9/1982 |
|
In the 1980 Edition with the Summer 1981 Addenda, QW-202.3(a) states that there is no limit on the minimum depth of deposited weld metal for repair or buildup welding. Does this also apply for repair or buildup of base materials subject to notch toughness (impact) requirements? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5328 |
| IX-82-27 |
Section IX, QW-202.3(a) and QW-403.6, 1980 Edition With Summer 1981 Addenda |
QW-202.3(a); QW-403.6 |
6/9/1982 |
|
QW-403.6, which is a supplementary essential variable for base materials when there are notch toughness requirements, states that for base material thickness less than 5/8 in., the thickness of the PQR test coupon is the minimum thickness of base material qualified for production welds. Is it a requirement of Section IX that the term production welding as used in QW-403.6 is to include repair or buildup welding? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5328 |
| IX-82-28 |
Section IX, QW-402.4 |
QW-402.4 |
6/9/1982 |
|
When a performance qualification test is given for the GTAW process using a consumable insert, is this considered welding with backing per QW-402.4? |
No. See QW-404.22. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5329 |
| IX-82-29 |
Section IX, QW-403.11 |
QW-403.11 |
6/9/1982 |
|
An SMAW procedure has been qualified joining P-No. 8 material to P-No. 5 (Cr-3% max.) material with an F-No. 43 electrode. Per QW-403.11, must a new procedure be qualified to join P-No. 8 materials to P-Nos. 4, 3, or 1 materials with an F-No. 43 electrode? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5330 |
| IX-82-30 |
Section IX, QW-200.1(b), QW-451, and QW-452 |
QW-200.1(b); QW-451; QW-452 |
6/9/1982 |
|
QW-200.1 requires the WPS to list in detail information on the base metals that may be used with this procedure. What is the range of thickness that may be encompassed by a single WPS? |
There are no limits on the range of thickness that may be given on a single WPS. However, the range of thickness on the WPS must be supported by one or more PQR's. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5331 |
| IX-82-30 |
Section IX, QW-200.1(b), QW-451, and QW-452 |
QW-200.1(b); QW-451; QW-452 |
6/9/1982 |
|
Note (1) of QW-451.1 and QW-451.2 make reference to "...QW-402(.2, .3, .6, .9, .10)..." for further limitations on the range of thickness qualified. Are these limitations applicable only when listed among the essential variables or supplementary essential variables (when applicable) for a particular process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5331 |
| IX-82-30 |
Section IX, QW-200.1(b), QW-451, and QW-452 |
QW-200.1(b); QW-451; QW-452 |
6/9/1982 |
|
What are the tolerances for those dimensions listed without tolerances in QW-462? |
Where the Code does not specify dimensional tolerances, the dimensions given in the figures are to be considered approximate. They are not intended to be minimum or maximum values. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5331 |
| IX-82-31 |
Section IX, Preparation of Test Coupons |
|
6/9/1982 |
|
How much material may be removed from the surface of a performance bend test specimen prior to testing? |
The minimum necessary to create approximately parallel surfaces. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5332 |
| IX-82-31 |
Section IX, Preparation of Test Coupons |
|
6/9/1982 |
|
May hand grinding be used to remove material from a performance bend test specimen prior to testing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5332 |
| IX-82-48 |
Section IX, QW-408.2 and QW-408.5 |
QW-408.2; QW-408.5 |
11/2/1981 |
|
A welding procedure has been qualified to weld P-No. 8 material using an open butt joint design with argon backing gas. Per QW-408.5, can the argon backing gas be deleted without requalifying the procedure? |
Yes. QW-408.5 covers the deletion or addition of backing gas and since this is a non-essential variable for applicable processes, requalification is not required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5333 |
| IX-82-48 |
Section IX, QW-408.2 and QW-408.5 |
QW-408.2; QW-408.5 |
11/2/1981 |
|
Does QW-408.2 refer specifically to shielding gases or all gases used during welding? |
QW-408.2 refers only to shielding gases. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5333 |
| IX-86-35 |
Section IX, QW-310.1 |
QW-310.1 |
9/23/1986 |
|
May 5 in. NPS pipe be used instead of 6 in. or larger pipe to qualify welders in both the 2G and 5G combination test positions per QW-310.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5334 |
| IX-86-36 |
Section IX, QW-202.4 and QW-451.1 |
QW-202.4; QW-451.1 |
9/23/1986 |
|
A welding procedure is qualified on a base material thickness of 0.365 in. using the SMAW process. May this welding procedure be used in production to weld a tee groove joint utilizing a 0.25 in. thick angle to an 18 gage (0.0516 in.) vessel shell?
|
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5335 |
| IX-86-40 |
Section IX, QW-181.1 and QW-451.3 |
QW-181.1; QW-451.3 |
9/23/1986 |
|
For procedure qualification, do QW-181.1 and QW-451.3 prohibit the use of materials in product forms other than plate and pipe? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5336 |
| IX-83-01 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
7/2/1982 |
|
Is a Welding Procedure Specification (accomplished immediately prior to the Winter 1977 Addenda), encompassing a GTAW root pass followed by SMAW fill, and which is supported by a Procedure Qualification Record that utilizes tension and impact test data compiled from specimens that did not include the GTAW portion of the weld, in compliance with the 1980 Edition of Section IX by virtue of QW-100.3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5337 |
| IX-83-02 |
Section IX, Variable Q-11 of the 1971 Edition |
|
7/2/1982 |
|
Does Q-11 V-10(c) apply to the WPS or PQR? |
It applies to the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5338 |
| IX-83-02 |
Section IX, Variable Q-11 of the 1971 Edition |
|
7/2/1982 |
|
Does Q-11(b)(5) apply to the WPS or the PQR? |
It applies to the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5338 |
| IX-83-02 |
Section IX, Variable Q-11 of the 1971 Edition |
|
7/2/1982 |
|
Was it a requirement of Section IX that the maximum current and voltage and the minimum travel speed of the WPS not exceed the heat input of the PQR? |
ASME Section IX, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda, did not address this matter. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5338 |
| IX-83-03 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
7/2/1982 |
|
Is omission of an essential, nonessential (or supplementary essential) variable from a WPS interpreted to be a negative response for that variable? |
No. The Code requires that every variable for the appropriate welding process or processes (QW-252 through QW-282) be listed on the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5339 |
| IX-83-03 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
7/2/1982 |
|
Given the following situation: Company "A" was purchased by Company "B," and became a subsidiary of Company "B" on a given acquisition date. Are PQR's developed by Company "A" prior to the acquisition date acceptable for support of WPS's written by Company "B" after the acquisition date? |
Yes, provided operational control is in accordance with QW-201 and is established to the satisfaction of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5339 |
| IX-83-03 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
7/2/1982 |
|
What support evidence (documentation) must an organization produce to show that companies of different names have satisfactorily demonstrated to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee operational control of welding procedure qualifications? |
The quality control system must describe the operational control. It is expected that the operational control will have been accomplished when the quality control manual has been reviewed and accepted at the time of a survey or joint review for new Certificates of Authorization or renewal of expiring Certificates. At intervals between renewal of Certificates, proposed changes in the accepted Quality Control System Manual must be reviewed and accepted by your Authorized Inspection Agency prior to implementation. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5339 |
| IX-83-03 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
7/2/1982 |
|
Must a manufacturer or contractor add a specific statement of Code qualification certification to the WPS? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5339 |
| IX-83-03 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
7/2/1982 |
|
Is the certification of PQR's required by QW-200.2 considered to meet the WPS Certification required by QW-201? |
No, the certification of the PQR is separate from any certification requirements of the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5339 |
| IX-83-04 |
Section IX, QW-402.6 and QW-402.10 |
QW-402.6; QW-402.10 |
7/2/1982 |
|
QW-402.6 refers to the term "fit-up gap" and QW-415 refers to the term "root gap." Are these terms analogous? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5340 |
| IX-83-04 |
Section IX, QW-402.6 and QW-402.10 |
QW-402.6; QW-402.10 |
7/2/1982 |
|
Is a manufacturer allowed a reasonable range on his WPS for nonessential variables QW-402.10 and QW-404.3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5340 |
| IX-83-04 |
Section IX, QW-402.6 and QW-402.10 |
QW-402.6; QW-402.10 |
7/2/1982 |
|
Can a performance qualification test for fillets be conducted on thicknesses using 8 gage or 10 gage production materials? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5340 |
| IX-83-05 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
7/2/1982 |
|
A WPS has been qualified for thickness range of 3/16 in. to 8 in. using a pipe coupon 12.75 in. O.D. with a nominal wall thickness of 1.5 in. Can a production weldment using a base material with a manufactured thickness of 0.178 in. be welded with the above WPS when the nominal wall thickness for this material was 0.203 in. and the 0.178 in. manufactured thickness is within the 12.5% manufacturing tolerance? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5341 |
| IX-83-05 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
7/2/1982 |
|
In accordance with Section IX, does the minimum value of a qualified thickness range apply to the nominal material thickness or the actual thickness of the production weldment material? |
The minimum qualification thickness value applies to the nominal thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5341 |
| IX-83-06 |
Section IX, Use of Consumable Inserts |
|
7/2/1982 |
|
A consumable insert is fused between two test coupons using GTAW process and no filler wire, the remaining passes deposited by the SMAW process. For welder qualification, is the welder qualified to make a field weld with the GTAW process and using bare wire (E 70S2) over the consumable insert? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5342 |
| IX-83-06 |
Section IX, Use of Consumable Inserts |
|
7/2/1982 |
|
If the GTAW process has qualified the welder to make such a deposit over the consumable insert, although he has not made a deposit in the qualification test, then would the welder's qualification of the GTAW process allow the welder to make a deposit with the GTAW process and the use of bare filler wire without the consumable insert having been preplaced? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5342 |
| IX-83-07 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
7/2/1982 |
|
A welder has been qualified for a thickness of deposited weld metal from 1/16 in. to 3/4 in. for a particular welding process. A 3/4 in. thick pipe is to be welded in production, using a single-vee butt joint, with the same process for which the welder is qualified. Is a second welder required to deposit the weld reinforcement, or is it permissible for the welder who completes the weld to deposit the reinforcement? |
A second welder is not required to deposit the weld reinforcement. It is permissible for the welder who completes the weld to deposit the weld reinforcement. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5343 |
| IX-83-08 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
7/2/1982 |
|
A welding procedure for a particular process has been qualified on 3/8 in. thick material. Weld reinforcement was removed during preparation of test specimens for mechanical testing. A 3/4 in. thick pipe is to be welded in production using this qualified procedure. May the finished weld include the reinforcement permitted by the Code [for example, Section VIII, Division 1, UW-35(c)], or must the finished weld be flush with the surface of the base metal? |
The finished weld may include the reinforcement permitted by the applicble Code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5344 |
| IX-83-09 |
Section IX, QW-282.6(m) |
QW-282.6(m) |
7/2/1982 |
|
Under the requirements of QW-282.6(m), does a 15% change in the amount of dust recorded on the PQR mean that an allowable range for particle fines is the amount of dust plus or minus 15% of that amount, or the amount of dust plus or minus 15%? |
QW-282.6(m) requires that the allowable range for particle fines be the amount of dust plus or minus 15%. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5345 |
| IX-83-10 |
Section IX, QW-404.4 |
QW-404.4 |
7/2/1982 |
|
A procedure was qualified with 521 bare wire (now classified as ER 90S-B3 or ER 90S-B3L). Is procedure requalification required when ER 90S-B3 or ER 90S-B3L is substituted for 521 bare wire? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5346 |
| IX-83-100 |
Section IX, QW-404.13 and QW-404.28 |
QW-404.13; QW-404.28 |
1/13/1984 |
|
A welder successfully qualifies using a P-No. 1 test coupon and a carbon steel consumable insert A-No. 1. Is he qualified to weld stainless steel P-No. 8 production welds using a stainless steel consumable insert A-No. 8? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5347 |
| IX-83-101 |
Section IX, QW-310.5(c) and QW-311(a) |
QW-310.5(c); QW-311(a) |
1/16/1984 |
|
Can the thickness of the test metal used for qualifying a corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay procedure, to weld on a base metal thickness of 25 mm (1 in.) or greater, be more than the base metal thickness used for production? |
Yes. See QW-214.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5348 |
| IX-83-101 |
Section IX, QW-310.5(c) and QW-311(a) |
QW-310.5(c); QW-311(a) |
1/16/1984 |
|
Do the requirements of QW-311 apply to procedure qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5348 |
| IX-83-101 |
Section IX, QW-310.5(c) and QW-311(a) |
QW-310.5(c); QW-311(a) |
1/16/1984 |
|
Does a welder/welding operator who qualifies for a groove joint also qualify for welding corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay, or vice versa? |
No. See QW-311. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5348 |
| IX-83-101 |
Section IX, QW-310.5(c) and QW-311(a) |
QW-310.5(c); QW-311(a) |
1/16/1984 |
|
If a welder successfully qualifies a fillet weld procedure, does this also qualify him for performance? |
Yes. See QW-203 and QW-301.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5348 |
| IX-83-101 |
Section IX, QW-310.5(c) and QW-311(a) |
QW-310.5(c); QW-311(a) |
1/16/1984 |
|
Is a welder who is qualified to weld P-No. 8 to P-No. 8 base metal with an F-No. 5 electrode using SMAW also qualified to weld combinations of P-No. 6 and P-No. 7 base metals with F-No. 5 electrodes using SMAW? |
Yes, within the limits of the essential variables of QW-353. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5348 |
| IX-83-101 |
Section IX, QW-310.5(c) and QW-311(a) |
QW-310.5(c); QW-311(a) |
1/16/1984 |
|
Is QW-310.5(c) applicable only when the filler metal does not belong to F-Nos. 41 through 45? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5348 |
| IX-83-102 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
1/19/1984 |
|
In Note (1) of QW-451.1, QW-403.2, .3, .6, .9, and .10 are listed. Do these variables apply to and further restrict the thickness of deposited weld metal qualified, even though they are base metal variables? |
No. In Note (1) of QW-451.1, only QW-407.4 applies to both base metal and deposited weld metal thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5349 |
| IX-83-103 |
Section IX, QW-202.2 and QW-301 |
QW-202.2; QW-301 |
5/2/1984 |
|
Do the requirements of QW-202.2 apply in the manufacturing of Section IV HLW water heaters where pressure retaining fillet welds are used? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5350 |
| IX-83-103 |
Section IX, QW-202.2 and QW-301 |
QW-202.2; QW-301 |
5/2/1984 |
|
Is a welder who welds a fillet procedure qualification test coupon, which successfully qualifies a fillet weld procedure in accordance with QW-202.2, qualified to weld pressure retaining fillet welds in production in accordance with QW-203 and QW-301.2? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5350 |
| IX-83-104 |
Section IX, QW-451 and QW-452 |
QW-451; QW-452 |
5/2/1984 |
|
Does the procedure or performance qualification test, where viewing windows are cut from a consumable insert, qualify the WPS or the welder when the windows are later welded using a consumable insert of the same chemical composition? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5351 |
| IX-83-104 |
Section IX, QW-451 and QW-452 |
QW-451; QW-452 |
5/2/1984 |
|
Does the same procedure or performance qualification test mentioned in Question (1) qualify the WPS or the welder when the windows are later welded in an open butt joint? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5351 |
| IX-83-104 |
Section IX, QW-451 and QW-452 |
QW-451; QW-452 |
5/2/1984 |
|
If a second procedure or performance qualification test utilizing an open root is combined with a procedure or performance qualification test utilizing a consumable insert, may the production weld utilize viewing windows that are subsequently welded either with consumable inserts of the same composition or using an open butt joint? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5351 |
| IX-83-105 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
5/2/1984 |
|
To qualify a welding procedure with an open butt joint, a 2 in. thick coupon was welded open butt and filled partially to 5/8 in. using the GTAW process. Is it a requirement of Section IX to fill the entire base metal thickness (2 in.) instead of 5/8 in. to qualify base metal maximum thickness to 4 in. and weld metal maximum thickness to 1-1/4 in. using the GTAW process for open butt welding? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5352 |
| IX-83-106 |
Section IX, QW-403.18 |
QW-403.18 |
5/2/1984 |
|
P-No. 3 and P-No. 5 base materials are to be joined in production. May P-No. 1 material be substituted for P-No. 3 or P-No. 5 for a welder performance qualification test? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5353 |
| IX-83-106 |
Section IX, QW-403.18 |
QW-403.18 |
5/2/1984 |
|
Does the P-No. 1 substitution apply for a procedure qualification test? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5353 |
| IX-83-107 |
Section IX, Open Butt Welds |
|
5/3/1984 |
|
A welder is qualified on a 2 in. NPS pipe test coupon using the GTAW process, and also on a 6 in. NPS pipe test coupon using the SMAW process. If a branch connection is to be welded where the branch connection fitting has a diameter between 1 in. and 2-7/8 in., and the run pipe has a diameter greater than 2-7/8 in., may the welder weld this joint using the GTAW process completely? |
The welder may use the GTAW process for the qualified thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5354 |
| IX-83-107 |
Section IX, Open Butt Welds |
|
5/3/1984 |
|
May the welder weld the joint mentioned in Question (1) using the GTAW process for the root and the SMAW process for the fill? |
The welder may make the root weld with the GTAW process but may not fill any portion of the remaining groove weld using the SMAW process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5354 |
| IX-83-107 |
Section IX, Open Butt Welds |
|
5/3/1984 |
|
May the welder weld the joint mentioned in Question (1) using the SMAW process completely? |
The welder may not use the SMAW process only. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5354 |
| IX-83-108 |
Section IX, QW-304 |
QW-304 |
5/3/1984 |
|
Based on the two qualifying tests listed below, is a welder qualified to weld, in all positions, a P-No. 8, 10 in. diameter pipe with a wall thickness of 1c in. using the SMAW process? Test 1 was performed on 6 in. diameter pipe and Test 2 was performed on plate.
Variable Test 1 Test 2
Base metal P-No. 1 P-No. 8
Filler metal F-No. 4 F-No. 5
Process SMAW SMAW
Position 6G 1G
Thickness 0.864 in. 0.250 in. |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5355 |
| IX-83-109 |
Section IX, QW-466.3 |
QW-466.3 |
5/3/1984 |
|
In QW-466.3, does the bender of the guided-bend wrap around jig have to be calibrated to the specimen thickness plus 1/16 in. distance between the roller and mandril? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5356 |
| IX-83-109 |
Section IX, QW-466.3 |
QW-466.3 |
5/3/1984 |
|
If the bender of the guided-bend wrap around jig in QW-466.3 is properly set to test 3/8 in. thick specimens, may 1/4 in. thick specimens be tested without resetting the roller? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5356 |
| IX-83-11 |
Section IX, QW-403.11, QW-407.4 |
QW-403.11; QW-407.4 |
7/2/1982 |
|
There exists a PQR for P-No. 5 to P-No. 5 materials with PWHT of 1400F. Can this PQR be used in accordance with QW-403.11 to support a WPS for P-No. 5 to P-No. 1 materials with a PWHT to be conducted at 1400°F? |
No. PWHT of P-No. 1 material at 1400F is between the upper and lower transformation temperatures. QW-407.1(a)(5) requires separate qualification for this condition. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5357 |
| IX-83-11 |
Section IX, QW-403.11, QW-407.4 |
QW-403.11; QW-407.4 |
7/2/1982 |
|
For the PQR and WPS described in Question (1), is the maximum base metal thickness of the WPS limited to 1.1 times the base metal thickness of the PQR per QW-407.4 since the critical temperature of the P-No. 1 material has been exceeded? |
The critical temperature range of the P-No. 1 material has not been exceeded; therefore, QW-407.4 does not apply. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5357 |
| IX-83-110 |
Section IX, QW-150 and QW-462.1 |
QW-150; QW-462.1 |
5/3/1984 |
|
A PQR is run using pipe with an outside diameter greater than 3 in. and a thickness of 1 in. or less. If tension tests are performed per QW-462.1(a) and the results meet the acceptance criteria of QW-153, will the minimum requirements for QW-150 be met? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5358 |
| IX-83-110 |
Section IX, QW-150 and QW-462.1 |
QW-150; QW-462.1 |
5/3/1984 |
|
If the thickness is greater than 1 in., will the minimum requirements for QW-150 be met? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5358 |
| IX-83-110 |
Section IX, QW-150 and QW-462.1 |
QW-150; QW-462.1 |
5/3/1984 |
|
If everything is the same as in Question (1) except that the outside diameter is smaller than 3 in., will the minimum requirements for QW-150 be met? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5358 |
| IX-83-110 |
Section IX, QW-150 and QW-462.1 |
QW-150; QW-462.1 |
5/3/1984 |
|
What tolerance is allowed on the 3/4 in. dimension in QW-462.1(b)? |
Section IX does not specify dimensional tolerances for this tensile test. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5358 |
| IX-83-111 |
Section IX, QW-200.1(c) |
QW-200.1(c) |
5/3/1984 |
|
For procedure qualification, does a change from automatic GTAW to manual GTAW, or vice versa, constitute a change in the welding process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5359 |
| IX-83-111 |
Section IX, QW-200.1(c) |
QW-200.1(c) |
5/3/1984 |
|
Is an additional procedure qualification test required for automatic welding when previous PQR coupons were welded manually, using the same process within the same essential variables? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5359 |
| IX-83-111 |
Section IX, QW-200.1(c) |
QW-200.1(c) |
5/3/1984 |
|
Is a new procedure qualification test and record required for manual welding when previous PQR coupons were welded automatically, using the same process within the same essential variables? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5359 |
| IX-83-112 |
Section IX, QW-404.32 |
QW-404.32 |
5/3/1984 |
|
Is a welder who qualified prior to the Summer 1983 Addenda with the GMAW-S process, 0.432 in. deposited weld metal thickness, required to requalify to weld up to a maximum deposited weld metal thickness of 0.864 in. after the Addenda becomes effective? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5360 |
| IX-83-113 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/3/1984 |
|
A welder is presently qualified for a given WPS to perform GTAW of P-No. 1 to P-No. 1 pipe using an F-No. 6, A-No. 1, SFA-5.18, AWS Classification ER-70S-2 filler metal. The welder is also qualified for another WPS to perform GTAW of P-No. 8 to P-No. 8 pipe using an F-No. 6, A-No. 8, SFA-5.9, AWS Classification ER-308 filler metal. All other essential variables are the same. The welder has maintained his qualification with the GTAW process using the ER-70S-2 filler metal on P-No. 1 base metals. The welder has not used the P-No. 8 to P-No. 8 WPS for more than 6 months. Is the welder required to renew his qualification prior to using the GTAW, P-No.8 to P-No.8 WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5361 |
| IX-83-114 |
Section IX, QW-202.3 |
QW-202.3 |
5/3/1984 |
|
Must a weld buildup (other than corrosion-resistant or hard-facing weld metal overlay) on P-No. 1 materials using austenitic stainless steel (or nickel alloy) filler metal be qualified with a groove weld per QW-202.3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5362 |
| IX-83-115 |
Section IX, QW-162.1, QW-466.1, and QW-200.3 |
QW-162.1; QW-466.1; QW-200.3 |
7/3/1984 |
|
Is it acceptable to perform alternate bend tests as specified in ASTM A 488 if the requirements of QW-162.1, QW-466.1, QW-466.2, and QW-466.3 cannot be met due to high yield-to-tensile strength ratio of either the base or the weld deposited metal? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5363 |
| IX-83-115 |
Section IX, QW-162.1, QW-466.1, and QW-200.3 |
QW-162.1; QW-466.1; QW-200.3 |
7/3/1984 |
|
Can the material-number groupings of ASTM A 488 be used for those metals not listed in Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5363 |
| IX-83-116 |
Section IX, QW-356 and QW-403 |
QW-356; QW-403 |
7/3/1984 |
|
May an existing PQR for joining P-No. 22 to P-No. 23 base materials using an F-No. 22 filler metal also be used for joining P-No. 25 to P-No. 25 base materials? |
No. See QW-403.11. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5364 |
| IX-83-116 |
Section IX, QW-356 and QW-403 |
QW-356; QW-403 |
7/3/1984 |
|
May an existing welder qualification for joining P-No. 22 to P-No. 23 base material also qualify for joining P-No. 25 to P-No. 25 base rnaterials? |
Yes. See QW-403.18 and QW-423. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5364 |
| IX-83-117 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
7/3/1984 |
|
In accordance with QW-322(a) or (b), is there a maximum time period following the expiration of performance qualifications whereby renewal may be made using a single test joint? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5365 |
| IX-83-118 |
Section IX, QB-406.1 and QB-406.3 |
QB-406.1; QB-406.3 |
7/3/1984 |
|
Regarding QB-406, does a change in fuel gas require a new procedure qualification provided all other essential variables remain unchanged? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5366 |
| IX-83-118 |
Section IX, QB-406.1 and QB-406.3 |
QB-406.1; QB-406.3 |
7/3/1984 |
|
In accordance with QB-406, is a new procedure qualification required for oxygen-fuel or air-fuel mixture ratios? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5366 |
| IX-83-119 |
Section IX, QW-151.1 (d) |
QW-151.1 |
7/3/1984 |
|
In accordance with QW-151.1 (d), may tensile test specimens be thermally cut when multiple specimens are to be used? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5367 |
| IX-83-119 |
Section IX, QW-151.1 (d) |
QW-151.1 |
7/3/1984 |
|
May multiple specimens (80-120 mm thick) be thermally cut and further machined in the heat affected zone for the tests? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5367 |
| IX-83-12 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
7/2/1982 |
|
A manufacturer has written and qualified a WPS for use at a particular jobsite. Assuming there are no changes in the essential or supplementary essential variables, is it necessary for this manufacturer to requalify the procedure for use at other jobsites? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5368 |
| IX-83-120 |
Section IX, QW-151.2 and QW-163 |
QW-151.2; QW-163 |
7/9/1984 |
|
Is it a requirement of QW-151.2(a), (b), and (c) that the test specimen thickness be equal to the test coupon thickness? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5369 |
| IX-83-120 |
Section IX, QW-151.2 and QW-163 |
QW-151.2; QW-163 |
7/9/1984 |
|
A groove weld bend test specimen is evaluated in accordance with QW-163 and contains two cracks of a 1/8 in. and a 1/16 in. dimension. Does this specimen meet the acceptance criteria of QW-163? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5369 |
| IX-83-120 |
Section IX, QW-151.2 and QW-163 |
QW-151.2; QW-163 |
7/9/1984 |
|
In accordance with QW-163, are open defect sizes evaluated individually? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5369 |
| IX-83-121 |
Section IX, QW-311 |
QW-311 |
8/22/1984 |
|
May a welder who qualifies the corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay procedure in accordance with QW-214 be qualified to use that procedure without additional testing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5370 |
| IX-83-121 |
Section IX, QW-311 |
QW-311 |
8/22/1984 |
|
Is it the intent of Section IX to permit qualification of corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay welders by using pipe test coupons rather than requiring flat plate test coupons? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5370 |
| IX-83-122 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Does QW-403.6 apply when supplemental essential variables are not a consideration for the welding process being used? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5371 |
| IX-83-123 |
Section IX, QW-202.4 |
QW-202.4 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Does QW-202.4 apply to welder performance qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5372 |
| IX-83-124 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
10/3/1984 |
|
May the provisions of QW-322 be used to renew the performance qualifications of a welder who has been laid off for a period of 10 months? |
Yes, provided the original qualifications were conducted by the same manufacturer or contractor as required by QW-301.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5373 |
| IX-83-125 |
Section IX, QW-282 |
QW-282 |
10/3/1984 |
|
In accordance with QW-282.2(d), when a hard-facing weld metal overlay procedure specification has been qualified in the horizontal and vertical welding positions and the welding is to be done in the flat position, must another welding procedure qualification test be accomplished in the flat position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5374 |
| IX-83-125 |
Section IX, QW-282 |
QW-282 |
10/3/1984 |
|
A hard-facing weld metal overlay procedure specification has been qualified in the 5G position. Does this qualify the welding procedure specification for use on flat, vertical, and overhead hard-facing of plate? |
No. See QW-282.2(d). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5374 |
| IX-83-126 |
Section IX, Qualification Thickness |
|
10/3/1984 |
|
May a welding procedure which is qualified on a 3/8 in. thick coupon be used to weld a 1/4 in. deep scar on a shell which is 1 in. thick? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5375 |
| IX-83-126 |
Section IX, Qualification Thickness |
|
10/3/1984 |
|
May a GTAW welding procedure which is qualified on a 3/8 in. thick coupon be used to weld the root pass up to a 1/4 in. maximum thickness in weld metal on base material 1 in. thick where the remainder of the joint is welded with a qualified SMAW welding procedure and the actual weld metal thickness of the GTAW weld is documented as not exceeding 1/4 in.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5375 |
| IX-83-127 |
Section IX, QW-403.8 |
QW-403.8 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Does QW-403.8 apply to deposited weld metal thickness as shown on Form QW-482 for the GMAW, GTAW, SAW, and SMAW processes? |
No. Deposited weld metal thickness is addressed by QW-404.30 and QW-404.32. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5376 |
| IX-83-127 |
Section IX, QW-403.8 |
QW-403.8 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Is the thickness for deposited fillet weld metal as shown on Form QW-482 the effective throat of the weld as defined in the various codes of construction? |
No. This entry refers to leg lengths. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5376 |
| IX-83-127 |
Section IX, QW-403.8 |
QW-403.8 |
10/3/1984 |
|
If the construction code establishes limitations on deposited weld metal thickness for groove or fillet welds, must these limitations be shown on the WPS including PWHT exemptions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5376 |
| IX-83-127 |
Section IX, QW-403.8 |
QW-403.8 |
10/3/1984 |
|
If the welder's performance qualification test coupons place limitations on his deposited weld metal thickness for groove welds, must these limitations be shown on the WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5376 |
| IX-83-127 |
Section IX, QW-403.8 |
QW-403.8 |
10/3/1984 |
|
If the welder's performance qualification test coupons place limitations on his pipe diameter range for groove or fillet welds, must these limitations be shown on the WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5376 |
| IX-83-128 |
Section IX, QW-322 and QW-304.1 |
QW-322; QW-304.1 |
10/3/1984 |
|
May a welder who has been qualified previously, but who has not welded in the past 6 months, be requalified in accordance with QW-304.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5377 |
| IX-83-129 |
Section IX, QW-281.2(e) |
QW-281.2(e) |
10/3/1984 |
|
In QW-281.2(e), does any increase in specified maximum interpass temperature require requalification, or only an increase in excess of 100°F? |
All increases in maximum specified interpass temperatures require requalification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5378 |
| IX-83-13 |
Section IX, QW-321 |
QW-321 |
7/2/1982 |
|
A welder failed a radiographic performance qualification test and subsequently received further training. If he again attempts to qualify, must he be retested in accordance with QW-321? |
No, since he has received further training he may be tested in accordance with QW-304. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5379 |
| IX-83-130 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
10/3/1984 |
|
In QW-407.1, does a change in soaking time at the specified postweld heat treatment temperature require requalification of the welding procedure? Supplementary essential variables for notch toughness are not a requirement. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5380 |
| IX-83-131 |
Section IX, QW-422 |
QW-422 |
10/3/1984 |
|
May dual stamped A53/A120 CW pipe be used for weld test coupons? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5381 |
| IX-83-131 |
Section IX, QW-422 |
QW-422 |
10/3/1984 |
|
May dual stamped A53/A120 CW pipe be treated as a P-No. 1 material, A53 Type F? |
Yes, provided that the requirements of the ASTM specification are identical (excluding editorial differences) or more stringent than the ASME specification for the grade, class, or type produced, and provided that the material is confirmed as complying with the ASTM specification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5381 |
| IX-83-131 |
Section IX, QW-422 |
QW-422 |
10/3/1984 |
|
May a welder of dual stamped A53/A120 CW pipe be qualified in accordance with Section IX? |
Yes. See QW-403.18. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5381 |
| IX-83-132 |
Section IX, QW-311 |
QW-311 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Does a welder/welding operator who qualifies for a groove joint qualify for welding corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5382 |
| IX-83-133 |
Section IX, QW-300.2 |
QW-300.2 |
10/3/1984 |
|
May a group of welders transfer their performance qualifications from a previous employer to a new company formed by those welders? |
No. See QW-300.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5383 |
| IX-83-134 |
Section IX, QW-312(a) and QW-461.9 |
QW-312(a); QW-461.9 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Do the essential variables listed in QW-282 also apply to the performance qualification of QW-312(a)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5384 |
| IX-83-134 |
Section IX, QW-312(a) and QW-461.9 |
QW-312(a); QW-461.9 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Do the parameters of QW-461.9 apply for hard-facing performance qualification? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5384 |
| IX-83-134 |
Section IX, QW-312(a) and QW-461.9 |
QW-312(a); QW-461.9 |
10/3/1984 |
|
May the requirements of QW-423.1 be used in hard-facing performance qualification? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5384 |
| IX-83-134 |
Section IX, QW-312(a) and QW-461.9 |
QW-312(a); QW-461.9 |
10/3/1984 |
|
For procedure qualification, may the requirements of QW-461.9 be used in lieu of QW-282.2(d)? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5384 |
| IX-83-135 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
10/3/1984 |
|
When the code of construction exempts the heat affected zone from notch-toughness testing, is it necessary to provide an additional qualification test for each base metal Group Number in accordance with QW-403.5 if all other variables remain the same? |
No. See QW-401.3. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5385 |
| IX-83-136 |
Section IX, QB-402.2 |
QB-402.2 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Is it permissible to qualify a brazing procedure joining a Code approved SA specified pipe or tube to a part made of ASTM B-16 Alloy C36000 (free cutting brass), which is not a material listed in QB-422, with an assigned P-Number? The procedure qualification would be valid only for the non-Code material and alloy number designated in conjunction with a Code listed material of the same P-Number as that qualified. |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5386 |
| IX-83-137 |
Section IX, QW-403.18 |
QW-403.18 |
10/3/1984 |
|
Is a welder qualified to weld P-No. 4 or P-No. 5 base material if performance qualification tests were made using P-No. 1 base material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5387 |
| IX-83-138 |
Section III, Division 1, and Section IX (All Editions), NX-4321 Required Qualifications |
|
10/9/1984 |
|
Does NX-4321 of Section III, Division 1, and Section IX provide for the positive identification of the welder or the welding operator taking the performance qualification test? |
Yes.
Note: This interpretation also appears as III-1-83-264. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5388 |
| IX-83-139 |
Section IX, QW-462.1(d) |
QW-462.1(d) |
11/26/1984 |
|
Can tensile results computed from a turned specimen which does not meet the machining tolerances given in QW-462.1 (d) be used for procedure qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5389 |
| IX-83-139 |
Section IX, QW-462.1(d) |
QW-462.1(d) |
11/26/1984 |
|
Are the machining tolerances given in QW-462.1(d) mandatory? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5389 |
| IX-83-14 |
Section IX, QW-450 |
QW-450 |
9/17/1982 |
|
A welder is qualified by depositing 2 mm of GTAW on a 2 mm base metal, and 10 mm of SMAW on a 10 mm base metal. Is this welder qualified to make a combination weld deposit of 4 mm GTAW root, and 16 mm SMAW fill on a 20 mm base metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5390 |
| IX-83-14 |
Section IX, QW-450 |
QW-450 |
9/17/1982 |
|
A welder is qualified in combination by depositing 2 mm of GTAW root using a consumable insert, and 8 mm of SMAW fill on 10 mm base metal. If the welder then qualifies on an open butt joint by depositing 2 mm of GTAW on a 2 mm base metal, could he make a combination weld deposit of 4 mm GTAW root, and 16 mm SMAW fill on a 20 mm base metal, using either a consumable insert or open butt? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5390 |
| IX-83-14 |
Section IX, QW-450 |
QW-450 |
9/17/1982 |
|
Would a 1½ in. procedure test coupon having 3/4 in. GTAW and 3/4 in. SMAW weld deposits qualify a procedure for 8 in. maximum base metal and 8 in. deposited weld metal thicknesses with either or both processes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5390 |
| IX-83-140 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
11/26/1984 |
|
Under the requirements of QW-404.5, can the A-Number be obtained by assuming a welding filler metal's chemical composition (as manufactured), as given by Section II, Part C, is close enough to the deposited weld metal chemical composition to be used in QW-442? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5391 |
| IX-83-140R |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
12/4/1985 |
|
Under the requirements of QW-404.5, can the A-Number be obtained by assuming a welding filler metal's chemical composition (as manufactured), as given by Section II, Part C, is close enough to the deposited weld metal chemical composition to be used in QW-442? |
No, except as defined in Interpretation IX-81-44.
Note: This interpretation should have appeared in Interpretations No. 16 -- Section IX, covering interpretations issued from July 1, 1984, through December 31, 1984, and revised interpretations issued from July 1, 1984, through February 8, 1985. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5392 |
| IX-83-141 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
11/26/1984 |
|
A WPS was qualified using 1-1/8 in. thick base metal test plates intended for use in making repair welds on castings. May this WPS be used to fill a 1/4 in. deep excavation on a 3 in. thick section of a sand casting? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5393 |
| IX-83-142 |
Section IX, QW-191 |
QW-191 |
11/26/1984 |
|
Does QW-191 require that the radiographer hold SNT certification to a manufacturer's written practice? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5394 |
| IX-83-143 |
Section IX, QW-351 |
QW-351 |
11/26/1984 |
|
Can weld reinforcement be considered for determining the deposited weld metal thickness per QW-351, provided that the full weld reinforcement is included in either the side bend tests (where side bends are permitted by QW-452) or the radiographic examination (where permitted by QW-304)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5395 |
| IX-83-144 |
Section IX, QW-462.3(a) and (b) |
QW-462.3(a) |
11/26/1984 |
|
Does Section IX, QW-462.3(a) and (b), require that test specimens joined in combination meet the y dimension of P-No. 23, if P-No. 23 is joined to P-No. XX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5396 |
| IX-83-144 |
Section IX, QW-462.3(a) and (b) |
QW-462.3(a) |
11/26/1984 |
|
Does Section IX require that back gouging of the second side prior to welding be an essential variable for welder/operator qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5396 |
| IX-83-145 |
Section IX, QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
11/26/1984 |
|
QW-407.2 of the 1980 Edition of Section IX (including 1981 Winter Addenda) specifies the lower limit of PWHT time on the PQR as at least 80% of that encountered in actual fabrication. Is there a limit on the maximum PWHT time on the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5397 |
| IX-83-146 |
Section IX, QW-408.9 |
QW-408.9 |
11/26/1984 |
|
May a GTAW PQR for P-No. 4X to P-No. 4X qualified with a backing strip and without gas backing be used to support a WPS for a gas backed open butt joint? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5398 |
| IX-83-146 |
Section IX, QW-408.9 |
QW-408.9 |
11/26/1984 |
|
May a GTAW PQR for P-No. 4X to P-No. 4X with an open butt gas backed joint be used to support a WPS for a groove with a backing strip without gas backing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5398 |
| IX-83-147 |
Section IX, AWS Number Change and PQR |
|
3/22/1985 |
|
When the AWS classification is changed with no change in mechanical properties or chemical composition, may a Manufacturer use a PQR referencing the old classification to support a new WPS referencing the new classification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5399 |
| IX-83-148 |
Section IX, QW-403.6 |
QW-403.6 |
3/22/1985 |
|
A PQR was qualified to the 1980 Edition of Section IX, where the base metal thickness is 5/8 in. (16 mm) or greater. Regarding the use of QW-403.6, can that PQR be used to support a 1983 SI Edition WPS where the minimum base metal thickness is 15 mm? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5400 |
| IX-83-149 |
Section IX, QW-301.2 |
QW-301.2 |
3/22/1985 |
|
In reference to the 1983 Edition of Section IX, QW-301.2, may the supervisor conducting the tests set his own visual requirements prior to the mechanical testing listed in QW-302? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5401 |
| IX-83-149 |
Section IX, QW-301.2 |
QW-301.2 |
3/22/1985 |
|
If the welder is testing under a code -- for example, ANSI/ASME B31.1 -- is the supervisor conducting the tests supposed to base his visual requirements on the production weld visual requirements listed in ANSI/ASME B31.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5401 |
| IX-83-15 |
Section IX, QW-463.1(b), QW-211 |
QW-463.1(b); QW-211 |
9/17/1982 |
|
Is it acceptable to prepare more than one coupon and remove part of the required specimens (including impact tests) from each coupon when qualifying a Welding Procedure Specification? |
Yes. See the provisions for small diameter pipe in QW-461.1(e) and QW-462.3(a) and the provisions for impact specimens in QW-170. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5402 |
| IX-83-150 |
Section IX, QW-322(a) |
QW-322(a) |
3/22/1985 |
|
If in a single Vee-groove joint, a GMAW root pass is used and the electrode is F-No. 6, SFA-5.18, AWS E705-3, can the GTAW process be used to reheat the weld without the use of additional filler wire if the procedure was qualified using filler wire F-No. 6, SFA-5.18, AWS E70S-2? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5403 |
| IX-83-151 |
Section IX, QW-201 and QW-300.2 |
QW-201; QW-300.2 |
3/22/1985 |
|
When one or more related companies of different names within an organization takes leave, becomes independent, or is no longer related to the organization, will the previously supplied weld procedure qualifications in their possession be in effect for their use? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5404 |
| IX-83-152 |
Section IX, QW-403.9 |
QW-403.9 |
3/22/1985 |
|
A SAW procedure was run on 1 in. thick base material using a single pass on each side. Both weld beads were greater than 1/2 in. Is the maximum base metal thickness qualified equal to 1.1 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5405 |
| IX-83-152 |
Section IX, QW-403.9 |
QW-403.9 |
3/22/1985 |
|
A SAW was run on 5/8 in. thick base material using a single pass on each side. Both weld beads were less than 1/2 in. Is the maximum base metal thickness qualified equal to 1-1/4 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5405 |
| IX-83-153 |
Section IX, QW-301.1 |
QW-301.1 |
3/22/1985 |
|
The requirements of QW-301.1 are intended to determine the ability of welders to deposit sound weld metal. If a percentage of coupons fail due to porosity, does disregarding such porosity meet the requirements of QW-301.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5406 |
| IX-83-154 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
3/22/1985 |
|
In QW-322, does "renewal" mean the reestablishment of qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5407 |
| IX-83-154 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
3/22/1985 |
|
A welder is qualified only for the SMAW process, and during a period of 3 months or more, he has not welded. Is his qualification reestablished if he makes a single test using any thickness, position, or material for which he was previously qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5407 |
| IX-83-154 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
3/22/1985 |
|
Is a record of welder performance qualification tests (WPQ) required to document the test described in Question (2)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5407 |
| IX-83-155 |
Section IX, QW-303.1 |
QW-303.1 |
3/22/1985 |
|
May a groove weld performance on pipe/tube 2-7/8 in. O.D. or larger qualify a welder to weld partial penetration groove welds on diameters less than 2-7/8 in. O.D.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5408 |
| IX-83-156 |
Section IX, QW-160 |
QW-160 |
3/22/1985 |
|
Can AISI 8630 modified to 1.20 maximum Mn, 1.00 maximum Ni, 1.20 maximum Cr, and 0.50 Mo be classified as P-No. 11? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5409 |
| IX-83-157 |
Section IX, QW-191 |
QW-191 |
3/22/1985 |
|
May a tube or pipe coupon be cut longitudinally in three or more sections, and then radiographed with the source side being the concave side of the sections and the penetrameter placed on the source side? |
Yes. See QW-191, Winter 1984 Addenda, Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5410 |
| IX-83-158 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
3/25/1985 |
|
May two welders, both qualified for a maximum deposit thickness of 0.864 in., weld on a joint 1.5 in. thick when one welder deposits metal up to 0.750 in. and the other welder then finishes the joint? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5411 |
| IX-83-159 |
Section IX, QW-322(a) |
QW-322(a) |
3/25/1985 |
|
May a welder maintain his qualification by welding on non-Code work? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5412 |
| IX-83-16 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
9/17/1982 |
|
Is a welder who passes a groove-weld test for all positions (6G or 2G and 5G) qualified to make fillet welds on all diameters of pipe and tube? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5413 |
| IX-83-160 |
Section IX, QW-202.3 |
QW-202.3 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If a procedure for P-No. 1 to P-No. 8 has been qualified on 1-1/2 in. or greater plate using one or more welding processes, may the resulting WPS be used for weld repair or buildup for either one or both of the qualified base materials per QW-451.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5414 |
| IX-83-160 |
Section IX, QW-202.3 |
QW-202.3 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If a procedure meeting the above conditions was qualified with buttering per QW-194, may the resulting WPS be used for weld repair or buildup for either one or both of the qualified base materials per QW-451.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5414 |
| IX-83-160 |
Section IX, QW-202.3 |
QW-202.3 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If a procedure for P-No. 1 to P-No. 43 has been qualified on 1-1/2 in. or greater plate using one or more welding processes, may the resulting WPS be used for weld repair or buildup for either one or both of the qualified base materials per QW-451.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5414 |
| IX-83-160 |
Section IX, QW-202.3 |
QW-202.3 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If a procedure meeting the conditions in Question (3) above was qualified with buttering, per QW-194, may the resulting WPS be used for weld repair or buildup for either one or both of the qualified base materials per QW-451.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5414 |
| IX-83-161 |
Section IX, QW-406.1 and QW-406.2 |
QW-406.1; QW-406.2 |
5/14/1985 |
|
When preheat (QW-406.1) is a required essential variable for procedure qualification, must the preheat temperature be as specified immediately prior to each arc initiation? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5415 |
| IX-83-161 |
Section IX, QW-406.1 and QW-406.2 |
QW-406.1; QW-406.2 |
5/14/1985 |
|
When interpass temperature (QW-406.3) is a required supplementary essential variable for procedure qualification, must the interpass temperature be as specified immediately prior to each arc initiation? |
No. Interpass temperature shall be as specified immediately prior to the start of each pass. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5415 |
| IX-83-161 |
Section IX, QW-406.1 and QW-406.2 |
QW-406.1; QW-406.2 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If a WPS contains a requirement, such as interpass temperature control per QW-406.3, that is not identified as an essential, supplementary essential, or nonessential variable, does Section IX require either requalification of the procedure or revision of the WPS if the requirement is changed? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5415 |
| IX-83-162 |
Section IX, QW-311 |
QW-311 |
5/14/1985 |
|
Is it permissible to test welding operators on pipe for corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay when the production welding is to be performed on pipe in the 5G position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5416 |
| IX-83-162 |
Section IX, QW-311 |
QW-311 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If welders are tested on pipe with the weld deposited in the horizontal position for corrosion-resistant weld metal overlays, are they qualified to weld in the flat and horizontal position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5416 |
| IX-83-162 |
Section IX, QW-311 |
QW-311 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If welders are tested on pipe in the 5G position for corrosion-resistant weld metal overlays, are they qualified to weld in the flat, vertical, and overhead position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5416 |
| IX-83-162 |
Section IX, QW-311 |
QW-311 |
5/14/1985 |
|
Is position an essential variable for welding operators who perform corrosion-resistant weld metal overlays? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5416 |
| IX-83-162 |
Section IX, QW-311 |
QW-311 |
5/14/1985 |
|
When qualifying welding operators on pipe for corrosion-resistant weld metal overlays, what is the minimum required width and length of weld deposit? |
The weld deposit must be a minimum of 1-1/2 in. wide by 6 in. long per QW-311. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5416 |
| IX-83-163 |
Section IX, QW-301.4 |
QW-301.4 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If a welding operator is qualified to weld in accordance with one qualified WPS, is the welding operator qualified to weld all thicknesses per that process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5417 |
| IX-83-163 |
Section IX, QW-301.4 |
QW-301.4 |
5/14/1985 |
|
Is the process the only essential variable for welding operators? |
Yes, except for the special requirements in QW-362 and QW-363. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5417 |
| IX-83-164 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(b) and QW-322(a) |
QW-200.2(b); QW-322(a) |
5/14/1985 |
|
Per QW-322(a), is brazing considered a welding process for the purpose of extending the welder's qualification in other processes? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5418 |
| IX-83-164 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(b) and QW-322(a) |
QW-200.2(b); QW-322(a) |
5/14/1985 |
|
Given a WPS qualified under the following conditions of coupon and deposited weld metal thickness, is it acceptable to groove weld material 1 in. thick where the GTAW root deposit is 0.215 in. thick and the remaining groove depth of 0.875 in. is to be welded with SMAW?
Procedure qualification conditions:
(a) 0.500 in. thick test coupon
(b) 0.125 in. deposited weld metal thickness at root using GTAW
(c) 0.375 in. deposited weld metal thickness for fill using SMAW |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5418 |
| IX-83-165 |
Section IX, QW-406.1 |
QW-406.1 |
5/14/1985 |
|
A PQR is generated that lists 400°F as the preheat temperature. Per QW-406.1, can the WPS require a minimum preheat temperature of 300°F? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5419 |
| IX-83-165 |
Section IX, QW-406.1 |
QW-406.1 |
5/14/1985 |
|
Can the preheat temperature in the PQR be a range? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5419 |
| IX-83-166 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/14/1985 |
|
A Manufacturer has several WPSs for one process that list the same P-Numbers but differ in Group Numbers, thicknesses, position, and other variables. Is a qualified welder that has used only one of these WPSs required to renew his qualifications to use any of the other WPSs if he has not welded in accordance with them for a period longer than 6 months? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5420 |
| IX-83-167 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/14/1985 |
|
A Manufacturer uses only one welding process but has two WPSs, one of which has been properly qualified in accordance with Section IX. If a welder only uses the unqualified procedure for non-Code work for over 6 months, is he required to renew this qualifications in order to use the qualified WPS for Code applications? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5421 |
| IX-83-168 |
Section IX, QW-408.8 |
QW-408.8 |
5/14/1985 |
|
A welder is qualified on groove joint of a pipe with inert gas backing. He was allowed to make a production weld on a groove joint without a gas backing. This production joint is a groove, welded from one side only, without using a backing ring. The welding procedure used to make this weld was qualified without inert gas backing. In accordance with QW-408.8 of Section IX, is the welder qualified to make this weld? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5422 |
| IX-83-169 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
5/14/1985 |
|
For submerged-arc welding, can a fabricator use a different brand of flux than that specified in a wire-flux classification for which he is qualified, without performing a new PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5423 |
| IX-83-17 |
Section IX, QW-100.1 |
QW-100.1 |
9/17/1982 |
|
A manufacturer has a mass production, assembly-line type of facility. A welder makes the same type of weld in the same process using the same type and size electrodes in the same position. The welder only has control over the current, voltage, and travel speed variables of a WPS. Does this manufacturer meet the requirements of QW-100.1 by only supplying the welder with information needed from the WPS rather than the entire WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5424 |
| IX-83-170 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
5/14/1985 |
|
If a welder is qualified in the 6G position and welds in the 3G position for a period of more than 3 months, is his qualification in the 6G position still valid? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5425 |
| IX-83-171 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(c) |
QW-200.2(c) |
5/14/1985 |
|
Is it permissible to make editorial corrections to a PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5426 |
| IX-83-171 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(c) |
QW-200.2(c) |
5/14/1985 |
|
Is it permissible to add supported data to a PQR as an addendum? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5426 |
| IX-83-171 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(c) |
QW-200.2(c) |
5/14/1985 |
|
Is it permissible to make editorial corrections and add supported data to a PQR as a revision? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5426 |
| IX-83-172 |
Section IX, Recording of Data on PQR and WPS |
|
5/14/1985 |
|
Is it necessary to record on the PQR that the single pass thickness of each manual GTAW or SMAW weld pass in the qualification test did not exceed 1/2 in.? |
Yes. The method of recording information on the PQR may be by statement, sketch, or other means, as long as the essential variables are addressed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5427 |
| IX-83-172 |
Section IX, Recording of Data on PQR and WPS |
|
5/14/1985 |
|
Is it necessary to specify on the WPS for a manual GTAW and SMAW procedure that no single pass will exceed 1/2 in. thickness? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5427 |
| IX-83-172 |
Section IX, Recording of Data on PQR and WPS |
|
5/14/1985 |
|
Is it necessary to record on the PQR that a consumable insert was or was not used for welding the qualification test coupon? |
Yes. The method of recording information on the PQR may be by statement, sketch, or other means, as long as the essential variables are addressed. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5427 |
| IX-83-173 |
Section IX, QW-191.2.2(b)(1) and (3) |
QW-191.2.2(b)(1) |
6/25/1985 |
|
A welder qualification weld is made on a 0.133 in. wall pipe. The welder performance test is by radiography and reveals one rounded indication that measures 0.029 in. maximum dimension. Does this performance qualification test pass the requirements of Section IX? |
No. See QW-191.2.2(b)(1). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5428 |
| IX-83-174 |
Section IX, QW-191 |
QW-191 |
6/26/1985 |
|
When qualifying welders to perform Section I production welding, is it permissible to use the maximum reinforcement allowed by PW-35 of Section I for penetrameter selection? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5429 |
| IX-83-175 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 |
QW-409.1 |
6/26/1985 |
|
May a PQR show a range on travel speed if the speeds reflect those actually used in the qualification? |
Yes. See QW-200.2(b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5430 |
| IX-83-176 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
6/26/1985 |
|
Does QW-404.5 apply to ferrous materials only? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5431 |
| IX-83-176 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
6/26/1985 |
|
Is the chemistry of the weld deposit of nonferrous filler metals an essential variable for procedure qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5431 |
| IX-83-177 |
Section IX, QW-405.3 and QW-451 |
QW-405.3; QW-451 |
6/26/1985 |
|
A welder has been qualified on P-No. 1 base metal, 0.375 in. wall pipe, in the 6G position, with the root pass deposited downhill using F-No. 3 electrodes, and the remainder of the joint welded uphill using F-No. 4 electrodes. Is the welder qualified to weld in the downhill/uphill progression using F-No. 3 electrodes, and may his qualification range be listed as downhill/uphill for F-No. 3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5432 |
| IX-83-177 |
Section IX, QW-405.3 and QW-451 |
QW-405.3; QW-451 |
6/26/1985 |
|
May the F-No. 4 electrodes be deleted from the uphill portion of the joint? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5432 |
| IX-83-18 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
9/17/1982 |
|
A groove-weld test coupon consisting of 3/8 in. thick base metal having the same P-Numbers is welded using the GMAW short circuiting mode process to deposit a 1/8 in. thick root pass and using a second welding process to complete the weld. What are the thickness ranges of base metal and deposited weld metal for which the procedure is qualified? |
The base metal thickness range qualified is restricted by essential variable QW-403.10 from 1/16 in. to 0.4125 in. The deposited weld metal thickness range qualified for the GMAW short circuiting mode process is restricted by Note (1) of QW-451.1 and QW-451.2 from 1/16 in. to 0.1375 in. The deposited weld metal thickness range qualified for the second process is from 1/16 in. to 1/2 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5433 |
| IX-83-19 |
Section IX, QW-304 |
QW-304 |
9/17/1982 |
|
Can a welder be qualified by radiographic examination when using a combination of the following welding processes: GTAW, 2 passes; GMAW (short circuiting), 1 pass; and GMAW (spray arc), balance? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5434 |
| IX-83-20 |
Section IX, QW-403 |
QW-403 |
9/17/1982 |
|
May an existing PQR for joining P-No. 4 to P-No. 7 base materials with an E 309 filler metal, also qualify a WPS for welding P-No. 4 to P-No. 4 base materials and P-No. 7 to P-No. 7 base materials using the same filler metal with all other essential variables remaining the same? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5435 |
| IX-83-21 |
Section IX, QW-300 |
QW-300 |
9/17/1982 |
|
A company has a testing laboratory qualify a welder to a qualified procedure meeting their requirements. The welder works for that company for about 30 days and quits. May another company with similar welding requirements buy a copy of his qualification (which is good up to 90 days) from the testing laboratory or must he be requalified by the second company? |
The welder must be retested by the second company. QW-103.1 and QW-300.2 state that responsibility for welder qualification rests with the manufacturer or contractor and cannot be delegated to another. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5436 |
| IX-83-22 |
Section IX, QW-404.22, QW-452.3 |
QW-404.22; QW-452.3 |
9/17/1982 |
|
Is it permissible for a welder to weld a consumable insert in a ½ in. diameter pipe on the following two separate qualifications with all other performance variables being the same?
Test (1) - GTAW, open butt root, ½ in. diameter pipe
Test (2) - GTAW, consumable insert root, 1 in. diameter pipe |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5437 |
| IX-83-23 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
9/17/1982 |
|
A welder is qualified with a given procedure to 1/2 in. thickness in all positions. The welder is then given a procedure qualification test plate to weld in the flat position to extend the WPS to 2 in. maximum thickness. Is the welder then performance qualified to weld up to 2 in. in all positions? |
No. See QW-301.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5438 |
| IX-83-24 |
Section IX, QW-432 |
QW-432 |
9/17/1982 |
|
In QW-432.1, SFA-5.4 filler metals are listed as F-No. 4 for ferritic materials and F-No. 5 for austenitic materials. How are SFA-5.4 martensitic filler materials to be categorized relative to QW-432.1? |
SFA-5.4 martensitic filler materials should be categorized as F-No. 4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5439 |
| IX-83-25 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
9/28/1982 |
|
A parent company has WPS's qualified by a wholly owned subsidiary. Both parent company and subsidiary have "N" Certificates of Authorization. If the parent company changes its name, is it necessary to change the WPS's to reflect the new name on the revised Certificates of Authorization? |
No, provided there is documented traceability from the new company name to the WPS qualified under the old company name. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5440 |
| IX-83-25 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
9/28/1982 |
|
A WPS is qualified using a filler material not listed in ASME Section II, Part C. Does the WPS have to be requalified if a later edition of Section II, Part C, incorporates this material? |
No, provided all filler material specification requirements remain the same. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5440 |
| IX-83-26 |
Section IX, QW-409 and QW-200.2 |
QW-409; QW-200.2 |
11/8/1982 |
|
Is it a requirement of Section IX that the voltage and amperage used to make the welding procedure qualification be recorded on the Procedure Qualification Record (PQR), or on other documents that are retained by the Certificate Holder, when the shielded metal-arc or gas tungsten-arc welding process is used and impact testing is not required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5441 |
| IX-83-26 |
Section IX, QW-409 and QW-200.2 |
QW-409; QW-200.2 |
11/8/1982 |
|
Is it a requirement of Section IX that the actual dimensions of the tensile test specimens and the actual tensile test loads be recorded on the PQR, or on other documents that are retained by the Certificate Holder, when the actual tensile test results are recorded on the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5441 |
| IX-83-27 |
Section IX, QW-254 |
QW-254 |
11/15/1982 |
|
In Section IX, Summer 1982 Addenda, QW-254 lists QW-404.9 as an essential variable for SAW and lists QW-404.12 as a nonessential variable for SAW. Is changing from an electrode classification in an SFA specification to any other electrode classification an essential variable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5442 |
| IX-83-28 |
Section IX, QW-461.9 |
QW-461.9 |
11/15/1982 |
|
Apart from welding in 2FR position itself, what other positions qualify a welder for 2FR? |
Positions 2F, 4F, 5F (see QW-461.6) and all groove-weld positions except 1G (see QW-461.5 and QW-303.1) will qualify a welder for 2FR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5443 |
| IX-83-29 |
Section IX, QW-407.1 and QW-407.2 |
QW-407.1; QW-407.2 |
11/15/1982 |
|
For procedure qualification under QW-407.1 and QW-407.2, is "post heating" at 572° ± 18°F for 7 hr for the purpose of hydrogen removal immediately following welding considered to be a "postweld heat treatment" below the lower transformation temperature per QW-407.1(a)(2)? Both "post heating" and "postweld heat treatment" are independently defined in QW-492. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5444 |
| IX-83-30 |
Section IX, QW-407.1 |
QW-407.1 |
11/16/1982 |
|
If a weldment undergoes annealing, then normalizing (heat treatment above the critical range) followed by heat treatment below the critical range, will a welding procedure qualified with normalizing followed by heat treatment below the critical range meet the requirements of QW-407.1 where no impact requirements exist? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5445 |
| IX-83-31 |
Section IX, QW-301.2 |
QW-301.2 |
11/16/1982 |
|
Does a welder who successfully welds a fillet weld procedure qualification test coupon, also qualify and/or satisfy the performance qualification requirements? |
Yes. See QW-301.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5446 |
| IX-83-32 |
Section IX, QW-301.4 |
QW-301.4 |
11/16/1982 |
|
A manufacturer maintains performance qualification records in a central file which is not accessible to production personnel. A computer printout is supplied to the production personnel listing welders' names and their qualifications. Are the requirements of QW-301.4 ("...ranges qualified...") satisfied if an additional document, listing the limitations of the ranges qualified in the performance qualification, is provided? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5447 |
| IX-83-33 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 |
QW-409.1 |
11/16/1982 |
|
When qualifying a WPS using a combination of SMAW and SAW with notch toughness a requirement, is it a requirement of the Code that QW-409.1 permits increases in heat input or volume of deposited weld metal for a WPS qualified with a postweld, grain refining, austenitizing heat treatment? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5448 |
| IX-83-34 |
Section IX, P-Number Listings for Castings |
|
1/19/1983 |
|
Two casting material specifications have the same chemical and processing requirements. One of the specifications requires a tensile specimen, the other does not. The specification requiring a tensile specimen has been assigned a P-Number, the other specification has not. Can the specification not listed in QW-422 be considered the same P-Number as the material listed in QW-422? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5449 |
| IX-83-35 |
Section IX, QW-407.4 and QW-403.11 |
QW-407.4; QW-403.11 |
1/19/1983 |
|
In accordance with QW-403.11, a PQR using P-No. 5 material which has been postweld heat treated (PWHT) at 1400°F is to be used to back up a WPS for P-No. 1 to P-No. 5 material with PWHT. Does the maximum base metal thickness on the WPS have to be limited to 1.1 times the base metal thickness on the PQR since the lower critical temperature of the P-No. 1 material has been exceeded? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5450 |
| IX-83-36 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
1/19/1983 |
|
Does a 0.375 in. thick groove-weld coupon for weld procedure qualification qualify a 0.500 in. thick shell to 3.000 in. thick end plate groove-weld joint? |
No. See QW-202.4(b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5451 |
| IX-83-37 |
Section IX, QW-404 |
QW-404 |
1/19/1983 |
|
If a WPS qualified in accordance with the requirements of Section IX lists E7018A-1 as the filler metal, would a new WPS be required if E7015A-1 were used in production welding and all other variables remain the same? |
Yes. See QW-200.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5452 |
| IX-83-38 |
Section IX, QW-151 |
QW-151 |
1/19/1983 |
|
A manufacturer qualifies a WPS using a 1/4 in. root pass in a 3 in. thick plate coupon. Is it acceptable to machine the 3 in. thick coupon to 1/4 in. thick tensile specimens, or must 3 in. thick tensile specimens be taken if the WPS is to be qualified to weld a 1/4 in. root pass in 3 in. plate? |
One-quarter inch thick tensile specimens may be used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5453 |
| IX-83-39 |
Section IX, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
1/19/1983 |
|
For organizations which invoke the requirements of Section IX but are not required by their code to have any interface with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee, may the requirements of QW-201 be satisfied by having the manager of a subsidiary company state in an official letter that the subsidiary company is under the operational control of the parent company for welding procedure qualifications? |
ASME cannot determine rules for organizations not involved with Code applications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5454 |
| IX-83-40 |
Section IX, Q-11(5), Welder Qualification, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda |
Q-11 (5) |
1/19/1983 |
|
Is it a requirement of Section IX, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda, that a welder performance qualification test on alloy steels (Q-23, nominal not to exceed 6%) can be substituted for carbon steels, and vice versa? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5455 |
| IX-83-40 |
Section IX, Q-11(5), Welder Qualification, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda |
Q-11 (5) |
1/19/1983 |
|
A welder performs a qualification test on A-588. (Note that there is no P-Number assigned to this material.) Is he also qualified to weld P-No. 1 materials, provided all essential variables are met? |
Yes, provided the manufacturer has qualified welding procedures for A-588 and P-No. 1 materials. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5455 |
| IX-83-40 |
Section IX, Q-11(5), Welder Qualification, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda |
Q-11 (5) |
1/19/1983 |
|
Is it a requirement of Section IX, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda, for procedure qualification of impact tested material [Q-11(b)(5)] that the voltage, amperage, and travel speed are within the range specified in the Welding Procedure Specification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5455 |
| IX-83-40 |
Section IX, Q-11(5), Welder Qualification, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda |
Q-11 (5) |
1/19/1983 |
|
According to Section IX, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda, do the Procedure Qualification Records have to demonstrate the most extreme ends of the specified ranges of the WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5455 |
| IX-83-41 |
Section IX, Q-11(b)(3), 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda |
Q-11 (b) (3) |
1/19/1983 |
|
In accordance with Section IX, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda, where impact testing is required, is it permissible to exceed the maximum specified interpass temperature on the WPS in the welding of the test coupon for qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5456 |
| IX-83-41 |
Section IX, Q-11(b)(3), 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda |
Q-11 (b) (3) |
1/19/1983 |
|
In accordance with Section IX, 1971 Edition, Winter 1973 Addenda, Q-11(b)(3), if the original WPS does not specify maximum interpass temperature, would the insertion on the WPS of the measured temperature encountered during qualification be in violation of Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5456 |
| IX-83-42 |
Section IX, QW-310.4 |
QW-310.4 |
1/19/1983 |
|
A welder is qualified to a qualified welding procedure (SMAW) process, to weld P-No. 5 to P-No. 5 base metal, using an F-No. 4 filler metal. By virtue of this qualification and the provisions of QW-310.4, is the noted welder qualified to weld P-No. 1 to P-No. 1 base metal (SMAW) process, using F-No. 4 filler metal (all other performance essential variables being the same, i.e., position, thickness, etc.)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5457 |
| IX-83-42 |
Section IX, QW-310.4 |
QW-310.4 |
1/19/1983 |
|
Is the data contained on the required Performance Qualification Record (WPQ), which was generated as proof of the welder's qualification for welding P-No. 5 to P-No. 5, considered to be acceptable proof of qualification for welding P-No. 1 to P-No. 1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5457 |
| IX-83-43 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
1/19/1983 |
|
Does QW-451.1, Note (3), permit either side or face and root bends for coupon thicknesses of 1/16 in. to 3/8 in., inclusive? |
No. See revision of Note (3) published in the Winter 1982 Addenda to Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5458 |
| IX-83-43 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
1/19/1983 |
|
A test coupon has GTAW root and SMAW fill. How many and what type of bend tests are required to meet QW-451.1, Note (4)(c)? |
For one or two processes, two root and two face bends or four side bends are required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5458 |
| IX-83-43 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
1/19/1983 |
|
A test coupon is made with three or more processes. How many and what type of bend tests are required to meet QW-451.1, Note 4(c)? |
Four side bends. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5458 |
| IX-83-44 |
Section IX, QW-461.9 |
QW-461.9 |
1/19/1983 |
|
Must the range of diameters of pipe to be welded in production be listed on the WPS? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5459 |
| IX-83-44 |
Section IX, QW-461.9 |
QW-461.9 |
1/19/1983 |
|
Does QW-461.9 define the limits of production positions qualified for procedure qualification? |
No. QW-461.9 applies to performance qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5459 |
| IX-83-44 |
Section IX, QW-461.9 |
QW-461.9 |
1/19/1983 |
|
Must the position of welding be defined in the WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5459 |
| IX-83-45 |
Section IX, Welding of Non-Code Materials |
|
1/20/1983 |
|
Does a non-Code material, such as AISI 1018, used for attachments to vessel walls constructed of materials which are Code materials, such as P-No. 1, require a separate procedure qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5460 |
| IX-83-46 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
3/11/1983 |
|
If a particular submerged-arc wire/flux combination does not conform to an SFA specification classification, may one use that wire/flux combination, and by what paragraph? |
Yes, by the provisions of QW-404.5 which requires an A-Number or the nominal chemical composition of the weld deposit to be stated. This composition may also be designated by the manufacturer's trade designation, AWS classification, or established procurement documents. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5461 |
| IX-83-46 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
3/11/1983 |
|
If a particular submerged-arc wire/flux combination does not conform to an SFA, may the user perform the test required by the appropriate SFA specification, and then consider the combination to be classified? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5461 |
| IX-83-46 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
3/11/1983 |
|
If a particular submerged-arc wire/flux combination is used for procedure qualification, that combination is recorded on the PQR by manufacturer's trade name, and the WPS limits welding to that particular wire/flux combination by manufacturer's trade name, must the SFA specification classification, F-Number, and A-Number be recorded on the PQR and WPS? |
No, provided the requirements of QW-404.4 and QW-404.5 are met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5461 |
| IX-83-46 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
3/11/1983 |
|
The previous edition of SFA 5.17 and 5.23 do not indicate the "as-welded" or "heat treated" condition as part of the wire/flux classification. May the old designations be used on new WPS's or new PQR's? |
The old designation may be used on new WPS's supported by old PQR's. The old designation may not be used on new PQR's or WPS's supported by them. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5461 |
| IX-83-46 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
3/11/1983 |
|
In the latest edition of SFA 5.23, the heat treatment condition for the filler metal is specified for various classifications. Must the WPS designate this same heat treatment, or may other heat treatments described in QW-407.1 be specified? |
The heat treatments specified in SFA 5.23 are for classification of filler metal only, and they have no relationship to heat treatment specified in a WPS or qualified in a PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5461 |
| IX-83-47 |
Section IX, QW-404.13 |
QW-404.13 |
3/11/1983 |
|
Does the combination of the below two PQR's support a new WPS covering GTAW welding of plate thickness 1/6 in. to 2 in. using open butt groove joint?
Variable WPS No. 1 WPS No. 2
Joint Open groove Open groove
Root Consumable insert F-No. 6 ERXXX
Remainder F-No. 6 ERXXX F-No. 6 ERXXX
Base metal thickness 1 in. 1/4 in.
Base metal limits 3/16 in. to 2 in. 1/16 in. to ½ in.
Tee-weld thickness 3/16 in. to 2 in. 1/16 in. to ½ in. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5462 |
| IX-83-48 |
Section IX, QW-214.1 |
QW-214.1 |
3/11/1983 |
|
Can a qualification done on a 4-3/4 in. (120 mm) plate in accordance with QW-214.1 be used to clad on production base metal of 1-5/8 in. (42 mm), 2 in. (52 mm), and 4 in. (100 mm)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5463 |
| IX-83-48 |
Section IX, QW-214.1 |
QW-214.1 |
3/11/1983 |
|
What is the maximum production base metal thickness on which this procedure can be used? |
There is no maximum thickness limit. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5463 |
| IX-83-49 |
Section IX, QB-402.3 |
QB-402.3 |
3/11/1983 |
|
Is the thickness range (as stated in QB-402.3) of a Brazing Procedure Specification (BPS) to be used on a piping or tubing system, applicable only to piping or tubing, or does it also apply to the fittings (elbows, tees, etc.) and components (valve, filters, etc.) used in the socket type (lap) connections of that system? |
No, the thickness range also applies to fittings and components. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5464 |
| IX-83-50 |
Section IX, QW-405.2 |
QW-405.2 |
3/11/1983 |
|
We are required to fabricate 18 in. diameter pipe manufactured from plate of A-537 to A-710 metal. Will the following qualifying conditions meet the requirements of QW-405.2 for all position welding where impacts are required, provided all other variables remain the same?
Joint - open butt groove
Plate - A-537 to A-710
Position - 3G
Root- E7010, G downhill
Hot pass - E7010, G downhill
Remainder- E8018, C3 uphill |
Yes, except the E7010G passes are not qualified for vertical uphill progression. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5465 |
| IX-83-51 |
Section IX, QW-466 |
QW-466 |
3/11/1983 |
|
QW-466 gives several diagrams of devices for bending of bend test specimens. May any device which bends the specimen around a radius as small as that required by the tables in QW-466 be used, provided the entire weld is included in the bent portion? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5466 |
| IX-83-52 |
Section IX, QW-191 |
QW-191 |
3/11/1983 |
|
For welder/welding operator performance qualification coupons with nominal outside diameters of 3-1/2 in, (89 mm) or less, is it permissible to radiograph the circumferential butt weld using a double-wall technique, single-wall viewing with a source side penetrameter placed on the I.D. of the pipe? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5467 |
| IX-83-52 |
Section IX, QW-191 |
QW-191 |
3/11/1983 |
|
For welder/welding operator performance coupons with nominal outside diameters of 3-1/2 in, (89 mm) or less, is it permissible to radiograph the circumferential butt weld using a double-wall offset technique, double-wall viewing with a source side penetrameter placed on the outside of the coupon, opposite the film? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5467 |
| IX-83-53 |
Section IX, QW-484 and QW-461.9 |
QW-484; QW-461.9 |
3/11/1983 |
|
Is it a Section IX requirement that welders are not allowed to weld in qualified position unless all of the qualified positions are indicated on the manufacturer's records of welder qualification test as shown in QW-484? |
No, the actual test position in which qualification was done shall be recorded on the Performance Qualification Record. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5468 |
| IX-83-54 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(b) |
QW-200.2(b) |
3/11/1983 |
|
Is it permissible to revise a WPS which utilizes SMAW or GTAW, and change the current and/or voltage range(s) outside of the limitations of the original WPS and outside of the current and/or voltage range(s) recorded on the applicable Procedure Qualification Record, without performing an additional procedure qualification test (supplementary essential variables are not a factor of this inquiry)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5469 |
| IX-83-55 |
Section IX, QW-351 |
QW-351 |
3/11/1983 |
|
Based on the qualification under the two conditions below, is the welder qualified to weld over 1 in. diameter pipe using F-No. 1 through F-No. 4 electrodes by the SMAW process?
Variable Condition 1 Condition 2
Joint Open groove Open groove
Backing None Argon gas
Base metal A-53 P-No. 1 A-335 P-No. 22
Diameter 5 in. Sch. 60(.432) 2 in. Sch. 40(.219)
Electrode F-No. 4 E7018 F-No. 5 E309
Position 6G 6G |
Yes, provided the pipe O.D. is 2-7/8 in. or greater. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5470 |
| IX-83-55 |
Section IX, QW-351 |
QW-351 |
3/11/1983 |
|
Based on the qualification under the two conditions shown in Question (1), is the welder qualified to deposit F-No. 5 weld metal to a thickness of 0.864 in. by the SMAW process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5470 |
| IX-83-56 |
Section IX, QW-403.11 |
QW-403.11 |
3/11/1983 |
|
A Welding Procedure Specification has been developed joining P-No. 4 to P-No. 5. Will this procedure qualification test also qualify a welding procedure using identical essential variables for welding P-No. 4 to P-No. 4 materials? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5471 |
| IX-83-57 |
Section IX, QW-304 |
QW-304 |
3/11/1983 |
|
Does QW-304 limit the use of radiographic examination for qualification using GMAW to those electrodes designated as SFA-5.18? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5472 |
| IX-83-58 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
3/11/1983 |
|
What is the definition of the word "process" as it is used in QW-322? |
The word "process" refers to those welding processes for which welding variables have been established in QW-350 and QW-360. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5473 |
| IX-83-59 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
3/14/1983 |
|
Is it permissible to change designators ("X's") within a classification in Table 4 in SFA-5.17, and Table 7 in SFA-5.23, without requalifying the procedures? An example of this would be changing from F7AZ-EM12K to F7AZ-EM13K? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5474 |
| IX-83-60 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
6/1/1983 |
|
For guided-bend specimens, corner cracks of what length are permitted? |
Corner cracks may be of any length. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5475 |
| IX-83-60 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
6/1/1983 |
|
For guided-bend specimens, are corner cracks originating from a defect acceptable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5475 |
| IX-83-60 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
6/1/1983 |
|
For guided-bend specimens, should corner cracks originating from a defect be considered? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5475 |
| IX-83-60 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
6/1/1983 |
|
For guided-bend specimens, what is the acceptance criteria for corner cracks on corrosion-resistance overlay? |
1/16 in.
Note: In the original letter of March 14, 1983, sent to the inquirer, Reply (4) read incorrectly as 1/6 in., rather than 1/16 in. as shown above. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5475 |
| IX-83-60 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
6/1/1983 |
|
Is grinding of corrosion-resistant overlay weld ripples on weld specimens acceptable? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5475 |
| IX-83-60 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
6/1/1983 |
|
Is cold straightening of overlay bend specimens objectionable? |
Section IX neither requires nor prohibits cold straightening. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5475 |
| IX-83-61 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
3/14/1983 |
|
Does QW-404.9 allow a change of electrode classification for the electrodes listed in SFA-5.9 without requalification of the procedure, provided the flux does not change? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5476 |
| IX-83-62 |
Section III, Division 1, - NX-4331, Conformance to Section IX Requirements; NX-4362, Essential Variables for Automatic and Semiautomatic Welding |
|
3/28/1983 |
|
Is it permissible when qualifying welding of specially designed seals to the requirements of Section III, NB-4362, to use types of base metal specifications listed in QW-422 of Section IX for grouping of P-Number base metals for qualifications? |
No, P-Number equivalents may not be used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5477 |
| IX-83-62 |
Section III, Division 1, - NX-4331, Conformance to Section IX Requirements; NX-4362, Essential Variables for Automatic and Semiautomatic Welding |
|
3/28/1983 |
|
When qualifying a welding procedure, do the requirements of Section IX have precedence over the requirements of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code? |
No, a welding procedure is qualified in accordance with Section IX as supplemented or modified by NX-4000. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5477 |
| IX-83-62 |
Section III, Division 1, - NX-4331, Conformance to Section IX Requirements; NX-4362, Essential Variables for Automatic and Semiautomatic Welding |
|
3/28/1983 |
|
Is it permissible to use SA-213 Type 304 and SA-312 Type 304 material for qualification tests in lieu of SA-182 F-304 and SA-336 F-304 for seal weld qualification when SA-336 F-304 and SA-182 F-304 are the materials that will be used in the production weld? |
Yes.
Note: This Interpretation also appears as III-1-83-104. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5477 |
| IX-83-63 |
Section IX, SMAW Performance Qualification |
|
5/9/1983 |
|
A welder is qualified welding P-No. 5 to P-No. 5 with the SMAW process and F-No. 4 filler metal. Is this welder qualified to weld P-No. 1 to P-No. 1 metal using the SMAW process and F-No. 4 filler metal? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5478 |
| IX-83-64 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
5/9/1983 |
|
A 1-1/2 in. thick double V-groove joint test coupon was welded using SMAW for 3/4 in. and GTAW for 3/4 in. What is the range of base metal qualified? |
Per QW-451, the range of base metal qualified is 3/16 in. to 8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5479 |
| IX-83-64 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
5/9/1983 |
|
What is the range of deposited weld metal qualified for each process? |
Per QW-451, the maximum range of deposited weld metal qualified is 8 in. with no minimum limitation. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5479 |
| IX-83-65 |
Section IX, QW-462.1(a) |
QW-462.1(a) |
5/9/1983 |
|
QW-151.1 states that the reduced-section specimen conforming to QW-462.1(a) may be used for tension tests. It goes on to state: "A single specimen of full-plate thickness shall be used for thicknesses up to and including 1 in." If the original thickness of a test coupon is measured to be 0.500 in., is a test specimen prepared according to QW-462.1 (a) and measured to be 0.499 in. thick acceptable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5480 |
| IX-83-66 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 and QW-452.3 |
QW-452.1; QW-452.3 |
5/10/1983 |
|
Can pipe groove qualification per QW-452.3 and thickness limit qualification per QW-452.1 be combined to qualify a welder over 1 in. O.D. and thickness range 1/16 in. to unlimited for a process, if a welder has been qualified on 2 in. Schedule 80 and 6 in. Schedule XXH for that process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5481 |
| IX-83-67 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
5/10/1983 |
|
For pressure vessels constructed in accordance with Section VIII, Division 1, what type of performance qualification should be made when qualifying a welding operator with a tube end welding gun? |
At the present time, Section IX has no special performance qualification requirements for welding operators to make tube-to-tubesheet welds with a tube end welding gun. See QW-361. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5482 |
| IX-83-68 |
Section IX, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
6/27/1983 |
|
A contractor's association desires to standardize procedure and performance qualification such that, after initial qualification, a welder can transfer from one organization to another without requalification. Is this acceptable under the requirements of QW-201? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5483 |
| IX-83-69 |
Section IX, QW-410.25 |
QW-410.25 |
6/27/1983 |
|
QW-410.25 states: "A change from manual or semiautomatic to machine or automatic welding and vice versa." This variable is a nonessential variable for procedure when using the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, and GTAW processes. Should this also be an essential variable for performance for these processes? |
No. QW-492 gives definitions for both welders and welding operators. These definitions, in conjunction with the requirements of Article III, provide separate performance qualification requirements for welders and welding operators. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5484 |
| IX-83-70 |
Section IX, QW-310.5(c) |
QW-310.5(c) |
6/27/1983 |
|
A manufacturer has qualified WPS for welding P-Nos. 41 through 45 with the SMAW process using the appropriate filler metals. May a welder be qualified using the SMAW process for welding P-Nos. 41 through 45 by welding a test coupon of these P-Numbers or combinations thereof, or P-No. 1 welded to itself or to any of the above P-Numbers using the filler metal of the qualified WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5485 |
| IX-83-71 |
Section IX, QW-402.10 |
QW-402.10 |
6/28/1983 |
|
A procedure was qualified using a carbon steel material which was welded using the SMAW process on a double-welded butt joint. The qualified procedure specified a range of root gaps from 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm. During production welding, the root gap is sometimes less than the range indicated on the WPS. Must the procedure be requalified to include these root gaps less than 1.5 mm.? |
No. However, since QW-402.10 is a nonessential variable for the SMAW process, the original WPS must be revised or a new WPS written to encompass these root gaps. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5486 |
| IX-83-72 |
Section IX, QW-200.2 |
QW-200.2 |
6/28/1983 |
|
When qualifying a Welding Procedure Specification, may the welding of the test coupons be done by more than one welder? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5487 |
| IX-83-73 |
Section IX, QW-466.1 |
QW-466.1 |
6/29/1983 |
|
For WPS qualification of F-No. 35 weld metal on P-No. 1 base metal (QW-214), is the minimum required thickness of the side-bend specimen 3/8 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5488 |
| IX-83-74 |
Section IX, QW-466.1 |
QW-466.1 |
6/29/1983 |
|
For WPS qualification of F-No. 35 weld metal on P-No. 1 metal (QW-214), is the maximum mandrel diameter of 6-2/3 t (2½ in.) used for the side-bend tests in QW-466.1, QW-466.2, and QW-466.3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5489 |
| IX-83-75 |
Section IX, QW-463.2(g) |
QW-463.2(g) |
6/29/1983 |
|
Is it permissible, when conducting a performance qualification test using the test assembly shown in QW-463.2(g), to weld the fixed vertical (2G) portion of the test between the 270 deg. and 360 deg. reference lines instead of the 225 deg. through 315 deg. reference lines? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5490 |
| IX-83-76 |
Section IX, QB-463, QB-181, QB-452.1, Note (1), and QB-141.4 |
QB-463; QB-181; QB-452.1; QB-141.4 |
6/29/1983 |
|
QB-463.1 (e) and QB-463.2(c) state: "For coupons 3 in. O.D. or less, two coupons are required for peel or section tests. One specimen shall be removed from each coupon." Does this mean there shall be two horizontal and two vertical coupons, altogether four specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5491 |
| IX-83-76 |
Section IX, QB-463, QB-181, QB-452.1, Note (1), and QB-141.4 |
QB-463; QB-181; QB-452.1; QB-141.4 |
6/29/1983 |
|
QB-181, last sentence, states: "The sum of the length of unbrazed areas on either side, considered individually, shall not exceed 20% of the length of the joint overlap." If there are four specimens, as per above, then should there be eight percentages that do not exceed 20%? In other words, will there be twice as many percentages as specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5491 |
| IX-83-77 |
Section IX, QW-351 |
QW-351 |
9/19/1983 |
|
Can weld reinforcement be considered for determining the test coupon thickness (or deposited weld metal thickness) per QW-351? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5492 |
| IX-83-78 |
Section IX, Tables QW-450 vs Fig. QW-461 |
QW-450; QW-461 |
9/19/1983 |
|
In QW-451 and QW-452, does t apply to the actual weld metal thickness deposited in a test coupon or does it apply to the specimen thickness shown in QW-462? |
As used in QW-451 and QW-452, t applies to the deposited weld metal thickness within the thickness T of the test coupon. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5493 |
| IX-83-79 |
Section IX, QW-251.2 |
QW-251.2 |
9/19/1983 |
|
A welding procedure has been previously qualified to satisfy all requirements, including notch toughness in the weld and heat affected zone. When there is a change in the supplementary essential variables, is it necessary only to prepare an additional test coupon with the plate only long enough to provide necessary notch-toughness specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5494 |
| IX-83-80 |
Section IX, QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
9/19/1983 |
|
Do the requirements of Section IX allow the welding of combined production joints when the individual processes are qualified separately but one process has a qualified base metal maximum thickness less than the production base metal thickness? |
No. See QW-200.4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5495 |
| IX-83-81 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
9/19/1983 |
|
In the Winter 1982 Addenda to Section IX, the minimum values for "Thickness t of Deposited Weld Metal Qualified" in QW-451.1 were deleted. Does this mean there are no minimum thickness qualifications for deposited weld metal? |
When determining the minimum thickness qualifications per QW-451.1, Notes (1) and (2) must also be considered. In those cases where the further limitation of these Notes does not apply, there is no limit on the minimum thickness qualification. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5496 |
| IX-83-81 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
9/19/1983 |
|
If impact tests are required for an SMAW procedure qualification, may the thickness limitations of Note (1) of QW-451.1 be overridden in determining the minimum deposited weld metal thickness qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5496 |
| IX-83-82 |
Section IX, QW-400 |
QW-400 |
9/20/1983 |
|
Are the requirements of QW-403.7 met by bend testing in accordance with QW-451.2? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5497 |
| IX-83-82 |
Section IX, QW-400 |
QW-400 |
9/20/1983 |
|
If a WPS was qualified for fillet welds only to the requirements of QW-451.3, would the variables of QW-403.6, QW-403.9, and QW-403.10 apply if they were made mandatory by the use of the applicable processes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5497 |
| IX-83-82 |
Section IX, QW-400 |
QW-400 |
9/20/1983 |
|
Do the requirements of QW-405.2 apply to fillet welds made in the vertical position uphill progression (when welding in the 3F or 5F position)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5497 |
| IX-83-82 |
Section IX, QW-400 |
QW-400 |
9/20/1983 |
|
Do the requirements of QW-406.2 pertain to preheat temperature during welding, and after welding is complete and prior to postweld heat treatment? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5497 |
| IX-83-82 |
Section IX, QW-400 |
QW-400 |
9/20/1983 |
|
When QW-404.12 is referenced as a supplementary essential variable, is requalification required of an SMAW procedure qualified using an SFA-5.5, E7018-A1 electrode when an SFA-5.5, E7018-C2L electrode is substituted? |
Yes. See QW-404.5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5497 |
| IX-83-82 |
Section IX, QW-400 |
QW-400 |
9/20/1983 |
|
When QW-404.12 is referenced as a supplementary essential variable, is requalification required of an SMAW procedure qualified using an SFA-5.5, E7018-XX electrode when an SFA-5.5, E8018-XX electrode is substituted? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5497 |
| IX-83-82 |
Section IX, QW-400 |
QW-400 |
9/20/1983 |
|
When QW-404.12 is referenced as a supplementary essential variable, is requalification required of an SMAW procedure qualified using an SFA-5.1, EXX18 electrode and an SFA-5.5, EXX18-XX electrode is substituted? |
Yes, except where permitted by QW-404.5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5497 |
| IX-83-83 |
Section IX, Combination Weld Qualifications |
|
9/20/1983 |
|
A combination weld is made on a 3/4 in. thick double-Vee groove-welded test coupon using 1/4 in. GTAW at the root of the double-Vee groove. This weld is completed using 1/4 in. SMAW on one side of the double-Vee groove weld and 1/4 in. SMAW on the second side, all other variables remaining the same. What is the maximum deposited weld metal thickness qualified for each process for both procedure and performance qualification? |
For the GTAW process, the maximum is 1/2 in., and for the SMAW process, the maximum is 1 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5498 |
| IX-83-84 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
9/20/1983 |
|
In accordance with QW-404.9, does a change in the wire classification, with no change in the flux composition, F-Number, or A-Number, require requalification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5499 |
| IX-83-85 |
Section IX, SI Units in a WPS and PQR |
|
9/29/1983 |
|
Excluding Manufacturer's Data Reports, is it permitted to use SI Units in manufacturer's documents such as WPS's and PQR's without the accompanying U.S. Customary Units? |
Yes. While the Code does not address this subject, it has been an accepted practice. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5500 |
| IX-83-86 |
Section IX, QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
11/21/1983 |
|
Does a Welding Procedure Qualification made with non-normalized base metal of SA-516 specification also qualify for use of normalized base metal of SA-516, or vice versa? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5501 |
| IX-83-87 |
Section IX, Use of Base Metal as a Filler Metal |
QW-404.4 |
11/21/1983 |
|
Is it acceptable to qualify a WPS in accordance with Section IX using a base metal as a filler metal? |
Yes. See QW-404.4 |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5502 |
| IX-83-88 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 and QW-452.1 |
QW-451.1; QW-452.1 |
11/21/1983 |
|
If the deposited weld metal thickness qualification limitations are changed in Section IX, may earlier qualification thickness limits be revised on the WPS to conform to the new requirements? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5503 |
| IX-83-89 |
Section IX, QW-404.14 |
QW-404.14 |
11/21/1983 |
|
Is it permissible to remelt the cover pass of a completed SMAW weld using the GTAW process without the addition of filler metal? The WPS for the GTAW process was qualified using filler metal. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5504 |
| IX-83-89 |
Section IX, QW-404.14 |
QW-404.14 |
11/21/1983 |
|
A GTAW process has been qualified with the addition of filler metal. Is it permissible to weld the root of a groove weld using the GTAW process without the addition of filler metal? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5504 |
| IX-83-90 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
11/21/1983 |
|
Can a double-beveled plate, 1 in. thick with each beveled groove being of 1/2 in., be welded by a welder qualified to weld a weld metal deposit of 0.864 in.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5505 |
| IX-83-90 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
11/21/1983 |
|
Can the same joint as above be welded by two individual welders, each with a deposited weld metal qualification of 0.864 in., provided each welder does not exceed 0.864 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5505 |
| IX-83-91 |
Section IX, QW-304 |
QW-304 |
11/21/1983 |
|
When qualifying a welder using radiographic examination, as permitted in QW-304, do the qualified thickness ranges in QW-452.1 apply? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5506 |
| IX-83-92 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
11/21/1983 |
|
A procedure has been qualified to satisfy all requirements, including notch toughness, for welding P-No.1, Gr-No.1 to P-No.1, Gr-No.1 base metals. Is it necessary to make a procedure qualification test to determine notch toughness only (QW-401.3) for welding P-No.1, Gr-No. 2 to P-No.1, Gr-No. 2 base metals, with all other essential variables the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5507 |
| IX-83-93 |
Section IX, Butt Weld Repair |
|
11/21/1983 |
|
A groove-weld procedure has been qualified for base metal and deposited weld metal thicknesses of 0.644 in. It is necessary to make a weld repair of 0.438 in. on a 2 in. thick base metal. Is it necessary to requalify the procedure in accordance with Section IX for the 2 in. thick base metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5508 |
| IX-83-94 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
1/13/1984 |
|
Is the procedure qualification thickness in QW-451.1 based on the test coupon thickness and not on the test specimen thickness? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5509 |
| IX-83-95 |
Section IX, QW-151.2(d) and QW-462.1(e) |
QW-151.2(d); QW-462.1(e) |
1/13/1984 |
|
When QW-462.1(e) is utilized for tensile testing of pipe equal to or less than 3 in. O.D., are multiple tensile specimens required? |
Yes. See QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5510 |
| IX-83-96 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
1/13/1984 |
|
Would a WPS which was qualified in December 1977 using a flux classification of F70-EL12 require requalification if the flux classification were changed to any of the following: F70-EM12K, F72-EM12K, or F74-EM12K (provided no other variables are changed and notch toughness is not a factor)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5511 |
| IX-83-96 |
Section IX, QW-404.9 |
QW-404.9 |
1/13/1984 |
|
Will one PQR (P-No.1 Gr. No. 2 to itself; see PQR No.1 below) meeting notch-toughness requirements of Section VIII, Division 1, and Section IX support three WPS's (WPS Nos. 1, 2, and 3 below) when all three specify the same essential, supplemental essential, and nonessential variables, except group numbers, as the one followed in welding the procedure qualification test coupon (WPS No. 1)?
PQR No. 1 -- P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 to itself
WPS No. 1 -- P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 to itself
WPS No. 2 -- P-No. 1 Gr. No. 1 to itself
WPS No. 3 -- P-No. 1 Gr. No. 1 to P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5511 |
| IX-86-50 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
11/24/1986 |
|
A welding operator qualified for GTAW on groove welds has let his qualification lapse. The welding operator is subsequently qualified for GTAW corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay cladding. Does this subsequent qualification renew the welding operator's qualification for GTAW of groove welds? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5512 |
| IX-86-51 |
Section IX, QW-350 |
QW-350 |
11/24/1986 |
|
Per QW-403.18, is a welder who qualified on P-No. 1 base metal also qualified on P-No. 1 through P-No. 11 and P-No. 4x base metal where all other performance essential variables are constant? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5513 |
| IX-83-97 |
Section IX, QW-404.13 and QW-403.8 |
QW-404.13; QW-403.8 |
1/13/1984 |
|
Does the combination of the two PQR's below support a new WPS covering the GTAW welding of the root pass in an open single-Vee or single-J groove weld for the base metal thickness range 1/16 in. to 8 in.?
Variable PQR No. 1 PQR No. 2
Joint Single-J groove Single-Vee groove
Root layer Consumable insert F-No. 6 ERXXX
Second layer F-No. 6 ERXXX [Note (1)] F-No. 6 ERXXX
Remainder SMAW F-No. 6 ERXXX
Base metal 2.10 in. 0.28 in.
Base metal limit T 3/16 in. to 8 in. 1/16 in. to 0.56 in.
Deposited weld metal t
GTAW 3/8 in. max. 0.56 in. max.
SMAW 8 in. max.
NOTE: (1) Combined thickness of consumable insert and second layer is 3/16 in. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5514 |
| IX-83-98 |
Section IX, QW-303.1 |
QW-303.1 |
1/13/1984 |
|
Is a welder who qualifies on plate in the 3G and 4G positions qualified to weld all diameters of tubing/pipe fillet welds? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5515 |
| IX-83-99 |
Section IX, QW-100.3 |
QW-100.3 |
1/13/1984 |
|
In 1983 a PQR was generated by qualifying a WPS to the 1977 Edition of Section IX. Can this WPS be used for fabrication meeting the requirements of the 1983 Edition of Section IX? |
Yes, provided the PQR and WPS meet all the requirements of the 1983 Edition of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5516 |
| IX-86-01 |
Section IX, QW-200.4(a) |
QW-200.4(a) |
9/19/1985 |
|
Per QW-200.4(a), Summer 1984 Addenda, when a qualified WPS for a combination process is available, must a new WPS be generated if only one of the processes is to be used in production, provided all requirements of Section IX for the process used are met? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5517 |
| IX-86-02 |
Section IX, QB-203.1 and QB-461 |
QB-203.1; QB-461 |
9/19/1985 |
|
In accordance with QB-203.1, does qualification in any of the three flow positions (flat-flow, horizontal-flow, or vertical-upflow) qualify for the vertical-downflow position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5518 |
| IX-86-02 |
Section IX, QB-203.1 and QB-461 |
QB-203.1; QB-461 |
9/19/1985 |
|
In accordance with QB-461, a pipe brazing qualification is in a fixed horizontal position. Does this limit the qualification to a flat-flow position, even though there is still a significant area that is, in fact, horizontal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5518 |
| IX-86-02 |
Section IX, QB-203.1 and QB-461 |
QB-203.1; QB-461 |
9/19/1985 |
|
Does a pipe brazing qualification in a fixed horizontal position qualify for both flat-and horizontal-flow? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5518 |
| IX-86-03 |
Section IX, QW-404 |
QW-404 |
9/19/1985 |
|
May welding rods, electrodes, and filler metals not identified as meeting an SFA specification be assigned F-Numbers, provided the materials meet another specification in which the mechanical and chemical properties are the same as specified in a SFA specification of Section II, Part C? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5519 |
| IX-86-04 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
9/19/1985 |
|
Does it meet the requirements of Section IX to specify in the WPS that preheat and postweld heat treatment shall be in accordance with the requirements of UCS-56? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5520 |
| IX-86-05 |
Section IX, QW-300.1 |
QW-300.1 |
9/19/1985 |
|
When qualifying a welding operator and recording the essential variables on his record of qualification, is the thickness of base metal or deposited weld metal an essential variable? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5521 |
| IX-86-06 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(f) and QW-200.4 |
QW-200.2(f); QW-200.4 |
9/19/1985 |
|
Does the combination of 2 PQRs, each of different processes, support a WPS combining the two processes in a single joint, with all essential and supplementary essential variables unchanged? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5522 |
| IX-86-07 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
12/2/1985 |
|
A welder or welding operator's qualification for a process has expired because he has not welded within the time periods required by QW-322(a) and (b). There is no specific reason to question his ability to make welds that meet the specification. Does QW-322 prohibit the use of QW-321 for retest of qualification where a welder has failed the single renewal test joint as provided by the last sentence of QW-322? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5523 |
| IX-86-08 |
Section IX, QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
12/4/1985 |
|
Per QW-200.4(a), may two or more separate WPSs (each properly qualified to weld the joint individually) be used to weld a single production joint without writing a new WPS combining the separate WPSs into a single WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5524 |
| IX-86-08 |
Section IX, QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
12/4/1985 |
|
Does QW-200.4(a) permit the referencing of a separately qualified WPS to cover the root pass welding of open root joints in another WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5524 |
| IX-86-09 |
Section IX, QW-462 |
QW-462 |
12/4/1985 |
|
When a transverse tensile test specimen fractures partly in the weld metal and partly in the base metal, should both locations of fracture be described on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5525 |
| IX-86-09 |
Section IX, QW-462 |
QW-462 |
12/4/1985 |
|
When a transverse tensile test specimen fractures partly in the weld metal and partly in the base metal, does QW-153.1(d) apply? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5525 |
| IX-86-10 |
Section IX, Contents of the WPS |
|
12/4/1985 |
|
Does a Welding Procedure Specification with an open root butt and fillet weld joint design require specifying backing material? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5526 |
| IX-86-11 |
Section IX, QB-408.2 |
QB-408.2 |
12/4/1985 |
|
Does QB-408.2 require that test specimens must be brazed with joint clearance dimensions representing minimum and maximum joint clearance intended to be used? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5527 |
| IX-86-12 |
Section IX, QW-355 |
QW-355 |
12/4/1985 |
|
Is FCAW included with GMAW in QW-355? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5528 |
| IX-86-13 |
Section IX, QW-301.4 |
QW-301.4 |
12/4/1985 |
|
For welder qualifications using combinations of GTAW root passes and SMAW fill passes, is it necessary to specifically record the use of backing for the SMAW passes on the welder qualification record when the WPS used is referenced on the qualification record and the WPS describes the GTAW deposit as backing for the SMAW? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5529 |
| IX-86-14 |
Section IX, QW-482 and QW-483 |
QW-482; QW-483 |
3/13/1986 |
|
Is it acceptable to indicate on the WPS and PQR that the variable QW-407.1 is addressed by indicating the letters "NA" to mean PWHT is not used? |
Section IX does not specify the terminology to be used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5530 |
| IX-86-15 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
3/13/1986 |
|
A WPS has been qualified to satisfy all requirements, including notch toughness, for welding P-No. 1 Gr. No. 1 base metals. Another WPS has been qualified to satisfy all requirements, including notch toughness, for welding P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 base metals. If all the variables, except for the change in base metal group number in the two WPSs are the same, may a third WPS be written to permit welding of P-No. 1 Gr. No. 1 to P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 base metals using the PQRs from the first two WPSs to support the third WPS without additional qualification for the change in base metal group numbers? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5531 |
| IX-86-53 |
Section IX, Brazing Procedure Qualification |
|
11/24/1986 |
|
May a brazing procedure be qualified by a proof test to failure? For example, but not limited to UG-101(m) proof test, of actual parts, or vessels as unique joints? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5532 |
| IX-86-55 |
Section IX, QW-410.7 |
QW-410.7 |
11/24/1986 |
|
Can a PQR using manual GTAW, where the parameters of QW-410.7 were not recorded, support a WPS for machine GTAW where notch toughness and QW-410.7 are required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5533 |
| IX-86-56 |
Section IX, QW-202.3 |
QW-202.3 |
11/24/1986 |
|
May a qualified SAW (strip technique)/FCAW combination procedure be utilized for base metal buildup as indicated in QW-200.4 and QW-202.3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5534 |
| IX-86-16 |
Section IX, QW-492 |
QW-492 |
3/13/1986 |
|
According to QW-492, can the definition of an active flux be interpreted to mean a flux which contains an alloying element(s) which is transmitted to the weld metal and will affect the properties which the weld metal is considered to possess, as a result of changes in the welding parameters (welding amperage and arc voltage)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5535 |
| IX-86-16 |
Section IX, QW-492 |
QW-492 |
3/13/1986 |
|
According to QW-492, can the definition of a neutral flux be interpreted to mean a flux which does not contain any alloying element or which contains an alloying element(s) which is transmitted to the weld metal but will not affect the properties which the weld metal is considered to possess, as a result of changes in the welding parameters (welding amperage and arc voltage)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5535 |
| IX-86-17 |
Section IX, QW-423 |
QW-423 |
3/13/1986 |
|
Does a welder need to requalify to weld AISI 4140 to API N-80 materials if he is qualified in the same process using P-No. 1 through P-No. 11 test plates? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5536 |
| IX-86-18 |
Section IX, QW-194.1 |
QW-194.1 |
3/13/1986 |
|
In QW-194.1, is it permitted to use a welding procedure qualified using P-No. 1 base material buttered with F-No. 43 filler material joining a P-No. 8 base material to support a welding procedure that will join P-No. 43 base material to P-No. 8 base material? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5537 |
| IX-86-19 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
3/13/1986 |
|
May a welder renew his SMAW qualifications in accordance with QW-322 for his 6G position on a 5 in. Schedule 160 (0.625 in. wall thickness), after 7 months of work interruption, by welding a 3/8 in. coupon in the 1G position with SMAW? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5538 |
| IX-86-20 |
Section IX, QW-407 |
QW-407 |
3/13/1986 |
|
A P-No. 1 pipe is butt welded to a P-No. 8 pipe of the same size. For procedure qualification under QW-407, is "postheating" to 2150°F for the sole purpose of centrifugally casting a metallic liner in the welded pipe assembly considered to be "postweld heat treatment" above the upper transformation temperature? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5539 |
| IX-86-21 |
Section IX, QB-201.3 |
QB-201.3 |
3/13/1986 |
|
A brazing procedure qualification is conducted for a lap joint consisting of a 1/8 in. test coupon brazed to a 1/2 in. test coupon. Are the following ranges of thickness qualified: thick material: 3/16 in. to 1 in.; thin material: 1/16 in. to 1/4 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5540 |
| IX-86-21 |
Section IX, QB-201.3 |
QB-201.3 |
3/13/1986 |
|
Does the above procedure qualification support a BPS for brazing 1/16 in. material to 1/16 in. material? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5540 |
| IX-86-21 |
Section IX, QB-201.3 |
QB-201.3 |
3/13/1986 |
|
Does the procedure qualification in Question (1) support a BPS for brazing 1/4 in. material to 1/4 in. material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5540 |
| IX-86-22 |
Section IX, QB-408.2 |
QB-408.2 |
3/14/1986 |
|
In QB-408.2, does a change outside the "range specified on the BPS" require requalification of a brazing procedure? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5541 |
| IX-86-22 |
Section IX, QB-408.2 |
QB-408.2 |
3/14/1986 |
|
In QB-408.2, does a change from the exact joint clearance recorded on the PQR require requalification of the brazing procedure? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5541 |
| IX-86-24 |
Section IX, QW-301 and QW-320 |
QW-301; QW-320 |
5/30/1986 |
|
If a welder or welding operator fails to pass the renewal of qualification test of QW-322, does the failure constitute a specific reason under QW-322(c) to question his ability to make welds that meet the specification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5542 |
| IX-86-24 |
Section IX, QW-301 and QW-320 |
QW-301; QW-320 |
5/30/1986 |
|
A manufacturer has reason to question the ability of a welder or welding operator to make acceptable welds. Does Section IX permit the manufacturer to use the renewal of qualification test of QW-322 to ascertain his ability? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5542 |
| IX-86-24 |
Section IX, QW-301 and QW-320 |
QW-301; QW-320 |
5/30/1986 |
|
A manufacturer has reason to question the ability of a welder or welding operator to make acceptable welds. In order to demonstrate his ability to make welds that meet the specification, does Section IX require qualification in accordance with QW-301? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5542 |
| IX-86-26 |
Section IX, QW-256 and QW-410.26 |
QW-256; QW-410.26 |
5/30/1986 |
|
Does Section IX address the use of roll planishing to smooth the surface of welds in a stainless steel vessel? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5543 |
| IX-86-27 |
Section IX, QW-311 (New QW-381) |
QW-311; QW-381 |
5/30/1986 |
|
Using the SMAW process for corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay, is any maximum limit imposed by QW-311 on the thickness of overlay which a welder is qualified to deposit? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5544 |
| IX-86-25 |
Section IX, QW-300 and QW-301 |
QW-300; QW-301 |
5/30/1986 |
|
Per QW-300.2, may several contractors simultaneously conduct the performance qualification test(s) of a welder? |
Section IX does not address this situation. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5545 |
| IX-86-25 |
Section IX, QW-300 and QW-301 |
QW-300; QW-301 |
5/30/1986 |
|
Per QW-301.2, may a welder simultaneously weld performance qualification test coupons in accordance with the Welding Procedure Specification of several contractors when only the essential variables are documented as equivalent? |
Section IX does not address this situation. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5545 |
| IX-86-28 |
Section IX, Qualification Requirements for Fillet Weld Repairs |
|
5/30/1986 |
|
Do the performance qualification requirements of QW-303.1 and QW-452.6 apply when repairing fillet welds? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5546 |
| IX-86-28 |
Section IX, Qualification Requirements for Fillet Weld Repairs |
|
5/30/1986 |
|
Does the deposited weld metal thickness of QW-452.1 apply to fillet weld repairs? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5546 |
| IX-86-28 |
Section IX, Qualification Requirements for Fillet Weld Repairs |
|
5/30/1986 |
|
Do the procedure qualification requirements of QW-202.2(c) and QW-451.4 apply to the repair of fillet welds? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5546 |
| IX-86-28 |
Section IX, Qualification Requirements for Fillet Weld Repairs |
|
5/30/1986 |
|
Does QW-202.3 place an upper limit on base metal and deposited weld metal thickness for fillet weld repairs? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5546 |
| IX-86-31 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
9/23/1986 |
|
When welding a partial penetration nozzle joint detail similar to that shown in UW-16.1 sketch (q) of ASME Section VIII, Division 1, must the shell and reinforcing pad thickness be combined to determine the base metal thickness that must be qualified by a weld procedure in accordance with QW-451 of Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5547 |
| IX-86-31 |
Section IX, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
9/23/1986 |
|
When welding a full penetration nozzle joint detail utilizing a reinforcing pad plate, must the shell and reinforcing pad thickness be combined to determine the base metal thickness that must be qualified by a weld procedure in accordance with QW-451 of Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5547 |
| IX-86-42 |
Section IX, QW-163 and QW-200 |
QW-163; QW-200 |
9/23/1986 |
|
Do acceptable bend and tensile test results for the SMAW process of a combination GTAW/SMAW PQR support a SMAW procedure when the GTAW process test results are not acceptable? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5548 |
| IX-86-44 |
Section IX, QW-410.15 |
QW-410.15 |
9/23/1986 |
|
Does QW-410.15 apply to the distance between the electrode and the filler metal when using the GTAW process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5549 |
| IX-86-45 |
Section IX, QW-462.1(a) |
QW-462.1(a) |
9/23/1986 |
|
Do test specimens machined to QW-462.1(a) of the 1983 Edition of Section IX satisfy the requirements of the current edition of Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5550 |
| IX-86-46 |
Section IX, QW-355 |
QW-355 |
11/24/1986 |
|
Is a welder who is qualified using gas metal-arc welding (GMAW) also qualified for flux-cored arc welding (FCAW) or vice versa, provided the other variables for performance qualification remain unchanged? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5551 |
| IX-86-47 |
Section IX, QW-407.1(b) |
QW-407.1(b) |
11/24/1986 |
|
If a weld to P-No. 43 material is made without a PWHT, and subsequently the weld receives a heat treatment because of the PWHT of a nearby ferritic weld, does QW-407.1(b) require that a procedure qualification be conducted for P-No. 43 material using PWHT? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5552 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
A Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) for a single welded joint was qualified using 1/2 in. thick base metal. GTAW was used for the first 1/8 in., and SMAW for the remaining 3/8 in. Will this PQR support a Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for deposited weld metal thicknesses of 1/4 in. and less using GTAW? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
Will the PQR in Question (1) support a WPS for deposited weld metal thicknesses of 3/4 in. and less using SMAW? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
Will the PQR in Question (1) qualify a WPS for first using SMAW on 3/4 in. and less deposited weld metal thickness followed by GTAW on 1/4 in. and less deposited weld metal thickness? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
The welder who successfully welded the test coupon for the PQR in Question (1) is to be used to production weld. Is it necessary to qualify this welder so that he may use the WPS in Question (1) within the variables of QW-350? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
Is it necessary to qualify this welder so that he may use the WPS in Question (2), where the WPS uses backing, within the variables of QW-350? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
Is it necessary to qualify this welder so that he may use the WPS in Question (2) where the WPS does not have backing in a single-welded groove? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
Is it necessary to qualify this welder so that he may use the WPS in Question (3) in a single-welded joint? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
Is the GTAW weld deposit of the PQR considered the backing for the SMAW? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-23 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, QW-306, and QW-407.4 |
QW-200.4; QW-306; QW-407.4 |
3/21/1986 |
|
QW-407.5 uses the term "critical temperature range." Does critical temperature range mean above the upper transformation range? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5553 |
| IX-86-33 |
Section IX, QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
9/23/1986 |
|
When preparing a WPS and WPQ using the shielded metal arc welding process with different filler metals (E6010 and E7018), is it required to list the E6010 electrode as weld metal backing if this filler metal is removed after it has served its purpose for backing? The deposit weld metal for the E6010 is not subjected to the mechanical test required by QW-200.4. |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5554 |
| IX-86-34 |
Section IX, QW-302.2 |
QW-302.2 |
9/23/1986 |
|
One 1/2 in. NPS and one 3 in. NPS Schedule 40 pipe coupon are welded in the 2G position, and one 1/2 in. NPS and one 3 in. NPS Schedule 40 pipe coupon are welded in the 5G position using the GTAW process. If performance qualification is by radiography, is the welder qualified to weld 1/2 in. NPS diameter pipe up to a maximum deposited weld metal thickness of 2t? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5555 |
| IX-86-37 |
Section IX, QW-162.1 and QW-466.3 |
QW-162.1; QW-466.3 |
9/23/1986 |
|
In reference to QW-466.3, Note (c), are methods of restraint other than the one indicated acceptable as long as sliding of the specimen is prevented? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5556 |
| IX-86-37 |
Section IX, QW-162.1 and QW-466.3 |
QW-162.1; QW-466.3 |
9/23/1986 |
|
Note (d) of QW-466.3 implies that the roller moves relative to the axis of A with the clamp remaining in a fixed position. The same result is achieved if the clamp and A rotate in the opposite direction with the roller fixed. As long as the specimen is bent into a U shape, is this method acceptable per QW-162.1 as being substantially in accordance with QW-466? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5556 |
| IX-86-37 |
Section IX, QW-162.1 and QW-466.3 |
QW-162.1; QW-466.3 |
9/23/1986 |
|
In reference to QW-466.3, Note (c), are methods of restraint other than the one indicated acceptable as long as sliding of the specimen is prevented? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5556 |
| IX-86-37 |
Section IX, QW-162.1 and QW-466.3 |
QW-162.1; QW-466.3 |
9/23/1986 |
|
Note (d) of QW-466.3 implies that the roller moves relative to the axis of A with the clamp remaining in a fixed position. The same result is achieved if the clamp and A rotate in the opposite direction with the roller fixed. As long as the specimen is bent into a U shape, is this method acceptable per QW-162.1 as being substantially in accordance with QW-466? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5556 |
| IX-86-38 |
Section IX, QB-466.3 |
QB-466.3 |
9/23/1986 |
|
In QB-466.3, Note (b), are methods of restraint other than the one indicated acceptable as long as sliding of the specimen is prevented? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5557 |
| IX-86-38 |
Section IX, QB-466.3 |
QB-466.3 |
9/23/1986 |
|
Note (c) of QB-466.3 implies that the roller moves relative to the axis of A with the clamp remaining in a fixed position. The same result is achieved if the clamp and A rotate in the opposite direction with the roller fixed. As long as the specimen is bent into a U shape, is this method acceptable per QB-162.1 as being substantially in accordance with QB-466? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5557 |
| IX-86-39 |
Section IX, QW-452, Note (2) |
QW-452 |
9/23/1986 |
|
Is a welder who successfully passes qualification tests using the following variables thereby qualified to weld a 2 in. Schedule 80 pipe using a backing ring and the SMAW process?
(a) Test on 2 in. Schedule 80 pipe with open butt using GTAW.
(b) Test on 10 in. Schedule 80 pipe with open butt using GTAW for the root and hot pass followed by fill passes using SMAW. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5558 |
| IX-86-41 |
Section IX, QW-403.18 |
QW-403.18 |
9/23/1986 |
|
Would a welder qualified to a WPS for P-No. 1 material and E7018 electrode be qualified to weld on P-No. 4 or P-No. 5 material using F-No. 4 electrodes within the limits of QW-416 and QW-452 and the limits of the specific WPS for the P-No. 4 or P-No. 5 material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5559 |
| IX-86-41 |
Section IX, QW-403.18 |
QW-403.18 |
9/23/1986 |
|
Would a welder qualified to a WPS for P-No. 1 material and ER70S-2 electrode be qualified to weld on P-No. 4, P-No. 5, or P-No. 8 materials using F-No. 6 electrodes within the limits of QW-416 and QW-452 and the limits of the specific WPS for the P-No. 4, P-No. 5, or P-No. 8 metals? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5559 |
| IX-86-43 |
Section IX, QW-202.4 |
QW-202.4 |
9/23/1986 |
|
In qualifying a WPS, may the actual production base metal thickness be used as the weld test coupon thickness? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5560 |
| IX-86-43 |
Section IX, QW-202.4 |
QW-202.4 |
9/23/1986 |
|
In qualifying a WPS to cover 9 mm and 28 mm base metal thicknesses, the 28 mm side of the test coupon was tapered 3 to 1, making the thickness at the weld 9 mm. Is the WPS qualified for the two thicknesses? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5560 |
| IX-86-49 |
Section IX, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
11/24/1986 |
|
Does QW-201 allow a manufacturer to subcontract welding to another organization without requiring that subcontractor to perform procedure qualifications to ASME Section IX if the following conditions apply?
(a) The original manufacturer writes and qualifies the weld procedure in accordance with Section IX and references this procedure on engineering drawings supplied to the subcontractor.
(b) The subcontractor performs all welding in accordance with the procedures written and qualified by the manufacturer.
(c) The subcontractor and manufacturer qualifies all welders in accordance with Section IX. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5561 |
| IX-86-54 |
Section IX, QW-402.3 and QW-402.5 |
QW-402.3; QW-402.5 |
11/24/1986 |
|
Does the reference to a P-Number on the WPS satisfy the nominal composition required by QW-402.3 and QW-402.5 for the nonessential variable backing material? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5562 |
| IX-86-54 |
Section IX, QW-402.3 and QW-402.5 |
QW-402.3; QW-402.5 |
11/24/1986 |
|
Must the actual composition of the backing material used in the qualification of a WPS be documented on the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5562 |
| IX-86-57 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Does Interpretation IX-83-140 apply only to materials listed in the F-Number Table QW-432.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5563 |
| IX-86-57 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
3/2/1987 |
|
For what welding processes is a chemical analysis of ferrous weld deposit required in order to determine the A-Number? |
A chemical analysis of ferrous weld deposit is required for OFW, SMAW, GTAW, PAW, GMAW, SAW, EGW, and ESW. This analysis may be determined by the methods provided in QW-404.5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5563 |
| IX-86-57 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Is a chemical analysis required for ferrous weld deposit made between base materials from two different P-Numbers? |
A chemical analysis of ferrous weld deposit is required for OFW, SMAW, GTAW, PAW, GMAW, SAW, EGW, and ESW. This analysis may be determined by the methods provided in QW-404.5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5563 |
| IX-86-57 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
3/2/1987 |
|
If a chemical analysis is performed on the weld deposit of a test coupon consisting of ferrous materials from dissimilar base materials, from where should the chemical analysis material be removed? |
From the weld deposit. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5563 |
| IX-86-57 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Is the location specified in the answer to Question (4) different if the provisions of QW-194 are utilized to qualify welds between dissimilar metals? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5563 |
| IX-86-57 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Does QW-462.5 apply to the replies for Questions (4) or (5)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5563 |
| IX-86-57 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Will the chemical analysis obtained as part of the Procedure Qualification be satisfactory for Section I or VIII use? |
This subject is not addressed by Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5563 |
| IX-86-60 |
Section IX, QW-410.9 |
QW-410.9 |
3/2/1987 |
|
An impact tested combination WPS was qualified and contained a root pass and two passes of GTAW, multipass of SMAW and SAW. If a production weld contains only a GTAW root pass and multipass of SMAW and SAW, is requalification necessary due to a change from multipass to single pass per side for the GTAW? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5564 |
| IX-86-60 |
Section IX, QW-410.9 |
QW-410.9 |
3/2/1987 |
|
If the same production weld contained only one pass of SMAW and multipasses of SAW, would requalification be necessary? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5564 |
| IX-86-61 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Is a bend test specimen exhibiting open defects exceeding 1/8 in. on the convex surface, which resulted from slag inclusions and other internal defects, acceptable in accordance with QW-163? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5565 |
| IX-86-61 |
Section IX, QW-163 |
QW-163 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Is a bend specimen exhibiting corner cracks in excess of 1/8 in. acceptable if they are not the result of slag inclusions or other internal defects? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5565 |
| IX-86-63 |
Section IX, QW-410.15 |
QW-410.15 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Does QW-410.15 apply to processes or welding procedures where only a single electrode is specified? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5566 |
| IX-86-63 |
Section IX, QW-410.15 |
QW-410.15 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Does QW-410.15 apply to automatic hot wire GTAW? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5566 |
| IX-86-63 |
Section IX, QW-410.15 |
QW-410.15 |
3/2/1987 |
|
Is the electrically preheated filler wire in hot wire GTAW considered an electrode within the context of QW-410.15? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5566 |
| IX-86-64 |
Section IX, QW-300.2 |
QW-300.2 |
5/7/1987 |
|
Can one organization employ welders and use another organization's Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) to qualify these welders to make welds for the second organization, where effective operational control of performance or procedure qualification does not exist between the two organizations? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5567 |
| IX-86-65 |
Section IX, QW-404 |
QW-404 |
5/7/1987 |
|
May a manufacturer use different brands and/or manufacturers of welding electrodes from that used on the qualification test coupon when the electrodes are all classified as the same SFA specification and classification electrodes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5568 |
| IX-86-65 |
Section IX, QW-404 |
QW-404 |
5/7/1987 |
|
Must the manufacturer obtain a deposit chemical analysis or obtain a typical certificate of conformance showing the deposit chemical analysis for the electrodes used to weld the qualification test coupon when the electrodes to be used in production welding are all classified as the same SFA specification and classification electrode as was used to weld the qualification test coupon? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5568 |
| IX-86-69 |
Section IX, QW-301 |
QW-301 |
5/7/1987 |
|
A welder was qualified using a 60 deg. angle groove WPS. Is this welder qualified to weld a 75 deg. angle groove weld where all other essential variables are the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5569 |
| IX-86-69 |
Section IX, QW-301 |
QW-301 |
5/7/1987 |
|
A welder was qualified using a 75 deg. angle groove WPS. Is this welder qualified to weld a 60 deg. angle groove weld where all other essential variables are the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5569 |
| IX-86-70 |
Section IX, QW-200.2 and QW-483 |
QW-200.2; QW-483 |
5/7/1987 |
|
Is the absence of a laboratory test number on a Procedure Qualification Record (PQR), QW-483 or equivalent, cause for rendering the document invalid? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5570 |
| IX-86-70 |
Section IX, QW-200.2 and QW-483 |
QW-200.2; QW-483 |
5/7/1987 |
|
Is the PQR invalid if the laboratory test results are specified on a PQR and neither the laboratory nor the owner of the PQR can produce a copy of the laboratory test results? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5570 |
| IX-86-72 |
Section IX, QW-416 |
QW-416 |
5/7/1987 |
|
May a welding procedure qualification record be editorially corrected to include variables that had been omitted provided this information can be substantiated by lab records or similar data? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5571 |
| IX-86-72 |
Section IX, QW-416 |
QW-416 |
5/7/1987 |
|
Per QW-403.18 and QW-423, if a welder is qualified for welding P-No. 1 base materials using ER 70S-2 (F-No. 6) filler metal, is he also qualified to weld P-No. 8 or P-No. 45 base materials with other filler metals, classified in QW-432 as F-No. 6 filler metals? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5571 |
| IX-86-86 |
Section IX, QW-405.3 and QW-416 |
QW-405.3; QW-416 |
2/29/1988 |
|
Is a welder who has successfully passed a qualification test using manual SMAW, in the uphill progression, also qualified to weld in the downhill progression (cover and root passes are not at issue)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5572 |
| IX-86-86 |
Section IX, QW-405.3 and QW-416 |
QW-405.3; QW-416 |
2/29/1988 |
|
Is a welder who has successfully passed a qualification test using manual SMAW, in the downhill progression, also qualified to weld in the uphill progression (cover and root passes are not at issue)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5572 |
| IX-86-86 |
Section IX, QW-405.3 and QW-416 |
QW-405.3; QW-416 |
2/29/1988 |
|
Do the above responses hold true for Section IX, 1980 Edition with Addenda through Winter 1982? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5572 |
| IX-86-74 |
Section IX, QW-202.2 and QW-303.1 |
QW-202.2; QW-303.1 |
9/24/1987 |
|
Do groove weld procedures qualified in accordance with QW-202.2 qualify all fillet weld sizes on all base metal thicknesses and all diameters if the resulting fillet or socket welds exhibit areas of melt-through, sagging, dripping, or breakdown of the internal surfaces leading to convexity or concavity? |
Yes, within the provisions of QW-100.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5574 |
| IX-86-74 |
Section IX, QW-202.2 and QW-303.1 |
QW-202.2; QW-303.1 |
9/24/1987 |
|
A welder, qualified in accordance with QW-303.1, produces acceptable groove welds. However, fillet or socket welds produced exhibit areas of melt-through, sagging, dripping, or breakdown of the internal surfaces leading to convexity or concavity. Is the welder required to be retested in accordance with QW-303.2? |
No. The manufacturer or contractor has the option to establish retest requirements. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5574 |
| IX-86-75 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 and QW-403.11 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.11 |
9/24/1987 |
|
Does a PQR for joining P-No. 3 Gr. No. 3 to P-No. 3 Gr. No. 3 base metal qualify for the joining of P-No. 3 Gr. No. 3 to P-No. 3 Gr. No. 1 base metal where notch toughness testing is required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5575 |
| IX-86-76 |
Section IX, QW-404 and QW-407 |
QW-404; QW-407 |
9/24/1987 |
|
Is requalification of a SAW procedure required if the filler metal is not classified in Section II, Part C, and is manufactured by an organization other than that used in qualification, even though the nominal chemical composition of the weld deposits for each filler metal is identical to that used in qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5576 |
| IX-86-76 |
Section IX, QW-404 and QW-407 |
QW-404; QW-407 |
9/24/1987 |
|
Does a PQR, qualified with PWHT at a temperature less than the lower transformation temperature of the base material, support a WPS specifying a different PWHT temperature, provided this temperature is also less than the lower transformation temperature of the base material and all other essential variables remain the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5576 |
| IX-86-77 |
Section IX, Test Specimen Movement |
|
9/24/1987 |
|
For welder qualification, does Section IX prohibit the changing of the height of a weld test coupon during the welding of the coupon? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5577 |
| IX-86-78 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
9/24/1987 |
|
A PQR exists for welding a P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 material to a P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 material with acceptable notch toughness properties. Does this PQR qualify for welding a P-No. 1 Gr. No. 1 material to a P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 material where notch toughness is required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5578 |
| IX-86-79 |
Section IX, QW-302.2 and QW-321.2(a) |
QW-302.2; QW-321.2(a) |
9/24/1987 |
|
May test coupons made from plate, for welder qualification by radiographic examination, be longer than 6 in., with the required length of weld examined by radiography a minimum of 6 in., so that the weld starts and stops at the ends of the test coupon are not included in the radiograph? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5579 |
| IX-86-80 |
Section IX, QW-402.11, Flexible Welding Back-Up Tape |
QW-402.11 |
12/14/1987 |
|
Is flexible welding back-up tape considered a nonmetallic retainer per Section IX, QW-402.11? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5580 |
| IX-86-81 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
2/29/1988 |
|
If a welder is qualified with two contractors under the restrictions of equivalent essential variables, does the welder remain qualified with both contractors if he welds with only one of the contractors with the same process for a period of 3 months or more? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5581 |
| IX-86-82 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
2/29/1988 |
|
Does a welder who welds in only one position for more than 6 months maintain his qualification in other positions for which he is qualified for a given process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5582 |
| IX-86-82 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
2/29/1988 |
|
Does a welder who is qualified for a given process for both groove and corrosion-resistant welding maintain his qualification for corrosion-resistant overlay welding if he welds groove-welds only for more than 6 months? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5582 |
| IX-86-82 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
2/29/1988 |
|
Is changing from groove-welding to corrosion-resistant or wear-resistant welding considered a change in process for maintenance of welder qualification?
|
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5582 |
| IX-86-83 |
Section IX, Intermittent Nondestructive Testing |
|
2/29/1988 |
|
Is intermediate additional nondestructive examination during welding of a welding procedure qualification test assembly prohibited by Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5583 |
| IX-86-84 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
2/29/1988 |
|
Does a PQR employing an E7018 A-1(A-No.2) electrode qualify the use of an E7018 (A-No. 1) electrode, with all other essential variables unchanged? |
Yes. See QW-431. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5584 |
| IX-86-85 |
Section IX, QW-304 |
QW-304 |
2/29/1988 |
|
As per QW-304, with the exception of the short-circuiting mode, is it permissible to qualify a welder by radiography alone when using the FCAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5585 |
| IX-86-87 |
Section IX, QW-200.2 |
QW-200.2 |
6/2/1988 |
|
A procedure qualification consisting of a double-welded butt groove joint is made with SMAW root and SAW fill. Prior to back-side welding with SAW, the SMAW root pass is almost completely removed by back gouging. Does the above procedure qualification support a combination WPS of SMAW and SAW if the SMAW root pass is completely removed in production? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5586 |
| IX-86-87 |
Section IX, QW-200.2 |
QW-200.2 |
6/2/1988 |
|
If in the above question the SMAW root is completely removed in the procedure qualification, is SMAW qualified to be used in production welding? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5586 |
| IX-86-87 |
Section IX, QW-200.2 |
QW-200.2 |
6/2/1988 |
|
Is a welder who makes a root pass on a double-welded butt joint qualification test, qualified to weld without backing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5586 |
| IX-86-88 |
Section IX, QW-422 |
QW-422 |
6/2/1988 |
|
Can the chemical analysis or mechanical properties of a material assigned to a P-Number in QW-422 be modified from the requirements of the material specification and still be considered assigned to that P-Number? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5587 |
| IX-86-89 |
Section IX, QW-202.4 |
QW-202.4 |
6/2/1988 |
|
When employing a groove-weld WPS to join flat plates of dissimilar thickness in a corner joint, is it a requirement of QW-202.4 that both the thicker and thinner members must be qualified within the range permitted by QW-451 unless the alternative provided in QW-202.4 is used? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5588 |
| IX-86-90 |
Section IX, QW-301.4 |
QW-301.4 |
6/2/1988 |
|
QW-301.4 requires a record of Welder Performance Qualification. May the Procedure Qualification Record Form (PQR) serve as the Welder Performance Qualification Form (WPQ) for the welder who prepared the qualification test coupons? |
Yes, provided all required Welder Performance Qualification information is included on the PQR Form. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5589 |
| IX-89-01 |
Section IX, QW-482 |
QW-482 |
10/6/1988 |
|
In describing the joint backing on the WPS for a multiprocess single-welded groove weld procedure with no backing for the root pass, must the backing for each process after the root pass be individually addressed? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5590 |
| IX-89-02 |
Section IX, QW-351 and QW-452 |
QW-351; QW-452 |
10/6/1988 |
|
A performance qualification groove weld test coupon has been successfully made by a welder on a 3/4 in. thick test coupon using transverse bend tests in accordance with QW-452. The test weld was made with one process, utilizing filler metals of two different F-Numbers. Is the deposited weld metal thickness qualified, for each of the F-Number filler metals used in qualification, "max. to be welded"? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5591 |
| IX-89-02 |
Section IX, QW-351 and QW-452 |
QW-351; QW-452 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Is the deposited weld metal thickness qualified, for the welding process utilized in qualification, "max. to be welded"? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5591 |
| IX-89-02 |
Section IX, QW-351 and QW-452 |
QW-351; QW-452 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Is the deposited weld metal thickness for each of the additional F-Number filler metals qualified in accordance with QW-404.28, QW-404.11, QW-404.15, and QW-404.16 "max. to be welded"? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5591 |
| IX-89-03 |
Section IX, QW-100.1 and QW-200.1 |
QW-100.1; QW-200.1 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Is it required that all of the essential and nonessential variables listed in QW-250 through QW-280 for each welding process be addressed in the WPS, even though some of these variables are not applicable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5592 |
| IX-89-03 |
Section IX, QW-100.1 and QW-200.1 |
QW-100.1; QW-200.1 |
10/6/1988 |
|
When QW-410.9 is a variable for a process, may a qualified multipass welding procedure be used to make single pass repairs, even if the WPS does not specify a single pass technique? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5592 |
| IX-89-03 |
Section IX, QW-100.1 and QW-200.1 |
QW-100.1; QW-200.1 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Is it permissible to record the required essential variables of QW-352 through QW-357 for more than one process on a single WPQ record? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5592 |
| IX-89-04 |
Section IX, QW-153.1 |
QW-153.1 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Does QW-153.1(d) apply not only to the qualification of a WPS, but also to any subsequent tensile testing which may be required as a result of a customer's request? |
No; QW-153.1 only applies to the qualification of a WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5593 |
| IX-89-04 |
Section IX, QW-153.1 |
QW-153.1 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Are any yield strength elongations or reduction of area determinations from said tensile test relevant as far as QW-153.1 is concerned? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5593 |
| IX-89-05 |
Section IX, QW-424 |
QW-424 |
10/6/1988 |
|
When qualification in accordance with Section IX is required by the construction code for welding of non-pressure retaining attachments to pressure parts, does QW-424 apply? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5594 |
| IX-89-05 |
Section IX, QW-424 |
QW-424 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Can materials made in accordance with different standards and/or with different specifications but with the same nominal chemical composition and mechanical properties, be treated as the same unassigned metal? |
Yes; see QW-424.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5594 |
| IX-89-06 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
10/6/1988 |
|
A production butt weld 120 mm thick is to be made. May two welders, each qualified to deposit a maximum thickness of 20 mm, alternatively deposit weld layers not exceeding their qualified thickness, resulting in a completed weld where each of the welders deposited a total of approximately 60 mm of filler material, thereby exceeding their maximum qualified thickness in the production weldment? |
No; see QW-351. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5595 |
| IX-89-07 |
Section IX, QW-403.6 and QW-451 |
QW-403.6; QW-451 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Does Table QW-451 apply to production welds and/or production weld coupons, or does it apply to welding procedure qualification only? |
Table QW-451 applies to welding procedure qualification for production welding. The requirements for production weld coupons are specified by the construction code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5596 |
| IX-89-07 |
Section IX, QW-403.6 and QW-451 |
QW-403.6; QW-451 |
10/6/1988 |
|
Does QW-403.6 refer to production welds and/or production weld coupons, or to welding procedure qualification only? |
QW-403.6 applies to welding procedure qualification for production welding. The requirements for production weld coupons are specified by the construction code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5596 |
| IX-89-08 |
Section II, Part C, Chemistry Deviations |
|
10/6/1988 |
|
If the composition of a welding rod or electrode deviates from the limits given in the appropriate SFA specification, but the mechanical properties and all other requirements of the specification have been met, can the manufacturer state that his product is classified according to AWS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5597 |
| IX-89-08 |
Section II, Part C, Chemistry Deviations |
|
10/6/1988 |
|
Given the situation in Question (1), can the manufacturer state that his product complies with the requirements of Section II, Part C, except Si and/or Mn? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5597 |
| IX-89-08 |
Section II, Part C, Chemistry Deviations |
|
10/6/1988 |
|
According to SFA 5.4, para. 13.2, chemical analysis must be tested from a weld pad sample. As the results obtained are not satisfactory, can the manufacturer take the analysis from the all-weld-metal tension test specimen? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5597 |
| IX-89-08 |
Section II, Part C, Chemistry Deviations |
|
10/6/1988 |
|
If the results of the test in Question (3) are on the acceptable limits, can the manufacturer state that his product complies with the requirements of Section II, Part C? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5597 |
| IX-89-09 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
12/14/1988 |
|
If a welder qualifies with a process on NPS 2 in the 6G position, is he then qualified per QW-452.3 to weld larger diameter pipe with that process, assuming that all other essential variables are unchanged? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5598 |
| IX-89-10 |
Section IX, QW-300.2 |
QW-300.2 |
12/14/1988 |
|
May an organization, as defined in QW-300.2, incorporate a procedure in its Quality Control System to receive the data supplied by another organization beyond its operational control, for the purpose of providing effective operational control of performance qualifications as described in QW-300.2? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5599 |
| IX-89-10 |
Section IX, QW-300.2 |
QW-300.2 |
12/14/1988 |
|
May two or more companies within the same organization provide the data described in Question (1) to each other for the purpose of providing effective operational control of performance qualifications as described in QW-300.2? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5599 |
| IX-89-100 |
Section IX, QW-202.2 and QW-451 |
QW-202.2; QW-451 |
1/2/1991 |
|
A procedure qualification in a test coupon of 1-1/2 in. thickness has been qualified to the requirements of QW-202.2(a) with the exception of notch toughness. A second Procedure Qualification with identical essential and supplementary essential variables, is tested for notch tough-ness only, in a test coupon of 3/16 in. thickness. Do the above two Procedure Qualifications support a WPS to weld a butt joint 3/16 in. to 8 in. in thickness where notch toughness in required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5600 |
| IX-89-100R |
Section IX, QW-202.2 and QW-451 |
QW-202.2; QW-451 |
1/2/1991 |
|
A procedure qualification in a test coupon of 1-1/2 in. thickness has been qualified to the requirements of. QW-202.2(a) with the exception of notch toughness. A second Procedure Qualification with identical essential and supplementary essential variables, is tested for notch toughness only, in a test coupon of 3/16 in. thickness. Do the above two Procedure Qualifications support a WPS to weld base metal 3/16 in. to 8 in. in thickness and deposited weld metal up to 8 in. in thickness where notch toughness is required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5601 |
| IX-89-101 |
Section IX, QW-383 |
QW-383 |
6/17/1991 |
|
Does QW-383 apply to composite boiler tubing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5602 |
| IX-89-101 |
Section IX, QW-383 |
QW-383 |
6/17/1991 |
|
Is it mandatory to use composite tubing material to qualify welders to weld composite tubing or pipe under 24 in. diameter? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5602 |
| IX-89-102 |
Section IX, QW-462 |
QW-462 |
6/17/1991 |
|
Is QW-462.1(e) applicable for tension test of longitudinal welded pipe? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5603 |
| IX-89-103 |
Section IX, QB-200.4 |
QB-200.4 |
6/17/1991 |
|
Will a socket type lap joint brazing procedure qualification between two different base metals with the same nominal thickness qualify for brazing these same two base metals in any thickness combinations within the thickness limits of QB-451.3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5604 |
| IX-89-104 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
6/17/1991 |
|
Is there a maximum outside diameter qualification limit in Table QW-452.3? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5605 |
| IX-89-105 |
Section IX, QW-211 and QW-404 |
QW-211; QW-404 |
6/17/1991 |
|
Is a flux-cored consumable permitted as a filler material using the PAW process provided a test coupon is made establishing a PQR with the flux-cored consumable meeting the requirements of Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5606 |
| IX-89-106 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
6/17/1991 |
|
Does Table QW-452.3 apply to Welding Procedure Qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5607 |
| IX-89-106 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
6/17/1991 |
|
Is there a maximum outside diameter qualification limit in Table QW-452.3? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5607 |
| IX-89-107 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
6/18/1991 |
|
A 50 mm thick test plate done for a weld procedure by FCAW is welded full thickness and receives X-ray examination and mechanical tests, including impact tests. Is the thickness test range qualified 3/16 in. to 8 in. as per QW-451.1? |
Yes, except when notch toughness is a requirement the minimum thickness qualified is 5/8 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5608 |
| IX-89-107 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
6/18/1991 |
|
A 50 mm thick test plate done for a weld procedure by FCAW is welded full thickness and receives X-ray examination and mechanical tests, including impact tests. Is the welder only qualified up to 50 mm thickness per QW-451.1? |
No. The maximum thickness is unlimited. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5608 |
| IX-89-107 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
6/18/1991 |
|
A welder qualification test plate done on 25 mm plate is welded full thickness by the FCAW process. Is the maximum thickness qualified per QW-452.1 unlimited if only X-ray is performed? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5608 |
| IX-89-107 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
6/18/1991 |
|
A welder qualification test plate done on 25 mm plate is welded full thickness by the FCAW process. Would the maximum thickness qualified be different if both two side bends and X-ray were performed? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5608 |
| IX-89-107 |
Section IX, QW-452 |
QW-452 |
6/18/1991 |
|
A welder qualification test plate done on 25 mm plate is welded full thickness by the FCAW process. Is the maximum thickness qualified per QW-452.2 equal to 50 mm (2t)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5608 |
| IX-89-108 |
Section IX, QW-305 |
QW-305 |
6/17/1991 |
|
If an operator of a fully automatic lathe welder has absolutely no control of the welding parameters or torch position and manipulation, must he still be qualified as a welding operator according to QW-305? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5609 |
| IX-89-11 |
Section IX, QW-250 |
QW-250 |
12/14/1988 |
|
If qualified SMAW procedures exist for welding P-No.1 Gr-No.2, 0.5 in. pipe with a 0.188 in. wall in the 6G position using an F-No. 4 electrode, and P-No. 1 Gr-No.2, 4.0 in. pipe with a 436 in. wall in the 6G position using an F-No. 4 electrode, will a separate welding procedure be required to weld 2 in. pipe with a 0.436 in. wall? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5610 |
| IX-89-12 |
Section IX, QW-202.3 |
QW-202.3 |
12/14/1988 |
|
Can a WPS qualified on groove welds be used for weld repairs to corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay per QW-202.3? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5611 |
| IX-89-13 |
Section II, Part C, SFA-5.1 |
|
12/14/1988 |
|
When welding on ASME Code items operational at temperatures less than -20°F, may the manufacturer use E-7018 electrodes in place of E-7018-1 electrodes in the flat position, even though the procedure qualification was done with E-7018-1 electrodes? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5612 |
| IX-89-14 |
Section IX, QW-403.1 and QW-422 |
QW-403.1; QW-422 |
12/14/1988 |
|
Does the use of SA-420, S41500, require requalification if ASTM A 487, Class CA6NM, was originally used during procedure qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5613 |
| IX-89-15 |
Section IX, QW-423 |
QW-423 |
12/14/1988 |
|
If a welder is qualified for the welding of P-No. 1 material, is he also qualified for P-No. 1 through P-No. 11 and P-No. 4X material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5614 |
| IX-89-16 |
Section IX, QW-408 |
QW-408 |
12/14/1988 |
|
Is the terminology welding grade acceptable to use on the WPS and PQR for shielding gas percentage when argon is used as a single shielding gas for the GTAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5615 |
| IX-89-17 |
Section IX, QW-200 |
QW-200 |
2/27/1989 |
|
Must a qualified SMAW WPS written for a groove weld on pipe be revised and requalified to support a SMAW groove weld on plate? |
Yes, however, procedure requalification is not required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5616 |
| IX-89-18 |
Section IX, QW-451.1 |
QW-451.1 |
2/27/1989 |
|
A 3/8 in. thick SA-240 plate is used as base metal in coupon preparation. Actual base metal coupon thickness is 0.413 in., which complies with thickness tolerances outlined in SA-480. Is the range of base metal thickness qualified 1/16 in. to 3/4 in. inclusive? |
Yes, provided 3/8 in. is recorded on the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5617 |
| IX-89-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.8 |
QW-409.8 |
2/27/1989 |
|
For the SMAW and GTAW processes, is it necessary to specify the amperage range, ie., non-essential variable, on the WPS when the voltage range is identified? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5618 |
| IX-89-19 |
Section IX, QW-409.8 |
QW-409.8 |
2/27/1989 |
|
For the GMAW process, is it necessary to specify either amperage or voltage, or both, on the WPS when the WPS identifies a wire feed rate range? |
Voltage must be specified, amperage need not be specified on the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5618 |
| IX-89-20 |
Section IX, QW-403.16, QW-404.30, and QW-405.1 |
QW-403.16; QW-404.30; QW-405.1 |
2/27/1989 |
|
Given a qualified GTAW groove weld procedure whose T range is 1/16 in. to 1/2 in. with 1/2 in. t, will the following welder qualification data support all position welding of plate and pipe above 1/4 in. NPS with a maximum t of 0.432 in. and a maximum T of 1/2 in.? Coupon; 3 in. pipe, schedule 40, 0.088 in. wall; 3 in. pipe, schedule 40, 0.216 in. wall.; position 2G; position 5G. Both coupons were successfully bend tested in accordance with QW-452.1. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5619 |
| IX-89-20 |
Section IX, QW-403.16, QW-404.30, and QW-405.1 |
QW-403.16; QW-404.30; QW-405.1 |
2/27/1989 |
|
A welder qualifies on a 3 in. schedule 40 pipe coupon, 0.216 in. wall groove weld, using the GTAW process. According to QW-452.1, he is qualified for 2 X 0.216 in., or 0.432 in. May the decimal dimension be rounded up to the nearest fractional value, 7/16 in., and the fraction value used for the welder qualification t limit? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5619 |
| IX-89-21 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
6/7/1989 |
|
A welder is qualified by radiographic examination as permitted in QW-304, for the following processes/test coupon thicknesses: SMAW -- Test Coupon 15 mm nominal wall thickness; SAW -- Test Coupon 18 mm nominal wall thickness; GTAW -- Test Coupon 10 mm nominal wall thickness. Is the welder qualified up to the following thicknesses of deposited weld metal, as determined from table QW-452.1: SMAW -- 30 mm; SAW -- 36 mm, GTAW -- 20 mm? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5620 |
| IX-89-21 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
6/7/1989 |
|
Does QW-452.1, third column, address only the limitations of deposited weld metal thicknesses and not the maximum work piece thickness qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5620 |
| IX-89-21 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
6/7/1989 |
|
May a workpiece 86 mm (nominal) thickness be welded by the above welder, when he deposits the maximum thickness weld metal with each process for which he is qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5620 |
| IX-89-21 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
6/7/1989 |
|
On form QW-484 shall the thickness to be written as the deposited weld metal thickness be recorded separately for each process used during the welder qualification test? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5620 |
| IX-89-22 |
Section IX, QW-283 |
QW-283 |
6/7/1989 |
|
Does QW-283 apply when welding carbon or low alloy steels such as P-No.1 through P-No.5 materials to another carbon or low alloy steel, when one or both of the base metals is "buttered" with one or more layers of an austenitic stainless steel or nickel based alloy? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5621 |
| IX-89-23 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
6/7/1989 |
|
A welding procedure qualification is made using the following combination of base metals P-No.1 Gr-No.1 to P-No.1 Gr-No.2. The client specification requires impact testing only for P-No.1 Gr-No.1 materials (in the weld metal and heat affected zone). For procedure qualification purposes, is the impact testing only required in the weld metal and in the heat affected zone on the P-No.1 Gr-No.1 base metal side? |
Impact tests are conducted when required by other ASME Sections. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5622 |
| IX-89-23 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
6/7/1989 |
|
Does the procedure qualification test coupon qualify the welding of P-No.1 Gr-No.1 base metal to any other P-No.1 base metal not to be impact tested using the variables qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5622 |
| IX-89-24 |
Section IX, QW-404.30, and QW-405.1 |
QW-404.30; QW-405.1 |
6/7/1989 |
|
A welder is currently qualified to deposit ½ in. in all positions. Will an additional test on a ¾ in. thick coupon welded in the 1G test position qualify him to deposit the "max. to be welded" (per QW-452.1) in all positions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5623 |
| IX-89-25 |
Section IX, QW-151.1 and QW-462.1(a) |
QW-151.1; QW-462.1(a) |
6/7/1989 |
|
Is there a minimum machine thickness requirement, in relation to the original test coupon thickness, for reduced section tensile specimens to conform to the dimensions of QW-462.1(a)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5624 |
| IX-89-25 |
Section IX, QW-151.1 and QW-462.1(a) |
QW-151.1; QW-462.1(a) |
6/7/1989 |
|
In paragraph QW-462 is there a dimension y in relation to dimensions x or T which is unacceptable? |
In paragraph QW-462 x, y, and T are not dimensional, they are used to designate test coupon locations. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5624 |
| IX-89-26 |
Section IX, 1987 Addenda, QW-403.5, and QW-424 |
QW-403.5; QW-424 |
6/7/1989 |
|
A PQR has been qualified using a combination of SMAW and SAW on P-No.5 Gr-No.1 and P-No.4 Gr-No.1 materials. Will a WPS be supported utilizing this PQR for P-No.5 Gr-No.1 to P-No.4 Gr-No.1, P-No.3, or P-No.1 materials if supplementary essential variables are required? |
No, only P-No.5 Gr-No.1 to P-No.4 Gr-No.1 is qualified. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5625 |
| IX-89-26 |
Section IX, 1987 Addenda, QW-403.5, and QW-424 |
QW-403.5; QW-424 |
6/7/1989 |
|
Will a WPS be supported utilizing the above PQR for P-No.5 Gr-No.1 to P-No.5 Gr-No.1 or P-No.4, P-No.3, or P-No.l, if supplementary essential variables are not required? |
The following combinations are qualified: P-No.5 to P-No.4, P-No.4 to P-No. 4, P-No.4 to P-No. 3, and P-No. 4 to P-No.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5625 |
| IX-89-27 |
Section IX, QW-322(a) |
QW-322(a) |
10/24/1989 |
|
When performance qualifications are extended for a particular welding process to six months by welding with another process, is the welder or welding operator required to be qualified in the other process that he is welding with? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5626 |
| IX-89-28 |
Section IX, QW-401.15 and QW-402.4 |
QW-401.15; QW-402.4 |
10/24/1989 |
|
A welder has been qualified with the SMAW process using F-No. 3 electrodes for the root pass, and F-No. 4 electrodes for the fill and wash process. Is the F-No. 3 weld deposit for this qualification considered backing for the F-No. 4 electrode weld deposit? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5627 |
| IX-89-28 |
Section IX, QW-401.15 and QW-402.4 |
QW-401.15; QW-402.4 |
10/24/1989 |
|
Is the welder qualified to make the complete weld with the F-No. 4 electrode? |
Yes, provided backing is used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5627 |
| IX-89-29 |
Section IX, QW-216 |
QW-216 |
10/24/1989 |
|
To qualify a WPS in accordance with QW-216, is it a requirement of Section IX that the electrodes to be used conform to F-No. 71 or F-No. 72 of QW-432.7? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5628 |
| IX-89-29 |
Section IX, QW-216 |
QW-216 |
10/24/1989 |
|
Is it.acceptable to qualify a WPS in accordance with QW-216 using electrodes with weld metal analysis conforming to A-No. 6, A-No. 8, or A-No. 9 per QW-442 on P-No. 6 and P-No. 1 base materials? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5628 |
| IX-89-30 |
Section IX, QW-301.4 |
QW-301.4 |
10/24/1989 |
|
In addition to the ranges in QW-452 as required by QW-301.4, is it a requirement to list the values or ranges for all other variables for which the welder is qualified (e.g. Materials Specification, P-Nos., F-Nos., etc.)? |
No, additional information or limitations may be listed at the option of the Manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5629 |
| IX-89-31 |
Section IX, QW-218, Applied Linings |
QW-218 |
10/24/1989 |
|
A carbon steel vessel requires the installation of an applied liner due to service conditions. If the weld is completed in such a way that it is essentially two fillet welds and a cover pass, would a weld procedure qualified for groove welding be acceptable? |
No. See QW-218. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5630 |
| IX-89-32 |
Section IX, QW-216.1 |
QW-216.1 |
10/24/1989 |
|
Do the requirements of QW-216.1 define the minimum base metal thickness qualified with one PQR or does it impose two PQRs for a procedure if it is the users intent to use it on both components over one inch thick and components less than one inch thick using identical parameters? |
Two PQRs would be required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5631 |
| IX-89-33 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
10/30/1989 |
|
Does the qualification of a welder using EXX 10 and EXX 18 electrode on P-No. 1 material also qualify him to weld P-No. 4 material with EXX 18 B 2L electrodes? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5632 |
| IX-89-34 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
1/3/1990 |
|
If a WPS and PQR have been qualified with filler material purchased to an established procurement document, is it required by QW-404.5 to requalify each time that filler material is reordered to the procurement document? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5633 |
| IX-89-35 |
Section IX, Multiprocess Qualification |
|
1/3/1990 |
|
A qualified (multiple process) WPS lists the following: Diameter and pipe schedule- 6 in. Sch. xxs (0.864 in. nominal thickness); GTAW root pass - 0.100 in. deposit thickness; SMAW hot and fill passes - 0.764 in. deposit thickness. A welder performed a performance qualification test, using the above WPS. An inspector, using a vernier caliper measured the root pass deposit and determined 0.125 in. thickness had been deposited by the GTAW process and subsequently rejected the performance test based on excessive deposit by the GTAW process. The coupon was radiographed and, additionally, side-bend specimens were removed and tested. Both met all the Section IX requirements for performance qualification. Since there are no tolerances stated in any of the tables relating to welding process deposits or test coupon specimens, does the Code require verification of the deposit thickness of weldments to the degree cited above? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5634 |
| IX-89-36 |
Section IX, QW-409.8 and QW-422 |
QW-409.8; QW-422 |
1/3/1990 |
|
When a constant current power supply is used in SMAW and GTAW, is a voltage or voltage range required to be listed on the WPS, provided the voltage is addressed (i.e. N/A)? Notch-toughness testing is not applicable. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5635 |
| IX-89-36 |
Section IX, QW-409.8 and QW-422 |
QW-409.8; QW-422 |
1/3/1990 |
|
ASTM SB-163, 166, 167, and 168 - Specification for Nickel Chromium Alloys in various shapes and forms, include UNS No. N06600 and UNS No. N06690 material. In the P-No. 43 base material listing, only UNS no. N06600 is specified. May the UNS No. N06690 be included in the P-No. 43 grouping to reduce welding procedure qualifications? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5635 |
| IX-89-37 |
Section IX, QW-200.3 and QW-466.1 |
QW-200.3; QW-466.1 |
1/3/1990 |
|
The base metal Nickel Aluminum Bronze has a specified minimum elongation of 15%. Would the following side bend specimen thickness and test jig dimensions be acceptable? Specimen thickness = 0.28 in.; A = 1.69 in.; C = 2.375 in. |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5636 |
| IX-89-37 |
Section IX, QW-200.3 and QW-466.1 |
QW-200.3; QW-466.1 |
1/3/1990 |
|
The dissimilar base metals Nickel Aluminum Bronze, which has no P-Number, and Aluminum Bronze, which falls under P-No. 35, are being joined together. Table QW-466.1 allows a specimen thickness of 1/8 in. for P-No. 35. Could the dissimilar joint specimen thickness also be 1/8 in.? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5636 |
| IX-89-38 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
1/3/1990 |
|
A welder/welder operator is qualified with the manual and machine GTAW process. He uses the manual GTAW process for a period of seven consecutive months during which he does not use the machine GTAW process. Does his machine GTAW qualification expire after six months even though the qualifications employ the same welding process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5637 |
| IX-89-39 |
Section IX, QW-216.2(d) |
QW-216.2(d) |
1/3/1990 |
|
When obtaining the chemical analysis required in QW-216.2(d) from the test coupon detailed in QW-462.5, shall the minimum thickness qualified be measured from the fusion line so that the chemical sample includes the effect of base metal dilution in the deposit? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5638 |
| IX-89-40 |
Section IX, Limits of Qualification |
|
1/3/1990 |
|
A WPS has a qualified PQR using a 1/2 in. thick test coupon and a preheat of 100°F. The same WPS also has a qualified PQR using a 1/4 in. plate and a preheat of 300°F. All other essential variables were the same for both tests. Will a combination of these two PQRs support the production welding of 1/8 in. thick plate requiring a preheat of 100°F? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5639 |
| IX-89-40 |
Section IX, Limits of Qualification |
|
1/3/1990 |
|
A welder is qualified with the SMAW process in the 2G position using backing. He is also qualified with the SMAW process in the 3G position without backing. All other essential variables were the same for both qualifying tests. Is the welder qualified to weld in the 2G position without backing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5639 |
| IX-89-41 |
Section IX, QW-424 |
QW-424 |
1/3/1990 |
|
May a procedure, which is qualified using an assigned base metal identified on the PQR and WPS by chemical composition and mechanical properties as well as P-Number, be used to weld an unassigned base metal which matches the composition and mechanical properties of the base metal identified on the PQR and WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5640 |
| IX-89-41 |
Section IX, QW-424 |
QW-424 |
1/3/1990 |
|
May a procedure, which is qualified using an unassigned base metal identified on the PQR and WPS by specification type and grade or chemical composition and mechanical properties, be used to weld an assigned base metal which matches the composition and mechanical properties of the base metal identified on the PQR and WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5640 |
| IX-89-41 |
Section IX, QW-424 |
QW-424 |
1/3/1990 |
|
May a welding procedure qualification record be revised to add the base metal specification type and grade and/or chemical composition and mechanical properties, provided this information can be substantiated by lab records or similar data? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5640 |
| IX-89-42 |
Section IX, QW-402.10 |
QW-402.10 |
1/3/1990 |
|
A WPS has been qualified using a PQR, can the root opening be increased by an unlimited amount without further qualification, provided the root opening is a nonessential variable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5641 |
| IX-89-43 |
Section IX, QW-200.4(a)(2) |
QW-200.4(a)(2) |
1/3/1990 |
|
Are the requirements of Section IX met when the PQRs list the thickness welded for each welding process in the test coupon and the thickness range qualified for each welding process in accordance with QW-451, and the WPS specifies the process for each layer and references the PQRs which are available and list the total thickness to be welded in compliance with QW-451? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5642 |
| IX-89-44 |
Section IX, QW-281.5(a) |
QW-281.5(a) |
1/3/1990 |
|
Do the requirements of QW-281.5(a) and QW-282.6(a) apply to the mechanical oscillator? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5643 |
| IX-89-45 |
Section IX, QW-462.4(b) |
QW-462.4(b) |
1/3/1990 |
|
Is it a mandatory requirement to stop and restart the weld near the center of the test piece? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5644 |
| IX-89-45 |
Section IX, QW-462.4(b) |
QW-462.4(b) |
1/3/1990 |
|
Is it allowable to stop the weld near the center and restart the weld from the opposite end and finish the weld on the center weld crater? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5644 |
| IX-89-46 |
Section IX, QW-442 |
QW-442 |
1/3/1990 |
|
Are the bare carbon steel electrodes identified as ER-70S6 and ER-70S2 both classified as F-No. 6 filler metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5645 |
| IX-89-46 |
Section IX, QW-442 |
QW-442 |
1/3/1990 |
|
May the weld deposit from the bare carbon steel electrodes identified as ER-70S6 and ER-70S2 be classified as A-No. 1, provided the requirements of QW-404.5 and
QW-442 are met? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5645 |
| IX-89-47 |
Section IX, QW-404.15 |
QW-404.15 |
1/3/1990 |
|
When preparing welder or welding operator qualification records for the SMAW process, is it required that deposited weld metal thickness with F-No. 3 and F-No. 4 electrodes be recorded separately, i.e., F-No. 3 = 0.125 in.; F-No. 4 = 0.750 in.? The process is the same. |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5646 |
| IX-89-48 |
Section IX, QW-300 |
QW-300 |
2/28/1990 |
|
Must the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) used for performance qualification be supported by a Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) meeting the requirements of Article II? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5647 |
| IX-89-48 |
Section IX, QW-300 |
QW-300 |
2/28/1990 |
|
Are welding Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) as per Article II and welding performance qualifications as per Article III independent of each other? |
See Question (1) above. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5647 |
| IX-89-48 |
Section IX, QW-300 |
QW-300 |
2/28/1990 |
|
Can a welder performance qualification be carried out prior to welding procedure qualifications as per Article II? |
No, except as provided in QW-301.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5647 |
| IX-89-48 |
Section IX, QW-300 |
QW-300 |
2/28/1990 |
|
If a welding procedure fails to meet the mechanical test results as required by QW-200, is the welder or welding operator deemed to have been qualified, as long as the procedure qualification test plate or pipe is radiographed and meets the requirements of QW-304 or QW-305? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5647 |
| IX-89-49 |
Section IX, QB-462.1(a) and (b) |
QB-462.1 |
2/28/1990 |
|
Is the tension-reduced Section thickness tested in QB-462.1(a) and (b) always the nominal thickness of the brazed material? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5648 |
| IX-89-49 |
Section IX, QB-462.1(a) and (b) |
QB-462.1 |
2/28/1990 |
|
May the specimen thickness requirements for QB-462.2(a) and (b) also be used for the tension-reduced Section specimens in QB-462.1(a) and (b)? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5648 |
| IX-89-50 |
Section IX, Article III, Welder Performance Qualification |
|
2/28/1990 |
|
Does Section IX, Article III, have visual inspection acceptance criteria? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5649 |
| IX-89-51 |
Section IX, QW-356 |
QW-356 |
2/28/1990 |
|
Is a welder, qualified to manually weld P-No. 8 material to itself with an F-No. 6 filler material using the GTAW process, qualified within the same essential variables to manually weld P-No. 10H material to itself with an F-No. 6 filler material using the GTAW process given the following conditions?
(1) Two separate qualified WPs exist; one for the P-No. 8/F-No. 6 combination, the other covering the P-No. 10H/F-No. 6 combination;
(2) The filler metal used to join the P-No. 10H material was designated as F-No. 6 by virtue of QW-404.28. |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5650 |
| IX-89-52 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
2/28/1990 |
|
For the maximum thickness qualified on a test coupon of 3/4 in. or more in thickness, does "Max. to be welded" mean that the maximum qualified weld thickness is unlimited? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5651 |
| IX-89-53 |
Section IX, QW-402 |
QW-402 |
2/28/1990 |
|
In preparing a weld procedure specification for a square-butt joint using the GTAW process without the addition of filler metal making a single pass each side and developing 60% to 80% weld penetration with each weld pass, is the weld joint considered to employ a backing material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5652 |
| IX-89-54 |
Section IX, QW-282 and QW-322 |
QW-282; QW-322 |
3/6/1990 |
|
According to QW-282.4(f), if a WPS is qualified for horizontal, vertical, and overhead positions, using different heat inputs for all three positions, is each position limited by maximum heat input qualified for that position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5653 |
| IX-89-54 |
Section IX, QW-282 and QW-322 |
QW-282; QW-322 |
3/6/1990 |
|
In QW-282.4(c), (h), (i), and (j), must these essential variables be addressed on the WPS and PQR, when they are not applicable to the welding operation? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5653 |
| IX-89-54 |
Section IX, QW-282 and QW-322 |
QW-282; QW-322 |
3/6/1990 |
|
In considering the requirements of QW-282.2(d), a WPS was written for all positions but qualified only for the 2G, 3G, and 1G positions. PQRs qualifying these positions were referenced on the WPS, however, the WPS stated in the position section "all." Does the WPS require change to reflect the positions qualified? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5653 |
| IX-89-55 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Can an A-Number be established by a material manufacturer's or material supplier's certificate of compliance (C of C) which shows "typical" results? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5654 |
| IX-89-55 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Is a WPS using the GMAW process qualified if the essential variables, F-Number and A-Number, remain the same but only the AWS classification is changed from that used in the original procedure qualification test coupon? |
Yes, provided the same A-Number has been established per QW-404.5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5654 |
| IX-89-56 |
Section IX, QW-404.31 |
QW-404.31 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Is it necessary to continually requalify the submerged arc welding procedure each time the reclaiming process is repeated with the same material? |
Section IX does not address this situation. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5655 |
| IX-89-57 |
Section IX, QW-452.6 |
QW-452.6 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Is a welder or welding operator that has been qualified by radiography of a groove weld, in accordance with QW-304, also permitted to deposit fillet welds? |
Yes. See QW-303.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5656 |
| IX-89-58 |
Section IX, QW-404.5, QW-423.1, and QW-424.1 |
QW-404.5; QW-423.1; QW-424.1 |
6/4/1990 |
|
A WPS is qualified for P-No. 5 Gr. No. 1 to P-No. 5 Gr. No. 1 base metals. Will the PQR for this procedure also support a new WPS for P-No. 5 Gr. No. 1 to P-No. 4 base metals if all other welding variables remain the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5657 |
| IX-89-58 |
Section IX, QW-404.5, QW-423.1, and QW-424.1 |
QW-404.5; QW-423.1; QW-424.1 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Would a welder who is qualified using the first WPS (P-No. 5 Gr. No. 1 to P-No.5 Gr. No. 1 base metals) automatically be qualified to weld using the new WPS (P-No. 5 Gr.1 to P-No. 4 base metals) if all other performance variables remain the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5657 |
| IX-89-58 |
Section IX, QW-404.5, QW-423.1, and QW-424.1 |
QW-404.5; QW-423.1; QW-424.1 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Would a new PQR be required if the filler metal used for the first process (F-No. 6 A-No. 4, ER 90SB3) was changed (to F-No. 6 A-No. 3, ER 80SB2) on the new WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5657 |
| IX-89-59 |
Section IX, QW-282.4(h) |
QW-282.4(h) |
6/4/1990 |
|
Is QW-282.4(h), the addition or omission of supplementary powder to the welding arc, an essential variable when depositing hardfacing using the gas tungsten arc welding process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5658 |
| IX-89-61 |
Section IX, QW-403.12 and QW-404.28 |
QW-403.12; QW-404.28 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Are the essential variables QW-403.10 and QW-403.11 as shown in QW-415 valid if they are not listed as a variable in Article IV? |
Please be informed that in the 1989 Edition of Section IX, part of QW-403 was inadvertently omitted. The correct version of QW-403 has been issued in the 1989 Addenda to Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5659 |
| IX-89-61 |
Section IX, QW-403.12 and QW-404.28 |
QW-403.12; QW-404.28 |
6/4/1990 |
|
What is the difference between the variables of QW-403.11 and QW-403.12? |
This question falls into the category of a consulting request. Unfortunately, ASME does not provide consulting aid. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5659 |
| IX-89-61 |
Section IX, QW-403.12 and QW-404.28 |
QW-403.12; QW-404.28 |
6/4/1990 |
|
In accordance with QW-404.28 may a welder who qualified on P-No. 8 Group 1 material using the GTAW process and SFA-5.9 filler material weld P-No. 1 material (within other qualification limits) using SFA 5.18 filler material without requalification? |
Yes, see QW-423. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5659 |
| IX-89-61 |
Section IX, QW-403.12 and QW-404.28 |
QW-403.12; QW-404.28 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Will the elimination of inert gas backing require requalification of the welder? |
Yes, except when the qualified WPS is changed in accordance with QW-408.8. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5659 |
| IX-89-61 |
Section IX, QW-403.12 and QW-404.28 |
QW-403.12; QW-404.28 |
6/4/1990 |
|
In accordance with QW-404.28 may a welder who qualified on P-No. 1 material using GTAW and F-No. 6 filler material weld P-No. 8 material using F-No. 6 filler material? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5659 |
| IX-89-62 |
Section. IX, QW-451 and QW-492 |
QW-451; QW-492 |
6/4/1990 |
|
To qualify a groove-weld procedure to cover welding a base metal range 3/16 in. to 8 in. and deposited weld metal thickness range up to 8 in., is it permissible to weld a single partial penetration groove ¾ in. deep on a single piece of 1½ in. thick plate? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5660 |
| IX-89-62 |
Section. IX, QW-451 and QW-492 |
QW-451; QW-492 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Within the limits stated in QW-451, does a partial penetration groove procedure qualify for welding a full penetration groove and vice versa? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5660 |
| IX-89-62 |
Section. IX, QW-451 and QW-492 |
QW-451; QW-492 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Does a different number of members to be welded in a weld joint require separate procedure qualifications? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5660 |
| IX-89-63 |
Section IX, QW-322 |
QW-322 |
6/4/1990 |
|
A welder is qualified for SMAW and GTAW processes, but these qualifications expire per QW-322(a). If he welds a single test coupon per QW-322(c)(1) using SMAW only, is he qualified to weld using GTAW? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5661 |
| IX-89-64 |
Section IX, Article II, QW-302.3; Article IV, QW-452.1 |
QW-302.3; QW-452.1 |
6/4/1990 |
|
May two side-bend tests be substituted for four required face- and root-bend tests [Note (7) -- QW-452.1] for the 5G and 6G positions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5662 |
| IX-89-65 |
Section II, Part C, SFA 5.1, Paragraph 6.1.1 |
|
6/4/1990 |
|
For Code use of welding electrodes in cartons identified as AWS A5.1 in accordance with the 1989 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part C, SFA 5.1 paragraph 6.1.1, is it necessary to also identify the cartons by printing "ASME Section II C SFA 5.1"? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5663 |
| IX-89-66 |
Section IX, QW-200.3 |
QW-200.3 |
6/4/1990 |
|
A welding procedure is qualified using AISI 1040 base material in the quenched and tempered condition. The mechanical properties of the base material meet or exceed the following minimum values: 70,000 psi UTS, 45,000 psi Yield (0.2%), 19% Elong., 32% ROA, (impact testing is not required). Is this procedure also qualified for base materials conforming to AISI 1026 through 1039 (inclusive) and 1042 nominal compositions, quenched and tempered, and which meet or exceed the same minimum specified properties? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5664 |
| IX-89-66 |
Section IX, QW-200.3 |
QW-200.3 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Is this procedure also qualified for AISI 1040 base materials (and AISI 1026 through 1042 if so determined per Question 1), quenched and tempered, which meet or exceed higher (or lower) minimum specified mechanical properties (impact testing not required), provided that the minimum specified tensile strength for the base material does not exceed the tensile strength of the reduced-section tensile specimens used to qualify the procedure? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5664 |
| IX-89-67 |
Section IX, QW-204 |
QW-204 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Does the combination of two PQRs, one of SAW process and the other of SMAW process, support a WPS combining the two processes in a single production joint, with all essential and supplementary essential variables unchanged? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5665 |
| IX-89-68 |
Section IX, QW-404.14 |
QW-404.14 |
6/4/1990 |
|
Does a GTAW PQR which supports a WPS with a consumable insert also qualify for manual GTAW repair of the rootpass or closing of an "open window" in the root with the same F-Number and A-Number filler metal? |
Yes, however, the WPS must define all of the variables necessary for the insert fusion and the manual root repair or window closing. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5666 |
| IX-89-69 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
6/4/1990 |
|
If a welder qualifies on an 8 in. diameter pipe, is he then qualified down to 2-7/8 in. outside diameter? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5667 |
| IX-89-70 |
Section IX, QW-281.2(b) |
QW-281.2(b) |
6/4/1990 |
|
In QW-281.2(b), is a corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay cladding procedure qualified on QW-422, P-No.1 base metal, also qualified for applying the same corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay on QW-422, A-No. 1 or A-No.2 weld deposit? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5668 |
| IX-89-71 |
Section IX, QW-380, Special Process |
QW-380 |
9/20/1990 |
|
May welding qualification (whether procedure or performance) done on a groove weld apply to material specifically intended to provide corrosion resistance (corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay) or of material specifically intended to provide wear resistance (hard surfacing)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5669 |
| IX-89-72 |
Section IX, QW-462.3(a) |
QW-462.3(a) |
9/20/1990 |
|
In the first sentence, of Note 2 of QW-462.3(a), does 4 in. nominal diameter mean, NPS 4 (4.5 in. O.D.)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5670 |
| IX-89-72 |
Section IX, QW-462.3(a) |
QW-462.3(a) |
9/20/1990 |
|
In the first sentence, of Note 2 of QW-462.3(a), does 2 in. to and including 4 in. mean, NPS 2 (2.375 in. O.D.), and NPS 4 (4.5 in. O.D.)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5670 |
| IX-89-73 |
Section IX, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
9/20/1990 |
|
A manufacturer hires a contractor who has a Quality Control system and holds an ASME Code Certificate. The manufacturer writes the WPS, the contractor accepts the WPS as fulfilling Code requirements and qualifies the procedure using the contractor's welder. May the manufacturer use the WPS for Code production welding? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5671 |
| IX-89-73 |
Section IX, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
9/20/1990 |
|
May a contractor under employment to a manufacturer use the manufacturer's welding procedures to perform the Code welds? |
No. However, some book sections take exception to this requirement in Section IX and provide alternate requirements. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5671 |
| IX-89-74 |
Section IX, QB-172 |
QB-172 |
9/20/1990 |
|
Is a tension test, per QB-153 acceptance criteria, acceptable in lieu of a peel test for procedure and performance qualifications? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5672 |
| IX-89-75 |
Section IX; QW-403.5, QW-403.11, and QW-424 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.11; QW-424 |
9/20/1990 |
|
A procedure qualification using the SMAW process in a V-groove joint has been qualified with acceptable bends, tensiles and charpy V-notch impact specimens, using P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 material welded to a P-No. 3 Gr. No. 3 material. Does the procedure qualification support the welding of P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 material together when notch toughness tests are required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5673 |
| IX-89-75 |
Section IX; QW-403.5, QW-403.11, and QW-424 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.11; QW-424 |
9/20/1990 |
|
Does the procedure qualification support the welding of P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 material to P-No. 3 Gr. No. 3 material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5673 |
| IX-89-75 |
Section IX; QW-403.5, QW-403.11, and QW-424 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.11; QW-424 |
9/20/1990 |
|
Does the procedure qualification support the welding of P-No. 3 Gr. No. 3 material together? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5673 |
| IX-89-76 |
Section II, Part C, Electrode Classification |
|
9/20/1990 |
|
May a covered arc welding electrode with high titania potassium type of covering depositing approximately 0.5% molybdenum and meeting the proper tensile requirements be classified as E7013-G, SFA 5.5? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5674 |
| IX-89-77 |
Section IX, QW-214.3 and QW-216.2(d) |
QW-214.3; QW-216.2(d) |
9/20/1990 |
|
Must the WPS/PQR chemical analysis specified in QW-214.3/QW-216.2(d) consist of all elements designated for the specific AWS grade with its modified ranges for specific elements? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5675 |
| IX-89-77 |
Section IX, QW-214.3 and QW-216.2(d) |
QW-214.3; QW-216.2(d) |
9/20/1990 |
|
May the WPS/PQR chemical analysis specified in QW-214.3/QW-216.2(d) consist of only the specified elements of interest and disregard the remaining elements specified for the wire in the AWS specification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5675 |
| IX-89-78 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
9/20/1990 |
|
A procedure qualification using the SMAW process in a V-groove joint has been qualified with acceptable bends, tensiles and charpy V-notch impact specimens, using P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 material welded to a P-No. 3 Gr. No. 3 material. Does the procedure qualification support the welding of P-No. 1 Gr. No. 2 material together when notch toughness tests are required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5676 |
| IX-89-78 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
9/20/1990 |
|
Does the procedure qualification support the welding of P-No. 1, Gr. No. 2 material to P-No. 3 material. |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5676 |
| IX-89-78 |
Section IX, QW-403.5 |
QW-403.5 |
9/20/1990 |
|
Does the procedure qualification support the welding of P-No. 3, Gr. No. 3 material together. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5676 |
| IX-89-79 |
Section IX, QW-301 and QW-415 |
QW-301; QW-415 |
9/20/1990 |
|
Is pipe diameter a variable for procedure qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5677 |
| IX-89-79 |
Section IX, QW-301 and QW-415 |
QW-301; QW-415 |
9/20/1990 |
|
Are tests for special metallurgical properties such as notch toughness and corrosion resistance required for performance qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5677 |
| IX-89-80 |
Section IX, QW-404.25 and QW-404.26 |
QW-404.25; QW-404.26 |
9/20/1990 |
|
Are QW-404.25 and QW-404.26 essential variables for PAW procedures where all of the filler metal is supplied in the powder form? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5678 |
| IX-89-81 |
Section IX, QB-462.1(c) |
QB-462.1(c) |
9/20/1990 |
|
If a brazed lap joint pipe diameter is too large for testing in full section, per QB-462.1(c), may reduced section tensile test specimens be used? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5679 |
| IX-89-82 |
Section IX, QW-403.16 and QW-415 |
QW-403.16; QW-415 |
1/2/1991 |
|
Does a WPS qualified by a groove-weld test coupon in flat plate material qualify welding of all pipe diameters? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5680 |
| IX-89-83 |
Section IX, QW 151.1, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
1/2/1991 |
|
Are two single full plate thickness specimens necessary to satisfy the requirements of QW-451 when they are prepared in accordance with QW-151.1(a)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5681 |
| IX-89-83 |
Section IX, QW 151.1, QW-451 |
QW-451 |
1/2/1991 |
|
Is the qualified thickness range of QW-451 based on the "as-welded" coupon thickness even though the coupon is subsequently machined to less thickness in order to obtain parallel surfaces? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5681 |
| IX-89-84 |
Section IX, QW-403.11 |
QW-403.11 |
1/2/1991 |
|
A Welding Procedure Qualification is completed using a combination of the GTAW and SMAW processes with a P-No. 10F, Group No. 1 base material in the normalized and tempered condition. Does this Procedure Qualification support the welding of a P-No. 10F, Group No. 1 base material supplied in the quenched and tempered heat treatment condition when notch toughness is not required and all essential variables remain the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5682 |
| IX-89-84 |
Section IX, QW-403.11 |
QW-403.11 |
1/2/1991 |
|
A Welding Procedure Qualification is completed using a combination of the GTAW and SMAW processes with a P-No. 10F, Group No. 1 base material in the normalized and tempered condition. Does this Procedure Qualification support the welding of a P-No. 10F, Group No. 1 base material supplied in the quenched and tempered heat treatment condition when notch toughness is required and all other essential variables remain the same? |
Yes. However, other book sections of the Code may require qualification on a base material of the same heat treatment condition when notch toughness is required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5682 |
| IX-89-85 |
Section IX, QW-100.1 and QW-200.1(b) |
QW-100.1; QW-200.1(b) |
1/2/1991 |
|
Is it a requirement that the actual deposited weld metal thickness used on the qualification be shown on the WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5683 |
| IX-89-86 |
Section IX, QW-403.6 |
QW-403.6 |
1/2/1991 |
|
Where notch toughness requirements are there for procedure qualification, is QW-403.6 applicable for weld metal thickness qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5684 |
| IX-89-87 |
Section IX, QW-202.2(c) |
QW-202.2(c) |
1/2/1991 |
|
May pressure retaining fillet welds be qualified by means other than a groove weld test coupon? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5685 |
| IX-89-88 |
Section IX, QW-403.11, QW-422, and QW-424 |
QW-403.11; QW-422; QW-424 |
1/2/1991 |
|
Are austenitic stainless steels (UNS N08925) seamless pipe conforming to ASTM B 677 and welded pipe conforming to ASTM B 673 and fabricated to the dimensional requirements of ASTM B 464, which are allowed to be used in construction of components complying with Section III, Division 1, of the ASME Code Class 2 and 3 per Code Case N-453-1 considered materials not identified in ASME Section IX QW-422, even though SB 677 and SB 673 are identified under a different UNS number (N08904)? Note: The Code Case does not state that this material shall be considered to be P-45. |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5686 |
| IX-89-88 |
Section IX, QW-403.11, QW-422, and QW-424 |
QW-403.11; QW-422; QW-424 |
1/2/1991 |
|
Does a GTAW and/or SMAW welding procedure specification which is backed up by a procedure qualification record qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX for Code Case N-438 material, i.e., solution annealed Fe, 24.5 Ni, 21 Cr, 6.4 Mo, 0.2 N Alloy UNS N08367 otherwise conforming to SB 675 with minimum tensile strength of 104 ksi also qualify the manufacturer or contractor to weld Code Case N-453-1 austenitic stainless steel (UNS N08925) conforming to ASTM B 677 and ASTM B 673 if all other essential variables are the same? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5686 |
| IX-89-89 |
Section IX, QW-310.2 |
QW-310.2 |
1/2/1991 |
|
Is it permitted by QW-310.2 to use a machined groove in a plate or pipe, the depth of the groove being less than the thickness of the plate or pipe, to qualify a welder on a groove weld with backing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5687 |
| IX-89-90 |
Section IX, QW-151.1 and QW-451 |
QW-151.1; QW-451 |
3/7/1991 |
|
A PQR test plate is originally "T" thickness. It is reduced by machining to obtain parallel surfaces prior to preparing a turned specimen per QW-151.3(a). Is the maximum diameter specimen required by Note (a) of QW-462.1(d) based on the plate thickness after machining? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5688 |
| IX-89-91 |
Section IX, QW-403.16 and QW-404.22 |
QW-403.16; QW-404.22 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Do the following tests support a welder's qualification to weld on all diameters 1 in. and over, on unlimited thickness, and on either open butt or with consumable inserts?
(1) 2 in. Schedule 40 pipe with open butt joint
(2) 2 in. Schedule 40 pipe with consumable insert
(3) 6 in. Schedule XXS pipe with open butt joint |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5689 |
| IX-89-92 |
Section IX, QW-280 and QW-380 Special Process |
QW-280; QW-380 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Is building up the thickness of the material on piping, pressure vessels, pumps or valve to restore thickness, slow, or prevent wall thinning with material of the same chemistry as the base metal considered to be "Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay" or "Hard Facing Weld Metal Overlay" per QW-280 and QW-380? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5690 |
| IX-89-92 |
Section IX, QW-280 and QW-380 Special Process |
QW-280; QW-380 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Is building up the thickness of the material on piping, pressure vessels, pumps or valve to restore thickness with corrosion resistant or hardfacing material which is of a chemistry different than the base metal considered to be "Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay" or "Hard Facing Weld Metal Overlay" per QW-280 and QW-380? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5690 |
| IX-89-92 |
Section IX, QW-280 and QW-380 Special Process |
QW-280; QW-380 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Is building up the thickness of the material on piping, pressure vessels, pumps or valve beyond that required to restore thickness to slow or prevent wall thinning considered to be "Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay" or "Hard Facing Weld Metal Overlay" per QW-280 and QW-380? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5690 |
| IX-89-92 |
Section IX, QW-280 and QW-380 Special Process |
QW-280; QW-380 |
3/7/1991 |
|
In the case of Questions (1) and (2) above should groove weld procedure qualification rules be followed? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5690 |
| IX-89-93 |
Section IX, QB-482 and QB-484 |
QB-482; QB-484 |
3/7/1991 |
|
The base metal section (QB-402) on Form QB-482 contains a line (8th) for tube/ pipe diameter range. Is this required to be addressed on the brazing procedure specification since tube/pipe diameter is not considered to be an essential variable for any type of brazing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5691 |
| IX-89-93 |
Section IX, QB-482 and QB-484 |
QB-482; QB-484 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Form QB-484, "Record of Brazer or Brazer Operator Qualification Tests," does not contain any diameter range qualified for pipe or tubing. Is the tube or pipe diameter an essential variable for brazer or brazing operator qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5691 |
| IX-89-94 |
Section IX, QW-452.3 |
QW-452.3 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Are welders who qualify using GTAW to weld a groove in P-No. 8 tubing, 1/8 in. O.D., 0.030 in. wall in 6G position qualified to weld tubing 1/8 in. O.D. and larger where the wall thickness is 0.030 in. to 0.060 in.? The weld process and base material remain the same in both cases. |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5692 |
| IX-89-95 |
Section IX, QW-452.1 |
QW-452.1 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Is a welder who has qualified using a deposit thickness of 0.90 in. qualified to weld the entire thickness of a 3 in. thick material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5693 |
| IX-89-96 |
Section IX, QW-403.6 |
QW-403.6 |
3/7/1991 |
|
In conducting a Welding Procedure Qualification for which notch toughness is required, is QW-403.6 applicable for weld metal thickness? |
No. See QW-451. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5694 |
| IX-89-97 |
Section II, Part C, SFA 5.1 |
|
3/7/1991 |
|
Are mechanical property tests required for weld deposited with 2.4 and 3.2 mm electrodes classified in ASME SFA 5.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5695 |
| IX-89-98 |
Section IX, QW-303, QW-423, and QW-461.9 |
QW-303; QW-423; QW-461.9 |
3/7/1991 |
|
Is a welder who has qualified with a NPS 2-1/2 Scheduled 40 pipe in the 6G position and also with a 3/4 in. plate in the 2G position qualified to weld in all positions and on all thickness of plate or pipe with diameters of NPS 2-1/2 or greater? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5696 |
| IX-92-01 |
Section IX, QW-306 and QW-405.4, Combination of Welding Processes, and Change in Vertical Welding |
QW-306; QW-405.4 |
10/7/1991 |
|
When a procedure is qualified in the vertical position using the GTAW machine welding process to deposit hard-facing weld metal overlay, is a change in the direction of travel from uphill to downhill (or vice versa) an essential variable? |
Yes.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5697 |
| IX-92-01 |
Section IX, QW-306 and QW-405.4, Combination of Welding Processes, and Change in Vertical Welding |
QW-306; QW-405.4 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Are the essential variables listed in QW-360 for welding operator performance qualifications using machine welding equipment applicable to welding operators who are being qualified to deposit hard-facing weld metal overlays using the gas tungsten arc-machine welding process? |
Yes.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5697 |
| IX-92-02 |
Section IX, QW-382; Hard-Facing Weld Metal Overlay (Wear Resistant) |
QW-382 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Is welding position an essential variable for welding operators who are being qualified to deposit hard-facing weld overlays using the gas tungsten arc-machine welding process? |
Yes.
NOTE: The answer to your question is based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5698 |
| IX-92-03 |
Section IX, QW-216; Hard-Facing Overlay |
QW-216 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Must more than the two faces of hard-facing exposed by sectioning be examined in accordance with QW-216.2 when the welding is done in the 5G or 6G position? |
Yes.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5699 |
| IX-92-03 |
Section IX, QW-216; Hard-Facing Overlay |
QW-216 |
10/7/1991 |
|
If more than two faces of the hard-facing exposed by sectioning per QW-216.1 are required to be examined, from what location around the test coupon must they be removed? |
See QW-462.5.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5699 |
| IX-92-03 |
Section IX, QW-216; Hard-Facing Overlay |
QW-216 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Must the hard-facing overlay be liquid penetrant examined after surface conditioning the overlay to the minimum thickness specified in the WPS per QW-216.1? |
Yes. See QW-453.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5699 |
| IX-92-04 |
Section IX, QW-382; Hard-Facing Weld Metal Overlay (Wear Resistant) |
QW-382 |
10/7/1991 |
|
When qualifying welding operators in the 6G position on pipe for depositing hard-facing weld metal overlay, is the minimum required length of the weld deposit 360 deg. around the plate? |
Yes.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5700 |
| IX-92-04 |
Section IX, QW-382; Hard-Facing Weld Metal Overlay (Wear Resistant) |
QW-382 |
10/7/1991 |
|
When qualifying welding operators in the 6G position on pipe for depositing
hard-facing weld metal overlay, is the minimum deposit required the lesser of 1 in. or the deposit width specified on the WPS? |
Yes.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5700 |
| IX-92-05 |
Section IX, QW-453 and QW-462.5; Qualification Thickness and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing Overlay and Corrosion-Resistant Overlay |
QW-453; QW-462.5 |
10/7/1991 |
|
When a chemical analysis is done on hard-facing welded in the 5G or 6G position, must the analysis be taken from more than one location? |
Yes. See QW-453. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5701 |
| IX-92-05 |
Section IX, QW-453 and QW-462.5; Qualification Thickness and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing Overlay and Corrosion-Resistant Overlay |
QW-453; QW-462.5 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Must more than the two faces of hard-facing exposed by sectioning be examined in accordance with QW-216.1 when the welding is done in the 5G or 6G position? |
Yes. See QW-453 and QW-462.5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5701 |
| IX-92-05 |
Section IX, QW-453 and QW-462.5; Qualification Thickness and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing Overlay and Corrosion-Resistant Overlay |
QW-453; QW-462.5 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Is more than one hardness reading required to be taken on hard-facing weld in the 5G or 6G position per QW-216.1? |
Yes. See QW-453.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5701 |
| IX-92-06 |
Section IX, QW-214; Corrosion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-214 |
10/7/1991 |
|
If an overlay procedure is tested on 1 in. thick plate, would the minimum nominal base metal thickness qualified be 1 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5702 |
| IX-92-06 |
Section IX, QW-214; Corrosion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-214 |
10/7/1991 |
|
If an overlay procedure is tested on less than 1 in. plate, is the minimum nominal base metal thickness qualified the thickness tested and the maximum thickness qualified unlimited? |
Yes.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1991 Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5702 |
| IX-92-07 |
Section IX, QW-201; Welding Procedure Qualifications, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
10/7/1991 |
|
If Company A reviews and approves Section IX qualified WPS's submitted by Companies B and C for a given project, may Company A use Company B and C's WPS's? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5703 |
| IX-92-07 |
Section IX, QW-201; Welding Procedure Qualifications, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
10/7/1991 |
|
If Company A reviews and approves Section IX qualified WPS's submitted Companies B and C for a given project, may Company A authorize Company B to use Company C's WPS's on that project? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5703 |
| IX-92-08 |
Section IX, QW-422; Classification of P-Numbers |
QW-422 |
10/7/1991 |
|
SA-789 S31803 is listed in QW-422 as P-No. 10HGr. 1. Can SA-240 S31803 be considered P-No. 10H Gr. 1 since it only differs in product form? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5704 |
| IX-92-09 |
Section IX, QW-103.1; Welding Responsibility |
QW-103.1 |
10/7/1991 |
|
May a contractor provide his qualified welding procedure specifications, for use by his subcontractors, to perform welding in accordance with the requirements of ASME BPV Code Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5705 |
| IX-92-10 |
Section IX, QW-160; Guided-Bend Test Specimens |
QW-160 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Does Section IX impose a specific temperature at which the specimen must be during the bend test? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5706 |
| IX-92-10 |
Section IX, QW-160; Guided-Bend Test Specimens |
QW-160 |
10/7/1991 |
|
May the test temperature of the specimen be any temperature between ambient and the maximum allowable temperature imposed by ASME Section III for that specific material? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5706 |
| IX-92-11 |
Section IX, QW-180, QW-202.2, and QW-202.4; Groove and Fillet Welds, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-180; QW-202.2; QW-202.4 |
10/7/1991 |
|
In qualifying a tube-to-tubesheet weld procedure for a partial penetration groove weld, do paragraphs QW-202.2 and QW-202.4 apply? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5707 |
| IX-92-11 |
Section IX, QW-180, QW-202.2, and QW-202.4; Groove and Fillet Welds, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-180; QW-202.2; QW-202.4 |
10/7/1991 |
|
In qualifying a tube-to-tubesheet weld procedure for a fillet weld, do paragraphs QW-180 and QW-202.2 apply? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5707 |
| IX-92-12 |
Section IX, QW-322; Expiration and Renewal of Qualifications of Welders |
QW-322 |
10/7/1991 |
|
May a welder that has qualified on 2 in. and 6 in. diameter stainless steel pipe maintain qualification by making one butt weld on 6 in. stainless steel pipe? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5708 |
| IX-92-13 |
Section IX QW-195; Liquid Penetrant Examination |
QW-195 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Must the production weld overlay surface be examined by the liquid penetrant method in accordance with QW-195 to qualify the WPS as required by QW-214.2 and QW-216.2(a)? |
ASME Section IX does not specify production weld requirements. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5709 |
| IX-92-14 |
Section IX, QW-150; Tension Tests |
QW-150 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Does ASME Section IX specify any method of rounding off observed, or calculated values, for tensile specimen test results? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5710 |
| IX-92-15 |
Section IX, QW-303 and QW-461.9; Performance Qualification Position and Diameter Limitations |
QW-303; QW-461.9 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Is a welder who has qualified on a 2 in. diameter coupon in the 5G position, and a 6 in. diameter coupon in the 2G position, qualified to weld 1 in. and larger diameter pipe in any position? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5711 |
| IX-92-16 |
Section IX, QW-103.1 and QW-200.2(b); Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-103.1; QW-200.2(b) |
10/7/1991 |
|
Does paragraph QW-103.1 allow a manufacturer or contractor to subcontract the welding of procedure qualifications to a testing laboratory where the welder is an employee of the subcontractor, and the manufacturer or contractor does not have a representative present to provide full supervision and control during the qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5712 |
| IX-92-17 |
Section IX, QW-202 and QW-301; Procedure and Performance Type of Tests Required |
QW-202; QW-301 |
10/7/1991 |
|
A PQR was generated in 1987 by qualifying a WPS to QW-201.1 and QW-201.2 of Section IX of the ASME Code. May these documents be used in ASME Code fabrication today? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5713 |
| IX-92-17 |
Section IX, QW-202 and QW-301; Procedure and Performance Type of Tests Required |
QW-202; QW-301 |
10/7/1991 |
|
In 1987, welders were qualified to the above WPS in accordance with QW-301.1 and QW-301.2 of Section IX of the ASME Code. May these welders be used in ASME Code fabrication today? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5713 |
| IX-92-18 |
Section IX, QW-423 and QW-422, Alternate Base Materials for Welder Qualification, A-Numbers |
QW-423; QW-422 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Is a welder, who has qualified using mild steel base material P-No. 1 to P-No. 1 using either GMAW, GTAW, or PAW welding processes and filler metal F6/A1, qualified to weld austenitic stainless steel P-No. 8 to P-No. 8? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5714 |
| IX-92-18 |
Section IX, QW-423 and QW-422, Alternate Base Materials for Welder Qualification, A-Numbers |
QW-423; QW-422 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Is the A-number an essential variable for a welder performance qualification test? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5714 |
| IX-92-19 |
Section IX, QW-151.1 and QW-451; Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-151.1; QW-451 |
10/7/1991 |
|
May two single full thickness specimens, taken from material greater than 1 in. thickness, satisfy the tension test size and quantity requirements of QW-451 and QW-151.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5715 |
| IX-92-20 |
Section IX, QW-218; Applied Linings |
QW-218 |
10/7/1991 |
|
In qualifying a WPS for attachment of applied linings in accordance with QW-218, are bends and tensile tests required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5716 |
| IX-92-20 |
Section IX, QW-218; Applied Linings |
QW-218 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Given that the variables in QW-250 apply, is the joint between the applied linings regarded as a groove weld? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5716 |
| IX-92-21 |
Section IX, QW-404.12; Change in Filler Metal |
QW-404.12 |
10/7/1991 |
|
May existing WPS's using the SMAW process with E7018 electrodes which were qualified at -50°F utilizing the essential and supplementary essential variables of QW-253 be revised to specify E7018-1 classification without requalification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5717 |
| IX-92-22 |
Section IX, QW-322; Expiration and Renewal of Welder Qualification |
QW-322 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Does a welder who is qualified for a given process for both groove and corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay maintain his qualification for groove welding if, for more than six months, the welder only does corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay welding? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5718 |
| IX-92-22 |
Section IX, QW-322; Expiration and Renewal of Welder Qualification |
QW-322 |
10/7/1991 |
|
Does the non-Code welding work need to be examined by NDE to maintain the welder's qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5718 |
| IX-92-22 |
Section IX, QW-322; Expiration and Renewal of Welder Qualification |
QW-322 |
10/7/1991 |
|
May a welder maintain his qualification by welding on temporary attachments without any NDE? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5718 |
| IX-92-23 |
Section IX, QW-301; Performance Tests |
QW-301 |
12/20/1991 |
|
In accordance with QW-301, may welders and welding operators, simultaneously qualified by more than one contractor, maintain qualifications with each participating contractor by maintaining qualification with any participating contractor? |
Yes.
NOTE: The answers to your questions are based on the 1992 Addenda to Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5719 |
| IX-92-24 |
Section IX, QW-183 and QW-184; Macro Examination - Procedure and Performance |
QW-183; QW-184 |
12/20/1991 |
A tube-to-tubesheet weld is made with an automatic process with no filler metal. The tube is completely through the tubesheet and flush with the outside of the tubesheet. The weld is considered a seal weld and not a pressure retaining weld. |
Do procedure and performance qualifications for the seal weld require examination in accordance with QW-183 and QW-184, respectively? |
Section IX does not specifically address qualification of seal welds or welder/welding operators making seal welds. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5720 |
| IX-92-24 |
Section IX, QW-183 and QW-184; Macro Examination - Procedure and Performance |
QW-183; QW-184 |
12/20/1991 |
A tube-to-tubesheet weld is made with an automatic process with no filler metal. The tube is completely through the tubesheet and flush with the outside of the tubesheet. The weld is considered a seal weld and not a pressure retaining weld. |
Is a seal weld a fillet weld? |
The type of weld required for a seal weld is specified by other Sections of the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5720 |
| IX-92-24 |
Section IX, QW-183 and QW-184; Macro Examination - Procedure and Performance |
QW-183; QW-184 |
12/20/1991 |
A tube-to-tubesheet weld is made with an automatic process with no filler metal. The tube is completely through the tubesheet and flush with the outside of the tubesheet. The weld is considered a seal weld and not a pressure retaining weld. |
If other Sections of the BPV Code specify the seal weld to be either a full penetration weld, a partial penetration weld, or a fillet weld does Section IX require the procedure to be qualified in accordance with. QW-202.2(a), (b), or (c), respectively, and the welder/welding operator qualified in accordance with QW-300? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5720 |
| IX-92-25 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(b) and QW-300.2; Manufacturer's and Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-200.2(b); QW-300.2 |
12/20/1991 |
|
According to QW-200.2(b), may a manufacturer or contractor provide guidelines for a procedure qualification, and a WPS, and a welder to a test lab, then audit on random basis and certify the procedure? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5721 |
| IX-92-25 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(b) and QW-300.2; Manufacturer's and Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-200.2(b); QW-300.2 |
12/20/1991 |
|
According to QW-300.2, may a manufacturer or contractor provide acceptance and rejection criteria, a WPS, and a welder performance for a qualification test to a test lab then audit on a random basis and accept responsibility for the performance qualification test? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5721 |
| IX-92-26 |
Section IX, QW-306; Combination of Welding Process |
QW-306 |
12/20/1991 |
|
When a welder has been qualified using a single welding process and later takes a test using a combination of welding processes, which includes the previously qualified process, and does not pass, does this affect the earlier qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5722 |
| IX-92-27 |
Section II, Part C, SA 5.4 - Table 4 |
|
12/20/1991 |
|
Should the footnotes a, b, and c of Table 4 read as follows:
a) See Section 10 and 14.2
b) See Section 11.1 and 14.3
c) See Section 11.2 and Figs. I and 3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5723 |
| IX-92-28 |
Section IX, QW-281.2(f); Corrosion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay - Essential Variables |
QW-281.2(f) |
12/20/1991 |
|
May a corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay procedure qualification test joint 2 in. in thickness that was postweld heat treated (PWHT) for 2 hr (1 hr per in.) qualify a PWHT of a 5 in. thick material for 5 hr (1 hr per in.)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5724 |
| IX-92-29 |
Section IX, QW-151.3 and QW-462.1, Tension Tests and Test Specimens |
QW-151.3; QW-462.1 |
2/28/1992 |
|
For plate coupon, welded by one process and procedure, may either reduced-section specimens conforming to the requirements given in QW-462.1(a) or turned specimens conforming to the requirements given in QW-462.1(d) be used for tension test specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5725 |
| IX-92-29 |
Section IX, QW-151.3 and QW-462.1, Tension Tests and Test Specimens |
QW-151.3; QW-462.1 |
2/28/1992 |
|
For a 2 in. plate test coupon welded with one process and procedure, may two turned 0.505 tensile specimens conforming to QW-462.1(d) be used for each tension test? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5725 |
| IX-92-29 |
Section IX, QW-151.3 and QW-462.1, Tension Tests and Test Specimens |
QW-151.3; QW-462.1 |
2/28/1992 |
|
In performing tension tests on a 2 in. test coupon welded with one process and procedure using turned specimens conforming to QW-462.1(d) and spaced in accordance with QW-151.3(b), is it acceptable if portions of weld deposit are not included in the tension tests? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5725 |
| IX-92-30 |
Section IX, QW-200.1, General Welding Procedure Qualifications |
QW-200.1 |
2/28/1992 |
|
Does QW-200.1(c) require that there be a history of changes such as margin notes or other record documenting what specific changes were made in the essential, nonessential, or supplemental variables each time a WPS is revised? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5726 |
| IX-92-31 |
Section IX, QW-310, Qualification of Test Coupons |
QW-310 |
2/28/1992 |
|
May a welder repair the root pass from the root side of a Welder Performance test coupon and be qualified to weld without backing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5727 |
| IX-92-32 |
Section IX, QW-351, General Welding Variables for Welders |
QW-351 |
2/28/1992 |
|
When using a single test coupon for welder performance qualifications, is it necessary to determine the deposited weld metal thickness for each process the welder uses to weld the single test coupon? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5728 |
| IX-92-34 |
Section IX, QW-451, Groove-Weld Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-451 |
2/28/1992 |
|
Tables QW-451.1 and QW-451.2 state limits for base metal and deposited weld metal thickness. Where QW-250 lists variables applicable to thickness, do these variables supersede the limits of QW-451.1 and QW-451.2? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5729 |
| IX-92-34 |
Section IX, QW-451, Groove-Weld Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-451 |
2/28/1992 |
|
Tables QW-451.1 .and QW-451.2 do not give a minimum deposited weld metal thickness. When the variable QW-403.6 states a minimum base metal thickness, does this minimum also apply to deposited weld metal? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5729 |
| IX-92-35 |
Section IX, QW-452.1, Transverse Bend Test for Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-452.1 |
2/28/1992 |
|
Even though QW-484 does not provide space for documenting conformance of the test coupon groove with the requirements of QW-452.1, Notes 8 or 9, does a signed Record of Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification form indicate that these requirements have been met? |
Yes.
Note: However, at the present moment, QW-484 is under consideration for possible revision. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5730 |
| IX-92-36 |
Section IX, QW-452.1, Transverse Bend Test for Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-452.1 |
2/28/1992 |
Interpretation IX-83-90 states:
"Question (1): Can a double-beveled plate, 1 in. thick with each beveled groove being ½ in., be welded by a welder qualified to weld a weld metal deposit of 0.864 in.?
Reply (1): No.
Question (2): Can the same joint as above be welded by two individual welders, each with a deposited weld metal qualification of 0.864 in., provided each welder does not exceed 0.864 in.?
Reply (2): Yes." |
Can a double-beveled plate, 1½ in. thick with each beveled groove being ½ in., be welded by two individual welders, one on each side of the plate and each with a deposited weld metal qualification of 0.864 in., provided each welder does not exceed 0.864 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5731 |
| IX-92-37 |
Section IX, QW-151 and QW-451, Tension Test Specimens and Groove-Weld Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-151; QW-451 |
2/28/1992 |
|
Do paragraphs QW-151.1, QW-151.2, QW-151.3, and QW-151.4 define the number of tension test specimens required for each tension test as specified in QW-451.1 and QW-451.2? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5732 |
| IX-92-37 |
Section IX, QW-151 and QW-451, Tension Test Specimens and Groove-Weld Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-151; QW-451 |
2/28/1992 |
|
Do Tables QW-451.1 and QW-451.2 specify the minimum required number of tension and guided bend tests needed for various groove welded coupons, regardless of diameter when pipe or tube is used? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5732 |
| IX-92-38 |
Section IX, QW-200, General Welding Procedure Qualifications |
QW-200 |
5/28/1992 |
A welder was monitored while performing production welding and was found to be welding above the amperage range listed on the WPS for a specific electrode diameter (SMAW process). |
Does Section IX require the WPS to be amended or requalified, as applicable, when a variable is not followed such as welding above or below the established amperage or voltage range listed on the WPS? |
The disposition of nonconformances is not within the scope of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5733 |
| IX-92-39 |
Section IX, QW-300.3, Simultaneous Qualification of Welders |
QW-300.3 |
5/28/1992 |
Three contractors desire to use the same WPS and simultaneously qualify welders in accordance with QW-300. Each contractor has a pre-existing PQR covering the scope of the WPS. Each contractor's name and corresponding PQR number is entered on the WPS and separate signature blocks are provided for each contractor. This method of weld procedure and welder performance qualification and operational controls is described in the QC system for each contractor. |
May the WPS described be used to simultaneously qualify welders? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5734 |
| IX-92-39 |
Section IX, QW-300.3, Simultaneous Qualification of Welders |
QW-300.3 |
5/28/1992 |
Three contractors desire to use the same WPS and simultaneously qualify welders in accordance with QW-300. Each contractor has a pre-existing PQR covering the scope of the WPS. Each contractor's name and corresponding PQR number is entered on the WPS and separate signature blocks are provided for each contractor. This method of weld procedure and welder performance qualification and operational controls is described in the QC system for each contractor. |
May the WPS described be used for production welding by all three contractors? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5734 |
| IX-92-40 |
Section IX, QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.1 |
5/28/1992 |
|
When notch toughness tests are a requirement, and option QW-409.1(a) is chosen as a means of determining heat input, must the actual voltage, amperage, and travel speed used be recorded on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5735 |
| IX-92-40 |
Section IX, QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.1 |
5/28/1992 |
|
When notch toughness tests are a requirement, and option QW-409.1(b), bead size, is chosen as a means of determining heat input, must the actual bead width and height deposited to ascertain "Volume of Weld Metal" deposited be recorded on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5735 |
| IX-92-40 |
Section IX, QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.1 |
5/28/1992 |
|
May either of the above methods be substituted for the other, when writing a WPS that has notch toughness requirements, by estimating the values of the "other" method [i.e., using option (a) (with estimated amps, volts, and travel speed) when option (b) (actual Volume of Weld Metal) was used when the test coupon was welded]? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5735 |
| IX-92-40 |
Section IX, QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.1 |
5/28/1992 |
|
When notch toughness tests are a requirement, and option QW-409.1(b), bead size, is chosen as a means of determining heat input, can any electrode diameter be used as long as the volume of deposited weld metal, which is recorded on the PQR, is not exceeded? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5735 |
| IX-92-41 |
Section IX, QW-461.9, Performance Qualifications - Position and Diameter Limitations |
QW-461.9 |
5/28/1992 |
|
Are welders qualified on plate in 2G, 3G, and 4G positions qualified to weld on pipe less than 24 in. OD in the 5G position? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5736 |
| IX-92-42 |
Section IX, QW-200.4(a), Combination of Welding Processes |
QW-200.4(a) |
9/30/1992 |
|
May a single set of weld metal impact test specimens be used to qualify two or more processes or procedures? |
Yes, provided weld metal from each process or procedure is included in each specimen. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5737 |
| IX-92-43 |
Section IX, QW-492, Definition of Machine Welding |
QW-492 |
9/30/1992 |
|
Is a GMAW spot welding process in which all variables are preset, except for placement of the nozzle against the material and activation of the trigger by the operator, considered machine welding? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5738 |
| IX-92-44 |
Section IX, QW-251.4 and QW-280, Special Processes |
QW-251.4; QW-280 |
9/30/1992 |
|
According to the 1990 Addenda of Section IX, are there any supplementary essential or nonessential variables required to be addressed in a WPS for the special processes described in QW-280? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5739 |
| IX-92-44 |
Section IX, QW-251.4 and QW-280, Special Processes |
QW-251.4; QW-280 |
9/30/1992 |
|
According to the 1991 Addenda of Section IX, are there any supplementary essential or nonessential variables required to be addressed in a WPS for the special processes described in QW-251.4? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5739 |
| IX-92-45 |
Section IX, QW-303.2 and QW-452.4, Fillet Welds |
QW-303.2; QW-452.4 |
9/30/1992 |
|
When Section IX requires separate performance qualification for fillet welds on small diameter pipe, does the same requirement apply to longitudinal fillet welds (such as the attachment of gussets in the longitudinal direction)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5740 |
| IX-92-46 |
Section IX, QW-303.3 and QW-461.9, Special Positions for Performance Qualification |
QW-303.3; QW-461.9 |
9/30/1992 |
|
Is a welder who is qualified to weld groove welds in a special orientation also qualified to weld in the 1G position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5741 |
| IX-92-47 |
Section IX, QW-322.2, Renewal of Qualification |
QW-322.2 |
9/30/1992 |
|
May the renewal of welder and welding operator performance qualification be done on production work? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5742 |
| IX-92-84 |
Section IX, QW-407.2, Postweld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.2 |
11/22/1993 |
A PQR was welded on a 2 in. thick P-No. 1, Gr. 2 material and post weld heat treated at 1150"F for six hours (3 hrs/in.) with supplementary essential variable requirements. |
Will this PQR support a WPS for a production weld in 2 in. thick P-No. 1, Gr. 2 material that is PWHT at 1150°F for 2 hours (1 hr/in.)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5743 |
| IX-95-24 |
Section IX, QW-403.1, Base Metals |
QW-403.1 |
3/19/1996 |
|
Does a WPS qualified, using P-No. 1 Group No. 1 material, qualify for welding P-No. 1 Group No. 2 material when notch toughness tests are not required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5744 |
| IX-95-25 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
3/19/1996 |
|
If company A purchases company B, is it permissible for company A to write Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) in their name supported by Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) qualified by company B? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5745 |
| IX-95-26 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
3/19/1996 |
Company A owns company B and changes its name to C. The new company C continues to use the WPSs and PQRs initially developed by B. After some time company A (the parent company) splits C back to B and C. Both B and C now operate independently but under company A. |
May company B use the WPSs and PQRs initially developed by B and also use WPSs and PQRs qualified by company C before the last reorganization? |
Yes, provided that the requirements of QW-201 are satisfied. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=5746 |
| IX-ER10-IX-03 |
Section IX, Tension Tests |
|
6/23/1981 |
|
When a reduced section tension test specimen is made in accordance with QW-462.1(a), may the dimension W be reduced to 1/4 in. for t greater than 1 in. if the capacity of the test equipment is limited to an ultimate load that will not test a larger specimen to failure? |
No. W must be approximately 1 in. When the capacity of the testing equipment is limited, QW-151.1 (b), (c) and (d) allow the full thickness specimen to be cut into a set of approximately equal strips. That set then must meet the requirements for a full thickness specimen. Each specimen of the set need not contain each welding process used. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=6989 |
| IX-ER10-IX-04 |
Section IX, QB-404.1 |
QB-404.1 |
6/23/1981 |
|
QB-404.1 requires requalification when the brazing temperature is changed to a value outside of the range stipulated in QB-432. What controls are required under the rule of Section IX to establish the brazing temperature employed? |
Section IX does not stipulate the method of establishing the brazing temperature. Such requirements may be specified in a Quality Assurance Manual or by agreement between the Authorized Inspector and the Certificate Holder. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=6990 |
| IX-ER10-IX-05 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
6/23/1981 |
|
A fabricator uses a proprietary electrode to weld P-No. 1 materials. Company policy is not to reveal the chemical, mechanical, and other properties outside the company except on a need to know basis. The material (E-8018G) contains Cr, Mo, and Ni in small quantities, but less than the minimums shown in QW-442 for A-Nos. 2, 10, 11, and 12. Can this material be considered an A-No. 1 welding material? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=6991 |
| IX-ER10-IX-05 |
Section IX, QW-404.5 |
QW-404.5 |
6/23/1981 |
|
In lieu of listing the actual chemistry of the welding material used to qualify the procedure, can the company material specification on the PQR and WPS meet the requirements of QW-404.5? |
Yes, provided the requirements of QW-441 are met and the requirements of QW-404.5 are met to the satisfaction of the Authorized Inspector. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=6991 |
| IX-ER10-IX-06 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification Testing |
|
6/23/1981 |
|
Welders are to be qualified on 6 in. NPS coupons in the 6G position using GTAW. The pieces are tacked together and positioned. The bottom of the coupon is sealed and the gas purge line inserted. The top of the coupon is then sealed with a perforated plastic cover. The welder being tested begins welding, while a second welder observes the underside (root) of the weld through the plastic cover. The observer then advises the welder during welding (e.g., "slow down, you're not coming through to fuse the edges," "You're too hot, speed up a little," etc.). Is this practice, called looking-in, permitted for performance qualification testing? |
Such a practice is not addressed by Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=6992 |
| IX-ER10-IX-06 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification Testing |
|
6/23/1981 |
|
What, if any, advice or instructions to the welder are permitted when he is welding a performance qualification test coupon? |
Advice to the welder during performance qualification is not addressed by Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=6992 |
| IX-ER10-IX-07 |
Section IX, Welder Qualification |
|
6/29/1981 |
|
When the same size tubular structural box members are joined in a tee configuration, the weld joint formed on the sides most nearly resembles a flair bevel groove. However, it differs from a normal flair bevel groove in that the depth the flat side extends into the groove is limited to the wall thickness of the tubular member. When the radius of the tubular box corners is larger than the wall thickness, the resulting joint has an open root (not backed). The root opening is typically about 3/16 in. Given the condition described above (open root, nonstandard flair bevel groove) and given that the design requirement is for partial penetration only (first 1/8 in. of groove is discounted), is a welder, whose SMAW qualification test was against backing or a GTAW root, qualified to weld this joint using SMAW only? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=6993 |
| IX-95-27 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
3/19/1996 |
|
May a subcontractor use a WPS supported by a PQR which was qualified by the contracting company and subsequently supplied to the subcontractor? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7033 |
| IX-95-28 |
Section IX, QW-403.10, Short Circuiting Mode |
QW-403.10 |
3/19/1996 |
|
Are the base metal thickness restrictions for the GMAW process short circuiting mode stated in QW-403.10 and QW-404.32 also applicable to fillet weld tests, either in procedure qualifications (QW-451.3, QW-451.4) or in performance qualifications (QW-452.4, QW-452.5, and QW-452.6)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7034 |
| IX-95-29 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
5/30/1996 |
|
If more than one manufacturer or contractor agrees upon the use of one WPS, which is to be followed during production of test weldments for qualification testing, may the welder used to produce the weldments to be tested for qualification of procedures be under the full supervision and control of each manufacturer or contractor during the welding, provided the Quality Control System or Quality Assurance Program of each manufacturer or contractor describes the control of welders? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7035 |
| IX-95-30 |
Section IX, QW-350, Welding Variables for Welders |
QW-350 |
5/30/1996 |
|
Do the essential variables of QW-350 apply to welding operators carrying out corrosion resistant overlay? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7036 |
| IX-95-30 |
Section IX, QW-350, Welding Variables for Welders |
QW-350 |
5/30/1996 |
|
Are welding operators qualified for submerged arc welding also qualified for Electroslag welding and vice versa? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7036 |
| IX-95-30 |
Section IX, QW-350, Welding Variables for Welders |
QW-350 |
5/30/1996 |
|
Is a welding operator qualified to QW-360 and QW-381 of Section IX in submerged arc weld overlay using wire electrode also qualified to use strip electrodes with the same process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7036 |
| IX-95-31 |
Section IX, QW-361.2, Essential Variables -- Machine Welding |
QW-361.2 |
5/30/1996 |
A welding operator has direct visual contact with a pipe weldment that is being welded utilizing machine orbital pipe welding equipment. This welding operator is giving verbal commands to a second welding operator, who does not have eye contact with the weldment and who is positioning the weld head and wire aimers located on the head, remotely, during the welding of the joint in accordance with the verbal commands of the first operator. Each welding operator has been qualified to perform both remote and direct visual control welding. |
Are these welders qualified to make the subject weld in accordance with QW-361.2 even though the welding operator having direct visual control is directing the positioning of the orbital pipe welding equipment verbally and does not have "hands-on" control of the welding head? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7037 |
| IX-95-32 |
Section IX, QW-300.2, Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300.2 |
7/1/1996 |
|
If more than one manufacturer or contractor agrees upon the use of one WPS, which is to be followed during production of test weldments for qualification testing, may the welder used to produce the weldments to be tested for qualification of procedures be under the full supervision and control of each manufacturer or contractor during the welding, provided the Quality Control System or Quality Assurance Program of each manufacturer or contractor describes the control of welders? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7038 |
| IX-95-33 |
Section IX, QW-403.10, Short-Circuiting Mode |
QW-403.10 |
9/24/1996 |
|
Does QW-403.10 limit the base metal thickness qualified to 1.1T for a combination GMAW-S/SMAW PQR test coupon thickness "T" less than ½ in. when used to support a combination GMAW-S/SMAW WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7039 |
| IX-95-34 |
Section IX, QW-202.3, Weld Repair and Buildup |
QW-202.3 |
9/24/1996 |
Assurance of defect-free hardfacing deposits on cast surfaces is often improved if a layer of weld metal is first deposited on the casting, acting as a substrate for the subsequent hardfacing weld metal overlay. |
Does Section IX require qualification of the substrate (e.g., in accordance with QW-202.3 or when the substrate is not included in the design minimum wall thickness in accordance with QW-214) which will be subsequently covered by a hardfacing weld metal overlay? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7040 |
| IX-95-34 |
Section IX, QW-202.3, Weld Repair and Buildup |
QW-202.3 |
9/24/1996 |
Assurance of defect-free hardfacing deposits on cast surfaces is often improved if a layer of weld metal is first deposited on the casting, acting as a substrate for the subsequent hardfacing weld metal overlay. |
If the deposit of the substrate is included in a hardfacing weld metal overlay procedure qualified to QW-216, is evaluation of the substrate to QW-202.3 or QW-214, as applicable, required? |
Section IX does not address qualification of a combination substrate/hardfacing WPS in a single coupon. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7040 |
| IX-95-35 |
Section IX, QW-300.1, Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300.1 |
9/24/1996 |
|
Is it permissible to use ultrasonic examination in lieu of radiography to qualify welders and welding operators in accordance with QW-300.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7041 |
| IX-95-36 |
Section IX, QW-300, Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300 |
9/24/1996 |
|
Would the successful qualification of a welder in a manual or semiautomatic method qualify him to weld in production using a machine or automatic method in the same process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7042 |
| IX-95-36 |
Section IX, QW-300, Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300 |
9/24/1996 |
|
Since the essential variables are the same for both methods, would successful qualification with testing in manual GTAW allow the same welder to weld in production using semiautomatic GTAW without testing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7042 |
| IX-95-37 |
Section IX, QW-404.9, Filler Metals |
QW-404.9 |
9/24/1996 |
|
In accordance with QW-404.9(c), does a change in the wire classification shown in SFA 5.9, with no change in the flux composition, F-Number, or A-Number, require procedure requalification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7043 |
| IX-95-38 |
Section IX, QW-322, Expiration and Renewal of Qualification |
QW-322 |
1/6/1997 |
|
Is it a requirement of QW-322 for a manufacturer to maintain records to demonstrate a welder's or welding operator's continuing qualification for a process from the date of the original qualification test? |
Section IX does not address how conformance to QW-322 is demonstrated. Other book sections may address the maintenance of records. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7044 |
| IX-95-39 |
Section IX, QW-304, Performance Qualification -- Welders |
QW-304 |
1/6/1997 |
|
Would the successful performance qualification of a welder in a manual or semi-automatic type (e.g,. GMAW, GTAW, SAW) per QW-304 qualify the same welder to operate as welding operator in machine or automatic type welding? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7045 |
| IX-95-39 |
Section IX, QW-304, Performance Qualification -- Welders |
QW-304 |
1/6/1997 |
|
If a welder used GMAW (short-circuiting mode) for the root pass and SAW for the hot and fill passes of test coupon, may the test coupon be testing using radiography for the SAW portion of the weld in accordance with QW-304 and QW-306? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7045 |
| IX-95-40 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
1/21/1997 |
Company A was a subsidiary of Company B. Company B sold Company A to Company C, and Company A became a division of Company C. |
May Company A continue to use WPSs and PQRs previously developed by Company B? |
It is the intent of the Code that when a manufacturer or contractor, or part of a manufacturer or contractor, is acquired by a new owner(s), the PQRs and WPSs may be used by the new owner(s) without requalification, provided all of the following are met:
(a) the new owner(s) takes responsibility for the WPSs and PQRs;
(b) the WPSs reflect the name of the new owner(s); and
(c) the Quality Control System/Quality Assurance Program reflects the source of the PQRs as being from the former manufacturer or contractor. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7046 |
| IX-95-41 |
Section IX, QW-453, Procedure/Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hardfacing (Wear-Resistant) and Corrosion-Resistant Overlays |
QW-453 |
3/6/1997 |
Corrosion-resistant weld overlay on P-No. 1 material needs to be carried out with Nickel-Aluminum Bronze using E CuNiAl SMAW electrode (F-No. 37) and ER CuNiAl GMAW filler wire (F-No. 37). |
For procedure qualification of the above to QW-453, can side bend test specimens of 1/8 in. thickness be used, bent to inner diameter of 2 1/16 in., as given for P-No. XX with F-No. 36 under QW466.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7047 |
| IX-95-42 |
Section IX, QW-284, Seam Welding Equipment Qualification |
QW-284 |
5/20/1997 |
When qualifying resistance seam welding equipment for QW-284, testing and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with QW-196. QW-196.2.1 addresses shear test specimens but only deals with spot welding. |
When qualifying seam welding equipment, do the requirements for spot shear test per QW-196.2.1 apply? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7048 |
| IX-95-42 |
Section IX, QW-284, Seam Welding Equipment Qualification |
QW-284 |
5/20/1997 |
When qualifying resistance seam welding equipment for QW-284, testing and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with QW-196. QW-196.2.1 addresses shear test specimens but only deals with spot welding. |
Do the rules of QW-286 for procedures qualification apply for equipment qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7048 |
| IX-98-01 |
Section IX, QB-141.4, Sectioning Tests |
QB-141.4 |
12/15/1997 |
|
In QB-451.3, Note (1), is the Sectioning Test a substitute for the Peel Test? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7049 |
| IX-98-02 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
12/15/1997 |
|
May a manufacturer use another organization's Welding Procedure Specifications in fabrication of pressure vessels contracted to that organization if the manufacturer works to specifications controlling all fabrication processes from material procurement to final delivery including QC examination provided by the contracting organization? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7050 |
| IX-98-03 |
Section IX, QW-451. Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-451 |
12/15/1997 |
|
Does a partial penetration groove weld procedure qualification test assembly qualify for full penetration production groove welds within the ranges indicated in QW451? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7051 |
| IX-98-04 |
Section IX, QW-200.2, Welding Procedure Qualifications |
QW-200.2 |
12/15/1997 |
|
Does ASME Section IX require that a preliminary WPS be attached to the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7052 |
| IX-98-05 |
Section IX, QW453, Procedure/Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hardfacing (Wear-Resistant) and Corrosion-Resistant Overlays |
QW-453 |
4/28/1998 |
|
In making repairs to hardfacing weld metal overlays, does the existing hardfacing weld metal overlay deposit to be repaired constitute a change in the original essential variable(s) (e.g., base material, thickness, etc.) thus requiring a new qualification. |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7053 |
| IX-98-06 |
Section IX, QW-402.12(a) and (c) and QW-402.14, Joints |
QW-402.12(a); QW-402.14 |
4/28/1998 |
|
Do the words "any change exceeding +10%," "change... greater than 10%," "a change ... greater than +10%," and "an increase or decrease of more than 10%," respectively, all indicate a qualified range of 10% above and 10% below the value recorded on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7054 |
| IX-98-07 |
Section IX, QW-410.42, Technique |
QW-410.42 |
4/28/1998 |
|
For PAW hardfacing and corrosion resistant weld metal overlay qualifications, may the full range of oscillation qualified (including the "change of more than 10%") also apply to the combined minimum and maximum oscillation range qualified? (e.g.. would the range qualified for a 1 in. oscillation combined with a 1.5 in. oscillation be 0.9 in.-1.65 in.) |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7055 |
| IX-98-07 |
Section IX, QW-410.42, Technique |
QW-410.42 |
4/28/1998 |
|
May the minimum and maximum oscillation values be combined and qualified on a single hardfacing weld metal overlay test coupon assuming all other essential variables are the same? |
Section IX does not prohibit the qualification of more than one set of essential variables on a single test coupon, provided each set of essential variables is tested in accordance with the requirements of Section IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7055 |
| IX-98-08 |
Section IX, QW-432, F-Numbers |
QW-432 |
4/28/1998 |
|
A WPS is qualified with an SMA electrode that is not certified by the manufacturer as conforming to an AWS classification. Are welders who were previously qualified with an electrode classified as F4, also qualified to use this unclassified electrode that conforms to the deposit chemistry of EXXXX-G, in Table 2 of SFA 5.5 (within the other limitations of QW-350)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7056 |
| IX-98-09 |
Section IX, QW-150 and QW-462.1, Tension Test Specimens for Pipe and Plate |
QW-150; QW-462.1 |
10/9/1998 |
|
Would tensile tests performed in accordance with SA-370 be acceptable for meeting ASME Section IX, QW-462.1(a) and (b)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7057 |
| IX-98-10 |
Section IX, QW-407.1, Post Weld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1 |
10/9/1998 |
|
Is it the intent of Section IX in QW-407.1 to permit reporting the results of more than one PWHT condition on a single report, with a single PQR number, provided all other applicable essential and supplementary essential variables are identical and all required tests are conducted and reported for both conditions? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7058 |
| IX-98-11 |
Section IX, QW-300, Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300 |
10/9/1998 |
|
May Company A retain the Company B employee responsible for welder performance qualification to review the welder qualification documents of both companies and qualify the welders of Company B to the welding program of Company A without further testing of the welders? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7059 |
| IX-98-12 |
Section IX, QW-451, Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-451 |
10/9/1998 |
|
May longitudinal bend specimens be used in lieu of transverse bend specimens when the base metals or the base metal and the weld metal do not differ markedly in bending properties? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7060 |
| IX-98-13 |
Section IX, QW-200.1, Welding Procedure Qualifications |
QW-200.1 |
12/22/1998 |
|
Are all-encompassing terms acceptable when addressing nonessential variables in a WPS (e.g., for backing, "with or without," for root spacing, "unlimited")? |
Section IX does not specify how nonessential variables are to be addressed; however, the terms used must provide direction to the welder/welding operator for making production welds to Code requirements. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7061 |
| IX-98-14 |
Section IX, QW-361.2, Machine Welding Variables for Welding Operators; and QW-381, Corrosion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-361.2; QW-381 |
12/22/1998 |
A multiple layer corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay performance qualification (machine welding) is made with the first layer under Direct Visual control and the second layer Remote Visual control. |
Is the welding operator qualified for both Direct and Remote Visual control techniques applied either in single or multiple layers? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7062 |
| IX-98-14 |
Section IX, QW-361.2, Machine Welding Variables for Welding Operators; and QW-381, Corrosion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-361.2; QW-381 |
12/22/1998 |
A multiple layer corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay performance qualification (machine welding) is made with the first layer under Direct Visual control and the second layer Remote Visual control. |
For the qualification described in the background, may two welding operators qualify on one coupon, provided the requirements of QW-453 and QW-361.2 (which delineate the welding operators "limits of qualification" as per QW-306) are addressed? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7062 |
| IX-98-15 |
Section IX, QW-405.3, Positions |
QW-405.3 |
12/22/1998 |
|
May a single-pass "seal weld" as defined in QW-492, used to seal boiler tubes to a boiler tube sheet, be considered a "cover pass" or a "wash pass" for purposes of exemption from QW-405.3? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7063 |
| IX-98-16 |
Section IX, QW-462.5(a), Chemical Analysis and Hardness Specimen Corrosion-Resistant and Hardfacing Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-462.5(a) |
12/22/1998 |
|
Is it permissible to use the surface of the test coupon as the "approximate fusion line" when determining the minimum finished thickness for corrosion-resistant and hardfacing overlays in accordance with QW-462.5(a)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7064 |
| IX-98-17 |
Section IX, QW-453, Procedure/Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing (Wear Resistant) and Corrosion-Resistant Overlays |
QW-453 |
3/23/1999 |
|
When performing corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay welding operator qualification using a machine GTAW process, are the limitations on thicknesses qualified per QW-453 applicable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7065 |
| IX-98-18 |
Section IX, QW-201.1, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201.1 |
3/23/1999 |
When one of a company's plants is sold, it is not clear if the new owner can use the Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) qualified by the original company, when the original company wishes to continue using those WPS/PQR. |
Company A sells one of its plants to Company B. May both Company A and Company B use the WPSs/PQRs previously qualified by Company A? |
Yes, provided the requirements of QW-201.1 are addressed by Company B. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7066 |
| IX-98-19 |
QW-404, Filler Metals |
QW-404 |
9/24/1999 |
|
Is requalification required when the filler metal specified in the WPS and supporting PQR is moved from one SFA specification to another SFA specification, or the AWS classification is changed, or when a previously unclassified filler is classified by the filler metal manufacturer as conforming to an SFA specification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7067 |
| IX-98-20 |
QW-202.4(b), Dissimilar Base Metal Thickness |
QW-202.4(b) |
6/8/2000 |
|
When welding a corner joint with dissimilar base metal thickness, the thickness of both members must be within the qualified thickness range of the WPS(s) being used. How is the thickness for the thicker member defined in sketches (a), (b), and (c) below? |
For sketch (a), the thicker of T or tS. For sketch (b), the thicker of T or ta. For sketch (c), the thicker of flange a or hub b. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7068 |
| IX-98-20R |
QW-202.4(b), Dissimilar Base Metal Thickness |
QW-202.4(b) |
6/8/2000 |
|
When welding a corner joint with dissimilar base metal thickness, the thickness of both members must be within the qualified thickness range of the WPS(s) being used. How is the thickness for the thicker member defined in sketches (a), (b), and (c) below? |
For sketch (a), the thicker of T or tS . For sketch (b), the thicker of T or tS. For sketch (c), the thicker of flange a or hub b. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7069 |
| IX-ER10-IX-01 |
Section IX, QW-201 |
QW-201 |
6/22/1981 |
|
A manufacturer wishes to qualify a procedure under the following conditions. The manufacturer will use the materials, consumables, equipment, plant, and testing facilities of another organization. The welder producing the test weldments is an employee of the manufacturer who is under the supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. All required testing is then done by the organization providing the stated services. Do the conditions described above meet the requirements of QW-201? |
Yes, provided the representative supervising the welding is an employee of the manufacturer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7070 |
| IX-ER10-IX-02 |
Section IX, QW-304 |
QW-304 |
6/22/1981 |
|
Can a welder be qualified with radiographic examination using GMAW (low-voltage short circuiting type)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7071 |
| IX-92-48 |
Section IX, QW-466, Test Jigs |
QW-466 |
9/30/1992 |
|
In determining the appropriate test jig dimensions of QW-466 to use for bend tests, is it permissible to use the dimensions corresponding to P-No. 35 material when the filler metal is a F-No. 36, even though the base material is other than a P-No. 35 material? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7072 |
| IX-92-49 |
Section IX, QW-466, Test Jigs |
QW-466 |
9/30/1992 |
|
In qualifying a welding procedure which utilizes a F-No. 36 filler of ER CuAl-A1 (SFA 5.7) for corrosion resistant weld metal overlay of a P-No. 1 carbon steel material, is the required mandrel diameter for side bend testing 4t as determined from column A of QW-466.1, QW-466.2 or QW-466.3? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7073 |
| IX-92-50 |
Section IX, QW-403.6, Base Metals |
QW-403.6 |
9/30/1992 |
|
If Heat Affected Zone (HAZ) notch toughness requirements are applicable, does QW-403.6, base metal thickness requirements, apply? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7074 |
| IX-92-51 |
Section IX, QW-451.3 and QW-462.4, Fillet Weld Test Specimens- Procedure, and QW-452.4, Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-451.3; QW-462.4; QW-452.4 |
9/30/1992 |
|
If a welder performs a procedure qualification per QW-462.4(d) using 2 in. NPS pipe and passes, is he qualified for all diameters as outlined in QW-451.3? |
No, per QW-452.4 he is qualified down to 1 in. O.D. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7075 |
| IX-92-52 |
Section IX, QW-462.5, Corrosion-Resistant Overlay Cladding/Hard-Facing Overlay, Chemical Analysis Specimen |
QW-462.5 |
12/14/1992 |
|
May only one chemical analysis specimen be removed from the vertical portion of a 6G positioned hard facing welded PQR coupon when the weld travel direction is reversed every other weld pass resulting in weld beads deposited in vertical-upward and vertical-downward direction? |
Yes, provided a chemical analysis represents each vertical travel direction. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7076 |
| IX-92-53 |
Section IX, QW-452.1, Groove Weld Procedure Qualifications Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-452.1 |
12/14/1992 |
|
A welder has qualified on 3 in. O.D. ½ in. wall pipe in the 1G position. He has also qualified on 1¼ in. O.D. 1/8 in. wall pipe in the 6G position. Is he qualified to weld 1¼ in. O.D. ½ in. wall in all positions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7077 |
| IX-92-54 |
Section IX, QW-214.3, Corrosion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-214.3 |
12/14/1992 |
|
Prior to the 1991 Addenda, did QW-214.3 address the number of chemical analysis tests required for Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay utilizing the GTAW Machine Welding Process in the 5G or 6G position? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7078 |
| IX-92-55 |
Section IX, QW-103.2, Records |
QW-103.2 |
12/14/1992 |
|
Is it acceptable to satisfy the requirements of QW-103.2 for record maintenance, certification, and accessibility by means of an electronic storage medium, e.g., computer database? |
Section IX does not address the media in which records are required to be maintained. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7079 |
| IX-92-56 |
Section IX, QW-451.3, Fillet Weld Tests |
QW-451.3 |
12/14/1992 |
|
A welder performs a fillet weld procedure qualification in accordance with QW-451.3, which fails; therefore, neither the procedure nor the welder are qualified. Is it permissible for the welder to then perform a successful groove weld procedure qualification test and be qualified for grooves and fillets? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7080 |
| IX-92-57 |
Section IX, 1989 Edition A91 Addenda, QW-253, QW-256, and QW-406.3, Maximum Interpass Temperature |
QW-253; QW-256; QW-406.3 |
12/14/1992 |
|
According to the 1991 Addenda of Section IX, is it permissible to revise a WPS by increasing interpass temperature to more than 100°F above that recorded on the supporting PQR when supplementary essential variables do not apply without requalification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7081 |
| IX-92-58 |
Section IX, QW-364, Friction Welding |
QW-364 |
12/14/1992 |
|
For performance qualification, is a friction weld operator required to requalify for each seat size and base metal combination to be qualified to operate the machine? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7082 |
| IX-92-59 |
Section IX, QW-306, Combination of Welding Processes, QW-452.1 and QW-452.3, Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-306; QW-452.1; QW-452.3 |
2/22/1993 |
The combination of welding processes and pipe diameters listed below were used for performance qualification:
(1) 2 in. Sch. 80 (.218) pipe with open butt using GTAW process.
(2) 2 in. Sch. 160 (.343) pipe with consumable insert and fill pass using the GTAW process and the remainder welded with SMAW process.
(3) 6 in. XXS (.864) using SMAW process with backing. |
Using the combinations listed in the Background, in accordance with QW-306, Note 2 of QW-452.1 to determine maximum thickness qualified, and QW-452.3 for minimum diameter qualification, is the welder qualified to weld on unlimited thickness and diameters above 1 in., using either an open butt joint or a consumable insert with the root layer deposited with the GTAW process and the remainder deposited with the SMAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7083 |
| IX-92-60 |
Section IX, QW-214, Corrosion-Resistant Weld Metal Overlay |
QW-214 |
2/22/1993 |
|
When corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay is deposited in a base material groove to a depth that is not included in the design calculations must the deposit be tested as a groove weld? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7084 |
| IX-92-61 |
Section II, Part C, SFA 5.13, Specification for Solid Surfacing Welding Rods and Electrodes |
|
2/22/1993 |
|
May powdered filler metal be classified under Section II, Part C, SFA 5.13? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7085 |
| IX-92-62 |
Section IX, QW-408.2, Shielding Gas |
QW-408.2 |
2/22/1993 |
|
When changing shielding gases of a specific mixture, is it permissible to adjust the nominal percentage(s) of the minor component(s) by +/- 20% without requalifying the procedure? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7086 |
| IX-92-62 |
Section IX, QW-408.2, Shielding Gas |
QW-408.2 |
2/22/1993 |
|
In addition, when the absolute value of +/- 20% times the nominal percentage of a minor component is less than 1%, would it be permissible to make a +/- 1% adjustment to the gas mixture? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7086 |
| IX-92-63 |
Section IX, QW-153.1, Tensile Strength |
QW-153.1 |
2/22/1993 |
|
A welding procedure qualification test coupon is welded using P-No. 23, SB-209, alloy 6061 aluminum base material in the ("o") temper. After welding the test coupon, it is subjected to a "T-6" heat treatment. To establish acceptability of tensile tests per QW-153.1, may the tensile requirements of QW-422 for SB-209, alloy 6061 (T4 and T6 tempers in the welded condition) be used? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7087 |
| IX-92-64 |
Section IX, QW-322, Expiration and Renewal of Qualification |
QW-322 |
5/26/1993 |
A welding operator is in. the process of renewing his/her qualification using machine GTAW welding equipment. During the process the machine malfunctions and burns through the root pass of the test coupon. No operator error is noted. Following the malfunction, the test coupon is repaired using a manual GTAW process. After the repair the machine welding equipment is used to complete the rest of the test coupon. |
May a welding operator performance test coupon being welded for qualification or renewal be repaired prior to testing using a manual welding procedure? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7088 |
| IX-92-65 |
Section IX, QW-423.1, Alternate Base Metals for Welder Qualification |
QW-423.1 |
5/26/1993 |
|
In QW-423.1, is P-No. 42 included in P-No. 4X? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7089 |
| IX-92-66 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
5/26/1993 |
Company A and Company B merge divisions to form a new Company, C. |
May the new Company, C, use PQRs and WPSs developed previously by Company A and Company B? |
Yes, provided operational control is in accordance with QW-201. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7090 |
| IX-92-66 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
5/26/1993 |
Company A and Company B merge divisions to form a new Company, C. |
May the new Company, C, use the central materials laboratory of Company A to develop WPSs and PQRs? |
Yes, provided operational control is in accordance with QW-201. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7090 |
| IX-92-67 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-201 |
5/26/1993 |
|
In a contract involving piping construction work, our company subcontracted the piping prefabrication work to a subcontractor. This subcontractor is managed by our company but has a different name. The subcontractor proceeded to qualify welding procedures which were conducted in the presence and with the approval of our company's welding engineer who monitored the welding of the test coupons and signed approval on the PQRs. The Quality Control System of the subcontractor and our company fully describe the operational control of procedure qualifications. Was our client right in rejecting the use by our company of the subcontractor qualified welding procedures for the erection work of the prefabricated piping? |
This is a contractual issue, which ASME does not address. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7091 |
| IX-92-68 |
Section IX, QW-306, Combination of Welding Processes, and QW-451, Groove Weld Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-306; QW-451 |
6/30/1993 |
|
In using a single set of test specimens to qualify two or more processes or procedures, does Section IX specify a minimum weld deposit thickness to be included in each test specimen from each of the processes or procedures? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7092 |
| IX-92-69 |
Section IX, QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.1 |
6/30/1993 |
|
Is it the intent of QW-409.1 that the heat input, to be recorded on the PQR, be
calculated based on the parameters used at the location where the impact specimens were removed? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7093 |
| IX-92-69 |
QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.1 |
5/19/2005 |
Note: Interpretation IX-92-69 has been withdrawn. |
Note: Interpretation IX-92-69 has been withdrawn. |
Note: Interpretation IX-92-69 has been withdrawn. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7094 |
| IX-92-70 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
9/22/1993 |
|
When a procedure qualification with supplemental notch toughness requirement is conducted with one P-Number material having multiple certifications in different Group Numbers, are WPSs qualified for all combinations of the Group Numbers? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7095 |
| IX-92-70 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
9/22/1993 |
|
In the above question, does one set of HAZ impact specimens, when required, satisfy the requirements of Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7095 |
| IX-92-70 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
9/22/1993 |
|
When a procedure qualification with supplemental notch toughness requirements is conducted with two materials of different P-Numbers each having multiple certifications in different Group Numbers, are WPSs qualified for all combination of the multiple certified Group Numbers of the first P-Number material to the multiple certified Group Numbers of the second P-Number material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7095 |
| IX-92-70 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
9/22/1993 |
|
In the above question, does one set of HAZ impact specimens from each P-Number material, when required, satisfy the requirements of Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7095 |
| IX-92-70 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
9/22/1993 |
|
In Question (3), are materials from the multiple certified Group Numbers qualified for welding a P-Number material to itself? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7095 |
| IX-92-70R |
QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
6/4/2001 |
|
When a procedure qualification with supplemental notch toughness requirement is conducted with one P-Number material having multiple certifications in different Group Numbers, are WPSs qualified for all combinations of the Group Numbers? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7096 |
| IX-92-70R |
QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
6/4/2001 |
|
In the above question, does one set of HAZ impact specimens, when required, satisfy the requirements of Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7096 |
| IX-92-70R |
QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
6/4/2001 |
|
When a procedure qualification with supplemental notch toughness requirement is conducted with two materials of different P-Number each having multiple certifications in different Group Numbers, are WPSs qualified for all combinations of the multiple certified Group Number of the first P-Number material to the multiple certified Group Number of the second P-Number material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7096 |
| IX-92-70R |
QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
6/4/2001 |
|
In the above question, does one set of HAZ impact specimens from each P-Number material, when required, satisfy the requirement of Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7096 |
| IX-92-70R |
QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
6/4/2001 |
|
In Question (3), are materials from the multiple certified Group Numbers qualified for welding a P-Number material to itself?. |
No.
Note: The term "multiple certifications" as used means any material for which a material test report indicates that the material meets all the requirements of two or more specifications, grades, types, or classes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7096 |
| IX-92-71 |
Section IX, QW-302.4, Visual Examination |
QW-302.4 |
9/22/1993 |
|
Are welders or welding operators qualified in accordance with Section IX prior to the 1992 addenda, for which the results of visual examination required by QW-302.4 were not documented on the WPQ, required to requalify in order that visual examination results may be documented? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7097 |
| IX-92-72 |
Section IX, QW-381(c), Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay, QW-453 and QW-461.9, Performance Qualification |
QW-381(c); QW-453; QW-461.9 |
9/22/1993 |
|
May welder qualifications for corrosion-resistant overlays per QW-381 and QW-453 be made on plate, when qualifying for welding on pipe/tubes parallel to the axis of the pipe/ tubes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7098 |
| IX-92-72 |
Section IX, QW-381(c), Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay, QW-453 and QW-461.9, Performance Qualification |
QW-381(c); QW-453; QW-461.9 |
9/22/1993 |
|
Should the side bends required in QW-453 consist of the base metal plus overlay thickness, after surface conditioning per Note 4 of QW-453? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7098 |
| IX-92-72 |
Section IX, QW-381(c), Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay, QW-453 and QW-461.9, Performance Qualification |
QW-381(c); QW-453; QW-461.9 |
9/22/1993 |
|
When the overlay test specimens are less than 3/8 in. thick, may the side bend specimen width be the test specimen thickness? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7098 |
| IX-92-72 |
Section IX, QW-381(c), Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay, QW-453 and QW-461.9, Performance Qualification |
QW-381(c); QW-453; QW-461.9 |
9/22/1993 |
|
May the edges of the overlay be outside of the bent area as long as at least a 1-1/2 in. width of overlay and HAZ are completely within the bend? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7098 |
| IX-92-72 |
Section IX, QW-381(c), Corrosion Resistant Weld Metal Overlay, QW-453 and QW-461.9, Performance Qualification |
QW-381(c); QW-453; QW-461.9 |
9/22/1993 |
|
May QW-461.9 Groove-Pipe be used for the position essential variable rules for welder qualifications on corrosion-resistant overlap? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7098 |
| IX-92-73 |
Section IX, QW-321.3, Welder Qualification After Further Training or Practice |
QW-321.3 |
9/22/1993 |
A welder performance qualification test plate fails to meet the radiographic requirements for qualification. After further training a new performance qualification test plate is welded. |
May the new test plate be evaluated by bend testing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7099 |
| IX-92-74 |
Section IX, QB-402.1, Base Metals |
|
9/22/1993 |
|
When brazing material used for a procedure qualification test is not listed in QB-422 or Appendix C, but is similar to P-No. 107 or S-No. 107 materials listed in QB-422 or Appendix C, may this material be considered as a P-No. 107 or S-No. 107 material in accordance with QB-402.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7100 |
| IX-92-75 |
Section IX, QW-200.4(b), Combination of Welding Procedures |
QW-200.4(b) |
9/22/1993 |
|
When writing multi-process welding procedures per QW-200.4(a), where the tube wall thickness is less than 1 in., using a separate qualification for the root deposit only, must the root deposit qualification coupon be 1/2 in. minimum thickness as stated in QW-200.4(b)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7101 |
| IX-92-76 |
Section IX, QW-462, Test Specimens |
QW-462 |
9/22/1993 |
|
QW-462 defines W as "specimen width, 3/4 in." Is 3/4 in. a minimum or maximum dimension requirement for preparing a reduced section tensile specimen? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7102 |
| IX-92-77 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, Combination of Welding Procedures, and QW-451.4, Fillet Welds Qualified by Groove Weld Tests |
QW-200.4; QW-451.4 |
9/22/1993 |
A butt welding procedure qualification was completed on a pipe with E6010
electrode (F-No. 3) for the root pass and E7018 electrode (F-No. 4) for the remaining process. |
Will the above procedure qualification alone support a WPS to make a fillet weld with E-7018 electrodes (F-No.4) for all the passes for all fillet sizes on all base metal thicknesses when all the other essential variables under QW-253, SMAW process, are the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7103 |
| IX-92-77 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, Combination of Welding Procedures, and QW-451.4, Fillet Welds Qualified by Groove Weld Tests |
QW-200.4; QW-451.4 |
9/22/1993 |
A butt welding procedure qualification was completed on a pipe with E6010
electrode (F-No. 3) for the root pass and E7018 electrode (F-No. 4) for the remaining process. |
Will the above procedure qualification alone support a WPS to make a butt weld with E-7018 electrodes (F-No. 4) for all the passes including the root pass within the limits of qualification of QW-451.1 and within the limits of the essential variables under QW-253, SMAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7103 |
| IX-92-78 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(b), Welding Procedure Qualifications |
QW-200.2(b) |
9/22/1993 |
|
May a company subcontract weld procedure development and qualification including certification of the PQR without a company representative present to witness the welding, testing, and certification? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7104 |
| IX-92-78 |
Section IX, QW-200.2(b), Welding Procedure Qualifications |
QW-200.2(b) |
9/22/1993 |
|
May a company subcontract weld procedure development and qualification including certification of the PQR with a company representative present to witness the welding, testing, and certification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7104 |
| IX-92-79 |
Section IX - 1989 Edition, Addenda 91; QW-151.1, Tension Tests, Reduced Section-Plate, and QW-462.1(a), Test Specimens |
QW-151.1; QW-462.1(a) |
9/22/1993 |
|
Is it permissible to reduce a plate test coupon thickness beyond removing the reinforcement to allow for parallel surfaces? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7105 |
| IX-92-79 |
Section IX - 1989 Edition, Addenda 91; QW-151.1, Tension Tests, Reduced Section-Plate, and QW-462.1(a), Test Specimens |
QW-151.1; QW-462.1(a) |
9/22/1993 |
|
What percentage of the thickness is permissible to be removed for procedure qualification? |
The minimum necessary to obtain parallel surfaces. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7105 |
| IX-92-80 |
Section IX, QW-103, Responsibility, and QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-103; QW-201 |
9/22/1993 |
|
When a company changes names during the course of time must all the historical documents such as PQRs and WPQs be revised to show this new name? |
No, provided there is documented traceability from the new company name to the WPSs and PQRs qualified under the old company name. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7106 |
| IX-92-81 |
Section IX, QW-103.1 and QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-103.1; QW-201 |
10/18/1993 |
|
According to Section IX, para. QW-201, is it permissible for a manufacturer or contractor to have the welding of the test weldments performed by another organization? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7107 |
| IX-92-81 |
Section IX, QW-103.1 and QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-103.1; QW-201 |
10/18/1993 |
|
According to para. QW-201, is it permissible to subcontract the work preparation of test metal for welding and subsequent work on preparation of test specimens from the completed weldment, performance of nondestructive examination, and mechanical test, provided that the manufacturer or contractor accepts the responsibility for any such work? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7107 |
| IX-92-81 |
Section IX, QW-103.1 and QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility |
QW-103.1; QW-201 |
10/18/1993 |
|
If the manufacturer or contractor writes the WPS and the welder used to produce weldments to be tested for qualification of procedures are under full supervision and control of a representative of the manufacturer or contractor during the production of these test weldments, may the welder be an employee of another organization? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7107 |
| IX-92-82 |
Section IX, Code Case 2141, Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, SFA 5.17 and SFA 5.23 |
|
11/22/1993 |
|
Does the "Manufacturer's Data Report" in the Section IX Code Case 2141 mean the following: (a) Manufacturer's Data Report required in PG-112 of SC I; (b) Data Report required in NCA-3770 of Section III; (c) Data Report required in UG-120 of Section VIII, Div. 2; or (d) Manufacturer's Data Reports required in AS-300 of Section VIII, Div. 2? |
A Manufacturer's Data Report form is any data report form that is required in an ASME Code Book. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7108 |
| IX-92-82 |
Section IX, Code Case 2141, Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, SFA 5.17 and SFA 5.23 |
|
11/22/1993 |
|
Is it required to described this Code Case number on procurement and/or manufacturer's specifications and certified material test report of welding consumables? |
Section IX does not address procurement and manufacturer's specifications. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7108 |
| IX-92-83 |
Section IX, QB-415, Brazing Variables |
|
11/22/1993 |
|
Does ASME Section IX permit braze welding qualifications using the rules of Part QW, Welding? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7109 |
| IX-92-83 |
Section IX, QB-415, Brazing Variables |
|
11/22/1993 |
|
May a fabricator qualify hard-facing using the brazing variables listed in QB-415? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7109 |
| IX-92-85 |
Section IX, QB-121 and QB-123, Brazing Test Positions |
|
11/22/1993 |
|
If the test material is oriented at 15 deg. above horizontal (i.e., 75 deg. down from vertical) and the brazing filler metal flows upward by capillary action through the joint, would the brazer then be qualified for both the flat-flow and vertical-upflow positions? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7110 |
| IX-92-86 |
Section IX, QW-100.3, Welding General Requirements |
QW-100.3 |
11/22/1993 |
|
May a hard-facing procedure qualification test that was performed in 1990 on a 1 in. thick test coupon and is used to support a welding procedure specification written in 1993 be used to deposit a hard-facing overlay on base material 1 in. to unlimited thickness? |
Yes. QW-100.3 allows welding procedure specification (WPS) to be supported by procedure qualifications accomplished subsequent to 1962 without amending the WPS to include any variables required by later Editions and Addenda. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7111 |
| IX-92-87 |
Section IX, QW-403.6, Base Metals and QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-403.6; QW-409.1 |
2/14/1994 |
Two PQRs have been qualified to support a WPS with notch toughness requirements and having a qualified base metal thickness range from 5/16 in. to 2 in. inclusive. One PQR was qualified on 1 in. thick material with a maximum heat input of 85,000 J/in. The second was qualified on 5/16 in. thick material with a maximum heat input of 45,000 J/in. All other essential and supplementary essential variables are the same. |
Is this WPS qualified for using 85,000 J/in. max. heat input on thicknesses 5/16 in. to 2 in.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7112 |
| IX-92-87 |
Section IX, QW-403.6, Base Metals and QW-409.1, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-403.6; QW-409.1 |
2/14/1994 |
Two PQRs have been qualified to support a WPS with notch toughness requirements and having a qualified base metal thickness range from 5/16 in. to 2 in. inclusive. One PQR was qualified on 1 in. thick material with a maximum heat input of 85,000 J/in. The second was qualified on 5/16 in. thick material with a maximum heat input of 45,000 J/in. All other essential and supplementary essential variables are the same. |
Is the heat input value of 85,000 J/in. applicable to base metal thicknesses between 5/8 in. to 2 in. and the heat input value of 45,000 J/in. applicable to base metal thicknesses between 5/16 in. and 5/8 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7112 |
| IX-92-88 |
Section IX, QW-409.1 and QW-409.8, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.1; QW-409.8 |
2/14/1994 |
|
Section IX, QW-409.8 and QW-409.1, require that the volts and amps be specified in the WPS. Does Section IX require voltage to be measured at a specific location in the welding circuit or the current to be measured using a specific type of meter (RMS, averaging or other type)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7113 |
| IX-92-89 |
Section IX, QW-452.1, Groove Weld Procedure Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens and QW-452.3, Groove Weld Diameter Limits |
QW-452.1; QW-452.3 |
2/14/1994 |
|
A welder has qualified on 3 in. O.D. 1/2 in. wall pipe in the 1G position and has also qualified on 1 in. O.D. 1/8 in. wall pipe in the 1G position. Is the welder qualified to weld 1 in. O.D. 3/8 in. wall in the 1G position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7114 |
| IX-92-90 |
Section IX, QW-461.9; Performance Qualification Position and Diameter Limitations |
QW-461.9 |
2/14/1994 |
|
A welder has passed two separate tests; one on 5/8 in. O.D. by 0.049 in. thick pipe welded in the 6G position using GTAW process, and another on 1/2 in. thick plate welded in the 1G position using GTAW process. Do these two tests in combination qualify the welder to weld pipe of unlimited diameter in all positions up to 1 in. thick using GTAW? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7115 |
| IX-92-91 |
Section IX, QW-300, General Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300 |
2/14/1994 |
|
Does Section IX prohibit making editorial corrections to welder and welding operator performance qualification records? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7116 |
| IX-92-92 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility, Clarification Request to Interpretation IX-92-07 Date Issued Oct. 7, 1991, File BC91-156 |
QW-201 |
5/20/1994 |
|
Is the term "Organization" as stated in QW-201 and "Company A" in Interpretation IX-92-07 one and the same? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7117 |
| IX-92-92 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility, Clarification Request to Interpretation IX-92-07 Date Issued Oct. 7, 1991, File BC91-156 |
QW-201 |
5/20/1994 |
Two companies are contracted by a client company to undertake pipe work installation on its facility. All stages of the Welding Procedure Qualification Processes for the two contracted companies are witnessed by the client companies representative and the documentation duly stamped and signed as accepted by the client. |
May these procedures be used by the client company? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7117 |
| IX-92-92 |
Section IX, QW-201, Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility, Clarification Request to Interpretation IX-92-07 Date Issued Oct. 7, 1991, File BC91-156 |
QW-201 |
5/20/1994 |
|
Does the client company have to requalify these procedures in order to perform in-house maintenance at a later date using all the same essential and nonessential variables with its own qualified welders? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7117 |
| IX-92-93 |
Section IX, QB-402.1, Brazing Data and Appendix C - Nonmandatory S-Numbers |
|
5/20/1994 |
|
Does the brazing procedure qualification test with a base metal assigned one S-Number, or S-Number plus Group-Number, qualify for all other base metals in the same S-Number grouping? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7118 |
| IX-92-93 |
Section IX, QB-402.1, Brazing Data and Appendix C - Nonmandatory S-Numbers |
|
5/20/1994 |
|
Does the brazing procedure qualification test with dissimilar metals using one metal listed in one S-Number to one specific metal not listed in one S or P-Number qualify for the brazing of all other base metals in the same S-Number to themselves and to the specific base metal without S or P-Number? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7118 |
| IX-92-94 |
Section II, Part C, SFA-5.8 |
|
5/20/1994 |
|
May AWS Classification BAg-34 be considered SFA-5.8 filler metal even though it does not appear in the 1992 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section II, Part C (including the 1992 Addenda)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7119 |
| IX-92-95 |
Section IX, QW-200, General Welding Procedure Qualifications |
QW-200 |
5/20/1994 |
|
May a single WPS be qualified both with PWHT and without PWHT (two PQRs), thereby allowing the WPS to be used with or without PWHT? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7120 |
| IX-92-96 |
Section IX, QW-300, General Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300 |
5/20/1994 |
A welder is qualified on a NPS 2 Sch. 40 pipe test coupon using GTAW 1.6 mm deposited weld metal and SMAW 2.4 mm deposited weld metal. |
Is the SMAW portion of the performance qualification considered welding with backing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7121 |
| IX-92-96 |
Section IX, QW-300, General Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300 |
5/20/1994 |
A welder is qualified on a NPS 2 Sch. 40 pipe test coupon using GTAW 1.6 mm deposited weld metal and SMAW 2.4 mm deposited weld metal. |
Is the welder qualified to weld NPS 4 single welded groove weld without backing using the SMAW process only? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7121 |
| IX-92-97 |
Section IX, QW-200.4(a), Combination of Welding Procedures |
QW-200.4(a) |
5/20/1994 |
|
According to QW-200.4(a), when a qualified WPS for a combination process is available, must a new WPS be generated if only one of the processes is to be used in production, provided all requirements of Section IX for the process used are met? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7122 |
| IX-92-98 |
Section IX, Appendix C, Nonmandatory S-Numbers |
|
5/20/1994 |
|
May steel produced to ASTM A-108 Grade 1018, UNS G10180, be considered S-1 material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7123 |
| IX-92-99 |
Section IX, QW-432.6, F-Numbers and Section II, Part C, SFA-5.29, 1992 Addenda |
QW-432.6 |
6/10/1994 |
|
May AWS 5.24 ER Zr4 be considered as an F-No. 61 filler metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7124 |
| IX-95-01 |
Section IX, QW-200.1(b), General Welding Procedure Qualifications and QW-402.4, Joints |
QW-200.1(b); QW-402.4 |
9/21/1994 |
|
If a WPS states that the GTAW process shall be used on root and second pass of open root or metal backed groove joints and the SMAW process shall be used on the remainder of the groove joint, is it necessary to state that the SMAW portion of the WPS must be performed with backing (i.e., the GTAW process)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7125 |
| IX-95-02 |
Section IX, QW-462, Test Specimens |
QW-462 |
9/21/1994 |
|
What are the minimum and maximum tolerances for specimens shown in QW-462, where the figures show "approximate" dimensions? |
As stated in the Foreword, "The Code does not fully address tolerances. When dimensions, sizes, or other parameters are not specified with tolerances, the values of these parameters are considered nominal and allowable tolerance or local variances may be considered acceptable when based on engineering judgment and standard practices as determined by the designer." |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7126 |
| IX-95-03 |
Section IX, QW-202.2(b), Groove and Fillet Weld Tests and QW-202.3(b), Weld Repair and Buildup Tests |
QW-202.2(b); QW-202.3(b) |
9/21/1994 |
Procedure Qualification was performed by making a full penetration weld on 1½ in. thick plate. Paragraph QW-202.2(b) states that qualification on 1½ in. or thicker base metal qualifies for making partial penetration welds on base metals with no upper limit of base metal thickness. No minimum thickness of base metal is addressed. |
Does qualification of 1½ in. thick base metal qualify for making partial penetration groove welds on base metals which are less than 3/16 in. thick? |
No. See para. QW-451.1 for minimum base metal thicknesses. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7127 |
| IX-95-03 |
Section IX, QW-202.2(b), Groove and Fillet Weld Tests and QW-202.3(b), Weld Repair and Buildup Tests |
QW-202.2(b); QW-202.3(b) |
9/21/1994 |
Procedure qualification was performed by making a full penetration weld on 1½ in. thick plate. Paragraph QW-202.3(b) states that qualification on 1½ in. thick or thicker base metal qualifies for making weld repairs or weld build-ups on base metals of unlimited thickness. |
Does qualification on 1½ in. base metal qualify for making weld repairs or weld build-ups on base metals which are less than 3/16 in. thick? |
No. See para. QW-451.1 for minimum base metal thicknesses. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7127 |
| IX-95-04 |
Section IX, QW-452.3, Groove Weld Diameter Limits and Submerged Arc Wire Flux Combination |
QW-452.3 |
9/21/1994 |
|
According to para. QW-452.3 is the inside diameter an essential variable for performance qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7128 |
| IX-95-04 |
Section IX, QW-452.3, Groove Weld Diameter Limits and Submerged Arc Wire Flux Combination |
QW-452.3 |
9/21/1994 |
WPS for SAW process was qualified with a wire flux combination classified as F6P0-EL8, using one trade name for flux. This WPS was in use for several years. Now the flux manufacturer has changed the classification to F7P2-EL8 without changing the trade name of flux. The flux trade name is mentioned on the WPS and PQR along with the former AWS classification. |
Is it required to requalify this WPS due to the change in the AWS class of the wire flux combination by the flux manufacturer without changing its Trade Name? |
Yes. See para. QW-404.9(a). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7128 |
| IX-95-05 |
Section IX, QW-422, P-Numbers |
QW-422 |
9/21/1994 |
|
May SB-564 UNS N08825 be considered as P-No. 45, since it has identical properties to SB-425 UNS N08825 that is assigned P-No. 45 in QW-422? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7129 |
| IX-95-06 |
Section IX, QW-153.1, Tension Tests |
QW-153.1 |
9/21/1994 |
|
If a tensile specimen breaks in the weld metal, below the weld metal's minimum specified tensile requirement, but not below the minimum tensile strength specified for the base metal, is the PQR considered acceptable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7130 |
| IX-95-07 |
Section IX, QW-420.2, S-Numbers |
QW-420.2 |
3/17/1995 |
|
When qualifying a welding procedure using S1 group 2 for API 5LX60 pipe joining to MSS SP-75 or ASTM A860 WPHY-65 fittings, or when joining WPHY-60 fittings to each other, is it permissible to use the corresponding S-Number for the fitting as the same grade of high strength pipe when the physical properties are similar? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7131 |
| IX-95-08 |
Section IX, QW-462.4(a), Fillet Weld Procedure |
QW-462.4(a) |
3/17/1995 |
|
When T2 is greater than 3/4 in. in Fig. QW-462.4(a), what is the maximum size fillet weld required? |
3/4 in. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7132 |
| IX-95-08 |
Section IX, QW-462.4(a), Fillet Weld Procedure |
QW-462.4(a) |
3/17/1995 |
|
In QW-462.4(a), what does "size of fillet = thickness of T2" mean? |
The length of each fillet leg(s) shall be nominally equal to the thickness of T2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7132 |
| IX-95-08 |
Section IX, QW-462.4(a), Fillet Weld Procedure |
QW-462.4(a) |
3/17/1995 |
|
Is there a tolerance for the fillet leg size? |
No. As stated in the 1992 Addenda to the Foreword, when tolerances are not specified, dimensions are considered nominal and allowable tolerances or local variances may be considered acceptable when based on engineering judgement and standard practices as determined by the designer. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7132 |
| IX-95-09 |
Section IX, QW-153, Acceptance Criteria--Tension Tests |
QW-153 |
3/17/1995 |
|
When welds between base metals of different minimum specified tensile strengths are being tested and tensile failure occurs in either of the base metals, does the reference to base metal within QW-153.1(d) mean the base metal with the lower minimum specified tensile strength? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7133 |
| IX-95-10 |
Section IX, QW-200.4, Combination of Welding Procedures |
QW-200.4 |
3/17/1995 |
|
May a single process WPS be qualified by a combination process PQR where no essential variables for the process are changed? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7134 |
| IX-95-11 |
Section IX, QW-408, Gas |
QW-408 |
3/17/1995 |
|
Is it required to indicate the purity level by percent composition or descriptive terms of a single shielding gas on the WPS and on the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7135 |
| IX-95-12 |
Section IX, QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4 |
3/17/1995 |
|
Does QW-202.4 include butt joints and corner joints when joining dissimilar base metal thicknesses when prepared with a groove? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7136 |
| IX-95-13 |
Section IX, 1989 Addenda, QW-203, Limits of Qualified Positions for Procedures Section II Part C, 1989 Addenda, SFA 5.1 and 5.5 |
QW-203 |
6/15/1995 |
|
Do the requirements for classification of filler metals in accordance with ASME Section II Part C apply to the qualification of welding and brazing procedures in accordance with Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7137 |
| IX-95-14 |
Section IX, QW-300.3, Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300.3 |
6/15/1995 |
|
Are there any circumstances under which a non-employee person or organization can represent one or more participating organizations during welding of the test coupon in accordance with the requirements of QW-300.3? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7138 |
| IX-95-15 |
Section IX, QW-160, Guided-Bend Tests and QW-466 Note (b)- Test Jigs |
QW-160; QW-466 |
6/15/1995 |
|
Is it acceptable to measure the percent elongation of the tensile specimens in lieu of bend specimens to measure the ductility for welding procedure qualification acceptance? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7139 |
| IX-95-16 |
Section IX, QW-255, Welding Variables Procedure Specifications for FCAW and QW- 408.2, Gas |
QW-255 |
6/15/1995 |
|
May a FCAW welding procedure qualified without shielding gas, be used with a shielding gas without requalification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7140 |
| IX-95-17 |
Section IX, QW-302.4, Visual Examination |
QW-302.4 |
10/19/1995 |
|
For the fillet weld coupon in welder performance qualification, does the macro examination required per QW-452.5 exempt the visual examination required per QW-302.4? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7141 |
| IX-95-17 |
Section IX, QW-302.4, Visual Examination |
QW-302.4 |
10/19/1995 |
|
Does the visual examination of the fillet weld test coupon required per QW-302.4 refer to the final weld face side only? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7141 |
| IX-95-18 |
Section IX, QW-409.8, Electrical Characteristics |
QW-409.8 |
10/19/1995 |
|
Does Section IX require that a separate amperage range be specified for each filler metal size listed in the WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7142 |
| IX-95-19 |
Section IX, QW-300.3, Welding Performance Qualifications and QW-322.1(b), Expiration of Welder Qualification |
QW-300.3; QW-322.1(b) |
10/19/1995 |
A welder simultaneously qualifies for ten different contractors in accordance with QW-300.3. QW-300.3 requires the contractor that rejects a welder to notify the other contractors who participated in the simultaneous test that the welder's qualification has been revoked. One of the contractors subsequently revokes the welder's qualification for specific reason in accordance with QW-322.1(b). |
Are the other nine contractors who qualified the welder simultaneously required to revoke the welder's qualification per QW-322.1(b)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7143 |
| IX-95-19 |
Section IX, QW-300.3, Welding Performance Qualifications and QW-322.1(b), Expiration of Welder Qualification |
QW-300.3; QW-322.1(b) |
10/19/1995 |
A welder simultaneously qualifies for ten different contractors in accordance with QW-300.3. QW-300.3 requires the contractor that rejects a welder to notify the other contractors who participated in the simultaneous test that the welder's qualification has been revoked. One of the contractors subsequently revokes the welder's qualification for specific reason in accordance with QW-322.1(b). |
When a participating contractor revokes a welder's qualification for specific reason, does QW-300.3 require the other participating contractors to retest the welder or welding operator? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7143 |
| IX-95-20 |
Section IX, QW-300, Welding Performance Qualification |
QW-300 |
10/19/1995 |
|
If the manufacturer or contractor writes the WPS and the welder used to produce the weldments to be tested for qualification of procedures is under the full supervision and control of the manufacturer or contractor during the production of these test weldments, may the welder be a contracted employee, provided the Quality Control system or Quality Assurance Program of the manufacturer or contractor describes the control of contracted welders? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7144 |
| IX-95-21 |
Section IX, QW-403.5, Base Metals |
QW-403.5 |
10/19/1995 |
A PQR is qualified in accordance with Section IX, with supplementary essential variables, using a material from British Standard 1501-224-490A-LT50. |
May this PQR be used to support a WPS utilizing a P-Number 1, Group Number 2 material with supplementary essential variables? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7145 |
| IX-95-22 |
Section IX, QW-424, Base Metals Used for Procedure Qualification |
QW-424 |
12/28/1995 |
|
Does a procedure qualification using an unassigned metal to an assigned P-numbered metal qualify for welding the base metals to themselves using all the nonessential, essential, and supplementary essential variables qualified? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7146 |
| IX-95-23 |
Section IX, QW-453 Notes (3) and (10), Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing and Corrosion-Resistant Overlays |
QW-453 |
12/28/1995 |
|
Notes (3) and (10) of QW-453 require a liquid penetrant examination of the surface of the test coupon for hardfacing procedure and performance qualifications respectively. May the acceptance standards of QW-195.2 or other standards deemed appropriate by the qualifying organization be used as acceptance criteria? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7147 |
| IX-95-23 |
Section IX, QW-453 Notes (3) and (10), Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing and Corrosion-Resistant Overlays |
QW-453 |
12/28/1995 |
|
Must the acceptance criteria be specified on the WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=7147 |
| IX-13-21 |
BPV Section IX; QG-108 - Current Edition |
QG-108 |
8/27/2013 |
|
In the 2013 Edition of Section IX, QG-108 requires that all new qualifications of joining processes and personnel be in accordance with the current edition. In previous editions of Section IX, the foreword indicated that new editions became mandatory six months after date of issue. Does that requirement apply to the 2013 edition? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=220 |
| IX-13-22 |
SC IX; QW 452.3 Groove-Weld Diameter Limits |
QW-452.3 |
8/27/2013 |
|
Does QW-452.3 apply to welding operators? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=85 |
| IX-13-22 |
SC IX; QW 452.3 Groove-Weld Diameter Limits |
QW-452.3 |
8/27/2013 |
|
Does QW-452.3 apply to welders? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=85 |
| IX-13-22 |
SC IX; QW 452.3 Groove-Weld Diameter Limits |
QW-452.3 |
8/27/2013 |
|
If a welder qualifies by making a groove weld on NPS 2 pipe, is the welder qualifed to weld NPS 3/4 pipe (outside diameter 1.04 in.)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=85 |
| IX-13-23 |
SC IX; QW-405 - string/weave technique |
QW-405 |
12/5/2013 |
A procedure qualification test coupon is performed in the 6G position, using a manual or semi-automatic welding process, with weld progression being vertical uphill. |
When notch toughness qualification is not applicable, does a change from stringer bead to weave technique require requalification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=109 |
| IX-13-23 |
SC IX; QW-405 - string/weave technique |
QW-405 |
12/5/2013 |
A procedure qualification test coupon is performed in the 6G position, using a manual or semi-automatic welding process, with weld progression being vertical uphill. |
When notch toughness qualification is applicable, does a change from stringer bead to weave technique require requalification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=109 |
| IX-13-17 |
SC IX; QW-404.4 and QW-404.30 (Change in F Number and Base Metal Thickness Range) |
QW-404.4; QW-404.30 |
8/27/2013 |
A WPS with supporting PQR was written and qualified without impact testing in 1978 to the 1977 Code without addenda on a NPS 2 (EN50) diameter x 0.432 inch (11 mm) wall thickness pipe. The procedure was qualified in 6G position using an E6011 (F-No. 3) electrode on the root pass and completed with two fill passes with E7018 (F-No. 4) electrode. The deposit thickness for the root and fill passes was not recorded on the PQR or specified individually on the WPS. |
Provided the WPS and PQR meet all requirements of the 1977 edition of ASME Section IX Code may the WPS continue to be used without revision for work being completed to the 1977 ASME Code? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=334 |
| IX-13-17 |
SC IX; QW-404.4 and QW-404.30 (Change in F Number and Base Metal Thickness Range) |
QW-404.4; QW-404.30 |
8/27/2013 |
A WPS with supporting PQR was written and qualified without impact testing in 1978 to the 1977 Code without addenda on a NPS 2 (EN50) diameter x 0.432 inch (11 mm) wall thickness pipe. The procedure was qualified in 6G position using an E6011 (F-No. 3) electrode on the root pass and completed with two fill passes with E7018 (F-No. 4) electrode. The deposit thickness for the root and fill passes was not recorded on the PQR or specified individually on the WPS. |
May a new WPS be written or revised without specifying weld metal thickness range for each welding electrode (E6011 & E7018) with the WPS prepared to the 2010 edition of ASME Section IX Code with 2011a addenda using the PQR qualified to the 1977 Code? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=334 |
| IX-13-17 |
SC IX; QW-404.4 and QW-404.30 (Change in F Number and Base Metal Thickness Range) |
QW-404.4; QW-404.30 |
8/27/2013 |
A WPS with supporting PQR was written and qualified without impact testing in 1978 to the 1977 Code without addenda on a NPS 2 (EN50) diameter x 0.432 inch (11 mm) wall thickness pipe. The procedure was qualified in 6G position using an E6011 (F-No. 3) electrode on the root pass and completed with two fill passes with E7018 (F-No. 4) electrode. The deposit thickness for the root and fill passes was not recorded on the PQR or specified individually on the WPS. |
Is the deposit thickness required to be recorded individually on the PQR and WPS for each F Number electrode used for the root pass deposited with the E6011 electrode and the fill passes deposited with E7018 electrodes qualified to the 2010 edition of ASME Section IX Code with 2011a addenda? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=334 |
| IX-13-18 |
SC IX; Stud Welding Procedure Qualification per QW-261 |
QW-261 |
8/27/2013 |
The requirements in QW-261. Stud Welding, essential variable QW-402.8 address the stud size and shape. Essential variable QW-403.17 addresses base metal and stud material P-Numbers, however, there are no requirements regarding base metal thickness. |
Is the base metal thickness a variable for stud welding? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=203 |
| IX-13-27 |
SC IX; QW-202.2 - WPS Qualification Using Bar Stock Test Coupon |
QW-202.2 |
2/27/2014 |
A test coupon is prepared using 2" diameter bar stock with a 3/8" deep circumferential groove that is welded flush with the OD of the bar. A 1-1/4" diameter hole is bored in the center, effectively making the test coupon a 2" OD "pipe" having a 3/8" wall thickness. |
Does Section IX address the qualified base metal thickness range for test coupons prepared using bar stock.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=369 |
| IX-13-19 |
BPV Section IX; QW-404.12 - Hardfacing Filler Metal Classification |
QW-404.12 |
8/27/2013 |
|
A PQR shows SFA-5.21 metal cored filler metal classification ERCCoCr-A was used to qualify GTAW hard-facing overlay WPS. Does this PQR support a GTAW hard-facing overlay WPS using SFA-5.21 bare (solid) filler metal classification ERCoCr-A? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=348 |
| IX-13-20 |
SC IX; QW-201 and QW-300.3 |
QW-201; QW-300.3 |
8/27/2013 |
|
When preparing Procedure Qualification Records (PQR), and Welding Performance Qualification (WPQ) test records in accordance with the requirements of QW-200 and QW-300, is it required to use the word “Certify” on the PQR and WPQ documents? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=49 |
| IX-13-20 |
SC IX; QW-201 and QW-300.3 |
QW-201; QW-300.3 |
8/27/2013 |
|
Are Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) required to be certified? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=49 |
| IX-13-20 |
SC IX; QW-201 and QW-300.3 |
QW-201; QW-300.3 |
8/27/2013 |
|
Is it required that a manufacturer or contractor be an ASME certificate holder in order to certify qualification records? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=49 |
| IX-15-08 |
SC IX; QW-452.1(b) - Welding of Joint by more than one Welder |
QW-452.1(b) |
9/11/2014 |
|
Can Welder 1 and Welder 2, both qualified to deposit 1/2" (13 mm) using the Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) process, each deposit 1/2 in. (13 mm) into a 1 in. (25 mm) groove-weld thickness, with Welder 1 depositing the first 1/2 in. (13 mm) of weld metal and Welder 2 depositing the remaining 1/2 in. (13 mm) of weld metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=677 |
| IX-15-09 |
SC IX; QW-151.2(d) - Reduced Section Tension Tests on Pipes |
QW-151.2(d) |
9/18/2014 |
ASME Section IX, QW-151.2(d), on Reduced Section Tension Test on Pipe, specifies that “When multiple specimens are necessary, the entire thickness shall be mechanically cut into a minimum number of approximately equal strips of a size that can be tested in the available equipment.” However, substantial cross sectional area is lost while splitting the entire thickness for multiple specimens, resulting into untested area at the mid-thickness. By allowing specimens from adjacent areas, full thickness will get tested. Other international standards allow the same. |
Is it permissible to take specimens from adjacent locations, one sample representing the outer thickness and the other, the inner side of the thickness, with overlapping areas in the mid-thickness, instead of cutting the entire thickness at one location into multiple strips, for one set of reduced section tension test specimens? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=679 |
| IX-15-12 |
SC IX; QW-453 and QW-462.5(a) - Hardfacing Hardness Test Locations |
QW-453; QW-462.5(a) |
11/26/2014 |
|
Is it required that hardness testing per QW-453 and QW-462.5(a) shall be located at the area where the highest amperage readings were observed on the test coupon? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=684 |
| IX-15-10 |
SC IX; QW-200.2(b) & Form QW-483 - Certification of the PQR |
QW-200.2(b); QW-483 |
9/18/2014 |
|
Is it a requirement that the laboratory performing the mechanical testing of the PQR coupon certify and sign the PQR, in addition to it being certified and signed by the Organization? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=715 |
|
SC IX; QW-217(a) - Welding Procedure Qualification with Cladding Plate |
QW-217(a) |
11/12/2015 |
|
When constructing a vessel using clad plate, a WPS is to be qualified following the provisions of QW-217(a), since the strength of the cladding will be considered in the design calculations. Does the tensile testing acceptance criteria of QW-153.1(b) apply? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=788 |
|
SC IX; QW-217(a) - Welding Procedure Qualification with Cladding Plate |
QW-217(a) |
11/12/2015 |
|
If the reply to Question (1) is "No", is the tensile testing acceptance criteria based upon the tensile strength of the base metal substrate per QW-153.1(a)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=788 |
| IX-15-13 |
SC IX; QW-322.1 - Expiration of Qualification |
QW-322.1 |
11/26/2014 |
A Welder is qualified performing a groove weld using combination of the Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) and Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) process(es). The welder then performs separate fillet welds using the GTAW and SMAW processes within the required six (6) month period to extend his qualifications. QW-322.1 (a) (1) states that all a welder has to do is too weld with the process for which he was qualified, under the supervision and control of the qualifying organization(s) to extend his qualification for an additional six (6) months. |
May a welder qualified to weld a groove weld using the combination of the Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) process and the Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) process extend his qualifications for an additional six (6) months by welding separate fillet welds with the GTAW process and the SMAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=805 |
|
SC IX; QW-193.1 - Tube to tubesheet welding procedure qualification |
QW-193.1 |
2/2/2015 |
Ten mockup welds are required to qualify each tube-to-tubesheet procedure. The mockup assembly shall essentially duplicate the tube hole configuration and tube-to-tubesheet joint design within the limits of the essential variables of QW-288. |
When performing tube to tubesheet welding procedure qualifications may the ten required consecutive welds be made in a straight line on the tubesheet test assembly, rather than the actual production tubesheet hole pattern, provided the ligament dimensions are correct? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=843 |
| IX-15-14 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 - Qualified Base Metal Thickness with Impacts |
QW-403.6 |
12/1/2014 |
A SMAW procedure qualification test coupon consisting of two plates with the same P-Number but different Group numbers, and of different base metal thicknesses is groove welded. The thinner plate, T1 = 0.24 in. thick, and the thicker plate, T2 = 3/8 in. thick. Impact testing is required. |
Does this test coupon qualify the WPS for a base metal thickness range of 0.120 in. to 0.75 in.? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=852 |
| IX-15-14 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 - Qualified Base Metal Thickness with Impacts |
QW-403.6 |
12/1/2014 |
A SMAW procedure qualification test coupon consisting of two plates with the same P-Number but different Group numbers, and of different base metal thicknesses is groove welded. The thinner plate, T1 = 0.24 in. thick, and the thicker plate, T2 = 3/8 in. thick. Impact testing is required. |
Does this test coupon qualify the WPS for a base metal thickness range of 0.120 in. to 0.480 in. for the T1 Group Number, and 0.375 in. to 0.75 in. for the T2 Group Number? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=852 |
| IX-15-15 |
SC IX; QW-403.5 - Procedure Qualification with Dissimilar Base Materials |
QW-403.5 |
12/1/2014 |
A test coupon has been welded using SA-333 Gr. 6 (P-No.1 Group 1) to SA-350 Gr. LF2 (P-No.1 Group 2) resulting in an impact tested (weld and both heat-affected zones) Procedure Qualification Record. |
May a WPS be written, supported by this PQR using the variables qualified, for welding all P-No.1 Group 2 materials to themselves, e.g. API 5L X65? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=861 |
| IX-15-16 |
SC IX; QG-102 - Procedure Qualification Record |
|
12/1/2014 |
|
Is it permissible to reference and attach a test report to a PQR form in lieu of transferring the test results to the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=899 |
| IX-15-17 |
SC IX; QW-253.1,QW-256.1 - Weld overlay procedure qualification |
QW-253.1; QW-256.1 |
12/1/2014 |
Material for the shell of a heat exchanger is SA516, Gr.70 (impact tested) plus 3 mm Monel Clad. Nozzles are SA333,.Gr. 6 and SA350, LF2, CL1 which are required to be impact tested and post weld heat treated. The cladding has been stripped from the longitudinal seam of the shell. The stripped back areas need to be re-clad with monel. The welding procedures for the shell and nozzles are qualified with impact testing. Fabrication is to ASME Section VIII, Division 1. |
Is it acceptable to perform a weld overlay qualification on the outside diameter of a pipe though in the actual job it is needed on the inside diameter? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=902 |
| IX-15-18 |
SC IX; QW-199 - Upset Welding |
QW-199 |
12/1/2014 |
|
May a WPS for Upset Welding (UW) be qualified in accordance with the rules of ASME Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=927 |
| IX-15-20 |
SC IX; QW-288.1(c) Tube-To-Tubesheet Essential Variables - qualified tube wall thickness |
QW-288.1(c) |
12/1/2014 |
|
Does a tube-to-tubesheet PQR with specified tube wall thickness of 2.77 mm qualify a tube-to-tubesheet WPS of any specified tube wall thickness greater than 2.5 mm? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=945 |
|
SC IX; QW-153(c) - Room Temperature Tensile strength |
QW-153(c) |
5/26/2015 |
|
Does QW-153.1(c) allow the minimum room temperature tensile strength of a procedure qualification weld test specimen to be less than that specified for the base material welded, (other than as provided for in the applicable ASME B&PV Code Section)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=954 |
| IX-15-21 |
SC IX; QW-408.2, Shielding Gas Variable |
QW-408.2 |
12/1/2014 |
|
For a single shielding gas or combination of shielding gases, is a change in the purity of the shielding gas an essential variable? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9691 |
| IX-15-22 |
SC IX; QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
12/1/2014 |
A PQR is completed with PWHT at 625ºC for 4 hours holding time where supplementary essential variable QW-407.2 applies. |
For a PQR, may PWHT at 625°C for 4 hours total holding time be completed in either a single cycle of 4 hours or in 2 cycles of 2 hours holding time? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9708 |
| IX-15-22 |
SC IX; QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
12/1/2014 |
A PQR is completed with PWHT at 625ºC for 4 hours holding time where supplementary essential variable QW-407.2 applies. |
Is the WPS qualified to complete an initial weld with PWHT at 625°C for 2 hours holding time followed by 1 repair weld completed on the weld with a PWHT holding time after the weld repair of 2 hours at 625ºC resulting in a total PWHT holding time of 4 hours? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9708 |
|
SC IX; QW-408.9 |
QW-408.9 |
2/2/2015 |
|
Does QW-408.9 require backing gas (gas purge) to be applied for fillet (attachment) welds with P-No. 4X base metal and F-No. 4X weld filler metal when the WPS was qualified with a groove weld with backing gas? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9711 |
| IX-15-23 |
SC IX; QW-193 - Test of Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint |
QW-193 |
12/1/2014 |
|
When performing a tube-to-tubesheet procedure qualification test in accordance with QW-193, is it required to perform only the macro examination required by QW-193.1.3? |
No. The test acceptance criteria specified in QW-193.1.1 through QW-193.1.3 shall apply. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9721 |
|
SC IX; QW-401.3, QW-407.1 |
QW-401.3; QW-407.1 |
2/2/2015 |
A WPS for P-No. 1 material includes a postweld heat treatment between 635 deg C and 665 deg C and is supported by a PQR which includes toughness testing at -46 deg C. The application requires toughness testing at -51 deg C so an additional test coupon was welded and postweld heat treated at 620 deg C. Both 620 deg C and 665 deg C are below the lower transformation temperature of the P-No. 1 material being welded. |
Does the additional qualification weld postweld heat treated at 620 deg C need to include the tension test and bend test specimens to support the WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9740 |
|
SC IX; QW-401.3, QW-407.1 |
QW-401.3; QW-407.1 |
2/2/2015 |
A WPS for P-No. 1 material includes a postweld heat treatment between 635 deg C and 665 deg C and is supported by a PQR which includes toughness testing at -46 deg C. The application requires toughness testing at -51 deg C so an additional test coupon was welded and postweld heat treated at 620 deg C. Both 620 deg C and 665 deg C are below the lower transformation temperature of the P-No. 1 material being welded. |
Does the additional qualification weld postweld heat treated at 620 deg C need to include the toughness specimens tested at -51 deg C to support the WPS for the specific application? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9740 |
|
SC IX; QW-40412(e) - Electrode for Non Impact Job |
QW-40412(e) |
5/26/2015 |
|
May a WPS qualified with impact testing and E7018-1 electrodes be revised to allow welding with E7018 electrodes for non-impact testing applications? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9762 |
|
SC IX; QW-402.2 - Backing |
QW-402.2 |
8/24/2015 |
A company is electron beam welding and all the welds deposited in the assembly are partial penetration welds. Table QW-260 considers QW-402.2 for the addition or deletion of backing an essential variable. The definition of backing in QG-109.2 states backing is material used to facilitate a complete joint penetration. |
Is a partial penetration electron beam weld considered a weld with backing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9770 |
|
SC IX; QF-301.4 and QF-305.1(a) - Fusing Machine Operator Qualification |
|
2/2/2015 |
QF-304.1, Record of Tests, requires that fusing machine operator performance qualification (FPQ) tests shall include the qualified ranges of essential performance variables, the type of tests performed, and test results for each fusing machine operator. QF-305.1(a), Testing, requires that qualification testing shall be performed on test coupons in accordance with QF-311 and the following requirements: (a) The data required by QF-130 shall be recorded for each fusing machine operator. |
Are the variables listed in QF-132, Data Acquisition Record Review, required to be recorded for the fusing machine operator performance qualification record? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9777 |
|
SC IX; QW-193.1.3(d) - Macro Specimen of Tube-to-tubesheet Joint |
QW-193.1.3(d) |
2/2/2015 |
A Manufacturer qualifies a tube-to-tubesheet weld procedure using a 10 tube mockup assembly per QW-193 with groove weld design where the depth of groove weld preparation is 2.0 mm. The tubesheet was cross-sectioned and the welds were examined per the requirements of QW-193.1.3. The requirements of QW-193.1.3(a-c, e) were met. All qualification cross-sectioned welds were found to have a minimum penetration depth of 1.7 mm (i.e. complete penetration to within 0.4 mm of the root of the weld). |
Are the tube-to-tubesheet welds acceptable per the requirement of paragraph QW-193.1.3(d)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9785 |
|
SC IX; QW-407.1(b) - PWHT within a specified range |
QW-407.1(b) |
5/26/2015 |
A WPS exists for welding P-No. 45 material and is supported by a PQR that has a PWHT temperature of 2100°F. Essential variable QW-407.1 applies. The existing WPS requires PWHT at 2100°F. |
May a new WPS be written with a PWHT temperature of 1625°F using an existing PQR that records a PWHT temperature of 2100°F and was welded using a WPS with a specified PWHT range of 2100°F? |
No, the PWHT temperature must be within the specified temperature range qualified by the PQR. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9787 |
|
ASME Section IX, Tables QW-451.1, QW-452.3 and Table QW-461.9. applicability to typical nozzle welds |
QW-451.1; QW-452.3; QW-461.9 |
2/2/2015 |
A 1.125 in. OD stub tube having a wall thickness of 0.180 in. is to be welded into a header having a wall thickness of 2.677 in. The weld detail will apply a partial penetration groove weld in combination with an external fillet weld such as shown in Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (u) of Section VIII, Division 1 (2013 Edition). The weld will be completed in the flat position by a welder qualified on a weld test coupon prepared using plate and welded in the 2G position. |
Do the procedure qualification limits of Table QW-451.1 require the WPS selected to deposit the weld joint described above to be qualified for a base metal thickness range (T) encompassing the thicknesses of both the stub tube and the header? |
Yes. See also paragraph QW-202.2(b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9795 |
|
ASME Section IX, Tables QW-451.1, QW-452.3 and Table QW-461.9. applicability to typical nozzle welds |
QW-451.1; QW-452.3; QW-461.9 |
2/2/2015 |
A 1.125 in. OD stub tube having a wall thickness of 0.180 in. is to be welded into a header having a wall thickness of 2.677 in. The weld detail will apply a partial penetration groove weld in combination with an external fillet weld such as shown in Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (u) of Section VIII, Division 1 (2013 Edition). The weld will be completed in the flat position by a welder qualified on a weld test coupon prepared using plate and welded in the 2G position. |
Do the performance qualification limits of Table QW-452.3 and Table QW-461.9 require a welder assigned to deposit the weld joint described above to be qualified for small diameter welds in pipe or tube? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9795 |
| BPV IX-16-7 |
SC IX; QW-215.1 - EB Welding |
QW-215.1 |
3/3/2016 |
|
If a production weld includes a lap over, is it required that the PQR test coupon include a lap over? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9819 |
|
SC IX; QW-360 and QW-382 - Hardfacing Operator Performance Using Powder Filler Metal |
QW-360; QW-382 |
8/24/2015 |
The inquirer seeks to perform a machine PAW hard-facing in conformance with Section IX requirements. The inquirer has qualified their operators and WPS in accordance with Section IX requirements. Powder from for filler metal is not covered in SFA 5.21 nor any other SFA specification. The powder filler metal conforms to the chemical composition of SFA 5.21 solid and bare electrodes. |
Does performance qualification for machine PAW hard-facing using a powder filler metal conforming to the chemical composition of one AWS classification, within a SFA specification, qualify for all other powder filler metals conforming to the chemical composition of an AWS classification within the same SFA specification? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9822 |
| IX-13-30 |
SC IX; QW-322.1(a) - Expiration of Qualification |
QW-322.1(a) |
5/29/2014 |
A welder/welding operator is required to weld with a process within a six month period, in order to maintain qualification to use that process. A welder/welding operator takes a performance qualification test using a process for which the welder is already qualified (e.g. SMAW), but with different essential variables (e.g. different F-number, progression, etc.). During the performance of the test, the organization responsible for supervising and controlling the test, visually examines the weld and determines that it meets the visual acceptance criteria of QW-194. Subsequently, the test coupon is subjected to volumetric NDE or mechanical testing, and fails to meet the acceptance criteria. |
May a failed performance qualification test, utilizing a process for which the welder/welding operator is currently qualified, satisfy the requirements of QW-322.1(a) for maintaining continuity? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=436 |
| IX-13-24 |
SC IX; QW-404.14 - Essential Variables |
QW-404.14 |
2/20/2014 |
A welding procedure was qualified to ASME Section IX for the GTAW process using ER70S-2 filler metal, a double V-groove joint design and with multiple passes as specified in the PQR. |
Does listing the filler metal classification, double V-groove joint design and that multiple passes are required, on both the WPS and PQR satisfy the requirement to address the addition or deletion of filler metal in QW-404.14? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=469 |
| IX-13-25 |
SC IX; QW-301.4 - Record of Tests |
QW-301.4 |
2/20/2014 |
Welders are qualified using a qualified WPS at the time of their welding tests, in accordance with the requirements specified in QW-300.2 and QW-301.2. |
Is it a requirement of ASME Section IX that the WPS followed at the time of a welder’s qualification test be listed on the Welder Performance Qualification report for that welder? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=470 |
| IX-13-28 |
SC IX; QW-161.1, QW-161.5 and QW-462.2 |
QW-161.1; QW-161.5; QW-462.2 |
3/3/2014 |
|
Does QW-161.1 require that the entire length of the weld of a corrosion resistant weld metal overlay bend test specimen be within the bent portion of the specimen after testing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=488 |
| IX-13-28 |
SC IX; QW-161.1, QW-161.5 and QW-462.2 |
QW-161.1; QW-161.5; QW-462.2 |
3/3/2014 |
|
Does QW-161.5 permit the use of longitudinal bend specimens in lieu of the transverse side bends for procedure qualification of a corrosion resistant weld metal overlay in which the weld metal and base metal differ markedly in bending properties? |
No, see Figure QW-462.5(d). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=488 |
| IX-13-28 |
SC IX; QW-161.1, QW-161.5 and QW-462.2 |
QW-161.1; QW-161.5; QW-462.2 |
3/3/2014 |
|
Does the General Note of QW-462.2 apply to corrosion resistant weld metal overlays? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=488 |
| IX-15-01 |
SC IX; QW-452 and QW-461.9: WPQ -Range for Qualification |
QW-452; QW-461.9: |
9/11/2014 |
A welder qualified on two pipes. One pipe was welded in the 1G position, 8.6” (219 mm) OD x 29/32” (23 mm) with 5/32” (4 mm) GTAW and 3/4” (19 mm) SMAW deposit. |
Is the welder qualified for all position SMAW with maximum to be welded for pipe OD > 1” (25 mm)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=489 |
| IX-15-01 |
SC IX; QW-452 and QW-461.9: WPQ -Range for Qualification |
QW-452; QW-461.9: |
9/11/2014 |
A welder qualified on two pipes. One pipe was welded in the 1G position, 8.6” (219 mm) OD x 29/32” (23 mm) with 5/32” (4 mm) GTAW and 3/4” (19 mm) SMAW deposit. |
Is the welder qualified for all position GTQ with 11/32” (8 mm) maximum deposit to be welded for pipe OD > 1” (25 mm)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=489 |
| IX-15-02 |
SC IX; QW-193 - Tube-to-tubesheet mockup test |
QW-193 |
9/11/2014 |
|
Per QW-193.1, is the tubesheet mockup thickness required to be 2 in. (50 mm) for qualification? |
The tubesheet mockup thickness is not required to be thicker than the production tubesheet nor greater than 2 in. (50 mm) in thickness. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=517 |
| IX-13-31 |
Interpretation: SC IX; QW-420, QW/QB-422, P-Numbers (SA-336 F304H) |
QW-420 |
5/29/2014 |
Prior to the 2007 Edition, Table QW/QB-422 listed SA-336 F304H UNS S30409 with P-No. 8 Group-No. 1. SA-336 F304H UNS S30409 was replaced by SA-965 F304H UNS S30409 in the 2007 Edition of Section IX in order to reflect the Section II, Part A material specification changes. |
Is SA-336 F304H UNS S30409 considered P-No. 8 Group-No. 1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=524 |
| IX-15-03 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 - Range thickeness |
QW-403.6 |
9/11/2014 |
|
A welding procedure with impact testing was qualified using a test coupon of 6mm. Does this qualify 3-12mm thickness, since the 6mm thickness is less than ¼ inch (6.35mm)? |
No, See Nonmandatory Appendix G. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=535 |
| IX-13-32 |
SC IX; QW-163: Acceptance Criteria – Bend Tests |
QW-163: |
5/29/2014 |
|
Does the acceptance criteria for the convex surface of guided bend test specimens, which states a maximum acceptable discontinuity length of 1/8 inch (3 mm) apply to each specimen individually? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=542 |
| IX-13-32 |
SC IX; QW-163: Acceptance Criteria – Bend Tests |
QW-163: |
5/29/2014 |
|
Is the acceptance criteria for the convex surface of guided bend test specimens, which states a maximum acceptable discontinuity length of 1/8 inch (3 mm), the cumulative total length permitted on all of the specimens required for a single qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=542 |
| IX-15-04 |
SC IX; QW-194: Visual Examination – Performance |
QW-194: |
9/11/2014 |
A performance coupon is welded and visual inspection reveals significant face and root reinforcement. |
Does Section IX state limits on face or root reinforcement for groove weld coupons used for welder qualification? |
No, Section IX establishes minimum acceptance criteria for the qualification of welding personnel. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=543 |
| IX-15-05 |
SC IX; QW-200.2(f) and QW-451.1 |
QW-200.2(f); QW-451.1 |
9/11/2014 |
One PQR was qualified with GTAW on a test plate thickness of 3/8” (0.375”). A second PQR was qualified with SMAW on a test plate thickness of 3/4” (0.75”). |
Can a WPS supported by both PQRs be qualified for 1/16” (0.0625”) to 3/4” (0.75”) without the minimum thickness applicable to the SMAW process being restricted to 3/16” (0.1875”) per QW-451.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=604 |
| IX-15-06 |
SC IX; QW-217(a) and (b) |
QW-217(a) |
9/11/2014 |
|
A full penetration butt weld joining SA-516 Gr. 60 plates clad with SA-240 316L is to be completed. Is the corrosion resistant weld metal overlay covering the carbon steel butt weld and joining the clad surfaces required to be deposited following a corrosion resistant overlay Welding Procedure Specification which has been qualified in accordance with the rules of ASME Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=639 |
| IX-15-07 |
Section IX; QW-122.1, QW-303.1, Table QW-461.9, Figure QW-461.1 - Position of 1G Pipe Weld |
QW-122.1; QW-303.1; QW-461.9; QW-461.1 |
9/11/2014 |
|
For performance qualifications on pipe in the 1G rotated test position, must production welding be limited to a weld axis of plus or minus 15 degrees from the top (0 degree) position of the pipe? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=647 |
| IX-15-07 |
Section IX; QW-122.1, QW-303.1, Table QW-461.9, Figure QW-461.1 - Position of 1G Pipe Weld |
QW-122.1; QW-303.1; QW-461.9; QW-461.1 |
9/11/2014 |
|
Is the direction of pipe rotation in a flat position pipe weld an essential variable for performance qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=647 |
|
SC IX; QW-403.10 |
QW-403.10 |
8/24/2015 |
A test coupon was welded using short circuit GMAW for the root pass and SMAW for the fill and cap. The corresponding PQR was used to support a WPS for SMAW only. |
Does QW-403.10 limit the base metal thickness of the SMAW WPS to 1.1T? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10123 |
|
SC IX; QG-106 - Full Supervision & Control During Qualification |
|
5/13/2015 |
|
Is it the intent of QG-106.1(a) that personnel who produce test joints for procedure qualification shall produce those joints under the full supervision and control of the qualifying organization? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10146 |
|
SC IX; QG-106 - Full Supervision & Control During Qualification |
|
5/13/2015 |
|
Is it the intent of QG-106.2(a) that personnel who produce test joints for performance qualification shall produce those joints under the full supervision and control of the qualifying organization? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10146 |
|
SC IX; QW-404.35 |
QW-404.35 |
5/13/2015 |
|
Is it the intent of ASME Section IX, QW?404.35, that requalification is required when there is a change to a larger number in the indicator for impact toughness, indicating classification at a lower impact testing temperature (e.g. a change from F7A2-EM12K to F7A4-EM12K)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10147 |
|
SC IX; QW-202.2(c) - Tube fillet |
QW-202.2(c) |
8/25/2015 |
The requirements for tube-to-tubesheet procedure qualification are provided in paragraph QW-202.6, including the requirements for procedure qualification when a tube-to-tube sheet weld is completed with a fillet weld joining a tube to tubesheet. |
When the applicable Code section specifies that QW-193 is required for tube-to-tubesheet demonstration mockup qualification tests, may qualification of tube-to-tubesheet welds be qualified as a fillet weld per Paragraph QW-202.2(c)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10172 |
|
SC IX; QW-202.2(c) - Tube fillet |
QW-202.2(c) |
8/25/2015 |
The requirements for tube-to-tubesheet procedure qualification are provided in paragraph QW-202.6, including the requirements for procedure qualification when a tube-to-tube sheet weld is completed with a fillet weld joining a tube to tubesheet. |
When the applicable Code section does not specify that QW-193 is required for tube-to-tubesheet demonstration mockup qualification test, may a pressure retaining fillet weld for welding a tube to tubesheet be qualified as a fillet weld per paragraph QW-202.2(c)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10172 |
|
SC IX; QW-202.2(c) - Tube fillet |
QW-202.2(c) |
8/25/2015 |
The requirements for tube-to-tubesheet procedure qualification are provided in paragraph QW-202.6, including the requirements for procedure qualification when a tube-to-tube sheet weld is completed with a fillet weld joining a tube to tubesheet. |
When the applicable Code section does not specify that QW-193 is required for tube-to-tubesheet demonstration mockup qualification test, may a nonpressure retaining fillet weld be qualified per paragraph QW-202.2(c)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10172 |
|
SC IX; QW-193.1 - Welding procedure qualification for overlay material cladding tubesheet |
QW-193.1 |
5/26/2015 |
QW-191.1 states, "The cladding may be represented by the base material of essentially equivalent chemical composition to the cladding composition." |
Does the word "cladding" in QW-193.1 include weld metal overlay material? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9861 |
|
SC IX; QW-283.4 (a) & QW-424.2 - Replacement of weld metal buttering with similar P-No base material |
QW-283.4; QW-424.2 |
8/25/2015 |
QW-283.4 requires a requalification of a buttered PQR when an essential variable is changed in the portion of the weld to be made after buttering or when a different organization is performing the portion of the weld to be made after buttering. While QW-283.4(b) and QW-424.2 permit the buildup or overlay portion of a joint to be substituted in the test coupon by any P-Number base material that nominally matches the chemical analysis of the buildup or overlay, QW-283.4(a) does not afford this relief. |
When buttering is less than 5 mm in thickness as outlined in QW-283.4(a), may any P-Number base material that nominally matches the chemical analysis of the buildup or overlay be used for requalification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10203 |
|
SC IX; QW-191.1.1 - Qualification & Certification of RT Personnel |
QW-191.1.1 |
11/12/2015 |
|
QW-191.1.1 states that "the radiographic examination for welders and welding operators shall meet the requirements of Article 2, Section V". Does Section IX specify qualification requirements for examination personnel performing radiographic examinations of qualification test coupons for welders and welding operators? |
No. See Section V, Article 2, paragraph T-210. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10208 |
|
Section IX, QW-452 and Table QW-461.9 – Welder Performance Qualification Thickness, Position and Diameter Limits |
QW-452; QW-461.9 |
11/12/2015 |
A welder is qualified for GTAW and SMAW on pipe in the 1G position. The actual values qualified are as follows. The pipe outside diameter is 219 mm and the wall thickness is 23.01 mm. The GTAW weld deposit thickness is 4 mm and the SMAW weld deposit thickness is 19.01 mm. |
Is the welder qualified to weld SMAW production welds with outside diameters over 25 mm in all positions (flat, horizontal, vertical, overhead)? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10218 |
|
Section IX, QW-452 and Table QW-461.9 – Welder Performance Qualification Thickness, Position and Diameter Limits |
QW-452; QW-461.9 |
11/12/2015 |
A welder is qualified for GTAW and SMAW on pipe in the 1G position. The actual values qualified are as follows. The pipe outside diameter is 219 mm and the wall thickness is 23.01 mm. The GTAW weld deposit thickness is 4 mm and the SMAW weld deposit thickness is 19.01 mm. |
The same welder is also qualified for GTAW on pipe in the 6G position. The actual values qualified are as follows. The pipe outside diameter is 63.5 mm and the wall thickness is 6.35 mm. The GTAW weld deposit thickness is 6.35 mm. Is the welder qualified to weld GTAW production welds with outside diameters over 25 mm with a maximum wall thickness of 12.7 mm in all positions (flat, horizontal, vertical, overhead)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10218 |
|
QW-303.1 and Table QW-461.9 - Welder Qualification Position Limits |
QW-303.1; QW-461.9 |
11/16/2015 |
A welder is qualified for SMAW on plate groove welds in the 2G, 3G and 4G positions for unlimited thickness. A 3 inch outside diameter piping nozzle is required to be welded to a shell that is over 24 inch diameter in the vertical position. The shell is beveled for a complete penetration set-in or stub–in welded connection. |
Is a welder that is qualified for all positions and unlimited thickness on plate groove welds also qualified to weld a complete penetration weld connecting a 3 inch outside diameter piping nozzle to a beveled shell that is over 24 inch diameter? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10234 |
|
SC IX; QW-462.1(a) - Dimensional Tolerance |
QW-462.1(a) |
11/16/2015 |
|
What is the maximum amount of material that may be removed to accomplish "minimum amount to obtain approx. parallel surfaces" in Figure QW-462.1(a)? |
Section IX does not specify the amount of material to be removed to obtain approximately parallel surfaces. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10242 |
| BPV IX-16-8 |
SC IX; QW-302 and Figure QW-463.2(e) Welder Performance Qualification on Pipe |
QW-302; QW-463.2(e) |
3/3/2016 |
Welder performance qualification testing is performed on a 30 inch NPS x 0.500 inch wall pipe coupon in the 5G position with qualification by bend testing to represent production welding where two (2) welders complete one (1) circumferential joint. Each welder completes half the circumference by welding the full thickness from the 6 o’clock to the 12 o’clock position. Four (4) side bend specimens are removed and tested for each welder. For each welder, two (2) of the four (4) side bend specimens are removed from the upper quadrant and two (2) from the lower quadrant with each specimen aligned between 45 and 60 degrees from the vertical plane of pipe’s circumference. Bends meet the requirements of QW-160. Radiographic examination for each welder meets QW-191.1.2.2 acceptance criteria. |
Does the welder performance qualification test in the background meet the requirements of QW-302? |
No. Each welder must complete the entire pipe circumference. See QW-302.2, QW-302.3, QW-302.4, QW-304.1(a), and published interpretation IX-10-01. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=13952 |
|
SC IX; QW-202.3 & QW-407.4 P-No. 10H Thickness Restrictions for Weld Repair and Buildup |
QW-202.3; QW-407.4 |
8/27/2015 |
A weld procedure qualification is conducted using a base material under P-No. 10H, with a thickness of 1.5". Essential variable QW-407.4 applies and restricts the maximum qualified base metal thickness to 1.65" (1.1 x T) when a solution annealing heat treatment is performed after welding. Paragraph QW-202.3(b) states that, "For other than fillet welds, the thickness range for base metal and deposited weld metal for each welding process shall be in accordance with QW-451, except there need be no upper limit on the base metal thickness provided qualification was made on base metal having a thickness of 1½" (38 mm) or more". QW-451.1 Note 1 states that variable QW-407.4 further restricts the limits in this table. |
May this PQR be used to support weld repair and weld buildup on base metal thickness exceeding 1.65 in.? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=13961 |
|
SC IX; QW-202.3 & QW-407.4 P-No. 10H Thickness Restrictions for Weld Repair and Buildup |
QW-202.3; QW-407.4 |
8/27/2015 |
A weld procedure qualification is conducted using a base material under P-No. 10H, with a thickness of 1.5". Essential variable QW-407.4 applies and restricts the maximum qualified base metal thickness to 1.65" (1.1 x T) when a solution annealing heat treatment is performed after welding. Paragraph QW-202.3(b) states that, "For other than fillet welds, the thickness range for base metal and deposited weld metal for each welding process shall be in accordance with QW-451, except there need be no upper limit on the base metal thickness provided qualification was made on base metal having a thickness of 1½" (38 mm) or more". QW-451.1 Note 1 states that variable QW-407.4 further restricts the limits in this table. |
Does the term "weld repair" apply to any repair of a weld after the weld is completed and final heat treatment is performed? |
Section IX does not define weld repair. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=13961 |
|
SC IX; QW-288.1(d) - Tube Diameter Range Qualified |
QW-288.1(d) |
11/16/2015 |
A tube-to-tubesheet PQR exists that used 19.05 mm diameter tubes having wall thickness of 2.11 mm. |
Can this PQR be used to support a WPS for tube-to-tubesheet welding 25 mm diameter tubes having wall thickness of 2.11 mm? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14003 |
| BPV IX-16-9 |
SC IX; QW-200.1(c) & QW-424.1 |
QW-200.1(c); QW-424.1 |
3/3/2016 |
Materials approved for use by a Code Case require separate qualification of the WPS for joining the “unassigned” material. The Code Case is subsequently revised multiple times. Some revisions alter the chemical composition or method of manufacture for the subject material, and others have no effect on the defining parameters for the material. After each revision of the Code Case, the WPS is reviewed by the qualifying organization to determine whether it remains valid for continued use. |
Under the conditions described in the background, do QW-200.1(c) or QW-424.1 require annotation of the WPS to reflect the WPS remains qualified for joining the unassigned materials when a Code Case is revised, if requalification of the WPS is not required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14005 |
|
SC IX; QW-407.2 - Tolerance on holding time at PWHT temperature |
QW-407.2 |
11/16/2015 |
|
When QW-407.2 applies may a production weld joining P No. 1 Gp. 2 material per a qualified WPS be PWHT’d for 1 hour holding time at 1150°F nominal temperature with a supporting PQR with PWHT completed for 5 hours holding time at 1150°F holding temperature? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14019 |
|
SC IX; QW-461.9 - Performance Qualification - Position and Diameter Limitations (Within the Other Limitations of QW-303) |
QW-461.9; QW-303) |
11/16/2015 |
A welder deposits two (2) weld layers in the 3G vertical-up position for the entire length of the test coupon, moves the test coupon to the 2G position and deposits two (2) weld layers for the entire length of the test coupon, and then moves the test coupon to the 4G position and deposits one (1) weld layer for the entire length of the test coupon. |
When performing a Welder Performance Qualification, may a single weld test coupon be utilized, moved between the 2G, 3G, and 4G positions, and welded the full length of the test coupon in each position to qualify the welder for all positions? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14022 |
|
SC IX; QW-461.9 - Performance Qualification - Position and Diameter Limitations (Within the Other Limitations of QW-303) |
QW-461.9; QW-303) |
11/16/2015 |
A welder deposits two (2) weld layers in the 3G vertical-up position for the entire length of the test coupon, moves the test coupon to the 2G position and deposits two (2) weld layers for the entire length of the test coupon, and then moves the test coupon to the 4G position and deposits one (1) weld layer for the entire length of the test coupon. |
When performing a Welder Performance Qualification, when a single weld test coupon is utilized, moved between the 2G, 3G, and 4G positions, and welded the full length of the test coupon in each position, is the thickness of the weld metal qualified based on the thickness deposited in each position? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14022 |
|
SC IX; QW-256, QW-409.1 & Form QW-482, Weld Travel Speed |
QW-256; QW-409.1; QW-482 |
11/16/2015 |
For welding procedure qualifications using the GTAW process, QW-409.1, an increase in heat input, is a supplementary essential variable. QW-409.1(a) requires the weld travel speed to be used in determining heat input. QW-409.8, current and voltage ranges, is a nonessential variable and there is not an essential or nonessential variable that addresses weld travel speed. However, weld travel speed is included on Form QW-482, Suggested Format for Welding Procedure Specifications. |
Must the weld travel speed be addressed on the WPS when supplementary essential variables apply and the method of QW-409.1(a) is used to control heat input? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14035 |
|
SC IX; QW-256, QW-409.1 & Form QW-482, Weld Travel Speed |
QW-256; QW-409.1; QW-482 |
11/16/2015 |
For welding procedure qualifications using the GTAW process, QW-409.1, an increase in heat input, is a supplementary essential variable. QW-409.1(a) requires the weld travel speed to be used in determining heat input. QW-409.8, current and voltage ranges, is a nonessential variable and there is not an essential or nonessential variable that addresses weld travel speed. However, weld travel speed is included on Form QW-482, Suggested Format for Welding Procedure Specifications. |
Is weld travel speed an essential or nonessential variable when supplementary essential variables do not apply? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14035 |
|
SC IX; QW-256, QW-409.1 & Form QW-482, Weld Travel Speed |
QW-256; QW-409.1; QW-482 |
11/16/2015 |
For welding procedure qualifications using the GTAW process, QW-409.1, an increase in heat input, is a supplementary essential variable. QW-409.1(a) requires the weld travel speed to be used in determining heat input. QW-409.8, current and voltage ranges, is a nonessential variable and there is not an essential or nonessential variable that addresses weld travel speed. However, weld travel speed is included on Form QW-482, Suggested Format for Welding Procedure Specifications. |
Is weld travel speed required to be specified on the WPS when supplementary essential variables do not apply? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14035 |
|
SC IX; QW-409.1 - Heat Input |
QW-409.1 |
11/16/2015 |
For welding procedure qualifications using the GTAW process, QW-409.1, an increase in heat input, is a supplementary essential variable. QW-409.1(a) requires the weld amperage, voltage and travel speed to be used in determining heat input. QW-409.8, current and voltage ranges, is a nonessential variable. |
When using the heat input method of QW-409.1(a), is it required that the amperage, voltage and travel speed values be addressed on the WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14036 |
|
SC IX; QW-409.1 - Heat Input |
QW-409.1 |
11/16/2015 |
For welding procedure qualifications using the GTAW process, QW-409.1, is a supplementary essential variable. When the heat input method of QW-409.1(a) is used, the values for current, voltage and travel speed must be used in determining the heat input. Heat input calculations using the specified ranges on the WPS for current, voltage and travel speed may give values that exceed the maximum qualified when the results are maximized (e.g. using highest current and voltage values with slowest travel speed). |
Is it acceptable to add a statement to the WPS that “current, voltage and travel speed may be adjusted by the welder within the specified ranges provided the maximum qualified heat input is not exceeded”? |
Section IX does not address the method of complying with essential variable limits. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14037 |
| BPV IX-16-10 |
SC IX; QG-101 - Supplementary Essential Variables |
|
3/3/2016 |
|
When toughness testing is not required by other Sections of the Code, but the customer specification requires toughness qualification of the procedure, do the supplementary essential variables apply? |
Yes, see QG-105.3. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14111 |
| BPV IX-18-04 |
SC IX; QW-202.4, QW-403.6 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4; QW-403.6 |
11/16/2015 |
A WPS was qualified by a PQR with base metal thickness of 0.875 in. (T2) welded to a base metal thickness of 0.432 in. (T1) in P-No. 1 Gr. 1 base metal with a single welding process. The thicker member was tapered at the weld to 0.432 in. to match the thickness of the thinner member. Both members of the test coupon were impact tested at -20°F.
A 6 in. Sch. 80 (0.432 in. nominal wall) nozzle will be welded into a 1.75 in. thick shell using a partial penetration groove weld from both sides with a weld preparation depth of 9/16 in. Notch toughness requirements at -15°F apply. |
Is the WPS qualified for welding impact tested base metals with a thickness (T) range of 0.432 in. to 0.864 in. thickness for T1 welded to a range of 5/8 in. to 1.75 in. for T2? |
Yes.
Note: This interpretation has been revised, see interpretation IX-17-88 |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14128 |
| BPV IX-18-04 |
SC IX; QW-202.4, QW-403.6 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4; QW-403.6 |
11/16/2015 |
A WPS was qualified by a PQR with base metal thickness of 0.875 in. (T2) welded to a base metal thickness of 0.432 in. (T1) in P-No. 1 Gr. 1 base metal with a single welding process. The thicker member was tapered at the weld to 0.432 in. to match the thickness of the thinner member. Both members of the test coupon were impact tested at -20°F.
A 6 in. Sch. 80 (0.432 in. nominal wall) nozzle will be welded into a 1.75 in. thick shell using a partial penetration groove weld from both sides with a weld preparation depth of 9/16 in. Notch toughness requirements at -15°F apply. |
Is the WPS qualified for deposited weld metal thickness (t) thru 0.864 in.? |
Yes.
Note: This interpretation has been revised, see interpretation IX-17-88 |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14128 |
| BPV IX-18-04 |
SC IX; QW-202.4, QW-403.6 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4; QW-403.6 |
11/16/2015 |
A WPS was qualified by a PQR with base metal thickness of 0.875 in. (T2) welded to a base metal thickness of 0.432 in. (T1) in P-No. 1 Gr. 1 base metal with a single welding process. The thicker member was tapered at the weld to 0.432 in. to match the thickness of the thinner member. Both members of the test coupon were impact tested at -20°F.
A 6 in. Sch. 80 (0.432 in. nominal wall) nozzle will be welded into a 1.75 in. thick shell using a partial penetration groove weld from both sides with a weld preparation depth of 9/16 in. Notch toughness requirements at -15°F apply. |
Is welding of a set-in 0.432 in. thick nozzle with a 9/16 in. partial joint penetration weld to both sides of a 1.75 in. thick shell plate qualified based on the above PQRs? |
Yes.
Note: This interpretation has been revised, see interpretation IX-17-88 |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14128 |
|
SC IX; QW-193 - Tube-to-Tubesheet Mockup |
QW-193 |
11/16/2015 |
When qualifying a WPS for tube-to-tubesheet welding, a mockup is required by QW-193.1 to simulate the joint between the tubes and a thicker (greater than 2 in. total thickness) corrosion resistant alloy clad carbon steel tubesheet. The material used for the mockup tubesheet is a solid plate of essentially equivalent chemical composition as the cladding alloy. |
If a solid plate of essentially equivalent chemical composition as the cladding alloy is used in lieu of a clad plate for the procedure mockup, is the plate required to be at least 2 in. (50 mm) in thickness for qualification in accordance with QW-193.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14184 |
|
SC IX; QW-404.12 - Electrode Substitution |
QW-404.12 |
11/19/2015 |
|
May E8018-C1 electrodes be substituted for E8018-C3 electrodes for an existing welding procedure that is impact tested without the need for requalification using the E8018-C1 electrodes? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14205 |
|
SC IX; QW-404.12 - Electrode Substitution |
QW-404.12 |
11/19/2015 |
|
May E8018-C2 electrodes be substituted for E8018-C3 electrodes for an existing welding procedure that is impact tested without the need for requalification using the E8018-C2 electrodes? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14205 |
|
SC IX; QW-404.12 - Electrode Substitution |
QW-404.12 |
11/19/2015 |
|
Does QW-404.12 (e) apply only to electrodes in the SFA-5.1 Classification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14205 |
|
SC IX; QW-163 - Bend Test Discontinuities |
QW-163 |
5/26/2015 |
|
Does the acceptance criteria for the surface of a guided bend test specimen apply prior to bending? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9879 |
|
SC IX; QW-163 - Bend Test Discontinuities |
QW-163 |
5/26/2015 |
|
Does the acceptance criteria for the convex surface of the guided bend test specimens apply to the specimens after bend? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9879 |
|
SC IX; Clarification of QW-407.9(a) |
QW-407.9(a) |
11/19/2015 |
A corrosion resistant overlay of A-Number 8 has been stress relieved at 600°C for 2 hours. |
Does the procedure qualify PWHT at 600°C for 2 hours maximum only? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14228 |
|
SC IX; Clarification of QW-407.9(a) |
QW-407.9(a) |
11/19/2015 |
A corrosion resistant overlay of A-Number 8 has been stress relieved at 600°C for 2 hours. |
Does the procedure qualify PWHT at 600°C for 2.5 hours maximum only? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14228 |
|
SC IX; QW-200.2(f) |
QW-200.2(f) |
11/19/2015 |
PQR-1 qualified GTAW and SMAW with PWHT, but without impact testing. Using the same material and thickness, PQR-2 qualified GTAW and SAW with PWHT, but without impact testing. |
Can these two PQRs be used to support a WPS that addresses the respective essential variables for GTAW, SMAW, and SAW with PWHT and without impact testing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14231 |
| BPV IX-16-11 |
SC IX; QW-453, Note 8 - Performance Qualification for Hard-Facing |
QW-453 |
3/3/2016 |
|
Are hardness tests required for welder performance qualifications for hardfacing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14240 |
| BPV IX-16-11 |
SC IX; QW-453, Note 8 - Performance Qualification for Hard-Facing |
QW-453 |
3/3/2016 |
|
If a visual examination at 5X finds any cracks in the base material or heat affected zones, lack of fusion, or other linear defects exceeding the requirements that are specified in the WPS, is the qualification rejected? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14240 |
| BPV IX-16-11 |
SC IX; QW-453, Note 8 - Performance Qualification for Hard-Facing |
QW-453 |
3/3/2016 |
|
For performance qualifications, is it required for the overlay material and base material to meet the liquid penetrant examination requirements specified in the WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14240 |
| BPV IX-16-15 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 & QW-451.5 - Fillet Welds qualified with Supplementary Essential Variables |
QW-403.6; QW-451.5 |
5/18/2016 |
The note in the bottom of QW-451.4 (fillet welds qualified by groove welds) states "supplementary essential variables apply when notch toughness is required by other sections". The table states that the range qualified for fillet welds qualified by groove welds is all sizes on all base metal thicknesses and all diameters. |
When fillet welds are made, joining base material where notch toughness is required, does QW-403.6 limit the WPS to the minimum base metal thickness qualified? |
Yes
NOTE: This interpretation has been revised, see interpretation IX-17-58 (#17-2180) |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14243 |
| BPV IX-16-2 |
SC IX; QW-451.1 Note (3) - Range of Thickness T Of Base Metal Qualified with FCAW |
QW-451.1 |
3/3/2016 |
|
Does Note (3) of QW-451.1 apply to the FCAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14244 |
|
SC IX; QW-322.a(1) & (2) - Supervision and Control by the Qualifying or Participating Organization |
QW-322.a(1) |
11/19/2015 |
|
In order to meet the QW-322 requirements for supervision and control, must the organization's representative observing the welder or welding operator, weld using a process, be an employee of the organization. |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14263 |
| BPV IX-16-3 |
SC IX; QW-283 - Buttering |
QW-283 |
3/3/2016 |
Company A qualified a WPS joining a P-Number 5A material to itself in accordance with QW-283 by buttering both groove faces using a filler metal that does not conform to an AWS classification but is identified on the PQR by trade name. The buttered ends were postweld heat treated and machined so that the buttered thickness after machining was not less than 3/16 inch. The buttered ends were then welded together using a different filler metal. The required mechanical tests were performed. Company B qualified a WPS to butter and heat treat the weld ends (but not perform the groove weld assembling the buttered parts) by making a groove weld in P-number 5A material using the same process, filler metal, and heat treatment temperature range that was used for buttering by Company A. The required mechanical tests were performed. |
Is it required that the production buttering be made with the same heat of the filler metal that was used for the buttered portion of the procedure qualification test coupon? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14277 |
| BPV IX-16-3 |
SC IX; QW-283 - Buttering |
QW-283 |
3/3/2016 |
Company A qualified a WPS joining a P-Number 5A material to itself in accordance with QW-283 by buttering both groove faces using a filler metal that does not conform to an AWS classification but is identified on the PQR by trade name. The buttered ends were postweld heat treated and machined so that the buttered thickness after machining was not less than 3/16 inch. The buttered ends were then welded together using a different filler metal. The required mechanical tests were performed. Company B qualified a WPS to butter and heat treat the weld ends (but not perform the groove weld assembling the buttered parts) by making a groove weld in P-number 5A material using the same process, filler metal, and heat treatment temperature range that was used for buttering by Company A. The required mechanical tests were performed. |
Is the company B WPS qualified to butter and heat treat the weld ends of the production parts? |
Yes, provided the thickness of buttering after machining is not less than 3/16 inch. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14277 |
| BPV IX-16-3 |
SC IX; QW-283 - Buttering |
QW-283 |
3/3/2016 |
Company A qualified a WPS joining a P-Number 5A material to itself in accordance with QW-283 by buttering both groove faces using a filler metal that does not conform to an AWS classification but is identified on the PQR by trade name. The buttered ends were postweld heat treated and machined so that the buttered thickness after machining was not less than 3/16 inch. The buttered ends were then welded together using a different filler metal. The required mechanical tests were performed. Company B qualified a WPS to butter and heat treat the weld ends (but not perform the groove weld assembling the buttered parts) by making a groove weld in P-number 5A material using the same process, filler metal, and heat treatment temperature range that was used for buttering by Company A. The required mechanical tests were performed. |
May a third company (Company C) use test coupons that have been buttered, heat treated, and machined by Company A (following a qualified buttering WPS) to qualify a WPS for only making the groove weld joining the buttered parts? |
Yes, provided the thickness of buttering after machining is not less than 3/16 inch. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14277 |
| BPV IX-16-14 |
SC IX; QW-193.1 & QW-303.5 |
QW-193.1; QW-303.5 |
5/18/2016 |
|
When the applicable Code Section does not require the use of QW-193 for tube-to-tubesheet demonstration mockup qualification tests, is it permitted for a welder, qualified on a groove weld test per QW-303.1 to perform tube-to-tubesheet welding on a Code item using a WPS qualified for tube-to-tubesheet welding in accordance with QW-193.1, provided the welds are within the limits of the welder’s qualified range? |
Yes, see QW-303.5. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14298 |
| BPV IX-16-32 |
SC IX; QW-304.2 and QW-305.2 - Qualification of Welder or Welding Operators on Production Weld |
QW-304.2; QW-305.2 |
9/15/2016 |
|
When a welder or welding operator performance qualification is conducted on a production weld not requiring volumetric examination, is it required that the weld be repaired per QW-304.2 or QW-305.2, if it does not meet the requirements of QW-191.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14305 |
| BPV IX-16-32 |
SC IX; QW-304.2 and QW-305.2 - Qualification of Welder or Welding Operators on Production Weld |
QW-304.2; QW-305.2 |
9/15/2016 |
|
When a welder or welding operator performance qualification is conducted on a production weld and does not meet the volumetric examination requirements of QW-191.1 but does meet the requirement of the construction code, does the weld need to be repaired per QW-304.2 or QW-305.2? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14305 |
| BPV IX-16-5 |
SC IX; QW-407.2 - PWHT Time range |
QW-407.2 |
3/3/2016 |
The range of qualified base metal thickness for a WPS is determined from Table QW-451.1 based upon the thickness of the PQR test coupon. During WPS qualifications, PWHT is applied to the PQR test coupon, at the holding temperature prescribed for the material, for the minimum holding time required by the construction code for the maximum qualified base metal thickness. As a result, the required holding time for PWHT at the holding temperature may vary considerably in production. The variable description for PWHT under QW-407.2 requires the WPS to be qualified with PWHT applied to the PQR test coupon “… essentially equivalent to that encountered in the fabrication of production welds, including at least 80% of the aggregate times at temperature(s)”. |
Is a WPS qualified for production welding where PWHT is applied for a holding time that is less than 80% of the holding time recorded on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14337 |
| BPV IX-16-5 |
SC IX; QW-407.2 - PWHT Time range |
QW-407.2 |
3/3/2016 |
The range of qualified base metal thickness for a WPS is determined from Table QW-451.1 based upon the thickness of the PQR test coupon. During WPS qualifications, PWHT is applied to the PQR test coupon, at the holding temperature prescribed for the material, for the minimum holding time required by the construction code for the maximum qualified base metal thickness. As a result, the required holding time for PWHT at the holding temperature may vary considerably in production. The variable description for PWHT under QW-407.2 requires the WPS to be qualified with PWHT applied to the PQR test coupon “… essentially equivalent to that encountered in the fabrication of production welds, including at least 80% of the aggregate times at temperature(s)”. |
Is a WPS qualified for production welding where PWHT is applied for a holding time longer than 125% (reciprocal of 80%) of the holding time recorded on the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14337 |
| BPV IX-16-6 |
SC IX; QW-424 - UNS Number and unassigned materials |
QW-424 |
3/3/2016 |
|
Is a base metal produced to an EEMUA specification with a UNS number of C7060X an unassigned metal as defined in QW-424.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14358 |
| BPV IX-16-16 |
SC IX; QW-403.6, QW-403.8 & QW-200.4 - Base metal thickness ranges qualified with multiple PQR'S of different processes |
QW-403.6; QW-403.8; QW-200.4 |
5/20/2016 |
PQR 1 was qualified using GTAW on a 0.249 inch thick test coupon. PQR 2 was qualified using FCAW on a 0.250 inch thick test coupon. PQR 3 was qualified using FCAW on a 0.500 inch thick test coupon. Supplementary essential variables do apply. |
Do the three PQRs support a combination GTAW and FCAW WPS with a base metal thickness range from 0.1245 inch to 1 inch with each process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14362 |
| BPV IX-16-17 |
SC IX; QG-104 Performance Qualification Record QW-301.2 - Qualification Tests |
QW-301.2 |
5/20/2016 |
|
Do the general requirements of QG-104 supersede the detailed requirements of QW-301.2, permitting the welding of a performance test coupon following a set of variables other than a qualified welding procedure specification or standard welding procedure specification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14382 |
|
SC IX; QW-407.2 - PWHT Time and temperature range |
QW-407.2 |
2/2/2015 |
|
Does a PQR with impact requirements, PWHT at 600 - 620ºC and 5 hours of soak time, support a WPS with impact requirements and the same PWHT temperature range with a soak time of 1 hour? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9840 |
|
SC IX; QW-171.2 - Impact Test Acceptance Criteria |
QW-171.2 |
5/26/2015 |
|
A WPS has been qualified with impact testing at -46°C. The filler metal is classified with impact testing at -30°C. Is the WPS qualified in accordance with Section IX down to -46°C ? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9900 |
|
SC IX; QW-171.2 - Impact Test Acceptance Criteria |
QW-171.2 |
5/26/2015 |
|
Is it required that the same brand and batch number of weld consumable, as used in weld procedure qualification impact testing, be used for production welds ? |
This is not addressed in ASME IX. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9900 |
|
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Combination of Welding Processes |
QW-200.4 |
5/26/2015 |
A PQR consisting of a 20mm base metal thickness test coupon is welded with the GTAW process for the root and subsequent passes up to 10mm weld deposit thickness, followed by the SMAW process for the fill and cap passes for the remaining 10mm weld deposit thickness. |
May the PQR be used to support a WPS for the SMAW process alone up to 20mm weld metal thickness and welding the root pass without backing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9901 |
|
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Combination of Welding Processes |
QW-200.4 |
5/26/2015 |
A PQR consisting of a 20mm base metal thickness test coupon is welded with the GTAW process for the root and subsequent passes up to 10mm weld deposit thickness, followed by the SMAW process for the fill and cap passes for the remaining 10mm weld deposit thickness. |
May the PQR be used to support a WPS for the SMAW process alone up to 20 mm weld metal thickness with back welding? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9901 |
|
SC IX; QW-405.2 - Range of Position in WPS |
QW-405.2 |
5/26/2015 |
A test coupon was welded in the 1G position and impact testing was performed. |
May a WPS supported by that PQR permit welding in the horizontal position when impact testing is applicable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9903 |
|
SC IX; QW-306 - Welder Qualifications for Combination Welding Used for Single Process Welding |
QW-306 |
5/26/2015 |
A welder was qualified for groove welds using a combination of welding processes, with manual GTAW process for the root pass without backing and SMAW process for remainder of the passes. Production welding will be performed using a separate qualified groove weld WPS that uses the SMAW process only for the root pass without backing and for the remaining passes. |
Is the welder qualified to perform welds using only one of the qualified processes, within the limits of qualification for each welding process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9842 |
|
SC IX; QW-306 - Welder Qualifications for Combination Welding Used for Single Process Welding |
QW-306 |
5/26/2015 |
A welder was qualified for groove welds using a combination of welding processes, with manual GTAW process for the root pass without backing and SMAW process for remainder of the passes. Production welding will be performed using a separate qualified groove weld WPS that uses the SMAW process only for the root pass without backing and for the remaining passes. |
Is the welder qualified to perform welds using the SMAW process for the root pass without backing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9842 |
|
SC IX; QW-408.2 - Shielding gas, Mison Ar |
QW-408.2 |
5/26/2015 |
|
May a shielding gas containing 99.97% Argon and 0.03%NO be considered a single shielding gas? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9907 |
|
SC IX; QW-163: Acceptance Criteria – Bend Tests |
QW-163 |
5/26/2015 |
|
If a guided bend specimen displays multiple open discontinuities on the convex surface after bending, each having a length less than 1/8 in. (3 mm), but whose cumulative length exceeds 1/8 in. (3 mm), is the specimen acceptable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=9986 |
|
SC IX; QW-193 and QW-193.1.3 - Macro Examination of Tube-to-Tubesheet Mock-up Welds |
QW-193; QW-193.1.3 |
8/24/2015 |
A tube-to-tube-sheet welding procedure is qualified by welding a 10 tube mock-up per the requirements of QW-193.1. Per the requirements of QW-193.1.3, the mockup welds are sectioned through the center of the tube for macro?examination. The four exposed surfaces are smoothed and etched to give a clear definition of the weld and heat?affected zone. |
Does a qualification of the welding procedure require macro examination of 40 tube-to-tubesheet polished weld faces from the 10 tube mock-up welds? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10063 |
|
SC IX; QW-402.4 and QW-402.5 |
QW-402.4; QW-402.5 |
8/24/2015 |
|
Does QW-402.4 require a WPS using SMAW with backing, to be revised or amended before it can be used to weld a production weld without backing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10068 |
|
SC IX; QW-402.4 and QW-402.5 |
QW-402.4; QW-402.5 |
8/24/2015 |
|
Does QW-402.4 require a WPS using SMAW without backing, to be revised or amended before it can be used to weld a production weld with backing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10068 |
|
SC IX; QW-402.4 and QW-402.5 |
QW-402.4; QW-402.5 |
8/24/2015 |
|
Does QW-402.5 require a WPS using GTAW without backing, to be revised or amended before it can be used to weld a production weld with backing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10068 |
|
SC IX; Table QW-258.1 |
QW-258.1 |
8/24/2015 |
An ESW Welding Procedure Qualification (PQR) for corrosion resistance weld overlay was completed to the requirements of QW-258.1 without a supplementary device for controlling the magnetic field acting on the weld puddle commonly known as magnetic steering. The deletion of a supplementary device for controlling the magnetic field acting on the weld puddle is an essential variable (QW-410.40) per Table QW-258. 1. |
May a WPS be written for Corrosion Resistant Weld Overlay using ESW with the addition of a supplementary device for controlling the magnetic field acting on the weld puddle, be supported by the PQR described in the background? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10094 |
|
SC IX; QW-288.1(b) - Tube-to-Tubesheet Qualification |
QW-288.1(b) |
11/12/2015 |
|
When a tube-to-tubesheet weld was qualified with a groove depth of 2.4 mm and subsequent production tube-to-tubesheet welds were made using a groove depth of 1.4 mm with the same groove type and no decrease in the groove angle from the procedure qualification, is requalification required for a reduction in groove depth? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10095 |
|
SC IX; QW-288.1(d) - Tube-Tubesheet Qualifications |
QW-288.1(d) |
11/12/2015 |
|
When a tube-to-tubesheet weld was qualified with a tube diameter of 20 mm and wall thickness of 2.1 mm and subsequent production tube-to-tubesheet welds were made with a tube diameter of 25.4 mm and a wall thickness of 2.1 mm, is requalification required for an increase of tube diameter? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10096 |
|
SC IX; QW-403.6 and QW-451.1 |
QW-403.6; QW-451.1 |
8/24/2015 |
A welding procedure specification is being qualified in accordance with a construction code requiring impact testing for WPS qualification. However, the base material and, by extension, the HAZ are exempt from impact testing by the construction code, so impacts are required for weld metal only. The procedure qualification test will be performed on a plate coupon that is 1 inch thick. |
Is the base metal thickness range qualified based only on the dimensions specified in Table QW-451.1? |
No, QW-403.6 applies. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=10099 |
| BPV IX-16-1 |
SC IX; QW-200 and QW-300 - Use of WPS and PQR by others |
QW-200; QW-300 |
3/3/2016 |
A company has a PQR and WPS that were previously qualified. The company has stopped fabrication activities, but continues with sales and engineering activities. |
Can the company allow the use of their PQR and WPS by another company if neither company is owned by a common parent company? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14459 |
| BPV IX-16-1 |
SC IX; QW-200 and QW-300 - Use of WPS and PQR by others |
QW-200; QW-300 |
3/3/2016 |
A company has a PQR and WPS that were previously qualified. The company has stopped fabrication activities, but continues with sales and engineering activities. |
Can the company allow the use of their PQR and WPS by another company if both companies are owned by a common parent company? |
Yes, provided QG-106.1(c) is met. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14459 |
| BPV IX-16-36 |
SC IX; QW-215 - Qualification of Pressure Retaining Socket Welds Produced with EBW and LBW |
QW-215 |
9/15/2016 |
|
May a pressure retaining fillet/socket weld produced by Electron Beam Welding or Laser Beam Welding be qualified in accordance with QW-215? |
Yes, refer to QW-202. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14826 |
| BPV IX-16-30 |
SC IX; WPS Update |
|
5/23/2016 |
|
May a new or existing PQR which meets all of the essential variables (and supplementary essential variables when required) of a qualified WPS, and is qualified for a longer PWHT time at temperature, be used to revise a WPS for a longer time at temperature? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14830 |
| BPV IX-16-37 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Filler Metal Sequence |
QW-200.4 |
9/15/2016 |
|
A weld that was originally deposited using a WPS with one filler metal for the root and hot pass, and another filler metal for the fill and cap is to be repaired. Is it acceptable to deposit the repair weld using only the filler metal specified for the root and hot pass by the WPS, if the qualified thickness range for the deposited weld metal is not exceeded? |
Yes, see QW-200.4(a) |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14835 |
| BPV IX-16-41 |
SC IX; QW-301.2 and QW-423.3 - WPS for Welder Performance |
QW-301.2; QW-423.3 |
11/21/2016 |
|
When conducting welder performance qualification testing, is it acceptable to use a WPS supported by a PQR qualified with an unassigned base metal, and substituting an assigned base metal as provided in QW-423.2? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14837 |
| BPV IX-16-38 |
QW-403.8 - Procedure Qualification - Base Metal Qualifications (Within the Other Limitations of QW-202.4 and QW-451) |
QW-403.8; QW-202.4; QW-451 |
10/10/2016 |
A single Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) with a groove weld joint was performed with plates of two different thicknesses (dissimilar thickness), having the same P-Number, with one side of the coupon comprised of a 9 mm thickness plate and the other side of the coupon comprised of a 38 mm thickness plate. |
Will the single PQR support a Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) having a base metal qualification range of 1.5 mm to 200 mm? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14839 |
| BPV IX-16-38 |
QW-403.8 - Procedure Qualification - Base Metal Qualifications (Within the Other Limitations of QW-202.4 and QW-451) |
QW-403.8; QW-202.4; QW-451 |
10/10/2016 |
A single Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) with a groove weld joint was performed with plates of two different thicknesses (dissimilar thickness), having the same P-Number, with one side of the coupon comprised of a 9 mm thickness plate and the other side of the coupon comprised of a 38 mm thickness plate. |
Is the performance of two Face Bends and two Root Bends acceptable for the dissimilar thickness PQR to qualify the base metal for 1.5 mm to 200 mm? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14839 |
| BPV IX-16-38 |
QW-403.8 - Procedure Qualification - Base Metal Qualifications (Within the Other Limitations of QW-202.4 and QW-451) |
QW-403.8; QW-202.4; QW-451 |
10/10/2016 |
A single Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) with a groove weld joint was performed with plates of two different thicknesses (dissimilar thickness), having the same P-Number, with one side of the coupon comprised of a 9 mm thickness plate and the other side of the coupon comprised of a 38 mm thickness plate. |
Is the performance of four Side Bends acceptable for the dissimilar thickness PQR to qualify the base metal for 1.5 mm to 200 mm? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14839 |
| BPV IX-16-42 |
Section IX, QW-304 Welders and QW-305 Welding Operators |
QW-304; QW-305 |
11/21/2016 |
|
Does the reference to the GMAW process in QW-304 and QW-305 include the FCAW process? |
Yes, see Table QW-355. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14841 |
| BPV IX-16-42 |
Section IX, QW-304 Welders and QW-305 Welding Operators |
QW-304; QW-305 |
11/21/2016 |
|
May volumetric nondestructive examination meeting the requirements of QW-304 and QW-305 be used to qualify a welder's or welding operator's first production weld(s) using the FCAW process, provided the mode of arc transfer is not short circuit? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14841 |
| BPV IX-16-39 |
SC IX; QW-193.1 - Test coupon thickness for Mock-up Tubesheet |
QW-193.1 |
10/10/2016 |
|
Does a tubesheet mockup thickness of 50 mm qualify production welding for a tubesheet thickness of 42 mm? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14897 |
| BPV IX-16-43 |
SC IX; QW-406.3 - Interpass Temperature |
QW-406.3 |
11/21/2016 |
|
When impact testing is not a requirement, is an interpass temperature required to be recorded in the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14918 |
| BPV IX-16-43 |
SC IX; QW-406.3 - Interpass Temperature |
QW-406.3 |
11/21/2016 |
|
When impact testing is not a requirement, can a WPS be written with a preheat greater than 100°F (55°C) above the interpass temperature recorded on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14918 |
| BPV IX-16-44 |
SC IX; QW-423.1 and QW-424.1 - Unassigned Base Metal |
QW-423.1; QW-424.1 |
11/21/2016 |
An unassigned metal A and an unassigned metal B have similar chemical composition and similar mechanical properties. |
Does a PQR with unassigned metal A welded to itself support a WPS for welding unassigned metal B per QW-424.1? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14919 |
| BPV IX-16-44 |
SC IX; QW-423.1 and QW-424.1 - Unassigned Base Metal |
QW-423.1; QW-424.1 |
11/21/2016 |
An unassigned metal A and an unassigned metal B have similar chemical composition and similar mechanical properties. |
May a welder qualified on unassigned metal A weld unassigned metal B in production per QW-423.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14919 |
| BPV IX-16-45 |
SC IX; QW-283 - Buttering |
QW-283 |
11/21/2016 |
A groove weld PQR is qualified joining Base Metal “A” to Base Metal “B” using Filler Metal “C” with post weld heat treatment (PWHT). |
Is a WPS qualified by the above referenced PQR for applying 3/16 in. minimum thickness weld butter to Base Metal “A” using Filler Metal “C”, prior to joining to Base Metal “B” with the same filler metal as the weld butter and the completed weld PWHT’d with all other essential variables being the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14935 |
| BPV IX-16-45 |
SC IX; QW-283 - Buttering |
QW-283 |
11/21/2016 |
A groove weld PQR is qualified joining Base Metal “A” to Base Metal “B” using Filler Metal “C” with post weld heat treatment (PWHT). |
Is a WPS qualified by the above referenced PQR for applying 3/16 in. minimum thickness weld butter to Base Metal “A” using Filler Metal “C” followed by PWHT, prior to joining to Base Metal “B” with the same filler metal as the weld butter with all other essential variables being the same? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14935 |
| BPV IX-16-45 |
SC IX; QW-283 - Buttering |
QW-283 |
11/21/2016 |
A groove weld PQR is qualified joining Base Metal “A” to Base Metal “B” using Filler Metal “C” with post weld heat treatment (PWHT). |
Is a WPS qualified by the above referenced PQR for completing a weld build up on Base Metal “A” using Filler Metal “C” with PWHT without joining to Base Metal “B”? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14935 |
| BPV IX-17-43 |
SC IX; QW-400, Contents of the WPS |
QW-400 |
8/23/2017 |
|
A test coupon is welded using a Double "V" groove. A single root weld is deposited by SMAW and SAW is used for depositing the balance of the weld. The root run is completely removed by grinding before welding the second side of groove. Is it required to mention the SMAW process in the WPS even though it is completely removed by gouging? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14936 |
| BPV IX-17-43 |
SC IX; QW-400, Contents of the WPS |
QW-400 |
8/23/2017 |
|
When an SMAW root weld is made and subsequently completely removed prior to completing the weld with SAW, is the SMAW process qualified? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14936 |
| BPV IX-17-19 |
SC IX; QW-200.1(c) & QW-424.1, and QW-403.18 & QW-423 - Procedure and Performance Requalification for Code Case Materials |
QW-200.1(c); QW-424.1; QW-403.18; QW-423 |
5/18/2017 |
A material approved for use in code construction by a Code Case requires separate qualification of the WPS and the welder's or welding operator's performance for joining the “unassigned” material. The Code Case is subsequently revised, changing the specified chemical composition of the 'unassigned' material to the extent that the new chemical composition falls outside the range of the chemical composition which uniquely identifies the "unassigned" material on the original PQR and WPQ. |
Under the conditions described in the background, is the change of chemical composition considered to be a change in an essential variable for welding procedure qualification? |
Yes. See QW-424.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14941 |
| BPV IX-17-19 |
SC IX; QW-200.1(c) & QW-424.1, and QW-403.18 & QW-423 - Procedure and Performance Requalification for Code Case Materials |
QW-200.1(c); QW-424.1; QW-403.18; QW-423 |
5/18/2017 |
A material approved for use in code construction by a Code Case requires separate qualification of the WPS and the welder's or welding operator's performance for joining the “unassigned” material. The Code Case is subsequently revised, changing the specified chemical composition of the 'unassigned' material to the extent that the new chemical composition falls outside the range of the chemical composition which uniquely identifies the "unassigned" material on the original PQR and WPQ. |
Under the conditions described in the background, is the change of chemical composition considered to be a change in an essential variable for welder performance qualification? |
No. See QW-423.1. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14941 |
| BPV IX-16-46 |
SC IX; QW-407.1 - Minimum PWHT Holding Temperature |
QW-407.1 |
12/1/2016 |
A Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) is qualified for joining a base metal with postweld heat treatment (PWHT) at a holding temperature below the lower transformation temperature, and the WPS was qualified without impact testing. A later Edition of the construction code increases the minimum PWHT holding temperature for the qualified base metal by 100F, yet still below the lower transformation temperature. |
Under the rules of QW-407.1, is the WPS qualified for joining this base metal with PWHT applied at the higher holding temperature? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14985 |
| BPV IX-16-47 |
SC IX; QW-453, Notes 3 and 10 - Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing (Wear Resistance) and Corrosion-Resistant Overlays |
QW-453 |
12/1/2016 |
|
When qualifying a hard-facing WPS with chromium carbide or tungsten carbide filler material, may the requirement for liquid penetrant examination, per Table QW-453 note 3, be omitted? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14997 |
| BPV IX-16-47 |
SC IX; QW-453, Notes 3 and 10 - Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing (Wear Resistance) and Corrosion-Resistant Overlays |
QW-453 |
12/1/2016 |
|
When qualifying a welder or welding operator to a hard-facing WPS with chromium carbide or tungsten carbide filler material, may the requirement for liquid penetrant examination, per Table QW-453 note 10, be omitted? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14997 |
| BPV IX-16-22 |
SC IX; QW/QB-422 - P-No. assignment for UNS N06626 |
|
5/20/2016 |
Code Case 2276-1 states that UNS N06626 may be considered as a P-No. 43 base metal for Section VIII, Division 1 welded construction because its chemical composition and mechanical properties are nearly identical to UNS N06625. However, unlike UNS N06625, UNS N06626 is not listed in any of the material specifications in QW/QB-422. |
Is UNS N06626 an unassigned base metal as defined in QW-424.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14481 |
| BPV IX-16-50 |
SC IX; QW-288.1 - Tube-to-Tubesheet Procedure Qualification |
QW-288.1 |
12/6/2016 |
|
Is requalification of a tube-to-tubesheet welding procedure required by QW-288.1(b) when there is any change in the weld joint configuration in excess of the manufacturing tolerance? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15188 |
| BPV IX-17-05 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 - Thickness Supplementary Variable for Austenitic |
QW-403.6 |
3/9/2017 |
|
A WPS qualified with toughness testing is required for welding austenitic stainless steel base metal together with an austenitic stainless steel welding filler metal with the GTAW welding process. Does QW-403.6 apply? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15191 |
| BPV IX-16-12 |
SC IX; QW-381.3 - Alternative Qualification for Corrosion Resistant Overlays |
QW-381.3 |
3/4/2016 |
|
When QW-381.3 has been selected as an alternate qualification for corrosion resistant overlays, must the number and locations for side bends be in accordance with QW-462.5(c)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14488 |
| BPV IX-16-13 |
SC IX; QW-407.1 - Post Weld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1 |
3/4/2016 |
A vessel head is fabricated with a longitudinal seam weld. The head blanks are first welded, heated to 600°C – 750°C, formed and then subjected to normalizing heat treatment at 900°C – 930°C. The head is then welded to the pressure vessel shell course and the entire vessel is subjected to post weld heat treatment at 621°C – 649°C. |
If the PQR test coupon supporting the WPS for welding the longitudinal seam weld described above is subjected to normalizing and heat treatment below the transformation temperature, does the WPS comply with the requirements of QW-407.1(a)(4)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14492 |
| BPV IX-16-51 |
SC IX; QW-193 - Tube to Tube Sheet Tests (Welding Procedure) |
QW-193 |
12/8/2016 |
|
Is QW-193.1 an essential variable for qualification of a tube-to-tubesheet welding procedure? |
No. QW-193.1 describes the required mockup assembly that is required for qualification. The variables of QW-288 are required to be recorded during the qualification test and any revision of them requires a new mockup assembly. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15292 |
| BPV IX-16-48 |
SC IX; QW-283 - Welds With Buttering |
QW-283 |
12/1/2016 |
Company A qualified a WPS to join an unlisted base metal (similar to P-Number 5A Group 1) to itself in accordance with QW-283 by buttering both groove faces using a filler metal that does not conform to an AWS classification, but is identified on the WPS and PQR by trade name. The buttered ends were postweld heat treated and machined so that the buttered thickness after machining was not less than 3/16 inch. The minimum buttering thickness in all cases listed will be greater than 3/I6 inch. The buttered ends were then welded together using a different filler metal and postweld heat treatment was not performed on the completed groove weld. The required mechanical tests were performed in accordance with QW-202.2(a). Notch toughness testing and hardness limits are required by the applicable Code for the heat affected zone and deposited weld metal. The maximum heat input qualified by Company A for buttering the groove faces was 25,000 J/in. and for welding the groove weld was 65,000 J/in.
Company B qualified a WPS to butter and heat treat the weld ends (but not perform the groove weld assembling the buttered parts) by making a groove weld in the same unlisted base metal using the same process, filler metal, and heat treatment temperature range that was used for buttering by Company A. The maximum heat input qualified by Company B for buttering is less than the maximum heat input qualified by Company A for the buttering and the groove weld.
Company C qualified a WPS to butter and heat treat the weld ends (but not perform the groove weld assembling the buttered parts) by making a groove weld in the same unlisted base metal using the same process, filler metal, and heat treatment temperature range that was used for buttering by Company A. The maximum heat input qualified by Company C for buttering is greater than the maximum heat input qualified by Company A for the buttering, but less than the maximum heat input qualified by Company A for the groove weld. |
Is Company A’s WPS qualified to perform the groove weld for buttered parts produced by Companies B and C for any heat input up to the maximum heat input of Company A’s WPS? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15342 |
| BPV IX-17-20 |
SC IX; QW-202 and QW-424.2 - Fillet of SS 316L Weld to Clad Metals |
QW-202; QW-424.2 |
5/18/2017 |
A WPS was qualified using a butt weld PQR joining two SA-240 316L coupons. A fillet weld satisfying this WPS’s qualified ranges will join an SA-240 316L plate to a corrosion resistant overlay deposit. The corrosion resistant overlay deposit is installed on SA 516 Gr. 70 plate, and has a nominal 316L deposit chemistry. |
Do ASME Section IX paragraphs QW-202 and QW-424.2 permit this WPS to be used to install this fillet weld? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15343 |
| BPV IX-17-06 |
SC IX; QW-217 - Welding of clad metals |
QW-217 |
3/9/2017 |
A WPS was qualified by a single PQR that included both the P- No. 1 material groove weld and the ERNiCr-3 corrosion resistant weld metal overlay over the root region of the P-No. 1 groove weld. The PQR tests included all the groove weld test requirements as specified in QW-451 and all the corrosion resistant weld metal overlay test requirements as specified in QW-453. All the tests were acceptable.
A vessel is being constructed which requires welding 0.75 inch P-No. 1 material with 0.375 inch Alloy 600 corrosion resistant weld metal overlay. The design of the vessel did not include the corrosion resistant overlay as part of the design calculations. The P-No. 1 material wall thickness and Alloy 600 cladding thickness are within the qualified ranges of the qualified WPS. |
Is the WPS qualified to deposit the 0.75 inch thick, P-No.1 material groove weld and the 0.375 inch Alloy 600 corrosion resistant weld metal overlay, over the root region of the P-No. 1 material groove weld? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15348 |
| BPV IX-16-20 |
SC IX; QW-409.1 - Heat Input |
QW-409.1 |
5/20/2016 |
|
Does QW-409.1 require that welding parameters (current, voltage, travel speed) listed in the WPS used in production welding be the same as that of the PQR, when notch toughness requirements are specified? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14503 |
| BPV IX-17-44 |
SC IX; QW-304 - Welder Performance Qualification Records |
QW-304 |
8/23/2017 |
|
Is a welder, or welding operator, required to take and pass a welder qualification test for each WPS that will be used? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15357 |
| BPV IX-17-07 |
SC IX; QW-407.9 - PWHT |
QW-407.9 |
3/9/2017 |
Background (A): A PQR was based on A-No. 8 corrosion resistant overlay onto a P-No. 1 material. Impact toughness was required and the test coupon received PWHT at 620°C for 4 hours. |
Does the PQR described in Background (A) support a WPS for depositing an A-No. 8 corrosion resistance overlay onto P-No. 1 material, with impact requirements, that receive PWHT at 620°C for 20 hours? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15359 |
| BPV IX-17-07 |
SC IX; QW-407.9 - PWHT |
QW-407.9 |
3/9/2017 |
Background (A): A PQR was based on A-No. 8 corrosion resistant overlay onto a P-No. 1 material. Impact toughness was required and the test coupon received PWHT at 620°C for 4 hours. |
Does the PQR described in Background (A) support a WPS for depositing an A-No. 8 corrosion resistance overlay onto P-No. 1 material, with impact requirements, that receive PWHT at 620°C for 5 hours? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15359 |
| BPV IX-17-07 |
SC IX; QW-407.9 - PWHT |
QW-407.9 |
3/9/2017 |
Background (B): A PQR was based on nickel alloy filler metal (F-No. 41 through F-No. 46) corrosion resistant overlay onto a P-No. 1 material. Impact toughness was required and the test coupon received PWHT at 620°C for 4 hours. |
Does the PQR described in Background (B) support a WPS for depositing a nickel alloy filler metal (F-No. 41 through F-No. 46) corrosion resistance overlay onto P-No. 1 material, with impact requirements, that receive PWHT at 620°C for 3 hours? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15359 |
| BPV IX-17-07 |
SC IX; QW-407.9 - PWHT |
QW-407.9 |
3/9/2017 |
Background (B): A PQR was based on nickel alloy filler metal (F-No. 41 through F-No. 46) corrosion resistant overlay onto a P-No. 1 material. Impact toughness was required and the test coupon received PWHT at 620°C for 4 hours. |
Does the PQR described in Background (B) support a WPS for depositing a nickel alloy filler metal (F-No. 41 to F-No. 46) corrosion resistance overlay onto P-No. 1 material, with impact requirements, that receive PWHT at 620°C for 5 hours? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15359 |
| BPV IX-16-49 |
SC IX; Table QW-452.1(b) and QW-351 - Thickness of Weld Metal Deposit by Welder |
QW-452.1(b); QW-351 |
12/6/2016 |
A complete penetration double bevel groove plate to pipe attachment weld joint is welded with GTAW for the root pass and SMAW for each side of the bevel groove remaining. Both sides of the bevel groove thickness remaining are the same after installation of the GTAW root pass by qualified Welder “A”. Another Welder “B” is assigned to complete the SMAW welding of both sides of the remaining double bevel groove joint. |
Is Welder “B” who is only qualified for the remaining bevel groove thickness on one side of the bevel groove weld also qualified to weld the remaining thickness on the other side of the bevel groove weld since the weld joint is separated by the GTAW root pass? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15360 |
| BPV IX-17-08 |
SC IX; QW-404.15 - Thickness Qualified |
QW-404.15 |
3/9/2017 |
A welder qualifies with SMAW using F-No. 4 filler metal by depositing a 0.436 inch thick weld. The same welder also qualifies with SMAW using F-No. 5 filler metal by depositing a 0.375 inch thick weld. |
Is a welder with the two qualifications above qualified to weld with F-No. 5 filler metal with a maximum thickness of 0.872 inches? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15375 |
| BPV IX-17-09 |
SC IX; Table QW-255 and QW-404.32 - Procedure Qualification FCAW Process |
QW-255; QW-404.32 |
3/9/2017 |
|
A WPS is qualified for the FCAW process. Table QW-255 applies to both GMAW and FCAW processes and specifies that QW-404.32 is an essential variable. Does the limitation for the low voltage short-circuiting type of gas metal arc process apply to the FCAW process when the deposited weld metal thickness is less than 1/2 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15391 |
| BPV IX-17-10 |
SC IX; Appendix E - Validity of Reaffirmed AWS SWPSs |
|
3/9/2017 |
|
May an edition of an AWS Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS), which shows a reaffirmation date other than that shown under “Designation” in Mandatory Appendix E, be used under the requirements of ASME Section IX, Article V? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15448 |
| BPV IX-17-11 |
SC IX; QW-404.9 - AWS Classifiation |
QW-404.9 |
3/9/2017 |
|
May a flux-electrode combination classified in the as-welded condition, be qualified in a PQR with PWHT, under Section IX rules? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15460 |
| BPV IX-17-15 |
SC IX; QW-200.4, QW-202.2 (a) and QW-202.2 (b) |
QW-200.4; QW-202.2; QW-202.2 |
4/7/2017 |
A PQR consists of a GTAW root without backing and SMAW fill. |
Can a WPS be written for SMAW without backing? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15481 |
| BPV IX-17-77 |
SC IX; QW-200.4(b), QW-403.6 - Combination of PQRs with Impact Testing |
QW-200.4(b); QW-403.6 |
11/14/2017 |
A combination GTAW and FCAW WPS is supported by two PQRs performed using the same base metals and the same PWHT below the lower transformation temperature. Impact testing was performed.
PQR A is welded with GTAW to join 13 mm thick plates with 13 mm of GTAW deposit. PQR B is welded with FCAW to join 40 mm thick plates with 40 mm of FCAW deposit. |
Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 16 mm to 200 mm when impact testing is required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15511 |
| BPV IX-17-03 |
SC IX; QW-404.32 - Waveform Controlled Welding |
QW-404.32 |
2/2/2017 |
|
Can Waveform Controlled Welding using short-circuiting transfer (gas metal-arc welding) be exempt from QW-404.32 thickness limitations? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15537 |
| BPV IX-17-16 |
SC IX; Table QW/QB-422 - P-Number Assignment |
|
4/7/2017 |
|
May SA-351/SA-351M Grade CF3MN be considered a P-Number 8, Group 1 material? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15553 |
| BPV IX-17-16 |
SC IX; Table QW/QB-422 - P-Number Assignment |
|
4/7/2017 |
|
May SA-351/SA-351M Grade CF3MN be considered as another P-Number? |
No, at this time the material has not been assigned a P-Number. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15553 |
| BPV IX-17-17 |
SC IX; QW-304.1 - Number of Test Coupons |
QW-304.1 |
5/18/2017 |
|
Does it meet Code requirements that when doing a performance test on a 1" diameter coupon, the specimens shall be removed according to QW-463.2(d) and the size of the coupon would follow figure QW-462.3(a), note (b) and cut into quarter sections and bent utilizing only one test coupon? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15564 |
| BPV IX-17-17 |
SC IX; QW-304.1 - Number of Test Coupons |
QW-304.1 |
5/18/2017 |
|
Does the last statement of QW-304.1 starting with "Alternatively", this part of the section, including sub sections (a), (b) and (c) all describe qualification of the welder utilizing production welds and the reference to 6" length deal entirely with volumetric NDE? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15564 |
| BPV IX-17-45 |
SC IX; QW-424.1 - Metals that do not appear in Table QW/QB-422 |
QW-424.1 |
8/23/2017 |
In assigning P-Numbers, some grades within QW/QB-422 list specific classes, while others do not list the individual classes. |
Whenever specific classes within a grade of a material specification are not individually listed in QW/QB-422, are all classes within a specific grade considered to be the same P-Number and Group Number? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15570 |
| BPV IX-16-40 |
SC IX; QW-200.2(d) - Format of the PQR |
QW-200.2(d) |
11/21/2016 |
QW-200.2(d) requires that "…the type of tests, number of tests, and test results shall be listed in the PQR." |
May the type of tests, number of tests, and test results be recorded in an attachment that is referenced on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14529 |
| BPV IX-17-18 |
SC IX; QW-322.1(a) - Expiration of Welder Qualification |
QW-322.1(a) |
5/18/2017 |
A welder qualified on January 1, 2016 last welded with the same process on March 1, 2016. |
Is the welder qualified to weld with the same process on September 2, 2016 without requalification or renewal of qualification per QW-322.2(a)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15582 |
| BPV IX-17-01 |
SC IX; QW-322.1(a) - NDE for welder qualification extension |
QW-322.1(a) |
1/9/2017 |
A welder was qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX QW-304 using volumetric NDE in accordance with QW-302.2. |
Is it required that volumetric NDE inspection be performed on the welder's weld within six month of the qualification date for extending the welder's certification for next six months? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15583 |
| BPV IX-17-22 |
SC IX; Request for Clarification of QG-102 |
|
5/18/2017 |
|
Are the actual test values required to be reported on the PQR? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15584 |
| BPV IX-17-13 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Applicability of Requirement |
QW-200.4 |
3/30/2017 |
|
Do all of the paragraphs of QW-200.4(a) only apply when using multiple qualifications? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15600 |
| BPV IX-17-12 |
SC IX; QW-452 and QW-461.9 - Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-452; QW-461.9 |
3/28/2017 |
A welder prepares a performance qualification test coupon using 20 mm thick plate by depositing three layers of weld metal for a total deposited weld metal thickness of 10 mm in the 2G position, then moves the test coupon to the 4G position and deposits three additional layers of weld metal for an additional deposited weld metal thickness of 10 mm. |
Does the condition described above qualify the welder for unlimited deposited weld metal thickness in the flat, horizontal, and overhead positions? |
No. See Table QW-452.1(b). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15624 |
| BPV IX-17-12 |
SC IX; QW-452 and QW-461.9 - Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens |
QW-452; QW-461.9 |
3/28/2017 |
A welder prepares a performance qualification test coupon using 20 mm thick plate by depositing three layers of weld metal for a total deposited weld metal thickness of 10 mm in the 2G position, then moves the test coupon to the 4G position and deposits three additional layers of weld metal for an additional deposited weld metal thickness of 10 mm. |
Does the condition described above qualify the welder for a maximum deposited weld metal thickness of 20 mm in each of the flat, horizontal, and overhead positions? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15624 |
| BPV IX-16-18 |
SC IX; QW-403.5 and QW-424 |
QW-403.5; QW-424 |
5/20/2016 |
|
A WPS is qualified using a P-No. 5A Group 1 base metal with impact testing. May the WPS allow welding of P-No. 5A Group 1 base metal with impact testing to P-No. 4, P-No. 3 and P-No. 1 base metals where impact testing is not imposed on the P-No. 4, P-No. 3 and P-No. 1 base metals without further qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14431 |
| BPV IX-17-46 |
SC IX; QG-101 & QW 200.1(b) - Content of WPS |
QG-101; QW-200.1(b) |
8/23/2017 |
|
Does ASME Section IX require that all essential, nonessential and supplementary variables, when applicable, be addressed on a WPS even when the variables are not used during qualification or production? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15658 |
| BPV IX-17-46 |
SC IX; QG-101 & QW 200.1(b) - Content of WPS |
QG-101; QW-200.1(b) |
8/23/2017 |
|
Is stating N/A an acceptable method of addressing variables on a WPS that are not used during qualification or production? |
Section IX does not address how the user addresses variables on the WPS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15658 |
| BPV IX-17-23 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 |
QW-200.4 |
5/31/2017 |
|
May a Procedure Qualification Record (PQR), qualified using one unassigned metal to a P-No. 5A metal with base metals 5 mm thick and another PQR qualified using the same process and weld filler metal on P-No. 5A to P-No. 5A metal 20 mm thick be combined to support a WPS for welding the same unassigned metal with a thickness of 5 mm to a P-No. 5A metal with a thickness of 20 mm using the same weld filler metal? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15676 |
| BPV IX-17-29 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 Dissimilar base metal thicknesses |
QW-202.4 |
6/6/2017 |
|
Does a PQR qualified with a groove weld of a 9mm thick P8 joined to a 40mm thick P1 material support a WPS for tube to tube sheet welding with a tube of 3mm thick P8 to a 100mm thick P1 tube sheet, provided all other essential variables remain unchanged, supplementary essential variables are not applicable and the construction code does not mandate QW-193 qualification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15688 |
| BPV IX-17-14 |
SC IX; QW-404.14 - Two-sided GTAW |
QW-404.14 |
4/7/2017 |
Production double welded butt-welds are performed on aluminum base metals. In order to consolidate the root pass penetration, a two-sided GTAW manual process is simultaneously performed by one welder per side (total 2 welders) in the same melted welding pool. During this two-sided welding operation, the face welder brings the filler metal, the root welder not. |
For welder performance testing, is the welder who installs only the root-side portion of this weld (i.e, the welder who does not add filler material) qualified for welding with filler material addition in accordance with QW-404.14? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15694 |
| BPV IX-17-24 |
SC IX; QW-193.1 and QW-288 - Procedure Qualification Specimens |
QW-193.1; QW-288 |
5/31/2017 |
|
Can a PQR qualified with a triangular hole configuration be used to weld a square hole configuration within the limits of essential variables of QW-288? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15712 |
| BPV IX-17-30 |
SC IX; QW-200.4, QW-200.2(f) - Combination WPS |
QW-200.4; QW-200.2(f) |
6/6/2017 |
|
May a combination of two PQRs each of different welding processes, support a WPS combining the two processes in a single joint with all the essential and supplementary essential variables unchanged? |
Yes, provided the base metal and deposited weld metal thickness limits of QW-451 are satisfied for each process. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15730 |
| BPV IX-17-02 |
SC IX; QW-288.1(c) Tube-To-Tubesheet Essential Variables - qualified tube wall thickness |
QW-288.1(c) |
1/19/2017 |
|
A PQR records a tube to tubesheet qualification using tubes with a wall thickness of 2.5 mm. Can this PQR be used to support a WPS to weld 3.05 mm thick tubes? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15739 |
| BPV IX-17-04 |
SC IX; QW-202.3(b) and QW 404.14 - Repair the cover pass of a completed SMAW weld using the GTAW process |
QW-202.3(b) |
2/14/2017 |
A joint is welded using a WPS qualified with the GTAW (with the addition of filler metal) and SMAW processes. |
Is it permissible to use the GTAW process, with the addition of filler metal and not exceeding the maximum qualified deposited thickness, to make repairs to the SMAW deposit? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15749 |
| BPV IX-16-21 |
SC IX; QW-423.1 - Base Metals for Welder Qualification |
QW-423.1 |
5/20/2016 |
|
QW-423.1 allows the substitution of base metals specified in the WPS used for welding the qualification test coupon and specifies the welder’s qualified range of base metals. Is the full range of Qualified Production Base Metals listed in the right column of the table permitted to be welded following qualified WPS’s within the welder’s qualified range of F-numbers and other essential variables? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14551 |
| BPV IX-16-21 |
SC IX; QW-423.1 - Base Metals for Welder Qualification |
QW-423.1 |
5/20/2016 |
|
Is it required that the WPS used for welding the test coupon list the alternate base metal(s) allowed for welder qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14551 |
| BPV IX-16-33 |
SC IX; QW-288 - Cladding Material Replacement by Equivalent Chemistry Plate |
QW-288 |
9/15/2016 |
A welding procedure qualification (P No. 8 to P No. 8) is required for joining 316L tubes to a clad plate (SA516 gr 70: 25mm thk + 6mm SS 316L) tube sheet, where the requirements of QW-288 apply. |
Can a 32mm solid plate of SS 316L material with all other essential variable as per QW-288, be used to represent the tube sheet for the qualification mock-up? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14560 |
| BPV IX-16-4 |
SC IX; QW-404.5 - A-No. 1 an A-No. 2 on WPS |
QW-404.5 |
3/3/2016 |
|
May a PQR qualified with an A-No. 1 weld metal support a WPS for welding both A-No. 1 an A-No. 2 weld metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14437 |
| BPV IX-16-23 |
SC IX; QW-200.2(b) Contents of the PQR |
QW-200.2(b) |
5/20/2016 |
Two identical pipe coupons were welded with the same essential and nonessential variables. One coupon was tested in the as-welded condition and the second coupon was tested after PWHT. |
Is it permitted to record both heat treatment conditions on one PQR provided all applicable essential variables are the same and all required tests are conducted and reported for both heat treatment conditions? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14614 |
| BPV IX-16-24 |
SC IX; QW-407.9 - PWHT Time and Temperature Range for Corrosion-Resistance |
QW-407.9 |
5/20/2016 |
|
Does a PQR for depositing corrosion resistance overlays onto P1 material with impact requirements which was PWHT at 1175°F for 5 hours, support a WPS depositing corrosion resistance overlay onto P1 material with impact requirements which was PWHT at 1175°F for 1 hour? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14617 |
| BPV IX-16-25 |
SC IX; QW-404.30 - Maximum t |
QW-404.30 |
5/23/2016 |
Two welders make identical performance qualification welds using SMAW. The weld metal deposited in each test coupon is less than ½ inch. One performance qualification test coupon was qualified by destructive testing. The other performance qualification test coupon was qualified by volumetric examination. |
Is the welder that was qualified by volumetric examination limited to a maximum weld metal thickness of 2t? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14630 |
| BPV IX-16-25 |
SC IX; QW-404.30 - Maximum t |
QW-404.30 |
5/23/2016 |
Two welders make identical performance qualification welds using SMAW. The weld metal deposited in each test coupon is less than ½ inch. One performance qualification test coupon was qualified by destructive testing. The other performance qualification test coupon was qualified by volumetric examination. |
Is the welder that was qualified by destructive testing limited to a maximum weld metal thickness of 2t? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14630 |
| BPV IX-16-26 |
SC IX; QW-407.1 - Post Weld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1 |
5/24/2016 |
A WPS is written for welding ASME P-No. 1 material with the SAW process where the material and weld is heated during forming at 600oC to 750oC for 1 hour, followed by normalizing at 900oC to 930oC for 2 hours followed by air cooling and then post weld heat treated at 621oC to 649oC for 2 hours. |
When notch toughness does not apply is the WPS supported with a PQR qualified with heat treatment of normalizing at 900oC to 930oC for 2 hours followed by air cooling and then post weld heat treated at 621oC to 649oC for 2 hours with all other essential and supplementary variables being the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14656 |
| BPV IX-16-26 |
SC IX; QW-407.1 - Post Weld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1 |
5/24/2016 |
A WPS is written for welding ASME P-No. 1 material with the SAW process where the material and weld is heated during forming at 600oC to 750oC for 1 hour, followed by normalizing at 900oC to 930oC for 2 hours followed by air cooling and then post weld heat treated at 621oC to 649oC for 2 hours. |
When notch toughness applies is the WPS supported with a PQR qualified with heat treatment of normalizing at 900oC to 930oC for 2 hours followed by air cooling and then post weld heat treated at 621oC to 649oC for 2 hours with all other essential and supplementary variables being the same? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14656 |
| BPV IX-16-34 |
SC IX; QW-402.4, QW-403.8, QW-404.15 and QW-452 - Welder Qualification |
QW-402.4; QW-403.8; QW-404.15; QW-452 |
9/15/2016 |
A welder is qualified in the 5G position without backing on a P No. 1 pipe of 12.75 in. (325 mm) OD and ¾ in. (19 mm) wall thickness welding the root and hot pass with the GTAW process using ER70S-2 filler metal depositing ¼ in. (6.4 mm) weld metal and then completing the balance of the weld with the SMAW process using E7018 electrode in three (3) weld passes. |
Is the Welder qualified to complete production welds joining A335 P22 pipe, without backing, in the 5G position of outside pipe diameters from 2-7/8 in. (73 mm) to unlimited outside diameter, completing the root and hot pass (1/2 in. (12.8 mm) maximum weld deposit thickness) with the GTAW process using ER90S-B3 filler metal and welding the fill and cap passes with the SMAW process using E9018-B3 electrodes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14671 |
| BPV IX-16-34 |
SC IX; QW-402.4, QW-403.8, QW-404.15 and QW-452 - Welder Qualification |
QW-402.4; QW-403.8; QW-404.15; QW-452 |
9/15/2016 |
A welder is qualified in the 5G position without backing on a P No. 1 pipe of 12.75 in. (325 mm) OD and ¾ in. (19 mm) wall thickness welding the root and hot pass with the GTAW process using ER70S-2 filler metal depositing ¼ in. (6.4 mm) weld metal and then completing the balance of the weld with the SMAW process using E7018 electrode in three (3) weld passes. |
Is the Welder qualified to complete production welds joining A335 P22 pipe, without backing, in the 5G position on outside pipe diameters from 2-7/8 in. (73 mm) to unlimited outside diameter completing the root pass with the SMAW process using E9018-B3 electrodes? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14671 |
| BPV IX-16-34 |
SC IX; QW-402.4, QW-403.8, QW-404.15 and QW-452 - Welder Qualification |
QW-402.4; QW-403.8; QW-404.15; QW-452 |
9/15/2016 |
A welder is qualified in the 5G position without backing on a P No. 1 pipe of 12.75 in. (325 mm) OD and ¾ in. (19 mm) wall thickness welding the root and hot pass with the GTAW process using ER70S-2 filler metal depositing ¼ in. (6.4 mm) weld metal and then completing the balance of the weld with the SMAW process using E7018 electrode in three (3) weld passes. |
If a welder is only qualified to weld fill and cap passes of the test coupon described in the background, may the welder weld only the fill and cap passes on outside pipe diameters of 2-7/8 in. (73 mm) to unlimited outside diameter of A335 P 22 pipe in the 5G position with the SMAW process using E9018-B3 electrodes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14671 |
| BPV IX-16-34 |
SC IX; QW-402.4, QW-403.8, QW-404.15 and QW-452 - Welder Qualification |
QW-402.4; QW-403.8; QW-404.15; QW-452 |
9/15/2016 |
A welder is qualified in the 5G position without backing on a P No. 1 pipe of 12.75 in. (325 mm) OD and ¾ in. (19 mm) wall thickness welding the root and hot pass with the GTAW process using ER70S-2 filler metal depositing ¼ in. (6.4 mm) weld metal and then completing the balance of the weld with the SMAW process using E7018 electrode in three (3) weld passes. |
Can the welder that is qualified as described in the background with the GTAW and SMAW processes, weld only the fill and cap passes on pipe of outside diameters from 2- 7/8 (73 mm) to unlimited outside diameter in the 5G position of A335 P 22 pipe with the SMAW process using E9018-B3 electrodes, provided another qualified welder welds the root and hot pass with the GTAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14671 |
| BPV IX-16-35 |
SC IX; QW-405.2 vs Heat input |
QW-405.2 |
9/15/2016 |
A FCAW WPS is supported by two FCAW PQRs where supplementary essential variables apply. The test coupon for PQR 1 was 1 inch thick, welded in the 1G position using a maximum heat input of 60 kJ/in and an interpass temperature of 400°F. The test coupon for PQR 2 was 5/16 inch thick, welded vertically up in the 3G position using a maximum heat input of 30 kJ/in. and an interpass temperature of 200°F. |
Is the WPS qualified to weld in all positions and all progressions on material thickness range of 5/16 inch to 2 inch with a maximum heat input of 30 kJ/in. and a maximum interpass temperature of 500°F? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14684 |
| BPV IX-16-35 |
SC IX; QW-405.2 vs Heat input |
QW-405.2 |
9/15/2016 |
A FCAW WPS is supported by two FCAW PQRs where supplementary essential variables apply. The test coupon for PQR 1 was 1 inch thick, welded in the 1G position using a maximum heat input of 60 kJ/in and an interpass temperature of 400°F. The test coupon for PQR 2 was 5/16 inch thick, welded vertically up in the 3G position using a maximum heat input of 30 kJ/in. and an interpass temperature of 200°F. |
Is the WPS qualified to weld in all positions and all progressions on material thickness range of 5/16 inch to 2 inch with a maximum heat input of 30 kJ/in. and a maximum interpass temperature of 300°F? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14684 |
| BPV IX-16-35 |
SC IX; QW-405.2 vs Heat input |
QW-405.2 |
9/15/2016 |
A FCAW WPS is supported by two FCAW PQRs where supplementary essential variables apply. The test coupon for PQR 1 was 1 inch thick, welded in the 1G position using a maximum heat input of 60 kJ/in and an interpass temperature of 400°F. The test coupon for PQR 2 was 5/16 inch thick, welded vertically up in the 3G position using a maximum heat input of 30 kJ/in. and an interpass temperature of 200°F. |
Is the WPS qualified to weld in all positions and all progressions on material thickness range of 5/8 inch to 2 inch with a maximum heat input of 60 kJ/in. and a maximum interpass temperature of 500°F? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14684 |
| BPV IX-16-31 |
SC IX; QW-191.1 - Radiographic Examination Method |
QW-191.1 |
7/11/2016 |
|
Is it the intent of Section IX, paragraph QW-191.1(a) to limit radiographic examination methods to film radiography, by imposing criteria for demonstrating compliance with density requirements? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14712 |
| BPV IX-16-27 |
SC IX; QW-424 - Base Metals Used for Procedure Qualification |
QW-424 |
5/25/2016 |
|
A Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) has been qualified for joining P-No. 5A to P-No. 8 with F-No. 43 filler metal using the GTAW welding process. Under the provisions of QW-424.1, is the WPS also qualified for joining P-No. 5A to itself, or to any other base metal with F-No. 43 filler metal? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14765 |
| BPV IX-16-29 |
SC IX; QW-403.10 - GMAW-FCAW welding |
QW-403.10 |
5/25/2016 |
A PQR was developed based on a 0.322 inch thick test coupon. Short-circuit GMAW was used to deposit 0.125 inch of weld metal and FCAW was used to deposit 0.197 inch of weld metal. |
Does the PQR support a combination GMAW and FCAW WPS for base material thickness range from 0.062 to 0.532 inch (1.1 times 0.125 inch for short-circuit GMAW and 2 times 0.197 inch for FCAW) with each process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14771 |
| BPV IX-16-28 |
SC IX; QW-304 - GMAW-S Qualification by Ultrasonic Examination |
QW-304 |
5/25/2016 |
|
May a performance qualification test weld deposited by a welder or welding operator using the GMAW short circuiting process be accepted by ultrasonic examination under the rules of QW-304, QW-305, and QW-191.2? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14777 |
| BPV IX-16-19 |
SC IX; QW-151, Figures QW-462.1(b), (c), (d) and (e) - Tension Test Specimens for Pipe |
QW-151; QW-462.1(b) |
5/20/2016 |
Provided an organization can demonstrate that it meets the requirements for the number and size of the tension test specimens. |
Is it permitted to use tension test specimens conforming to Figure QW-462.1(b) for pipes having outside diameters of 3 in. (75 mm) or less? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14457 |
| BPV IX-16-19 |
SC IX; QW-151, Figures QW-462.1(b), (c), (d) and (e) - Tension Test Specimens for Pipe |
QW-151; QW-462.1(b) |
5/20/2016 |
Provided an organization can demonstrate that it meets the requirements for the number and size of the tension test specimens. |
Is it permitted to use tension test specimens conforming to Figure QW-462.1(c) for pipes having outside diameters greater than 3 in. (75 mm)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14457 |
| BPV IX-16-19 |
SC IX; QW-151, Figures QW-462.1(b), (c), (d) and (e) - Tension Test Specimens for Pipe |
QW-151; QW-462.1(b) |
5/20/2016 |
Provided an organization can demonstrate that it meets the requirements for the number and size of the tension test specimens. |
Is it permitted to use tension test specimens conforming to either Figure QW-462.1(d) or Figure QW-462.1(e) regardless of pipe outside diameter? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=14457 |
| BPV IX-17-54 |
SC IX; QW-409.22, QW-409.26 and Figure QW-462.5 (d) - Electrical Characteristics, Amperage |
QW-409.22; QW-409.26; QW-462.5 |
8/24/2017 |
|
Does QW-409.22 or QW-409.26 require that the highest amperage used in the first layer of the PQR be used at the location where the side bend test specimens are removed? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16206 |
| BPV IX-17-67 |
SC IX; QW 202.4 - Dissimilar Thicknesses in a Weld Joint |
|
9/28/2017 |
|
A welding procedure is qualified by welding 10mm P-No 45 material to10mm P-No 43 material. Does this qualify welding unlimited thickness of the thicker production member of dissimilar metal thickness P-No 45 to P-No 43? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16208 |
| BPV IX-17-55 |
SC IX; QW-322.1 - Qualifying Organization |
QW-322.1 |
8/24/2017 |
|
Does “Qualifying or Participating Organization(s)” as mentioned in QW-322.1 refer to a 3rd party inspection company? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16221 |
| BPV IX-17-56 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 and Table QW-451.4 - Fillet Weld Procedure Qualification |
QW-403.6; QW-451.4 |
8/24/2017 |
|
For fillet welds qualified by a groove weld in test coupon thickness less than 6 mm (1/4 in.) in accordance with Table QW-451.4 and where supplementary essential variables apply, is the minimum qualified base metal thickness for fillet welds limited to ½T per QW-403.6? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16232 |
| BPV IX-17-26 |
SC IX; QW-322 - Expiration of Qualification |
QW-322 |
6/6/2017 |
|
May a welder qualified to weld a corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay using (SMAW) process extend his qualifications for an additional six (6) months by welding groove welds with SMAW process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16236 |
| BPV IX-17-56 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 and Table QW-451.4 - Fillet Weld Procedure Qualification |
QW-403.6; QW-451.4 |
8/24/2017 |
|
For fillet welds qualified by a groove weld in test coupon thickness less than 6 mm (1/4 in.) in accordance with Table QW-451.4 and where supplementary essential variables apply, is the maximum qualified base metal thickness limited? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16232 |
| BPV IX-17-56 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 and Table QW-451.4 - Fillet Weld Procedure Qualification |
QW-403.6; QW-451.4 |
8/24/2017 |
|
For fillet welds qualified by a groove weld in test coupon thickness greater than 6 mm (1/4 in.) but less than 16 mm (5/8 in.) in accordance with Table QW-451.4 and where supplementary essential variables apply, is the minimum qualified base metal thickness for fillet welds limited to T per QW-403.6? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16232 |
| BPV IX-17-56 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 and Table QW-451.4 - Fillet Weld Procedure Qualification |
QW-403.6; QW-451.4 |
8/24/2017 |
|
When supplementary essential variable QW-403.6 applies to fillet welds qualified by a groove weld test, what is the intent of the limiting the minimum thickness to T? |
ASME does not provide rationale for Code requirements. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16232 |
| BPV IX-18-23 |
SC IX; QG-106.1 - Corporate Organization Responsibility |
|
4/19/2018 |
In accordance with QG-106.1(c), one or more companies under the same corporate ownership do not require separate procedure qualifications if operational control is defined in each company's Quality Control System/Quality Assurance Program and all other requirements of Section IX are met. |
Company A is the corporate owner of Company B & C. If Company A certifies both procedure qualifications and procedure specifications, may Company B & C use both the procedure qualifications and specifications without creating and certifying those documents for each company individually? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16244 |
| BPV IX-18-01 |
SC IX; QG-106.3 - Simultaneous Performance Qualifications, QW-321.4 - Further Training |
QW-321.4 |
1/10/2018 |
A welder performs a qualification test in accordance with QG-106.3 and fails the test. The welder receives further training or practice prior to retaking the test per QW-321.4. |
Is it required that further training or practice be witnessed or administered by the participating organizations? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16248 |
| BPV IX-18-01 |
SC IX; QG-106.3 - Simultaneous Performance Qualifications, QW-321.4 - Further Training |
QW-321.4 |
1/10/2018 |
A welder performs a qualification test in accordance with QG-106.3 and fails the test. The welder receives further training or practice prior to retaking the test per QW-321.4. |
Is it required that the welder/welding operator provide evidence of further training or practice to participation organizations if the participation organizations did not witness the training or practice? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16248 |
| BPV IX-18-01 |
SC IX; QG-106.3 - Simultaneous Performance Qualifications, QW-321.4 - Further Training |
QW-321.4 |
1/10/2018 |
A welder performs a qualification test in accordance with QG-106.3 and fails the test. The welder receives further training or practice prior to retaking the test per QW-321.4. |
Is watching an internet instructional video considered further training? |
Section IX does not define how the further training is conducted. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16248 |
| BPV IX-17-34 |
SC IX; QG-106 - Welding Procedure Qualification |
QG-106 |
6/22/2017 |
|
Under the rules of QG-106.1(a), may a qualifying organization utilize a worker contracted from another company to produce a test joint for procedure qualification, provided the worker is under the full supervision and control of the qualifying organization during the production of the test joint? |
Yes. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16264 |
| BPV IX-17-35 |
SC IX; QW-191.2.1(b) - Qualification of Ultrasonic Examination Procedure |
QW-191.2.1(b) |
6/22/2017 |
|
When qualifying a welder or welding operator on production welds by ultrasonic examinations as permitted under QW-302.2, if the qualification of the examination procedure is not required by the referencing code section, is the ultrasonic examination procedure required to be qualified under the requirements of QW-191.2.1(b)? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16271 |
| BPV IX-17-57 |
SC IX; QW-424.1 - Base Metal Qualification |
QW-424.1 |
8/24/2017 |
|
May a PQR qualified using P-No. 5B base materials be used to support a WPS for welding any combination of P-No. 5B and P-No.15E materials? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16300 |
| BPV IX-17-37 |
SC IX; QW-202.2, QW-211 & QW-451.1 - PQR with Dissimilar Thicknesses |
QW-202.2; QW-211; QW-451.1 |
8/4/2017 |
A procedure qualification is performed between one plate having a thickness of 3/8 in. and a second plate of the same P-Number having a thickness of 1½ in. The 3/8 in. thick plate is beveled and welded to the 1½ in. thick plate with complete joint penetration using a single welding process with 3/8 in. deposited weld metal thickness. Notch toughness testing is not required. |
Will this PQR qualify a WPS for welding base metal with a thickness range of 1/16 in. to ¾ in. to base metal with a thickness range from 3/16 in. to 8 in. and a deposited weld metal thickness range of ¾ in. maximum? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15814 |
| BPV IX-17-37 |
SC IX; QW-202.2, QW-211 & QW-451.1 - PQR with Dissimilar Thicknesses |
QW-202.2; QW-211; QW-451.1 |
8/4/2017 |
A procedure qualification is performed between one plate having a thickness of 3/8 in. and a second plate of the same P-Number having a thickness of 1½ in. The 3/8 in. thick plate is beveled and welded to the 1½ in. thick plate with complete joint penetration using a single welding process with 3/8 in. deposited weld metal thickness. Notch toughness testing is not required. |
Will this PQR qualify a WPS for all base metal thickness combinations from 1/16 in. to 8 in. and a deposited weld metal thickness range of ¾ in. maximum? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15814 |
| BPV IX-17-62 |
SC IX; Table QW-452.1(b) - Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified |
QW-452.1(b) |
10/4/2017 |
A WPQ test is conducted on 6 in. sch. 160 (18.26 mm thick) pipe using GTAW and SMAW. Weld metal deposited by GTAW is 3 mm and by SMAW is 15.26 mm with more than 3 layers. |
Is the qualified thickness of SMAW deposited weld metal, maximum to be welded? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16333 |
| BPV IX-17-62 |
SC IX; Table QW-452.1(b) - Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified |
QW-452.1(b) |
10/4/2017 |
A WPQ test is conducted on 6 in. sch. 160 (18.26 mm thick) pipe using GTAW and SMAW. Weld metal deposited by GTAW is 3 mm and by SMAW is 15.26 mm with more than 3 layers. |
For the purpose of performance qualifications, is “maximum to be welded” the same as “unlimited”? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16333 |
| BPV IX-17-62 |
SC IX; Table QW-452.1(b) - Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified |
QW-452.1(b) |
10/4/2017 |
A WPQ test is conducted on 6 in. sch. 160 (18.26 mm thick) pipe using GTAW and SMAW. Weld metal deposited by GTAW is 3 mm and by SMAW is 15.26 mm with more than 3 layers. |
May a 24 in. diameter pipe of thickness 26.9 mm be welded using SMAW only based on the above qualification? |
Yes, within the limits of other essential variables. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16333 |
| BPV IX-17-63 |
SC IX; QW-356 and QW-408.8 |
QW-356; QW-408.8 |
9/25/2017 |
A welder is qualified on P-No. 8 pipe using GTAW with inert gas backing. |
May the welder weld P-No.1 material without inert gas backing? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16334 |
| BPV IX-17-47 |
SC IX; QW-404.12 and QW-404.33 |
QW-404.12; QW-404.33 |
8/24/2017 |
|
For filler metals not covered by an SFA specification, are the terms “trade designation” and “trade name” used interchangeably? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15768 |
| BPV IX-17-84 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Combination of PQRs |
QW-200.4 |
12/4/2017 |
PQR-A is welded with GTAW (12mm) + SMAW (20mm) + SAW (20mm) for a total base metal thickness of 52mm. Tensile, bend and impact test is carried out and was acceptable. PQR-B is welded with GTAW (4mm) + SMAW (4mm) for a total base metal thickness of 8mm. Only Impact test is carried out on PQR-B and was acceptable. All other variables are unchanged between the two PQR. |
When impact test is required, do the two PQRs (A&B) support a WPS to weld base metal of thickness range from 8-200mm using the GTAW and SMAW processes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16393 |
| BPV IX-17-84 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Combination of PQRs |
QW-200.4 |
12/4/2017 |
PQR-A is welded with GTAW (12mm) + SMAW (20mm) + SAW (20mm) for a total base metal thickness of 52mm. Tensile, bend and impact test is carried out and was acceptable. PQR-B is welded with GTAW (4mm) + SMAW (4mm) for a total base metal thickness of 8mm. Only Impact test is carried out on PQR-B and was acceptable. All other variables are unchanged between the two PQR. |
When impact test is required, do the two PQRs (A&B) support a WPS to weld base metal of thickness range from 8-200mm using the GTAW, SMAW and SAW processes? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16393 |
| BPV IX-17-61 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Combination of PQR's |
QW-200.4 |
9/14/2017 |
PQR A is welded with GTAW and GMAW on 0.787 in. (20 mm) thick plates with weld metal deposition of 0.275 in. (5 mm) by GTAW and 0.590 in. (15 mm) by GMAW. PQR B is welded with GTAW and SMAW on 1.18 in. (30 mm) thick plates with weld metal deposition of 0.275 in. (5 mm) by GTAW and 0.985 in. (25 mm) by SMAW. PQR C is welded with GTAW on 0.390 in. (10 mm) thick plates with 0.390 in. (10 mm) GTAW weld metal deposition. Notch toughness is not required. |
PQR A and PQR B are combined to make a WPS for SMAW and GMAW, qualifying base metal thickness limits and respective weld metal deposition limits are as per QW-451. Can either the SMAW or GMAW process be used for initial passes(root/hot) as well as for final passes (final/capping) within their qualifying weld metal deposition limits? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16401 |
| BPV IX-17-61 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Combination of PQR's |
QW-200.4 |
9/14/2017 |
PQR A is welded with GTAW and GMAW on 0.787 in. (20 mm) thick plates with weld metal deposition of 0.275 in. (5 mm) by GTAW and 0.590 in. (15 mm) by GMAW. PQR B is welded with GTAW and SMAW on 1.18 in. (30 mm) thick plates with weld metal deposition of 0.275 in. (5 mm) by GTAW and 0.985 in. (25 mm) by SMAW. PQR C is welded with GTAW on 0.390 in. (10 mm) thick plates with 0.390 in. (10 mm) GTAW weld metal deposition. Notch toughness is not required. |
Is it acceptable to combine PQR B and PQR C to make a WPS using both GTAW and SMAW, with qualified base metal thickness range of 0.06 in. (1.5 mm) to 2.36 in. (60 mm) for each of these welding processes? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16401 |
| BPV IX-17-40 |
SC IX; QW-407.1 and QW-407.2 - Supplementary Essential Variable for Plate Material Heat Treatment Prior To Welding |
QW-407.1; QW-407.2 |
8/4/2017 |
|
When qualifying a welding procedure specification with impact testing using a test coupon prepared from plate materials, is the heat treatment condition of the plate material prior to welding considered to be a supplementary essential variable for procedure qualification? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16412 |
| BPV IX-17-40 |
SC IX; QW-407.1 and QW-407.2 - Supplementary Essential Variable for Plate Material Heat Treatment Prior To Welding |
QW-407.1; QW-407.2 |
8/4/2017 |
|
When qualifying a welding procedure specification using a test coupon prepared from plate materials, is the heat treatment condition of the plate material prior to welding considered to be an essential variable for procedure qualification? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16412 |
| BPV IX-18-10 |
SC IX; QW-163 - Open Discontinuity |
QW-163 |
2/7/2018 |
An open discontinuity is present on the soon-to-be-convex surface of a bend specimen prior to bending and is also present after bending. Bending the specimen did not cause the discontinuity to open. |
Does the acceptance criteria of QW-163 apply to such a discontinuity? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16419 |
| BPV IX-17-59 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 and Table QW-451.4, Fillet Weld Procedure Qualification by Groove Weld Test |
QW-403.6; QW-451.4 |
8/30/2017 |
|
When fillet welds are qualified by a groove weld test per Table QW-451.4 and notch toughness requirements apply, do the base metal thickness limits of QW-403.6 limit the “Range Qualified” in Table QW-451.4? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16425 |
| BPV IX-17-87 |
SC IX; QW-163 - Acceptance Criteria - Bend Test |
QW-163 |
12/11/2017 |
ASME B31.3–2006, 328.2.1(a) states that qualification of welding is to be in accordance with Section IX, except as modified by 328.2.1(b). For base metals that will not withstand a full 180 degree bend despite possessing ample ductility, 328.2.1(b) permits testing of the base metal to determine the maximum angle that the material can be bent without cracking in a wrap around jig. The welded coupon is then required to undergo the same degree of bending determined for the base metal, within 5 degrees. Due to the nature of cast materials, even with ductility equal to or greater than 20%, they cannot withstand the bending stress and the material fails away from the weld or heat affected zone before reaching the established bend within 5 degrees. |
A guided bend specimen fails due to a crack, tear, or any other failure mechanism in the unaffected base metal away from the weld or the heat affected zone, precluding the completion of the bend test. Does this satisfy the requirement of QW-163? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16453 |
| BPV IX-18-24 |
SC IX; Fig.QW-462.1(b) and Fig.QW-462.3(a) |
QW-462.1(b); QW-462.3(a) |
5/3/2018 |
|
Is it required to remove material represented by the dashed lines shown in Figure QW-462.1(b). |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16456 |
| BPV IX-18-24 |
SC IX; Fig.QW-462.1(b) and Fig.QW-462.3(a) |
QW-462.1(b); QW-462.3(a) |
5/3/2018 |
|
Is it required to remove material represented by the dashed lines shown in Figure QW-462.3(a). |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16456 |
| BPV IX-17-68 |
SC IX; QW-420 and QW-424.1 - Base Metals for Procedure Qualification |
QW-420; QW-424.1 |
10/6/2017 |
|
Does a PQR performed using the 2007 Edition 2009 Addenda or later on P-No. 5B base metal qualify a WPS to weld P-No. 15E base metals, provided all other essential and supplementary essential variables are met? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16464 |
| BPV IX-17-68 |
SC IX; QW-420 and QW-424.1 - Base Metals for Procedure Qualification |
QW-420; QW-424.1 |
10/6/2017 |
|
Does a PQR performed on base metal classified as P-No. 5B Group 2 using editions and addenda prior to the 2007 Edition 2009 Addenda, but currently classified as P-No. 15E qualify a WPS to weld P-No. 15E base metals, provided all other essential and supplementary essential variables are met? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16464 |
| BPV IX-17-78 |
SC IX; QW-200.2(f) and QW-200.4 - Combination of Welding Procedures |
QW-200.2(f); QW-200.4 |
11/14/2017 |
|
Does QW-200.4 describe how to combine multiple WPSs on a single production joint? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16483 |
| BPV IX-17-78 |
SC IX; QW-200.2(f) and QW-200.4 - Combination of Welding Procedures |
QW-200.2(f); QW-200.4 |
11/14/2017 |
|
When developing new WPSs using multiple PQRs per QW-200.2(f), are there thickness limitations based on the PQRs that are to be combined? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16483 |
| BPV IX-17-79 |
SC IX; QW-401.1 - Multiple PQRs |
QW-401.1 |
11/14/2017 |
A WPS is supported by three PQRs. PQR 1 is qualified on 0.249 inch material using a heat input of 25 kJ/in. PQR 2 is qualified on 0.375 inch material using a heat input of 50 kJ/in. PQR 3 is qualified on 0.625 inch material using a heat input of 75 kJ/in. All three PQRs had acceptable tensile and bend test results. PQR 1 had acceptable toughness test results. PQR 2 and 3 had unacceptable toughness test results. |
Is the WPS, described in the background, qualified with impact requirement to weld on material thickness ranging from 0.125 to 1.25 inch thick using a maximum heat input of 25 kJ/in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16485 |
| BPV IX-17-42 |
SC IX; QW-360 - Machine vs Automatic WPQ |
QW-360 |
8/21/2017 |
|
Is a machine qualified welding operator also qualified to use the same process in the automatic mode? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16497 |
| BPV IX-17-64 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 - Combined Process |
QW-200.4 |
9/26/2017 |
A PQR shows the first portion of the coupon with 14mm of weld metal deposited using the GTAW process and the final portion with 100mm of weld metal deposited using the FCAW process. |
Can a WPS be written showing a different process sequence other than that on the PQR if the GTAW weld metal deposit of 28 mm and/or the FCAW weld metal deposit of 200 mm is not exceeded? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16504 |
| BPV IX-18-11 |
SC IX; QW-202.4(b)(2) and QW-283 - Base Metal Thickness Limitations and Buttering |
QW-202.4(b)(2); QW-283 |
2/7/2018 |
A PQR for a groove weld test on a 1 ½ inch thick P-No. 3 plate buttered with F-No. 43 filler metal (3/16 inch thick) was completed in accordance with the requirements of QW-283. After post weld heat treatment was performed on the buttered plate, it was welded to a 1 ½ inch thick P-No. 43 plate and the required mechanical testing was successfully performed. |
Does the allowance for no limitation on the maximum thickness of the thicker member given in QW-202.4(b)(2) apply for a production weld made in accordance with a WPS supported by this PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16508 |
| BPV IX-18-31 |
SC IX; QG-107 - Ownership Transfers |
|
6/20/2018 |
When one of a company's plants is sold, it is not clear if the new owner can use the Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) qualified by the original company, when the original company wishes to continue using those WPS/PQR. |
Company A sells one of its plants to Company B. May both Company A and Company B use the WPSs/PQRs previously qualified by Company A? |
Yes, provided the requirements of QG-107 are addressed by Company B. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16518 |
| BPV IX-17-80 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thickness |
QW-202.4 |
11/14/2017 |
ASME Section IX, QW-202.4(b)(2) requires that for P-no. 1 base metals of dissimilar thickness the thinner and thickest member shall be within the range permitted by QW-451 except that there need be no limitation on the maximum thickness of the thicker production member provided qualification was made on base metal having thickness of 38 mm or more.
For the questions below the orifice flange thickness is greater than the branch connection thickness. |
When selecting a welding procedure specification for welding a set on branch connection groove weld to the orifice of an orifice flange of dissimilar thickness does QW-202.4 apply? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16529 |
| BPV IX-17-80 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thickness |
QW-202.4 |
11/14/2017 |
ASME Section IX, QW-202.4(b)(2) requires that for P-no. 1 base metals of dissimilar thickness the thinner and thickest member shall be within the range permitted by QW-451 except that there need be no limitation on the maximum thickness of the thicker production member provided qualification was made on base metal having thickness of 38 mm or more.
For the questions below the orifice flange thickness is greater than the branch connection thickness. |
When welding a set on branch connection groove weld to the orifice of an orifice flange, does the thickness of the flange establish the base metal flange thickness since the weld will intersect both the thinner and the thicker section of the flange thickness around the orifice opening? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16529 |
| BPV IX-17-82 |
SC IX; QG-106.3 - Organization's Representative at Simultaneous Performance Qualification |
|
11/21/2017 |
A corporation has a representative participate in simultaneous performance qualifications fully complying with QG-106.3. |
Can wholly owned subsidiaries of a corporation utilize the welders qualified by the corporation representative? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16531 |
| BPV IX-18-25 |
SC IX; QG-106.1 - Requirement of ASME Certificate of Authorization |
|
5/3/2018 |
|
Are the organizations and companies referenced in QG-106.1 required to have ASME Certificates of Authorization? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16538 |
| BPV IX-17-72 |
SC IX; QW-410.17 |
QW-410.17 |
11/8/2017 |
|
In QW-410.17, is "welding equipment" as it pertains to EBW, limited to the electron gun column incorporating the electron source and the magnetic focusing arrangement, and not to the various chamber geometries? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16559 |
| BPV IX-17-41 |
SC IX; QG-106.1(a) |
|
8/14/2017 |
|
In QG-106.1(a) it states that the persons producing test joints for the qualification of procedures shall be either direct employees or shall be personally engaged by contract for material joining services. Is it acceptable for a company needing to qualify a welding procedure to contract a second company to perform the welding of the qualification test coupon, provided the first company maintains full supervision and control of the qualification? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16566 |
| BPV IX-18-19 |
SC IX; QW-191, QW-304 and QW-305 - Performance Qualification by Ultrasonic NDE |
QW-191; QW-304; QW-305 |
4/3/2018 |
|
May welders or welding operators be qualified by ultrasonic examination of groove welds deposited in P-No.1 base metals not less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick in test coupons or production welds using SMAW, SAW, GTAW, PAW or GMAW, or any combination of these welding processes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16574 |
| BPV IX-17-74 |
SC IX; QW-424.1 - Unassigned Materials and interpretation IX-89-05 applicability |
QW-424.1 |
11/8/2017 |
|
Does interpretation IX-89-05 apply to ASME Section IX 2015 Edition? |
This is addressed in https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/SearchInterpretation.cfm under the heading APPLICABILITY OF INTERPRETATIONS. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16588 |
| BPV IX-17-74 |
SC IX; QW-424.1 - Unassigned Materials and interpretation IX-89-05 applicability |
QW-424.1 |
11/8/2017 |
|
Does Question (2) of interpretation IX-89-05 apply to parts under pressure? |
Section IX does not address this issue. The question should be addressed to the applicable construction code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16588 |
| BPV IX-17-58 |
SC IX; QW-403.6 & QW-451.5 - Fillet Welds qualified with Supplementary Essential Variables |
QW-403.6; QW-451.5 |
8/25/2017 |
The note in the bottom of QW-451.4 (fillet welds qualified by groove welds) states "supplementary essential variables apply when notch toughness is required by other sections". The table states that the range qualified for fillet welds qualified by groove welds is all sizes on all base metal thicknesses and all diameters. |
When fillet welds are made, joining base material where notch toughness is required, does QW-403.6 limit the minimum base metal thickness qualified? |
Yes.
Note: This is a revision to previously published interpretation IX-16-15 (#15-2366). |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16602 |
| BPV IX-17-75 |
SC IX; QW-407.1 and QW-407.2 - Post Weld Heat Treatment |
QW-407.1; QW-407.2 |
11/8/2017 |
|
May a WPS where toughness applies listing a PWHT time of 11.25 hours be supported by two PQRs each covering a portion of the range of qualified thickness, one PQR with a PWHT time of 3.75 hours and the other with a PWHT time of 11.25 hours? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16632 |
| BPV IX-18-26 |
SC IX; Fig.QW-462.1(e) - ID Weld Reinforcement |
QW-462.1(e) |
5/3/2018 |
|
In figure QW-462.1(e), is the requirement to remove weld reinforcement applicable to the inside surface of the pipe? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16640 |
| BPV IX-17-73 |
SC IX; QW-202.2 & QW-451.1 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thickness |
QW-202.2; QW-451.1 |
11/8/2017 |
|
For procedure qualification of a weld joint of different base metal thicknesses with the thicker member tapered to match the thickness of the thinner member, is the final tapered thickness considered to be base metal thickness, T, for the thicker member? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16650 |
| BPV IX-17-70 |
SC IX; QW-409.24 |
QW-409.24 |
10/19/2017 |
The PAW-Hot Wire process is used in qualifying an overlay procedure. The wire wattage is calculated using the formula amperage X voltage per QW-409.24. |
Is wire stickout also required to be noted on the PQR and WPS? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16680 |
| BPV IX-17-71 |
SC IX; QW-200.4 and QW-451.1 - Combination of Welding Procedures, Performance Qualification Specimen |
QW-200.4; QW-451.1 |
10/30/2017 |
|
May a combination of two PQR’s, each qualified to weld a maximum of 6 mm with GTAW, be used to support a WPS to weld a production joint of 10 mm with GTAW in accordance QW-200.4? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16726 |
| BPV IX-17-81 |
SCIX; QW-423.2 - Alternate Base Metal for Welder Qualification |
QW-423.2 |
11/14/2017 |
A welder is qualified on an unassigned base metal produced to a national or an international standard. The mechanical properties and nominal chemical composition of the unassigned material are equivalent to P-No. 4 material. |
Is the welder qualified for welding production base metals of P-No. 1 through P-No. 15F, P-No. 34, and P-No. 41 through P-No. 49? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16734 |
| BPV IX-17-85 |
SC IX; Figure QW-462.1(a) |
QW-462.1(a) |
12/4/2017 |
A PQR test coupon was welded in accordance with an edition of Section IX prior to the current edition. A tension test specimen was found not to meet the dimensional requirements of Section IX that was in effect at the time the test coupon was welded, but the dimensions meet the requirements in the current edition of Section IX. |
May the test results be used to prepare a PQR supporting a WPS to the current edition of Section IX provided all the requirements of the current edition of Section IX are met? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16760 |
| BPV IX-17-28 |
SC IX; QW-407.1, QW-407.2, QW-256, QW-253.1 - PWHT Essential Variables |
QW-407.1; QW-407.2; QW-256; QW-253.1 |
6/6/2017 |
|
Are heating and cooling rates for PWHT essential variables per ASME Section IX and required to be recorded on the PQR? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15864 |
| BPV IX-17-28 |
SC IX; QW-407.1, QW-407.2, QW-256, QW-253.1 - PWHT Essential Variables |
QW-407.1; QW-407.2; QW-256; QW-253.1 |
6/6/2017 |
|
If a client requires other variables such as heating and cooling rates to be added to the PQR do these become essential variables? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15864 |
| BPV IX-18-02 |
SC IX; Table QW-451.1, Note 2 and QW-200.4 - Combination of Welding Procedures |
QW-451.1; QW-200.4 |
1/19/2018 |
|
Does Table QW-451.1 specify any limitation on the minimum thickness of a procedure qualification test coupon to be welded with two processes provided all essential and when required, supplementary essential variables of each process are addressed? |
No. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16784 |
| BPV IX-18-02 |
SC IX; Table QW-451.1, Note 2 and QW-200.4 - Combination of Welding Procedures |
QW-451.1; QW-200.4 |
1/19/2018 |
|
A 10 mm thick welded test coupon is welded with GTAW at the root (3 mm) weld deposit and filled with SMAW (7 mm) weld deposit. Is it required to remove two face bends and two root bends in accordance with Table QW-451.1? |
Yes, however, Table QW-451.1, Note 5 permits four side-bend tests to be substituted for the required face- and root-bend tests, when thickness T is (10 mm) and over. In addition, tension tests are also required. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16784 |
| BPV IX-17-76 |
SC IX; QW-153 - Maximum Tensile Strength |
QW-153 |
11/8/2017 |
|
May a base metal tensile strength value recorded on a PQR exceed the maximum tensile strength specified in the applicable base metal specification? |
Yes. Section IX acceptance criteria does not limit the maximum tensile strength of base metal test specimens. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16786 |
| BPV IX-17-83 |
SC IX; QW-217(a) - Welding of Dissimilar Base Metals |
QW-217(a) |
11/30/2017 |
A WPS is qualified for groove welds in clad metal in accordance with QW-217(a). The base metal of the clad metal is a P-No. 1 material and the cladding is a P-No. 43 material. |
May this WPS be used to make a dissimilar metal weld joining a P-No. 1 pipe to a P-No. 43 pipe? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16795 |
| BPV IX-18-20 |
SC IX; QW-191.1.1(a) |
QW-191.1.1(a) |
4/3/2018 |
|
Does QW-191.1.1(a) require that the density of radiographic film meet the requirements of Section V, Article 2 when film radiography is applied? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16798 |
| BPV IX-18-07 |
SC IX; Table QW-255 - Change of Filler Metal Classification and Shielding Gas in FCAW Process |
QW-255 |
2/7/2018 |
|
Does an FCAW procedure qualified using F-No. 6, A-No.1, Classification E71T-1M electrode and 75% Ar/25% CO2 shielding gas support a WPS using an F-No. 6, A-No1, Classification E71T-1C electrode and 75% Ar/25% CO2 shielding gas when impact testing is not required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16804 |
| BPV IX-18-07 |
SC IX; Table QW-255 - Change of Filler Metal Classification and Shielding Gas in FCAW Process |
QW-255 |
2/7/2018 |
|
Does an FCAW procedure qualified using F-No. 6, A-No.1, Classification E71T-1M electrode and 75% Ar/25% CO2 shielding gas support a WPS using an F-No. 6, A-No1, Classification E71T-1C electrode and 100% CO2 shielding gas when impact testing is not required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16804 |
| BPV IX-18-07 |
SC IX; Table QW-255 - Change of Filler Metal Classification and Shielding Gas in FCAW Process |
QW-255 |
2/7/2018 |
|
Does an FCAW procedure qualified using F-No. 6, A-No.1, Classification E71T-1M electrode and 75% Ar/25% CO2 shielding gas support a WPS using an F-No. 6, A-No1, Classification E71T-1 electrode and 75% Ar/25% CO2 shielding gas when impact testing is not required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16804 |
| BPV IX-18-07 |
SC IX; Table QW-255 - Change of Filler Metal Classification and Shielding Gas in FCAW Process |
QW-255 |
2/7/2018 |
|
Does an FCAW procedure qualified using F-No. 6, A-No.1, Classification E71T-1M electrode and 75% Ar/25% CO2 shielding gas support a WPS using an F-No. 6, A-No1, Classification E71T-1 electrode and no shielding gas when impact testing is not required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16804 |
| BPV IX-17-89 |
SC IX; QW-300.1, QW-303.1 Limits of Qualified Positions, Table QW-461.9 Performance Qualification-Position and Diameter limitations, and QW-361.1 Essential Variables – Automatic Welding |
QW-300.1; QW-303.1; QW-461.9; QW-361.1 |
12/20/2017 |
|
Do the essential variables in QW-350 apply to welding operators in addition to those specified in QW-360? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16825 |
| BPV IX-17-90 |
SC IX; QW-153 |
QW-153 |
12/20/2017 |
A PQR was qualified by welding API 5L Gr. B material to API 5L Gr. X65 material. Impact testing is not required by design. All essential variables have been met. QW-420 has been taken into consideration. Tensile failure occurs in the base metal with lower strength. |
In accordance with QW-153, when welds between base metals of different minimum specified tensile strengths are being tested and tensile failure occurs in the base metal having lower strength, is it permissible to use the procedure thus qualified, to weld base metal with higher strength to itself? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16844 |
| BPV IX-18-32 |
SC IX; Table QW-461.9 - Performance Qualification Welder |
QW-461.9 |
6/20/2018 |
Production groove weld joint consisting of a 2 inch diameter set-in nozzle attachment to a 24 inch diameter cylindrical tank shell requires welding in horizontal and vertical positions. |
Per Table QW-461.9, may a welder qualified on plate groove in 2G, 3G and 4G positions weld the joint described in the background? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16845 |
| BPV IX-18-06 |
SC IX; Table QW-451.1 - Dissimilar Thickness Bend Test |
QW-451.1 |
1/24/2018 |
A groove weld procedure qualification was completed with plates of different thicknesses having the same P-Number. One side of the test coupon was comprised of a 9 mm thickness plate and the other side of the test coupon was comprised of a 38 mm thickness plate. |
Are side bend tests permitted in groove weld qualifications in dissimilar thickness base metals when one base metal thickness is <10 mm? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16866 |
| BPV IX-18-06 |
SC IX; Table QW-451.1 - Dissimilar Thickness Bend Test |
QW-451.1 |
1/24/2018 |
A groove weld procedure qualification was completed with plates of different thicknesses having the same P-Number. One side of the test coupon was comprised of a 9 mm thickness plate and the other side of the test coupon was comprised of a 38 mm thickness plate. |
Are face and root bend tests permitted for groove weld qualifications in the above combination of thicknesses when the thicker member is not machined down to match the thinner member prior to bend testing? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16866 |
| BPV IX-18-14 |
SC IX; QW-404.12 - Filler Metal Classification |
QW-404.12 |
2/22/2018 |
|
Does a PQR qualified with A-No. 4, F-No. 6 filler metal classified as E91T1-B3C per SFA-5.29 support a WPS using an A-No. 4, F-No. 6 filler metal classified as E91T1-CIPZ-B3 per SFA-5.36 when toughness testing is required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16874 |
| BPV IX-18-14 |
SC IX; QW-404.12 - Filler Metal Classification |
QW-404.12 |
2/22/2018 |
|
Does a PQR qualified with A-No. 4, F-No. 6 filler metal classified as E91T1-B3C per SFA-5.29 support a WPS using an A-No. 4, F-No. 6 filler metal classified as E91T1-CIPZ-B3 per SFA-5.36 when toughness testing is not required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16874 |
| BPV IX-18-38 |
SC IX; Part QG and ISO 15614-1:2017 |
|
8/16/2018 |
|
The introduction of ISO 15614-1:2017 says that its Level 1 qualification rules are is based on requirements of ASME Section IX. While many of the technical requirements of Section IX are found in ISO 15614-1, none of the administrative requirements of Part QG, General Requirements, are specified by ISO15614-1. Does a WPS qualified in accordance with ISO 15614-1 Level 1 satisfy the requirements of Section IX? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16886 |
| BPV IX-18-38 |
SC IX; Part QG and ISO 15614-1:2017 |
|
8/16/2018 |
|
If the administrative requirements of Part QG are satisfied and the WPS and its qualification satisfy the requirements of ISO 15614-1 Level 1, does that satisfy the requirements of ASME Section IX? |
While the technical requirements of ISO 15614-1:2017 Level 1 are comparable to those of Section IX, it is the responsibility of the organization preparing and qualifying WPSs to be sure that all the requirements of Section IX are satisfied. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16886 |
| BPV IX-18-18 |
SC IX; QW-403.5, QW-403.6 and QW-404.12 |
QW-403.5; QW-403.6; QW-404.12 |
3/13/2018 |
|
May a PQR that was qualified using P-No. 8, Group 1 type 316L stainless steel with toughness testing, be used to support a WPS for welding on other P-No. 8, Group 1 materials where toughness testing is a requirement? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16897 |
| BPV IX-18-03 |
SC IX; QW-403.10 and QW-404.32 - Combination WPS Maximum Thickness using GMAW-S and SAW |
QW-403.10; QW-404.32 |
1/19/2018 |
A welding procedure is qualified on base metal thickness of 1.125 in. using two welding processes. The deposited weld metal thickness is 0.125 in. for GMAW Short Circuiting Transfer, and is 1 in. for SAW. |
Is the maximum base metal thickness qualified by this combination PQR limited to 2.250 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16900 |
| BPV IX-18-03 |
SC IX; QW-403.10 and QW-404.32 - Combination WPS Maximum Thickness using GMAW-S and SAW |
QW-403.10; QW-404.32 |
1/19/2018 |
A welding procedure is qualified on base metal thickness of 1.125 in. using two welding processes. The deposited weld metal thickness is 0.125 in. for GMAW Short Circuiting Transfer, and is 1 in. for SAW. |
Is the maximum deposited weld metal thickness for GMAW-S limited to 0.1375 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16900 |
| BPV IX-18-03 |
SC IX; QW-403.10 and QW-404.32 - Combination WPS Maximum Thickness using GMAW-S and SAW |
QW-403.10; QW-404.32 |
1/19/2018 |
A welding procedure is qualified on base metal thickness of 1.125 in. using two welding processes. The deposited weld metal thickness is 0.125 in. for GMAW Short Circuiting Transfer, and is 1 in. for SAW. |
Is the maximum deposited weld metal thickness limit for SAW limited to 2 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16900 |
| BPV IX-18-08 |
SC IX; Appendix E - SWPS Edition |
|
2/7/2018 |
|
Is SWPS B2.1-8-212:2001 (R12) acceptable for use in accordance with the 2017 edition of ASME Section IX? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15875 |
| BPV IX-18-13 |
SC IX; QW-408.9 - Backing Gas |
QW-408.9 |
2/13/2018 |
|
May a P-no. 45 GTAW PQR without backing gas support a WPS for GTAW welding with backing gas, with inert backing gas, or with backing gas containing a mixture of inert and non-inert gasses, per QW-408.9 without requalification? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16902 |
| BPV IX-18-39 |
SC IX; QW-290.6 - In-Process Repair Welding |
QW-290.6 |
8/16/2018 |
|
Do the welding procedure limitations for in-process repairs in QW-290.6(a) apply only to temperbead welding? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16984 |
| BPV IX-17-88 |
SC IX; QW-202.4, QW-403.6 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses (Revised interpretation issued under ITEM 15-2027) |
QW-202.4; QW-403.6 |
12/13/2017 |
A WPS was qualified by a PQR with base metal thickness of 0.875 in. (T2) welded to a base metal thickness of 0.432 in. (T1) in P-No. 1 Gr. 1 base metal with a single welding process. The thicker member was tapered at the weld to 0.432 in. to match the thickness of the thinner member. Both members of the test coupon were impact tested at -20°F. A 6 in. Sch. 80 (0.432 in. nominal wall) nozzle will be welded into a 1.75 in. thick shell using a partial penetration groove weld from both sides with a weld preparation depth of 9/16 in. Notch toughness requirements at -15°F apply. |
Is the WPS qualified for welding impact tested base metals with a thickness (T) range of 0.432 in. to 0.864 in. thickness for T1 welded to a range of 5/8 in. to 1.75 in. for T2? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17002 |
| BPV IX-17-88 |
SC IX; QW-202.4, QW-403.6 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses (Revised interpretation issued under ITEM 15-2027) |
QW-202.4; QW-403.6 |
12/13/2017 |
A WPS was qualified by a PQR with base metal thickness of 0.875 in. (T2) welded to a base metal thickness of 0.432 in. (T1) in P-No. 1 Gr. 1 base metal with a single welding process. The thicker member was tapered at the weld to 0.432 in. to match the thickness of the thinner member. Both members of the test coupon were impact tested at -20°F. A 6 in. Sch. 80 (0.432 in. nominal wall) nozzle will be welded into a 1.75 in. thick shell using a partial penetration groove weld from both sides with a weld preparation depth of 9/16 in. Notch toughness requirements at -15°F apply. |
Is the WPS qualified for deposited weld metal thickness (t) thru 0.864 in.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17002 |
| BPV IX-17-88 |
SC IX; QW-202.4, QW-403.6 - Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses (Revised interpretation issued under ITEM 15-2027) |
QW-202.4; QW-403.6 |
12/13/2017 |
A WPS was qualified by a PQR with base metal thickness of 0.875 in. (T2) welded to a base metal thickness of 0.432 in. (T1) in P-No. 1 Gr. 1 base metal with a single welding process. The thicker member was tapered at the weld to 0.432 in. to match the thickness of the thinner member. Both members of the test coupon were impact tested at -20°F. A 6 in. Sch. 80 (0.432 in. nominal wall) nozzle will be welded into a 1.75 in. thick shell using a partial penetration groove weld from both sides with a weld preparation depth of 9/16 in. Notch toughness requirements at -15°F apply. |
Is welding of a set-in 0.432 in. thick nozzle with a 9/16 in. partial joint penetration weld to both sides of a 1.75 in. thick shell plate qualified based on the above PQRs? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17002 |
| BPV IX-18-16 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - Groove Welds with Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4 |
2/28/2018 |
|
Is QW-202.4 only applicable to dissimilar base metal thickness welding? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17013 |
| BPV IX-18-16 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - Groove Welds with Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4 |
2/28/2018 |
|
Does a P-No. 8 PQR on 15 mm thickness coupons support a WPS for welding 5 to 30 mm thick P-No. 8 material to P-No. 8 material with no limit on the maximum thickness when notch toughness testing is not required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17013 |
| BPV IX-18-16 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - Groove Welds with Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses |
QW-202.4 |
2/28/2018 |
|
Does a P-No. 1 PQR on 38 mm thickness coupons support a WPS for welding 5 to 200 mm thick P-No. 1 material to P-No. 1 material with no limit on the maximum thickness when notch toughness testing is not required? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17013 |
| BPV IX-18-05 |
SC IX; QW-424.1 and Table QW/QB-422 - Unassigned Materials for Procedure Qualifications |
QW-424.1 |
1/24/2018 |
SA/EN 10028-2 P355GH is listed in Table QW/QB-422 with P-Number 1 Group 2. |
Is EN 10028-2 P355GH an unassigned base metal as defined in QW-424.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17019 |
| BPV IX-18-05 |
SC IX; QW-424.1 and Table QW/QB-422 - Unassigned Materials for Procedure Qualifications |
QW-424.1 |
1/24/2018 |
SA/EN 10028-2 P355GH is listed in Table QW/QB-422 with P-Number 1 Group 2. |
Does a PQR with EN 10028-2 P355GH base metal welded to itself support a WPS for welding P-Number 1 base metals? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17019 |
| BPV IX-18-05 |
SC IX; QW-424.1 and Table QW/QB-422 - Unassigned Materials for Procedure Qualifications |
QW-424.1 |
1/24/2018 |
SA/EN 10028-2 P355GH is listed in Table QW/QB-422 with P-Number 1 Group 2. |
Per UG-10 of Section VIII Div. 1, may a base metal be recertified as a base metal having an assigned P-Number listed in QW/QB-422? |
Section IX does not address this issue. The question should be addressed to the applicable construction code. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17019 |
| BPV IX-18-21 |
SC IX; QW-193.1 - Test Specimens |
QW-193.1 |
4/17/2018 |
An SA-266 Gr.2N tubesheet is explosively clad with a layer of SB-265 Gr.1 followed by a layer of SB-523 R60702. An SB-523 R60702 tube is welded to the SB-523 R60702 cladding. |
Is it permissible to substitute a plate of essentially equivalent chemical composition for the clad surface provided the requirements of QW-288 are met? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17034 |
| BPV IX-17-48 |
SC IX; QW-251.2 - Supplementary Essentials |
QW-251.2 |
8/24/2017 |
A PQR is run respecting supplementary essential variables for toughness applications. |
Can a WPS be written for non-toughness applications? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15899 |
| BPV IX-17-48 |
SC IX; QW-251.2 - Supplementary Essentials |
QW-251.2 |
8/24/2017 |
A PQR is run respecting supplementary essential variables for toughness applications. |
For non-toughness applications can supplementary essential variables that may be addressed in the WPS be violated? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15899 |
| BPV IX-17-21 |
SC IX; QG-106.1(a) - Qualification of WPS Using a Welder Personally Engaged by Contract |
|
5/18/2017 |
|
In accordance with QG-106.1(a), may a company needing a welding procedure qualification (Company A) engage a second company (Company B) by contract to have Company A's procedure qualification welding performed by a welder employed by and under the supervision and control of Company B? |
No. The persons producing test joints for the qualification of procedures must be under the full supervision and control of the qualifying organization. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15916 |
| BPV IX-17-49 |
SC IX; QW-217(b) and QW-424.2 |
QW-217(b); QW-424.2 |
8/24/2017 |
|
Is a WPS qualified to groove weld a P-No. 1 material to a P-No. 43 material with a F-No. 43 filler metal also qualified to groove weld a P-No. 1 material with a F-No. 43 corrosion-resistant overlay to a P-No. 43 material with a F-No. 43 filler metal when the strength of the corrosion-resistant overlay is not included in the design calculation? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15925 |
| BPV IX-17-31 |
SC IX; QW-200.1(b) and QW-424.1 - WPS Essential Variables and Unassigned Metals |
QW-200.1(b); QW-424.1 |
6/8/2017 |
Variables applicable to specific P-numbers (e.g. QW-410.64 essential variable applies to P-No. 11A and P-No. 11B base metals only) and variables exempting specific P-numbers (e.g. QW-403.6 supplementary essential variable exempts P-No. 10H base metals) do not explicitly mention unassigned base metals of similar chemical composition and similar mechanical properties. |
Do the variables and exemptions described in the background also apply to unassigned base metals of similar chemical composition and similar mechanical properties? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15945 |
| BPV IX-17-69 |
SC IX; QW 193.1 - Tube-to-Tubesheet Mockup Number Requirements |
QW-193.1 |
10/6/2017 |
|
When qualifying a tube-to-tubesheet test coupon, is it permissible to weld more than 10 tubes? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15953 |
| BPV IX-17-25 |
SC IX; QW-424.2 - P-Number for Qualification |
QW-424.2 |
6/6/2017 |
A corrosion-resistant PQR of A-No. 8 on P-No. 5A base material exists. |
Does QW-424.2 permit a corrosion-resistant WPS to be written for A-No. 8 on P-No. 4 base materials? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=15994 |
| BPV IX-17-86 |
SC IX; QW-302.3 and Table QW-452.1(a) - Bend Test Specimens |
QW-302.3; QW-452.1(a) |
12/4/2017 |
|
Can a welder welding a single test coupon with a single welding process be qualified by a combination of face, root and side (one face, one root and two side) bend specimens in the 6G position on a ½ inch thick test coupon? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16009 |
| BPV IX-17-27 |
SC IX; QW-283.2 and QW-283.4(b), Groove Weld Qualification of Buttering |
QW-283.2; QW-283.4(b) |
6/6/2017 |
Company A has qualified a WPS for buttering P-No. 5A base metals using a P-No. 5A to P-No. 5A groove weld test coupon with ERNiCrMo-3 (UNS No. N06625) filler with PWHT. Company B has qualified a WPS for joining the buttered ends using a groove weld test coupon with P-No. 43 to P-No. 43 (also UNS No. N06625) base metals using ERNiCrMo-3 filler without PWHT. The production weld is a P-No. 5A to P-No. 5A groove weld requiring 0.250 in. buttering thickness of ERNiCrMo-3 and PWHT prior to making the final weld with ERNiCrMo-3 without PWHT. Both WPSs are within the qualified thickness range of Table QW-451.1. |
May Company A butter the weld bevels using a WPS qualified by a groove weld with P-No. 5A base metals with ERNiCrMo-3 filler and PWHT, then Company B perform the final groove weld using a WPS qualified by a groove weld between P-No. 43 base metals with ERNiCrMo-3 filler without PWHT? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16012 |
| BPV IX-17-38 |
SC IX; QW-381.3 - Alternative Qualification |
QW-381.3 |
8/4/2017 |
A welder is qualified for corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay with groove weld test per QW-381.3. The welder is qualified for the full range of the WPS for corrosion-resistant overlay used for production welding. The WPS used for production welding does not specify chemical composition. The supporting PQR contains chemical composition test results. The production welds will be tested for contractually required overlay deposit chemistry. |
Does the welder meet the qualification requirements by following the WPS described in the background? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16019 |
| BPV IX-17-32 |
SC IX; QW-404.12 - Filler Metal Classification |
QW-404.12 |
6/12/2017 |
|
Does a PAW PQR with SFA-5.9, ER308L wire support a WPS that specifies SFA-5.9, ER308LSi when QW-404.12 supplementary essential variable applies? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16026 |
| BPV IX-17-50 |
SC IX; QW-301.2, QW-350, QW-404.30 and Table QW-452.1(b) – Weld Deposit Limit for WPS and Performance Qualification |
QW-301.2; QW-350; QW-404.30; QW-452.1(b) |
8/24/2017 |
|
May a WPS that is qualified for a maximum weld deposit thickness of 0.464 inch be used to qualify a welder for the maximum to be welded using a 0.625 inch weld test coupon? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16032 |
| BPV IX-17-51 |
SC IX; QW-409.1, QW-290.2 and QW-290.4 |
QW-409.1; QW-290.2; QW-290.4 |
8/24/2017 |
|
Do temper bead WPS heat input ranges determined in accordance with QW-409.29 have to comply with the maximum heat input limit given in QW-409.1 when impact testing is required? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16051 |
| BPV IX-17-52 |
SC IX; QW-404.30 - PQR Essential Variable Requirements |
QW-404.30 |
8/24/2017 |
A PQR using a single welding process and filler metal was completed to the 1977 edition of the Section IX, and without updating it, has been used to support a WPS written to the current edition of the Code. In addition, the deposited weld metal thickness was not recorded on the PQR, since that was not required by the 1977 edition of Section IX. |
Is the deposited weld metal thickness of QW-404.30 required to be listed on the procedure qualification record completed to the 1977 Code edition? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16052 |
| BPV IX-17-52 |
SC IX; QW-404.30 - PQR Essential Variable Requirements |
QW-404.30 |
8/24/2017 |
A PQR using a single welding process and filler metal was completed to the 1977 edition of the Section IX, and without updating it, has been used to support a WPS written to the current edition of the Code. In addition, the deposited weld metal thickness was not recorded on the PQR, since that was not required by the 1977 edition of Section IX. |
For determining the maximum weld metal thickness to be listed on the WPS, may the thickness specified for one of the full thickness reduced section tensile specimens listed on the PQR be used? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16052 |
| BPV IX-17-66 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - Base Metal Thickness Qualified |
QW-202.4 |
9/28/2017 |
A single procedure qualification record (PQR) with a groove weld joint was completed with plates of two different thicknesses (dissimilar thickness), having the same P-Number, with one side of the coupon comprised of a 9 mm thickness plate and the other side of the coupon comprised of a 38 mm thickness plate. |
Will the single PQR support a welding procedure specification (WPS) having a base metal qualification range of 1.5 mm to 18 mm welded to 5 mm to 200 mm? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16057 |
| BPV IX-17-60 |
SC IX; Fig.QW-462.4(d) - Pipe to Pipe Fillet |
QW-462.4(d) |
8/31/2017 |
QW-462.4(d), “Fillet Welds in Pipe – Procedure”, depicts fillet weld procedure qualification using either a pipe-to-plate coupon or a pipe-to-pipe coupon. |
Is it acceptable to use a pipe-to-plate coupon to qualify fillet welds joining pipe- to-pipe and, conversely, to use a pipe-to-pipe coupon to qualify fillet welds joining pipe-to-plate? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16073 |
| BPV IX-17-39 |
SC IX; QW-423.1 - Unassigned Metal - Welder Qualification |
QW-423.1 |
8/4/2017 |
|
May a welder qualified to weld on a P-No. 1 base metal, also weld an unassigned metal in production per QW-423.1, when the unassigned metal's chemical composition is similar to any P-No. 1 through P-No. 15F base metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16082 |
| BPV IX-17-36 |
SC IX; QG-100(b) - Increased Preheat Application |
|
6/23/2017 |
|
Do the rules of QG-100(b) require a WPS qualified for P-No.1 with a minimum preheat of 30°C to be requalified with a test coupon prepared using a minimum preheat of 95°C when the production weld applies a minimum preheat of 95°C? |
No. See QW-406.1 and QW-406.2. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16097 |
| BPV IX-17-33 |
SC IX; QW-404.12- Filler metal classification |
QW-404.12 |
6/12/2017 |
|
Does a PQR qualified with impact toughness tested at 0°F using an electrode classified to SFA-5.20 as E70T-5 support a WPS using an electrode classified to SFA-5.20 as E70T-1, when QW-404.12 supplementary essential variable applies? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16104 |
| BPV IX-17-53 |
SC IX; QW-300 - Welding Performance Qualifications |
QW-300 |
8/24/2017 |
|
In performing a welder qualification test, does ASME Section IX prohibit the use of power tools (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical, or other) to remove weld imperfections prior to submitting the weld coupon for inspection? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16118 |
| BPV IX-17-65 |
SC IX; Table QW-256.1, Variable QW-405.4 |
QW-256.1; QW-405.4 |
9/26/2017 |
A corrosion-resistant overlay (CRO) PQR is qualified by machine GTAW of a pipe with the axis in the vertical position and the axis of the weld rotating in the horizontal plane. |
Is this test position defined as a Special Position as defined in QW-124? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16119 |
| BPV IX-17-65 |
SC IX; Table QW-256.1, Variable QW-405.4 |
QW-256.1; QW-405.4 |
9/26/2017 |
A corrosion-resistant overlay (CRO) PQR is qualified by machine GTAW of a pipe with the axis in the vertical position and the axis of the weld rotating in the horizontal plane. |
Does this PQR support a WPS for depositing CRO in the flat position? |
No, see Table QW-256.1 variable QW-405.4. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16119 |
| BPV IX-18-09 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - PQR Base Metal Thickness for Supporting Production Welds |
QW-202.4 |
2/7/2018 |
Background for Questions (1) through (4): A groove weld PQR is qualified by welding two P-No. 8 base metal plates of 6 mm equal thickness together using the GTAW process. Notch toughness testing was not completed as part of the PQR. |
Does this PQR support a WPS joining 1.5 mm thickness P-No. 8 base metal to 200 mm thickness P-No. 8 base metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16120 |
| BPV IX-18-09 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - PQR Base Metal Thickness for Supporting Production Welds |
QW-202.4 |
2/7/2018 |
Background for Questions (1) through (4): A groove weld PQR is qualified by welding two P-No. 8 base metal plates of 6 mm equal thickness together using the GTAW process. Notch toughness testing was not completed as part of the PQR. |
Does this PQR support a WPS joining 1.5 mm thickness P-No. 8 base metal to 300 mm thickness P-No. 8 base metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16120 |
| BPV IX-18-09 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - PQR Base Metal Thickness for Supporting Production Welds |
QW-202.4 |
2/7/2018 |
Background for Questions (1) through (4): A groove weld PQR is qualified by welding two P-No. 8 base metal plates of 6 mm equal thickness together using the GTAW process. Notch toughness testing was not completed as part of the PQR. |
Does this PQR support a WPS joining 12 mm thickness P-No. 8 base metal to 300 mm thickness P-No. 8 base metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16120 |
| BPV IX-18-09 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - PQR Base Metal Thickness for Supporting Production Welds |
QW-202.4 |
2/7/2018 |
Background for Questions (1) through (4): A groove weld PQR is qualified by welding two P-No. 8 base metal plates of 6 mm equal thickness together using the GTAW process. Notch toughness testing was not completed as part of the PQR. |
Does this PQR support a WPS joining 13 mm thickness P-No. 8 base metal to 300 mm thickness P-No. 8 base metal? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16120 |
| BPV IX-18-09 |
SC IX; QW-202.4 - PQR Base Metal Thickness for Supporting Production Welds |
QW-202.4 |
2/7/2018 |
|
When QW-202.4 applies must the PQR used to support the WPS be qualified on dissimilar base metal thicknesses? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=16120 |
| BPV IX-18-33 |
SC IX; QW-407.2 |
QW-407.2 |
6/25/2018 |
|
When supplementary essential variable QW-407.2 applies, is a WPS supported by a PQR qualified with a PWHT at 610°C with a 1 hr. holding time qualified to perform an initial weld with PWHT at 610°C for 1 hr. holding time followed by a repair weld with a local PWHT holding time after weld repair of 1 hr. at 610°C? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17126 |
| BPV IX-18-43 |
SC IX; QW-361.2 & QW-303 - Range of Pipe diameter for welding operator |
QW-361.2; QW-303 |
8/22/2018 |
|
Are welders and welding operators who have been qualified by preparing butt welded test coupons in plate in the 1G, 2G, 3G, or 4G position also qualified to butt weld circumferential joints in pipe with an outside diameter less than 2- 7/8" inch in any welding position? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17644 |
| BPV IX-18-44 |
SC IX; QW-409.2 - Transfer Mode |
QW-409.2 |
8/22/2018 |
|
When QW-409.2 is an essential variable, may both globular and spray transfer mode for FCAW be listed on the WPS when only one of the modes was recorded on the PQR? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17711 |
| BPV IX-18-42 |
SC IX; QW-452.1(b) - Welder Qualified Thickness |
QW-452.1(b) |
8/16/2018 |
A welder passes a performance test with F-No. 6 filler metal and is qualified for a deposit of 2t. The welder then passes a performance test with F-No. 43 filler metal using a coupon and deposit that are thicker than used for the original test. |
Does the extra qualified thickness provided by the F-No. 43 qualification also apply to the F-No. 6 qualification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17726 |
| BPV IX-18-15 |
SC IX; QW-217(a) - Joining of Composite Clad Metals |
QW-217(a) |
2/28/2018 |
QW-217 (a) states that “The procedure qualification test coupon shall be made using the same P-number base metal, cladding, and welding processes, and filler metal combination to be used in production welding.
A WPS is qualified using a qualification test coupon made on 13mm clad material, using a combination of filler metals consisting of ER316L to join the 4mm thick P-No. 8 clad portion, E309LMo-17 for 5mm of the P-No. 1 base metal portion of the joint and another filler metal is used for the remainder of the P-No. 1 base metal portion of the joint. |
Provided the rules of QW-217 and QW-451 have been met, is it permissible to use the ER316L and E309Mo-17 only in production welding? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17142 |
| BPV IX-18-51 |
Weld Reinforcement Inclusion in QW-191.1.2.2(b) |
QW-191.1.2.2(b) |
12/19/2018 |
|
Is weld reinforcement included in the value of "t" when evaluating the acceptance of rounded indications in QW-191.1.2.2(b)(1)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18100 |
| BPV IX-18-45 |
"A" number |
|
12/6/2018 |
|
May the chemical composition analysis of the filler metal (in the filler metal condition) be used to determine the A-number for ER70S-G or ER70S-2 classifications when used for the GTAW process with 100% Argon shielding gas? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18114 |
| BPV IX-19-02 |
Linear Indications |
|
1/7/2019 |
|
For the macro-examination of a fillet weld performance qualification test, are cracks or incomplete fusion at the root not exceeding 1/32 in. permitted under the exception for “linear indications at the root” in QW-184(a)? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18150 |
| BPV IX-19-04 |
Clause for Advanced Feature and Mode of Metal Transfer |
|
1/14/2019 |
|
Will a welding procedure qualified with pulsed spray mode of metal transfer qualify a welding procedure with short-circuiting mode of metal transfer using advanced features that yield a metal transfer mode that is a mix of pulsed spray and controlled short-circuiting at controlled frequency to maintain short and stable welding arc without spatter? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18157 |
| BPV IX-18-50 |
QW-151 Tension Test Specimens and QW-161 Guided Bend Test Specimens |
QW-151; QW-161 |
12/18/2018 |
A 40 mm double-V-groove plate weld test coupon is welded on one side with 20 mm GTAW weld deposit thickness and the other side with 20 mm FCAW weld deposit thickness. |
Is it required to perform 2 tension test specimens independently for the GTAW process and 2 tension test specimens independently for the FCAW process? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18168 |
| BPV IX-18-50 |
QW-151 Tension Test Specimens and QW-161 Guided Bend Test Specimens |
QW-151; QW-161 |
12/18/2018 |
A 40 mm double-V-groove plate weld test coupon is welded on one side with 20 mm GTAW weld deposit thickness and the other side with 20 mm FCAW weld deposit thickness. |
Can the 40 mm thick test coupon containing both GTAW and FCAW processes be used for testing 2 full thickness tension test specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18168 |
| BPV IX-18-50 |
QW-151 Tension Test Specimens and QW-161 Guided Bend Test Specimens |
QW-151; QW-161 |
12/18/2018 |
A 40 mm double-V-groove plate weld test coupon is welded on one side with 20 mm GTAW weld deposit thickness and the other side with 20 mm FCAW weld deposit thickness. |
Can the 40 mm thick test coupon containing both GTAW and FCAW processes be used for testing 4 side bend specimens? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18168 |
| BPV IX-18-22 |
QW-409.29 - Change in Heat Input |
QW-409.29 |
4/17/2018 |
|
Does paragraph QW-409.29(a)(2) require that the heat input value determined for the second tempering bead layer not be greater than or less than the heat input value determined for the first tempering bead layer by more than 20% or 10%, as applicable, when welding the procedure qualification test coupon? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17154 |
| BPV IX-18-22 |
QW-409.29 - Change in Heat Input |
QW-409.29 |
4/17/2018 |
|
Does QW-409.29(a)(2) require that the heat input ratio determined between the second and first tempering bead layers not exceed the heat input ratio determined between the second and first tempering bead layers of the procedure qualification test coupon by more than 20% or 10%, as applicable? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17154 |
| BPV IX-18-22 |
QW-409.29 - Change in Heat Input |
QW-409.29 |
4/17/2018 |
|
Does QW-409.29(b) specify whether the average heat input per layer, single pass heat input per layer, or highest heat input per pass in a single layer be used for determining the heat input value for each layer when calculating the heat input ratio? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17154 |
| BPV IX-18-46 |
Code Case-2142 |
|
12/14/2018 |
Code Case 2142-4 is the latest revision of a Section IX Code Case which assigns F-No.43 to UNS N06052, UNS N06054, UNS N06055 and UNS N06056 welding filler metals. Can Code Case 2142-1 be used in lieu of Code Case 2142-4? |
Does Section IX permit the use of a previous (not current) revision of a Section IX Code Case? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18213 |
| BPV IX-19-03 |
Welder Qualification for Single and Multiple Pass |
|
1/10/2019 |
A Welding Operator is qualified using single pass orbital GTAW tube-to-tubesheet WPS according to QW-193.2 and all the requirements of QW-288 were met. The WPS used the same variables of QW-288 but it was dual qualified with both single pass and multiple pass welds. This Welding Operator is required to weld on another task where multi pass welding is required. |
Is this Welding Operator qualified to weld multi pass welding providing all the essential variables are exactly the same except for the multiple pass weld (QW-288.1(f))? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18239 |
| BPV IX-18-49 |
Regarding Transfer of Welder Qualification |
|
12/18/2018 |
|
Provided the rules of QG-106.2 regarding joint ownership of multiple companies are met, are welding personnel qualified by one company also qualified to weld for another company under the same corporate ownership? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18270 |
| BPV IX-19-01 |
Branch Fitting Base Metal Thickness |
|
1/7/2019 |
|
A branch pipe of 12 in. nominal diameter x 9.5 mm thickness will be welded to a run pipe of 24 in. nominal diameter x 9.5 mm thickness using a branch fitting with a base metal P-Number not listed in QW-202.4(b)(1). The branch fitting thickness at the crotch area for the weld to the run pipe was measured at approximately 24 mm. Must the qualified range of base metal thickness for the welding procedure include both the 24 mm fitting thickness and the 9.5 mm run pipe thickness? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18277 |
| BPV IX-18-48 |
Performance Qualification Tests |
|
12/18/2018 |
A welder has completed a procedure qualification test for nonpressure-retaining fillet welds per QW-202.2(c) and it has been accepted. The procedure qualification test requires five macro-examinations, however the performance qualification requires one macro-examination and one fracture test. |
Is additional testing specifically required for the performance qualification of the welder that completed the acceptable procedure qualification test record?
|
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18310 |
| BPV IX-18-17 |
QW-404.5(b), Table QW-442, SFA-5.18, SFA-5.28 - A-Number Determination |
QW-404.5(b); QW-442 |
2/28/2018 |
|
When qualifying a WPS using GTAW process, may the chemical composition given in the filler metal specification be used to determine the A-Number for that filler metal? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17176 |
| BPV IX-18-47 |
Third Party Certificate |
|
12/18/2018 |
QW-200.2(b) requires the organization to certify the PQR but does not address the preparation of the document. |
Does Section IX permit a qualifying organization to subcontract the preparation of the procedure and performance qualification records as long as the qualifying organization accepts full responsibility for and certifies the records? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=18379 |
| BPV IX-18-30 |
QG-106.2 and QW-423.1 - Similar Chemical Composition |
QW-423.1 |
5/19/2018 |
Section IX does not define "similar chemical composition". |
Is it the organization's responsibility, per QG-106.2, to determine if an unassigned metal has a "similar chemical composition" to any assigned metal as permitted by QW-423.1? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17181 |
| BPV IX-18-40 |
QW-306 - Combination of Welding Processes |
QW-306 |
8/16/2018 |
|
Is it permissible for two or more WPSs to be followed for performance qualification testing of a welder or welding operator in a single test coupon? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17200 |
| BPV IX-18-12 |
QW-462.5(a) - Determination of the Minimum Qualified Overlay Thickness |
QW-462.5(a) |
2/13/2018 |
|
Is it permissible to use the fusion face of the test coupon as the "approximate weld interface" when determining the minimum qualified overlay thickness for Corrosion-Resistant or Hard-Facing Weld Metal Overlays in accordance with Figure QW-462.5(a)? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17093 |
| BPV IX-19-05 |
QW-361.1 and QW-363 - Qualification Renewal |
QW-361.1; QW-363 |
1/14/2019 |
The essential variables for welding operators are listed in QW-360. Stud welding, capacitor discharge method, is an automatic welding process. |
Are the only essential variables in QW-361.1 that apply to a stud welding operator: (a) a change from automatic to machine welding; and (b) a change in welding process? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17271 |
| BPV IX-19-05 |
QW-361.1 and QW-363 - Qualification Renewal |
QW-361.1; QW-363 |
1/14/2019 |
The essential variables for welding operators are listed in QW-360. Stud welding, capacitor discharge method, is an automatic welding process. |
May a stud welding operator's qualifications that have lapsed be renewed by welding a single test coupon in accordance with QW-363 in any of the positions shown in Figure QW-461.7 and successfully completing the tests required by QW-192? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17271 |
| BPV IX-18-37 |
Table QW-452.1(b),Table QW-452.3,Table QW-461.9 - Welder Qualification |
QW-452.1(b); QW-452.3; QW-461.9 |
7/24/2018 |
A welder has two separate performance qualifications. One qualification used 0.55 inch (14 mm) thick plate in the 3G position and the second qualification used 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) thick pipe (NPS 1/2 SCH. 40) in the 6G position. |
Is this welder qualified to weld on all pipe diameters 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) and greater, in all positions and on all material thicknesses? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17385 |
| BPV IX-18-27 |
QW-452.5 - Fracture Test |
QW-452.5 |
5/4/2018 |
A performance test coupon is prepared in accordance with figure QW-462.4(c) utilizing pipe-to-plate. |
Is it permissible to substitute one of the required fracture tests for an additional macro test, or vice versa, per Table QW-452.5? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17390 |
| BPV IX-18-34 |
QW-401.1 and QW-403.6 - Thickness Range Qualified for Impact Testing |
QW-401.1; QW-403.6 |
6/25/2018 |
A welding procedure qualification was performed on a 40 mm thick test coupon in 1G position by GTAW (10 mm) and SMAW (30 mm). Tension and bend tests were performed on the 40 mm plate. A second welding procedure qualification was performed on a 6 mm plate in 3G position by GTAW and only impact testing was performed. A third welding procedure qualification was performed on a 6 mm plate in 3G position by SMAW and only impact testing was performed. All of the essential variables remained the same except for the coupon thickness. |
May the PQRs listed above, support a WPS (GTAW+SMAW) for material requiring notch toughness with a qualified base material thickness range of 5 mm to 200 mm, GTAW weld metal thickness range 20 mm max. and SMAW weld metal thickness range up to 200 mm max.? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17403 |
| BPV IX-18-29 |
QW-200.2(c) - PQR Revision |
QW-200.2(c) |
5/11/2018 |
Company A is made up of several legacy Companies. Company A changes the name on the PQRs from that of the legacy Companies’ names to the name of Company A for branding purposes. No other information is changed. |
In accordance with QW-200.2(c) is changing the name on a PQR to that of Company A considered an editorial revision? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17406 |
| BPV IX-18-35 |
QW-301.2 - Welder Performance Qualification |
QW-301.2 |
6/25/2018 |
Two welders produce a procedure qualification test coupon. One welder welds the GTAW weld deposit and a second welder welds the SMAW weld deposit. All test results are acceptable. |
May each welder producing the PQR test coupon also be qualified for the respective process used within the limits of QW-350? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17447 |
| BPV IX-18-36 |
QW-306 - Welder Performance Qualification |
QW-306 |
6/25/2018 |
Two welders produce a performance qualification test coupon. One welder welds the GTAW weld deposit and a second welder welds the SMAW weld deposit. All test results are acceptable. |
May each welder be qualified for the respective process used in the test coupon within the limits of QW-350? |
Yes |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17448 |
| BPV IX-18-41 |
QW-410.9 |
QW-410.9 |
8/16/2018 |
|
When QW-410.9 is listed in the brief of variables for a process and is applicable as a supplementary essential variable, may a qualified multipass per side welding procedure, which does not allow single pass per side welding, be used to produce backing with a single pass weld on a joint requiring a single-sided weld with backing without requalifying the Procedure Specification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17459 |
| BPV IX-18-41 |
QW-410.9 |
QW-410.9 |
8/16/2018 |
|
When QW-410.9 is listed in the brief of variables for a process and is applicable as a non-essential variable, may a qualified multipass per side welding procedure, which does not allow single pass per side welding, be used to produce backing with a single pass weld on a joint requiring a single-sided weld with backing without revising the Procedure Specification? |
No |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17459 |
| BPV IX-18-28 |
Appendix L - ISO 9606-1 |
|
5/4/2018 |
|
Is a welder qualified in accordance with ISO 9606-1:2017 also qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX? |
No. See additional administrative, technical and testing requirements addressed in Appendix L. |
https://cstools.asme.org/Interpretation/InterpretationDetail.cfm?TrackingNumber=17475 |